Guia Do Soft Sirius

Technical guide 2012
BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to
communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
MY HOME
AD-ITMH12GT - Edition 04/2012
BTicino SpA
Via Messina, 38
20154 Milano - Italia
www.bticino.it
MY HOME
DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION
GUIDE
INTRODUCTION Project guidelines
Radio System
AUTOMATION
Burglar alarm
Energy management Temperature Control Air Conditioning

Consumption Display Load control management
Sound system
Video door entry and home video surveillance system
Structured cabling system for the home sector
System integration and control
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES CATALOGUE
TECHNICAL SHEETS - GLOSSARY
General Contents MY HOME
MY HOME General Contents
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MY HOME - Build on it. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The MY HOME system technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
An interface for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Select the look that meets your taste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MY HOME functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Project guidelines
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional diagram of a MY HOME system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Creation of the home automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
YouProject software for the sizing of MY HOME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Devices configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Virtual configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Additional functions that can be performed with the virtual configuration. . . 26
Virtual Configurator software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
System layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation of a BuS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Type of wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MY HOME flatWall for all basic or advanced system needs. . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements. . . . . . . . 44
MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MY HOME FLATWALL 150 switchboard composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installation heights for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Device-holder supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installation solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electric distribution board position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Plug-in boxes position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Indications for the installation of aXOlutE EtrIS device holder boxes . . . . . 56

Local control device position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Grouping cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Selection of the cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selection of the conduits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Positioning of conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Radio System
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wireless freedom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
The functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Installation features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuration - general rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
How to modify the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuration of the functions: the main control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuration of the functions: the scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Distances and maximum number of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Application examples and wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
AUTOMATION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Introduction to the Automation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actuator devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Automation extension with ZigBee radio devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
122
132
142
143
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
General concepts. . . . . . . .
Addressing levels. . . . . . . .
Main operating modes . . . .
Examples of configuration. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
144
148
151
153

Maximum distances and absorptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maximum number of devices which can be configured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Logical expansion of the addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Lighting management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management of different loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window and shutter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management of dimmer lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting and shutter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
166
167
168
169
Burglar alarm
Professional safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advanced functions: integration with other MY HOME functions . . . . . . . .
System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
178
179
180
181
182

Project approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of modular devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modular power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central unit with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IR detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
188
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
202
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of the Youproject program for the configuration of the system . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: anti-panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: flooding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical alarms: telephone signalling of the tripping of the
general circuit breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced applications: switching on the lights because of an alarm. . . . . .
Advanced applications: remote assistance request with telephone call . . . .
203
205
206
207
208
209
211
213
214
215
Start-up and testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming a remote control or a transponder for several systems . .
System activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System test: two line contact interfaces check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration or system modifications - Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
216
218
219
220
222
223
224
225
Energy management
Saving energy has never been this easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
To ensure energy efficiency with MY HOME is easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Energy efficiency management devices overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Temperature control
MY HOME temperature control can be used:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and absorptions. . . . . .
Combining with other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct mode of installation for 4 zone control unit, probes and
magnetic contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
246
247
248
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Legend of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector, 12 zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Several homes, 4 zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
250
256
262
270
274
278
282
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MY HOME integration devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
consumption display
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying consumptions and the production data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement and display devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Energy data logger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
294
296
298
299
Load control management

The end of the black-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Load control management and consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of electric consumptions on several lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of produced and consumed energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of produced and consumed energy in exchange mode on location. . . .
Display of the consumption of thermal power/hot water by individual home. . .
Load control management with total consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . .
Load control management with total display, of loads and diagnostics. . . . .
Three-phase and one-phase load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
Sound system
Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..324
Wide range of solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Integration with other MY HOME applications and the 2 wire video
door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Installing a system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Installation examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Maximum distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
System consumption calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Residential sector - apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector - small house 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - doctors surgery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - restaurant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - supermarket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - hotel room 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sector - hotel room 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residential sector: villa with 2 wire video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . .
System expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
360
364
366
368
370
372
374
376
378
380
Video door entry and home video

surveillance system
System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3 - Apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4 - Complexes of small houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
390
391
394
396
398
400
402

System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
413
416
418
419
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

One-family system with 1 EP and 5 intercommunicating video handsets. . . . 422
Two-family systems with 1 EP, 3 handsets per home
and intercom between apartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
One-family system with 5 video handsets in simultaneous switching on. . . . . . 425

One-family system with max 16 cameras or entrance panels. . . . . . . . . . . 426
Structured cabling system

for the home sector
What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?. . . . . . . . . . . .
The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples: telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and
video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples: telephone, data and integration
with MY HOME for local and remote function control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling structure and components for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
430
432
434
436
438
442
444

Main requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creation of the communication area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning of the user sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User socket wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
447
448
449
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets . . . . . . . . .
System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets . . . . . . . . .
System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks, 4 data sockets,
1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System for distribution of telephone system, data network, TV/SAT signal. . .
System with Wireless router modem external to the distribution
board for the management of 4 data sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the data and telephone system network
with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control. . . . . . . . .
Expansion of the number of data sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
450
451
452
454
456
457
458

System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode of integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration and interfacing devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration among MY HOME systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration between MY HOME and systems with different protocols. . . . . .
System control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Installer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Customer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System layout for the use of the MY HOME WEB services. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Creation and configuration of the Customer Area. . . . . . .
MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be
performed in the Installer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
460
461
462
463
469
470
472
486
498
499
500
502
504
505
MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be

performed on the control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Open WEB nET language and MY OPEn Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Integration of the Automation system with the
Temperature Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Video door entry system with the Sound system . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Automation
and Temperature Control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Video door entry
system and the Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of the Automation system with the Video door entry system
(with Web server for remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total integration of the MY HOME systems with remote function control . . .
510
511
512
513
514
516
Software and services

YouProject preparing estimates and designing MY HOME
home automation systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouDiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTicino responds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
520
522
523
524
RADIO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXOLUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIVINGLIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mtix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLATWALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
527
531
559
587
607
CATALOGUE
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Technical sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Burglar alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Load control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Video door entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Structured cabling system for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Control and integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of Automation devices
with virtual configuration.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Progressive index of items

ITEM
502NPA
502PA
3440
3442
3444
3445
3448
3455
3456
3456
3457
3470
3475
3476
3477
3479
3480
3480V12
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3485B
3486
3495
3496
3499
3501/....
3504
3505/12
3506
3507/6
3508BUS
3508U2
3508U3
3510
3510M
3510PB
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3518
3518/50
3518/150
3519
552
552
544
544
544
544
544
546
546
599
546
538
538
535
544
546
543
544
544
541
541
533
541
533
548
532
550
552
552
545
545
545
547
547
547
543
543
543
543
543
543
543
551
543
543
543
543
543
CATALOGUE
579
604
579
604
572
572
572
572
572
574
574
TECHNICAL SHEET
862
864
867
870
873
972
976
574
566
566
563
572
574
571
572
572
569
569
541
569
541
576
549
577
579
579
573
573
573
575
575
575
571
571
571
571
571
571
571
578
571
571
571
571
571
592
592
590
598
599
597
598
598
595
595
561
595
561
601
560
602
604
604
598
598
598
600
600
600
597
597
597
597
597
597
597
603
597
597
597
597
597
668
670
671
672
875
877
881
885
887
890
892
1010
1011
895
895
895
895
895
895
897
898
899
899
899
899
ITEM
3522
3523
3526
3526/10
3526/16
3527N
3528N
3528N
3529
3530S
3540
3545
3549
3550
3559
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3581
3750
3751
3756
3757
3759
3761
3771
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3801
3802
547
547
530
530
530
536
535
535
551
542
546
551
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
530
608
608
608
609
609
609
609
609
609
608
608
608
608
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
609
608
608
CATALOGUE
575
600
575
600
564
563
563
578
570
574
578
590
590
590
603
596
599
603
TECHNICAL SHEET
958
677
677
677
678
681
629
682
978
630
631
632
633
634
635
639
641
643
646
ITEM
3803
3804
3805
3823
3825
3828
3829
3831
4050
4070
4072A
4072L
4911TDM
32754
32871
32872
335919
335919
336904
336982
336983
336984
336985
339213
339223
339313
342170
342200
342550
342560
342991
342992
343001
343002
344082
344163
344165
344400
344401
344411
344412
344413
346000
346020
346030
346230
346250
346260
346830
CATALOGUE
608
608
608
608
609
608
609
608
545
573
545
545
562
555
555
555
551
603
552
577
577
577
602
558
558
558
TECHNICAL SHEET
573
573
545
902
598
545
903
903
583
583
583
578
579
604
1028
1029
1032
1033
1034
1036
1036
1038
1038
1040
1050
1052
585
585
585
585
585
551
533
548
548
578
578
576
576
603
603
601
601
1053
1054
1055
1061
1063
1064
1067
ITEM
346833
346841
346850
346851
348200
347400
348201
348202
348203
348204
348205
348206
348220
348402
349140
349210
349211
349212
349310
349311
349312
349313
349320
349321
349340
349414
349415
349418
391647
391648
391649
391657
391658
391659
391661
391662
391663
391670
A5006
A5460
A5765
AM4890
AM5006
AM5052H
AM5064VH
AM5460
AM5658
AM5659
AM5731/12
CATALOGUE
550
550
550
558
577
577
577
602
602
602
TECHNICAL SHEET
1068
1070
1071
1073
1075
558
558
558
558
558
558
542
558
558
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
557
550
550
550
585
585
585
585
585
585
557
557
557
606
606
606
588
606
606
606
606
591
591
598
570
905
1078
1082
1084
1084
1084
1086
1086
1088
1090
1090
1090
1090
1090
1090
1092
838
843
ITEM
AM5732/12
AM5740
AM5742
AM5765
AM5783/8
AM5785
AM5786
AM5787
AM5787/4
AM5790
AM5791
AM5791B
AM5831M2
AM5832/2
AM5832/3
AM5834
AM5851/1
AM5851M2
AM5872
AM5875
AM5911
AM5911/2
AM5911/2AF
AM5911/2AG
AM5911/2AH
AM5911/2AI
AM5911AF
AM5911AG
AM5911AH
AM5911AI
AM5911BE
AM5911BF (*)
AM5915/2AA
AM5915/2AB
AM5915/2AC
AM5915/2AD
AM5915/2BA
AM5915/2BB
AM5915/2BC
AM5915/2BD
AM5915/2BE
AM5915/2BF
AM5915/2BH
AM5915AA
AM5915AB
AM5915AC
AM5915AD
AM5915BA
AM5915BB
CATALOGUE
598
601
601
606
595
596
595
590
590
596
596
596
590
590
590
590
592
592
599
599
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
605
TECHNICAL SHEET
1017
1020
596
595
933
936
937
940
938
946
949
952
601
602
794
797
829
799
801
993
1002
ITEM
AM5915BC
AM5915BD
AM5915BE
AM5915BF
AM5915BH
BMDI1001
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
BMSE2005
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
C9451
E46ADCN
E47/12
E47ADCN
E49
F80AL
F80CMD
F115/8A
F115/8B
F400A
F411/1N
F411/1NC
F411/2
F411/2NC
F411/4
F413N
F414
F415
F416U1
F417U2
F420
F422
F425
F426
F428
F429
F430/2
F430/4
F441
F441M
F454
F461/2
F462
F481
CATALOGUE
605
605
605
605
605
540
537
537
537
537
537
537
539
539
539
533
551
551
551
551
578
568
565
565
565
565
565
565
567
567
567
561
578
578
578
578
TECHNICAL SHEET
594
591
591
591
591
591
591
593
593
593
589
603
603
603
603
684
687
692
698
704
710
716
722
725
728
731
907
908
918
552
552
578
539
539
539
539
539
540
540
540
540
540
533
532
535
532
535
532
546
546
548
548
533
533
533
544
579
579
604
604
567
567
567
567
567
568
568
568
568
568
561
560
563
560
563
560
574
574
576
576
561
561
561
572
593
593
593
593
593
594
594
594
594
594
589
588
590
588
590
588
599
599
601
601
589
589
589
598
732
734
735
738
739
742
745
745
748
752
755
756
766
767
772
983
987
1093
1094
1112
1113
1116
909
ITEM
F482
F482V12
F483
F500N
F502
F503
F520
F521
F522
F523
F524
F550C6
F551
F552
F553
F555
F558
H4372V230H
H4548
H4549
H4562
H4570
H4586
H4587
H4588
H4590
H4591
H4592
H4593
H4594
H4595
H4648
H4649
H4651M2
H4652/2
H4652/3
H4671/1
H4671M2
H4678
H4687
H4890
HA4572
HA4572SB
HA4589
HA4596
HA4597
HA4598
HA4599
HA4619
543
543
544
548
577
548
547
547
547
547
547
555
555
555
555
555
555
556
556
556
548
550
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
528
556
556
534
534
534
538
538
538
532
532
528
528
528
528
528
544
CATALOGUE
571
571
572
576
601
577
575
575
575
575
575
583
583
583
583
583
583
577
597
597
598
601
601
600
600
600
600
600
589
602
1020
1016
647
648
650
651
652
653
654
655
786
786
788
794
797
799
801
806
549
560
TECHNICAL SHEET
911
913
916
1012
1013
1014
960
962
965
778
969
1098
1100
1102
1103
1105
1107
588
1122
808
810
649
659
660
661
662
922
ITEM
HA4690LTK
HA4690VBB
HA4690VNB
HA4690VSW
HA4690XC
HB4572
HB4572SB
HB4589
HB4596
HB4597
HB4598
HB4599
HB4619
HC4033
HC4070
HC4177
HC4202D
HC4210D
HC4214D
HC4269F
HC4279C6A
HC4511/12
HC4512/12
HC4547
HC4560
HC4563
HC4563
HC4563/2
HC4565
HC4575
HC4577
HC4578
HC4601
HC4603/4
HC4603/8
HC4604
HC4605
HC4606
HC4607
HC4607/4
HC4608
HC4610
HC4611
HC4611B
HC4613
HC4618
HC4653/2
HC4653/3
HC4654
CATALOGUE
TECHNICAL SHEET
532
532
532
532
532
808
810
649
659
660
661
662
922
528
528
528
528
528
544
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
535
541
542
542
542
542
544
534
534
536
929
1017
815
1018
817
542
541
549
550
665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
954
956
827
827
829
ITEM
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HC4658
HC4659
HC4672N
HC4673
HC4680
HC4690
HC4692
HC4692FAN
HC4693
HC4695
HC4891
HC4911
HC4911/2
HC4911/2AF
HC4911/2AG
HC4911/2AH
HC4911/2AI
HC4911/2BA
HC4911/2BC
HC4911/2BE
HC4911AD
HC4911AF
HC4911AG
HC4911AH
HC4911AI
HC4911BA
HC4911BC
HC4911BE
HC4915
HC4915/2
HC4915/2AA
HC4915/2AB
HC4915/2AC
HC4915/2AD
HC4915/2BA
HC4915/2BB
HC4915/2BC
HC4915/2BD
HC4915/2BE
HC4915/2BF
HC4915/2BG
HC4915/2BH
HC4915AA
HC4915AB
HC4915AC
HC4915AD
HC4915BA
534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
CATALOGUE
549
549
TECHNICAL SHEET
833
833
838
843
811
848
1118
993
996
999
1002
851
ITEM
HC4915BB
HC4915BC
HC4915BC
HC4915BE
HC4915BF
HC4915BG
HC4915BH
HC4915BL
HC4915BL
HC4915DD
HC4915DD
HC4915M2BL
HC4915M2BL
HC4915MR
HC4915MR
HC4919
HC4921BL
HC4921DD
HC4921MR
HD4033
HD4070
HD4177
HD4202D
HD4210D
HD4214D
HD4269F
HD4279C6A
HD4511V12
HD4512V12
HD4547
HD4560
HD4563
HD4563M2
HD4565
HD4575
HD4577
HD4578
HD4601
HD4603/4
HD4603/8
HD4604
HD4605
HD4606
HD4607
HD4607
HD4607/4
HD4608
HD4610
HD4611
CATALOGUE
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
542
535
541
542
542
TECHNICAL SHEET
929
549
1017
815
1018
817
665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
541
938
944
946
949
ITEM
HD4611B
HD4613
HD4618
HD4653M2
HD4653M3
HD4654
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HD4658
HD4659
HD4672N
HD4673
HD4680
HD4690
HD4692
HD4692FAN
HD4693
HD4695
HD4891
HD4911
HD4911AD
HD4911AF
HD4911AG
HD4911AH
HD4911AI
HD4911BA
HD4911BC
HD4911BE
HD4911M2
HD4911M2AF
HD4911M2AG
HD4911M2AH
HD4911M2AI
HD4911M2BA
HD4911M2BC
HD4911M2BE
HD4915
HD4915AA
HD4915AB
HD4915AC
HD4915AD
HD4915BA
HD4915BB
HD4915BC
HD4915BD
HD4915BE
HD4915BF
HD4915BG
HD4915BH
CATALOGUE
542
542
544
534
534
536
534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
TECHNICAL SHEET
954
956
827
827
829
833
833
838
843
818
549
550
549
549
848
546
549
993
996
999
1002
851
ITEM
HD4915BL
HD4915DD
HD4915M2
HD4915M2AA
HD4915M2AB
HD4915M2AC
HD4915M2AD
HD4915M2BA
HD4915M2BB
HD4915M2BC
HD4915M2BD
HD4915M2BE
HD4915M2BF
HD4915M2BG
HD4915M2BH
HD4915M2BL
HD4915M2BL
HD4915MR
HD4915MR
HD4919
HD4921BL
HD4921DD
HD4921MR
HS4033
HS4070
HS4177
HS4202D
HS4210D
HS4214D
HS4269F
HS4279C6A
HS4511/12
HS4512/12
HS4547
HS4560
HS4563
HS4563/2
HS4565
HS4575
HS4577
HS4578
HS4601
HS4603/4
HS4603/8
HS4604
HS4605
HS4606
HS4607
HS4607/4
554
554
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
556
545
556
555
555
555
555
555
544
544
556
548
535
549
550
546
528
541
545
541
545
542
541
535
535
CATALOGUE
556
556
TECHNICAL SHEET
929
549
1017
815
1018
817
542
541
665
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
ITEM
HS4608
HS4610
HS4611
HS4611B
HS4613
HS4618
HS4653/2
HS4653/3
HS4654
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
HS4658
HS4659
HS4672N
HS4673
HS4680
HS4690
HS4692
HS4692FAN
HS4693
HS4695
HS4891
HS4911
HS4911/2
HS4911/2AF
HS4911/2AG
HS4911/2AH
HS4911/2AI
HS4911/2BA
HS4911/2BC
HS4911/2BE
HS4911AD
HS4911AF
HS4911AG
HS4911AH
HS4911AI
HS4911BA
HS4911BC
HS4911BE
HS4915
HS4915/2
HS4915/2AA
HS4915/2AB
HS4915/2AC
HS4915/2AD
HS4915/2BA
HS4915/2BB
HS4915/2BC
HS4915/2BD
CATALOGUE
541
542
542
542
542
544
534
534
536
534
534
536
536
547
547
535
532
546
546
546
546
532
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
553
553
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
TECHNICAL SHEET
944
946
949
954
956
827
827
829
833
833
838
549
550
549
811
546
549
848
1118
993
996
999
1002
851
ITEM
HS4915/2BE
HS4915/2BF
HS4915/2BG
HS4915/2BH
HS4915AA
HS4915AB
HS4915AC
HS4915AD
HS4915BA
HS4915BB
HS4915BC
HS4915BC
HS4915BE
HS4915BF
HS4915BG
HS4915BH
HS4915BL
HS4915BL
HS4915DD
HS4915DD
HS4915M2BL
HS4915M2BL
HS4915MR
HS4915MR
HS4919
HS4921BL
HS4921DD
HS4921MR
HW4890
L4033
L4177
L4202D
L4210D
L4214D
L4269F
L4279C6A
L4373H
L4380/B
L4380/B
L4511/12
L4512/12
L4546
L4547
L4560
L4561N
L4562
L4563
L4565
L4566
CATALOGUE
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
554
556
554
556
554
556
554
556
544
556
556
556
532
584
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
545
573
572
572
606
584
576
548
577
563
577
550
TECHNICAL SHEET
1122
576
601
576
577
602
1017
1019
1020
815
1018
1022
ITEM
L4566/10
L4567
L4568
L4569
L4572
L4572SB
L4575N
L4575SB
L4576N
L4577
L4578N
L4589N
L4596N
L4597N
L4598N
L4599N
L4600/4
L4601
L4603/4
L4603/8
L4604
L4605
L4606
L4607
L4607/4
L4608
L4610
L4611
L4611B
L4613
L4618
L4619
L4630
L4630
L4651M2
L4652/2
L4652/3
L4654N
L4658N
L4659N
L4664
L4665L20
L4665L40
L4665L40
L4668BUS/35
L4668BUS/60
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
550
550
550
550
574
529
529
529
529
529
529
573
569
573
569
573
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
572
573
545
562
562
562
564
564
564
555
555
555
583
548
548
552
552
552
CATALOGUE
577
577
577
577
602
602
602
602
570
569
TECHNICAL SHEET
1021
1023
1024
1025
808
810
817
821
826
992
665
649
659
660
661
662
930
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956
598
576
788
794
797
829
838
843
577
583
583
577
577
579
579
579
601
601
604
604
604
858
858
859
ITEM
L4669S
L4671/1
L4672N
L4673
L4678
L4680
L4692
L4692FAN
L4693
L4695
L4891
L4911ADN
L4911AFN
L4911AGN
L4911AHN
L4911AIN
L4911BFN
L4911M2AFN
L4911M2AGN
L4911M2AHN
L4911M2AIN
L4911M2N
L4911M2TN
L4911N
L4911TN
L4915AN
L4915BN
L4915DD
L4915DN
L4915FN
L4915KIT
L4915KIT1
L4915M2ADN
L4915M2AN
L4915M2BN
L4915M2DN
L4915M2FN
L4915M2N
L4915M2TN
L4915MR
L4915MR
L4915N
L4915SETBL
L4915SETBL
L4915TN
L4915TN
L4919
LN4548
LN4549
552
566
575
575
566
563
574
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580
580
582
580
584
580
582
584
582
584
572
584
584
CATALOGUE
579
604
574
576
TECHNICAL SHEET
924
799
811
806
848
993
996
999
1002
851
584
ITEM
LN4586
LN4587
LN4588
LN4590
LN4591
LN4592
LN4593
LN4594
LN4595
LN4648
LN4649
LN4671M2
LN4890
LN4890A
MH200N
MHKIT10N
MHKIT85N
MHVISUAL
N4033
N4070
N4177
N4202D
N4210D
N4214D
N4269F
N4279C6A
N4373H
N4511/12
N4512/12
N4547
N4560
N4563
N4565
N4575SB
N4576N
N4577
N4575N
N4577
N4578N
N4589N
N4596N
N4597N
N4598N
N4599N
N4600/4
N4601
N4603/4
N4603/8
N4604
CATALOGUE
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
529
584
584
566
560
560
533
563
570
532
584
573
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
572
572
584
576
563
577
TECHNICAL SHEET
647
648
561
589
596
560
588
598
576
602
574
529
529
529
529
529
529
573
569
573
569
573
650
651
652
653
654
655
786
786
801
1122
1122
1124
929
1017
815
1018
821
826
992
817
665
649
659
660
661
662
930
920
932
933
934
ITEM
N4605
N4606
N4607
N4607/4
N4608
N4610
N4611
N4611B
N4613
N4618
N4640
N4640B
N4654N
N4658N
N4659N
N4672N
N4673
N4680
N4692
N4692FAN
N4693
N4695
N4891
N4911ADN
N4911AFN
N4911AGN
N4911AHN
N4911AIN
N4911BFN
N4911M2AFN
N4911M2AGN
N4911M2AHN
N4911M2AIN
N4911M2N
N4911M2TN
N4911N
N4911TN
N4915AN
N4915BN
N4915DD
N4915DN
N4915FN
N4915KIT
N4915KIT1
N4915LN
N4915M2ADN
N4915M2AN
N4915M2BN
N4915M2DN
CATALOGUE
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
542
542
564
564
564
575
575
563
574
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580
570
569
570
570
574
584
596
596
576
TECHNICAL SHEET
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956
925
925
829
838
843
811
848
993
996
999
1002
851
ITEM
N4915M2FN
N4915M2LN
N4915M2TN
N4915MR
N4915MR
N4915SETBL
N4915TN
N4919
NT4033
NT4070
NT4177
NT4202D
NT4210D
NT4214D
NT4269F
NT4279C6A
NT4373H
NT4511/12
NT4547
NT4560
NT4563
NT4565
NT4575N
NT4575SB
NT4576N
NT4577
NT4578N
NT4600/4
NT4601
NT4603/4
NT4603/8
NT4604
NT4605
NT4606
NT4607
NT4607/4
NT4608
NT4610
NT4611
NT4611B
NT4613
NT4618
NT4654N
NT4658N
NT4659N
NT4672N
NT4673
NT4680
NT4692
CATALOGUE
580
580
582
580
584
582
582
572
584
573
584
583
583
583
583
583
584
572
584
576
563
577
574
529
573
569
573
569
573
570
569
563
563
569
570
570
570
570
572
564
564
564
575
575
563
574
TECHNICAL SHEET
584
584
929
576
570
569
577
1017
815
1018
817
821
826
992
665
930
920
932
933
934
936
937
940
938
944
946
949
952
954
956
829
838
843
811
ITEM
NT4692FAN
NT4693
NT4695
NT4891
NT4911ADN
NT4911AFN
NT4911AGN
NT4911AHN
NT4911AIN
NT4911BFN
NT4911M2AFN
NT4911M2AGN
NT4911M2AHN
NT4911M2AIN
NT4911M2N
NT4911M2TN
NT4911N
NT4911TN
NT4915AN
NT4915BN
NT4915DD
NT4915DN
NT4915FN
NT4915KIT
NT4915KIT1
NT4915M2ADN
NT4915M2AN
NT4915M2BN
NT4915M2DN
NT4915M2FN
NT4915M2N
NT4915M2TN
NT4915MR
NT4915N
NT4915SETBL
NT4915TN
NT4919
CATALOGUE
574
574
574
560
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
581
582
581
582
580
580
580
580
580
582
582
580
580
580
580
580
580
582
580
580
582
582
572
574
576
TECHNICAL SHEET
996
999
1002
851
584
584
584
584
848
993
MY HOME
Introduction
CONTENTS
MY HOME INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction MY HOME
GENERAL FEATURES
MY HOME - Build on it
MY HOME is the BTicino home automation system, the solution for the design of the electric system of the house.
ADVANCED ELECTRIC SYSTEMS
SELECTION OF
THE FUNCTIONS
Thanks to the MY HOME technology,

it is possible to design electric
A system made using MY HOME
systems with new, and more
can be expanded at any time,
advanced features in new or existing
with minimum, cost effective
buildings.
interventions: during the design

stage, one can select which functions
shall be included immediately, and
which ones at a later date.
COMFORT
SAFETY
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
AUDIO VIDEO
Light automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
COMMUNICATION
Management of shutters
Technical alarms
Air conditioning
Digital video door entry system
Remote assistance
Load management
Video handset answering
Automatic rearming
Consumption display
and automations
Scenario activation
Sound system
after black-out
Video monitoring systems
MY HOME
Introduction
machine
Integrated telephone system
tem
2 TECHNOLOGIES
Simple design and installation,
thanks to radio or digital BUS
AN OPEN SYSTEM
MY HOME is an open system allowing
communication among the

components.
both integration with products of

other brands, and communication
with the outside world using the
TCP/IP protocol.
LOOK CAPABLE OF
MEETING ALL TASTES
MY HOME is available is several
finishes: AXOLUTE, AXOLUTE ETRIS,
LIVINGLIGHT and MATIX.
MY HOME portal
INTEGRATION AND CONTROL
Function integration through the Touch Screen user interface
Local management through PC
Remote management using the

MY HOME WEB service
The MY HOME system technologies

BUS technology
TYPE OF DEVICES
L
N
Control
Actuator
SCS BUS
FEATURES
The SCS BUS technology is based on the use of devices connected to each other by a cable (BUS) with two conductors,
used for the transfer of information and the low voltage (27 Vdc) power supply.
Using appropriate interfaces, MY HOME BUS systems can be easily integrated to BUS systems with different communication
protocols, like Konnex and DALI standards, etc., and extended using ZigBee control devices.
Lighting
Shutter automation
Scenario management
Burglar alarm
Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)
Sound system
FUNCTIONS
Temperature control
Load management and consumption display
Video door entry system
Home structured cabling
Local and remote control of one or more

integrated functions
WHEN SHOULD IT BE USED When there is the possibility of installing a new system, or refurbishing an old one with BUS wiring
TV/SAT
DEVICE
CONFIGURATION
Web Server
TV/SAT
IPTV
Ethernet cable
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
Configuration
using thecontrollo
programming
videocitofonia
software
termoregolazione
automazione
lan
controllo carichi
energia
BUS cable
MY HOME
Introduction
luci
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
Physical configuration using plug-in

www
irrigazione
devicestvcccalled configurators.
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
Radio ZigBee technology

L
N
Radio control
Actuator
FEATURES
The Radio Zigbee technology is based on the use of battery powered control devices, and actuator devices powered by the
electric power supply, and connected to the load to be controlled, communicating via radio signals at a 2.4 GHz frequency.
Thanks to these features, it is possible to realise with extreme easy new electric systems, or to modify existing ones, with
reduced cable connections and minimum masonry wall interventions. Using a specific interface, ZigBee radio control
devices can be integrated to a BUS technology system (i.e. the Automation system).
Lighting
Shutter automation
Scenario management
Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)
When it is not possible to extend/modify a system with BUS wiring
Push and Learn mode; without using tools and software
Legrand is a
member of
the executive
board
An interface for every need

A wide range of controls providing the most suitable solution for each need.
From basic controls to scenario controls, from room controls to local and remote
supervision.
TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS

To control all the MY HOME functions
from one single point, in a simple and
logic manner.
TOUCH CONTROLS
A simple touch will activate any
actuation or regulation function.
WEB SERVER
For remote control of all home automation
functions, using a PC or a hand-held computer,
through internet and WEB pages.
MY HOME
Introduction
DIGITAL CONTROLS
A simple click for function control.
VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets also become versatile
control and management multimedia
stations of the MY HOME system.
MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN

It can be used to control and display the
MY HOME system on the screen, with a
simple touch of the icons shown on the
large 10 display.
It can also act as a video handset, and
enables monitoring the rooms through
the cameras installed around the home.
The device is also capable of reading
and displaying multimedia contents
available through WEB connections or
saved in USB Pen drives, or SD cards.
Select the look that meets your taste

A wide range of finishes, to dress the MY HOME system with colours and finishes to ones personal taste .
The MY HOME devices are completed with the colours and materials of
the cover plates of the AXOLUTE, NIGHTER AND WHICE, AXOLUTE ETERIS,
LIVINGLIGHT AND MTIX, civil series, available in all modularities.
LIVINGLIGHT
MTIX
MY HOME
Introduction
AXOLUTE
WHITE SOLUTION
AXOLUTE
AXOLUTE
NIGHTER E WHICE
AXOLUTE ETRIS
MY HOME functions
TOUCH SCREEN, to intuitively
activate, using an icon
menu, all home automation
functions.
COMFORT
MY HOME improves and simplifies
the quality of domestic living.
For example, it provides automation
LOCAL DISPLAY
Touch screen control for the
simultaneous control of 4 functions:
Scenarios, Temperature control,
Sound system, Consumption
display, and Load management
of curtains and shutters, light control

centralisation, centralised sound
system control for the whole house,
temperature control, watering and
activation of several automations.
ENERGY SAVING
TOUCH SCREEN configured for real time

display and management of electricity, gas
and water consumption levels.
MY HOME pays a lot of attention

to the respect of the environment
and the intelligent use of energy
resources.
Temperature control central unit

for zone control of the various
temperatures inside the home.
It enables monitoring consumption

levels and managing the air
conditioning system across the whole
house, adjusting the temperature
according to the zone.
CENTRAL UNITS
For the management of the burglar alarm system.
Various solutions available, for each and every type
of requirement: from the one-bedroom apartment
to the villa.
SAFETY
MY HOME makes the home
safer and more protected, even
when the owner is out. It helps
preventing intrusions and protecting
against domestic dangers and
inconveniences, such as gas leaks,
flooding, electric power cuts,
activating any countermeasures as
necessary.
10 MY HOME
Introduction
FLUSH MOUNTED CAMERA

For video monitoring across
the home.
NIGHTER E WHICE HANDSETS
Large 8 colour display
8 mm thick glass surface
Touch control keypad, a simple touch of the

icon will activate the function.
COMMUNICATION
MY HOME can be used to manage
images, data, and music inside the
home. It ensures valid video handset
call reception and forwarding
solutions, facilitating access control,
VIDEO DISPLAY
2.5 colour display
Icon menu
CONTROL AND INTEGRATION

The BTicino MY HOME Control system
and provides local video monitoring.
INTERFACES
Devices for the integration of the various MY HOME functions with
SCS technology, and for the integration of the MY HOME system
with standard DALI systems
provides supervision and monitoring

of the home in total safety and
discretion.
Control can be local and remote.
Local using a simple control, or an
advanced device like MULTIMEDIA
TOUCH SCREEN, or an iPad with
the My Home BTicino application
installed, which can be downloaded
free of charge from iTunes. Remote
control is through a PC, hand held
computer, telephone or mobile
phone, using the Internet connection

Video handset and control device for all the MY
HOME functions.
It also works as a multimedia station with
USB port, SD card reader connector, and WEB
connection for RSS, IP radio and webcam
and the potentialities of the Web

Platform.
IPAD
iPad with My Home BTicino application for
local function control.
Introduction MY HOME 11
MY HOME WEB
MY HOME Web is a virtual platform
Customer area:
In order to take advantage of the MY
designed by BTicino, divided into two
solely intended for customers
HOME WEB services, the system of
areas:
interested in the remote
the customer must be fitted with at
Installer area:
management of their system.
least one of the following:
intended for the My Home
This service, active since 2003,
Web server, for FLAT type ADSL
installers which can register their
enables remote control of all the
line communication, using the
own systems. Following customers
home automation functions of
BTicino router modem;
request, it is also possible to
the MY HOME system, making
activate the Remote Assistance
available exclusive services that
communicator, for connection to
service, which gives the possibility
are only possible through the web
the public telephone network.
of remotely monitoring the home
portal (danger notifications, web
of the customer, and receive real
scenarios, etc.).
Burglar alarm central unit with
time notifications in case of faults.

Burglar-alarm
central unit
Web server
ADSL modem
12 MY HOME
Introduction
CONNECTION SAFETY AND

PROTECTION
In developing the MY HOME WEB
Integrity: safeguard of the
portal, BTicino has paid special
accuracy and completeness of the
attention to ensuring high levels of
information;
protection of the data transferred
Accessibility: guarantee that both
through the network from unwanted
data and information will be
access.
available when required.
In particular, stringent protection
For the described features, BTicino
measures have been implemented
has obtained the ISO27001
to ensure high levels of protection in
Information technology Security
terms of:
management systems certification.
Privacy: protection of data from

unauthorised access;
PSTN
ADSL
Internet
Mobile access
Voice and SMS

message access
Introduction MY HOME 13
14 MY HOME
Project guidelines
CONTENTS
MY HOME Project guidelines

General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Project guidelines MY HOME 15
GEnEral fEaturES
functional diagram of a MY HOME system

the creation of a MY HOME
the home converge in a general
automation BuS (grey cable) is the
automation system does not entail
distribution board that contains the
same as for the Energy management
many changes when compared with
usual system sectioning devices, the
and temperature control systems
a traditional system the energy,
BuS power supplies for the various
the burglar-alarm BuS (red cable), is
telephone/data line and Video door
systems, and all DIn modularity
the same as the one for the technical
entry system sources that reach
devices the lights/shutter
alarms
TV/SAT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ENERGY SUPPLY
FLATWALL
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
Telephone line
TV/SAT
REMOTE
videocitofonia
controllo
Grey cable (BUS)
IPTV
TV/SAT
IPTV
CONTROL
one
zione
videocitofonia
diffusione sonora
controllo
antifurto
lan
controllo carichi
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
ADSL line
(Internet)
energia
controllo
TV/SAT
luci
tvcc
controllo carichi
lan
IPTV
www
energia
irrigazione
Red cable (BUS)

luci
tvcc
www
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM
arichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Video door entry system call
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
White cable (BUS)
LAN
16 MY HOME
Project guidelines
tvcc
ww
the 2 wire video door entry system
or can be integrated with each other
BuS (white cable) is the same as the
using specific interfaces lOCal
one for the sound system, and offers
COntrOl devices enable centralising
the possibility of implementing the
the supervision and the control of the
video surveillance system function
systems from one single point of the
the systems can be set individually,
home
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
IPTV LIGHT/SHUTTER AUTOMATION
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
TV/SAT
automazione
termoregolazione
controllo carichi videocitofonia
energia
mazione
rto
lazione
controllo luci
lan
tvcc
controllo carichi
www
diffusione sonora
energia
irrigazione
antifurto
luci
TV/SAT
termoregolazione
IPTV
videocitofonia
controllo
LOCAL CONTROL
tvcc
www
irrigazione
IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
TV/SAT
controllo carichi
IPT
TECHNICAL ALARMS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
VIDEO DOOR
controllo
automazione
lan
diffusione sonora
controllo carichi
antifurto
IPTV
energia
termoregolazione
luci
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
controllo
tvcc
www
IPTVlan
controllo
SOUND SYSTEM
ENTRY SYTEM
TV/SAT
IPTV
LOCAL CONTROL
termoregolazione
automazione
controllo
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
diffusione sonora
antifurto
lan
controllo carichi
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
luci
tvcc controllo
TV/SATvideocitofonia
controllo
lan
www
lan
controllo carichi
irrigazione
energi
IPTV
DATA NETWORK
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
IPTV
controllo carichi
energia
LOCAL CONTROL
videocitofonia
automazione
controllo
diffusione sonora
lan
controllo carichi
antifurto
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
luci
controllo
tvcc
lan
www
controllo carichi
irrigazione
energia
luci
tvcc
GEnEral fEaturES
System integration
In order to ensure advanced home
automation functions and enable the
central management of the
MY HOME system, the BuS of the
various systems are integrated with
1
each other using particular interfaces
that can be installed inside the

flatWall distribution board, near
other DIn modularity devices (power
supplies, actuators, etc )
the following image shows the main
4
devices for the above setup
6
7
Video door entry system entrance panel
10
18 MY HOME
Project guidelines
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV Light/shutter automation
LEGEND
3. f422 interface for the integration
1. E46aDCn power supply for

automazione
controllo carichi
energia
diffusione sonora
antifurto
TV/SAT
luci
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
the poweringIPTV
of the automation,
tvcc
Temperature control
IPTV
Energy management
termoregolazione
lan
controllo carichi
Video door automazione

entry sytem
videocitofonia
controllo
Burglar alarm
energia
TV/SAT
luci
antifurto
4. f422 interface for the integration
2. E46aDCn power supply for the
of the video door entry system and
powering of the burglar-alarm
the automation system

5. f454 web IPTV
server for local and
TV/SAT
lan
controllo carichi
energia
controllo
remote control
internet
tvcc using thewww
luci
luci
tvcc
irrigazione
and the lan network of the home

tvcc
www
IPTV
irrigazione
termoregolazione
automation functions
6. 346000 power supply for the
powering of the video door entry
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
system and the sound system

IPTV
7. f441M audio/video multichannel
matrix for the distribution of the
Sound system
videocitofonia
energia
management systems
TV/SAT
rmoregolazione
controllo carichi
of the burglar-alarm and automation

systems
SCS/DALI interface
diffusione sonora
lan
temperature
control and Energy
www
irrigazione
system
antifurto
controllo
signals of the video door entry

lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
system and the sound system

8. f551 switch for the distribution
of a data line to four different rJ45
automazione
TV/SAT
diffusione sonora
IPTV
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
sockets
controllo carichi
energia
luci
9. f552 power supply for the
SCS/Konnex interface
powering of the switch

10. aDSl modem/router for the
Telephone line
connection to the internet network of

the MY HOME system using the web
server item f454
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
In addition to the devices described,
irrigazione
the MY HOME system can also be

integrated with systems of a different
technology and communication
protocol, such as Konnex and EIB,
IPTV
using the devices shown for more

Data network
details refer to the section SYStEM
ADSL line (Internet)
IntEGratIOn anD COntrOl" of this
TV/SAT
controllo carichi
antifurto
energia
termoregolazione
luci
videocitofonia
tvcc
controllo
guide
IPTV
www
lan
irrigazione
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
MY
HOME
Project
guidelines
19
GEnEral fEaturES
Creation of the home automation system

the creation of the MY HOME
SYSTEM DESIGN AND
automation system follows the
CONFIGURATION OF THE
following stages:
DEVICES:
for this operation Bticino provides
1. 1. DEFINITION OF THE
two tools:
REQUIREMENTS
this technical Guide with technical
Definition of the home automation

functions to implement inside the
sheets
the Youproject software for
home, based on the requirements of
preparing the necessary estimates
the user
and designing the integrated

home automation system
2. PROJECT
the application is preset to
selection of the types of devices
automatically perform all the
needed, configuration, operation
size and electrical calculations, as
mode, and development of the
well as the configuration of the
electric diagram
products, giving the installer full

freedom to make the necessary
3. INSTALLATION
changes and customisations
wiring of the devices inside their
at the design stage for more
conduits and the distribution board,
information see the section
with operational test
"Software and Services"
20 MY HOME
Project guidelines
YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
WHEN AND WHY SHOULD YOU
USE YOUPROJECT
YouProject is an extremely useful and
from the design to the installation
the diagram below shows the
versatile software that Bticino has
of the system (system absorption
range of information generated by
designed to simplify and speed up
check, number of DIn modules,
YouProject during the three different
the sizing of a MY HOME system in
dissipated power, map of physical
stages required for the realisation of
order to:
and logic links for the installation,
the system:
Produce an estimate of the
confi
DEfInItIOn Of rEQuIrEMEntS
guration, Cat service report)
DESIGn
offer (General description and

advantages, bill of quantities, list of
InStallatIOn
items required);
1st STAGE DEFINITION OF REQUIREMENTS
Entering of the data for the definition of the functions
2nd STAGE - DESIGN

Report:
- General description and advantages,
- Bill of quantities;
- List of Items required;
- Time estimate;
- System absorption check;
- Number of DIN modules and dissipated power.
TiPre
Software for preparing
estimates
YouProject
3rd STAGE - INSTALLATION

XML file
Report:
- Map of physical and logic installation links;
- Configuration;
- CAT service report
Multimedia Touch Screen
Device configuration software:

- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch
My Home Web services

MY HOME portal
Touch Screen
GEnEral fEaturES
YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
If the MY HOME system is not
the filled system booklet will then
designed using YouProject, it will
become a useful and necessary
Screen, Multimedia touch Screen,
be necessary to fill at least a system
document for the installer, as it
MH200n scenario programmer,
Booklet (1) in Excel format, with the
represents the ID card of the system
using the corresponding
description and configuration of the
installed
programming software etc
systems (automation, temperature
Having a booklet in Excel format will
control, burglar-alarm, etc )
be useful to create the XMl file to:
Configure devices such as touch
activate the My Home Web

services
the file is created using the
YouProject software, by importing
the xls file of the system booklet
YouProject
Installation
File XML
Device configuration software:

- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch
My Home Web services

MY HOME portal
MH200N
NOTE (1): the file in Excel format of the System booklet and the YouProject software are available with the CD supplied with the present guide, or by visiting the Installers
area of the MY HOME section of the www.BTicino.it website.
22 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Devices configuration
Based on the type of products, this
operation may be performed in three
Example of main screen of the
software for the definition
of the scenarios using the
TiMH200N program
different ways:
Device configuration using the

programming software:
devices such as Wen server,
Scenario programmer, touch
screen, Video station, Multimedia
touch screen etc , are supplied
with appropriate software for the
configuration of the operating
parameters and the management
of the web pages or graphic icons
of the MY HOME functions
Physical configuration:
Flush mounted device configuration
this is done by connecting to the

appropriate socket of each device,
using pliers, special activation
components (3501/ ) called
configurators Each configurator is
identified with its number, letter,
colour or graphic
Virtual configurator:
In automation and temperature
control systems with several
devices, it is possible to greatly
to the system through the Web
the VIrtual COnfIGuratOr
simplify the configuration
server thanks to the virtual
software installed in the PC; this
operations using the virtual
configuration, it is possible to
solution is particularly suited
configuration, as an alternative to
configure each device without
to large systems, where the
the physical configuration
using the standard alphanumerical
configuration may be changed
the virtual configuration is
configurators
at any time without the need
performed using a PC connected
the address and the operating
for manual intervention on each
mode of the device are set using
individual device
Virtual configuration
TV/SA
Web Server
Ethernet cable
BUS
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
PC with Virtual Configurator 2.1 software
contro
GEnEral fEaturES
It is possible to greatly simplify
configurators With the virtual
4. Obtain the diagnostics of the
the configuration operations
configuration it is possible to:
automation and temperature
using, as an alternative to the
1. Create a new device
control systems: in this way the PC
physical configuration, the Virtual
configuration: to assign the address
interrogates all the devices of the
Configuration software (Virtual
and the mode of operation of each
system and supplies a summary of
Configurator), which manages the
system device
the status of each of them, using
addresses and the operating modes
2. Change the pre-existing
three different colours:
of the devices
configuration: to change the address
green for correct operation
the software installed in the PC
and the operating mode of each
yellow when the device is not
communicates with the system
system device already virtually
present, or has not been detected
through the new 3503n Kit,
configured
by the system
connected to the BuS, or using the
3. Test the actuators: it enables
red for faulty device
web server; the Virtual configuration
driving an already configured
5. Knowing the status of a single
is therefore particularly useful as
actuator directly from the PC to
device: it is possible to individually
it offers new modes and gives
ensure that it is operating correctly
interrogate all the system devices to
the possibility of changing the
(for example switching on a light
check that they are working correctly
configuration at any time, without
point controlled by the actuator)
using the normal alphanumeric
PC with VIRTUAL
CONFIGURATOR program
Ethernet cable
24 MY HOME
Project guidelines
there are two possible types of

virtual configuration:
THE VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION
THE PROJECT&DOWNLOAD
that can be applied to all types
CONFIGURATION
of automation and temperature

control systems, both in the case
of individual systems or systems
Dedicated for the lighting

Management system
new modes of configuration
integrated with each other in
(ID COnfIGuratIOn +
logical expansion mode this
COnfIGuratIOn WItH XMl) for
follows the addressing laws, with
more information see the lighting
the corresponding limits as shown
Management System technical
in the diagrams of the following
guide for BuS systems
sections
new virtual configuration

procedures through extended
description (1) and extended
addresses
new functions available: contacts

and CEn PluS
NotE 1): For more information of the extended
descriptions, see the Glossary section of this Guide.
TV/SAT
BUS connector
automazione
diffusione sonora
automazione
antifurto
diffusione
sonora
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
Power supply
connector
General features
Additional functions that can be performed

with the virtual configuration
In some critical cases, the virtual
status of a contact and has been
different types of pressures
configuration enables exceeding the
conceived for the management of
(short pressure, start of extended
existing addressing limits, thanks to
the integration among different
pressure, extended pressure,
the use of virtual addresses, which do
systems (e.g. if a window is
release after extended pressure).
not use any of the addresses of the
opened, the central heating goes
The devices can be configured
automation system.
off ). Using the virtual configuration
with virtual address from 0 to
The functions enabling the use of
software, it is possible to configure
2047, an address from 0 to 31
virtual addresses are:
the contact function with
can be associated to each device
CONTACTS (available for the
addresses from 1 to 201.
pushbutton.
PLUS SCENARIOS: function
contact interface, Item F428 and
CEN PLUS: the function enables
3477): the function enables the
configuring the device as CEN
only intended for the Lighting
transmission of information on the
control, capable of managing
Management System.
LIST OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION

Item
Description
F430/2
2 DIN relay actuator
F430/4
4 DIN relay actuator
HC/HS4695 L/N/NT4695 AM5874
4 zone temperature control central unit
HC/HS4692 L/N/NT4692 AM5872
probe with selector
HC/HS4693 L/N/NT4693
probe without selector
HC/HS4692FAN L/N/NT4692FAN
probe with selector for Fan-Coil
34561)
splitter management interface
Note 1): the management of the device is only possible when using version 2.2 or later of Virtual Configurator.
LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION

Item
Description
3476
basic actuator
3477
basic contact interface1)
BMSE1001
passive IR ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2001
wide band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2002
narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2003
sbidirectional narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2004
one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2005
double technology wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSW1001
230 Vac 1 DIN relay actuator 1)
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
F411/1N
1 DIN relay actuator 1)
26 MY HOME
Project guidelines
LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION

Item
Description
F411/1NC
1 DIN NC relay actuator 1)
F411/2NC
2 DIN NC relay actuator 1)
F411/2
F411/4
F413N
DIN ballast dimmer 1)
F414
1000 VA DIN dimmer 1)
F415
DIN electronic transformer dimmer 1)
F416U1
DIN multi load 1000 W dimmer 1)
F417U2
DIN multi load 2x400 W dimmer 1)
F429
DIN SCS/DALI interface1)
HD/HC/HS4563 L/N/NT4563
Knob control
HD/HC/HS4575 L/N/NT4575N
Receiving radio interface
F420
DIN scenario module
F422
SCS-SCS interface
F425
DIN memoty module 1)
HD/HC/HS4657M3 HC/HS4657M4
NIGHTER and WHICE control
HD/HC/HS4891 L/N/NT4891
Local Display
HD/HC/HS4575SB L/N/NT4575SB
HD/HC/HS4576 L/N/NT4576N
HD/HC/HS4680 L/N/NT 4680
Scenario control 1)
H/L4651M2 AM5831M2
2 module special control 1)
H/L4652/2 AM5832/2
2 module base control 1)
H/L4652/3 AM5831/3
3 module base control 1)
H/L4671/1 AM5851/1
2 module 1 relay actuator
H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2
2 module 2 relay control/actuator
H/L4678
ferromagnetic transformer dimmer
HC-HS4653/2 - HD4653M2
Soft Touch control
HC-HS4653/3-HD4653M3
Soft Touch control
HD/HC/HS4654 L/N/NT4654N AM5834
IR receiver
BMDI1001
Dimmer 1/10 V actuator1)
F428
DIN contact interface 1)
Note 1): the devices show an extended description of the function and are identified in the software with the message Virtual Advanced.
These item also have extended addresses (A=0-10, PL=0-15), and ID solely intended for the Lighting Management System.
GEnEral fEaturES
Virtual Configurator software

the Virtual Configurator Software
for more information refer to the
select the operating mode, using
had been designed to be used on a
software user manual
numbers and letters (following the
PC with Windows Xp 32 bit, Windows
Below are some screenshots of
logics of the physical configurators),
Vista 32 bit, and Windows 7 32 bit
Virtual Configurator Depending on
or through an extended description
operating system
the devices, it will be possible to
of the function
Single device configuration screen
Device description
Device item
Configurator
selection window
actuator test screen
Actuator test action selection window
28 MY HOME
Project guidelines

Summarisation screen listing the devices installed in the system
Device item
Device state
Configuration set in the device
Below some screenshots relating to the automation system, where it is possible

to select the operating mode through an extended Description of the function
Single device configuration screen

Function selection window
Mode selection window
GEnEral fEaturES
Screen for the identification of the devices in the system
Project name
List of devices
Single device screen
Device description
Device item
Device with
advanced functions
Pushbutton for accessing

the device configuration
30 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Below are some examples of
the connection may also be
connections between the PC and the
completed without using the
system to be configured using the
configuration kit, provided that the
3504 kit
Web Server, item f454, is installed in

the system
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
IPTV
AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH KIT 3504
Temperature
control central unit
diffusione sonora
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
Shutter
control
termoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
controllo
carichi
Dimmer
control
lan
energia
Shutter
control
controllo
lucicarichi
OK
3
ABC
GHI
JKL
MNO
YUV
WXVZ
DEF
OFF
DIN dimmer
DIN actuator
DIN actuator
L
1 2 3 4
T5H 250V
Flush mounted
actuator
PQRS
luci
www
Probe with
selector
CLEAR
ON
Power supply
energia
tvcc
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART. F411/2
0245 06
C1
C2
C1
C2
F414
230V~
50Hz
60 1000VA
A PL M G
Kit 3504
SCS AI
SCS AV
WiFi
BUS
PC
ETHERNET
automazione
antifurto
ETHERNET
diffusione sonora
230 Vac
SCS AI
SCS AV
BUS connector
Power supply
connector
irriga

TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
IPTV
AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH WEB SERVER
diffusione sonora
automazione
antifurto
diffusione sonora
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
controllo
carichi
lan
energia
controllo
lucicarichi
Temperature
Shutter
control
Dimmer
control
Shutter
control
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
7
PQRS
8
YUV
WXVZ
OFF
DIN dimmer
DIN actuator
DIN actuator
L
T5H 250V
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART. F411/2
024506
C1
C2
C1
C2
F414
230V~
50Hz
60 1000VA
A PL M G
Flush
mounted
actuator
Crossed cable
Ethernet
PC
Web Server
F454
SCS AI
32 MY HOME
Project guidelines
SCS AV
Probe with
selector
OK
CLEAR
ON
Power supply
ETHERNET
GEnEral fEaturES
energia
tvcc
luci
www
INTEGRATED SYSTEMS
Configuration of the devices of all the
Warning: remember that in order to configure all the
M position and configuring the address of position
systems belonging both to the Local
devices of the system it is necessary to configure
I4 using configurators from 1 to 9.
BUS and the Main riser. this can be
the F422 interfaces for logic expansion"
ensured by connecting the Kit or the
operating mode, connecting configurator no. 2 to the
Web Server to the main riser

Local BUS
Automation system No. 1
Main raiser
Interface
F422
PC for the configuration

of the devices of the
system.
Crossed cable
Ethernet
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Local BUS
IN
Web Server
F454
ETHERNET
Interface
F422
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
SCS AI
SCS AV
IN
If on the other hand, the
local BuS, only the devices of that
must be disconnected from the riser
configuration kit or the Web Server
system can be configured In this
by removing the connection to the
are connected to one of the two
case the system to be configured
corresponding f422 interface
Local BUS
Main
raiser
Crossed
cable
Ethernet
OUT
Local BUS
OUT
ART.F422

PC for the configuration
of the devices of system no. 2
Interface
F422
IN
Web Server
F454
ETHERNET
SCS AI
SCS AV
BUS
cable
cable
disconnected
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
General features
The installation of a ZigBee radio system

RADIO SYSTEM
The installation of a Zigbee radio
installation of a domestic electric
system does not have any special
system, and with the instructions of
requirements; It is enough to comply
this page.
with the current regulations for the
Actuator
Junction box
All the actuator devices are connected to the electric power line; for their installation, the installation requirements of
traditional devices apply.
All the radio controls are battery powered and are independent from the electric wiring. They can therefore be installed
anywhere, in flush mounted or wall mounted boxes.
34 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Switch
Junction box
The existing electric system can be easily modified by adding radio devices, using already existing junction boxes and
conduits.
Radio control
Radio
actuator
Radio
control
Junction box
SYStEM laYOut
Installation of a BuS system

WARNING:
The design and installation of the MY HOME system must only be performed by qualified personnel, in accordance with
current local regulations. BTicino SPA rejects all responsibility for any consequence resulting from the non-compliance
with such regulations.
the first step towards the installation
different from that of a traditional
In a traditional system, all the control
of a home automation system is
electric power system, particularly in
devices are connected to the user
to design and ensure a good basic
terms of:
load using a more or less complex
installation setup
the selection and position of the
wiring setup
In fact, an accurate setup of cables,
Each function therefore requires
distribution boards;
trunking, boxes, equipment rooms
the position of the junction boxes;
electric connection; the more
and control points, enables to follow
the position of plug-in boxes;
functions are included in the system,
in a much simpler way the evolution
the definition and position of
the more the circuits and the
of the devices already installed inside
complexity of the wiring
loads/users
the home and include new ones in
In creating a home automation
as an example, shown here is the
the future
system it will be necessary to take
electric diagram of an electric circuit
Irrespective of the type of system
into account other factors based on
used for switching on a lamp using 4
and the required home automation
the installation features of a BuS
control devices (two 4 way switches
applications, it is necessary that the
system, such as the Bticino MY HOME
and two 2 way switches) as it can be
layout of the house and a general
system:
seen, rather simple functions require
furniture plan, are made available to
the layout of the conduits;
a complex type of wiring, difficult
the installer
the type of wiring;
to modify over the time without
It is also important that a check is
the coexistence of cables inside
having to rewire most of the circuit
carried out, to ensure that the initial
(for example in order to reach a new
the same conduit
estimate is in line with the actual site:
In order to understand these
number of rooms and their use (living
requirements, extensively outlined in
room, bedroom, bathroom etc )
the following pages, it is important to
On a design and installation point
understand the difference between a
of view, the installation of a home
traditional and a BuS type system
control point)
automation system is not much
Two-way
switch
Four-way
switch
Four-way
switch
Two-way
switch
L
T
N
Junction box
36 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Junction box
Junction box
Junction box
In a BUS system, the power line for
this system configuration offers clear
changing the position of the
the powering of the load is separated
advantages:
control points through the
from the control line, which is also
an important simplification of the
connection of the device in any
independent from the functional
wiring of the various control points
wiring
offered by the use of one single
With reference to the diagram shown
cable (pair);
4 way switches, we have electronic
L
T
N
devices connected to actuator

devices for the control of the lamp
a simplification of the installation

of the conduits for the powering of
the loads
the possibility of adding or
here, instead of traditional 2 way and
point of the BuS;
Switchboard actuators
Lamp
through a telephone pair (BuS line)

In the diagram the actuators are
shown inside an electric distribution
BUS
board of the apartment, although

they can also be positioned inside
junction boxes, or, for some types,
Control
device
can also be installed inside the device
Control
device
Actuator
Junction box
Junction box
holder boxes, together with the

control devices
BUS
By sharing the same BuS pair, some
of the temperature control system
system without requiring specific
MY HOME systems can perform
and the automation system; the
additional wiring
different functions based on common
central unit and the probes connect
also the actuator for the control of
wiring this is the case, for example,
to the BuS line of the automation
the heating system solenoid valve is

connected to the automation BuS
L
T
N
and shares the house switchboard

Temperature control central unit
Switchboard actuators
with the other actuators of the home

automation system
Lamp
BUS
Control
device
Sonda
Temperature control
Control
device
Actuator
Junction box
Junction box
SYStEM laYOut
type of wiring
Systems may be installed using two
FREE STRUCTURE WIRING
different types of structures or modes
this type of wiring is normally used
of distribution:
in traditional distribution systems
these for the sheathed BuS pair
free structure
However, in order to integrate MY
supplied by Bticino, characterised
Star structure
HOME systems, it will be important
by an insulation voltage of 300/500
the choice is based on installation
to take into account the following
V In general, the conduits must be
needs, functions required
indications during the design stage:
selected with a suitable diameter to
(installation of the applications;
the BuS path may be the same as
meet any current and future system

requirements
lighting, automation, burglar-alarm,
the power line, using traditional
video surveillance system, etc ),
covered trunking, surface mounted
wall limitation, and whether we are
trunking, under floor systems, or
installation of junction boxes,
talking of refurbishments or new
trunking installed behind the false
which must be sized and placed in
buildings With these modes it is
ceiling "
positions that facilitate parallel
possible to cover and create all the
this solution provides a reduction
connection of the pair in more
types of MY HOME systems
of both installation times and
sections of the system In case of
masonry works If the building
motorised windows and shutters,
already has power system conduits
ensure that the power services
with diameter of no less than
and the automation BuS pair also
20 mm, it will be possible to use
reach the shutter boxes
the indications also apply to the
Device
Junction box
Power supply
38 MY HOME
Project guidelines
STAR STRUCTURE WIRING

this wiring is recommended when
there is a requirement for integration
of the data transmission system,
video door entry system, video
surveillance system, sound system,
telephone system, and tV/Sat
system inside one single conduit
the structure of the star wiring
consists of a central point called star
centre to which all the peripheral
branches of the various wiring
systems converge as a rule, the star
centre is made using a switchboard,
a flush or wall mounted distribution
board that groups all the active and
passive devices for the management
of the services, which, from the urban
and building networks are taken
inside the apartment
the sizing of the star wiring system

must take into account the following:
In accordance with the structure

of the building, position the star
centre in the barycentre position
in relation to the system If
possible, install the switchboard
in an appropriate service room or
inside a storage, in order to avoid
compromising the look of the room
Install the conduits with junction

boxes every 10 metres, for pulling
the cable or for installing any
required signal amplifiers
for the power system use
dedicated conduits, the EDP/
telephone/tV services may share
the same conduits, which must
have a minimum internal diameter
of 18 mm (recommended 20 mm)
Device
Junction box
Power supply
SYStEM laYOut
Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board

the integration of the various MY
Bticino offers a wide range of
the calculation of the dissipated
HOME systems in the building entails
switchboards suitable for types of
power, all Bticino switchboards
the need for grouping in one central
needs, with different capacities and
and distribution boards meet
point all the active (power supplies,
installation solutions (flush mounted,
the requirements of CEI 23-51
interfaces, telephone switchboards,
or wall mounted)
standards
etc ) or passive devices for the control
a useful selection criteria in terms of
and the management of all the
installation of the MY HOME system is
new buildings and apartments
functions
the following:
where an equipment room for
this location is effectively the "brain"
for one-floor or multi-floor
the integration of the MY HOME
for installation in one floor
of the whole home automation
installations in new or existing
system is not available, Bticino
system of the building Its size shall
(refurbished) buildings where an
offers MY HOME flatWall, an
be defined taking into account the
equipment room will be installed
innovative solution for central
following general requirements:
for the electric distribution board
installation of electric and
allow for extra space for expansion
of the home, it is possible to select
electronic devices and user
using new devices that may be
among the various wall mounted
interfaces in full respect of the
needed for future requirements
or flush mounted distribution
decor of the home
install the power supplies in the
board or switchboard solutions
lower position of the switchboard
belonging to the Multiboard and
in order to facilitate thermal
Idroboard series for the integration
dissipation;
of the MY HOME system for
the switchboard must be capable

of dissipating a power higher than
the sum of the powers dissipated
by all the devices it will hose
40 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Overview of wall mounted and flush

mounted switchboards
available in two versions:
MY HOME flatWall meets two
- with variable height from 240 cm
types of installation requirements:
to 270 cm
- inside the homes, as innovative
- with height 150 cm
centralised installation solution for
this type of unit can contain up
all electric and multimedia services
to 288 DIn modules, and features
in harmony with the decor of the
sections that can only be accessed
home
by the installer (e g actuators and
MY HOME FLATWALL 240 - 270
- on the building riser, as a solution
power supplies, for maintenance/
for the distribution of the main
updating purposes), as well as
wiring of the whole building
sections that can be accessed by

the final user (burglar-alarm central
unit, flush mounted video handset,
etc )
MY HOME FLATWALL 150
SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall
for all basic or advanced system needs
1. SWITCHBOARD TYPE SOLUTION
2. ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION BOARD TYPE SOLUTION
Configuration providing interaction with the My Home
Configuration ensuring the containment of all DIn
system through room control (touch Screen), video
actuators and power supplies of the My Home system,
handset (Video Display) and burglar-alarm central unit
making them easily accessible
It also enables intervention on the earth leakage and

thermal magnetic electrical safety and protection devices
inside the corresponding switchboard
Switchboard type solution
EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL H150 INSTALLATION:

small households or home automation systems with basic functions.
2
1
Electric distribution board type solution
42 MY HOME
Project guidelines

Switchboard type solution
3. FLOOR RISER TYPE SOLUTION
Building floor crossing configuration, for distribution using

common service cables (only possible with flatwall 240270)
All these solution can be fully integrated with the room design thanks to the finishing
panels, supplied in white, and which can be painted using standard masonry paints.
EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL 240 - 270 INSTALLATION
1
2
Electric distribution board type solution
Floor riser type solution
SYStEM laYOut
aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements

MY HOME flatWall features a sophisticated design and
thanks to the protrusion from the wall, 2 cm only, the
extreme functionality of all its components the type of
paintable front cover panels, and the side surround plates
accessibility to the devices installed depends on their use:
in anodised aluminium, MY HOME flatWall provides
some sections are only accessible to the installer, to
maximum integration with the residential environment
perform the required maintenance operations on the

installed devices;
other sections are accessible to the end user for

interaction with the system

available in the switchboard, distribution panel, and floor
riser version, it offers management of the distribution for all
electric services inside modern houses
It can be installed in both masonry walls (supporting and
partition walls) and in plasterboard walls

MY HOME flatWall 150 is the ideal solution for containing together all the devices required for a basic home automation system (up to 180 DIn modules) with minimum
space requirement the aesthetic and functional features
of the new version are similar to the well-known flatwall
240-270 version Most of the complements and accessories
used are the same for the two versions, with the exception
of the cable entry in the bottom section, which does not
require a conduit securing place, therefore allowing more
space for housing devices
Installation is possible in both masonry and plasterboard
walls
44 MY HOME
Project guidelines
new in the flatwall range, is a box for the installation
this results in a further concentration of electric devices,
of multimedia devices (router, modem, etc ) used in
and the disappearance from around the home of the
Home network systems, promoted by all main telephone
unsightly cables needed for connecting these kinds of
providers
devices Bticino offers its own range of Home network
the new flatwall accessory creates a dedicated area for
devices, and the flatwall multimedia box is one of its
multimedia devices
integral parts
Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices like ADSL

modems or routers. The installation requires a 36 DIN module support
(3787).
Devices for interaction with the MY HOME system that can be operated by
the end user (Touch Screen, burglar alarm central unit, Video Display).
Switchboard for electrical safety and protection devices accessible to the

end user. Available in three versions (glass, metal and plastic), featuring
installation reversibility. The hinged side can in fact be attached to the
right or the left, so that the door can be opened from the most suitable
and functional side.
Zone accessed by the installer only, housing power supply risers,

actuators and other DIN devices (up to 288 modules), for the operation
of the MY HOME system. The installation is completed by the white front
cover panels.
SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition

MY HOME flatWall consists of:
1. ONE TELESCOPIC BASE MODULE
2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
(adjustable on two heights: 270 and 240 cm), which
for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with
constitutes the metal back to be fitted in the wall; the
plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and
adjustable feet provide better positioning of the back
securing of wiring cables

the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the
installation of MY HOME devices
1 INSTALLATION OF
BASE MODULE
Bracket with
adjustable feet
2 INSTALLATION OF
DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
Upper
cover
Back of
telescopic module
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
Back of base
module
Bracket with
adjustable feet
Duct fastener plate

Concrete mesh
46 MY HOME
Project guidelines
3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES

Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints
3 INSTALLATION OF
FINISHING ELEMENTS
Upper
end cap
Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
video door entry system
Front cover panel

for the installation
of MY HOME devices
and video door entry
system h 120 cm
Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm
Blanking module
h 90 cm
Multimedia box to
be completed with
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover
Side surround plates with

opening handle (pair)
Lower
end cap
SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall 150 switchboard composition

MY HOME flatWall consists of:
1. A BASIC MODULE
2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
metal, 150 cm high, flush mounted inside masonry and
for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with
plasterboard walls Differently from flatwall 240 270,
plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and
there is no conduit securing plate
securing of wiring cables
In case of need, remove the first DIn guide in the bottom
the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the
section, to make cable entry easier
installation of MY HOME devices, and specific accessories

such as the multimedia box dedicated to the installation of
modems, routers, etc
2 INSTALLATION OF
1 INSTALLATION OF
BASE MODULE
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 60 cm
Back of base
module
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 30 cm
Concrete mesh
48 MY HOME
Project guidelines
3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES

Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints
3 INSTALLATION OF
FINISHING ELEMENTS
Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
Upper
end cap
Front cover panel

h 30 cm
Front cover panel for

the installation of MY
HOME devices and video
door entry system
h 30 cm
Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm
Blanking module
h 90 cm
Multimedia box to
be completed with
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover
Side surround plates
Side surround
plates
SYStEM laYOut
Installation heights for every need

the flatwall 150 solution, specifically designed for small
thanks to its exclusive sliding hooxking adjustment system,
households, gives the possibility of installing up to 180 DIn
flatwall 240-270 makes it possible to adjust on <site the
modules (a capacity higher than the average number of
height of the column based on the height of the room
devices used in a basic home automation system)
It can be used for installing up to 288 DIn modules (capacity normally higher than the number of devices used
in a whole home automation system), centralising all the
devices within one single location of the home By using
the appropriate accessory, it is possible to use MY HOME
flatWall as riser for apartment complex services, or inside apartments and villas on several floors
150 cm flush mounted back
adjustable flush mounted back, 240 or 270 cm

Max. 252 DIN modules
240 cm
270 cm
150 cm
56 cm
56 cm
50 MY HOME
Project guidelines
56 cm
Device-holder supports
three types of device-holder supports are available,
Irrespective of the MY HOME flatWall solution chosen,
offering the advantage that they can be wired in the
the front cover panels are always secured to the device-
workshop and then taken to the installation site, where
holder supports with screws
they are secured to the metal back already installed in the
Therefore, when assembling MY HOME FLATWALL, it is
wall, making the whole installation process much simpler
always necessary to install the device-holder supports
and quicker for the installer
across the whole height of the unit.
72 MODULES
36 MODULES
CABLE FIXING
3787
3788
3789
Height: 60 cm
Height: 30 cm
Height: 30 cm
Max capacity: 72 DIn modules
Max capacity: 36 DIn modules
Holes for fixing the cables with
DIn rails and side trunkings for
DIn rails and side trunkings for wiring*
wiring*
to be used in switchboard
Holes for fixing the cables with clamps

Holes for brackets for the
and electric distribution board
installation of non modular GSM
solutions
burglar-alarm and temperature
Note: DIN rails and PVC trunkings are fixed and

cannot be removed.
control units
to be used in switchboard
clamps
Holes for the installation of the
vertical partition (3804)
It can be equipped with DIn kit
and trunkings (3790)
to be always used in the floor
riser type solution or as universal
and electric distribution board
plate for free installation in other
solutions
configurations
required for the installation of the

multimedia box
Note: DIN rails and PVC channels can be removed,
providing maximum configuration flexibility
* Side trunkings for wiring, sizes 60 x 60 mm, subject to CEI-64-8 Standard for compliance with a 50% fill factor.
SYStEM laYOut
Installation solutions
the small thickness of the flush mounted back, only 8.5 cm,
workshop and then installed inside the metal back already
makes MY HOME flatWall suitable for installation using
fitted in the wall
the same procedure as for sliding doors
In order to preserve integrity, the finishing elements can be
When installed while the wall is being built, the metal back
installed after the completion of masonry operations
also ensure savings in building materials
the page on the side shows a typical installation in a
the device-holder supports can be assembled at the
masonry wall
Partition walls
Plasterboard walls
Supporting walls
Note: For installation inside supporting walls, a 60 cm wide recess must be obtained in the wall from the floor to the ceiling. For partition or plasterboard walls leave an
opening of approximately 60 cm during the construction of the wall.
52 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Area for accessible and visible

devices operated by the end
user
Side entry for corrugated ducts
Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices (routers, modems, etc.). The metal
basket, which can only be fitted on 36 module device holder supports, has cut-out marks on
all sides, providing flexibility during the management of the cable passage areas. Supplied
as standard are 4 rubber cable glands, required for ensuring the protection of data and
power cables. For multimedia device installations requiring a large number of cables, a
specific kit with 8 cable glands is also available (3831). The installation of the devices is
completed using appropriate clips (F496/MF). *
Wall fixing bracket

Area intended for protection
devices (stop&go, thermal
magnetic devices etc.)
Area for My Home

devices
Duct fastener plate

In order to facilitate the entry of cables, MY HOME FLATWALL (for the 240-270 h version)
has been designed to allow the entry of several corrugated ducts, both through the bottom
section, where they can be easily secured thanks to the duct fastener plate, and from the
sides, through knockout holes. This operation is not required for the Flatwall h150 version.
* The Flatwall metal structure screens the Wi-Fi signal. Therefore, the installation of an external antenna must be allowed for at the design stage.
SYSTEM LAYOUT
Electric distribution board position

The positioning of the electric distribution board(s) must be decided based on the type of building. The most suitable position of the distribution
board should be agreed with the installer (unless already preset).
SERVICE SECTOR
More than 3 rooms + bathroom &
BUILDING ON SEVERAL FLOORS
Install a dedicated distribution board
kitchen
Install the main distribution board
inside an equipment room for the
only include one distribution board,
in an equipment room, or under the
centralisation of all the devices on
at a central position.
stairs. Install another distribution
DIN rail.
Part of the DIN rail devices will be
board on each floor, in a barycentre
installed on the board, while part of
position. DIN rail devices will
them will be distributed.
be partly centralised, and partly
ONE FLOOR BUILDING

1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &
distributed.
kitchen: arrange only one distribution

board in a barycentre position, for the
centralisation of all DIN devices.
Service sector
Several floor building

Flush mounted
device
Distribution
board
Distribution
board
1
1
2
2
038 42
C1
C2
3rd FLOOR
Equipment
room
One floor building: 1, 2, or 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen
2nd floor
Flush mounted
device
Distribution
board
1st FLOOR
One floor building: more than 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen

Distribution
board
1
1
2
2
038 42
C1
DIN modularity
device
Equipment
room
1
1
2
2
038 42
C1
C2
C2
Flush mounted
device
1
1
2
2
038 42
C1
54 MY HOME
C2
Project guidelines
Flush mounted
device
Plug-in boxes position

the positioning and the quantity of plug-in boxes needed must be assessed based on the type of home let's now consider
the following types of homes:
1 FLOOR APARTMENT
APARTMENT ON SEVERAL
SERVICE SECTOR
1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &
FLOORS
Install plug-in boxes in the false
kitchen: minimum number of
Install one plug-in box under each
ceiling, or under the floor
plug-in boxes, for cable joints only
electric distribution board, as well as
all DIn devices are centralised
all DIn devices are centralised
other boxes distributed around the
more than 3 bedrooms +
system, to house the DIn devices of
bathroom & kitchen: plug-in boxes
the home automation system
are used also for housing the DIn
DIn devices are both centralised and
devices of the home automation
distributed
system DIn devices are both
as an alternative, where appropriate,
centralised and distributed
install MY HOME flatWall, for the
Main plug-in box
30 cm
centralisation of all DIn devices
Note: For the installation of the boxes refer to the CEI 64-50 guide.
The Guide recommends a minimum height of 17.5 cm from the floor. We suggest a height of 30 cm approximately.
Installation:
It is also recommended that the
Plug-in boxes should be installed,
boxes are nOt positioned:
based on the floor plan, including the
behind large pieces of furniture or
possible distribution of the furniture:
in easily accessible locations, for

maintenance purposes;
in passage areas (e g hall) or areas
wardrobes;
behind flush mounted appliances;
in particularly visible areas
Solenoid valve
actuator
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
Plug-in box
that are not used very often (e g

storage rooms);
nearby the hydraulic collector of
Hydraulic
collector
the temperature control system

(see drawing)
Zone solenoid
valve
Box
SYStEM laYOut
Indications for the installation

of aXOlutE EtrIS device holder boxes
to combine the MY HOME system
with the new cover plates of the
New dedicated flush

mounted boxes
aXOlutE EtrIS series, it will be

necessary to use dedicated flush
New dedicated supports
mounted boxes, supports and cover

plates
for more information refer to the
AXOLUTE devices
already listed in the
catalogue
aXOlutE Catalogue
FEATURES OF THE NEW

DEDICATED BOXES FOR
AXOLUTE ETRIS
2 new modularities (2 and 8 mod );
New dedicated cover plates
More depth to ensure minimum

protrusion of the light point from
the wall;
Can be installed in masonry walls

and plasterboard/cavity walls
Deeper than traditional boxes
PLASTERBOARD WALLS
Screw sockets reinforced
with steel blades
(10 to 45 mm thick boards)

8 modules
2 modules
Mortar protection cover included

(for flush mounted boxes)
MASONRY WALLS
8 modules
The covers are fitted with appropriate
spirit level housings.
2 modules
Note: Etris boxes are deeper than standard boxes. When designing the system, ensure that their positioning is adapted to the type of wall.
E.g. with standard partition walls with thicknesses of approx. 10 cm, it will not be possible to install 2 boxes opposite to each other (one each side of the wall) because the
overall space required of 12 cm would exceed the thickness of the wall.
56 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Example with 2 and 3 module devices
Example with several 2 module devices
Example with 2 module control
Example of vertical configuration
Depending on needs and look
Once the installation is completed,
requirements, Etris can be used to
the cover plates will be perfectly
create a light point using several 2
aligned and joined
module boxes joined together
Example of horizontal configuration
JOINING THE BOXES TOGETHER

this operation is performed both for
Coupler (502WA)
masonry and plasterboard boxes,

using the appropriate coupler (item
502Wa) the boxes will be perfectly
joined and level with each other,
making the subsequent steps much
easier
Cable
entry space
Cable entry knockouts

to be removed
SYStEM laYOut
local control device position

In addition to the controls for the
individual loads, further devices may
be included for centralised control of
the MY HOME functions for correct
positioning follow the indications
below
6
5
4
3
1
Scenario control
2. SCENARIO CONTROL
It is recommended that this device is
installed nearby the main house entrance,
and at the points from where the whole
house must be controlled from. For
example, installation in the bedroom
makes it easy to lower all shutters and
switch all lights off before going to bed.
NIGHT AREA control

(switches all bedroom lights on or off)
Local Display
1. LOCAL DISPLAY
Depending on the configured
operating mode, the device
controls the lights, the sound
system, or the scenarios;
therefore, it can be placed in any
zone of the home.
58 MY HOME
Project guidelines
3. GROUP
CONTROLS
Group controls may be used to
control a range of actuators.
They should be installed by
the entrance of the room to be
controlled.
6. VIDEO HANDSETS AND

MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREENS.
It is recommended that video handset are installed in areas
of the home that can be easily reached, both during the day
and the night. They have a double function, as they enable
receiving calls from the entrance panels and also control of the
MY HOME applications installed inside the home.
Touch Screen
5. TOUCH SCREEN
The TOUCH SCREEN must be installed in a central position, so
that it is visible and easily accessible from any room of the
house. The TOUCH SCREEN provides control and management
of all MY HOME applications.
Shutter general controls
4. GENERAL CONTROLS
It is preferable to install the general controls
for SHUTTERS and LIGHTS nearby the main
entry of the house, so that lights may be
switched on and off, and shutters may be
opened or closed, from a single point, before
going out, or when returning to the house.
SYStEM laYOut
Grouping cables
although the construction of
refurbishment, the cables for some
the following table shows the
the cables guarantees 300/500V
applications may be installed inside
systems/MY HOME applications for
electric insulation, it does not
the same conduits or pipes of the
which the cables may be grouped
however guarantee immunity from
traditional electric power supply
in the same conduits as the power
disturbances that may occur if
system this solution results in
supply lines (however, under no
they are installed inside the same
important SaVInGS, both in terms of
circumstances they should be
conduits as the 230V power supply
masonry work and costs
installed in the same conduits as 380
cables This type of installation is not
Vac power supply cables)
recommended However, in case of
mY Home AppLIcAtIon
Comfort
Sicurezza
Risparmio
Comunicazione
GroUpInG WItH poWer cABLes

Lighting / Automation
YES
Sound system
NO
Burglar alarm
YES
Video surveillance system
*1
Energy management
YES
Video door entry sytem
*1
Integrated telephone system/ Data network
NO
Note: * If the recommended cables are used for these systems, i.e. BTicino items, SAFETY is guaranteed in terms of electrical insulation. However, no guarantee is
provided for correct operation, due to possible disturbance that may occur if the MY HOME system cable is grouped with the electric power cables.
CABLE L4669
CABLE 336904
the light automation, shutters
the separation of electric power
automation, temperature control,
supply cables from signal cables
and energy management l4669 (or
MuSt also be ensured inside the
l4669Hf and l4669/500) GrEY BuS
junction boxes and the electric
MaY be placed in the same conduit
distribution board
as the l4669S rED BuS of the burglar
attention must therefore be paid
alarm system (in lEVEl 1 classified
when presetting the conduit
systems) together, they can also
entrances of the junction boxes and
share the same conduits and boxes as
the electric distribution board
the electric power cables

the video door entry system and
sound system 336904 WHItE BuS
may be placed in the same conduit
with the data transmission, telephone
system and tV-Sat signal cables, but
must be separated from the electric
power supply cables
60 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Selection of the cable

BTICINO CABLE 336904
BTICINO CABLE L4669, L4669HF
BTICINO CABLE L4669S
for video systems, Btcino produces
AND L4669/500
this cable has been specifically
a dedicated cable, 336904, made
this cable has been designed for the
designed for the installation of MY
of two twisted conductors with
installation of BuS systems for the
HOME burglar-alarm systems
a section of 0 50 mm2 each this
following applications:
this cable can be used for the
cable ensures the best performance
automation, Energy management
distribution of power supplies and
of the video system (greater
and temperature control this cable
operating signals When using the
distance between Entrance Panel
can be used for the distribution
300/500 insulated BuS cable, and the
and Handset, when compared to
of power supplies and operating
clamp protection cover, with which
other cables) In addition, contrarily
signals When using the 300/500
all devices are fitted, Bticino systems
to standard cables, which are not
insulated BuS cable, and the clamp
may also be installed in the same
suitable for underground installation,
protection cover, with which all
boxes and conduits as the electric
item 336904 may be installed
devices are fitted, Bticino systems
power supply lines (230 Vac) lEVEl 1
underground in suitable conduits,
may also be installed in the same
classified systems
as it complies with CEI 20-11
boxes and conduits as the electric
Technical features
standards on cables for underground
power supply lines (230 Vac)
SCS sheathed pair made up of
installation
Item l4669Hf is a low toxicity cable
2 flexible conductors, sheathed,
Technical features
without halogens, to be used in
twisted, unshielded for burglar-
rooms where more attention to
alarm system
safety is required in case of fire
Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
twisted, unshielded
Technical features
Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-
Insulation voltage: 450/750V
Compliant to En60811, En50289,

En60228, 50265-2-1, En50395,
En50396
Coil length: 200 metres

20 standards
Coil length: 100 metres
twisted, unshielded
Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 2020 standards
Coil length: - 100 metres ( l4669) 500 metres (l4669/500) 200 metres (l4669Hf)
GREY CABLE
L4669
L4669/500
RED CABLE
L4669S
WHITE CABLE
336904
SYStEM laYOut
Selection of the cable

MY HOME APPLICATIONS
the following table enables selecting the right cable based on the MY HOME application
mY Home AppLIcAtIons
comFort
TV/SAT
IPTV
sAFetY
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
sAVInG
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
controL
commUnIcAtIon
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
IPTV
IPTV
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
controllo
controllo
tvcc
irrigazione
controllo
energia
irrigazione
energia
luci irrigazione
tvcc
tvcclantvcc
wwwcarichi
wwwwww
irrigazione
Data network
termoregolazione
termoregolazione videocitofonia
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
antifurto
antifurto
Integrated
telephone system
diffusione
diffusione
sonora
sonora
Video door entry

sytem
(*)
automazione
automazione
Energy
management
(*)
Video surveillance
system
(*)
Wire burglar
alarm
automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan controllo
controllo
carichi
energia
termoregolazione
lan sonora
controllo
videocitofonia
carichi
energia
controllo
luci
lan
controllo
tvcc
carichi
www
energia
irrigazione
luci
tvcc
automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
www
irrigazione
diffusione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo
carichi
luci www
tvcc
www
automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lanirrigazione
controllo
carichi
termoregolazione
automazione
automazione
videocitofonia
diffusione
diffusione
sonora
sonora
controllo
antifurto
antifurto
termoregolazione
lantermoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
carichi
videocitofonia
energia
controllo
controllo
luci lan
lan energia
tvcc
controllo
carichi
carichi
www
energia
energia
irrigazionecontrollo
luci
luci luci
Sound system
videocitofonia
videocitofonia
diffusione
controllo
antifurto
luci
tvcc
diffusionesonora
sonora automazione
antifurto
Temperature
control
termoregolazione
termoregolazione
automazione
energia
automazione
Automation
antifurto
diffusione
sonora controllo antifurto
lan
carichi
Lighting
diffusione sonora
automazione
controllo
lan lan
controllo
controllo
carichi
carichi
BTicino 336904
(white)
(*)
(*)
BTicino L4669,
L4669HF and
L4669/500
(grey)
BTicino L4669S
(red)
BTicino L4668CM
UTP 5
BTicino C9881U/5E
C9882U/5E UTP 5E
multi-pair
Telephone pair
RG6 cable
Cables recommended by BTicino(in accordance with installation regulations).

NOTE (*): Compulsory for the underground sections of the individual systems
62 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Cables that may be used (for each system, the current installation regulations must be checked).
Web Server video
TV/SAT
energia
energia
luci
luci luci
www
tvcc
irriga
tvcc tvcc
Selection of the conduits

Inside the home, cables must be
REQUIREMENTS OF THE CEI 306-
placed inside protective conduits
2 STANDARDS (*)
made of insulating material,
In the planning and sizing of the
2. 1 piping with minimum diameter
embedded in floors, walls or ceilings
conduits the CEI 306-2 standards
of 18 mm for the conduits connecting
for garages and cellars, due to
recommend to allow for any future
the star centre to the device holding
the difficulty in embedding the
requirements of advanced wiring
boxes In the case of "exposed"
components in the walls (garage walls
systems
conduits, trunkings of similar capacity
normally made of solid concrete, and
for the realisation of conduits to
may also be used
often less than 10 cm wall thickness
and from the star centre the said
3. 1 piping of suitable diameter for
in cellars), it is preferable to leave
Standards recommend that the
the installation of 1 cable for the
conduits and boxes exposed the path
following is installed :
terrestrial tV system and up to 8
of the conduits must take into account
1. 1 piping with minimum diameter
cables for the connection of the star
the possibility of cables connecting
38 mm for the connection of the
centre to the terrestrial tV antennas
different systems for the installation
Star centre to the infrastructure of
and satellite tV dishes
of flush mounted components,
the common section of the building,
corrugated tubes of different colours
or the access point of the various
should be used this will make
services (telephone system, power
installation and individuation of the
supply, central tV antenna)
system easier It is recommended
that only conduits with a minimum
38 mm
diameter of 25 mm are used

Automation
Energy
Temperature control
Energy management
Energy
Telephone system
TV
Star centre distribution board
Burglar alarm
2
18 mm
Telephone system
Data network
TV/SAT
Video door entry sytem
Sound system
3
Data network
TV/SAT
Note (*): CEI 306-2. Guide for telecommunication

and multimedia distribution wiring inside residential
buildings.
TV
SYStEM laYOut
Positioning of conduits
this electric SYStEM laYOut is
as far as the conduits are concerned,
3. any exposed wires may follow the
defined by marking the walls with
irrespective of the type of MY HOME
shortest path
the paths of the connection conduits
application , it is recommended
4. any wires installed inside ceilings
these paths shall be vertical or
that the following requirements are
or under the floor may follow the
horizontal
complied with:
shortest path
Diagonal paths must be avoided
1. the bending radiuses of the main
unless they follow an inclination of
paths must be such that all risks of
the wall or ceiling Inside the ceiling
damage to conduits and cables are
and under the floor, conduits may be
avoided
installed as desired
2. all conduits embedded in the walls
the distribution between junction
must be horizontal, vertical or parallel
boxes and loads/users depends on
to the wall edges Diagonal path are
the type of room and the type of load
only allowed for VErY short sections
to be connected
OK
OK
NO
NO
OK
OK
OK
64 MY HOME
Project guidelines
OK
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND
PLUG-IN BOXES
the distribution between the electric
use a number of conduits suitable
Install additional conduits, even if
distribution board and the plug-in
for the systems / services being
empty, for future system expansions
boxes must be of the star type
distributed
It is recommended that 32 mm
conduits are used
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN PLUG-IN

BOXES AND WALL MOUNTED BOXES
the distribution between plug-in boxes
use a number of conduits suitable
conduits with a diameter of at least
and junction boxes must be of the free
for the systems / services being
20 mm are used
system type
distributed It is recommended that
SYStEM laYOut
LIGHT AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Comply with the following
2. if a load with light intensity
4. in case of a load connected to
installation requirements:
adjustment is required (DIMMEr),
a controlled socket (e g bedside
1. if the requirement for the room
the actuator will be positioned in the
cabinet lamp or floor lamp in the
is that the load is controlled from
electric distribution board and the
living room) with Basic actuator, the
one point only (flush mounted
conduit will be as above
conduit will go through the actuation
actuator with control), the conduit
3. if the requirement for the room is
and control junction boxes
will be directed from the junction box
that there should be various loads
towards the load
controlled from several points (DIn

actuator in plug-in box or distribution
board
Light automation system

2
Power cable
Dimmer actuator in the
electric distribution board
Power and Automation

BUS cables
BUS cables

BUS cables
BUS
Automazione
Control box
Actuation box
66 MY HOME
Project guidelines
SHUTTER AUTOMATION SYSTEM
ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SOUND SYSTEM
If a shutter automation system is
for the connection of nOn-flush
for the connection of a flush
required, the conduit will go from the
mounted appliances, install the
mounted DIn amplifier, allow for two
junction box to the load
flush mounted actuator for the
separate dedicated conduits
management of the load at the side

of the power socket the conduit will
RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURED
go from the junction box and the
CABLING
nearest junction
allow for star wiring between the

switchboard or electric distribution
board of the communication area
Shutter automation system
Energy management system

BUS cables

BUS cables
Sound system

BUS cables
Residential structured cabling
Electric
distribution
board
Bus
Sound system
Power
cable
It is recommended that power sockets are ALWAYS installed near data

transmission sockets.
SYStEM laYOut
BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
Comply with the following
installation requirements:
1. for the connection between the
2. for the connection of the burglar-
3. for the connection of the
electric distribution board (burglar-
alarm central unit to the telephone
magnetic contacts (windows), install
alarm power supply) and the outdoor
communicator install two separate
separate conduits going to separate
siren install a dedicated conduit
conduits, one for the burglar-alarm
boxes where the contact interface
BuS and the other for the telephone
must be housed (DIn or BaSIC)
cable
Burglar-alarm system
2
Outdoor
siren
Electric
distribution
board
Telephone cable
Burglar-alarm
BUS
68 MY HOME
Project guidelines
Burglar-alarm BUS
Flush mounted contact interface
3
2 pair cable for
magnetic contacts
2 pair
cable for
magnetic contacts
Burglar-alarm BUS
DIN contacts
interface
BASIC contact
interface
70 MY HOME
Radio system
contents
MY HOME Radio System

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Radio system
MY HOME 71
GeneRAL FeAtURes
Wireless freedom
MY HOME radio system: for simple and flexible
home automation systems
The MY HOME radio system, available with AXOLUTE and
LIVINGLIGHT looks, gives the possibility of very easily
creating advanced electric systems to manage:
Lighting;
The automation of lights and shutters;
The protection of the home from gas leaks and
ooding.
Thanks to the radio transmission and the battery

powering of controls, the devices easily integrate with the
infrastructure of the traditional electric system, without the
need for any additional wiring
The use of the ZigBee technology for the communication
of devices makes it possible to use the MY HOME system
also in large spaces with obstacles and partition walls
ACTUATORS
Devices connected to the load to
manage and the power line
L
N
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer radio control

RADIO CONTROLS
Battery powered devices
communicating via radio with the
actuators
72 MY HOME
Radio system
Shutter actuator
Scenario radio control
Shutter radio control
mazione
THe AdVANTAGeS IN A NeW SYSTeM:
THe AdVANTAGeS oF INTeGrATIoN:
Creation of new systems with home automation functions

using the infrastructure of the traditional electric system
Use of radio control devices to extend the BUS Automation

system to rooms without twisted pair
THe AdVANTAGeS IN THe reFurBISHMeNT:

Evolution of a traditional electric system: from the
addition of a new control system without the need
for masonry walls, to the realisation of basic home
automation functions
BuS AuToMATIoN SYSTeM
Light control
ON/OFF
actuator
Power supply
SCS/ZigBee interface
TV/SAT
IPTV
Light actuator
Light radio control
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
Radio system
tvcc
MY HOME 73
www
GeneRAL FeAtURes
The functions
Lighting and shutter automation
Lighting control with ON/OFF mode and Dimmer
Shutter control with Preset setting (recalling of a
preset position)
LIGHTING
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
L
N
Light radio control
Light actuator
Dimmer actuator
TV/SAT
IPTV
SHuTTer AuToMATIoN
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
L
N
74 MY HOME
Radio System
Shutter actuator
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
ffusione sonora
MANAGING SceNArIoS
Simultaneous activation of several loads (lamps and shutters) for the creation of comfort situations
Example: lamp on and shutter half way down for watching the TV; diffused light and shutter fully open for
reading
L
N
Dimmer actuator
Shutter actuator
TV/SAT
IPTV
Radio remote
control
TecHNIcAL ALArMS
antifurto
Home safe from water or gas leaks The system will notify the danger event, and automatically intervene to
limit any damage (e g closing the gas or water mains)
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
Solenoid valve
Gas detector
Radio interface
Radio actuator
Radio system
MY HOME 75
irrigazion
GeneRAL FeAtURes
Installation features
The devices
The range is split into:
Devices for the control of the load, integrated in the

electric system;
Shutter actuator
Battery powered control devices, installable in any

location in full freedom;
Devices for interfacing with the MY HOME BUS and the

management of technical alarms
Shutter control
automazione
L N
The use of radio devices greatly simplifies the installation

of the electric system; all the control devices are in fact
battery powered, and independent from the wiring
In addition, some actuator devices do not require the

neutral conductor for their operation, and can therefore be
easily installed in existing systems, in place of traditional
devices
N
Traditional wiring
diffusione sono
Wiring with MY HOME radio system

L
N
N
N
L
L
L
L
N
L N
L
L
N
N
L
N
Actuator devices
Radio control devices
76 MY HOME
Radio System
PROCEDURE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ZIGBEE DEVICES

INSTALLATION
SUPPORT
DEVICE
KEY COVER
COVER PLATE
Installation with box
Actuator
(*)
Adapter
LN4588
H4588
Wall installation
Control without
original
support
Control with support
(*) Note: The device is sold inclusive of mounting support. For installation in flush mounted boxes, the control device must be removed from its support and
attached to the LN4588 - H4588 adapter.
Radio system
MY HOME 77
GeneRAL FeAtURes
Control devices
The range includes the following products:
SINGLE AND DOUBLE

ON/OFF LIGHT CONTROLS
For the management of one, two, or a
group of light actuators
Double control
Single control
DIMMER LIGHT CONTROL

For the management of one, or a
group of Dimmer actuators
SHUTTER CONTROL
For the management of one, or a
group of shutter actuators
SCENARIO CONTROL
For the management of up to 4
scenarios
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Note: these devices require one module key covers.

See the following pages for more information.
78 MY HOME
Radio System
RADIO REMOTE CONTROLS

Available with 4 and 5 pushbuttons,
to recall the scenarios saved by the
scenario Control device
Radio remote control
INFRARED CONTROL (IR)

It can be used to activate one or more actuators
when someone walks in the area monitored by
the IR sensor of the device
The device also includes a light sensor that
enables operation during the evening hours, or
when the light levels are too low
Fresnell lens
with IR sensor
IR control
TEMPERATURE PROBE
Wall installation device with temperature
sensor with measurement range from -10 to
+40 C
When the two temperature thresholds set are
reached (minimum and maximum), the probe
activates the two corresponding scenarios
Radio system
MY HOME 79
GeneRAL FeAtURes
Control devices
MY HOME - Build on it
Devices preset for:
The integration of traditional devices with the ZigBee

radio system, for the Automation and Safety functions
(technical alarms);
Extending a BUS Automation system using radio control
devices
TRANSMITTER AND ACTUATOR

FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
The transmitter for technical alarms can be used to
generate and send to the radio system a danger signal,
generated by safety devices, like the gas, smoke, or
water detectors connected to its clamps
Transmitting interface and gas detector
The device must be used with one or more actuators for

the activation of the alarm signal (siren and/or flashing
unit), and for ensuring the safety of the room (e g :
activation of solenoid valve to close the water and gas
mains)
CONTACT INTERFACE
Actuator
Featuring two contacts for the connection of two

switches, or one two-way switch, this device can
be used to control two groups of light actuators,
or one group of shutter actuators
The interface has basic modularity for flush
mounted box installation
Contact interface
TV/SAT
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
80 MY HOME
controllo
Radio System
IPTV
lan
controllo carichi
Solenoid valve
energia
luci
tvcc
automazione
diffusionewww
sonora
irrigazione
antifurto
termoregola
SCS/ZIGBEE INTERFACE FOR THE EXTENSION

OF THE BUS AUTOMATION SYSTEM
This device is required for the extension of the BUS
Automation system using ZigBee radio control devices
To be used for easy reach of one or more wired system
control points, in positions that cannot be reached by
the BUS wiring
The interface ensures the transfer of information
between the radio control devices and the Bus
automation system actuators; it is not possible to
manage the actuator of the ZigBee radio system using
Automation BUS control devices
Ligth control
Power supply
Light actuator
IPTV
ontrollo carichi
SCS/ZigBee interface
OPEN/ZIGBEE INTERFACE
This particular device also belongs to the interface
group; it is used to interface the radio system
to a Personal Computer to be used for central
function management through the Open Web Net
communication protocol
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Radio system
MY HOME 81
GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices
Selection of the device based on the functions to manage
LIGHTING AND ON/OFF LOADS
TYPE OF CONTROL
AXOLUTE
KEY COVERS
LIVINGLIGHT
KEY COVERS
SINGLE RADIO CONTROL
HA4596
HB4596
HC/HD/HS4915BA
L4596N
N4596N
L/N/NT4915AN
DOUBLE RADIO CONTROL
HA4597
HB4597
2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA
L4597N
N4597N
2 X L/N/NT4915AN
TRANSMITTER FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs
H4586
LN4586
CONTACT INTERFACE
3577
wall movement sensor
3579
lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)

TYPE OF CONTROL
AXOLUTE
KEY COVERS
HA4598
HB4598
dimmer SINGLE RADIO CONTROL
HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD
LIVINGLIGHT
L4598N
N4598N
KEY COVERS
L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN
lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)

TYPE OF CONTROL
AXOLUTE
radio CONTROL FOR SHUTTERS
82 MY HOME
Radio System
KEY COVERS
HA4599
HB4599
HC/HD/HS4911AH
+ HC/HD/HS4915
LIVINGLIGHT
L4599N
N4599N
KEY COVERS
L/N/NT4911AHN +
L/N/NT4915N o N4915LN
Actuators
Powered by the electric power line and connected to the
load to manage, these devices process the information
received by the control devices and operate as repeaters,
forwarding the radio signal to other actuators belonging
to the ZigBee network The range includes flush mounted
devices, to be completed with key covers, and devices

for installation in shutter boxes, junction boxes, and false
ceilings
ON/OFF actuator without neutral

Flush mounted device for the control of a group of
lamps and generic loads with maximum power 300 W
This device is the ideal solution to replace traditional
system devices like switches and two way switches,
as its operation does not require connection to the
neutral conductor
N
L
ON/OFF actuator without neutral
ON/OFF actuator for false

ceiling installation
Device for the control of one, or one
group of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 2500 W
ON/OFF actuator
Actuator for two groups
of lamps
ON/OFF actuator for one or two

groups of lamps
Actuator for one group of lamps
Flush mounted devices for the control of lamps and

generic loads with maximum power:
2500 W for the management of a group of lamps;
2x1000 W for the management of two groups of
lamps
Radio system
MY HOME 83
GeneRAL FeAtURes
Actuators
ON/OFF actuator for one or two

groups of lamps
Local control
pushbutton
ON/OFF mobile socket
Conceived as a mobile socket, with German standard

plug and socket, for the connection to a power socket
of the system, this actuator is suitable for the control
of lamps and generic loads with maximum absorption
10 A
Power socket
Dimmer actuators for

light automation
Flush mounted devices available in the following
versions:
for the control of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 400 W;
for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with maximum
power 1000 W
N
L
Ballast actuator
Ballast
84 MY HOME
Radio System
Dimmer actuator for false

ceiling installation
Available in the following versions:
for the control of lamps and generic

loads with maximum power 600 W;
for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with

maximum power 1000 W
Dimmer mobile socket
Local control
pushbutton
Mobile dimmer actuator

False ceiling mounted
dimmer actuator
Also this device has German standard plug

and socket, for connection to a power
socket of the system
Suitable for dimmer control of lamps and
generic loads with maximum power 500 W
SHUTTER AUTOMATION
ACTUATORS
Available in two versions, for the control of
motorised shutter and shutter motors with
maximum power 500 VA:
ush mounted
for installation inside shutter boxes
In both cases the shutter position can be
saved, and then recalled using the appropriate
control device
Shutter box actuator
Flush mounted actuator
Radio system
MY HOME 85
GENERAL FEATURES
Actuators
Device selection table
TYPE OF ACTUATOR
AXOLUTE
KEY COVERS
LIVINGLIGHT
KEY COVERS
300 W ON/OFF
H4590
HC/HD/HS4915BA
LN4590
L/N/NT4915AN
2500 W ON/OFF
H4591
HC/HD/HS4915BA
LN4591
L/N/NT4915AN
2 x 1000 W ON/OFF
H4592
2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA
LN4592
L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4915AN
2 x 300 W ON/OFF
H4593
HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD
LN4593
L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN
Dimmer FOR 0-10 v ballast
H4594
HC/HD/HS4915BA +
HC/HD/HS4911AD
LN4594
L/N/NT4915AN +
L/N/NT4911ADN
ON/OFF FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs
H4587
LN4587
LN4595
L/N/NT4911AHN +
L/NT4915N o N4915LN
2500 W ON/OFF
3571
600 W DIMMER
3572
DIMMER FOR 0-10 v ballast
3573
500 w dimmer mobile socket
3574
2500 w on/off mobile socket
3575
FOR SHUTTERS
H4595
FOR SHUTTERS
86 MY HOME
HC/HD/HS4911AH +
HC/HD/HS4915
3576
Radio System
Table of loads (1)

INCANDESCENT
LAMPS
HALOGEN LAMPS
FLUORESCENT
LAMPS
FERROMAGNETIC
TRANSFORMERS
ELECTRONIC
TRANSFORMERS
COMPACT
FLUORESCENT
LAMPS
LED LAMPS
MOTORS
(2)
60 400 W
60 400 W
60 400 W
60 400 W
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
250 VA
2 x 1000 W
2 x 1000 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 100 VA
2 x 1000 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 100 VA
60 300 W
60 300 W
60 300 VA
60 300 W
1000 W (3)
2500 W
2500 W
2500 W
2500 VA
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 VA
2500 W
2500 W
2500 W
2500 VA
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
250 VA
60 600 W
60 600 W
60 450 VA
60 600 W
1000 W (3)
50 500 W
50 500 W
60 500 VA
60 500 VA
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 VA
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
500 VA
500 VA
Note (1): for system with 110 Vac power line supply, the maximum power values
listed are halved.
Note (2): For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than
their rated power must be connected.
For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency of
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
Note (3): 0-10 V ballast for fluorescent lamps
Radio system
MY HOME 87
GENERAL FEATURES
Configuration - general rules

Structure of the MY HOME radio system
The MY HOME radio system is based on a network of
devices that communicate using a radio signal with
frequency of 2.4 GHz and the ZigBee protocol, defined by
international standard IEEE 802-15 4.
As shown in the drawing below, the information sent by
a control device reaches the recipient actuator passing
through other devices on the network.
This particular mode of transmission ensures high reliability

and efficiency; in fact, if the signal path is interrupted by
a faulty device, the other existing devices will create an
alternative path for the signal to reach its destination.
Interruption
Device that sends the

command
Recipient actuator
Control device
Signal path
Router actuator
Path with communication problems
Coordinator Actuator (*)
New alternative path
The MY HOME radio system can be used in any type of room or home none of the system devices interfere with wireless
devices present, like burglar alarm, computer, Wi-Fi data network, etc.
88 MY HOME
Radio System
How is the ZigBee radio network installed

The international IEEE 802 15 4 standard defines the
interconnection protocol between radio communication,
and the type of devices that constitute a ZigBee network
With reference to the drawing in the previous page, in a
ZigBee network it is possible to identify 3 types of devices:
DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
NETwORK DEVICE
Battery powered control devices, remote controls, contact interfaces, and

technical alarm transmitters
Control device
Forwarding of the radio signal for actuators
router device
Actuation of the control intended for same, and forwarding of

Actuator devices, connected to the electric power line
the radio signal to other network devices
Coordinator device
Control and management of communication within the

network and actuation of the control intended for the same
Only one actuator device of the system, selected and defined during the
configuration of the network.
if the ZigBee network is integrated with the BUS Automation system,
the coordinator function must be assigned to the SCS/ZigBee interface
device
Simple and quick system configuration

The system configuration does not require tools or
software To include and associate all the devices
of the ZigBee network, a simple pressure of the
appropriate pushbutton on the front of each device
itself is enough
Note : Zigbee Certified Product - Manufacturer Specific Profile.
Radio system
MY HOME 89
CONFIGURATION

The configuration of radio ZigBee devices is performed in
three stages:
1 - Selection of the coordinator device and

network creation
1. Selection of the coordinator device and network creation
This is the first operation that must be completed after

wiring the devices. After its definition, the coordinator will
store all information relating to all the devices making up
the network, and will manage the transfer of information
among the devices.
2. Adding the devices to the network

3. Association of the devices
To help the reader, below is a legend of the symbols used
in the next pages to indicate the status of the LEDs of the
devices.
ProcedurE:
1. Remove any key covers present.
2. Select the actuator device that will act as a Coordinator,
and press the corresponding network key for 4 seconds.
LED status
OFF
ON STEADY
FLASHING SLOWNLY (1 s)
4s
FLASHING QUICKLY (0.25 s)
FLASHING (60 ms)
FLASHING 3 TIMES (3 s)
Coordinator
LEDS AND KEYS REQUIRED FOR THE CONFIGURATION
3. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and

after a few instants will start flashing quickly.
NETWORK key
NETWORK
indicator LED
LEARNING key
LEARNING
indicator LED
Coordinator
ON/OFF control
key
90 MY HOME
Radio system
4. Create the network by setting the devices that will be

included, as indicated in the following page.
2 - Adding the devices to the network

3. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK
KEY of the Coordinator device; the corresponding
NETWORK LED will FLASH THREE TIMES, while the
NETWORK LEDs of all other devices will switch off.
1. Press the NETWORK KEY of the first device to include.

The NETWORK LED (yellow) turns on steady during
the network search stage. Once the stage has been
completed, it will start flashing slowly.
Coordinator
3s
Device
2. Repeat the above procedure for all devices to include

in the network.
Device
CHECKING THE DEVICES BELONGING TO THE NETWORK

To check the devices belonging to a common network
press the NETWORK KEY of any actuator device, or the
NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device: the NETWORK
LED (yellow) of the Coordinator device will flash slowly,
while the NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of the other Actuator
devices will flash quickly.
The radio control must be checked individually.

Press the NETWORK KEY of the first Control: the NETWORK
LED (yellow) of the Control will flash slowly, while the
NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of all the actuators in the system
will flash quickly. Repeat the operation also for the other
radio controls.
Device
Coordinator
Device
PL
Device
Radio system
MY HOME 91
CONFIGURATION

3 - Association of the devices
After installing the Zigbee system, the actuator devices must be associated to the corresponding control devices.
HOW TO ASSOCIATE A CONTROL DEVICE TO AN

ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices.
2. Press the learning Key of the rAdio conTrol, the
leArning led (green) will flash slowly.
5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATOR. The load

connected turns on, the LEARNING LED (green) change
flashing mode, from slow to quick.
PL
Control
Actuator
3. Wait at least 1 second, press then the ON KEY; the

LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Note: repeat the procedure described at points 2 and 3 for each command to be
associated to the actuator.
6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the RADIO CONTROL.

The LEARNING LEDs (green) of all associated devices will
go off
PL
Control
Control
4. Press the ACTUATOR to associate to the LEARNING KEY.

The LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
Actuator
Actuator
92 MY HOME
Radio system
PL
7. The devices are now associated: to check that the

configuration procedure has been performed correctly
press the OFF KEY on the radio control; the load
connected to the actuator should go off Otherwise
repeat the association procedure described
PL
Control
Actuator
HoW To ASSocIATe AN AcTuATor To ANoTHer

AcTuATor
The procedure described for associating the control device
to the actuator can also be used to associate an actuator to
another actuator This gives the possibility of controlling
loads connected to several actuators from one actuator
only, like in the example shown below
1. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 1, to activate the load
connected to this actuator
Actuator No.1
2. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 2 to activate the load

connected to this actuator, and also to send via radio a
switch on command to actuator no 1
Actuator No.2
Radio system
MY HOME 93
CONFIGURATION

HOW TO ASSOCIATE A RADIO CONTROL TO A NEW
ACTUATOR
2. Press the ON KEY of the Radio control, the
associated loads come on.
3. Press the leArning Key of the radio conTrol, the
learning led (green) will flash slowly.
PL
Control
Actuator
4. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the

LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
Also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of the associated
actuators will flash quickly.
6. Press the ON KEY on the new ACTUATOR. The LEARNING

LED (green) will flash quickly and the load switches on.
PL
Control
Actuator
Actuator
94 MY HOME
5. Press the LEARNING KEY of the new actuator to

associate, il LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
Radio system
7. Press the LEARNING KEY ont the rAdIo coNTroL

The LEARNING LEDs of all devices will go off
PL
Control
Actuator
8. Press the ON KEY on the radio control, the associated

devices will go off
PL
Actuator
Control
Actuator
Each individual actuator manages the corresponding load connected, while the radio control is capable of managing both
actuators at the same time
Radio system
MY HOME 95
CONFIGURATION
How to modify the configuration

It is possible to change at any time the system configuration, by removing the current association between the Radio
control and one or more actuators, to create new associations.
HOW TO REMOVE THE ASSOCIATION BETWEEN A

RADIO CONTROL AND AN ACTUATOR
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the
LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
5. Press the LEARNING KEY on the Radio control, all

LEARNING LEDs (green) will go off.
PL
PL
Control
Control
3. Now press the ON KEY, the LEARNING LED (green) will

start flashing quickly.
At the same time, also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of
all the actuators associated to the radio control will start
flashing quickly.
6. Check that the Radio control is disconnected from

the ACTUATOR. When the ON key of the radio control
is pressed, the load connected to the disconnected
actuator must not activate. Otherwise repeat the
described procedure.
HOW TO REMOVE A DEVICE FROM THE NETWORK

1. Press the NETWORK KEY on the device to be removed.
The corresponding NETWORK LED (yellow) will start
flashing quickly.
PL
Control
4. Identify the actuator to disconnect and press the

corresponding LEARNING KEY. The LEARNING LED
(green) will go off.
Device
2. Press the NETWORK KEY again. The NETWORK LED

(yellow) will switch off for 10 seconds, and then will start
flashing slowly.
3. Remove the device from the system.
Actuator
96 MY HOME
Radio system
Configuration of the functions: the main control

2. Select the radio control that will manage all the
actuators. Press the LEARNING KEY; the LEARNING LED
(green) will flash slowly.
A
5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATORS, the load activates,

the LEARNING LED (green) will go from flashing slowly to
flashing quickly.
PL
PL
Control
Actuator
3. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the

LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the
learning LEDs (green) of all devices will go off.
A
PL
PL
Control
4. Press on all the ACTUATORS the LEARNING KEY. All the

LEARNING LEDs (green) will flash slowly.
Control
Actuator
Actuator
Radio system
MY HOME 97
CONFIGURATION
Configuration of the functions: the scenario

The scenario consists of the simultaneous activation of several loads, with the objective of creating a specific comfort
situation. As an example, below is a description of the procedure for creating a scenario for switching ON a light point in
dimmer mode, and open a shutter.
ProcedurE:
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the scenariO CONTROL,
the LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
5. Press the ON KEY on the Dimmer actuator.

To set the brightness at the desired level, use the + and
keys. The LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Scenario control
3. Press KEY 1; the LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing

quickly.
Dimmer actuator
6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SHUTTER ACTUATOR,

Scenario control
4. Press the LEARNING KEY on the DIMMER ACTUATOR,

Shutter actuator
7. Press the UP KEY of the Shutter actuator, the

LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Dimmer actuator
Shutter actuator
98 MY HOME
Radio system
8. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SCENARIO CONTROL.

The LEARNING LED (green) of the Dimmer actuator,
of the SHUTTER ACTUATOR and of the SCENARIO
CONTROL will go off.
Dimmer actuator
Scenario control
Shutter actuator
9. Check the created scenario using key No. 1 of the

SCENARIO CONTROL. At the same time as the light
switches on in dimmer mode, also the shutter will open.
Otherwise repeat the described procedure.
Radio system
MY HOME 99
GeneRAL RULes FoR InstALLAtIon
Distances and maximum number of devices

The installation of a Zigbee radio system does not have any special requirements; it is enough to comply with the current
regulations for the installation of a domestic electric system, and with the instructions of this page
MAXIMuM NuMBer oF deVIceS

TV/SAT
IPTV
The maximum number of devices
that can be
configured as part of a network is 65000
TV/SAT
IPTV
MAXIMuM dISTANceS
The maximum distance between 2 device is:
150 metres on free eld
automazione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
15 metres for closed areas (the presence of masonry or
luci
automazione
tvcc
www
irrigazione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
metal walls greatly reduces the signal strength)

N
Wall
150 metres
15 metres
Radio control
Actuator
Radio control
dISTANceS eXceedING THe PerMITTed LIMIT
Actuator
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
If the distance among the devices exceeds the permitted limits, the network will use the Router function of the actuators,
which will then receive the command and send it to other similar devices, until it reaches the destination
The maximum number of actuators that can be used wit the Router function is 30
automazione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
automazione
controllo
antifurto
controllo
carichi
lan
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
luci
controllo
tvcc
lan
www
controllo
carichi
irrigazione
energia
luci
tvcc
Example: in the room shown, the signal sent by the light control device (A) is unable to reach the corresponding actuator (B)
if this is installed at a distance of 30 m or more
N
L
Wall
Wall
Light control
Shutter actuator
Signal
TV/SAT
IPTV
Light actuator
TV/SAT
IPTV
30 metres
The shutter actuator (C), installed in an intermediate position, operates as a Router, receiving the signal from the control
device (A), and sending it to the light actuator (B)
automazione
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
automazione
controllo
lan
antifurto
controllo
carichi
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
luci
N
L
Wall
Signal
Light control
Radio system
Signal
Light actuator
Shutter actuator
15 metres
100 MY HOME
Wall
15 metres
controllo
tvcc
lan
www
controllo
carichi
irrigazione
energia
luci
tvcc
CONTENTS
APPLICATION EXAMPLES AND WIRING DIAGRAMS

1. Adding a light point for lighting control . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Managing the lighting from 3 positions . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Addition of a third light point and dimmer management
of the lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Automatic switching on of the light in the night zone . .
5. Central shutter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Simplified shutter and lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Light control with scenario management . . . . . . . . . .
8. Methane gas leak with automatic isolation of the pipes
and optical-acoustic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 102
. . . . . . . . 104
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
106
108
110
112
114
. . . . . . . . 116
Radio system
MY HOME 101
WIRInG DIAGRAMs
Application examples and wiring diagrams

1. ADDING A LIGHT POINT FOR LIGHTING CONTROL
Without performing expensive masonry work, or any wiring operations, the user wants to add a new light point for the
management of the lighting inside the room
Switch
The standard switch is replaced by a radio actuator; this

operation is carried out without any modifications of the
wiring, because the device operation does not require the
use of the neutral conductor (see wiring diagram)
The new light point consists of a control installed on the

wall surface
It is possible to add to this device one or more controls,
providing a more flexible control of the lighting from other
areas of the room
Actuator
Radio control
102 MY HOME
Radio system
WIRING DIAGRAM
Actuator
Radio control
MATERIAL
description
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Actuator
H4590
LN4590
Radio control
HA/HB4596
L/N4596N
Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).
Radio system
MY HOME 103
WIRING DIAGRAMS

2. MANAGING THE LIGHTING FROM 3 POSITIONS
The lighting system of the bedroom shown consists of a ceiling light fitting controlled by a switch at the entrance of the
room, and two table lamps connected to two power sockets.
The idea is to modify the system to make it possible to manage all lights from the bed.
Switch
Socket
Socket
Without any changes to the current system, the traditional

switch at the entrance of the room is replaced with a radio
actuator. Two mobile sockets for the management of the
two table lamps are connected to the power sockets.
Radio control
Mobile socket
104 MY HOME
Radio system
The management of the lamps is ensured by fitting on

the side of the bed two radio controls configured for the
management of the radio actuator and the two mobile
sockets.
Radio control
Mobile socket
Actuator
WIRING DIAGRAM
230 Vac
socket
230 Vac
socket
Mobile socket
Mobile socket
Actuator
Radio control
Radio control
MATERIAL
description
item
AXOLUTE
quantitY
LIVINGLIGHT
Actuator
H4590
LN4590
Radio control
HA/HB4597
L/N4597N
Mobile socket
3575
3575
Radio system
MY HOME 105
WIRING DIAGRAMS

3. ADDITION OF A THIRD LIGHT POINT AND DIMMER MANAGEMENT OF THE
LIGHTING
In the room shown, the lamp is controlled by two two-way switches. The user wants to manage the lamp from a third control
point and wants to be able to adjust the light intensity using the dimmer function.
Two-way switch at the

entrance of the room
To achieve what described, a simple modification of the

electric system is required. The two-way switch connected
to the lamp is replaced by a dimmer radio actuator. Two
radio controls are then installed; the first one to replace
the two-way switch at the entrance of the room, and the
Two-way switch
second in the most comfortable position for use. Using the

pushbuttons of the three new devices, it will be possible to
switch the lamp on and adjust its intensity.
Dimmer actuator
106 MY HOME
Radio system
WIRING DIAGRAM
Dimmer actuator
MATERIAL
description
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Dimmer actuator
H4593
LN4593
HA/HB4598
L/N4598N
Flush mounted box

adapter (*)
H4588
LN4588
(*) Accessory required for the installation of the radio control in the flush mounted
box, instead of the two-way switch.
Radio system
MY HOME 107
WIRING DIAGRAMS

4. AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON OF THE LIGHT IN THE NIGHT ZONE
The automatic switching on of the lighting during the
night, when the user crosses the area, is without any doubt
a useful function.
This function can be realised easily in both new systems
and in systems being refurbished, thanks to infrared radio
controls, and without any wiring operations.
The drawing shows the night zone of a home with a
lighting system consisting of control devices and radio
actuators (see wiring diagram).
The automatic switching on of the lighting is performed

by two infrared controls, located respectively in the room,
near the floor beside the bed, and in the hallway.
During the night and when there is no light, the infrared
controls will automatically switch on the lights of the two
rooms when the user gets up to reach the bathroom.
The lights are then switched off manually using the
corresponding actuators and radio controls.
BEDROOM
Radio control
Actuator
IR radio control
HALLWAY
Actuator
IR radio control
108 MY HOME
Radio system
WIRING DIAGRAM
IR radio control
IR radio control
Actuator
Actuator
Hallway lamp
Hallway lamp radio control
Actuator
Bedroom lamp
Bathroom lamp
Bedroom lamp radio control
MATERIAL
description
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
300W actuator
H4590
LN4590
Single radio control
HA/HB4596
L/N4596N
IR radio control
3579
3579
Radio system
MY HOME 109
WIRING DIAGRAMS

5. CENTRAL SHUTTER CONTROL
The room shown has three motorized shutters, individually controlled by the corresponding traditional control devices.
The user wants to add a general control at the entrance, to manage all shutters at the same time, without carrying out any
masonry work, or wiring modifications.
Changeover switch
Changeover switch
Changeover switch
To achieve what described, the traditional devices are easily replaced by radio actuators, without changing the existing
wiring system. The new general control consists of a surface mounted radio control located at the entrance of the room.
Shutter actuator
Shutter actuator
Shutter actuator
110 MY HOME
Radio system
WIRING DIAGRAM
Motorised shutter
Motorised shutter
Actuator
Actuator
Motorised shutter
Actuator
MATERIAL
description
General radio control
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Shutter actuator
H4595
LN4595
HA/HB4599
L/N4599N
Radio system
MY HOME 111
WIRING DIAGRAMS

6. SIMPLIFIED SHUTTER AND LIGHTING SYSTEM
By using false ceiling mounted actuators and reduced
size actuators instead of similar flush mounted devices, it
is possible to obtain a lighting and shutter management
system with extreme ease, without the need for wiring, or
flush mounted device holding boxes.
Thanks to their reduced sizes, these actuators can be
installed near the loads to be controlled, or inside the
shutter boxes, and are connected to the power network,

required for operation of the load.
The drawing shows an example of the electric system for
the management of lights and shutters, using both the
devices described and radio controls.
Light
actuator
Shutter
actuator
Shutter
actuator
Shutter
radio control
Shutter
radio control
Light radio control
MATERIAL
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
QUANTITY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Shutter actuator
3576
3576
Light radio actuator
3572
3572
HA/HB4599
L/N4599N
Light radio control
HA/HB4596
L/N4596N
112 MY HOME
Shutter
actuator
Radio system
Shutter
radio control
WIRING DIAGRAM
Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator
Light actuator
Light radio control
Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator
Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator
Radio system
MY HOME 113
WIRING DIAGRAMS

7. LIGHT CONTROL WITH SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
The living room shown contains three lamps managed by
dimmer actuators. Without any wiring intervention, it is
possible to integrate the scenario control with the system.
This will be useful for setting, by pressing the control key,
the ambiance scenario of the room, based on particular
situations and on the life style of the user, like:
TV WATCHING SCENARIO
Scenario radio
control
TV watching scenario: when selected, the main ceiling

light and the table lamps are switched off , and the stem
lamp is switched on at 30% of its power;
Reading scenario: when selected, the main ceiling light
and the stem lamp are switched off , and the table lamps
are switched on.
The scenario control is capable of saving up to 4 scenarios
maximum.
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer actuator
Remote control for the

management of scenarios
Dimmer actuator
READING SCENARIO
Scenario radio
control
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer actuator
Remote control for the

management of scenarios
In the system described it is also possible to add a remote control, for easier management of the scenarios.
114 MY HOME
Radio system
Dimmer actuator
WIRING DIAGRAM
Ceiling light
Ceiling light
Dimmer actuator
Ceiling light
L
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer actuator
MATERIAL
description
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Dimmer actuator
H4593
LN4593
HA/HB4589
LN4589N
3528N
3528N
Radio system
MY HOME 115
WIRInG DIAGRAMs

8. METHANE GAS LEAK WITH AUTOMATIC ISOLATION OF THE PIPES AND
OPTICAL-ACOUSTIC ALARM
As it is well known, the protection of the home from gas
leaks can be easily obtained by integrating a methane gas
detector with the electric system
The highest protection level can be obtained by combining
the gas detector with a radio interface, and an actuator
connected to a solenoid valve
In case of danger, the gas detector will emit an audible

signal; at the same time, the interface will transmit a signal
to the actuator that will order the solenoid valve to seal the
gas conduit
The operating principle also applies for protection against
flooding, by replacing the gas detector with a water sensor,
and using the actuator to control the water conduit
Transmitting interface
and gas detector
Siren or
flashing device
Radio actuator
Solenoid valve
Radio actuator
116 MY HOME
Radio system
WIRING DIAGRAM
Technical alarm transmitter
Actuator
Aux2 Aux1
Siren and/or flashing

device
Actuator
Solenoid valve
12 Vac/dc
MATERIAL
description
item
quantitY
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
Methane gas detector (*)
HD4511V12
HC/HS4511/12
L/N/NT4511/12
L/N/NT4512/12
Technical alarm transmitter
H4586
LN4586
Actuator
H4587
LN4587
Note*: ensure that the detector is powered by a power supply with 12 Vac/dc
output voltage.
Radio system
MY HOME 117
118 MY HOME
Automation
CONTENTS
MY HOME Automation
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Automation
MY HOME 119
GEnErAl fEAturEs
introduction to the Automation system

the MY HOME Automation system
a programmable logic and are
if it is not possible to achieve a Bus
allows you to manage functions in
connected in parallel with a
system or if you want to expand a
a simultaneous and integrated way
2-conductor Bus cable for sending
pre-existing system without any
to date, these functions have been
information and with low voltage
masonry work, the Automation
performed with special and complex
(27V d c ) electric power there are
system can be expanded with special
electrical devices such as:
two types of devices in the system:
wire/radio interfaces and radio
lighting control
controls, connected only to the
control devices characterised by high

installation flexibility
Bus cable;
control for shutters and/or electric
actuators, connected both to
curtains, fans, exhausters, etc

Compared to the devices
the Bus cable and to the 230V
of a conventional electrical
a c power line for managing the
system, Automation devices
connected load
have an electronic circuit with
Wire system
Basic contact
interface
General
control
Touch control
(SOFT TOUCH)
Local Display
Traditional
device
Power supply
230 Vac
TV/SAT
DIN module
actuator
TV/SAT automazione
diffusione sonora
IPTV
DIN module
dimmer actuator
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
Shutters
controllo carichi
energia
lan
IPTV
controllo carichi
energia
automazione
luci
diffusione
tvcc
sonora
antifurto
www
termoregolazione
irrigazione
IPTV
luci
Light
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Shutters
The MY HOME Automation system devices are IMQ certified, as they comply with the CEI EN 50428 standard non-automatic control devices for fixed electrical home
installations and similar uses.
120 MY HOME
Automation
TV/SAT
Shutter actuator
IPTV
control
TV/SAT
videocitofonia
controllo
When the Automation system
it is also possible to carry out special
control device or by using the touch
devices are configured properly, it
functions - which can hardly be
screen menu if the Automation
is possible to manage the load as
achieved with conventional electrical
system is integrated with the 2 wire
follows:
systems
sound system and temperature
Control for a single load (lamp,
these functions are called scenarios,
control system, the scenario can also
which consist of a set of simultaneous
set up a room with background music
controls used for arranging the room
and with the required temperature
shutters, etc );
Control for one or more load

groups (for example, only the
according to the users lifestyle
shutters on the first floor, north
An example of a scenario can be
side, etc );
represented by the simultaneous

activation of lights, shutters, etc ,
simultaneous management of
all loads (for example, general
which can be set by the user after
deactivation of all lamps in the
getting home by using one single
house and/or closing of all rolling

shutters)
radio/wire interfaces
Local control
radio system
Radio
control
SCS/ZigBee GATEWAY
radio interface
Touch Screen
Basic
actuator
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
automazione
IPTV
TV/SAT
controllo carichi
energia
IPTV
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
IPTV
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
IPTV
luci
Light
tvcc
Shutter
actuator
control
www
irrigazione
Shutters
Automation
MY HOME 121
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
Control devices allow you to control
is separated from the mechanical
two types of keys and key covers can
the state of the actuators, thus
operating part so that one can
be used:
executing different functions: On,
choose the type, number and size of
1 function key cover, one or two
Off, timing, etc , which depend
the control pushbuttons
modules, to be used with the grey
on the functioning mode that has
the device can be modular, thus
control key;
been assigned to them through an
meeting the different installation
appropriate configuration
requirements and different functions
modules, to be used with the black
the electronic part of these devices
required by the user
control key;
2 function key cover, one or two
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Control key
Key cover
1 function
1 module
Key cover
2 functions
1 module
Control key
Key cover
1 function
2 modules
Control key
Key cover
2 functions
2 modules
The control with the single key cover can become integrated
The double key cover (tilting) can become integrated with a traditional exchanging contact.
with a traditional closing contact (pushbutton or switch).
NOTE: control keys are supplied with the device as standard.
122 MY HOME
Automation
lowered controls
speciAl control
these devices are consist of two
in addition to the standard functions
lowered flush mounted modules
it also enables performing all
this reduces depth, leaving more
the special functions, normally
room inside the box for the housing
performed by three different controls:
of cables, or for basic modularity
the special function control, the
devices
extended control, and the timer

control
lowered 2 Module control
the special control features 4
the single and double load control
pushbuttons and 2 green/red
control stAtus indicAtors
performs the same functions of the
bicolour lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt
All the controls feature lEDs, which
previously released item the only
and MtiX version) or 4 blue/red
indicate their status (enabled or
differences are:
bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version)
disabled), and make them easier to

find in the dark the intensity of the
it has been lowered to reduce the
selected load status signalling lED
size inside the box;
it features two green/red bicolour
may be adjusted or turned off using
lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt and
the pushbutton on the control itself
MtiX version), or 4 blue/red

bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version)
Lowered 2 module
control
Special control
Upper pushbutton
more space available
LED
Lower pushbutton
Automation
MY HOME 123
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices:
controls/key covers - quick matching guide
aXolUTe
Key-coVers
WiThoUT silK-screen prinTing
1 ModUle
1 Function
liVinglighT
2 ModUles
2 Functions
1 Function
2 Functions
1 ModUle
1 Function
2 ModUles
2 Functions
1 Function
2 Functions
Controls for 3
independent loads
Controls for 2
independent loads
Special control
conTrols
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
HD4915
HC4915
HS4915
HD4911 HC4911
HS4911
HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N
L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N
L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
H4652/2
L4652/2
AM5832/2
HD4915
HC4915 HS4915
HD4911 HC4911
HS4911
HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N
L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N
L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
H4652/3
L4652/3
AM5832/3
HD4915
HC4915 HS4915
HD4911 HC4911
HS4911
HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N
L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N
L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH
aXolUTe
Key-coVers
WiTh silK-screen prinTing*
1 ModUle
1 Function
2 Functions
liVinglighT
2 ModUles
1 Function
2 Functions
1 ModUle
1 Function
2 Functions
2 ModUles
1 Function
2 Functions
Controls for 3
independent loads
Controls for 2
independent loads
Special control
Controls
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...
HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...
HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...
L4915... N4915...
NT4915...
L4911... N4915...
NT4915...
L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
H4652/2
L4652/2
AM5832/2
HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...
HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...
HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...
L4915... N4915...
NT4915...
L4911... N4915...
NT4915...
L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...
HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...
HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...
L4915... N4915...
NT4915...
L4911... N4915...
NT4915...
L4915M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
L4911M2...
N4915M2...
NT4915M2...
H4652/3
AM5832/3
L4652/3

* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table). For the complete range of LIVINGLIGHT key covers see the Catalogue section.
124 MY HOME
Automation
selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK- screen prinTing
MTiX
1 ModUle
1 Function
AM5911
2 Functions
AM5911
AM5911
AM5911
AM5911
2 ModUles
AM5911
1 Function
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
aXolUTe
MaTiX
2 Functions
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
MTiX
1 Function
AM5915...
AM5915...
AM5915...
2 Functions
AM5911...
AM5911...
AM5911...
2 ModUles
1 Function
AM5915/2...
AM5915/2...
AM5915/2...
AM5911/2...
AM5911/2...
silK-screen prinTing
descripTion
DD
DO NOT DISTURB
BN
STAIRCASE LIGHT
MR
MAKE THE ROOM
AA
OFF
AB
ON
AC
GEN
AD
ADN
DIMMER
BA
AN
LIGHT
BB
DN
BELL
BC
EXHAUST FAN
FN
KEY
BE
TREBLE CLEF
BF
NURSE
BG 1)
ROOM
BH
ALARMS
2 FUNCTIONS
2 Functions
AM5911/2...
silK-screen
prinTing
1 FUNCTION
BD
1 ModUle
liVinglighT
AF
AFN
ON/OFF/GEN
AG
AGN
ON/OFF
AH
AHN
UP/DOWN
AI
AIN
ON/OFF DIMMER
BA 1)
LIGHT
BC 1)
EXHAUST FAN
BE 1)
TREBLE CLEF
BF 2)
BFN
ADN
SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION
+
-
+ UP
- DOWN
1) Key cover not available for the MTIX series

2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series
Automation
MY HOME 125
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
2 module Soft Touch control
two or three Module

Axolute soft touch
controls
this device is capable of sending
actuation and adjustment commands
for the automation, sound system
and video door entry system
functions, with the simple touch of
the control
Axolute nighter, whice And

white glAss controls
Each zone corresponding to a key is
the nighter and Whice control
marked at the centre by a light blue
this effect gives the user the feeling
is a control where the traditional
lED
of activating the control using the
pushbuttons are replaced by
When the user moves a finger close,
appropriate configurator it is possible
capacitive sensors
its intensity increases sensibly, and
to select different intensity levels
Moving the finger close to a sensor is
remains so until the finger is moved
the same as pressing a pushbutton
away again
the device can therefore be used to

control single or group loads (e g
lights and shutters), sound system,
scenarios, and basic video door entry
Nighter 3 module control
system functions
its produced in the versions with 3
and 4 flush mounted modules, with 6
and 8 keys respectively
Whice 4 module control
126 MY HOME
Automation
infrAred controls
ir receiver and new ir remote
intended for 1 relay actuators for
control:
single loads, 2 relays actuators for
With the receiver, the manual control
double loads (shutter motor etc ), for
can be complemented or replaced by
the management of scenarios, as well
a remote control, using the infrared
as manage both sound systems and
remote control unit, 3529
video door entry systems
IR receiver
to the remote control pushbuttons,

it is possible to associate controls
IR remote control
MoVeMent And lighting

sensors
thanks to the new Green
Comfort and wellbeing
switch sensors and the lighting
the new sensors also allow
Management system sensors, it is
increasing the level of comfort
possible to manage, in a My Home
of the users, with the automatic
system, the lighting depending on
switching on of the light when
the presence of people, and the level
entering the room, and the
of natural light, ensuring:
preservation of the desired
Energy eciency
lighting level based on external
With the new sensors it is possible
conditions
to eliminate energy waste through

an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place the various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the
user to obtain dierent levels of
energy eciency
Automation
MY HOME 127
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
scenArio MAnAgeMent
systeMs
a certain level, and positioning some
scenario that can be set using
these devices can be used to create
shutters for watching the television,
the various integrated MY HOME
particular and advanced comfort
or reading a book, following the life
systems is the activation of a certain
situations called scenarios, for
style of the user
background music, the setting of the
example, by activating some lights to
Another example of an advanced
temperature and the light level of the

house, when entertaining friends
automazione
Lighting/movement sensor
diffusione sonora
antifurto
Scenario programmers MH200N
Touch Screen
TV/SAT
Nighter & Whice control

automazione
128 MY HOME
Automation
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
the described scenarios are managed
2 Din modules f420 scenario
MH200n scenario programmer for
from particular devices capable of
module for saving 16 scenarios
the creation and management of
saving in the memory all the Controls
for automation, sound system,
advanced scenarios, also linked
that define the scenario, and which
temperature control, and video
to time events, system status, and
the user can recall simultaneously by
door entry applications
more
pressing one single pushbutton

the devices capable of saving and
programming these functions are the
following:
automazione
TV/SAT
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
IPTV
lan
controllo carichi
Special control
energia
luci
tvcc
Video Station (*)
Scenario module F420
Soft Touch control
Local display
IPTV
controllo carichi
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Scenario control
NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer.
Automation
MY HOME 129
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
control selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
Type of conTrol
on/off lighTing and loads

aXolUTe
liVinglighT
lighTing WiTh adJUsTMenT (diMMer)

MTiX
aXolUTe
liVinglighT
MTiX
2/3 module single and double load

control (*)
H4652/2
H4652/3
L4652/2 L4652/3
AM5832/2 AM5832/3
H4652/2
H4652/3
L4652/2 L4652/3
AM5832/2 AM5832/3
2 module special control (*)
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
HD4563
HC4563
HS4563
L4563
N4563
NT4563
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N
AM5834
Knob control
Infrared receiver + IR remote control
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N
AM5834
Scenario control
2/3 module Soft Touch control
HD4653M2 HD4653M3
HC4653/2 HC4653/3
HS4653/2 HS4653/3
HD4653M2 HD4653M3
HC4653/2 HC4653/3
HS4653/2 HS4653/3
3/4 module Nighter and Whice controls
HD4657M3 HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
HD4657M3 HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
Touch Screen - Local display
H4890
HW4890
LN4890
LN4890A
AM5890
H4890
HW4890
LN4890
LN4890A
AM5890
Green Switch control and PIR sensor
HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658
H4648
H4649
L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N
LN4648
LN4649
AM5659
AM5658
HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658
L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N
AM5659
AM5658
Key card switches
* To be completed with key cover
130 MY HOME
Automation
MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS)

AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
SCENARIO MANAGEMENT USING F420 AND MH200N
MTIX
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
MTIX
H4652/2
H4652/3
L4652/2
L4652/3
AM5832/2
AM5832/3
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N
AM5834
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
L4654N
N4654N
NT4654N
AM5834
HD4680
HC4680
HS4680
L4680
N4680
NT4680
HD4653M2
HD4653M3
HC4653/2
HC4653/3
HS4653/2
HS4653/3
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
H4890
HW4890
HC4891
HD4891
HS4891
LN4890
LN4890A
L4891
N4891
NT4891
AM5890
HC4659
HC4658
HD4659
HD4658
HS4659
HS4658
H4648
H4649
L4659N
L4658N
N4659N
N4658N
NT4659N
NT4658N
LN4648
LN4649
AM5659
AM5658
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
H4890
HW4890
LN4890
LN4890A
AM5890
Automation
MY HOME 131
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
these devices execute direct controls
flush-Mounting ActuAtor
and control the connected load in the
with 2 Modules
same way as an electromechanical
they are available with 1 and 2
relay
interlocked relays: control for 1 single
for this reason, they must be
load (lamp or motor) or 1 double load
connected to the Bus cable using the
(motor for shutters)
removable terminals as well as to the
these actuators can be
230V a c supply line of the load
advantageously used as a control
there are different types of actuators:
point, as they are provided with
they can differ by shape, size,
control pushbuttons at the front side
installation features and by their
operated by key covers
Shutters up-down
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
controlled power
the range includes:
Example of installation of a flush mounted

actuator (with 2 interlocked relays) for the
control of the shutters.
flush mounted two module

actuators;
Basic modularity actuators with

reduced profile;
Din module actuators
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Control key
Key cover
1 function
2 modules
NOTE: the control keys are supplied with the device as standard.
132 MY HOME
Automation
Control key
Key cover
2 functions
2 modules
antifur
BAsic Module ActuAtor

Basic actuators are characterized
by extremely compact dimensions:
width = 40 5 mm, height = 40 5 mm,
Example of installation in flush mounted box

Side-by-side
Basic items
Box
depth = 18 mm these dimensions

allow the actuators to be installed
in junction boxes or inside the load
to be controlled (for example in the
bowl of a chandelier, in the structure
of a lampstand, etc )
it is also possible to place the
control for two light points with
their Basic actuators in a 503E
box; the installation can otherwise
be achieved with a 504E box or
by finding new spaces for the
BUS
BUS
Input for
traditional
devices
Support
Control
positioning of the actuators
new flush Mounted

ActuAtor/control
Flush mounted
actuator/control
this device is fitted with 2

independent relays for the
management of:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads,
independent;
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor)
the actuator may also be configured
for the management of the
connected load, whilst at the same
time operating as a control device
for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating
modes typical of control device item
H/l4652/2
Light
management
actuator key
cover
Remote actuator control

key cover
Automation
MY HOME 133
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices:
controls/key covers quick matching guide
aXolUTe
Key-coVers WiThoUT
2 ModUles
1 Function
liVinglighT
1 ModUle
2 Functions
1 Function
2 Functions
2 ModUles
1 Function
1 ModUle
2 Functions
1 Function
2 Functions
Dimmer actuator
Actuator/control with
2 interlocked relays
Actuator with 1 relay
acTUaTors
H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1
HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
H4671M2
L4671M2
AM5851M2
L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
H4678
L4678
HD4915M2
HC4915/2
HS4915/2
HD4915
HC4915
HS4915
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
HD4911 HC4911
HS4911
HD4911M2
HC4911/2
HS4911/2
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
L4915M2N
N4915M2N
NT4915M2LN
L4915N
N4915LN
NT4915N
L4911N
N4911N
NT4911N
L4911M2N
N4911M2N
NT4911M2N
aXolUTe
Key-coVers WiTh
silK-screen prinTing*
2 ModUles
1 Function
2 Functions
liVinglighT
1 ModUle
1 Function
2 Functions
2 ModUles
1 Function
2 Functions
1 ModUle
1 Function
2 Functions
Dimmer actuator
Actuator/control with
2 interlocked relays
Actuator with 1 relay
acTUaTors
H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1
HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...
H4671/1
L4671/1
AM5851/1
H4678
L4678
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...
HD4915M2...
HC4915/2...
HS4915/2...
L4915M2
L4915M2
NT4915M2
HD4915...
HC4915...
HS4915...
HD4911M2...
HC4911/2...
HS4911/2...

* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table).
134 MY HOME
Automation
HD4911...
HC4911...
HS4911...
L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2
L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2
L4915M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2
L4911M2
N4915M2
NT4915M2
L4915... N4915...
NT4915...
L4911... N4915...
NT4915...
selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK-screen prinTing
MTiX
2 ModUles
1 Function
AM5911/2
aXolUTe
MaTiX
1 ModUle
2 Functions
1 Function
AM5911
AM5911
silK-screen
prinTing
DD
DO NOT DISTURB
BN
STAIRCASE LIGHT
MR
MAKE THE ROOM
AA
OFF
AB
ON
AC
GEN
AD
ADN
DIMMER
BA
AN
LIGHT
BB
DN
BELL
BC
BD
MTiX
2 ModUles
1 Function
AM5915/2...
2 Functions
1 ModUle
1 Function
AM5915...
EXHAUST FAN
FN
KEY
BE
TREBLE CLEF
BF
NURSE
BG 1)
ROOM
BH
ALARMS
2 FUNCTIONS
2 Functions
AM5911/2...
AM5911/2...
descripTion
1 FUNCTION
2 Functions
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
liVinglighT
AM5911...
AF
AFN
ON/OFF/GEN
AG
AGN
ON/OFF
AH
AHN
UP DOWN
AI
AIN
ON/OFF DIMMER
BA 1)
LIGHT
BC 1)
EXHAUST FAN
BE 1)
TREBLE CLEF
BF 2)
BFN
ADN
SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION
+
-
+ UP
- DOWN
1) Key cover not available for the MTIX series

2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series
Automation
MY HOME 135
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
din Moduel ActuAtors
these devices are suitable for
cover so as to reduce the overall
centralised installations in boards
dimensions, thus allowing them to
and switchboards (2 Din modules)
be installed in raceways, junction
Available in versions with 1, 2 and 4
boxes, false ceilings, boxes for rolling
relays for controlling single loads or
shutters, etc
double loads (motor for shutters);
With centralised installations, for
these devices are also provided with
example, Din switchboards E215/ ,
load control keys for carrying out an
MultiBOX or with the innovative
operational test
installation solution MY HOME
these actuators are characterised by
flAtWAll*, the Din adapter and the
having the advantage of removing
front cover enable you to align the
the rear Din adapter and the front
profile of the adapter to that of the
Switchboard installation example
other Din modular devices

DIN actuator
for installation in switchboards
Load
connection
terminals
Load control
pushbutton
Example of installation
inside a junction box
Configurator
housing
Removable adapter
for installation on DIN rail
in switchboards
Removable
front cover
136 MY HOME
Automation
ActuAtors And diMMers
4 relay actuator in
DIN module BMSW1003
with power line supply

new actuators and dimmers, part
of the lighting Management offer
range, which, thanks to the power
supply from the power line, provide
Multi load dimmer actuator in

DIN module with one output F416U1
control of the load connected even

when no power is received from the
Bus in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself; they also absorb an extremely
limited amount of current from
the power supply of the Bus, and
new ActuAtors
therefore only have a marginal
some devices of the Energy
the exception of the management
impact on the maximum number of
Management offer may also be used
of the shutters the connection with
devices that may be installed on the
in the automation system
the power line enables zero crossing,
Bus itself
DIN actuators:
which makes the devices compatible
the catalogue offers actuators in
two actuator devices capable
with the new energy saving lamps
the 1, 2, and 4 relay versions with
of performing both energy
(compact fluorescent and lED)
independent outputs for lighting
management and automation
Flush mounted actuator:
devices only;
functions; one in the basic version
Actuator conceived for installation
the power supply enables zero
and one fitted with an integrated
in liVinGliGHt and AXOlutE flush
crossing and allows them to
current sensor for the measurement
mounted supports, intended for
be particularly suitable for the
of the consumption of the controlled
the automation and/or energy
management of the new energy
load (instantaneous consumption
management functions
saving lamps, such as compact
and 2 energy totalizers that can be
fluorescent lamps and lED lamps
reset independently)
there are also dimmers with 0/10
Configured in automation mode, they
V output, and two new multi load
enable performing all the operations
dimmers with 1 or 2 outputs, which
available on the Control devices, with
can control any type of load (with the

exception of compact fluorescent
DIN actuator
Flush mounted
actuator
and lED lamps), and which enable

the user to install the dimmer on the
system, postponing the selection of
the lamp to a later date
Automation
MY HOME 137
GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
ActuAtor selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
on/off lighTing and loads
Type of acTUaTor
aXolUTe
liVinglighT
Flush mounted 2 module (*) 1 relay actuator
H4671/1
L4671/1
Flush mounted, 2 relays, 2 MODULES (*), actuator/control
H4671M2
L4671M2
Flush mounted 2 MODULE (*) dimmer actuator
Basic actuator
3475
Basic Actuator/Control
3476
1, 2, 4 relay DIN actuators
F411/1N (1 relay)
F411/2 (2 independent relays)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)
F411/1NC
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
DIN Dimmer actuators
* To be completed with key cover
138 MY HOME
Automation
MTiX
AM5851/1
AM5851M2
LIGHTING WITH ADJUSTMENT (DIMMER)
AXOLUTE
LIVINGLIGHT
MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS)
MTIX
AXOLUTE
H4671M2
H4678
LIVINGLIGHT
LN4671M2
MTIX
AM5851M2
L4678
F411/1N (1 relay - e.g.to control a solenoid valve) -)

F411/2 (2 relays - ex. for 230 Vac motors -)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)
F413N (for electronic ballasts and LED lamps)

F414 (for 60 - 1000 VA resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers)
F415 (for 60 - 400 VA Electronic transformers)
F416U1
F417U2
BMDI1001
Automation
MY HOME 139
General features
Actuator devices:
selection of the actuators depending on the type of load
The table allows identification of the actuator device depending on what it is to be used for, the electrical features of the load
to be controlled and the installation features.
Warning: Unless otherwise specified in the instruction leaflet, a 10 A thermal magnetic protection must be fitted on the power line to the actuators.
Table of the loads
Actuators
Modules
Power supply
of the device
Controllable loads
Incandescent and halogen

lamps
LED lamps
Linear fluorescent Compact

lamps 1)
fluorescent
lamps
-
Electronic
transformers 3)
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2) 3)
Reducer motor for

shutters 4)
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac
3475
3476
Basic
BUS SCS
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
40 W @ 230 Vac
20 W @ 110 Vac
1 lamp maximum
F411/1N
2 DIN
BUS SCS
10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

4 A cos 0.5
250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac
10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 440 VA @ 110 Vac
F411/2
2 DIN
BUS SCS
6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac
250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A

120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac
250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A

2 A cos 0.5
120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
F411/4
2 DIN
BUS SCS
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
0.3 A
35 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A

35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
F413N
2 DIN
BUS SCS
F414
4 DIN
BUS SCS
F415
4 DIN
BUS SCS
H/L4671/1
AM5851/1
2 flush BUS SCS

mounting
40 W @ 230 Vac 20 W @ 110 Vac 1 lamp maximum
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac 5) 220 W @ 110 Vac 5)
MAX. 10 ballast
type T5, T8, compact
or driver for LED
0.25 4.3A
60 1000 W @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz 0.25 3.5A
60 800 W @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz
0.25 4.3A
60 1000 VA @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz 0.25 3.5A
60 800 VA @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz
0.25 1.7A
60 400 VA
@ 230 Vac - 50 Hz
6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac
150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A

70 W @ 110 Vac
150 W @ 230 Vac
150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A

2 A cos 0.5
70 W @ 110 Vac 150 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac
H/LN4671M2 2 flush BUS SCS

AM5851M2 mounting
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
0.3 A
35 W @ 110 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A

35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac
2A
460 W @ 230 Vac
220 W @ 110 Vac
F411/1NC
2 DIN
BUS SCS
10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

4 A cos 0.5
250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac
F411/2NC
2 DIN
BUS SCS
6A
1380 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac
H/L4678
2 flush BUS SCS

mounting
140 MY HOME
0.25 1.30 A
60 300 W @ 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz -
Automation
0.65 A
150 W @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 110 Vac
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA @ 230 Vac
220 VA @ 110 Vac
0.65 A
1 A cos 0.5
150 W @ 230 Vac 230 VA @ 230 Vac
70 W @ 110 Vac 110 Vac @ 110 Vac
0.25 1.3 A
60300 VA @ 230 Vac50/60 Hz
Table of the loads

Actuators Modules
Power supply of the

device
Controllable loads
Incandescent and halogen

lamps
LED lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
Compact
fluorescent
lamps
Electronic
transformers 3)
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2) 3)
Reducer motor
for shutters 4)
F522
1 DIN
BUS SCS
10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac
F523
1 DIN
BUS SCS
10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac
HD/HC/
HS/L/N/
NT4672N
2 flush BUS SCS

mounting
10 A
2300 W @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A

250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac
4 A cos 0,5
920 VA @ 230 Vac
440 VA @ 110 Vac
F416U1
6 DIN
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A

40 1000 W @ 230 Vac
40 500 W @ 110 Vac
4.3 A
4.3 A
40 1000 W @ 230 Vac 40 1000 VA @ 230 Vac 40 500W@110Vac 40 500 VA @ 110 Vac
F417U2
6 DIN
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 1.7 A

40 400 W @ 230 Vac
40 200 W @ 110 Vac
1.7 A
1.7 A
40 400 W @ 230 Vac 40 400 W @ 230 Vac 40 200 W @ 110 Vac 20 200 W @ 110 Vac
BMDI1001 6 DIN
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A

1000 VA @ 230 Vac
500 VA @ 110 Vac
BMSW1001 4 DIN
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A

3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac
BMSW1002 4 DIN
BMSW1003 6 DIN
4.3 A
1000 VA @ 230 Vac
500 VA @ 110 Vac
4.3 A
1000 VA @ 230 Vac 500 VA @ 110 Vac
2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
500 VA @ 230 Vac 10x(2x36 W) @ 230 Vac 1150 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac
16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A

3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac
2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac
100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A

3680 W @ 230 Vac
1760 W @ 110 Vac
2.1 A
4.3 A
5A
16 A
16 A
3680 VA @ 230 Vac
1760 VA @ 110 Vac
Notes:
1) fluorescent lamps with corrected power factor, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) it is necessary to consider the efficiency of the transformer in order to calculate the effective power of the actuator load. For instance, if you connect a dimmer to a 100VA
ferromagnetic transformer with efficiency 0.8, the effective power of the load will be 125VA.
3) the transformer must be loaded at its rated power and, in any case, never below 90% of that power. It is recommended to use one transformer rather than several transformers in
parallel. For instance, it is preferred to use one 250VA transformer with 5 50W spotlights connected rather than 5 50VA transformers in parallel, each with a 50W spotlight.
4) the
symbol shown of the actuators refers to a reducer motor for shutters.
5) only compatible with the selected lamps with Ballast 1/10 V.
Automation
MY HOME 141
GEnErAl fEAturEs
interfaces
contAct interfAce in din
contAct interfAce in BAsic
Module
Module
With this device it is possible to
the essential feature of this
connect traditional devices to the Bus,
device, due to the reduced overall
such as switches and pushbuttons,
dimensions, is the rear-device
thus extending the use of the Bus to
installation mode As a result, it is
traditional pre-existing systems
possible to install the interface in a
it is also possible to interface
503E box right behind the traditional
thermostats, control devices, humidity
devices (e g switch, pushbutton) or
detectors, wind detectors etc
behind electronic shallow devices

(e g controls, detectors)
it is also possible to interface
thermostats, humidity detectors,
wind detectors etc this installation
solution simplifies the conversion of
traditional electric systems into home
DIN module contact

interface
automation systems, as it makes it

possible to keep the existing flush
mounted boxes, without the need for
masonry work
Basic module
contact interface
External devices
142 MY HOME
Automation
Prestige switch
(reuse of historical devices)
Wire Automation extension

with ZigBee radio devices
the wired automation system
controlling the users from positions
moving walls and with false ceiling
described in the previous pages
that cannot be reached by the Bus
mounted Bus actuators, the radio
can be expanded at any time by
wiring the wireless connection
controls are the ideal solution for
extending the wiring or adding new
among these devices and the wired
installing flexible light points, easy to
control devices
ones is ensured by a special radio
reposition in case of modification in
However, this is not always easy
interface connected to the Bus
the arrangement of the offices, or the
to do; in some buildings, either
the integration between the two
furniture
historic and/or valuable buildings,
technologies, radio and wired,
for more information and for the
the extension of the system entails
enables therefore the installer to
range of control devices see the
unavoidable and costly interventions
select each time the best solution
specific radio system chapter of this
on the building work
that meets the requirements of
guide
these problems can be easily
the customer, both in terms of
resolved using the radio controls
functionality, and in relation to the
possiBle functions
included in the ZigBee radio system
homes
shutter and rolling shutter
range; being battery powered and
this solution can also be extended,
independent from the system wiring,
with some advantages, to new
lighting
these devices give the possibility of
buildings; for example in offices with
scenario management
Light
control
automation
Radio control for

the management
of lights
Shutter
control
Power supply
SCS/Zigbee
gateway
TV/SAT
230 Vac
TV/SAT
Light
actuator
TV/SAT
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
automazione
energia
IPTV
Shutter
actuator
IPTV
TV/SAT
termoregolazione
IPTV
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
IPTV
luci
Lights
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Radio Remote control

for the management
of scenarios
Shutters
Automation
MY HOME 143
Configuration
General concepts
This chapter describes the general
Actuator address -
concepts for the physical and
Physical Configuration
virtual configuration of the MY
The address of each actuator is
positions (G1, G2 and G3) as they can
HOME automation devices. For
defined uniquely by assigning the
belong to several different groups at
each item, the Technical Sheets
numeric configurators 1 to 9 in
the same time.
chapter describes the functions that
positions A (Room) and PL (Light
can be realised depending on the
Point inside the Room).
Example: The actuator configured with A = 1, PL = 3
configurators used.
A maximum of 9 addresses can be
and G = 4 is device 3 of room 1 belonging to group 4.
defined for each room; a maximum of
Actuators:
9 rooms can be defined in a system.
address and type of
The group of belonging is defined by
control
inserting a third numeric configurator
To understand the addressing logical
in the housing identified with G
it is useful to define some terms
(Group).
which will occur frequently in this
Some actuators have several G
guide.
Room (A)
Set of devices belonging to a logical
area (in a home, for example, the
ROOM 9
living room, the bedroom, etc.).

Light Point (PL)
Numeric identification of the single
actuators inside the Room.
A =9
PL = 1
A =9
PL = 2
A =9
PL = 1
A =9
PL = 2
A =9
PL = 2
A =9
PL = 9
Group (G)
ROOM...
Set of devices also belonging to

different rooms but which must be
controlled at the same time (e.g. the
rolling shutters of the North side of
the home, the lighting of the day
ROOM 2
19
ROOM 1
A =1
PL = 1
A =1
PL = 1
A =1
PL = 2
A =1
PL = 9
A =1
PL = 2
A =0
PL = 9
GROUP 1
19
A = GR
PL = 1
144 MY HOME
Automation
19
GROUP 9
area, etc.).
A =1
PL = 1
A =9
PL = 9
Actuator address -
logical extension
For special applications such as
A maximum of 16 addresses can be
extended systems in houses or
defined for each room(PL=0-15);
service/industrial rooms, where the
a maximum of 16 rooms can be
use of many devices may exceed
defined in a system. (A=0 -10).
the configuration limits mentioned

above, interface F422 can be used,
configured in the logical expansion
mode.
This mode can make an extended
system made up of several individual
systems (see General rules for
installation section).
ROOM 10
A = 10
PL = 0
A = 10
PL = 1
A = 10
PL = 0
A = 10
PL = 1
A = 10
PL = 1
A = 10
PL = 15
A = 10
PL = 15
ROOM ...
ROOM 1
A =0
PL = 1
A =0
PL = 1
A =0
PL = 1
A =0
PL = 15
A =0
PL = 2
A =0
PL = 15
GROUP 1
1 15
A =0
PL = 2
GROUP 255
0 15
ROOM 0
A = GR
PL = 1
1 255
Automation
MY HOME 145
COnfiGurAtiOn
General concepts
controls: Address And type
of control
the control devices also have
configurators with graphics which
positions A and Pl to define the
enable the device to send the control
addresses of the devices which
with the various ways listed in the
receive the control (actuators)
table below
for these positions there are numeric
Mode for addressing the devices using the Physical Configuration

Type of conTrol
Mode for addressing the devices using the Virtual Configuration

Type of conTrol
conTrol deVice
conTrol deVice
configurator socket
value of the configurator
Configurable address
Configuration
Point-point
A
PL
1-9
1-9
Point-point
A
PL
0-10
0-15
Room
A
PL
AMB
1-9
Room
A
PL
AMB
0-10
Group
A
PL
GR
1-9
Group
A
PL
GR
1-255
General
A
PL
GEN
-
General
A
PL
GEN
-
146 MY HOME
Automation
exAMples of configurAtion
Point-point control
Group control
if the no 3 control is configured with
if the no 7 control is configured
identified with G = 1 (thus belonging
A = 2 and Pl = 3, this device sends
with A = Gr and Pl = 1, this device
to group 1)
the control to the actuator identified
sends the control to the actuator
with A = 2 and Pl = 3
poinT-poinT
conTrol
2
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 1
groUp conTrols
rooM
conTrols
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = AMB
PL = 1
A = AMB
PL = 2
general
conTrols
A = GR
PL = 1
A = GR
PL = 2
A = GEN
PL =
BUS
actuators
= Point-point control
A = 1
PL = 1
G = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
G = 1
A = 1
PL = 3
G = 2
A = 2
PL = 1
G = 2
A = 2
PL = 2
G = 1
A = 2
PL = 3
G = 1
= Group control
Automation
MY HOME 147
COnfiGurAtiOn
Addressing levels
for a better understanding of the
Example: control for a single load (lamp, fan, rolling shutter, etc.)
concepts described in the previous
rooM 1
page, the four addressing modes are
rooM 2
described below
the control devices (senders) can
activate the actuators (receivers) with
A = 1
PL = 1
the following modes
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
point-point control
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
Direct control
to one actuator
IPTV
TV/SATIPTV
IPTV
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
identified by a room number and a

light point number
A = 1
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
Control device:
A = n*
Pl = n*
Actuator:
A = n*
Pl = n*
rooM control
Direct control to all the actuators
Example: control for all the lamps of a room
identified by the same room number

rooM 1
rooM 2
A = 1
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
A = 1
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
A = AMB
PL = 1
n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9
148 MY HOME
Automation
A = AMB
PL = 2
Control device:
A = AMB Pl = n*
Actuator:
A = n*
Pl = n*
group control
Direct control to all the actuators
which perform particular functions
even if they belong to different
rooms and are identified by the same
group number
Example: control of all the lamps of a floor, on the North side of the building
rooM 1
rooM 2
A = GR
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
A =1
PL = 1
G =1
A =1
PL = 2
G =1
A =1
PL = 3
G =2
A =2
PL = 1
G =2
A =2
PL = 2
G =1
A =2
PL = 3
G =1
A = GR
PL = 2
A = AMB
PL = 1
Control device:
A = Gr
Pl = n*
Actuator:
A = n*
Pl = n*
A = AMB
PL = 2
G = n*
Automation
MY HOME 149
COnfiGurAtiOn
Addressing levels
generAl control
Direct control to all the system actuators
Example: control of all the lamps of the building
rooM 1
A = 1
PL = 1
rooM 2
A = 1
PL = 2
A = 1
PL = 3
A = 2
PL = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
A = 2
PL = 3
A = GR
PL = 1
A = GR
PL = 2
A =1
PL = 1
G =1
A =1
PL = 2
G =1
A =1
PL = 3
G =2
A =2
PL = 1
G =2
A =2
PL = 2
G =1
A = GEN
PL = -
A = AMB
PL = 1
Control device:
A = GEn Pl = /
Actuator:
A = n*
150 MY HOME
Automation
Pl = n*
A = AMB
PL = 2
G = n*
n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9
A =2
PL = 3
G =1
Main operating modes

The devices in the automation system
The function performed, i.e. what the
are flush mounted). The table below
can perform different functions, such
device must do, is defined by putting
lists the various operating modes as a
as setting the brightness, switching
configurators into the housings
function of the configurator and type
lamps on/off or opening/closing
marked with M of the control devices
of key cover used in the device.
rolling shutters.
and completing the devices with

keys and key covers (if the devices
Control TABLE
Key covers
Configurator value (M)
Function performed
1 function
M
Cyclical ON-OFF control

Repeatedly pressing the relay actuators device key cover, ON and OFF controls will be sent in a cyclical way.
M
M
With dimmer actuators, keep the pushbutton pressed to adjust the load power.
no configurator
M
ON
M
SPE
14
M
M
M
14
M
SPE
18
18
14
M
SPE
18
18
14
M
M
SPE
configurator ON
OFF
18
OFF
ON
18
SLA
O/I
M
configurator
OFF
OFF
O/I
PUL
M
M
configurator
PUL
M
O/I
SLA
SLA
18
PUL
M
M
SLA
PUL
PUL
2 FUNCTIONS
Bistable controlMwith hold (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)

M
UL
Pressing the key cover (lower
or Pupper)
sends the UP-DOWN control to the rolling shutter motor. After the control has been sent, press the lower or upper key cover again, to stop the rolling shutter in the required position.
M
configurator
ON
M
SPE
OFF
M
SPE
14
14
18
18
Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)

The device sends an UP-DOWN control for a rolling shutter motor as long as the lower or upper key cover is
pressed. When the key cover is released, the motor STOPS.
configurator
ON
M
M
M
SLA
M
Monostable ON-OFF control
(pushbutton)
This mode can perform an ON/OFF control similar to the control of a traditional point-point pushbutton, thus
intended just for one address.
O/I
18
18
OFF control
18
18
When pressing the corresponding
key cover, the device sends the OFF control.
M
OFF
M
O/I
OFF
ON
18
ON14control
M
18
SPE
When pressing the corresponding
key
cover, the device sends the ON control.
M
M
ON
18
18
ON
18
18
18
ON/OFF control
Used with relayMactuators, when the upper key cover is pressed the device sends an ON control; when the lower
key cover is pressed the device sends an OFF control.With dimmer actuators, pressing the upper and lower key
cover adjusts the load power.
SLA
OFF
O/I
18
configurator O/I
PUL
M
M
O/I
SLA
Automation
MY HOME 151
Configuration
Main operating modes

Cen operating mode
with the CEN configurator in the M
AM5831M2, by pressing the T1
This particular mode is used to
position. The key (upper or lower) of
(upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons.
manage scenario programmer
the control device and the scenario
For the correspondence between
devices MH200N.
to be activated are linked through
the control keys and the scenarios to
As described in the pages of this
the TiMH200 program written to
activate see the table:
guide, the device can manage
create the scenarios and then saving
even complex scenarios activated
them in the MH200N device.
automatically after events in the
For example, two independent
system or manually by pressing a
scenarios can be activated using
key of a control device configured
the special control H/L4651M2,
Type of control
Special control
H/L4651M2 and AM5831M2
Configuration
A=09; PL=09; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=0; LIV2=0; SPE=0; I=0
Basic control for 2 independent loads

H/L4652/2 and AM5832/2
A1=09; PL1=09; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=0
Identification of scenario activation keys
T1
T2
T1
T2
Basic control for 3 independent loads

H/L4652/3 and AM5832/3
A1=09; PL1=09; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=CEN
T1 T2
A1=09; PL1=09; A2=0; PL2=0; A3=0; PL3=0; M=CEN
T3 T4
T1 T2 T3
T4 T5 T6
M
Main actuator operating modes

The actuators can be configured for the following operating modes:
M
14
14
ON
M
SPE
M
SPE
18
18
18
18
ACTUATOR TABLE
Configurator value (M)
M
M
M
14
Function performed
M
SPE
18
18
18
18
Special functions
This mode can perform special functions (OFF delayed, STOP timed) on the basis of the type of actuator used (single or double) and the numeric
configurator inserted.
configurator 14
OFF
SLA
SLA
18
Slave
This mode can perform a control with two or more actuators. In practice the actuators with the SLA (Slave) configurator repeat the function
performed by another actuator which acts as Master.
The actuators must have the same addresses and must be of the same type (either all light actuators or all rolling shutter actuators).
configurator SLA
O/I
PUL
PUL
SLA
PUL
The device does not operate with the Room and General controls.
configurator PUL
M
152 MY HOME
PUL
Automation
Examples of configuration
the drawing shows a system for
Group control
receiving the control (one only, a
the management of three lamps
Group control 7 marked with A=Gr
group or several room actuators) and
and three shutters Each actuator is
and Pl=1, controls actuators 1 and 2
from the configurators in position
identified by three numbers: room
marked with G=1
M to define the function (On/Off or
number (A), device progressive
General control
On/DOWn)
number (Pl for light actuators and
the devices identified A=GEn and
Pl1 and Pl2 for shutter actuators)
Pl= - (no configurator) send a general
control operAting Mode
and Group (G) of belonging
control to all the actuators, for the
the configurator inserted in position
defining the Addresses
lights and for the shutters, in the
M of each control device identifies
Point-point control
system
the operating mode

the O/i configurator specifies a lamp
Control 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1) controls
actuators 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1 and G = 1)
NOTE: The actuators which manage the shutters,
switching on control which is given
in the same way control 2 (A = 1,
unlike those for the lights, are configured in the same
by pressing the upper key cover (On)
Pl = 2) controls actuator 2 (A = 1,
way in the two positions PL1 and PL2.
and the lower key cover (Off)
Room control
the control devices are instead
the configurators
room control 8 (A=AMB, Pl=2)
distinguished from the configurators
position M instead specify a control
controls actuators 4 and 5 marked
in positions A and Pl which specify
to manage the rolling shutters
with A=2
the addresses of the actuators
intended for actuators 4, 5 and 6
Pl = 2 and G = 1) etc
poinT-poinT
conTrol
groUp
rooM
conTrols conTrols
A =1
PL = 1
M = O/I
A =1
PL = 2
M = O/I
A =1
PL = 3
M = O/I
A =2
PL = 1
M = M
A =2
PL = 2
M = M
A =3
PL = 1
M = M
and
M in
general
conTrols
A = GR
PL = 1
M = O/I
A = AMB
PL = 2
M = M
A = GEN
PL =
M = O/I
10
A = GEN
PL =
M = M
BUS
actuators
A = 1
PL = 1
G = 1
A = 1
PL = 2
G = 1
A = 1
PL = 3
G = 2
A = 2
PL = 1
G = 1
A = 2
PL = 2
G = 2
A = 3
PL = 1
G = 1
Automation
MY HOME 153
GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn
Maximum distances and absorptions

this chapter outlines the details for
for the purpose of the above
availability of current according to
ensuring a correct realisation of a MY
calculations, refer to the tECHniCAl
the length of the cable
HOME automation system:
DAtA shown in the technical sheets
When setting up, please observe the
selv classification
chapter
following rules:
Maximum distances and
When calculating the absorptions,

it is also necessary to consider the
absorptions
Maximum number of devices

which can be configured
selV clAssificAtion
the automation system is sElV
1 The connection between the power supply and the furthest away device must not be longer than 250m.
Power supply
Device
Junction box
(safety Extra low Voltage) classified

due to the fact that it is powered
using double safety insulation
independent devices, not connected
to the earth, and with maximum
operating voltage of 27 Vdc, nonundulated, in accordance with CEi En
600065 it is therefore comparable
to a sElV source as described in
point 411 125 of CEi 64-8-4 the
conformity to sElV classification
is only guaranteed subject to full
compliance with current installation
regulations, and with the general
rules for installation for each single
2 The total length of the connections must not be more than 500 metres (extended cable).
device and cable making up the

system recommended by Bticino
MAxiMuM distAnces of the

Bus cABle And ABsorptions
the maximum number of devices
that can be connected to the Bus
depends on their total absorption
and on the distance between the
connection point and the power
supply the power supply unit can
deliver up to 1200 mA or 600 mA;
ihence, the maximum number of
devices will be determined by the
sum of the absorptions of the single
devices you need to install
154 MY HOME
Automation
Power supply
Device
Junction box
3 For optimum division of the currents on the BUS line power supply should be positioned in the middle.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
E46ADCN
SCS
E49
1
1
2
2
C1
3
4
C2
C3
C4
2
2
C1
3
4
C2
C3
C4
With Power supply E46ADCn:
With Power supply E49:
= 250 m max
= 250 m max
= 250 m max
= 250 m max
A + B = 500 m
Maximum current supplied from
the power supply 1200 mA
A + B = 500 m
Maximum current supplied from
the power supply 600 mA
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.
Automation
MY HOME 155

MAxiMuM distAnces for the
connection of ActuAtors
Example of connection with F411/1N
depending on the loAd
in order to manage some types of
loads correctly, it is necessary to

observe the installation specifications
for all actuators used
fluorescent lamps: the length of

the connecting cable between the
F411/1N
L N
MIN 3 m
C1
actuator and the load must not

be less than 3m Do not connect
more than 15 actuators controlling
this type of lamp on the same line
Metallic iodide and sodium-
Warning: Refer to the technical data shown on the technical sheets for each actuator
vapor lamps: in addition to

the indications given for the
fluorescent lamps, please pay
attention to the operating
instructions of these lamps (for
example, avoid switching on when
hot), do not connect dimmers to
the same line of these lamps, keep
the bus line and the power line of
these lamps separated from each
other (at least 1 metre)
three-phase networks: when using

three-phase networks, check the
balance of the phases as well as
Maximum distances for connecting the contact interface

50 m
the quality of the network

non-compliance of the above
regulations may affect proper
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
operation of the devices

PL1
MAxiMuM distAnce for

interfAce
interface (basic or Din module) and
the traditional type device must not
exceed 50 metres in length several
pushbuttons may be connected to
the interface inputs
156 MY HOME
Automation
Prestige switch
(reuse of historical
devices)
connecting the contAct

the connection between the
PL2
BUS
ABSORPTIONs, SIZE AND DISSIPATIONS

Item
Description
3475
3476
3477
E46ADCN
actuator
control actuator
contact interface
power supply
E49
F411/1N 1)
F411/2 1)
mini power supply

1-relay actuator
2-relay actuator
F411/4 1)
4-relay actuator
F412 1)
F413N 1)
F414
1-relay NC/NA actuator

output 1 to 10 for ballast
DIN dimmer
F415
F522
F523
F420
F422
DIN dimmer
actuator 16A with current sensor
actuator 16A
scenario module
SCS/SCS interface
F425
F426
F427
F428
F429
H/L4651M2 AM5831M2
memory module
SCS/EIB interface
OPEN KNX interface
contact interface
SCS/DALI interface
special control
H/L4652/2 AM5832/2
H/L4652/3 AM5832/3
H/L4671/1 AM5851/1
H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2
H/L4678
H/L4684
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607/4
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4610
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4611
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4680
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
BMSE2005
F416U1
F417U2
BMDI1001
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
control for 2 actuators

control for 3 actuators
1-relay actuator
control/actuator
flush-mounting dimmer
colour Touch Screen
SB receiving radio interface
protected control
protected scenario control
fixed IR detector
swivel IR detector
16 A flush mounted 2 module actuator
scenario control
passive infrared ceiling sensor
wide band wall/ceiling sensor
narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
two-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor
double technology band wall/ceiling sensor
dimmer actuator1000W TC
dimmer actuator1000W 2x400 W TC
dimmer actuator1000W 1/10 V
1-relay 230 Vac actuator
Absorption from Bus

(power supply 27 Vcc)
13 mA
13 mA
3.5 mA
22 mA
28 mA (single loads)
15.5 mA (interlock)
40 mA (single loads)
22 mA (interlock)
20 mA
30 mA
9 mA
9 mA
30 mA
10 mA
20 mA
IN: 25 mA
OUT: 2mA
5 mA
30 mA
9 mA
5 mA
6 mA for H4651M2
8.5 mA for L4651M2 and AM5831M2
9 mA
9 mA
16.5 mA
14 mA
9 mA
80 mA
33 mA
15 mA
12 mA
4.5 mA
4.5 mA
10 mA
9 mA
10 mA
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
17 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
Size
Dissipation
Dissipated power
Max. load
with max. load
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
8 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
11 W
6W
5.3 W
1.5 W
1.7 W
2 DIN modules
3.2 W
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
4 DIN modules
1.5 W
0.5 W
11W
5W
11 W
4 DIN modules
1 DIN module
1 DIN module
2 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
1.2 A
0.5 A
1000W
500W
400W
0.6 W
1W
2 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
2 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
2 flush-mounting mod.
3+3 flush-mounting mod.
l=75/p=40/h=20
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=91
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=92
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=93
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=94
l=115.86/p=69.6/h=95
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
4 DIN modules
4 DIN modules
6 DIN modules
0.1 W
0.2 W
0.9 W
3W
300 W
8W
8W
1000 W
2 X 400 W
1.2 W
1.7 W
2.8 W
NOTE:
1) the power dissipated indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the relays loaded at the load maximum. If the load is less the dissipated power is less and may be calculated
by means of the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[I12+I22+...IN2]
P: dissipated power in mW,
N: no. of loaded relays
IN: load current corresponding to the N relay.
Install the items with greater dissipated power (in special power supplies and dimmers) in lower positions in the switchboard for easier heat dissipation.
Do not place devices which dissipate a power greater than 5W side by side, but leave an empty module between them.
Automation
MY HOME 157
General rules for installation

If the absorption of the whole system
PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE
Positions I3 and I4 shall be configured
is less than 600 mA, the E49 compact
Limit systems shall be applied to
according to the configuration of
power supply can be used. If the
each bus in terms of absorption and
the Automation devices in the two
absorption is between 600 and 1200
maximum wiring distance, as shown
systems connected to each other.
mA, use the E46ADCN power supply.
in the previous page. Therefore, it
With reference to the picture, let us
For extended systems with current
is not possible to supply a system
suppose, for example, that I3=2, I4=7:
absorption over 1200 mA or 600
consisting of two or more buses with
on the input bus (IN), the addresses
mA powered by power supplies
only one power supply unit E46ADCN
of Automation devices No. 1 must
E46ADCN and E49, it will be
or E49, connected to each other by
be between A=1 / PL=1 and A=2 /
necessary to split the system into
interfaces configured in physical
PL=6;
several lines, each powered by its
expansion mode even if the number
own power supply and connected
and type of components connected
addresses of Automation devices
to each other using interface F422
to the system do not exceed the set
No. 2 must be between A=2 /
configured in Physical expansion
maximum absorption (1200 mA).
PL=8 to the address of the next
on the output bus (OUT), the
interface.
mode.
A/PL = 28 53
230 Vac
F422
OUT
OUT
F422
OUT
F422
I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 2
I4 = 7
MOD = 1
F422
IN
IN
IN
230 Vac
230 Vac
A/PL = 11 26
158 MY HOME
I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 5
I4 = 4
MOD = 1
Automation
A/PL = 55 99
Installation rules
When setting up the system, consider
It is possible to use up to 4
the following recommendations:
interfaces in series, which divide
The buses, connected to the
the system into 5 separate
interface input and output, must

be supplied with their own power
sections.
The F420 scenario module, the
supply unit; additionally, the
F425 memory module, and the
system limits apply for each of
devices that can be configured
them, in terms of absorption and
using the self-learning mode must
maximum distance.
be installed on the bus section
Therefore, it is not possible to
corresponding to their own
supply a system consisting of
local address. For example if the
two or more buses with only one
scenario module is configured
power supply unit (E46ADCN or
as A=0 (no configurator), PL=1, it
E49) connected to each other
will have to be placed on section
by various interfaces configured
1 of the system. The energy
in physical expansion mode
management system central unit
even if the number and type of
F421 and the control panel N4682
components connected to the
must be installed on the BUS with
system do not exceed the set
the highest addresses (system no.
maximum absorption (1200 mA).
3 in the example).
It is not possible to connect two

interfaces in parallel to the same
BUS
Automation
MY HOME 159
Maximum number of devices which can be configured

physicAlly configured
single systeM
A single system can manage up to 9
points (Pl), for a total of 81 addresses
it is also possible to have several
rooms (A) for each room, it will then
to these addresses, any inclusion in
devices with the same address
be possible to manage up to 9 light
one or more groups must be added
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
Power supply
Shutter
control
Dimmer
control
3 31
81 addresses MaX.
Basic contact
interface
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ART. 3477
PL1 PL2
BUS cable
230 Vac
DIN
dimmer
3 31
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
Flush-mounting
actuator
T5H 250V
Basic
actuator
0245 06
F414
50Hz
230V~
60 1000V A
A PL M G
PL1 PL2
VirtuAlly configured
single systeM
light points (Pl=0-15), for a total of
rooms (A=0-10) for each room it will
175 addresses (the address A=0, Pl=0
then be possible to manage up to 16
is not permitted)
Basic contact
interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
Power supply
Shutter
control
3 31
175 addresses MaX.
A single system can manage up to 11
Dimmer
control
230 Vac
Web server
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Extra
power supply
ART. 3477
PL1 PL2
F453
Ethernet
cross-over cable
230 Vac
3 31
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
Flush-mounting
actuator
T5H 250V
Basic
actuator
0245 06
F414
50Hz
230V~
60 1000V A
A PL M G
PL1 PL2
Automation
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
BUS cable
DIN
dimmer
160 MY HOME
Pc
logical expansion of the addresses

extended systeM with one
f422 interfAce
in larger homes, or in the service
using interface f422 configured in
sector, there might be the need for
the logic expansion mode: with
Automation systems with a higher
configurator n0 2 in position M, and
number of functions than the above
no 1 in i4
in this case, it is possible to create
Power supply
Basic contact
interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
Shutter
control
3 31
Fan
control
Dimmer
control
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Shutter
control
ART. 3477
PL1 PL2
230 Vac
DIN
actuator
Power supply
0245 06
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
3 31
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
1
1
2
2
AR T.F470/2
F414
50Hz
230V~
ART. 3477
60 1000V A
ART. 3477
Interface
F422
A PL M G
PL1 PL2
Flush-mounting
actuator
Basic
actuator
Basic contact
interface
Shutter
control
3 31
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
PL1 PL2
Basic
actuator
DIN
dimmer
Dimmer
control
Fan
control
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
I1
I2
I3
I4
M
Shutter
control
=
=
=
=1
=2
ART. 3477
PL1 PL2
OUT
OUT
AR T.F422
IN
230 Vac
L
1
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM NO. 1
(MAIN RISER)
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
2
2
AR T.F470/2
DIN
actuator
3 31
T5H 250V
1
0245 06
3 31
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
F414
50Hz
230V~
ART. 3477
60 1000V A
ART. 3477
A PL M G
PL1 PL2
Basic
actuator
PL1 PL2
Flush-mounting
actuator
DIN
dimmer
Basic
actuator
Web server
230 Vac Extra

power supply
Pc
ETHERNET
174 addresses MaX.
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM NO. 2
(Local BUS)
3 31
T5H 250V
349 addresses MaX.
175 addresses MaX.
an extended Automation system
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS AI
SCS AV
Ethernet Cross-over Cable
Automation
MY HOME 161
logical expansion of the addresses

If you need to control and execute the centralised
extended systeM with
management of the system with Web Server,
seVerAl f422 interfAces
Touch screen and Energy Management Control
if three or more systems (up to a
Unit, these devices will have to be installed in the
maximum of 9) must be combined,
main riser.
these must be connected by means

of interfaces f422 with a common
Main riser
166 addresses MaX.
call riser, on which the control,
LOCAL BUS
activation and management (for
174 addresses MaX.
174 addresses MaX.
bus, which from now on we will
example touch screen) devices can

also be installed because they belong
to the Automation system the riser
cannot be made, for example, with
a Burglar-alarm or 2 wire Video door
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 =
M=
1
2
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
entry system the f422 interfaces

LOCAL BUS
logic expansion mode, connecting

configurator no 2 to the M position
and configuring the address of
position i4 with configurators from
1 to 9, as per the following diagram
for each of the 9 systems there will
be 174 configuration addresses
address, as well as 166 addresses on
the riser, for a total of 1732 addresses
Warnings:
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
174 addresses MaX.
available, excluding the interface
I1
I2
I3
I4
M

I1
I2
I3
I4
M
=
=
=
=
=
3
2
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
In the main riser it is possible to install control

devices configured to send GROUP or GENERAL
the single systems and in the same main riser.
POINT-POINT controls generated inside each

single system and on the main riser can reach
the actuators situated in the whole system only
if they are sent from the appropriately configured
174 addresses MaX.
controls to some or all of the actuators situated in
LOCAL BUS
I1
I2
I3
I4
M
situated on the main riser or on one of the single
162 MY HOME
Automation
4
2
OUT
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
SPECIAL control device H/L4651M2, AM5831M2

systems (max 9) connected.
=
=
=
=
=
addresses MaX.: 174x9+166 (Main riser) = 1732
are configured for operation in
extended systeM with

interfAce f422 And weB
serVer
special systems for which the
using one or more Web servers f454
case the extended system is made up
availability of more than 1739
and a lAn network which forms the
of two or more systems for each of
addresses is required can be made
connection infrastructure
which a maximum of 1739 addresses
referring to the picture below, in this
can be configured the centralised

control of the functions is obtained
through Personal Computer,
LOCAL BUS
Main riser
OUT
Control
ART.F422
LOCAL BUS
connecting directly to the Web server
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
fixed iP address and working on Web

pages with preconfigured icons

OUT
ART.F422
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C1
C2
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
Web Server
F454
ETHERNET
1739 addresses MaX.
SYSTEM 1
SCS AI
SCS AV
BUS
PC
LOCAL BUS
Main riser
OUT
Control
ART.F422
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
ART.F422
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C1
C2
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
Web Server
F454
ETHERNET
1739 addresses MaX.
SYSTEM 2
SCS AI
LAN
network
SCS AV
BUS
LOCAL BUS
Control
ART.F422
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
Main riser
LOCAL BUS
OUT
ART.F422
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C1
SYSTEM 3
OUT
C2
OUT
Interface
F422
IN
Web Server
F454
ETHERNET
1739 addresses MaX.
SCS AI
SCS AV
BUS
Automation
MY HOME 163
Wiring diagrams
Lighting management
Diagram 1 SWITCHING ON/OFF OF 2 LAMPS FROM 4 LIGHT POINTS WITH GENERAL ON/OFF CONTROL
230 Vac
N
L
L4671/1
ON
E46ADCN
OFF
A
PL
M
G1
G2
=
=
=
=
=
L1
1
1
O/I
L4671/1
ON
OFF
A
PL
M
G1
G2
=
=
=
=
=
BUS
230 Vac
L4652/2
GEN
BUS
L4652/2
A = GEN
PL1 =
M = O/I
ON
L2
1
2
O/I
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M
=
=
=
=
=
=
To other devices
1
1
O/I
1
2
O/I
Diagram 2 automatic switching on of the light with passive infrared ceiling sensor
N
L
3475
E46ADCN
L1
1 1
230 Vac
ART. 3475
230V
2A cos = 0,6
2A
A
PL
M
G
=
=
=
=
1
1
230 Vac
BUS
BMSE1001
A
PL
M
S
T
=
=
=
=
=
1
1
1
6
L4652/2
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I
ON
To other devices
For other
functions
OFF
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on,
and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires. The PIR movement sensor sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation the
sensor Lighting set point must be defined (see procedure). If the user switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a presence is detected, for
a time set in T.
164 MY HOME
Automation
diAgrAM 3 switching on And off of one lAMp And rolling shutter control using An ActuAtor control
230 Vac
N
L
L1
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
E46ADCN
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
1
1
2
O/I
A
PL
M
G1
G2
M
L2
=
=
=
=
=
L2
1
2
O/I
ON
OFF
L4671/1
L4671M2(*)
230 Vac
BUS
To other
devices
*Complete the device with key covers as per the drawing:
ON
Shutter
control
Light
control
OFF
diAgrAM 4 wire systeM extension with rAdio control to MAnAge two lAMps
230 V ac
N
L
F411/1N
E46ADCN
F411/1N
C1
A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
1
F411/1N
L1
F411/1N
C1
A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
L2
To other
devices of the
Wire Automation
system
230 Vac
L4578 (*)
L4597N
A = 9
PL = 8
M =
A =1
PL1 = 1
PL2 = 2
Note: Replacing actuator F411/1N with actuator dimmer F414 and F414/127 the lamp brightness can be adjusted as well
Note (*): assign an address not used for other Automation devices. The interface can manage up to 36 radio control devices.
Automation
MY HOME 165
Wiring diagrams
Management of different loads

Diagram 5 SWITCHING-ON control for bathroom light and fan with delayed SWITCHING-OFF
230 Vac
N
L
M
Bathroom
light
F411/1N
1
F411/1N
E46ADCN
C1
A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3
=
=
=
=
=
=
F411/1N
3
1
2
F411/1N
C1
A
PL
M
G1
G2
G3
=
=
=
=
=
=
Bathroom
fan
3
1
SLA
230 Vac
BUS
L4652/2
The ON control turns on the light and the fan at the same time.
The OFF control turns off the light whereas the fan turns off after 2
minutes (configurator in M=2 of the Master actuator)
To other
devices
A = 3
PL = 1
M = O/I
ON
OFF
Diagram 6 motor control in direct current for motorised curtains (example 24 V d.c.)
24 Vdc
+
F411/2
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C1
E46ADCN
A
PL1
PL2
G
M
=
=
=
=
=
3
1
1
C2
F411/2
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C1
A
PL1
PL2
G
M
=
=
=
=
=
3
1
1
SLA
C2
230 Vac
BUS
230 Vac
To other
devices
L4652/2
It is possible to use direct current motors with other features (12 - 24 - 48 V d.c.) by replacing
the compatible power supply unit with the features of the motor (voltage and current), thus
verifying the absorptions of the motor with the actuator relay capacity (F411/2).
166 MY HOME
Automation
A = 3
PL = 1
M =
For other
functions
Window and shutter management

Diagram 7 motor control in alternated current for rolling shutters, curtains or motorised shutters
230 Vac
L1-N = clockwise rotation

L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
M1
L1
F411/2
M = AC motor
with 2 windings
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
E46ADCN
C1
A
PL1
PL2
G
M
=
=
=
=
=
N
L2
M2
L1
F411/2
2
1
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C2
C1
A
PL1
PL2
G
M
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
2
N
L2
L1
F411/2
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
C2
C1
230 Vac
M3
A
PL1
PL2
G
M
=
=
=
=
=
L2
2
3
3
C2
BUS
L4652/3
A
PL1
A2
PL2
A3
PL3
M
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
2
1
2
2
2
3
To other
devices
L4652/2
GEN
A = GEN
PL =
M =
Diagram 8 motor control in alternated current for opening/closing motorised shutters
M1
230 Vac
N
L
Ap C
M2
Ch
Ap C
F411/4
1 2 3 4 5
E46ADCN
ART. F411/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
Ch
A
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
M
=
=
=
=
=
=
2
1
1
1
1
1
230 Vac
motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter

M1 =
motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
M2 =
PL1 and PL2 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to
the internal rabbet shutter
PL3 and PL4 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to
the external rabbet shutter
BUS
L4652/2
To other
devices
For other
functions
A = 2
PL = 1
M =
Automation
MY HOME 167
Wiring diagrams
Management of dimmer lamps

Diagram 9 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF fluorescent lamps

By means of the ballast

N
N
L
230 Vac
+
F413
Ballast
A
PL1
M
G
1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V
N L - +
=
=
=
=
2
1
ART. F413N
C1
E46ADCN
230 Vac
To other
devices
BUS
L4652/2
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I
For other
functions
ON
OFF
Diagram 10 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF incandescence lamps,

halogen and ferromagnetic transformers
N
L
DIN
dimmer
actuator
E46ADCN
Incandescence lamps,
halogen and ferromagnetic
transformer
L
T5H 250V
230 Vac
0245 06
F414
230V~
50Hz
60 1000VA
A PL M G
230 Vac
A
PL
M
G
=
=
=
=
1
2
To other
devices
BUS
L4652/2
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 = O/I
168 MY HOME
Automation
ON
OFF
For other
functions
Lighting and shutter management

Diagram 11 LIGHTING AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 100 M2 HOME
The following pages give a
Functions performed by the system:
description of an Automation
Light general control.
system used for lighting and
Shutters general control.
shutter management in a home of
Control of light points in each
approximately 100 m2, consisting of

living room, kitchen, two bedrooms
Dimmer light control point in the

living room and the bedrooms.
room.
Central control using the Touch

Screen installed in the living room.
Recalling of scenarios with Local
Control of shutters in each room.
Display in the two bedrooms.
and two bathrooms.

Distribution components in the single rooms
Hall
Corridor
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BATHROOM 1
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ITEM
1 lighting general control (1)

1 shutter general control (2)
1 ceiling light point controlled by flush mounted actuator (3)
1 control (4) for the corridor light point
2 ceiling light points controlled by flush mounted actuator and 8 other points (4 - 6 - 7 - 9 - 13 - 22 - 28)
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (7) and by
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*)
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (8) and by
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (11) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*)
1 ceiling light point controlled from two points (9 - 11) and by
1 Touch Screen (12)
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (13) and by
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (16 - 17 - 18) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (17)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (18) and by
1 control (20) for the Corridor Light Point
1 Local Display (19)
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (22 - 23 - 24) with light intensity adjustment and by
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (23)
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (24) and by
1 control (26) for the Corridor Light Point
1 Local Display (25)
H4652/2
H4652/2
H4671/1
H4652/2
H4671/1
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4890
H4652/2
F411/1N
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
HS4891
H4652/2
F415
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
F411/2
H4652/2
HC4685
NOTE: All the controls must be completed with support, cover plate and key covers for the desired civil series. These can be found in the BTicino General Installation catalogue.

For this specific example products of the AXOLUTE civil series have been used.
NOTE (*): All the actuators in DIN module are installed on the 54 module home automation panel in the hall.
Home automation panel
DIN MODULES
1 SCS power supply
12 DIN actuators
8
24
Home automation panel
DIN MODULES
3 DIN dimmer
1 scenario module
12
2
Total 46
Automation
MY HOME 169
WirinG DiAGrAMs
lighting and shutter management

HALL
CORRIDOR
KITCHEN
L
N
F420
F411/1N
A1 =
PL = 1
E46ADCN
H4671/1
A1 = 1
PL = 1
M1 = O/I
ON
ART.F420
H4671/1
OFF
ON
OFF
A = 3
PL = 1
ART.F411/1
A1 = 2
PL = 1
M1 = O/I
230 Vac
H4652/2
ON
GEN
H4652/2
A1 = GEN
M = O/I
H4652/2
A = GEN
M =
OFF
OFF
H4652/2
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I
ON
ON
OFF
H4652/2
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
=
=
=
=
=
=
ROOM 2
L
N
F415
L
ART.F415
F411/2
A = 8
PL = 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2
ON
OFF
26
H4652/2
A = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I
25
A =
PL1 =
M =
FUN =
H4652/2
1
4
1
NOTE: for the configuration of bathroom 2 refer to bathroom 1, configuring for all the devices room A=6
170 MY HOME
Automation
ON
OFF
24
ON
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
F411/2
A = 8
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
8
3
O/I
8
1
O/I
ON
OFF
23
ON
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
A = 8
PL1 = 4
PL2 = 4
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
8
2
O/I
8
1
O/I
ON
OFF
22
H4652/2
A = 8
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I
A = 8
PL1 = 4
M1 =
21
3
1
O/I
2
1
O/I
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BATHROOM
L
N
F411/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
F411/1N
A = 3
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
ART.F411/1
H4652/2
F415
A = 4
PL = 1
ART.F415
H4652/2
A1 = 3
PL1 = 2
M =
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
F411/2
A = 4
PL = 2
4
1
O/I
2
1
O/I
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
11
10
ART.F411/1
H4890
H4652/2
A1 = 4
PL1 = 3
M =
F411/1N
A = 4
PL1 = 3
PL2 = 3
1 2 3 4
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
4
2
O/I
4
1
O/I
F411/2
A = 5
PL = 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
13
12
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
A = 5
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
5
1
O/I
2
1
O/I
A1 = 5
PL1 = 2
M =
14
ROOM 1
L
N
F415
F411/2
A = 7
PL = 1
L
ART.F415
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2
ON
OFF
20
HS4891
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
M = O/I
19
A =
PL1 =
M =
FUN =
F411/2
A = 7
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 3
1 2 3 4
H4652/2
1
4
1
ON
OFF
18
ON
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
7
3
O/I
7
1
O/I
ON
ON
OFF
17
OFF
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
A = 7
PL1 = 4
PL2 = 4
H4652/2
=
=
=
=
=
=
7
2
O/I
7
1
O/I
ON
OFF
16
H4652/2
A = 7
PL1 = 4
M1 =
A = 7
PL1 = 1
M1 = O/I
15
Automation
MY HOME 171
172 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
CONTENTS
MY HOME Burglar alarm

General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Start-up and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 173
GEnEral fEaturES
Professional safety
the MY HOME burglar-alarm
as for all the MY HOME system, the
RADIO EXPANSION
system is a safe and effective alarm
wiring of the of the burglar-alarm
By integrating the radio interface
system for the protection of people
system is based on BuS technology
with the BuS system it is possible to
and their belongings, capable of
all the devices are therefore
expand the burglar-alarm system
detecting any intrusions, promptly
connected using a non-polarised 2
with radio detection and control
notifying the event by means of
wire cable this features allows to
devices a range of optional functions
sound and visual alarms, and by
share information with the other MY
also become available:
sending telephone messages the
HOME BuS functions, and obtain
technical alarms - using a specific
system includes a central unit that
advanced applications
can be programmed for control
flood control of the room
and supervision of the system,
WIDE RANGE OF SOLUTIONS
management and control devices,
Central unit with integrated PStn
volumetric sensors (ir technology
or GSM communicator, managing
or dual ir+MW technology), for the
up to 72 sensors in 8 areas
internal protection of the house, and
transponder connectors, radio
perimeter sensors for the protection of
wave connectors, infrared and
doors and windows
numeric code connectors
By integrating special devices, the
Wired or radio devices
system can also perform "safety"
technical alarm management
functions, such as remote assistance
ademco Contact iD communication
for old people, and the protection of
sensor, it is possible to perform
remote assistance - to assure

peace of mind and prompt
assistance for people in difficulties
radio control it is also possible to

integrate a radio remote control, for
radio arming and disarming
protocol management
the house from gas or water leaks
Outdoor siren
Central unit with PSTN or gSM communicator
Power supply
230 Vac
BuS
IR+MW sensor
174 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
IR sensor
Basic contact
interface
Magnetic
contacts
INTEGRATION WITH OTHER MY

HOME SYSTEMS
using a special interface, the burglar-
RADIO DEVICES
BuS MY HOME SYSTEM
Remote control
Automation
alarm system can be easily integrated

with other MY HOME systems, to
obtain the following:
advanced applications resulting

from the synergy among the
individual systems (for example
automatic switch-on of the lights
Radio perimeter
detector
following a burglar-alarm event);
local central management or

remote central management via
the internet, using the MY HOME
WEB portal of the system
IMQ ALARM CERTIFICATION FOR

LEvEL 2 DEvICES
the Bticino burglar-
Central management
Radio volumetric
presence detector
alarm system
offers solutions for each protection
requirement: from the minimum
protection limit required in an
apartment, to the most stringent
levels offered by professional systems
Keypad connector with display
Radio receiver
SCS/SCS
interface
BuS
To any other systems
Key ring badge
transponder
Badge transponder
Transponder connector
Keypad connector
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 175
GEnEral fEaturES
advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people

the burglar-alarm system
WATER OR GAS LEAK ALARM
REMOTE ASSISTANCE
represents the basic infrastructure
Water or gas leak detection with
Forwarding of assistance request by
for alarm management, but the
message forwarding and immediate
calling personal numbers.
set of applications which can
shut-off of the water or gas piping.
Old, disabled or recovering people
be implemented can easily be
By integrating a water or gas sensor
may send an assistance request
expanded in fact the burglar-alarm
with the burglar-alarm system,
using a portable remote control
system can be used to ensure the
in case of such a danger event
the signal transmitted is detected
protection of people and their
occurring, the burglar-alarm system
by a radio receiver connected to the
belonging from dangerous events
activates a solenoid valve that orders
burglar-alarm system, which activates
such as gas leaks, flooding, etc with
the shutting-off of the water or gas
an indoor siren, and the telephone
alarm notifications (also remotely
distribution network at the same
communicator of the central unit,
through telephone messages)
time an indoor siren will be activated,
which forwards the assistance
Below are some examples:
while a burglar-alarm central unit
request to the set number(s)
communicator will forward a

telephone alarm message
TV/SAT
WATER OR gAS LEAK ALARM
REMOTE ASSISTANCE
TV/SAT
IPTV
Indoor siren
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
automazione
controllo
diffusione sonora
lan
Indoor siren
(optional)
controllo
antifurto carichi
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
luci
Relay actuator
Radio receiver
Radio receiver
Flooding
detector
Radio control for

remote assistance
176 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
controllo
tv
PANIC ALARM
ANTI-BURGLARY ALARM
in case of suspected noises inside
in case of danger, it is possible to
the home, the owner can manually
activate the burglar-alarm system
activate the burglar-alarm system
for sending a remote assistance
to generate an alarm signal if the
request through the central unit
system is armed all the sirens will
communicator the activation does
activate to confuse any intruders
not generate a sound alarm, thus
at the same time, the telephone
allowing the police force to surprise
communicator of the central unit will
the burglar, who is not aware that the
also send a remote assistance request
call has been made
if the system is not armed only the

indoor siren will activate (if present),
while the communicator will forward
the request for assistance
ANTI-BuRgLARY ALARM
TV/SAT
IPTV
Indoor siren (optional)
PANIC ALARM
TV/SAT
Technical alarm
interface
automazione
Technical alarm
interface
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
automazione
diffusione sonora
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo carichi
energia
controllo
lan
IPTV
luci
controllo carichi
tvcc
energia
N.C. pushbutton
N.C. pushbutton
STOP & GO: TELEPHONE

SIGNALLING OF TRIPPING OF
THE GENERAL CIRCUIT BREAKER
By connecting SalVaVita StOP&GO
the SalVaVita StOP&GO device
the burglar-alarm system will no
to the burglar-alarm system using a
automatically closes the tripped
longer try to reinstate the power
special interface, it is possible to receive
circuit breaker, reinstating the power
supply, but will forward a message
a telephone message in case of tripping
supply in fully safe conditions
of the circuit breaker due to storm,
However, if the fault remains, due to
electric disturbance, or system fault
an insulation defect or line overload,
TV/SAT
STOP & gO
diffusione sonora
Technical alarm
interface
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
Stop & go circuit breaker
IPTV
Control interface
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
Burglar alarm
tvcc
www
MY HOME 177
GEnEral fEaturES
advanced functions:
integration with other MY HOME functions
By sharing the same means of
therefore be managed also using a
the house in practice, when the
information transmission (BuS pair),
remote PC and the internet Below
doors or windows of a room are
the MY HOME applications can be
are some examples:
opened, the heating system of
easily integrated with each other to
By integrating the burglar-alarm
the temperature control zone of
optimise functions and to generate
system to the automation system
that room is automatically turned
new ones, thus meeting new
it is possible to automatically
off the opening and closing of
requirements
switch on all the lights of the home
doors and windows is detected by
in this respect, the Burglar-alarm
following an intrusion event
the burglar-alarm system contact
automatic disabling of the heating
system can be easily integrated with
interface, which reads the status
the automation or Video door entry
system
of the nC contact installed on the
system using a special interface f422
By integrating the burglar-alarm
door or window, and sends the
Of course by using several interfaces
system with the heating system,
information to the temperature
it will be possible to create fairly
it is possible to set a particularly
control system for the appropriate
complex systems, through the
useful function, which can bring
actions
integration of the burglar-alarm
in important energy savings, by
system with other systems with
avoiding unwanted dispersion of
different functions (sound system,
heat to the outside, for example
temperature control, etc ), which can
when changing the air inside
AuTOMATIC DISABLINg OF THE HEATINg

TV/SAT
IPTV SYSTEM
COuRTESY LIgHTS MANAgEMENT
Magnetic contact
diffusione sonora
Interface
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
TV/SAT
Opening of
TV/SAT
window
automazione
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
diffusione sonora
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
irrigazione
IPTV
IPTV
Interface
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
TV/SAT
general
light control
www
controllo carichi
energia
energia
luci
tvcc
IPTV
Control interface
automazione
178 MY HOME
diffusione sonora
Burglar alarm
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
System devices
the pages that follow show the main
Customisation of users
Managing scenarios
devices making up the MY HOME
the central unit can be programmed
it is possible to define up to 16
burglar alarm system for the full list,
to allow access inside the house
scenarios to activate, with one single
refer to the Catalogue section
based on two criteria that can be
operation, the burglar-alarm system
customised by the user; by time
for the areas of the home that need
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT
band, and by type of area
protecting
time band: access in protected areas
it is also possible to associate a
With telephone communicator,
is only allowed at certain times for
certain scenario to each individual
example, the maid is given a key that
key
PStn or PStn/GSM;
Without telephone
communicator
disables the burglar-alarm system

each tuesday between 9 00 o'clock
this is the device at the heart of
and 12 00 o'clock
the burglar-alarm system, capable
area: access inside the house is
of managing up to 72 sensors in 8
only permitted in some areas for
areas, and recognise up to 50 keys
example, the gardener is given a key
for the arming/disarming of the
that only gives him access to the tool
system using the large display, the
room
Base central unit
user can control the system status,

set advanced operating modes,
such as user customisation, scenario
management and activation of
Central unit with PSTN or gSM telephone communicator
advanced functions resulting from
Protected areas
the integration with other MY HOME

systems
it's also preset for the ademco
Contact iD function, for forwarding
telephone messages to vigilance
bodies following a burglar-alarm or
System state
technical alarm event
Night scenario: total protection of the day area and perimeter protection of the house.
Work scenario: complete protection of the house.
LEgEND
Perimeter protection
Day area IR protection
Night area IR protection
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 179
GEnEral fEaturES
Control and protection devices

ACTIvATORS
these devices can be used to arm/

disarm the system by entering a
numeric code or using a transponder
key
using the keypad connector with
Transponder key reader
display it is also possible to select

the areas of the house that need
protecting (separation), and to
know the system status through the
information shown on the display
Radio remote control with built-in

transformer
CONTACT INTERFACES
for the connection to the burglaralarm system of normally closed (nC)
or normally open (nO) magnetic
contacts for the protection of doors
and windows
DIN contact
interface
IR SENSOR
IR barriers
for the protection of the areas of the

house
BASIC contact
interface
With ir sensor
With ir sensor and MW

(microwave) sensor
for the protection of doors and
windows, ir barriers are also
available, in lengths between 0 5
and 2 metres
Note: For the full list of all the available devices refer to the Catalogue section.
180 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
IR+MW sensor
Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms

IR SENSOR AND RADIO
MAGNETIC CONTACT
Window-breaking
radio detectors
Battery powered, these devices can

be used to protect rooms where no
BUS wiring is present.
Radio IR sensor
WIRE-RADIO INTERFACE
Wire-radio
interface
It allows integration with the wired

burglar-alarm system of radio
technology devices, such as the radio
remote control in the previous page,
and the devices listed below.
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL

ALARMS
This family includes devices such as:
The radio control, to send an
assistance request;
The radio sensor, to detect the
Radio control
for Remote assistance
presence of water;
The Auxiliary channel interface, for
integrating gas and water sensors
Radio water sensor
with the burglar-alarm system;

The Basic module contact
interface.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 181
GEnEral fEaturES
System selection criteria

today the wire burglar-alarm system
of structure to be made safe and the
area to be protected
can satisfy any installation needs in
functions required
alarm modes
the home the criteria should thus be
four factors are to be considered
Protections
indicated for a correct choice of the
when choosing a system
System control
components, depending on the type

AREA TO bE PROTECTED
AVAILAbLE
FUNCTIONS
CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/

COMMUNICATOR
gSM COMMUNICATOR
bASE CENTRAL UNIT
L/N/NT4600/4
Polyx Alarm
3485B
Polyx Alarm
3485
HC/HD/HS4601
L/N/NT4601
3486
Maximum number of
sensors
36
36
36
72
72
Maximum division
into zones (areas)
SYSTEM CONTROL
WITH RADIO REMOTE CONTROL
WITH IR REMOTE CONTROL (ONLY WITH

WITH TRANSPONDER
CENTRAL UNIT L/N/NT4600/4 AND 3486)
HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4618
Radio receiver
348220 Radio remote

control
HC/HD/HS4604, L/N/
NT4604
Activator
WITH NUMERIC CODE
HC/HD/HS4607, L/N/
NT4607, AM5787
Transponder reader
HC/HD/HS4603/4
L/N/NT4603/4
IR divider
HC/HD/HS4607/4
L/N/NT4607/4
AM5787/4
Divider transponder
4050
Remote control
3530S, 3540
Badge, key-ring
HC/HD/HS4606, L/N/
NT4606, AM5786
Keypad connector
HC/HD/HS4608
L/N/NT4608
Keypad connector with
display
182 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
PROTECTIONS
AREA CONTROL
Fixed sensitivity
PERIMETER CONTROL
Variable sensitivity
Sensors + Barriers
Detectors
3510 FLUSH mounted magnetic

detector
Swivel IR
(distance 6 m)
L/N/NT4611B
AM5791B
Fixed IR (distance 3 9m)

HC/HD/HS4610
L/N/NT4610
AM5790
3516 Window breaking detectors
3514 Cable detector for shutters
3511 Visibly
magnetic detector
3513 Magnetic detector for metal

main doors
Wall mounting IR
(distance 6 m)
N4640B
Wall mounting IR
(distance 3
9 m)
N4640
Wall mounting
IR (distance 4
12 m)
3440
3444 Window-breaking radio

detectors
3445 Cable radio detector for rolling

shutters
3512 Magnetic detector for swing

doors
3510M Brass FLUSH mounted

magnetic detector
Dual-technology (distance 10 m)
HC/HD/HS4613
L/N/NT4613
Swivel IR (distance 3 9 m)
HC/HD/HS4611
L/N/NT4611
AM5791
3518, 3518/50, 3518/150, 3519

IR barriers for windows
3442 Radio opening detector
Brass FLUSH mounted magnetic

detector 3510PB
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 183
GEnEral fEaturES

ALARM MODES
OPTION1 back-up battery in the outdoor siren
POWER SUPPLY
Option2 - back-up battery in the switchboard
OUTDOOR SIREN
INDOOR SIREN
POWER SUPPLY
HC/HD/HS/
N/NT4070
E47ADCN
4072L
E46ADCN
OUTDOOR SIREN
INDOOR SIREN
4072A
HC/HD/HS/
N/NT4070
Only outdoor siren

Outdoor and Indoor siren
Only indoor siren
Central unit with
communicator
No siren
3486
Polyx Alarm
3485
Warning: if both internal and external sirens are installed, tampering with the system when disarmed will only cause the indoor siren to go off.
ACTIVATION OF THE ALARM DEVICES DEPENDINg ON THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM AND THE DANgER EVENT
SYSTEM ARMED
Alarm event
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren 4072A

(without internal back-up
battery)
Outdoor siren 4072L

(with internal back-up
battery)
Relay actuator 3479 and

F481 (1)
Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B

the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
units
units (2)
Burglar
Rings
Rings
Rings
Activates
Calls
Activates
Tamper
Rings
Rings
Rings
Activates
Calls
Activates
Tamptest
Rings
Rings
Rings
Activates
Calls
Activates
Anti-panic
Rings
Rings
Rings
Activates
Calls
Activates
Silence (burglar alarm)
Does not ring
Does not ring
Does not ring
Does not
activate
Calls
Does not
activate
Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.
184 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
SYSTEM DISARMED
Alarm event
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren 4072A

(without internal back-up
battery)
Outdoor siren 4072L

(with internal back-up
battery)
Relay actuator 3479 and

F481 (1)
Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B

the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
units
units (2)
Tamper
Rings
Does not ring
Does not ring
Activates
Forwarding of event
notification message
Activates
Tamptest
Does not ring

Notification
Does not ring

Notification
Does not ring

Notification
Does not activate
Forwarding of event
Does not activate
in central units with display, in central units with display, in central units with display,
or LED notification in central or LED notification in central or LED notification in central
unit L/N/NT4601
unit L/N/NT4601
unit L/N/NT4601
Tampering (disconnection
of the central unit from the
system)
Rings
Does not ring
Does not ring
Activates
Forwarding of event
Activates
Tampering (disconnection of
the siren from the system)
Rings
Rings
Does not ring
Does not activate
Forwarding of event
Does not activate
Anti-panic
Rings
Does not ring
Does not ring
Activates
Forwarding of assistance
request message
Activates
Silence (burglar alarm)
Does not ring

Does not ring
Does not ring
Does not activate
It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4
central unit is installed
Forwarding of assistance
request message
Does not activate
Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 185
GEnEral fEaturES

CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION
in addition to the criteria explained in
entrusted with a key, which during
AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL
the previous pages, the selection of
UNIT 3486 OR 3485. Switching on
the above times deactivates the
the central unit can be made taking
of all home lights. if the burglar-
burglar-alarm system of the cellar
into account the possible available
alarm system is integrated with the
all other areas of the house are still
functions, such as:
automation system, it can be set
protected by the burglar-alarm
KEYS ONLY OPERATING DURING
in such a way that if burglar-alarm
system, armed by the owner when
CERTAIN TIME BANDS
event occurs, some or all the lights
leaving the home for work
Enabling for the cleaning staff in
of the house will come on, inducing
order to be able to do her job, the
the burglar to leave
maid has been given a key for the
AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL

UNIT 3485B. Activation of
division scenario. Each time the
KEYS ONLY OPERATING IN
disarming of the burglar-alarm
CERTAIN AREAS. Enabling access
key is used (transponder, radio
system across the whole house,
for the gardener. the cellar is
remote control or numeric key)
but only between 9 00 oclock and
used to store gardening tools and
to activate the system, a specific
12 00 oclock, on normal working
is made accessible by the owner
division scenario will be activated
days During all other times and
of the house every tuesday from
holidays the key does not operate
2 00 to 6 00 pm in order to do
his job, the gardener has been
CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION

AVAILAbLE
FUNCTIONS
4 ZONE
FLUSH-MOUNTED CENTRAL UNIT
CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/

COMMUNICATOR
gSM COMMUNICATOR
Polyx Alarm
3485B
Polyx Alarm
3485
L/N/NT4600/4
HC/HD/HS4601
L/N/NT4601
3486
Max. no. of keys that

can be saved (1)
30
20
50
50
Key constraints (day/

zone/time) (2)
NO
NO
SI
SI
Max. no. of scenarios
NO
16
16
Max. no. of
automations
NO
10 (see note 4)
20 (see note 3)
20 (see note 3)
PC programming with
software
NO
TiSecurity Basic for firmware update
TiSecurity POLYX for the

programming of parameters and
firmware update
TiSecurity GSM for the

programming of parameters and
firmware update
NOTE: (1) Keys are any control devices such as IR remote control, radio remote control, transponder key, and numeric key. (2) Each key can be set to only operate certain days of
the week, in certain areas, or during certain time bands. (3) If the system is integrated with other MY HOME systems, for example lights automation, it is possible to switch all
the lights of the house on, if a burglar-alarm system event occurs. (4) Of the 10 possible automations, one is activated using an auxiliary relay inside the central unit. The other
9 are combined to Arming, disarming, Date and Time events.
186 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION
Project approach
The project of setting up a new MY
ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS
HOME BURGLAR-ALARM system can
Once the above information is
Division into zones
be completed in two ways:
available, the following must be
For a better management of the
Functional this is a good
agreed:
sensors needed to protect the
compromise between cost and
Selection of the protection:
property, it is recommended that the
safety. The main priority is selecting
Volumetric protection is normally
system is divided in at least 2 ZONES:
which functions to include, and
the basic protection. This decision
a perimeter and a volumetric zone
the possibility of making the
must be made taking into account
(up to 9 sensors per zone)
system ready for future expansion
various aspects, with the main
is also taken into account. This
one being the actual location of
the system should be divided into at
solution includes, for example,
the property. For properties on
least 4 ZONES:
both volumetric and perimeter
the ground or 1st floor, perimeter
2 Perimeter ZONES (day/night areas) 2
protection. Advantages: high level
protection and/or protection of the
Volumetric ZONES (day/night areas)
of flexibility and increase in the
rolling shutters, is recommended.
value of the property.
Perimeter protection is also
or in villas, the system should be
recommended if external access
divided into 4 ZONES or more.
Economical based on an
In properties with more than 2 rooms,
In properties with several rooms,
economic, low cost installation It
points near balconies are also
If the system does not include an
does not exclude the use of the
present (e.g. rain water pipes,
external burglar-alarm arming /
different features offered by the
gutters, nearby balconies or
disarming device, a time delay
system, although it only calls for
terraces). With perimeter protection,
should fitted on the sensors
the use of one type of protection
the system can also be armed when
protecting the main entry.
(volumetric), and does not take into
people or animals are inside the
Otherwise, the entrance area
account future system expansions.
property.
should be kept as part ZONE 1, on
Advantages: low cost installation.
which a time delay can be set as
In order to ensure a good work setup,

the following elements are needed:
standard.
Example of house split into 4 zones
Planimetry (absolutely necessary),

of the living unit, so that the
locations where the system
Zone 4 - bedroom
elements are to be installed can be

defined beforehand. It would also
be appropriate to have a furniture
plan.
Definition of the protections,

necessary to define which system
Zone 3 - living room
devices to include (volumetric,

perimeter or combined protection),
and check that the protecting
devices actually cover the
appropriate areas.
Zone 2 - kitchen
Zone 1 - entrance
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 187
System measurement
MAXIMUM REACHABLE
DISTANCES
availability of current based on the
that can be connected to the BUS
length of the cable.
connections between the two
depends on the total absorption of
During sizing ensure that the
furthest-away devices must not be
the same and the distance between
following rules are complied with:
more than 175 metres.
the point of connection and the
When two outdoor sirens are
The maximum length of the
The maximum length of the
power supply.
installed the connection lines
connections must not be more
The power supply can supply up to
between siren and power
than 350 metres
1.2 A (E46ADCN) or 1 A (E47ADCN);
supply must be separate and the
the maximum number of devices will
maximum length of each should
therefore be determined by the sum
not be more than 100 metres,
of the absorptions of the individual
while the sum of the two should
devices to be installed.
not be more than 175 metres.
In calculating the absorptions it will

also be necessary to consider the
MAXIMUM BUS CABLE LENGTHS

A = 100 m max
B = 100 m max
A+ B
= 175 m max
A+C
= 175 m max
A + B + C = 350 m max
+ - C1 COM C2
12V
C1
C2
A
B
Note: During this check do not consider the connection between NC (normally closed) contacts and the corresponding interface module.
188 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
SYSTEMS WITH AND WITHOUT

Outdoor siren
Traditional burglar-alarm systems -
The power supply unit and the
which require an outdoor siren as it
battery are installed in wall mounted
is equipped with the back-up battery
enclosures F115/8A and F115/8B
of the whole system - can sometimes
which guarantee protection against
cause inconvenience to neighbours
tampering attempts thanks to special
in case of an alarm, especially in
self-protection systems.
condominium flats. BTicino gives
The outdoor siren is now considered
you the opportunity to avoid this
optional: However, if you want to
drawback by using a specific power
install it, use siren 4072A.
supply unit instead of the power
Warning: in order to install the devices and assure
supply E46ADCN. This power supply
level 2 protection according to CEI 79-22 standard
unit can be used for connecting a
use wall mounted boxes fitted with tampering and
back-up battery (not supplied). It
tearing protection devices(to prevent units being
is easily available and necessary to
pulled away).
power the system in case of power
These boxes are also needed when installing
failure from the mains. The battery
contact interfaces F482, or batteries with sizes not
to be used with it must have the
compatible with switchboards F115/8A.
Power supply
E47ADCN
following features: 12 V, 7,2 24 Ah.
TYPE OF SYSTEM
+
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN
REQUIRED
Power supply E46ADCN
Siren 4072L
Battery inside the siren

3505/12
+
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN
OPTIONAL
Power supply E47ADCN
Siren 4072A
Battery 12 V
7.2/12/24 Ah
Note: the table summarises the combinations implement based on the type of system to create.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 189
System measurement
CHECK ELECTRICAL
CONSUMPTIONS
if you use the E46ADCN power
if you use the E47ADCN power
connections, it is necessary to
supply unit and the absorption
supply unit, you will only need
determine the sum of the total
is less than 150mA, you will only
to install a 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah or 24
currents absorbed by the devices
need to install a siren 4072L; if the
Ah battery. The following chart
installed. This verification will
absorption is higher than 150mA,
indicates the maximum absorption
determine whether it is necessary to
it will be necessary to install 2
required by the system, according
equip the system with 1 or 2 outdoor
sirens 4072L; However, the total
to the battery installed and to
sirens or the type of battery to use.
absorption must not exceed
the level of autonomy required.
This is necessary in order to provide
300mA. For both cases, a 24 hour
However, the maximum absorption
the most complex system with a
duration is guaranteed.
must not exceed 700 mA. The
After checking the length of the
minimum required autonomy of 24
maximum consumptions of the
hours, at a temperature of 25C in
self-powered devices have already
case of power failure from the mains.
been deducted from the maximum

current that can be supplied by the
power supply unit.
MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO THE DEVICES ON THE BUS WITH POWER

SUPPLY E47ADCN
Tables of unit absorptions

DEVICE
Absorbed current
AUTONOMY IN CASE OF
LACK OF NETWORK
4 zone central unit
25 mA
Central unit 3486
50 mA (stand-by) max 120 mA
Central unit 3485
55 mA (stand-by) max 90 mA
Central unit 3485B; HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
50 mA
Activator
8 mA
Transponder reader
12 mA
Zone divider 1 4; Zone divider 1 to 4 transponder
15 mA
5 - 8 zone expander
10 mA
Disconnector with key
5 mA
28 mA
Keypad connector
5.5 mA
Fixed sensitivity IR detector; Passive IR detector;

Passive IR articulated detector
4.5 mA
Dual-technology detector
5 mA 35 mA **
IR barriers
50 mA
Contact interface
5 mA
Contact interface - 12 V
5 mA *
Contact interface - 2 DIN mod.
6 mA
24 h
Type of battery installed

7.2 Ah
12 Ah
24 Ah
110 mA (*)
190 mA (*)
380 mA
15 h
180 mA
300 mA
600 mA
8h
340 mA
560 mA
700 mA
(*) In this case the system complies with level 2 of the CEI 79-2 standard.
MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO 12 V DEVICES WITH POWER SUPPLY E47/12

(This power supply is used, for example, in IR barriers)
AUTONOMY IN CASE OF
LACK OF NETWORK
24 h
Type of battery installed

7.2 Ah
12 Ah
24 Ah
Interface 3480
5 mA
300 mA (*)
500 mA (*)
1A
Relay actuator
20 mA
6 mA
15 h
480 mA
800 mA
1,6 A
Technical alarm interface

Radio receiver
15 mA
8h
900 mA
1.5 A
2A
Indoor siren
8 mA
Outdoor siren 4072A
5 mA
Interface F422
2 mA
(*) In this case the system complies with level 1 of the CEI 79-2 standard.
Note: in order to ensure level 2 performances according to CEI 79-2 standard in case of lack of
network power supply, use batteries capable of ensuring system autonomy for at least 24 hours.
190 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Note:* Plus the absorption of the detector connected to it

** Consider: - 35mA for the first detector installed; 5 mA for all the others.
Each system can be made up of a minimum and maximum number of devices as shown in the following tables.
CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 36 SENSORS
1
4
2
5
3
6
OK
L/N/NT4600/4, AM4600/4
3485B
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
Not managed
Not managed
Not managed
KEYS
IR remote control
Not managed
Transponder
Numeric code
Keypad connector
Transponder reader or
Divider transponder
IR activator, zone 1-4 divider
9 (in total)
Not managed
Not managed
Not managed
Not managed
(IR and contact interface)
9 for each zone 1-4

(total 36)
9 for each zone 1-4

(total 36)
9 for each zone 1-4

(total 36)
Technical alarm interface and actuator relay
Radio receiver
9 for each zone 0-4

(total 45)
9 for each zone 0-4

(total 45)
9 for each zone 0-4

(total 45)
MAX 30 in total
0
MAX 20 in total
MAX 20 in total
Activators and dividers

9 for each zone 0 4
(total 45)
9 for each zone 0 4

(total 45)
9 for each zone 0-4(total

45)
Detectors
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 191
System measurement
CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 72 SENSORS
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
Maximum No.
IR remote control
Not managed
Not managed
Transponder
Numeric code
3
6
9
3486
3485
Minimum No.
2
5
8
0
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
MAX 50 in total
KEYS
MAX 50 in total
Activators and dividers:

Keypad connector
Transponder reader or
Divider transponder
IR activator, zone 1-4 divider

with 5-8 expansion unit
Not managed
Not managed
9 in total
(IR and contact interface)
9 for each zone 1 8

(total 72)
9 for each zone 1 8

(total 72)
Technical alarm interface and actuator relay
9 for each zone 1 8

(total 72)
9 for each zone 1 8

(total 72)
9 for each zone 0 8 (total 81)
9 for each zone 0 8 (total 81)
Detectors
NUMBER OF SIRENS
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
Minimum No.
Maximum No.
E46ADCN
Not managed
3 (2 if a central unit with display is

installed)
Not managed
2 ( 4072L)
E47ADCN
3 (1)
2 ( 4072A)
NOTE (1): the total number of internal/outdoor sirens must not exceed 3. Example: 2 indoor sirens and one outdoor siren.
192 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system

100 m2 apartment on the ground
through the physical barriers (rolling
to ensure this flexibility, the
floor of an apartment complex, with
shutters/window glass) without
various sensors should be grouped
balcony and continuous vertical
actually opening the door or window
appropriately
protection parapet on one side
in this case, the magnetic detector on
in this case, the system can be
the main entry consists of a door,
the opening would in fact be unable
divided as follows:
while all french windows can be
to generate the alarm
magnetic contact and volumetric
considered as alternative accesses
this type of setup would also give the
these access ways are all controlled
user the possibility to customise the
by magnetic contacts
system to meet personal needs
in view of the position, it is
this gives clear advantages on a
recommended that volumetric
management point of view
detectors are installed in all rooms,
for example:
thus increasing the level of safety
perimeter protection can be used
this will also make the system easier

to manage
detector for the living room: zone 1;
magnetic contacts for doors and

windows: zone 2;
daytime area volumetric detectors

(kitchen, studio): zone 3;
sleeping area volumetric detector

(bedrooms, hallways, service
bathroom); zone 4;
during the night;
volumetric sensors can be armed,
it is recommended that volumetric
whilst leaving perimeter sensors
systems are always installed, as
disarmed, during short absences
the intruder may be able to break
Arrangement of the components and wiring layout
Study
Bedroom
Kitchen
SYMBOL LEgEND
Activator
Bathroom
Hallway
Burglar-alarm central unit

Contact interface
Living room
IR sensor
Balcony
Second
bathroom
Children
bedroom
Magnetic contact
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 193
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system

The power supply unit can be
disturbed, and will be unable to hear
During the installation of the system,
installed in the area of the electric
the police force approaching.
the job of the installer can be made
distribution board.
An outdoor siren with optic diffuser
easier by filling a system card,
The central u-itnit must be installed in
shall also be installed outside on the
including all the configuration
a protected area, that can be reached
balcony, for easy identification from
information in one document, as well
easily by the user.
the outside, of the system in alarm
as consumptions and positioning
In order to facilitate arming of the
state.
of the devices. The card will also
system, an auxiliary transponder
When positioning the volumetric
be useful after installation should,
arming device should also be
sensors, it will be necessary to check
for example the system need
included.
the coverage area and comply
extending. Detailed information on
If installation of the arming device
with the recommendations of the
the compiling and use of the system
on the outside of the property is not
following pages.
card can be found in the system
possible or desired, the activation of
Using the system diagram, ensure
manuals.
the volumetric sensor of the living
that 24 hour autonomy is guaranteed
room should be delayed. On the
with only one outdoor siren.
other hand, if the arming device

is installed outside, zone 1 will be
activated without delay.
The system will be completed by the
installation of an indoor siren in the
hallway area, so that the intruder will
be confused by the high noise, and
List of Items required

Description
ITEM
Consumption QuantitY
Central unit with dialling device
3486
50 mA
Transponder activator
L4607
12 mA
Transponder
3540
Power supply
E46ADCN
Jointed pass. IR detector
L4611
4.5 mA
Contact interface
3480
5 mA
5 mA
Outdoor siren
4072L
Indoor siren
4070
Outdoor siren storage battery
3505/12
1
1
Indoor siren storage battery
3505/6
Anti-tamper device
L4630
13
Magnetic contact
Configurators
3501K
* item to be selected based on the doors and windows characteristics
194 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
installation of modular devices

IN FLUSH MOUNTED BOXES
IN WALL MOUNTED BOXES
the wire burglar-alarm system is
if the flush mounted box is different
this series of boxes already has a
compatible with systems made using
from the Bticino standard (box with
supporting frame for the devices and
the axOlutE, liVinGliGHt and
reduced depth, less than 52 mm),
the liVinGliGHt boxes have white
Mtix series and therefore uses the
proceed as follows: completely
cover plate When installing modular
same boxes, supporting frames and
remove the tamper rod
devices inside wall mounted boxes or
cover plates When using standard
corner boxes proceed as follows:
flush mounted boxes (depth 52 mm)
remove the cap (A) from the
embedded in the mortar level with
bottom of the devices by rotating
the plaster/tile, or in any case where
it 90;
the maximum depth from the bottom

of the box to the finished wall is less
Do not fit the clear protection

cover (B)
< 52 mm
than 60 mm, cut the tamper rod (1)
fit the devices inside the wall
at the first reference notch, insert it in
mounted (or corner) boxes
the appropriate housing, rotate it 90

and then remove it completely
in this case, the anti-tamper
Place the tip to the bottom of the box
protection (C) is already on the box
without pushing too hard and cut the
Pay attention to ensure that the
rod level with the box insert the rod
tamper rod of the box fits perfectly
(1) protection device (tamper) in the
500 - 503E - 504E - 506L
in the preset hole at the back of the
appropriate housing, rotate 90, and
IMPIANT O
90
52 mm
ON
OF F
device
remove completely
Warning: BTicino wall mounted boxes are suitable
for installation of devices with level 1 performance.

For level 2 performance (CEI 79-2 standard) use the
< 60 mm
90
box 502PA for angle installation.
2
IMPIANT O
However, if the maximum depth from

the bottom of the box to the finished
ON
OF F
< 52 mm
wall plane is 60 mm, insert the
appropriate rod protection device
90
fix the devices to the flush mounted
(tamper) in its housing (1), rotate it
boxes
90, and remove it completely
Warning: the use of the tamper rod for the protection
500 - 503E - 504E - 506L
of FLuSH MOuNTED BOXES devices with BTicino
supports is a necessary requirement to assure level
1
90
IMPIANT O
60 mm
ON
OF F
2 protection in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard.

For the selection of the flush mounted boxes see the
general Installation Catalogue.
Check that there is no damage at the bottom of
the box in the tamper rod working area. Take the

necessary measures to solve any problems.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 195
Modular power supplies

All the power supplies are sold with
Installation of power supply E47ADCN -
Installation of power supply E46ADCN
Tamper device against the opening
E47/12
These devices are installed inside
of the switchboard.
These devices are installed inside the
standard flush mounted or wall
Depending on the power supply
switchboard F115/8A.
mounted switchboards.
being used, two types of installations
If required, install the back-up
Warning: In order to assure level 2 performance
are possible.
battery(ies) in the appropriate
in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be
housing of the 7.2 Ah enclosure
necessary to use flush mounted switchboards with
F115/8B.
opening protection, or wall mounted switchboards
For batteries of higher capacity check
with opening and tear protection. If the power
the compatibility with the F115/8B
supply is installed in switchboards without door,
enclosure. When the N.C. contact is also
ensure that it is not subjected to water sprays.
being used for additional tampering
Ensure that the vents are not obstructed. A two-pole
protection of the battery, connect the
thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact
contact on the F115/8B enclosure to a
separation of at least 3 mm must be used, positioned
tamper line of the system.
near the power supply. The function of the circuit
Warning: for batteries of sizes not compatible
breaker is to disconnect and protect the power
with F115/8B enclosures use the required DIN
supply.
switchboard in the general BTicino catalogue.
NOTE: For more information and for the wiring
In order to assure level 2 performance in accordance
requirements refer to the instructions supplied with
with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be necessary to use
the power supplies.
90
2
1
90
wall mounted switchboards with opening and

tear protection. If the power supply is installed in
switchboards without door, ensure that it is not
subjected to water sprays.
Battery
N.C. contact
196 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Central unit with display

WALL MOUNTED INSTALLATION
after fixing the base and performing
all connections, install the central
OF F
unit ensuring that the cables are
ON
BUS
arranged in a way that they will not

be damaged NOTE Before installing
the burglar-alarm central unit

ensure that the sliding switch on the
back is in the ON position.
WARNINGS FOR ALL CENTRAL

UNITS
Warning: both in wall mounted

installation and in MultiBOx
switchboards, in order to ensure
compliance with level 2 of CEi 79-2
Wall mounted installation of 3485 or 3485B central units. This same method is also used for the installation of the
3486 central unit.
standard, it will be necessary to use

the 3484 tamper for the protection of
the GSM antenna, as explained in the
installation manual of the central unit
impianto
on
off
PROTECTION OF PSTN CENTRAL

UNITS FROM LIGHTNING
it is good practice to protect the

system from lightning by using surge
protective devices, SPD, belonging to
2
3
class ii
for the protection of burglar-alarm

central units 3485 and 3486 from
surges from the telephone line, the use

of the Plt1 device is recommended,
connecting the corresponding earth
clamp to the "earth" reference of the
impianto
Installation of the 3486 central unit inside a

MuLTIBOX switchboard.
on
off
SPD limiter installed in the apartment

switchboard for further details refer
to the instructions supplied with the
central units or the relevant tECHniCal
SHEEtS
NOTE: the central units are supplied with the tamper line clamps (-/T1) circuited for the use of the local
tamper T1 (wall mounted installation with metal base). This is compulsory to ensure that the central
unit complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standards in terms of possible tampering (tear protection). For
installations inside MuLTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for
the tamper function. For further information see the central unit installation manual.
Local tamper T1
Tamper line (see note)
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 197
IR detectors
ADJUSTABLE IR DETECTOR
radio ir detector 3440
HC/HS/L/N/NT4611
IR MINI DETECTOR N4640

AND N4640B
In addition to the indications shown
Two installation modes are possible:
The base of the detector has a
for the installation of modular
Wall mounted installation
particular shape that enables wall
devices, also take into account
Angle installation
mounted installation in 4 different
that before installing the swivel IR

sensor the adjustment fixing screw
(1) at the back of the detector must
be loosened in order to allow the
Before permanently securing the object ensure that

the radio communication with the HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4618 receiver is working correctly.
detector to turn.
modes:
Angle installation
Front angle installation
Tilted angular installation
Note: the screw will be tightened after the System

test and protected zone check, thus setting the
central unit in maintenance mode.
molla
tamper
Angle installation
Angle installation
MOD
Note: for other installation modes see the instruction

leaflet.
198 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Various sensors
LAYOUT FOR MAGNETIC
FLOODING DETECTOR HA/
CONTACTS
HB/L/4619
During the installation of the
Fix the device to the wall using
Place the rope contact preferably
magnetic contacts, if a specific
double sided adhesive tape or screws
in the middle of the rolling shutter
underground conduit is not being
and plugs. After completing the
box and then fasten it. Then fasten
installed, ensure appropriate surface
configuration fit the key covers using
the end of the rope to the rolling
trunking up to the jambs of doors
the spacers supplied.
shutter with a screw. The rope can be
and windows. The wires of the
Note: If the sensor cable needs shortening, cut the
extended up to 3.4 m.
contacts will then have to be run to
excess off and connect to the probe terminals.
NOTE: The rope must be set between the window
DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS
the point on the door or window,
and the rolling shutter. Check condition of rope and
where the sensor is being installed.
its sliding movement periodically.
The contact wires have a reduced
In order to prevent the rope from rubbing against
section, which will not cause any
a sharp part of the rolling shutter, you can glue a
problems when refitting the jambs.
square (not supplied) using double-sided adhesive

tape.
Magnetic
contacts
Key-cover
L/N/NT4919
Led
Test
Reset
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 199
Various sensors
piezoelectric window-
RADIO MAGNETIC CONTACT 3442
breaking detector 3516/3444
The device must be installed inside
The detector must be applied to the
the house, on doors and windows,
glazed part to be protected using the
including sliding ones, and similar
special double-sided adhesive tape
openings, as shown in the figure;
(supplied).
the magnetic contact must be
The glazed part must be between 1.5
fixed in place using the appropriate
and 6 mm thick; the diagonal length
position adjustment spacers, in order
must not exceed 3 m (Fig. 1).
to activate the alarm as soon as the

movable part of the door or window
starts to move away.
Reference
tab
2
25 mm
min.
25 mm
min.
3 m to 6
.5
AX
M m1
o
r
f
ss
ne
mm
ick
Th
Note: Clean and dry glasses before applying the detector.
Note: To ensure correct positioning align the reference notches of the magnetic
Press hard to ensure optimum adhesion.
contact of the transmitter
200 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
IR BARRIERS 3518 3518/50

3518/150 3519
the two columns must be installed
Each column consists of:
open (break) the cable passage
one in front of the other (fig 1) in the
aluminium section bar
hole at the base of the unit
same direction (both terminal boards
top terminal (base + cover + screw)
placed at the top side or bottom side)
Bottom terminal (base + cover +
(fig 2); the height must be as close

as possible to the ground or to the
lower part of the window (fig 3), with
the terminal strips can be

temporarily removed to help cable
connection
screw)
4 screws + 4 screw anchors for wall
for the electric connection, refer to

the Connection diagrams section
mounted
no fixed or removable obstructions
installation
WARNINg: Do not use a shielded cable when
that may interfere with the rays
follow the instructions on the
connecting the barriers to the contact interface.
(fig 4) so that the receivers are not
instructions leaflet, taking into
directly exposed to sunrays (fig 5)
account the following requirements:
and are not exposed to the rays of
the cable can be inserted from the
other transmitted, either directly or
bottom (inside the wall), or from
by reflection
the outside (exposed) in this case
fig. 1
fig. 2
fig. 4
fig. 5
fig. 3
RX
Note: for further information see the instruction leaflet supplied with the barriers
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 201
Outdoor siren
1. Remove the two screws (1) and take
4. Insert the screw plastic plugs into the
7. Put the battery (1) or 12V-12Ah
off the external cover (2).
holes and partly tighten the top screws
battery - into the special housing
(1) and the tamper screw (2).
without connecting the Faston

terminals. Connect the electronic
card as shown in the instruction leaflet
supplied with the siren.

1
2
2. Remove the four screws (1) and pull

out the internal protection cover (2).
5. Adjust the tamper screw by using

the notch (1) on the drilling template,
as shown in the picture.

Warning: If the installation or the adjustment of
the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
2
system will not work.

1
1
TEMPLATE
3. By using the drilling template (1),

position the hole (2) near the wireoutlet pipe and scribe the 5 holes.
NOTE: use a 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.
6. Attach the siren to the two top

screws (1). Tighten the two bottom
screws (2). Tighten the four screws
2
completely.
1
1
202 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
CONFIGURATION
General concepts
Configuring the devices of the
perform special functions such as the
CONNECTION / REMOVAL OF
burglar-alarm system means
management of technical alarms (gas
CONFIGURATORS
assigning them their respective
leaks, floods, etc.) or alarm signalling
Before configuring the devices
addresses and operating modes
by means of auxiliary channels.
remove the clear protection cover (1).
The address allows you to solely
The address of the device is
To facilitate connection or removal of
identify each device within the
determined by assigning a value to
the configurators use the appropriate
system; conversely, the operating
the positions:
tool (2).
modes are the specific functions
Z to specify the number of the
performed by each device (central
assigned zone (compulsory) of the
unit, detectors, sirens, etc.).
device, if this belongs to the group
In addition to the typical functions
of detectors. If the device belongs to
of any burglar-alarm system, such as
the group of connectors, this position
the tripping delay of a detector or the
must not be configured;
management of a balanced contact
N to specify the progressive number
line, it is possible through the
(compulsory) of the device within the
configuration of the operating mode
above-mentioned zone.
to enable the devices in order to
Activator device
Auxiliary devices
ZONE 9
ZONE 0
Z =0
N =1
Central unit
Z =0
N =2
N = 1
AUX = MOD = -
N = 9
AUX = MOD = -
1 9 max
1 9 max
BUS
Sensors
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ZONE 8
ZONE ...
ZONE 1
Z =1
N =1
Z =1
N =9
72 devices max.
1 9 max
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 203
Z
N
AUX
Configuration
General concepts
Z
N
AUX
Example of IR detector configuration.
AUXILIARY CHANNELS
First sensor belonging to zone 2, with
In addition to the typical functions,
the three lanes and act accordingly,
pulse count function enabled.
the devices of the My Home Burglar-
based on their configuration.
alarm system can also perform a
If the there is any information
range of functions independent
connected to intrusion events, the
VALUE
from the status of the burglar-alarm
devices activate local signallings
system itself (armed or disarmed).
(sirens), or remote signallings
No.
This is possible thanks to a particular
(telephone dialling devices); if on
MOD
communication channel of the
the other hand the information
AUX
none
burglar-alarm and automation
relates to technical alarms, based
bus, called auxiliary channel, used
on the set operating parameters,
Configurator
position
Z
N
AUX
by some devices (such as the
the devices activate to generate
auxiliary channel interface or the
alarm or prealarm signals, or to
radio receiver) for the transmission
reinstate safety within the controlled
of information such as health
environment. Some typical examples
emergency, robbery emergency etc.
are the application for the automatic
In order to better clarify this concept,
shutting off of the gas piping
the burglar-alarm system may be
following the detection of natural
compared to a 3 lane road, with
gas leaks, described in this guide, and
Example of contact interface
the first one used for the transit of
the operation of the burglar-alarm
configuration. Fourth sensor of zone
police cars (information connected
central unit in ADEMCO protocol
3, with balanced protection of the
to intrusions or burglary), while the
mode (forwarding of telephone
contact line.
second is for service cars (information
calls to vigilance bodies following a
connected with the operation of
burglar-alarm or a technical alarm
the system), and the third lane is for
event).
emergency services (information
In this case, when configuring the
connected with auxiliary alarms or
3486 central unit, the use of the
events).
auxiliary channel with the type of
Auxiliary devices are capable of
technical alarm that generates the
handling the sets of information from
call is already set, as shown in the
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Configurator position
VALUE
Z1
N1
MOD1
N.C.
Tamper line
Balance resistance
10 K 5 % 1/4 W
- C1 - C2
AR T .F482
204 MY HOME
following table.
N.C.
C2 C1
Burglar alarm
TYPE OF TECHNICAL ALARM
COMBINED AUXILIARY CHANNEL
Gas leak
Freezer
Flooding
Anti-panico
General technical alarms
5-6-7
Fire
Remote assistance
Configuration example
Zone 2 house perimeter:
the following drawing shows
Zone 4 bedrooms, hallway,
the example of the configuration
protected by magnetic contacts
bathroom: protected by volumetric
of the burglar-alarm system of
on the french windows and the
detectors configured with Z=4 and
the apartment described in the
windows, connected to three
n=1 4
section "GEnEral rulES fOr
interfaces configured with Z=2 and
Devices such as the indoor siren,
inStallatiOn" the configuration of
n=1 - 3;
the transponder connector, and the
Zone 3 Kitchen and studio:
the devices depending on the area to
separator, are only configured in
be protected is the following:
protected by volumetric detectors
the n socket corresponding to the
Zone 1 living room: protected by
configured with Z=3 and n=1, and
number of the device within the
Z=3 and n=2;
system
a magnetic contact with interface

configured with Z=1 and n=2 on
the entrance door and a volumetric
detector configured with Z=1 and
n=1;
Siren
Balcony
4072L
3510
Bedroom
BuS
3510
Z=4
N=2
N=2
Contact
interface
Transponder
activator
Second
IR sensor
bathroom
Z =2
Z=2
N=2
3510
3510
Z =2
Z=2
N=3
L4611
L4607
3511
F482
Z=4
N=1
IR sensor
Z=4
N=3
Z=4
N=4
Children's
bedroom
L4611
L4611
L4611
IR sensor
IR sensor
F482
Hallway
3
6
9
Kitchen
3510
3586
Bathroom
N=1
Z=3
N=2
Indoor siren
IR sensor
L4611
4070
N=1
Study
Z=3
N=1
Z1
Z1=2
=2
N1=1
IR sensor
3510
T
AR T .F482
L4611
L4611
IR sensor
- C1 - C2
C2 C1
L4607
Z=1
N=1
Z1 =1
Z1=1
N1=2
Living room
Transponder
activator
F482
3511
- C1 - C2
AR T .F482
Contact interface
02
C2 C1
F482
Contact interface
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 205
COnfiGuratiOn
use of the Youproject program

for the configuration of the system
the configuration of the system can
the software produces a paper report
be performed using the appropriate
with technical information for the
design program called Youproject,
installation of the system, which also
conceived to automatically perform
includes the configuration, and the
all the specific and predictable
list of the necessary materials
functions inside the home

automation system (placement of
devices, dimensional and electrical
calculation, allocation of addresses,
configuration of tables )
Youproject program screen with the data of the system

to be configured
Report generated by the program with

the configuration and the list of devices
206 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm

if there is a robbery, the assistant can
means of:
local sound alarm, so that the robber
press a hidden pushbutton which
one or more telephone calls
can be surprised, as he does not
activates the burglar-alarm central
one or more sms (using the MY
know that the call has been made
HOME portal)
unit telephone communicator which
Suspend the call by means of the
one or more e-mail (using the MY
sends a request for assistance to the
HOME portal)
My Home Portal this will warn the
TV/SAT
IPTVa
the activation does not generate
owner or people indicated by him, by
remote control on the burglar-alarm

central unit
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
central unit
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
TV/SAT
SCS/SCS
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
Technical
tvcc alarm
interface
luci
IPTV
interface
www
irriga
www
irrig
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
N.C. pushbutton
Telephone line
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS

technical alarm interface 3481
TV/SAT
IPTV central unit, for coupling with the signalling message of the
NOTE*: the auxiliary channel number 7 must also be entered at
the programming stage, on the burglar-alarm
telephone communicator.
BURGLAR ALARM
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
BuS
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
1 luci
1st AuX devicetvcc
No. of auxiliary channel *
Anti-burglary mode
N.C.
pushbutton
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 207
COnfiGuratiOn
technical alarms: anti-panic alarm
one or more e-mail (using the
if the owner hears strange noises
the burglar-alarm central unit
in the home, he presses a special
telephone communicator sends a
pushbutton to activate all the
request for assistance to the My Home
this function can be activated with
Burglar-alarm system sirens (only
Portal, which warns the owner or
the burglar-alarm system switched on
with the system armed, otherwise
people indicated by him, by means of:
or off and in any division condition
only the indoor siren activates) to
one or more telephone calls;
confuse any intruder with the intense
one or more sms (using the
sound
MY HOME portal)
MY HOME portal);
TV/SAT
Indoor siren
(optional)
IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
SCS/SCS
interface
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
Burglar-alarm
central unit
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
IPTV
Technical alarm
interface
www
irr
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
N.C. pushbutton
Telephone line
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione

TV/SAT
indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070 - n/nt4070

IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
1st AuX device
controllo carichi
energia
luci
no configurator
N
MOD
N.C.
pushbutton
208 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
anti-panic mode
tvcc
1 Indoor siren
no configurator
N
MOD
www
irri
technical alarms: flooding control

a water pipe leak, or a tap left open,
alarm system, which can activate
request to the MY HOME portal, which
may cause serious damage if not
an actuator that controls a solenoid
will in turn warn the owner, or any
immediately detected With MY
valve in addition, it will also activate
nominated individual, by means of:
HOME, the signal transmitted by
an indoor siren and the telephone
the sensor is received by a radio
communicator of the burglar-alarm
one or more sms messages;
receiver connected to the burglar-
unit, which sends the assistance
one or more e-mails
TV/SAT
Indoor
siren
IPTV
Radio
receiver
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
central unit
SCS interface
usione sonora
antifurto
TV/SAT
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
Relay
actuator
tvcc
www
irrigazione
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Flooding
detector
Solenoid valve
Telephone line
videocitofonia
diffusione sonora
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione

relay actuator 3479
TV/SAT
IPTV radio receiver. Configuration for manual reset solenoid valve. When
NOTE*: the number 4 of the auxiliary channel is the one shown in the AuX socket of the HC/HS/L/N/NT4618
using a different solenoid valve connect configurator no. 3 to the MOD socket (bistable mode).
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
1
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
1st AuX device

tvcc
monostable contact
www
Transformer
Solenoid valve
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 209
irrigazio
ne
ne
COnfiGuratiOn
technical alarms: flooding control

radio receiver HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4618
NOTE*: The number of the auxiliary channel must also be indicated during the programming of the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling to the signalling message of the
telephone communicator, as well as in the configuration of the relay actuator that controls the electrovalve.
The coupling between the flood detector and the radio receiver must be completed before installing the detector itself. To save the detection device see the Configuration section.
Z
N
AUX
TV/SAT
zona 9
1st detector device in zone 9
IPTV
BuS
BURGLAR ALARM
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-n/nt4070

in alternative to the radio flood
TV/SAT
detector, contact interface 3480,
IPTV
together with sensor 3482, can also
BURGLAR ALARM
be used
BuS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
N
MOD
N
MOD
NC
Alarm reset
Tamper line
3482
1st Indoor siren

no configurator
210 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Z1=
19
Interface address
N1=
19
Interface address
Z2=
No configurator
N2=
No configurator
MOD1=
NO contact technical alarm
MOD2=
No. of auxiliary channel (see note above)
www
technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system

the application shows the use of the
a technical alarm signal managed
owner or people indicated by him,
methane gas detector combined in
by the burglar-alarm system to close
by means of:
the burglar-alarm system by means
the solenoid valve and at the same
One or more telephone calls;
of an auxiliary channel interface
time, makes a telephone call via the
One or more sms;
central unit/dialling device to the
One or more e-mail
When the detector detects gas, by
TV/SAT
My Home Portal which warnsIPTV
the
means of the interface it generates
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
TV/SAT
SCS/SCS
termoregolazione
interface
videocitofonia
Burglar-alarm
lan
central unit
controllo
IPTV
controllo carichi
energia
Technical
alarm
interface
luci
tvcc
Relay
actuator
www
irrig
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Bticino
Telephone line
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
MET ANO
Solenoid valve
Methane gas
detector (*)
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Transformer
12 Vdc
Note: (*) maximum 3 devices with transformer F91/12E

maximum 2 devices with transformer HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4541

Gas detector HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4511/12
Note: No configuration
Note*: auxiliary channel number 1 must

also be indicated while programming
TV/SAT
IPTV
the burglar-alarm central unit to link it to the telephone communicator signalling
message.
BURGLAR ALARM
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
To transformer
F91/12E
To the auxiliary channel

interface
videocitofonia
BuS
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
1st AuX device
technical alarm
From methane gas

detector
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 211
CONFIGURATION
Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system

Relay actuator 3479
Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)
Note*: the auxiliary channel number 1 is that given in the AUX housing of the
Note*: The audible signal of the indoor siren does not activate for technical alarms.
TV/SAT
technical alarm interface 3481.
This function
IPTV is performed by the natural gas detector.
BURGLAR ALARM
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
Transformer
F91/12E
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
2nd AUX device
monostable contact
energia
luci
N
MOD
tvcc
Burglar alarm
www
1st Indoor siren
1o 5
technical alarm
deactivation *
N
MOD
Solenoid valve
L4525/12NO
212 MY HOME
BUS
irr
technical alarms: telephone signalling of the

tripping of the general circuit breaker
With home switchboards fitted with a
breaker as soon as one of the above
the MY HOME WEB portal, which will
SalVaVita StOP&GO circuit breaker,
problems occur, the SalaVaVita
then send an alarm message by SMS
it is possible to be notified when
StOP&GO device automatically
and/or e-mail
the main circuit breaker trips, due
closes the tripped circuit breaker and
this function is only valid with 3485
to lightning, electric disturbance or
reinstates power supply in full safety
and 3486 central units fitted with
system fault
if however the fault remains, due to
telephone communicator
the main condition for this useful
an insulation defect, or line overload,
function, is that the SalVaVita
the burglar-alarm system will send
StOP&GO device is connected to
an SMS telephone message or a
the burglar-alarm system through
pre-recorded message, to notify the
an interface, for the detection of the
user of the problem the telephone
status of the earth leakage circuit
message can also be forwarded to
b
a
b
ART.3485
_
T1
OFF
ON
BUS
BURGLAR
Central unit
STOP&gO
ALARM
BuS
automazione
Control interface
6
5 4
ART. F80CMD
1 2 3
Technical alarm
interface
diffusione sonora
antifurto
1st AuX device
technical alarm with normally closed contact
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
select mode 3 ( fault

notification) by operating
the selector with a flat head
screwdriver.
NOTA*: auxiliary channel number 3 must

also be indicated in the burglar-alarm central
unit programming to link it to the telephone
communicator signalling message.
Auxiliary channels between 1 and 9 can be selected.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 213
COnfiGuratiOn
advanced applications: switching on the lights

because of an alarm
an interesting application is the
risk of immediate identification
device devices to dialogue
possibility of automatically switching
will induce the thief to leave this
Obviously the lights can also be
on all the lights, or a group of them,
function is obtained by connecting
switched on and off by means
inside the home, for a preset time
the automation device and burglar-
of the local control device in the
following an intrusion this adds an
alarm systems with an interface
automation system
element of confusion to the sound
which allows the burglar-alarm

IPTV
central unit and the automation
TV/SAT
signal emitted by the siren and the
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
SCS/SCS
tvcc
interface
luci
www
irr
OUT
ART.F422
general control
of the lights
ON
GEN
TV/SAT
IPTV
OFF
AUTOMATION
BuS
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci

SCS/SCS interface f422
General control of the lights H/l4652/2

IPTV
TV/SAT
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
SCS/SCS
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
interface
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
OUT
I1/I2/I3=
No
Configuration
ART.F422
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
AUTOMATION
I4= interfacing mode
MOD= burglar-alarm
www
No configuration
O/I
TV/SAT
1
tvcc
GEN general configurator
IPTV
ON control (upper key)

and OFF control
(lower key)
BuS
automazione
214 MY HOME
diffusione sonora
antifurto
Burglar alarm
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
irr
usione sonora
ermoregolazione
usione sonora
Advanced applications:
remote assistance request with telephone call
Old or disabled people can send
sends the assistance request to the MY
This function can be activated with
an assistance request, using a
HOME portal, which will then warn the
the burglar-alarm armed or disarmed,
portable remote control. The signal
owner or any nominated individuals,
with any type of division.
sent is captured by a radio receiver
by means of:
connected to the burglar-alarm. The
burglar-alarm activates an indoor siren
one or more sms;
and the telephone communicator of
one or more e-mail.
TV/SAT
the burglar-alarm central unit, which
Indoor siren
(optional)
IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
BUS
antifurto
termoregolazione
TV/SAT
SCS/SCS
controllo
interface
videocitofonia
Burglar-alarm
central unit
lan
IPTV
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
Radio receiver
www
irrigazione
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Telephone line
energia
Radio control for

Remote assistance
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione

Radio receiver HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618
Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)
NOTE*: If the configurator is not present, auxiliary channel no. 9 is allocated
NOTA*: The audible signalling of the indoor siren does not activate for technical
automatically. This auxiliary channel number must be indicated also at the
alarms. This function is performed by the natural gas detector.
programming stage on the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling with the
signalling message of the telephone communicator.
zone 1
1st receiver device
1
N
MOD
Z
N
AUX
1 Indoor siren
technical alarm deactivation *
TV/SAT
IPTV
N
MOD
BURGLAR ALARM
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
BUS
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
Burglar alarm
tvcc
www
MY HOME 215
irrigazione
Start-up and testing
Start-up
Note: this operation must be carried out after
go back to the maintenance menu;
CENTRAL UNIT 3485/B AND HC/
configuring the system.
check the reception level of the
HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
In order to startup the system, all devices must be

connected and installed properly into their supports.
GSM signal;
When the central unit is switched on
program any scenarios as needed;
for the first time, the Maintenance
Program an IR remote control, a
menu is shown; the slide switch on
transponder key, or a Numeric
the back is in OFF position.
CENTRAL UNIT 3486
code as shown in the following
To activate the central unit and make
When the central unit is switched on
pages;
it operational:
for the first time, the Maintenance
enter time and date;
choose the language;
menu is shown; the slide switch on
edit the names of the zones and
use the central unit to start the
the back is in OFF position.
devices and the division scenarios.
system tutorial;
To activate the central unit and make
WARNING: If the central unit battery is exhausted,
move the slide switch to ON;
it operational proceed as follows:
the GSM module does not operate.
press twice to exit the
choose the language;
use the central unit to start the

tutorial;
maintenance menu (1)
Central UNIT l/n/nt4600/4
return to the maintenance menu;
Remove the support from the box
program a transponder key or a
move the slide switch to ON;
(if already installed) and move the
press CLEAR twice to exit the
changeover switch (1) at the back
enter time and date;
of the device to the OFF position
customize zone, device and
maintenance menu;
select Communication - GSM
(maintenance).
division scenario names.
Management menu and enter the
Power the system and check that the
PIN code;
central unit is in maintenance mode.
go to the main screen by holding
numeric code;
This is confirmed by the AUX (2)
down CLEAR, switch off the central
and 24h (3) red LEDs flashing in
unit;
succession.
disconnect the battery;
insert the SIM card;
connect the battery again and

4-zone central unit
switch the central unit back on

again; wait for the battery to fully
ALLARME
ZONA 1
OFF);
make sure there is a line
connection;
IMPIANTO
charge (icon
Central unit 3485 / 3485B
ON
OFF
wait about one minute; during this

icons might
be displayed.
check the PIN code or check if the
AUXON
ALLARME
ZONA
S 1 PROG
After one minute, both icons should

disappear; if they do not disappear,
24h
TEST
IMPIANTO
PIN
time, the ERROR or
OFF
SIM card is disabled by inserting it in

a mobile phone.
Warning: with the system in Maintenance mode, the batteries of the system are not charged. If the system
remains in this mode for an extended amount of time, the batteries may be damaged.
216 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
Common operations for all

central units
Check if the red LED is on the siren
the polarity (red +, black -).
If central unit L/N/NT4600/4 is
control card.
Warning: when there is a
installed, move the changeover
If it is lit, reverse the connection of
connection with an inversion of
switch (3) at the back of the unit to
the Bus pair.
polarity, the card will be protected
the ON position (active).
Warning: Furthermore, make sure
with 4A fuses placed inside the cable
Fit the central unit inside the box
the yellow LED is off; when it is lit, it
(2). Install the two siren protection
correctly.
indicates the alarm condition, hence
covers.
an abnormal condition in the system.
NOTE: in case a second siren is installed, make sure
in this case, eliminate the anomaly.
to repeat the LED check after its installation. The J1
Now connect the two faston terminals
jumper of the second siren must be cut (see the siren
(1) to the battery paying attention to
technical sheet).
Indoor siren card

A
2
1
J1
Yellow LED
Red LED
A = BUS
B = BATTERY (RED+, BLACK -)
C = SOUND SIGNALLER

L/N/NT 4600/4
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 217
Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls

Central UNIT 3486, 3485/B
Pairing of RADIO remote
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
controls 348220
Programming remote controls is
Press the transmission pushbutton
1. Switch the system to maintenance
facilitated by the information given
(5) and hold it down until the tone is
mode.
by the display (see the installation
emitted.
2. Press the Radio receiver HC/HD/
manual of the central unit supplied
A tone lasting about half a second
HS/L/N/NT4618 programming
with the device).
means that the programming process
pushbutton for five seconds, until the
Flush mounted central
has been executed correctly.
red LED comes on.
units L/N/NT4600/4
NOTE: A tone lasting about 4 seconds means that
3. Press the connection pushbutton for
After putting the batteries into the
the programming process has not been executed
5 seconds.
remote controls, with the central unit
correctly. hence it will be necessary to repeat the
4. If the pairing of the device has been
in maintenance mode (switch on
operation.
performed correctly, the red LED
the back in OFF position), press the
When the remote control
of the radio receiver will go off.If
P pushbutton (1) using a pencil or
programming has been completed,
this does not happen, repeat the
similar object.
repeat the operation for all supplied
procedure from step 3. If the LED
Make sure that the yellow LED
remote controls (maximum 30).
flashes, it means that the device
PROG (2) is lit and that a short tone
NOTE: in this stage, it is possible to program remote
memory is full.
is emitted.
controls for other systems.
5. To save other devices in the radio
Place the remote control
After programming the last remote
receiver repeat step 2.
transmission lens (3) against the
control, press the S pushbutton (6).
6. Perform self learning of the system
central unit receiving lens (4) in order
Make sure the yellow LED PROG (7)
from the central unit.
to keep it perfectly aligned (cover the
is off.
7. Program the remote controls on the
lens in case of interferences with the
central unit, if this is of a type "with
infrared, e.g. due to the direct light of
display.
lamps or spotlights).
8. Exit maintenance mode.
2
4-zone central unit
24h
TEST
PROG
AUX
Arming
1
24h
1
S
4-zone central unit

24h
PROG
AUX
2
3
4
Key-ring
218 MY HOME
AUX
PROG
TEST
TEST
Burglar alarm
Disarming
Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders

CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B
Procedure:
DELETING OR ADDING A
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
1. With central unit in maintenance
TRANSPONDER
programming transponders is
mode, press the P key and check if
When using central units 3486,
the yellow lED PrOG lights up
3485/B and HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4601
by the display (see Central unit
2. re-program the ir remote controls
the deletion of transponders is
installer manual)
first (see chapter rEMOtE COntrOl
PrOGraMMinG)
by the display (see Central unit
FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL
3. now, move the badges towards the
installer manual)
UNITS L/N/NT4600/4
transponder reader (figure at bottom
in systems with fluSH mounted
the transponder (badge) programming
left)
central units l/n/nt4600/4, a
operation is necessary in order for it
4. Make sure that two short tones are
new programming process is
to work as a normal infrared remote
emitted: the first is emitted from the
required to delete previously stored
control 4050 Please keep in mind that
transponder reader, the second is
transponders or to add new ones
when the transponder-reader is used
emitted from the central unit
follow the procedure described
as a activator, it will almost always be
5. repeat points 3 and 4 for all available
in section rEMOtE COntrOl
installed in places different from the
badges
PrOGraMMinG (of course, during
one in which the central unit is located
6. Whenyouhavefinishedprogramming
this procedure, the badge will have
therefore, it is recommended to
the last badge, press the S pushbutton
to be moved near the transponder
temporarily connect it near the central
on the central unit (the yellow PrOG
reader instead of the central unit)
unit
lED turns off) and move the back
this procedure will delete all stored
the initial programming - which
selector switch to On - dwg a
transponders (partial deletion is not
is carried out when installing the
possible)
transponder reader shall be

carried out with the central unit in
MaintEnanCE mode (selector switch
IMPIANTO
located on the back in Off position)
4-zone central unit

24h
OFF
TEST
PROG
AUX
ON
LUMINOUS AND AUDIbLE INDICATORS
bUZZER
LED
SYSTEM ENABLED
0.5 sec
OFF
SYSTEM DISABLED
0.5 sec
Fixed green
INCORRECT ACTIVATION
4 sec
Flashing green
ALARM OCCURRED
Fixed red
DEACTIVATION AFTER ALARM OCCURRED

(allows you to check the zone in which the alarm occurred)
0.5 sec
Fixed orange
IMPORTANT: the central unit can save up to 30 system arming/disarming devices. If a

transponder is used as a remote control, only 29 devices can be saved. This is because an IR
bip
tra
cod
35
30
HIG
HS
EC
UR
IT Y
remote control (4050) must always be present.

nsp
on
de
r
R
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 219
Start-uP anD tEStinG
Programming a remote control or a transponder

for several systems
FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL
AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
UNITS L/N/NT4600/4
Programming is facilitated by the
if you have two or more burglar-alarm
it will be possible to program one or
information given by the display
systems with a flush mounted central
more remote controls able to interact
(see Central unit installer manual)
unit (for example, home and office),
with all systems
Remote control
(transponder)
common to the
two system
1ST SYSTEM (OFFICE)

24h
PROG
AUX
24h
TEST
2ND SYSTEM (HOME)
Office remote
control
(transponder)
TEST
PROG
AUX
Home remote
control
(transponder)
Note: carry out these operations with the two systems already activated: both central units with rear selector switch in ON position.
Press the S pushbutton on the
Warning: When programming a newly-purchased
Note: all previously stored codes of the remote
central unit of the second system (2)
remote control, first of all do the programming
controls are now deleted and can no longer be
and hold it down Send an impulse
described in chapter REMOTE CONTROL
recognised by the central unit. Hence, it will be
using a previously-enabled remote
PROgRAMMINg (user manual).
necessary to re-program all remote controls and
control (keep it at a maximum
NOTE: make sure the system is disabled - green LED
transponders which will need to act on this system
distance of 50 cm from the central
(1) on.
by following the descriptions in chapter REMOTE
unit)
CONTROL PROgRAMMINg (user manual).
Make sure the yellow lED tESt (3)

is on Send a second impulse Make
4
sure the yellow lED PrOG (4) is on

release the S pushbutton (2)
24h
a pencil or a similar object

Make sure a short tone is emitted
3
220 MY HOME
Burglar alarm
TEST
Press the P pushbutton (5) by using
4-zone central unit
PROG
AUX
Direct the remote control previously
wait for the beep sound
after completing the programming
programmed on the first system
from now on, the remote control
operations, press the S pushbutton
towards a 1 to 4 zone divider or
code for the first system will also be
(1) and make sure the yellow lED
connector of the second system
recognised by the second system
PrOG (2) is off
Press the remote control pushbutton
When the remote control
as if it were a normal enabling
programming has been completed,
process
repeat the operation for all remote
if a transponder is used, move it
controls requiring this function (30
towards the transponder reader and
altogether)
Activator
Divider zone 1 to 4
max 50 cm
max 50 cm
1
2
4
4-zone central unit

24h
er
nd
tra
0
53
d3
co
o
nsp
IT Y
UR
EC
HS
HIG
transponder
cod3530
TEST
PROG
AUX
HIGH SECURITY
1 2
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 221
System activation
SYSTEM WITH central UNIT
SYSTEM WITH central UNIT
3486, 3485/B HC/HD/HS/L/N/
l/n/nt4600/4
NT4601
First of all, set the central unit to
NOTE: if the two LEDs continue to flash, it means
After completing the operation
ON. To activate the system, direct
that the selector switch at the back of the central
described in the chapter "Putting into
the remote control (1) towards the
unit has not been set to ON. If the 24h LED is steadily
operation" of the system, the central
receiving lens (2) of the central unit at
on, it means that one of the devices is producing a
unit becomes operational.
a maximum distance of 50 cm.
24h alarm. Check if the installation has been carried
Perform a system test as described
Activate the remote control by
out properly (see problems/causes/solutions table).
below.
pressing the pushbutton (3) once
Make sure the green LED ~ (7) is on.
or twice with a time interval of 5
In this condition, the system is activated and
seconds between the first and the
disabled.
ON OFF
slide switch
second time, until the green LED (4)

lights up.
Activate the remote control with the
impianto
on
a
b
off
LU
a
b
pushbutton (3), thus making sure

that the green LED (4) turns off.
24h
TEST
Activate the remote control again
1
S
with the pushbutton (3), thus making

Central unit (3486) rear view
1 6
AUX
PROG
2
3
4
sure that the green LED (4) turns on.

Make sure that the red LEDs AUX (5)
T1
Tamper
222 MY HOME
T1
T2
Burglar alarm
and 24h (6) are off.
Now test the system as indicated in the

next pages.
System test
TEST PROCEDURE
1. infrared detector check
access the Maintenance menu and
the red lED should light up when
select tESt, as described in the
passing through the area protected
installer manual supplied with the
by the detector
central unit
1. When the system is disabled (led
on) press S and hold it down
2. Press the pushbutton of one of the
enabled remote controls; the TEST lED
turns on, hence you can now release
the S key
3. after carrying out the verifications
described in the following
paragraphs (test procedure), press
S to end the test; Make sure the TEST
lED turns off
2. Contact check
the red lED of the contact interface
should light up when opening the
windows or entrance door
Central units L/N/NT4600/4

24h
PROG
AUX
24h
TEST
PROG
AUX
Warning : when testing, the central unit L/N/
TEST
NT/4600/4 does not recognize the remote controls

When the rolling shutter controlled
by the rope sensor is raised or
lowered, the red lED of the interface
comes on after the number of pulses
set, and will go off again after 4
seconds
Central units L/N/NT4600/4

24h
TEST
PROG
AUX
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 223
System test:
two line contact interfaces check
The interfaces 3480 and F482 are
paragraph 4.4); if it stays on, make
equipped with LED indicators for
sure that the contacts of the two
properly start-up the system.
lines are closed (e.g. windows
During the startup procedure, the
closed).
central unit must not be powered. If it

1. Connect the interface to the SCS bus
when the contact is closed (e.g.
and the wires of the contacts and
window closed), the LED must
tamper to their terminals.
be off,
when the contact is open (e.g.
and close again using the transparent
window open) the LED must
shell (interface 3480).
be on.
Tamper.
be off,
4.4 Make sure the LED is on when

opening the various contacts:
3. Close all contacts, including the
when the contact is closed (e.g.

window closed), the LED must
is, it must be in test mode.
2. Insert the required configurators
4.3 Make sure the LED is on when

opening the various contacts:
when the contact is open (e.g.

window open) the LED must
be on.
COMPLETION OF THE TEST

STAGE
3486, 3485/B and HC/HD/HS/L/N/

NT4601 central units
Procedure for 3480
Exit the Maintenance" menu

following the procedure described in
4. Power the item.
the installation manual supplied with
Procedure for F482

Tamper contact,
line 1, line 2 LED
indicator activated
the central unit.
L/N/NT4600/4 central units

Once the checks have been
completed press pushbutton (1),
ART.F482
Tamper contact
LED indicator
activated
C2 C1
Line 2 LED
indicator
activated
Line 1 LED
indicator
activated
4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check

the configuration and repeat the
startup procedure. If the LEDs
flash quickly, only 5/6 times before
stopping, go on to the following
paragraph.
4.2 If the tamper contact LED is
now off, go on to paragraph 4.3);
if it stays on, make sure that the
tamper line is short-circuited and
then repeat the procedure from
paragraph 4).
4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check

the configuration and repeat
the startup procedure. If the
LED flashes quickly, only 5/6
times before stopping, go on to
paragraph 4.2).
4.2 If the LED is now off, go on to
paragraph 4.3); if it stays on, make
sure:
check that the TEST LED (2) has

gone off and move the ON-OFF
selector (3) to the OFF position.
Remove the swivel IR detectors
from the box and tighten the screw
locking the adjustments.
4-zone central unit
24h
that the tamper line is shortcircuited and then repeat the

procedure from paragraph 4)
PROG
AUX
well closed and then repeat the
procedure from paragraph 4)

after switching the power off.
ALLARME
ZONA 1
the contacts of the two lines

are closed (e.g. windows
closed) and then repeat the
ON
OFF
procedure from paragraph 4.2)
2 LEDs are now off, go on to

ALLARME
ZONA 1
NTO
Burglar alarm
the enclosure of the interface is
4.3 If the line contact 1 / line contact
224 MY HOME
TEST
IMPIANTO
T - C1 - C2
ON
Configuration or system modifications Maintenance

If it is necessary to modify the
4-zone central unit
configuration of the system after

starting it up, follow the procedure
ALLARME
ZONA 1
IMPIANTO
below after disabling the system:

ON
OFF
Central UNITS 3486, 3485/B

Go to the Maintenance" menu

following the procedure described
in the installation manual supplied
with the central unit;
NOTE: for normal operation of the system, please
Warning: If you are going to install a device next
refer to the guidelines specified in the User
to the central unit, do not place the tamper rod in
manual.
IMPIANTO
Disconnect the power supply from
ALLARME
ZONA 1
the system;
ON
the new device as the system would produce a 24h

alarm. The anti-tampering protection is guaranteed
by the tamper rod installed on the central unit.
OFF
Replace or add the configurators to

the devices;
Connect the power supply;
Ensure that the central unit

performs the system self-learning
procedure;
Perform the system test.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE OF
THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
Central UNITS L/N/NT4600/4
after disabling the system, remove

the central unit from the box and
set the selector (1) to OFF within
30 seconds, otherwise a 24h alarm
signal will be produced, if the
It is recommended that a test is

performerd regularly to check that
the system i working correctly, that
the system back-up batteries are
charged, as well as the condition of
any radio devices.
tamper rod has been installed;
switch off the system;
replace or add the configurators to

the devices;
switch on the system;
flip the selector switch (1) to ON;
install the central unit in the box;
activate the system by sending one

or two impulses with the remote
control.
Burglar alarm
MY HOME 225
226 MY HOME Energy management
CONTENTS
MY HOME Energy management

Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Energy consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Energy management MY HOME 227
GENERAL FEATUREs
saving energy has never been this easy

MY HOME, the winning
combination
Displaying information on energy
very much more aware of their
consumption and managing and
energy use, be it to meet their green
controlling energy loads; this is
aspirations or their desire to make
whAT THE NEw My Home solutions
financial savings
deliver to end users - making them
Visibility drives savings

An aware user is one that saves
changing there (bad) routines or
with resulting benefits for the
correcting faults which result in
environment and in reduced costs
savings of 10 to 15%
studies have shown that displaying

energy consumption results in users
My Home enables you to:
Create a living space with

maximum comfort, only using the
necessary energy and heat
Improve the energy class of the

building, and therefore also of its
economic value
Touch Screen
GENERAL FEATUREs
To ensure energy eciency

with MY HOME is easy
BUS-SCS MY HOME
TV/SAT
IPTV
Heating only when

and where needed
Using this function, the user can decide the
antifurto
Zone
temperature
termoregolazione
control
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
temperature of each individual room based on its
energia
luci
tvcc
use and the time of day It is also possible to select

the rooms that are not being used, and therefore
dont need to be heated
The activation of the system also takes into account
the heat produced by the sun
uP to
30%
sAVings
switch lights o, switch

savings on
energia
Light automation
luci
management
Management
of www
lighting depending
on the
tvcc
irrigazione
presence of people and the level of natural light:
this provides maximum visual comfort for the
users and greatly contributing to energy savings
Depending on the space, savings of 55% to 75%
are possible
BUS-SCS MY HOME
uP to
75%
sAVings
www
irrigazione
ne
TV/SAT
IPTV
A complete consumption and energy

production check-up
The user can display on the touch screen not only the
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
Consumption
energia
display
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
consumptions
inside their home
(power,
water and gas1)),
but also the energy and hot water ouput obtained using
photovoltaic or solar panels
uP to
15%
sAVings
With a few simple steps, the user can select the type of
consumption that needs to be checked, the type of display
(instantaneous or graphs), and the period (day, month,
year) Extremely useful information, for using ones own
systems at their best, reducing waste and faults
TV/SAT
IPTV
NOTE: 1) subject to type of meters installed for gas and water.
New heading required

This function can be used to manage the maximum
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
Management
of loads
controllo carichi
power to be used, and automatically disconnect the least

energia
luci
tvcc
www
important appliances in case of overload
irrigazione
Using the Touch screens, the user can check the total
consumption of the individual circuit, and decide if the
priorities need changing
The user can also decide to delay the activation of a
particular load
GENERAL FEATUREs
Energy eciency management devices overview
Splitter
Probe
Local Display
Splitter
management
interface
99 zone central unit

Distribution board
Room-by-room temperature control
Zone temperature control
Probe
Air conditioning
Splitter management Splitter

interface
Touch Screen
Washing machine
Photovoltaic
panel
Thermal
solar panels
Microwave
Flush mounted
16A actuator
Bus meter with

toroids
Pulse counter
interface
Pulse counter
interface
Pulse counter
interface
Touch Screen
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output
Automatic switching o of heating when windows are

opened
Consumption and production

display
Irrigation management
m3/
m3/
KWh/
Touch Screen
KWh
Kcal
Central unit for load management
CONTENTS
MY HOME Temperature control

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
GENERAL FEATUREs
MY HOME temperature control can be used:

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS PRESET
Bathroom
FOR ZONE MANAgEMENT

Kitchen
A system is preset for zone
Bedroom
management when the solenoid

valves for the management of
each zone can be installed on the
distribution collector
Hall
Solenoid valve
Living room
A system is divided into Zones with radiant panel heating
Collector
Bedroom
Collector
Kitchen
Bathroom
Living room
Box
WHEN THE SOLENOID vALvES

USED ARE:
The solenoid valves that manage the
The MY HOME temperature
from the MY HOME temperature
zones can be of two types:
control system can also manage
control system; they need an
1. with ON/OFF contacts
the circulation pumps (see Fig 3)
external control unit, supplied by
2. With open/close contacts
WARNING: The proportional mixing
the manufacturer of radiant heating
valves cannot be managed directly
panel systems
YEs YEs YEs
236 MY HOME
IN SYSTEMS WITH:
Radiators
Radiant panels
Fan-coil
WITH SYSTEMS OF:
Heating
Bathroom
Cooling
Both
Kitchen
Bedroom
IN CENTRAL HEATINg
SYSTEMS WITH DISTRIbUTION
COLLECTOR FOR EACH HOME
In central heating systems where
each Home is fitted with its own
Hall
distribution collector, it is possible to:
Living room
by installing a meter on the

collector input, measure the
amount of heat used;
by installing solenoid valves, to

manage the dierent zones of the
Home
Bathroom
Kitchen
Bedroom
Hall
Distribution
collector
Living room
Zone solenoid
valve
Meter
Example of central heating system split into zones, for several apartments.
Main boiler
GENERAL FEATUREs
Devices
The MY HOME temperature control
system consists of the following
devices:
Power supply
Temperature central unit
Probes:
Probes
they must be installed in each zone,
Actuators
so that the temperature of the rooms
Contact interface (OPTIONAL)
can be detected and if necessary

locally changed, in relation to the
temperature set on the control unit
Power supply
Power supply:
Temperature control unit:
for MY HOME systems
this is the unit used for system
Zone 1 probe
2 relay
actuator
configuration, program
customisation, and the display of
information This is available in
the catalogue in the 4 zone flushmounting version or in the 99 zone
wall-mounting version
Actuators:
activate the solenoid valves and
the circulation pumps
The number and type of actuators
depends on the type of solenoid
valves installed, and their
positioning within the system
External temperature radio probe:

it measures the external temperature
and sends the information, through
radio waves, to the receiving interface,
Outdoor
radio probe
and therefore to the control unit
Zone 2 probe
External
radio probe
interface
Zone 99
probe
Local
Display
BUS
4 relay
actuator
Contact interface
Actuators:
Contact interface:
For the ON/OFF control of the
this optional device detects the open
are open With this function one can
solenoid valves only one contact is
or closed position of windows and
make the most of each energy saving
used, while for open/close solenoid
doors by assessing the status of their
opportunity, avoiding unwanted
valves the interlocking of two relays
magnetic contact The information
dispersion of heat to the outside,
is used By using the 4 relay actuator,
obtained is then used by the MY
for example when the air inside the
it is possible to control both the
HOME temperature control system to
house is being changed
activation of the fan-coils and the
switch off the zones corresponding to
automatic selection of the 3 speeds
the rooms where windows and doors
GENERAL FEATUREs
Devices
Adjustable probe
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CENTRAL UNITS
The two temperature control
Local Display
units ensure simple management/

programming of the whole system; in
this way, thanks to a guided menu, it
will be possible to select the operating
mode, display the temperatures of
the various zones, and change the
possibility of managing the
daily and weekly programs Inside the
operating mode (OFF; antifreeze/
4 zone control unit is a probe This
thermal protection, and automatic)
is a zone in itself, and it is therefore
possibility of controlling the speed
possible to connect three more

probes, before the maximum number
of probs that can be managed by the
device is reached
In addition to being able to manage
temperature control systems, both
in heating and cooling mode, the
LOCAL CONTROL
of the FAN-COILs
A probe is installed in each room, for
All these functions may also be
the measurement of the temperature
performed using Local Display,
Probe models fitted with a knob also
a recently launched Oled Touch
provide easy system control:
screen technology control device,
possibility of changing the
connected to a probe
99 zone control unit is also capable,

thanks to the scenarioso mode, of
setting different temperatures in
temperature by 3 C compared
with the value set on the control
unit
PC PROgRAMMINg
TiThermo and TiThermo Basic are
the different zones of the system, by
programs that enable the user to
means of a single control (e g maid
program and configure the control
scenarioso) 16 scenariosos for the
4 zone central unit
units, by setting and customising
winter and 16 scenariosos for the
the parameters connected with the
summer can be set
temperature control system Thanks
to a dedicated function, the software

can also be used to update the
firmware of the control unit
Bticino software
Video Station
PERFECT INTEgRATION WITH

THE MY HOME SYSTEM
Example of integration between
(e g weekly mode, external probe
Temperature Control and Automation
scenarioso mode, etc ) For further
The temperature control system
information see the User Manual
can be integrated with MY HOME
supplied as standard with Touch
Automation, for the management
screen IP
of the temperature in the different

zones of the house, using Touch
Touch Screen
screen, Videostation, and Video

Display In particular, using Touch
screen IP it is possible to manage
not only the temperature in the
different zones, but also those
functions that up to now have always
been managed by the control unit
Example of integration between
house is being changed In practical
Alarm system, which reads the
Temperature Control and Automation
terms, when doors or windows of
condition of the NC contact installed
The integration between MY HOME
a room are opened, the heating
on the door or window, and transfers
Burglar-Alarm and Temperature
system of the temperature control
the information to the Temperature
Control systems allows the set-up of
zone corresponding to that room is
Control system for the appropriate
a particularly useful function in terms
automatically turned off
actions
of energy saving, avoiding unwanted
The opening or closing of doors and
escape of energy to the outside,
windows is detected by the contact
for example when the air inside the
interface module of the Burglar-
Magnetic contact
Contact interface
Opening of window
Radiator off
Temperature control unit
GENERAL FEATUREs
Device selection criteria

gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF
THE CONTROL UNIT
The following table shows the
the number of zones of the hydraulic
functions provided by the two
system Other selection parameters
control units The selection must be
may be the management of magnetic
based on the features of the system
contacts, remote control, etc
It is fundamental that the selection of

the control unit should be based on
available funCtionS
4 Zone Central unit
99 Zone Central unit
HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875
3550
Maximum number of zones

Remote control
Local control (Touch Screen)
Programming with TiThermo Basic
Programming with TiThermo
Magnetic contacts management
Scenarios
Climaveneta Chiller Management
99
gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF

THE DEvICES
The following table summarizes
the various types of systems,
and the devices needed for their
management, based on their
features
type of SyStem
aCtuator
probe
HC/HS4692
L/N/NT4692
F430/2
F430/4
Gateway
HC/HS4693
L/N/NT4693
HC/HS4692FAN
L/N/NT4692FAN
HC/HS4685
L/N/NT4685
In conjunction with
probe item HC/
HS4693, L/N/ NT4693,
or with external probe
item 3457
Radiators or Radiant panels
Combined system with radiant panels and fan-coils
Normal Fan-coil
CLIMAVENETA Fan-coil
WARNING: protect the outputs of the relay actuators using a 10 A thermal magnetic circuit breaker, included in the BTDIN catalogue with item no. F881NA/10.
GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION
Maximum number of devices,

maximum distances and absorptions
A system can manage up to 99 zone
the items and making sure that the
addresses Up to nine addresses
total does not exceed the capacity
dedicated to the actuators can
of the power supply For the
be managed for each zone The
calculations mentioned above, refer
on the BUs line the power supply
maximum number of devices which
to the TECHNICAL DATA listed in the
should be installed in the middle
can be connected to the BUs also
Technical sheets section of this guide
depends on their total absorption
When calculating the absorptions the
and the distance between the
availability of current as a function
connection point and the power
of the length of the BUs cable must
supply The power supply can
also be considered During the sizing
supply up to 1200 mA (E46ADCN)
therefore respect the following rules:
or 600 mA (E49) and the maximum
the connection between the power
the total length of the connections

must not be more than 500m;
for best division of the currents
number of devices which can be
supply and the furthest device
connected to the BUs is determined
must not be more than 250 m long;
by summing the absorption of all
MAXIMUM DISTANCES OF THE bUS CAbLE
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+1
1
4
7
OF
+3
+2
+3
+2
-3
OK
OF
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
E46ADCN
SCS
-3
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
-3
E49
OF
1 2 3 4
+1
ART. F430/2
C1
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
With power supply E46ADCN:
With power supply E49:
=250 m max
=250 m max
=250 m max
=250 m max
A + b =500 m
Maximum current supplied
by the power supply: 1200 mA
A + b =500 m
Maximum current supplied
by the power supply: 600 mA
C2
PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE

In large systems or systems which
use of the interface itself as indicated
have current absorption greater than
below:
Automation device addresses must
the limit of 1200 mA supplied by the
If a bus system with only
be between A = 1 / PL = 1 and A =
on the input bus (IN) the
power supply E46ADCN or 600 mA
temperature control devices must
supplied by the E49 compact power
be extended, positions I3 and I4 of
supply, split the system into several
the interface must be congured
addresses must be between A = 3 /
sections connected to each other
with addresses I3 = 1 9 and I4 =
PL = 3 and A = 9 / PL = 9 or the
using the F422 interface configured
1 9 completely independent from
address of the next interface. It
in physical expansion mode. It
the Temperature control device
should be stressed that all the
is important to remember that
addresses;
temperature control devices on the
each line must be powered by its
3 / PL = 1;
on the output bus (OUT) the
system section must be congured
If a bus system with Automation
own power supply. To produce the
and temperature control devices
totally independently of the
physical expansion mode interface
must be extended, positions I3
Automation device conguration.
item F422 must be congured by
and I4 must be congured as a
In any case no automation device
inserting numeric congurator 1 in
function of the conguration of
must be congured with the same
the MOD position. Positions I3 and I4
the Automation devices in the two
address (A, PL) as interface F422
of the interface must be congured
connected systems. Referring to
(I3, I4).
as a function of the two modes of
the illustration, let us suppose that

I3 = 3, I4 = 2:
A/PL = 33 53
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
-2 -1
F422
OUT
+1
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 5
I4 = 4
MOD = 1
-3
AR T.F422
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
A/PL = 11 31
IN
I1 =
I2 =
I3 = 3
I4 = 2
MOD = 1
-3
AR T.F422
-2 -1
+1
OUT
OUT
+3
+2
F422
-3
OK
1
4
7
OF
A/PL = 55 99
Combining with other functions

The Temperature control function
The above is also valid if the
this document. For systems which
devices can share the same BUS
pre-existing MY HOME system
also have the burglar-alarm function,
cable as other MY HOME automation
has several Automation systems
the Temperature control must not
and emergency management
connected using interfaces item F422
be installed on the same bus as the
applications (grey cable). If there
congured in the logical expansion
burglar-alarm, but there must be
is already a stable cable with the
mode.
an F422 interface between the two
automation or power management
For systems with logical expansion
buses.
BUS the Temperature control items
there is no installation limitation for
can be added at any point in the
the Temperature control devices,
system, after installing a box item
which can be installed at any point
503E for the control units, one or
in the system.Thus, for correct
more boxes positioned at a height
system sizing, one only need check
of 1.5 m for each temperature probe
the length of the connections made
and a unit with enough room for the
with the BUS cable and the total
DIN actuators.
device absorptions as specied in
A/PL = 11
99
OUT
OUT
+1
-3
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
-3
AR T.F422
ZA = 1
ZB = 1
ZA = 1
ZB = 1
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 2
+1
OK
IN
1
4
7
AR T.F422
-3
F
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
IN
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
OUT
OUT
OUT
24h
TEST
PROG
AUX
AR T.F422
IN
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 4
C2
OF
+3
+2
OUT
ZA = 2
ZB = 1
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 2
MOD = 2
-2 -1
OUT
-3
A/PL = 11
99
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ZA = 3
ZB = 2
Correct mode of installation

for 4 zone control unit, probes and magnetic contacts
The 4 ZONE CONTROL UNIT and
wall-mounting boxes (LIVING, LIGHT,
with pre-existing BUS systems that
the Probes
LIGHT TECH only); Surface installation
cannot be expanded.
must be installed at a height of
may be useful for resolving issues
approximately 1.5 m, away from areas

that may affect the reading of the
-3
+1
-2 -1
OFF
+1
-3
+3
+2
-2 -1
-3
-2 -1
OFF
-2 -1
OFF
+3
+2
+1
+1
inside standard flush-mounting, or
+3
+2
The probes may be installed both
OFF
+3
+2
windows, fan-coils, or radiators.
-3
room temperature, such as nearby
1,5m
CALIBRATION OF THE 4 ZONE

CENTRAL UNIT AND THE
PROBES
The probes and the 4 zone central
function, which can be found in the
room temperature (e.g. by opening
unit do not normally need calibration;
central unit menu.
or closing windows, doors, etc.)
however, in particular installation
Before performing the calibration
and avoid standing near them;
situations (perimeter walls, north
operation, ensure the following:
or south facing walls, when close to
Leave the probes connected and
for the calibration use a calibrated

sample thermometer, correctly
placed inside the room.
heat sources, etc.), the temperature
powered with the hydraulic system
value measured may be corrected
off for at least two hours. During
For more details on the calibration
using the appropriate calibration
this time, avoid any changes in the
procedure, refer to the central unit

installation manuals.
Magnetic contacts
are generally installed in the upper
protection line generally not used
If the contact interface is correctly
part of the window frames and in
in temperature control. It is mainly
congured it can support both
the point furthest away from the
useful for preventing tampering
applications. When the temperature
hinges. In this way small openings
such as cutting the wires in burglar-
control system is being installed the
cause the magnet to move away
alarm systems. If the same MY HOME
protection line should be installed
from the contact reed and the
system has temperature control and
and wired as well, so that the burglar-
contact itself consequently opens.
burglar-alarm applications the same
alarm can be installed as well.
The models in the catalogue
magnetic contacts can be used for
are of NC type and also have a
both functions at the same time.
For flush-mounting installation 3510, 3510M, 3510PB For visible installation 3511
Magnet
Contact
Magnet
Contact
Magnet
Contact
Contact
Protection
line
NC contact
Magnet
Protection
line
NC contact
GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION
Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators

The typical installation requires the
Solenoid valve
actuators
positioning of all solenoid valves on
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
ART.F430/2
Plug-in box
C1 C2
the collector, grouped inside a box

in the boiler room In this case it is
recommended that also all actuators
Hydraulic
collector
are grouped, inside a control unit,

installed nearby the box itself In
Zone solenoid
valve
multi-floor buildings, this solution

may be repeated at every floor
Box
FAN-COIL SYSTEMS
In fan-coil systems, the solenoid valve
may be installed inside the fan-coil
Installation of the solenoid valve inside 2 pipe fan-coils
Installation of the solenoid valve inside 4 pipe fan-coils
itself In 2 pipe systems, the same

solenoid valve is used both for the
heating and the cooling functions In
4 pipe systems, 2 separate solenoid
valves are used, one for the heating

and the other for the cooling
function
RADIANT PANEL SYSTEMS

In radiant panel systems it will be
necessary to install, after the pump,
a three-way mixing valve capable
Three-way
mixing valve
Zone
solenoid valve
Actuators
Circuit breaker
of mixing the water, so that the

maximum temperature limit set is
not exceeded The mixing valve is
managed by a central unit supplied
by the manufacturer of the radiant
panel system
To the zone radiant panels
230 Vac
To other
devices
Circulation
pump
Mixing valve
management central unit
Power supply
Wiring diagrams
Legend of symbols
To make the reading of the diagrams shown in the following pages easier, the various symbols and their functions are summarised.
General valve symbol
Radiators
Electric radiator
Boiler
Radiant panels
Fan-coil
Chiller
ON/OFF solenoid valve
M
Open/close solenoid valve
Non-return valve
Pump
Three-way mixing valve (*)
(*) NOTE: In radiant heating panel systems this valve has the function of mixing water, to ensure that the water itself, and therefore also the floor, remain below a certain
temperature limit. For this reason, the mixing valve must be controlled by a control unit supplied by the radiant heating panel system supplier.
Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 1 HEATING WITH RADIATORS
C4
C3
C2
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 4
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
Solenoid valve
-3
F430/4
-2 -1
+1
Solenoid valve
OF
+3
+2
ZONE 3
-3
4692
4692
-2 -1
+1
Solenoid valve
OF
+3
+2
ZONE 2
-3
BUS
E46ADCN
4692
18.0C
ZONE 1
Solenoid valve
23.7C
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
4695
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
F430/2
L
N
C1
Circulation pump
Boiler
Central unit/probe configuration

18.0C
23.7
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/
the system conguration operations
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875,
correctly.
as well as managing the whole of the
As an alternative the TiThermo Basic
temperature control system, contains
application dedicated to this version
a temperature probe which must
of control unit can be used.
be congured physically like the
For these operations refer to the
other system probes. Interact with
manual supplied with the products.
the Congure zones menu to end
Zone 1 Central unit/probe

[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
PROBES configuration
-3
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
Zone 3 probe
Zone 4 probe
Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Circulation pump actuator

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 2 Heating with Radiant panels
C4
C3
C2
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
-3
C1
C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
ZONE 4
F430/4
-3
4692
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
ZONE 3
4692
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
ZONE 2
-3
BUS
E46ADCN
4692
18.0C
23.7C
ZONE 1
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
4695
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
F430/2
Mixing valve
management central
unit
L
C1
Circulation
pump
Boiler
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves

18.0C
23.7C
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
correctly. As an alternative the
TiThermo Basic application dedicated
to this version of control unit can
be used. For these operations refer
to the manual supplied with the
products.

[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
-3
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
Zone 3 probe
Zone 4 probe
Zone actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 3 Heating with Radiant panels and heating units
C1
ZONE 1
C2
C3
4695
C4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
18.0C
23.7
13
38
:
Ven
C1
07
C2
C3
C4
Gen
OK
F430/4
4692
-3
ZONE 2
-2 -1
OF
+1
+3
+2
BUS
-2 -1
OF
E46ADCN
+1
+3
+2
ZONE 4
-3
4692
4692
-3
ZONE 3
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
1 2 3 4
C1
Mixing valve management

central unit
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
F430/2
C2
F430/2
C1
Heating units distribution

collector
Circulation
pumps
Distribution collector with
solenoid valves
C1
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C2
Boiler

18.0C
23.7
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
products.

[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
-3
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
Zone 3 probe
Zone 4 probe
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
C1
1 2 3 4
C1
C2 C3 C4
Zone actuator
ART. F430/2
ART. F430/2
ART. F430/4
C1
C2
C2
HEATING UNITS actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil

DIAGRAM 4 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
(*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL

during manufacturing, and is already connected to the
FAN-COIL itself through the collector found at the top on
the front. Therefore, once the hydraulic connection has
been completed, all that is needed is to connect the BUS.
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
-3
(*) ZONE 4
GATEWAY
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
-3
(*) ZONE 3
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 2
-3
BUS
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 1
FAN-COIL connection
-3
3550
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
E46ADCN
GATEWAY
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GATEWAY
CHILLER
99 zone central unit configuration
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
The 99 zone control unit item 3550
As an alternative the TiThermo
does not need physical congurators
application can be used. For these
but, to end the system conguration
operations refer to the manual
operations, interact with the
supplied with the products.
Congure zones menu.
3
6
9
Configuration of probes for fan-coil
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 3 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
HEATING AND COOLING WITH

CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Gateway
Zone 4 probe
Electric diagram and configuration
all other zones, perform the same
of the GATEWAY installed inside the
type of connection, ensuring correct
Climaveneta fan-coil for the heating-
configuration of the actuator for
cooling of zone 2.
the specific zone, as shown in the
In order to control the fan-coils of
configuration tables.
Zone 1 gateway
Zone 3 gateway
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
Zone 2 gateway
BUS
climaveneta CHILLER
Zone 2 gateway
Wiring diagram and conguration
chiller. With one chiller, a system
of the gateway which controls the
can be slaved and operate both as

a heating system and as a cooling
system. The Gateway is connected
to the CLIMAVENETA chiller through
Climaveneta
the collector found at the top on the
CHILLER
front, and to the BUS through the

draw-out connection terminal.
Gateway
BUS
Gateway chiller
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 5 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA AIR CONDITIONING AND COMBINATION BOILER
(*) ZONE 4
-3
FAN-COIL connection
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
GATEWAY
-3
(*) ZONE 3
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL during

manufacturing, and is already connected to the FAN-COIL itself
through the collector found at the top on the front. Therefore,
once the hydraulic connection has been completed, all that is
needed is to connect the BUS.
-3
(*) ZONE 2
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
4692FAN
GATEWAY
3550
E46ADCN
(*) ZONE 1
-3
OK
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
+1
4692FAN
GATEWAY
F430/2
GATEWAY
C1
C2
ART. F430/2
1 2 3 4
Combination boiler
3 way
solenoid valve
CHILLER
next >>
Heating and cooling with

CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Electric diagram and configuration
Correctly configures the gateway
of the GATEWAY installed inside the
corresponding to the zone as
heating/cooling Climaveneta fan-coil.
indicated in the configuration tables

of the following pages.
GATEWAY
BUS
CLIMAVENETA CHILLER
Wiring diagram of the gateway which
There is thus no need to install
The Gateway is connected to the
controls the chiller. A single chiller
radio probe item 3455 with its
CLIMAVENETA chiller through the
serves a system which can work
interface. The temperature datum
collector found at the top on the
both as heating and as cooling. The
is made available to the MY HOME
front, and to the BUS through the
attached outside temperature probe
temperature control system by
draw-out connection terminal.
is a device normally present in a
means of the gateway.
Climaveneta system of this type.
Climaveneta
CHILLER
5 C
GATEWAY
BUS
WIRING DIAGRAMs
4 zone villa
< previous
DIAgRAM DESCRIPTION
This diagram represents an example
Using TiThermo set the Outside
ON, Boiler OFF, valve open towards
of a heating and cooling system
Temperature (OT) value below which
the Chiller To sum up, the Chiller
made with Climaveneta unit and
the Boiler starts to work: for example
continues to work until the OT drops
Combination boiler
set 5C
below 5C; at this point the Boiler
By means of the TiThermo software
When OT is higher than 5C the
starts to work
the 99 zone control unit item 3550
Chiller manages the system When
It will stay on until the OT rises above
can be programmed to use the
OT is lower than 5C the following
7C, when the Chiller switches on
reading of the outside temperature
actions take place: Chiller OFF, Boiler
again
from the Climaveneta system to
ON and valve open towards the
manage systems with combination
Boiler
NOTE: for the TiThermo software setting details
boilers
The Boiler continues to work until
consult the documentation supplied with the product
Depending on the outside
OT rises above a value higher than
itself.
temperature the control unit
5C This selection is made to avoid
activates the most suitable and
device state oscillation phenomena
convenient heating system
If for example 7C is set as threshold
depending on the heat yield
value, when OT is higher than 7C the
During the spring and autumn
following actions take place: Chiller
rooms can be heated using the heat

generated by the Chiller This heat is
however not suf cient in the winter
when a Combination boiler, generally
TiThermo: example of an application window, indispensable for programming
supplied by gas, must be used
and setting the temperature thresholds and the automations.
The MY HOME temperature control

system switches between the
two sources of heat, using the
outside temperature as parameter
to discriminate between spring
and autumn and winter Actuator
F430/2 manages the switching ON
or OFF of the Boiler and changes
the valve state, while the Gateway
manages the Climaveneta Chiller In
the example given here the Chiller
continues to work as long as the
outside temperature (measured
by the Climaveneta outside
probe) remains higher than a set
threshold value; below this value the
Combination boiler starts to work
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
This device does not need physical
must be used to manage systems
congurators but, to end the system
with combination boiler. The
conguration operations, interact
function is not in fact available on
with the Congure zones menu
the 4 zone control unit item HC/
and with TiThermo applications. For
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875.
these operations refer to the manual

-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 3 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
Zone 4 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
GATEWAY FAN-COIL configuration

Zonef1 gateway
Zone 3 gateway
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
Zone 2 gateway
Zone 2 gateway
GATEWAY CHILLER configuration
6 C
Gateway chiller
[ZA]
[ZB]
[N]
[TYPE]
Boiler and solenoid valve actuator configuration

Boiler/solenoid valve actuator
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
C2
RISCALDAMENTO
Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 6 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT
C4
C3
C2
C1
F430/4
(*)
1
T - C1 - C2
4692
C1
C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
+1
C2 C1
ART. F430/4
ART.F482
-3
C1
1 2 3 4 5
F482
(*)
4692
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
C2
-3
ZONE 3
BUS
+1
3550
ZONE 2
(*)
T - C1 - C2
OK
-2 -1
+1
C2 C1
2
5
8
0
OF
+3
+2
ZONE 1
1
4
7
ART.F482
-3
C1
E46ADCN
4692
F
3
6
9
F482
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
Mixing valve management

central unit
C2
F430/2
L
C1
Circulation
pump
Boiler
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to the magnetic
contacts must not exceed 50 metres.
next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIgURATION
congurators but, to end the system
When setting the parameters for
must be used to use the magnetic
conguration operations, interact
the management of the magnetic
contact management function The
with the Congure zones menu
contacts, the TiThermo application
function is not in fact available on
must be used Two parameters may
the 4 zone control unit item HC/
application can be used For these
be set: the reaction time, and the
Hs/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875
reactivation time
This device does not need physical
supplied with the products
REACTION
TIME
OK
1
4
7
REACTIvATION
TIME
2
5
8
0
3
6
9

item 3550
TiThermo screen
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from
frame avoiding switching the
needed for the changes of air, for
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of
corresponding temperature control
example opening a window to close
delay to the deactivation of the
zone OFF setting 0 minutes
or open the shutters, or opening the
temperature control zone During
deactivation is practically instant
entrance door to welcome a person
this time the system completely
This function is suitable for short
ignores the opening of the window
openings of windows or doors not
WINDOW
CLOsED
WINDOW
OPENING
WINDOW
CLOsING
WINDOW
CLOsED
t = 02
time can be set from
0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel ON
radiant panel
kept ON
radiant panel
kept ON
radiant panel ON
Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
< previous
Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from
Even if it goes against the concept of
When the reactivation time is set on
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited.
energy saving this function is useful
unlimited the function is not active.
When the time set has elapsed the
when the windows have been left
system reactivates the temperature
open and the temperature set in the
control zone even if windows or
room must be kept the same.
doors are still open.
WINDOW
CLOSED
WINDOW
OPENING
WINDOW
LEFT OPEN
t = 5
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited
radiant panel ON
radiant panel OFF
radiant panel
back ON automatically
Contact interface
configuration
The contact interface is directly
Follow by connecting the AUX
address 1 to 99 of the device, within
connected to the temperature
configurator to the MOD1 and/or
the system. The coupling between
control bus. It autonomously and
MOD2 housings, for the activation
the interface contact line and the
independently manages the two
of the operating mode with
temperature control zone must
C1 and C2 lines. It is necessary to
temperature control system only.
be performed using the TiThermo
configure only the line used, and not
Then configure the Z1/2 and N1/2
application.
both of them.
housings, in order to assign the
Contact interface of zone 1 windows

T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
C2 C1
[Z1]
[N1]
[MOD1]
[Z2]
[N2]
[MOD2]
AUX
Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows
[Z1]
[N1]
[MOD1]
[Z2]
[N2]
[MOD2]
AUX
AUX
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 3 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
Zone actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 7 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT

FROM THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
C4
C3
C2
C1
F430/4
F482
T - C 1 - C2
C1
C2 C3 C4
OFF
+3
+2
+1
C2 C 1
ART. F430/4
ART.F482
-3
C1
1 2 3 4 5
-2 -1
(*)
4692
ZONE 3
-2 -1
OFF
+3
+2
(*) C2
-3
4692
+1
3550
ZONE 2
T - C 1 - C2
E46ADCN
4692
OK
ART.F482
+1
C2 C 1
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
OFF
+3
+2
-3
-2 -1
(*)
C1
3
6
9
F482
ZONE 2
F422
F430/2
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to

the magnetic contacts must not exceed 50 metres.
It is recommended that the balancing resistance is
installed nearby the last line contact.
C1
C2
ART.F422
OUT
3486
BUS
E46ADCN
OK
1
4
7
Mixing valve
management central
unit
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
4607
L
C1
Circulation
pump
Boiler
next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIgURATION
In this case the contact interface is
In order to use the function for
performed using the Configuration
connected to the burglar-alarm bus
menu or the TiThermo application
only and communicates with the
contacts installed in the Burglar-
When setting the parameters for
temperature control bus by means of
Alarm system, item 3550 must be
interface F422 The door or window
used in the
contacts, the TiThermo application
opening or closing signal is sent both
99 zone control unit temperature
must be used Two parameters may
to the burglar-alarm system and to
control system This device does
be set: the reaction time and the
the temperature control system, and
not require physical configurators
reactivation time
is used both for safety and energy
Configuration operations must be
saving purposes
REACTION
TIME
OK
REACTIvATION
1
4
7
TIME
2
5
8
0
3
6
9

item 3550
TiThermo screen
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from
frame avoiding switching the
needed for the changes of air, for
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of
corresponding temperature control
example opening a window to close
delay to the deactivation of the
zone OFF setting 0 minutes
or open the shutters, or opening the
temperature control zone During
deactivation is practically instant
entrance door to welcome a person
this time the system completely
This function is suitable for short
ignores the opening of the window
openings of windows or doors not
WINDOW
CLOsED
WINDOW
OPENING
WINDOW
CLOsING
WINDOW
CLOsED
t = 02
time can be set from
0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel ON
radiant panel
kept ON
radiant panel
kept ON
radiant panel ON
Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
< previous
Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from
Even if it goes against the concept of
When the reactivation time is set on
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited.
energy saving this function is useful
unlimited the function is not active.
When the time set has elapsed the
when the windows have been left
system reactivates the temperature
open and the temperature set in
control zone even if windows or
the room must be kept the same.
doors are still open.
WINDOW
CLOSED
WINDOW
OPENING
WINDOW
LEFT OPEN
t = 5
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited
radiant panel ON
radiant panel OFF
radiant panel
back ON automatically
Contact interface
configuration
Then configure housings Z1/2 and
N1/2 depending on the requirements
Contact interface of zone 1 windows
and features of the burglar-alarm

system (see the burglar-alarm
technical guide).
[Z1]
[N1]
[MOD1]
[Z2]
[N2]
[MOD2]
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows
The coupling between the interface
[Z1]
[N1]
[MOD1]
[Z2]
[N2]
[MOD2]
contact line and the temperature
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
control zone must be performed

using the TiThermo application.
(*) NOTE: The involved contacts are C1 and C2. Only the housings of the lines used must be configured; configure
housings MOD1 and/or MOD2 based on the type of contact an the operating mode to be used. See table.
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
C2 C1
MOD1/MOD2
Type of contact and mode
NC
Balanced
NC - delayed
NC - Balanced - delayed
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 3 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
Zone actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Wiring diagrams
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 8 Heating with Radiant panels
F430/4
1
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
C1
C3
C4
C1
C2
C3
C4
C4
C1
4692
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
BUS
4692
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
ZONE 5
ZONE 2
4692
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
ZONE 1
F430/2
+1
F430/2
1 2 3 4
C1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
2
5
8
0
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
3550
1
4
7
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
ZONE 6
OK
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
-3
C3
-3
C2
ART. F430/4
-3
C1
C2
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
E46ADCN
ART. F430/2
C2
C1
C2
3
6
9
Mixing valve
Mixing valve
C1
C2
Secondary circulation pumps
C1
Main circulation
pump
Boiler
C2
C3
C4
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
does not need physical configurators
but, to end the system configuration
Configure zones menu.
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 4 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 5 probe
+1
Zone 2 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 3 probe
Zone 6 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF
MAIN Circulation pump actuator

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Secondary circulation pumps actuator

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
Wiring diagrams
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 9 RADIANT PANELS HEATING AND COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFIER FAN-COIL
F430/4
1
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
C1
C4
C1
C2
C3
C4
C4
C1
ZONE 3
-3
ZONE 2
BUS
OFF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+3
+2
4692
-3
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
4692
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
+1
ZONE 6
Humidistat 1*
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
-3
+1
ZONE 5
-3
4692
OFF
4692
C2
-3
ZONE 4
4692
-2 -1
C3
C3
+1
C2
ART. F430/4
-2 -1
C1
C2
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
ZONE 1
Humidistat 1*
3550
F430/2 F430/2
E46ADCN
1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
ART. F430/2
OK
C1
1
4
7
C2
C1
C2
3
6
9
1*
Mixing valve
2
5
8
0
Mixing valve
C1
C2
Secondary
circulation
pump
C1
C2
1*
L
Main circulation
pump
N
NOTE: 1* the dehumidifier system is not managed through the MY HOME system.
Chiller
Secondary
circulation
pump
C3
C4
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 4 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 5 probe
+1
Zone 2 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 3 probe
Zone 6 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
OFF
MAIN Circulation pump actuator

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
Secondary circulation pumps actuator

[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
Wiring diagrams
8 zone villa
DIAGRAM 10 HEATING WITH RADIATORS AND fan-coil COOLING
F430/4
1
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
ART. F430/4
C2 C3 C4
C1
C2 C3 C4
BUS
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
3
F430/4
+1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C4
OFF
+3
+2
+3
+2
OFF
-3
4692
C4
ART. F430/4
C2 C3 C4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 7
ZONE 8
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
F430/4
1
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C3
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
-3
4692
C3
ART. F430/4
C2 C3 C4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 5
ZONE 6
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
F430/4
1
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
-3
4692
C2
ART. F430/4
C2 C3 C4
C1
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
4692
-3
-2 -1
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1
3550
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C1
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
-3
4692
C1
C2 C3 C4
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
E46ADCN
OK
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
C2
C1
F430/2
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Circulation
pump
CHILLER
RISCALDAMENTO
Boiler
C1
C2
next >>
HEATING
Wiring diagram for connecting the
solenoid valves of zones 2, 4, 6 and
8 to the heating actuator. To control
zones 1, 3, 5 and 7 replicate the same
connection between the solenoid
valves and the corresponding
to be controlled. In the example
actuator. The configuration must
given here, zone 2 is controlled by
be made correctly, maintaining the
contact C1 configured with [ZA] = 0
correlation between the actuator
and [ZB] = 2.
contact and the address of the zone
C4
C3
ZONE 6
ZONE 8
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
C2
C1
C1
C2 C3 C4
L
N
ZONE 2
ZONE 4
ART. F430/4
COOLING
To control the fan-coils belonging
correctly configuring the actuator
fan-coil to the actuator for zone 6
to zones 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8
cooling.
replicate the same connection,
indicated in the configuration tables.
ZONE 6
C4
C3
F430/4
1
ART. F430/4
C2
C1
1 2 3 4 5
C1
C2 C3 C4
C1= fan-coil solenoid valve

C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
C4= maximum ventilation speed
CIRCULATION PUMP
Wiring diagram for connecting
F430/2
1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
COOLING CIRCULATION
the circulation pumps to the
PUMP
corresponding actuator.
HEATING CIRCULATION
C2
PUMP
C1
The pumps of the two systems,

heating and cooling, are controlled
by a single actuator.
L N
Wiring diagrams
8 zone villa
< previous
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
application can be used.
For these operations refer to the
manual supplied with the products.
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 5 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
Zone 6 probe
Zone 3 probe
Zone 7 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 4 probe
Zone 8 probe
Heating system actuator configuration

Zone 1, 3, 5 and 7 actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 2, 4, 6 and 8 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Cooling system actuator configuration

Zone 1 cooling actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Circulation pump actuator configuration

1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
C2
Wiring diagrams
Service sector, 12 zones

DIAGRAM 11 2 PIPE, 3 SPEED FAN-COIL, SINGLE HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM
BUS
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
ART. F430/4
-3
-3
-2 -1
OF
+1
+1
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+1
OF
-3
C2 C3 C4
+3
+2
ART. F430/4
C1
+3
+2
F430/4
1
-2 -1
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ZONE 10
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 12
ZONE 11
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
ART. F430/4
-3
-3
-2 -1
OF
+1
+1
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+1
OF
-3
C2 C3 C4
+3
+2
ART. F430/4
C1
+3
+2
F430/4
1
-2 -1
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ZONE 7
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 8
ZONA 9
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
ART. F430/4
-3
-3
-2 -1
OF
+1
+1
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+1
OF
-3
C2 C3 C4
+3
+2
ART. F430/4
C1
+3
+2
F430/4
1
-2 -1
C1
1 2 3 4 5
ZONE 4
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 5
ZONE 6
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
ART. F430/4
-3
-3
-2 -1
OF
+1
+1
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+1
OF
-3
C2 C3 C4
+3
+2
ART. F430/4
C1
+3
+2
F430/4
1
-2 -1
C1
1 2 3 4 5
C2 C3 C4
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
Circulation pump
3550
C1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
E46ADCN
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
C1
C2
CHILLER
next >>
HEATING AND COOLING

zones replicate the same connection,
fan-coil to the actuator for zone
correctly configuring the actuator
12 heating/cooling. To control the
fan-coils belonging to all the other
indicated in the configuration tables.
ZONE 12
C4
C3
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
C2
C1
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
C1= fan-coil solenoid valve

C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
C4= maximum ventilation speed
Circulation pump
Wiring diagram for connecting
A system which can provide both
the circulation pumps to the
heating and cooling is controlled by a
corresponding actuator.
single pump.
F430/2
C2
1
1 2 3 4
SINGLE CIRCULATION
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
PUMP
C1
L N
Wiring diagrams
Service sector, 12 zones

< previous
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
-3
Zone 1 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
Zone 7 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
+1
Zone 2 probe
Zone 8 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Zone 3 probe
Zone 9 probe
Zone 4 probe
Zone 10 probe
Zone 5 probe
Zone 11 probe
Zone 6 probe
Zone 12 probe
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
Heating/cooling fan-coil actuator configuration

Zone 1 actuator
1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
Zone 7 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 2 actuator
Zone 8 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 3 actuator
Zone 9 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 4 actuator
Zone 10 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 5 actuator
Zone 11 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Zone 6 actuator
Zone 12 actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
Circulation pump actuator configuration

1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
C2
Wiring diagrams
Several homes, 4 zones

DIAGRAM 12 RADIATOR CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEM WITH Radiant panels OF Several homes, 4 zones
Home n
+1
-2 -1
+1
4692
ZONE 2
-3
-3
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
OF
+3
+2
ZONE 3
4692
18.0C
ZONE 1
23.7C
-3
ZONE 4
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
+1
4692
4695
Home 2
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
4692
OF
+3
+2
OF
ZONE 2
-3
-3
-2 -1
ZONE 3
4692
18.0C
23.7C
-3
ZONE 4
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
13 : 38
+1
4692
Ven
07
ZONE 1
Gen
OK
4695
Home 1
Central boiler
next >>
Connection of the distribution collector and temperature control BUS system of home 2
Solenoid valve
C1
Solenoid valve
C2
C3
C4
F430/4
1
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Meter
Mixing valve
Mixing valve
management
central unit
4 zone
control unit
F430/2
18.0C
23.7C
13 : 38
1 2 3 4
Main
Solenoid valve
ART. F430/2
C1
Ven
07
Gen
OK
E46ADCN
C2
C1
L
N
+1
-3
-2 -1
OF
OF
+3
+2
+1
+3
+2
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
-3
4692
ZONE 2
-3
4692
ZONE 3
-2 -1
4692
ZONE 4
+1
The meter is used to measure the amount of heat consumed by each home.
NOTE: The temperature control BUS system, the connection of the solenoid valve, and the meter, are the same for all homes.
Wiring diagrams
Several homes, 4 zones

< previous

18.0C
23.7
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
products.

[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
[ZA]
[ZB]
[SLA]
-3
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
Zone 3 probe
Zone 4 probe
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2 C3 C4
C1
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3 and 4
C2
Main solenoid valve actuator
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[ZB2]
[ZB3]
[ZB4]
[N]
[ZA]
[ZB1]
[N1]
[ZB2]
[N2]
OFF
TEMPERATURE CONTROL - ConfiguraTion
General concepts
The Temperature control system
Zone ZA and ZB
Probes address
must be appropriately configured so
Address of the devices belonging
The probes also have positions ZA
that it can work properly and so that
to a logical zone; as an example in
and ZB to define the address of the
each item can perform the required
a dwelling one can talk about night
devices which will receive the control
function.
area, day area and cellar.
(actuators). These positions have
Configuring basically means
numeric configurators which enable
interacting with the unit and actuator
Progressive zone number N
probes, thus defining:
Numeric identification of the single
For the probes and the 4 zone
actuator inside the same zone.
the device to send the control.
control unit:
a) the zone of belonging
Actuator address
b) any slave probes managed
The address of each actuator is
For the probes:

a) Master or Slave mode
uniquely defined by inserting the

numeric configurators from 0 to 9 in
(if necessary)
positions ZA and ZB. For each zone
For the actuators:
a maximum of 9 addresses can be
a) the zone of belonging
defined by inserting the numeric
b) the type of load to manage
configurators from 1 to 9 in position
c) the number of actuators
N; a maximum of 4 or 99 zones can be
belonging to the same zone
defined in a system, according to the
For the central units:
control unit used.
a) the zones of the system and
Up to 99 zones can be managed in a
their name
system; 2 configurators will thus be
b) the functioning mode of the
needed to define the zone number.
actuators (heating, cooling, ecc.)

c) the type of load to be controlled
(solenoid valves, fan-coil, etc.)
d) the pumps in the system
e) the control mode of the pumps
(heating, cooling, etc.)
f ) the startup delay of the pumps
(if necessary)
Configurazione
General concepts
The probe which controls zone 1 is combined in the 4 zone control unit.
ZONE 4
ZONE 3
07
Gen
+1
Ven
OF
+3
+2
13 : 38
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
-2 -1
18.0C
23.7C
-3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
OK
4 zone central unit

18.0C
1
23.7C
13 : 38
Ven
07
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Gen
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C2
C1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =3
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N =3
C2
OK
1 9 max
1 9 max
BUS
The temperature control function can manage up to 99 zone addresses. For each zone up to 9 addresses dedicated to the actuators can be managed.
ZONE ...
ZONE 2
+1
-3
-2 -1
OF
+3
+2
-3
-2 -1
ZONE 1
OF
+3
+2
ZONE 99
F
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
+1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
3
6
9
C1
C2
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =2
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N =3
C1
C2
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =2
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
N =3
C2
C2
1 9 max
1 9 max
BUS
CONTENTS
MY HOME Air conditioning

GENERAL FEATUREs
Air Conditioning
Integrating the MY HOME system
functions, which up to now were
If a probe configured as sLAVE of
with the management of the
performed using the remote control
the Temperature control system is
splitter air conditioning system
supplied with the device, to the
installed in a room, it will be possible
is now possible using the splitter
Touch screen or the Multimedia
to read the room temperature and
management interface, item 3456
Touch screen of the MY HOME
set the splitter operation
The interface transfers all the splitter
system
Touch Screen
Zone probe configured

as SLAVE
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
SCS/BUS
antifurto
termoregolazione
automazione
videocitofonia
diffusione
controllo
sonora
antifurto
lan
termoregolazione
controllo carichi
Splitter
management
interface
Splitter
Splitter
videocitofonia
energia
controllo
luci
lan
tvcc
Splitter
management
interface
controllowww
carichi
irrigazione
energia
MY HOME integration devices

SPLITTER MANAgEMENT
TOUCH SCREEN H4684 L4684
Advanced mode
INTERFACE, ITEM 3456
AM5864 AND MULTIMEDIA
Adjust the temperature
The splitter control interface is a
TOUCH SCREEN HD/HC/HS4690
device capable of controlling the
Using the Touch screens, it is possible
air conditioning system splitters
to send the following commands
position of the ventilation ns
by sending infrared commands,
based on the interface configuration
(sWING)
replacing the remote control of the
mode:
set the splitter speed (VEL);
splitter itself
Base Mode
select the operating MODE (OFF,
The association between the device
Recall up to 20 favourite controls,
(sETPOINT);
Adjust the oscillation and/or the
winter, summer, fan, dehumidier,

etc )
and the splitter remote control,
previously set during the
must be performed by connecting
association between the interface
All these controls may be included in
the interface to the programming
and the splitter In this mode,
an automation scenario saved on the
software PC
the controls can be recalled, as if
scenario module of the system (e g
The device may be installed inside
they were a scenario (without the
Exit for when one goes out: switching
flush mounted boxes, behind
need for being associated to the
of all the lights and splitters of the
traditional devices, in distribution
scenario module), also by other
home)
boards, without using a DIN rail space
devices, such as Local Display or
The advanced mode may also be
inside the splitter
scenario control This mode can be
used for the splitters included in the
It is fitted with an IR transmitter with
used with splitters of any brands
software database list
a two metre wire, for connection to

the splitter receiver
Touch Screen
Splitter
management
interface
CONTENTS
MY HOME Energy consumption display

GENERAL FEATURES
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data

Using the My Home measurement
It is also possible to display the energy
format to make interpretation easy
devices it is possible to display on
produced on site from solar thermal
By setting tariff values it is pOssible to
several user interfaces (e g Local
and photovoltaic systems
display the data in the form of costs
Display, 3 5 and 10 Touch Screen,
The consumption can be displayed on
PC, or smartphone) not only the
the touch screen as instantaneous or
electric consumptions, but also water
cumulative data in graphical or table
and gas consumptions, as well as

the data from the heating central
accounting system
Dedicated icon on display

of the Touch Screen
Energy selection screen
Power consumption screen

(instantaneous / cumulative)
Monthly power consumption graph
Daily power consumption graph
GENERAL FEATURES
Displaying consumptions and the production data

The devices for the display of the
Thanks to the use of pulse counter
Using the power meters and the
consumptions can be integrated
interfaces and BUS meters with 3
pulse counter interfaces, it is possible,
directly on the bus of the
inputs for toroids, with the My Home
when a photovoltaic or a thermal
Automation/Temperature control
consumption display system it is
solar system is installed, to monitor
system, or be part of a dedicated
possible to display on the interfaces
how much power is being generated
system, as shown in the diagram
the consumptions for electricity, gas,
and how much water is being heated
below In this case, a power supply
and water, as well as the data from
will be necessary for the powering of
the heating accounting system
the BUS, as well as a display interface

(e g Local Display, Touch Screen,
Energy Data Logger, Webserver)
Touch Screen
Compact
power supply
Bus meter
with toroids
Pulse counter
interface
Pulse counter
interface
Local Display
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output
Thermal solar
panels
Photovoltaic
panel
Inverter
LAN network
Bus meter
with toroids
Hot water meter with

pulse output
Energy
Data Logger
Pulse counter
interface
GENERAL FEATURES
Measurement and display devices

PULSE COUNTER INTERFACE
BUS METER WITH 3 INPUTS FOR
ITEM 3522
TOROIDS - ITEM F520
The device detects, counts, and
The device measures up to three
The above described functions are
processes the information (water,
separate circuits, by connecting up
also valid to save the data coming
gas, etc ) received from meters with
to three toroids to the appropriate
from solar thermal and photovoltaic
pulse outputs; the data is then made
inputs
systems
available to the SCS bus, and displayed
The data is displayed on the Touch
The device is supplied with 1 toroid
on the Touch Screens The processing
Screens through the SCS Bus The
and corresponding connection
and accounting functions are:
processing and accounting functions
cable (item 3523); it is suitable for
instantaneous consumption
are:
installation inside distribution boards
instantaneous consumption of 3
and switchboards and requires the
(calculated as the average of 2
lines maximum;
pulses received during the time
space of 1 DIN module
cumulative hourly consumptions
unit);
hourly, daily, and monthly
for the last 12 months, daily
consumption (one year memory)
consumptions for the last 2 years,
The device may be installed in
monthly consumptions for the last
ush mounted boxes, behind
12 years
traditional type devices, or also

inside distribution boards, but
Bus meter with 3 inputs
for toroids
without taking up any DIN rail

space
Data deletion
pushbutton
Pulse counter interface
SCS/BUS
connection
230 Vac
connection
Pulse input
Opto isolated
repetition
(pulse input)
Configurator
socket
Toroid with
connection cable
Device
status
LED
SCS/BUS
connection
Configurator
socket door
DISPLAY DEVICES
SYSTEM INTERFACES
Central unit for load management, or
My Home offers several user
Local Display, 3 5, and 10 Touch
preventively force the load
interfaces for the display of
Screens are devices commonly used
The Touch Screen and Multimedia
consumption/production data:
for the control of the My Home
Touch Screen display can also be
System interfaces: (Local Display,
functions, but can also be used to
used to display consumption and
display energy consumptions, and to
production data for the last 12 years,
Energy data logger
control the loads Local Display can in
in chart or table format (hourly,
Portal
fact be used to display consumption
daily, or monthly representation)
Each interface is capable of
and production data for several
Using all the previous interfaces, it
energies It is possible to manage up
is also possible to associate several
to 10 lines, displaying on each line
measurement units (m3, l, kWh, etc )
the instantaneous, cumulative daily,
to the individual line/pulse counter
monthly, and annual consumptions,
interface, and the corresponding
including the corresponding
currency (Euro, $, , etc )
3 5 and 10 Touch Screen)
meeting several needs
economic values It is also possible

to operate the controlled loads,
reactivating a load disabled by the
Touch Screen
Local Display
GENERAL FEATURES
Energy data logger

The energy data logger is a device
Have a more detailed recording of
The web pages of the devices
that can be used to:
electric data: for each electric line,
show for each individual electric
Display on the PC or other device
the user can download an excel le
line or pulse counter interface the
every 15 minutes
instantaneous consumption, the
(e g Smartphone) consumption/
Set several time bands for a more
daily consumption, the monthly
detailed conversion of the electric
consumption, the average daily
power value into an economic
consumption for each month, the
consisting of 10 separate energy
value (e g two-hourly, three-hourly
total consumption for the last 12
lines maximum The lines can
tari ) For water and gas lines
years, in a chart or table format
be the electric power lines, by
there are monetary conversion
connecting F520 meters, or
values without time bands (single
an F521 Central unit for load
one-hour tari )
production data, recalling the web

pages using an Internet Browser
Concentrate and save data
management, or lines for water,
Export the data for each line/pulse
gas, or heat consumption, by
counter interface in individual
connecting 3522 pulse counter
excel les split by day, month, year
interfaces
Ethernet cable
connection
Power line/device
status LED
Pushbutton
Have a simple data backup: the

device features a housing for
SD memory card
housing door
an SD memory card, on which

consumption details for each
individual line are saved daily
SCS/BUS
connection
Portal
MY HOME WEB is a virtual platform
that can be used to control all the MY
HOME functions relating to comfort,
safety, savings, and communication
in your own home In developing the
The My Home portal is capable of
Fixed IP: in case of xed IP ADSL
saving the electric consumption
subscription
data on an hourly basis and, thanks
Variable IP: in case of variable IP
to the time bands settings, convert
ADSL subscription
the energy value into economic
Web Server Active Connection
MY HOME WEB portal, BTicino has
(W A C ): in case of private network
value For water and gas lines there
paid special attention to ensuring
connection, where the system
are monetary conversion values
high levels of protection of the data
cannot be directly reached by the
without time bands Thanks to
transferred through the network
Internet (e g Fastweb), or of non-
the calculation capabilities of the
from unwanted access The most
congurable router
portal it is possible to save and

display the consumption data
stringent protection criteria have

therefore been implemented, like:
For the energy management
without any limitations in terms
The use of the special https protocol,
functions the Portal gives the
of time and maximum number of
which makes it impossible to read at
possibility of monitoring the
lines The data saved are available
the origin any information transiting
controlled loads (load management),
for consultation as charts on
through the network, and the use of
and of displaying energy
web interface, inside the Energy
the 128 bit SSL (Secure Socket Layer)
consumptions Using the web pages
Management section of the Portal
protocol certified by the VerySign
of the portal, it is in fact possible to:
Certification Authority Through the
Force a load disabled by the central
Export an excel le after selecting

the time period the data should
portal, the user can control all the
unit for load management, or
refer to The generated export le
home automation functions installed
preventive forcing, as well as to
contains the consumption data
inside the home, including the
display the consumptions of the
and the corresponding economic
Energy Management function, from
controlled load (using item F522)
values
one single application, and remotely

using a PC or smartphone The
Display the consumption/

production data
service is compatible with all types of

connections:
CONTENTS
MY HOME Load control management

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
GENERAL FEATURES
The end of the black-out

The My Home load control
It gives the possibility of disabling
Its devices (central unit and
management system manages
or re-enabling, using the display
actuators) only require the space
the maximum power used, by
interfaces, the priorities congured
of one DIN module This ensure
automatically disconnecting the
based on the changed needs of
optimisation of spaces inside the
least important appliances in case of
the customer
distribution boards
overload
It gives the possibility of checking
By conguring the actuators of the
The system:
on the display interfaces the
load control system in automation
Manages up to 63 loads
correct operation of the load using
mode, it is possible to use display
Displays on the display interfaces
the measurement of the earth
interfaces to set the time delays for
(e g Local Display, Touch Screen,
leakage current absorbed by the
the activation of the loads at set
Webserver) the instantaneous
same
times
and cumulative consumption on

hourly, daily, and monthly basis, of
the controlled phase In addition,
thanks to the actuator with sensor,
it is possible to measure the actual
consumption of the controlled
load
Dedicated icon on the screen

of the touch screen
Power consumption screen

(instantaneous / cumulative)
Monthly power consumption graph
Controlled loads screen
Controlled load consumption display

screen (with item F522)
Diagnostic icon
Energy consumption
display icon
Load control
management icon
GENERAL FEATURES
Operation
Using the external toroid, the central
and a number of devices depending
has configurator no 3 This load
unit measures the power used by
on the available supply current
therefore only disconnects after the
the loads connected and compares it
In the example shown, the oven, the
oven and the washing machine
with the value preselected during the
microwave oven, and the washing
The user can reactivate the
installation (using the configurators it
machine represent the loads
disconnected device at any time
is possible to select powers between
controlled using actuators, while
using the actuator pushbutton or
1 5 and 18 kW, with tolerances up to
the refrigerator, which operation is
the touch screen In this case, if
+/- 20%) An actuator is associated
imperative that is not interrupted,
the overload condition still exists,
to each appliance being controlled
is connected to his socket without
the central unit will enable the
The actuator receives the information
actuator
operation of the selected load, but
from the central unit and disconnects
In case of overload, the first
will disconnect the subsequent loads
the load from the network in case of
device that disconnects is the one
starting from the least important,
overload
considered the least important by
until the overload situation is
The disconnection sequence of
the user, in the example the oven,
resolved
the actuators is defined during
which actuator has configurator no
The operating status of the loads is
the installation using a simple
1 The microwave is on the other
notified both by the actuators and
configuration operation to be carried
hand the most important device,
the touch screens
out on the devices themselves
and the corresponding actuator
By configuring the actuators of the

load control management system
The central unit gives the possibility

of managing up to 63 priority levels,
Central unit for

load management
also in automation mode, it is

possible to use the touch screen to
set the time delays for the activation
Power meter
Electric distribution
board
of the loads at set times
BUS SCS
230 Vac
Non-controlled
socket
Flush mounted
actuator
Flush mounted
actuator
Flush mounted
actuator
230 Vac
Non-controlled load
NOTE: inside the electric distribution board it is installed the central unit for load management
Controlled load
with priority 1
Controlled load
with priority 2
Controlled load
with priority 3
DISPLAY FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
The central unit for load
Thanks to the actuator with probe
management is capable of measuring
(Item F522), it is possible to display,
the consumption of the controlled
in addition to consumptions, also the
line using the toroid supplied The
diagnostic, using the additional toroid
information is displayed on the touch
(item 3523) of the controlled load
screens, local displays, and on the

web pages of the web server and the
energy data logger
The processing and accounting
functions are:
instantaneous consumption of the
controlled line;
hourly, daily, monthly and last 12
months cumulative consumptions
Controlled loads
diagnostic display screen
Diagnostic
icon
Load OK
Load near the earth leakage

disconnection limit
Load problems
(e.g. device earth connection problems)
GENERAL FEATURES
Device selection criteria

CENTRAL UNIT FOR LOAD
ACTUATOR 16 A WITH CURRENT
MANAGEMENT F521
PROBE - ITEM F522
The device is capable of measuring
The processing and accounting
The device is an actuator with an
the input power from the electric
functions are:
integrated current probe for the
system and to control the status
instantaneous consumption of the
measurement of controlled load
of the actuators of the load
consumptions (instantaneous
controlled line;
management system, to prevent the
cumulative hourly consumptions
consumption and 2 independently
risk of tripping of the power meter
for the last 12 months, daily
resettable energy totalizers), and is
The central unit manages up to
consumptions for the last 2 years,
capable of performing both ENERGY
63 appliances or electric loads per
monthly consumptions for the last
MANAGEMENT and automation
each phase, measures currents
12 years
functions
and voltages, and processes these
The central unit is suitable for
When configured in ENERGY
data to provide energy and power
MANAGEMENT mode, it gives the
information
possibility of measuring the load
input power, the power and the

earth leakage current (through the
Actuator 16A
with current probe
connection of an external toroid, item

3523)
230 Vac
connection
The actuator is suitable for

Device status
LED
Central unit for load

management
230 Vac
connection
Device status
LED
16A actuator
Load forcing
pushbutton
230 Vac
connection
Configurator socket
door
Load forcing
pushbutton
Device status
LED
Load forcing
pushbutton
SCS/BUS connection
Configurator socket
door
Configurator socket
door
SCS/BUS connection
SCS/BUS connection
ACTUATOR 16A F523
FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATOR 16 A
LOAD CONTROL PANEL
The device is an actuator capable
ITEMHC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4672N
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673
of performing both energy
Actuator conceived for installation in
The load control panel is a device that
management and automation
Living, Light, Light Tech and Axolute
enables displaying the status of the
functions The actuator is suitable for
flush mounted supports, intended
loads controlled by the load control
for the automation and/or ENERGY
central unit, item F521, and force
MANAGEMENT functions
their operation independently from
The device has:
the central unit itself It is therefore
a local load forcing pushbutton;
possible to:
a red/green two-colour LED for
Force the priority of the load
the notication of the status of the
during normal operation In this
actuator;
case the central unit cannot
central unit for load management

red disabling signalling LED
disable the load for 4 hours

Re-enable a load disabled by
the central unit, the duration of
this operation lasts for 4 hours,
unless the disabling key is pressed
manually
The functions that can be performed
by the load control panel can also be
performed by Local Display
Local pushbutton for load

forcing/local control
Load status red LED

Device status two-colour LED
(HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685) With Local

Display it is however possible to
manage up to 20 loads
Flush mounted 16 A actuator
Forced load key

Local Display
Load/programming status
notification LED
Load control panel
Load control management and consumption display

BUILDING LAYOUT
PHYSICAL LIMIT
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
The BUS system layout for the
ACTUATORS
installation of Load Control
that can be connected to the BUS
The Central Unit for Load
Management System and the Display
(central unit for load management,
Management can control up to 63
of Consumptions System offers the
actuator, power meter, and pulse
actuators (appliances or electric
following advantages:
counter interface) depends on the
loads)
Both for new systems, and
total absorption of the same, and on
If the system is solely dedicated to
installation in existing electric
the distance between the connection
Load Management, or if it shares the
systems, the BUS line can use
point and the power supply
same BUS line of the Automation/
the same conduits of the energy
Temperature control system, the
system used for the wiring of
If the system uses the same cable
number of actuators shall depend on
power sockets However, this is
as the Automation/temperature
the limit of the available current
only possible when using the BUS
control system, the calculation of the
cable, Item L4669, with insulation
maximum number of devices must
voltage 300/500 Vdc
be performed taking into account the
Depending on the needs of the
general absorption of the same
user and the type of building, the
For the purpose of the above
load control actuators may be
calculations, the table shows the
installed:
current absorbed by each device
1. in DIN distribution board, if it is not

required to display and reactivate
the load directly in the room where
the load is located;
2. near each current socket for the
load to be controlled, to ensure the
possibility of controlling the status
and/or forcing the load
ITEM
DEVICE
ABSORPTION FROM BUS
F521
28 mA
F522
Actuator with probe
30 mA
F523
Basic actuator
10 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N
10 mA
H4684 - L4684 - AM5864
Touch screen 3.5
80 mA
HD/HC/HS4690
Multimedia Touch screen 10
50 mA
F520
Bus meter with toroids
35 mA
3522
7.5 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673
Load control panel
7 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685
Local Display
60 mA
F524
Energy data logger
30 mA
1. The length of the connection

between the power supply and the
furthest device cannot exceed 250 m
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution
board
Furthest device
2. The total length of the connections

must not exceed 500 m (extended
cable)
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution
board

In order to ensure optimum distribution
of the currents on the BUS line, it is
recommended to position the power
supply in an intermediate position
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
With E46ADCN power supply:
With E49 power supply:
=250 m max
=250 m max
=250 m max
=250 m max
A + B =500 m
The maximum current supplied
by the power supply is: 1200 mA
A + B =500 m
The maximum current supplied
by the power supply is: 600 mA
CONFIGURATION

The load management control and
control actuators (Item F522, F523,
The products may be split in two
consumption display systems must
L/N/NT/HC/HS/ HD4672N) and
classes:
be correctly configured to ensure
consists in physically connecting
1. Pulse counter interface (item
that they can operate correctly,
the connection components, called
3522), Bus meter with 3 inputs for
and that each item can perform
configurators to the appropriate
toroids (item F520), Central unit for
the desired function The mode of
housings of the devices
load management (item F521) All
configuration must be the physical
The configurators have different
these devices have an address from
one The physical configuration
numbers, letters, colours, or graphics
1 to 127
entails interaction with the devices

- pulse counter interface (Item
3522), bus meter with 3 inputs for
toroids (Item F520), central unit for
CONFIGURATOR SOCKET
CONFIGURATORS USED
load management (Item F521), load
A1 is the configurator indicating the hundreds
0, 1
A2 is the configurator indicating the tens
From 0 to 9
A3 is the configurator indicating the units
From 1 to 9
A3-Ta
From 1 to 9 (a congurator must be in this housing)
A3-Tb
From 1 to 9
A3-Tc
From 1 to 9
WARNING: The 0 configurator in A3-Tb, A3-Tc indicates that the toroid input is not being used. A3 or A3Ta cannot
be equal to 0. In the case of the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids, item F520, if only one toroid is used, this must
be connected to A3-Ta.
Configuration examples:
For bus meter with three inputs for toroids, item F520, and pulse counter interface, item 3522:
Bus meter with toroids
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS
A1
A2
A3-Ta
A3-Tb
A3-Tc
ADDRESSES
0
0
1
2
3
Toroid connected to Ta with address 001

Toroid connected to Tb with address 002
Toroid connected to Tc with address 003
WARNING: The devices in this class must be a different

address from each other: for example, there cannot be
a pulse counter interface and a bus meter with three
inputs for toroids with the same address. Also two
toroids cannot have the same address.
In case two consumption/load control devices are
installed on an automation or temperature control
A1
A2
A3-Ta
A3-Tb
A3-Tc
1
2
6
7
0
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
0
0
4
Toroid connected to Ta with address 126

Toroid connected to Tb with address 127
No toroid connected to Tc
bus, the configured addresses are not in conflict with

the other devices on the system: a temperature control
probe configured with address 11 is not in conflict with
a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids with address 11.
It is possible to manage up to 20 lines (toroids)
maximum per power supply. Example: 6 meters for 3
Pulse counter interface address 004
lines plus 1 meter for 2 lines (total 20).
CONFIGURATION

2. Load control actuators:
The actuators may be used both as
mode requires a progressive address
programs in the touch screens, and
automation actuators and ENERGY
from 1 to 63
define the disconnection priorities for
MANAGEMENT actuators The
These addresses are used in the
the controlled load
configuration in automation mode
appropriate configuration software
follows the same rules outlined

in the automation guide (see the
device TECHNICAL SHEETS); the
configuration in Energy Management
CONFIGURATOR SOCKET
CONFIGURATORS USED
P1 is the configurator indicating the tens
From 0 to 6
P2 is the configurator indicating the units
From 0 to 9
Configuration examples:
For actuator 16 A with probe Item F522 and actuator 16 A Item F523:
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS
ADDRESSES
WARNING: In the case of consumption display/
Actuator 16 A with probe

Actuator 16A
load control actuators installed on an automation

A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF
A
PL
M
G
P1
P2
or temperature control bus, and configured also in

0
1
Address priority 01
automation mode
(A, PL...), the load control actuator must not have
the same address as another actuator on the
automation bus. Example: if actuator F411/1N A =
1 PL = 1, then actuator F522 cannot be configured
Address priority 10
with PL=1.
1
0
SYSTEM EXPANSIONS
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
LOAD CONTROL SYSTEM
The energy management system is a
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
very flexible system, for the installation
After installing the devices (Pulse
After installing the devices and
of the devices on the automation/
counter interface, item 3522, bus
configuring the actuators, it is
temperature control bus, or for
meter with 3 inputs for toroids,
necessary that the central unit
creating a system solely dedicated to
Item F520, central unit for load
for load management acquires
energy management, with dedicated
management, Item F521), an address
the actuators on the bus, and the
power supply in general, all energy
must be assigned using physical
corresponding priorities configured
management devices may be installed
configurators (A1, A2, A3) This
For more information see the
on each bus
address will then be used in the
technical sheet of the central unit
branch and on each expansion,
software for the configuration of
for load management, item F521,
provided this is allowed by the
the user interfaces (e g software for
and the TECHNICAL SHEET for the
absorption calculations The only
the configuration of the 3 5 touch
actuators
exceptions are the actuators, which,
screen)
when configured in automation mode,
For more information see the
during system expansions follow the
relevant product technical sheet
same rules of the automation bus

(automation technical guide)
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
DEVICES
Power bus meter with
3 inputs for toroids
Central unit for

load management
Actuator 16 A
with current probe
Actuator 16A
Flush mounted
Actuator 16 A
Pulse counter
interface
SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
Load management
panel
IN
3522
OUT
Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)
NOTE 1): in combination with additional toroid, item 3523
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
DEVICES
Local display
Touch screen 3,5
Touch screen 10
Energy data logger
Webserver
Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
WARNING
RCCD
MCB1
E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
3522
General switch
4 A MCB switch
Compact power supply
Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10
The following Touch Screens may be installed:
230 Vac
- H4684 AXOLUTE
- L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
- AM5864 MTIX
- Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523
The general switch RCCD must be selected depending
on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended.
N
L
N
L
To the other users
MGT1
4A
IG
Modem Router/
Switch
3523
E49
Touch Screen
F520
F524
PRI
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
=0
=0
=1
=0
=0
BUS/SCS
Switchboard or distribution board
3522
SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
IN
3522
OUT
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
=0
=0
=2
=0
=1
=0
3522
SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
Zener Barrier/Galvanic
insulation Barrier 1)
NOTES: 1) the barrier must meet the Atex requirements

and must be installed outside the Atex area.
Gas meter with

pulse output
Water meter with

pulse output
IN
3522
OUT
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
=0
=0
=3
=0
=3
=0
Display of electric consumptions on several lines

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
WARNING
E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-5
MCB6

Toroid
General switch
Linear protection switch
4 A MCB switch

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523
230 Vac
N
L
N
L
IG
MGT1
MGT2
MGT3
MGT4

recommended.
MGT5
3523
3523
Socket line 1
3523
Socket line 2
3523
Line 3
lighting
3523
Line 4
appliances
3523
MGT6
F881NA/4
E49
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
Switchboard or
distribution board
Line 5
Temperature
control
(hot and cold)
F520
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC
Touch Screen
F520
=0
=0
=1
=2
=3
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC
=0
=0
=4
=5
=6
BUS/SCS
To other devices if present
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of produced and consumed energy

WARNING
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
E49
F520
3523
3522
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-2

Toroid
General switch
MCB protection switch
If a photovoltaic system and a thermal solar system for

the production of energy and hot water are installed,
by using energy measurement devices and the pulse
counter interface the user can display the energy
produced, or the amount of heated water on the touch
screen.

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item
3523, for current reading
recommended.
230 Vac
L N
Photovoltaic generator string
L
Input/output
meter
Wh
230 Vac
Wh
MGT1
IG
Inverter
3523
String distribution board
3523
N
MGT2
Touch Screen
E49
F520
F520
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC
A1
A2
A3TA
A3TB
A3TC
=0
=0
=1
=0
=0
=0
=0
=2
=0
=0
BUS/SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
3
0
3
0
Water meter with

pulse outout
SCS
3522
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
IN
3522
OUT
Storage battery
Display of produced and consumed energy

in exchange mode on location
WARNING
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
E49
F520
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1-3

Toroid
General switch
MCB protection switch
In the presence of a photovoltaic panels system

configured for a delivery of energy in local exchange
mode, the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids can be
installed as shown in the figure: one toroid measures
the current produced by the photovoltaic panels, the
other the home consumption.
WARNING: avoid fitting the measuring toroid directly
on the main bidirectional meter.

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
load absorption
recommended
Photovoltaic generator string
230 Vac
L N
Production
meter
Input/
output
meter
Wh
MGT1
Inverter
Wh
MGT2
String distribution board
3523
IG
3523
L
N
MGT3
Touch Screen
E49
F520
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A1 =
A2 =
A3TA =
A3TB =
A3TC =
0
0
1
2
0
BUS SCS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of the consumption of thermal power /

hot water by individual home
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
E46ADCN
...4695
...4692
F430/2
F430/4
3522
Touch Screen
Power supply
4 zone central units
probe with adjustment knob
2 relay DIN actuator
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch
Screen 10
In an establishment with central heating, by connecting a

Pulse counter interface to the pulse output of the meter of
a My Home system, it is possible to display on the touch
screen the data made available by the meter (water
consumption of the individual home, thermal power).
The meter must be have pulse outputs, and must be
installed at the input of the distribution manifold.
WARNING
- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
The following 4 zone central units may be installed:
- HC/HS4695 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4695 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5875 MATIX
Home n
The following probes with knob may be installed:

-3
-3
- HC/HS4692 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4692 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5872 MATIX
ZONE 2
OFF
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
+1
4692
ZONE 4
-2 -1
OFF
+3
+2
ZONE 3
4692
ZONE 1
18.0C
-3
23.7C
-2 -1
OFF
+3
+2
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
OK
+1
4692
4695
Home 2
-3
-3
ZONE 2
+1
-2 -1
+3
+2
OFF
+3
+2
OFF
+1
4692
ZONE 4
-2 -1
ZONE 3
18.0C
-3
23.7C
-2 -1
OFF
+3
+2
13 : 38
Ven
07
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
Meter
ZONE 1
Gen
OK
+1
4692
Solenoid valve
4692
4695
Home 1
Mixing
valve
Main solenoid
valve
Central boiler
E46ADCN
Mixing valve
management
central unit
F430/2
1
1 2 3 4
C2
1 2 3 4 5
...4695
ART. F430/4
ART. F430/2
C1
Touch Screen
F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
OK
230 Vac
-2 -1
-3
-3
F
+1
+1
...4692
-2 -1
OF
OF
+3
+2
-2 -1
+1
...4692
+3
+2
+3
+2
OF
...4692
-3
BUS/SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
1
0
2
0
3522
NOTE: the pulse counter interface is recommended (M=2) to detect the thermal power
SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
IN
3522
OUT

with total consumption display
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
WARNING
E49
F521
F523
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1
...4672N

16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch 10
General switch
4 A MCB switch
230 Vac
- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
The following 2 module flush mounted 16 A actuators
may be installed
- HC/HS/HD4672N AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4672N LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
load absorption
N
L

recommended
N
L
MGT1
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid,

item 3523, for current reading
MGT2
IG
N
L
3523
Load
Load
Load
...4672N
L N
F521
E49
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
1
0
5
F523
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
Touch
Screen
F523
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
2
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
1
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
3
BUS/SCS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Load control management with total display,

of loads and diagnostics
WARNING
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
E49
F521
F523
F522
3523
Touch Screen
RCCD
MCB1

Actuator 16 A with probe
Toroid
Touch Screen 3.5 / Multimedia Touch Screen 10
General switch
4 A MCB switch

- H4684 AXOLUTE
- AM5864 MTIX
load absorption
230 Vac
N
L

recommended
N
L
MGT1
F522 actuator 16 A with integrated current probe,

capable of measuring the consumptions of the controlled
load. By connecting a toroid, item 3523 to the device,
it is possible to measure the earth leakage current and
display the load status on the Touch screen.
MGT2
IG
N
L
3523
Load
Load
Load
Load
L N
Touch Screen
E49
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
F521
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
1
0
5
F522
A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF
F523
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
2
5
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
F522
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
1
A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF
F522
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
3
0
A
PL
M
P1
P2
PF
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
4
0
BUS/SCS
Three-phase and one-phase load control management

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
WARNING
E49
F521
F523
3523
MCB
FC4A...

Toroid
MCB switch
AC contactor

load absorption
The contactor must be selected depending on the
absorption of the load
The three-phase line must be balanced
380 Vac
R
S
T
N
R
S
T
N
MGT1
MGT2
Single-phase
load
R N
E49
F521
F523
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)
F523
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
1
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
2
BUS/SCS 1
E49
F521
F523
PRI
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
1
R N
FC4A...
BUS/SCS 2
E49
F521
F523
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 240 V~
185 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A1
A2
A3
P
TOL
= 0
= 0
= 1
= 1)
= 1)
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
1
Three-phase load
NOTE: 1) the configurators must be selected depending on the rated power

BUS/SCS 3
CONTENTS
MY HOME Sound system

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
GENERAL FEATURES
Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI

The stereo Sound System provides
audio/video mixers, it will be possible
perfectly integrated with the electric
sound selection and control, so that
to choose between mono and
system, that enable listening both to
high quality sound may be sent to
multichannel systems
the HI-FI system and the integrated
several rooms at the same time
The Sound System consists of
FM radio source
Thanks to the various available
amplifiers and loudspeakers,
Flush mounted diffuser
Flush mounted
amplifier
Hi-Fi stereo system
stereo control
Line terminator
8-contact connector
324 MY HOME
Sound system
Thanks to its complete range and the
of expansion of the system, and
environments, such as general
many functions that it provides, it
the sound quality, mean in fact that
practitioners or dentist nurseries,
represents the ideal solution for both
it can be used both in domestic
shop, bars, restaurants and
home and service sector applications
environments (from the apartment
supermarkets
The performance, the possibilities
to the villa), and in service sector
Flush mounted
amplifier
Audio/Video node
Line terminator
Power supply
230 Vac
Bus
Sound system MY HOME 325
GENERAL FEATURES
Wide range of solutions

fOR THE RESIDENTIAL SEcTOR
fOR THE SERVIcE SEcTOR
Mono/multichannel sound system
Extendable to up to 140
loudspeakers
Wide range of loudspeakers
Possibility of using the
Elegant and refined designs
loudspeakers for intercom

purposes
Possibility of also creating

monophonic systems
Management through PC
Ceiling mounted diffuser
Flush mounted amplifier
stereo amplifier
MULTIcHANNEL SETUP: IN EAcH

ROOM IT WILL BE POSSIBLE TO
LISTEN TO THE DESIRED MUSIc
In total freedom and with full control
The multichannel setup will in
will listen to the radio, while, in their
fact give the possibility to listen to
own bedroom, the parents will enjoy
different music in each room at the
a cd from the stereo system located
same time: in their bedroom, children
in the living room
up to 4 sound sources
dierent music for each room
multichannel matrix
otHer sourCes
note: the multichannel matrix has four more inputs, for the connection of entrance panels, video door entry systems, and/or cameras.
326 MY HOME
Sound system
Integration with other MY HOME applications

and the 2 wire video door entry system
The Sound System can be integrated with
other MY HOME applications and with
the 2 wire video door entry system, for
the creation of useful scenarios, such as:
1. With the simple pressure of one
2. Automatically lower the
3. Make a call from the video
key it will be possible to rise the
music volume to better hear
handset, with the voice carried
rolling shutter, and switch the radio
communications from the handset, or
through the loudspeakers, to look for
or the stereo on, to have the desired
the video door entry systems
people, or for verbal communication

in general
music playing in the background

example of implementation of scenario 1
Automation system:
lights and shutters
sCs/sCs interface:
to integrate the sound system with automation
= white BUS cable (for sound system)
sound system
= grey BUS cable (for automation)
example of implementation of scenarios 2 and 3

Audio/video node or multichannel matrix:

common for video door entry system and sound system
sound system
= white BUS cable (common for video door entry system and sound system)
TWO WIRE SIMPLIcITY

The installation of the sound system
applications, also this system may be
The Sound System uses the same
is simple and accessible
easily expanded and modified at a
power supply and cable of the 2 wire
Just like all other MY HOME
later date
door entry system
GENERAL FEATURES
Installing a system
Irrespective of the solution selected,
To them, it will then be necessary
when installing a sound system the
to add all those devices, common
following components will always be
to every system, that enable the
required:
application to function: power
1. Audio/video mixers;
supply, sheathed pair, configurators,
2. Sound sources;
line terminals etc
3. Sound Amplifiers;
4. Control device;
5. Loudspeakers
1 AUDIO/VIDEO MIXERS
The choice of one of the four audio/
multichannel matrix:
for single channel systems with several sound sources used at the
same time.
video mixers depends on the type of

system being installed These devices
enable the distribution of the sound
from the sound sources through
the amplifiers located in the various
Audio/Video node:
for single channel systems
with several sound sources
used one at the time.
rooms
Video adapter:
for basic systems with only one
sound source.
Compact power supply:

this is a Video AdAPter integrated inside a power
supply. single device performing the audio/video mixer
and power supply functions. suitable for basic systems
with only one sound sources (max available current
600 mA). see dedicated diagram 1 in the section.
installation examples.
328 MY HOME
Sound system
2 SOUND SOURcES
Sound sources are devices
interfaces for connection of external
generating a stereo audio signal
sound sources (e g HI-FI system,
BTicino offers radio synthetisers and
IPOD with dock-station)

rCA input
radio tuner
source insulator
to be used with rCA input only,
when the sound source is not
battery powered
stereo control
3 AMPLIfIERS
Devices that amplify the audio

signal form the sound sources to the
loudspeakers found throughout the
system
stereo amplifier da incasso:

permette lamplificazione del segnale oltre a
tutte le funzioni di comando on/o, volume,
selez. sorgente, stazione o brano Cd
din stereo amplifier:

directly powered at 230 Vac, it enables the
creation of extended systems (up to 140
loudspeakers). suitable for service sector
environments, such as oces, restaurants,
supermarkets, etc...
Power amplifier:
enables to faithfully reproduce the sound signal.
Fitted with oLed display, for the displaying of all the
parameters. 10 settable equalisation levels, and 10
preset ones.
GENERAL FEATURES
Installing a system
multimedia touch:
multimedia station providing control of
the sound system and of all the my Home
applications, as well as the Bticino video
systems.
4 cONTROL DEVIcE
These devices are available in

several versions: from simple ones,
touch screen:
a simple touch of the screen
will be enough to manage the
sound system and all existing
my home applications
capable of managing ON/OFF and

volume adjustment controls from
the amplifiers that can be found in
the various rooms, to more advanced
products, for radio channel and
sound source selection, up to the
possibility of remote control of the
whole system
radio control:
management of all control
functions: useful for system
expansion
touch keys:
For stereo loudspeakers
on/o control and volume
adjustment
Local display:
comando a touch display per gestione
amplificatori, on/o, volume, selez. stazione
special control:
management of amplifiers, on/o
control, volume, radio station and Cd
track selection; design complemented
by appropriate key covers
Knob control:
on/o, volume, radio
station and cd track
selection
330 MY HOME
Sound system
radio remote control:

management of all control functions.
Preset for use by disabled people
nighter e whice soft touch control:

for stereo loudspeakers on/o
control and volume adjustment
ir remote control (infrared):

for the management of all control
functions
muLtiBoX flush mounted box:

suitable for the residential sector
5 LOUDSPEAKERS
The sound system can be used

with all 8 and 16 ohm loudspeakers
wall-mounted, slimline:
35 mm thickness, for
indoor use
available on the market

BTicino offers solutions that meet
the needs of all main installation
environments
Ceiling mounted 240 mm:

for the service sector
Ceiling mounted 100 mm:

Ceiling mounted,
60x60 mm panel:
Flush mounted box item 506e:

suitable for the residential sector
GENERAL FEATURES
Installation examples
This section of the guide shows some
3. With multichannel matrix -
8. Integration of the video door
examples of wire systems, providing
multichannel stereo system
entry system on the same branch -
some general information on the
4. Expansion with audio/video node
with flush mounted amplifiers
various types of installations that
or multichannel matrix - several inputs
9. Installation of monophonic
can be obtained Detailed wiring
5. Expansion with audio/video
systems
diagrams can be found later on, in a
node or multichannel matrix - several
10. Example with independent power
specific section of this guide
outputs with DIN amplifiers
amplifier - without My Home Bus
6. Expansion with audio/video
11. System with audio/video node
LIST Of SUGGESTED
node or multichannel matrix -
and floor distribution block
INSTALLATION EXAMPLES
several outputs with flush mounted
1. With compact power supply -
amplifiers
basic stereo system
7. Integration of the video door
2. With audio/video node -
entry system on the same branch -
single channel stereo system
with DIN amplifiers
1 EXAMPLE WITH cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY - BASIc STEREO SYSTEM
Using the compact power supply
sound source in the system and flush
To assess the maximum number of
item 346030 you can build a basic
mounted or DIN rail amplifiers can be
amplifiers that can be installed, use
Sound system
connected in output (on one branch
the calculation method starting from
This solution lets you have just one
only)
600 mA
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
Line terminator
Loudspeaker
Bus
sound sources
Audio/video
mixer
2
Compact
power supply
2
radio tuner
332 MY HOME
Sound system
Bus
Bus
Bus with star wiring

Bus with in-out wiring
Bus with free wiring
2 EXAMPLE WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE - SINGLE cHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM
With the audio/video node, the
The example proposed includes:
sound sources can be mixed on its
2 sound sources (radio and RCA
Integrated video door entry

entrance panel and handset (the
4 outputs The node is suitable both
input for the connection of a stereo
volume of the music source is
for service sector environments and
system) that can only play music
automatically lowered in case of
small domestic environments
one source at the time
call, sending of voice messages

through the loudspeakers)
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
Bus
Handset
on
Line terminator
Loudspeaker
Line terminator
Loudspeaker
Bus
Bus
sound sourCes
sorGenti
sonore
Audio/video
node
Bus
Audio/video
mixer
Power supply
Bus
Bus
2
2
radio tuner
stereo
source insulator
rCA input
GENERAL FEATURES
3 EXAMPLE WITH MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - MULTIcHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM
The multichannel matrix is the ideal
is particularly suited for residential
source) that may play music at the
solution for anyone who wants to
installations, such as villas, homes
same time;
have various sound sources active
and large apartments, where
in different rooms at the same
integration with the 2 WIRE video
integrated entrance panel, handset
time, guaranteeing full freedom
door entry system and other MY
and cameras for cctv functions
of listening and control With the
HOME applications is required
(the volume of the music source
multichannel matrix, the sound
The example proposed includes:
is automatically lowered in case
sources can be mixed on its 8
3 sound sources (radio, stereo
of call, sending of voice messages
Video door entry system including
control, and RCA input for external
outputs The multichannel matrix
room 1
through the loudspeakers)
room 2
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
Handset
on
Line terminator
Line terminator
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
2
Bus
Audio/video
mixer
Bus
Bus
Power supply
multichannel
matrix
Bus
2
2
Bus
Bus
2
2
Bus
Bus
entrance panel
334 MY HOME
Cameras
Sound system
sound sourCes
2
2
Bus
Bus
Bus
radio tuner
stereo control
rCA input
source insulator
4 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS
The Sound System can be integrated
be connected to an additional audio/
Sound sources may not be installed
with the 2 wire video door entry
video node It is possible to connect
on the node connected in cascade
system This integration may cause
one additional audio/video node for
This solution gives the possibility of
the complete saturation of the mixers
each input of the audio/video node,
installing up to 16 entrance panels or
inputs If it is necessary to increase
or the main multichannel matrix (only
cameras, when a matrix is used as the
the number of inputs for cameras or
inputs dedicated to the video door
main mixer
entrance panels, these devices may
entry system)
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
Handset
Bus
2
on
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Line terminator
Line terminator
2
Bus
Bus
Power supply
Audio/video
node
or multichannel
matrix
2
Bus
Bus
2
2
Audio/Video node
Bus
only cameras or
entrance panels may
be connected in this
branch
Bus
radio tuner
2
Bus
stereo
source insulator
rCA input
Bus
entrance panel
instALLAtion note: only audio/video nodes may be installed in cascade to the main mixer
wArninGs: if the addition of additional sources is
required (particularly cameras), or if the outputs of
the audio/video node (item F441), or the multichannel
matrix (item F441m) are not enough, the system
can be expanded. these expansions are obtained by
cascade connection of an additional audio/video node.
when performing a cascade connection, the following

must be taken into account:
Cascade connection of the multichannel matrix is
not possible;
Only one connection in cascade, providing more
inputs and outputs, is possible (it is not possible to
Cameras
extend the system with 3 or more nodes installed in

cascade);
Only 2 wire entrance panels and cameras may be
connected to the node installed in cascade. sound
sources cannot be connected.
Above are some examples that are normally possible.
GENERAL FEATURES
5 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH
DIN AMPLIfIERS
By connecting an audio/video node
module (item 346851), it is possible
only) Thanks to this solution, useful
on the output to another mixer,
to expand the system to up to 70
for service sector environments, up to
combining it to the system expansion
amplifiers (DIN amplifiers, item F502,
140 loudspeakers may be installed
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers
Amplifier
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Amplifier
Line terminator
Line terminator
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Line terminator
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Amplifier
Line terminator
Amplifier
2
2
2
Audio/video
node
Patch cord
radio tuner
Audio/video
node
or
multichannel
matrix
system
expansion
module
Power supply
Patch
cord
Power supply
2
2
Bus
2
Bus
stereo
336 MY HOME
source
insulator
Sound system
rCA input
* din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac
6 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH
fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS

By exploiting the setup shown above
to expand the system, enabling
8 flush mounted amplifiers with 16
and replacing the main audio/video
the installation of 4 flush mounted
ohm loudspeakers on the output of
node with a matrix, it is possible
amplifiers with 8 loudspeakers, or
the matrix and the audio/video node
Amplifier
Amplifier
Line terminator
Line terminator
Line terminator
Amplifier
Line terminator
Amplifier
2
Audio/video
node
Power supply
system
expansion
module
matrix or
Audio/Video node
Patch cord
2
Bus
radio tuner
rCA input
source
insulator
stereo
GENERAL FEATURES
7 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS
Maximum 10 DIN rail amplifiers
The diagram below shows the
In the example, DIN rail amplifiers,
possibility of connecting both
item F502, are used
for each output of the audio/video
amplifiers and audio/video handsets
The calculation of consumptions
mixer
to the output of a mixer branch
remains unchanged:
Handset
on
*
Amplifier
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Line terminator
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
Amplifier
Amplifier
Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers
*
Amplifier
2
2
Audio/video
node
or multichannel
matrix
Bus
Power supply
2
Bus
radio tuner
* din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac

entrance panel
338 MY HOME
Sound system
8 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS
The integration on the same output

branches of the mixers between
amplifiers and handsets can also be
performed with a flush mounted
amplifier
When calculating consumptions, the
following must be taken into account:
If an output branch is fitted with
If an output branch is fitted with
a flush mounted amplifier and
more than one flush mounted
a handset, the installation of an
amplifier, it will be necessary to
additional power supply is not
install an additional power supply
necessary
for each handset installed (any 2

wire handset)
Loudspeakers
Handset
Handset
on
extra
power supply
on
Amplifier
Loudspeakers
Loudspeakers
Amplifier
Amplifier
2
Power supply
matrix or
Audio/Video node
2
2
radio tuner
entrance panel
rCA input
source
insulator
stereo
GENERAL FEATURES
9 EXAMPLE Of INSTALLATION Of MONOPHONIc SYSTEMS
The Sound system has been mainly
The wiring of amplifiers remains
When a flush mounted amplifier
conceived for stereo systems
unchanged, following standard
is used, the sound system must be
However, should it become
installation requirements
connected to the + terminal of
necessary to install monophonic
When the item F502 DIN rail
one channel and to the - terminal

of another channel
systems, for example for the service
amplifier is used, it will be necessary
sector (supermarkets, shopping
to connect configurator 3 to the M3
When choosing these installation
centres, etc ), installation will still be
housing, and it will only be possible
solutions, it will only possible to
possible, by following some simple
to connect one loudspeaker, or
connect the range of loudspeaker
precautions:
two mono loudspeakers, on the
included in the BTicino catalogue
amplifier outputs
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
note: use 8 or 16
loudspeakers only
note: it is possible to connect a
Amplifier
Amplifier (rear view)
loudspeaker, or use both outputs by

Bus
installing two monophonic loudspeakers
(Configurator m3 = 3)
2
Line terminator
Bus
Line terminator
Audio/video
node
2
2
2
radio tuner
stereo
stereo control
340 MY HOME
Sound system
Power supply
10 EXAMPLE WITH INDEPENDENT POWER AMPLIfIER WITHOUT MY HOME BUS
Due to its qualities that ensure high
This use is suitable for broadcasting
DIN switchboards powered with
performances in terms of faithful
the sound signal from an MP3 reader,
110 - 230 Vac power line voltage,
reproduction of the signal, the F503
a CD, or similar device, in a small
with the sound signal connected
power amplifier may also be used
environments (individual rooms)
to the AUX audio input, through a
independently from the MY HOME
The installation requires that the
standard 3 5 mm stereo jack
BUS
amplifier is placed inside suitable
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
GENERAL FEATURES
11 EXAMPLE Of SYSTEM WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE AND fLOOR DISTRIBUTION BLOcK
By using this particular setup, it is
the item F441 audio/video node and
up to 40 DIN rail amplifiers in total,
possible to fully saturate the Sound
DIN rail amplifiers, item F520 (item
with up to 10 of them connected to
System using only one output of the
F502 amplifiers must be powered by
each individual output of the floor
audio/video node This particular
230 Vac power supply)
distribution block, item 346841
solution can only be achieved using
The solution proposed includes
Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier
din
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block
radio tuner
Bus
Audio/video
node
2
2
342 MY HOME
Sound system
Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier
din
Amplifier
din
Floor
distribution
block
Line terminator
stereo control
Power supply
Bus
stereo
Wiring
WIRING WITH AUDIO/VIDEO
NODE
remember some installation general
where the signals from the external
When wiring the sound system, by
rules: the distribution system is
stereo sources and the wirings from
means of the audio/video node,
made by means of star wiring,
the control devices and amplifiers

converge
in/out wiring.
- the outputs are connected to the audio/video node by means of in-out wiring.
- the audio/video used node outputs must be closed with the line terminator.
Line
terminator
Amplifier
special
control
ON
ON
OFF
Amplifier
ON
Local
display
OFF
OFF
Line
terminator
outputs
BUS
Audio/video
node
star centre
inputs
SCS
Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my Home systems.
touch screen
Power supply
sound sourCes
BUS
ON
special control
OFF
OUT
F422
3495
IN
IN
ON
star wiring
- the sound sources are connected by means of star wiring
- one source per input.
344 MY HOME
sCs/sCs interface
OUT
Sound system
OFF
special control
WIRING WITH MATRIX
The first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2
The wiring of the multichannel matrix
wire entrance panels and cameras
has a star topology where all the
Each output can only manage one
procedure, the following must be
in/out wiring.
- the matrix outputs must be closed using the line terminal
- each output can only have one room
- the rooms must be in increasing order
ON
on the same output
room
taken into account:
Amplifier
It is not possible to have two rooms
dedicated to the sound sources
converge to During the wiring
increasing order (output 1 - room 1,

output 2 - room t, etc )
The subsequent 4 inputs are
signals of the sound system devices
The rooms must be connected in
special
control
room 1
room 2
Line terminator
terminatore
di linea
ON
Local
display
OFF
OFF
room 3
room 4
Amplifier
ON
Line terminator
OFF
room 8
outputs

BUS
multichannel
matrix
star centre

inputs
Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my home systems.
touch screen
Power supply
sound sourCes
BUS
ON
special
control
OFF
OUT
F422
IN
ON
star wiring
- the first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras.
- the subsequent 4 inputs are dedicated to stereo sound sources
- only one source per input.
OFF
sCs/sCs
interface
special control
Maximum distances
When sizing the system remember
the wiring of the BUS 2 wire Sound/
with suitable insulation (e g item
the following system limits as a
Video door entry System and
336904)
function of the type of amplifier
the accessory wirings (cables for
Failure to respect the above
installed and the impedance features
loudspeakers etc ) in separate piping
provisions may affect the quality of
of the loudspeaker used
from the power cables (230V line)
the audio signal reproduced
To keep the fidelity of the audio
The above wirings can only share
signal reproduced unaltered, lay
inside junction boxes using cables

230 Vac
Amplifier
Amplifier
- max. 30 m with cable 1.5 mm2

- max. 15 m with cable 0.5 mm2
ON
max. 10 m
OFF
Loudspeakers
Loudspeakers
max. 300 m
Power supply
max. 200 m
max. 300 m
Audio/Video node or
multichannel matrix
SCS
max. 200 m
max. 5 m
Generic audio source
MAX. DISTANcE BETWEEN THE DEVIcES (A)

Maximum cable length on the basis of the number of flush mounted amplifiers installed along an output of the audio/video Node
Using cable item 336904

Using cable item UTP cat.5E
loudspeaKer
impedance
wiTh no. 1
amplifier
wiTh no. 2
amplifiers
wiTh no. 3
amplifiers
wiTh no. 4
amplifiers
160 m
60 m
16
200 m
160 m
100 m
60 m
80 m
30 m
16
160 m
80 m
50 m
30 m
NOTE: - using amplifiers DIN item F502, a maximum of 10 amplifiers can be cabled for each audio/video node output,
- for the lengths of the Video door entry wirings, rfer to the Technical Communication Guide,
- total stretched cable max 800 m.
346 MY HOME
Sound system
System consumption calculation

The system absorption is always
System with multichannel matrix:
The maximum number of DIN
calculated whenever the diagrams
add together the maximum
rail amplifiers, item F502, can be
shown afterwards in the guide are
consumption of all sources (they
40 when the audio/video node is
not followed. When calculating
may all be on at the same time).
used, and 80 if the multichannel
the current absorbed by the
B) Calculation of the current
matrix is used. In any case, the
components, remember that the
consumed by flush mounted
maximum number will depend
maximum current which can be
amplifiers: item H4562, item L4562
on the consumption of the input
supplied by the power supply: 1200
and item AM5742 consider the
sources.
mA (600 mA if using item 346030).
consumption in the ON position
REQUIREMENTS:
for each type of load connected (see
output of the mixers must be below
A) Calculation of the current
table B on the following page).
600 mA continuous ma (example:
absorbed by the sound sources
C) When building a basic system
maximum 2 flush mounted
Systems with audio/video node:
(without expansions) remember that:
amplifiers with 8 ohm loudspeakers,
there must be a maximum of 100
or 4 flush mounted amplifiers with
add together the source with the

highest consumption in the on
position, and the consumption of
all other sources during standby
The maximum current of each
scs devices.
16 ohm loudspeakers.
The maximum number of

amplifiers item H/L4562 and
AM5742 must not exceed 8.
2 wire sound system
Use the 2 wire System guide *

Sound system combined with the 2 wire video door
entry system?
YES
* For quick reference see tables C and D
NO
You have 1200 mA available
System with multi-channel matrix item f441m
System with audio/video node item F441
Subtract the total absorption of the sources,

they could work simultaneously
(see table A)
Subtract the maximum absorption of the source

which absorbs most and subtract the absorption
In stand-by of the other sources in the system
(see table A)
When calculating the absorptions consider the amplifiers as well:

Flush mounted amplifiers item h/l4562 - am5742 (see table b)
DIN guide amplifiers item F502 subtract 5 mA for each amplifier
IF THE RESULT IS >=0 mA and at the output to the audio/video mixers the current is less than 600 mA continuous (for each branch) THE SYSTEM CAN BE CONSTRUCTED.
If not look at the system again using more DIN rail amplifiers and making each system expansion following the layout examples in this guide.
System consumption calculation

Table A 2 wire Sound system component absorptions
Item
F441M
F441
346830 - 346030
Description
Multichannel matrix
Audio/Video node
Video adapter
Radio tuner
F500 - F500COAX
F500 N
Absorption
60 mA
20 mA
0 mA
12 mA (stand-by)
50 mA (in ON)
5 mA (stand-by)
20mA (in ON)
12 mA (stand-by)
40 mA (in ON)
12 mA (stand-by)
30 mA (in ON)
L4561N
Stereo control
HC/HD/HS4560 L/N/NT4560 AM5740

F502
RCA input
H4562 - L4562 - AM5742
Max. 10 amplifiers
for each mixer output
See table B
HW/H/L4684 - AM5864
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
80 mA
DIN amplifier
Item
H4651M2
L4651M2 - AM5831M2
HC/HD/HS4575
L/N/NT4575N
HC/HD/HS 4575SB
L/N/NT4575SB
Description
Special control
Special control
Radio interfaces
Absorption
6 mA
8.5 mA
22 mA
Radio interfaces
33 mA
HC/HD/HS4653/2/3
Soft Touch
15 mA
HC/HD/HS4563
L/N/NT4563
Knob control
5 mA
HC/HD/HS4654
L/N/NT4654N - AM5834
HC/HD/HS4657M3
HC/HD/HS4657M4
HC/HD/HS4685 - L/N/NT4685
IR receiver
8.5 mA
White glass controls, Nighter,

Whice
Local display
30 mA (3 mod.)
40 mA (4 mod.)
60 mA
Table B absorptions of the Flush mounted amplifiers H/L4562 - AM5742

Item
H4562
L4562
AM5742
Description
AXOLUTE flush mounted amplifier
LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT TECH flush mounted amplifier
Mtix flush mounted amplifier
Absorption
Stand-by
ON
6 mA
250 mA with 8 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
130 mA with 8 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
130 mA with 16 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
90 mA with 16 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
40 mA (MUTE)
NOTE: when the 2 wire Sound system is combined with the 2 wire system calculate the absorption of the amplifiers in MUTE (40mA)
EXAMPLE 1
A calculation example considering
The layout is made with the multi-
sources must be considered as all
the diagram called Small house
channel matrix and in this case, to
active.
(diagram 2) is proposed below.
calculate the absorptions, the sound
Items which absorb current
QuantitY
Absorption (mA)
F500 Tuner
L4561N Stereo control
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier
F441M Multichannel matrix
L4575N Radio interface
TOTALE
1
1
6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers)
1
1
1 x 50 (in ON)
1 x 40 (in ON)
5 x 130 + 250
1 x 60
1 x 22
1072
EXAMPLE 2
To better understand the calculation
the small house but using the
of the absorptions using the multi-
audio/video node instead of the
channel matrix or the audio/video
multi-channel matrix.
node, we give the same example of

Items which absorb current
QuantitY
Absorption (mA)
F500 Tuner
L4561N Stereo control
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier
F441 Audio/Video node
L4575N Radio interface
TOTAL
1
1
6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers)
1
1
1 x 50 (in ON)
1 x 12 (in stand-by)
5 x 130 + 250
1 x 20
1 x 22
1004
348 MY HOME
Sound system
INTEGRATION WITH VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

The tables below show the consumption data for video door entry system devices
Table C - Audio/video source absorption

Item
342150
342170
Description
SFERA Speaker module
SFERA Speaker module
Absorption
30 mA
30 mA
342200
SFERA Nameplate module
15 mA
342240
342510
342550
342600
342610
342630
342640
346991
346992
342708
342702
SFERA 4-key module

SFERA B/W Camera module
SFERA colour Camera module
SFERA Alphanumeric Pulse-dialling
SFERA Numeric Pulse-dialling
Speaker module with call SFERA graphics
Keypad for Pulse-dialling SFERA graphics
Universal Speaker module
Pushbutton extender
MINISFERA video
MINISFERA audio
15 mA
15 mA
15 mA
110 mA
15 mA
110 mA
15 mA
30 mA
15 mA
30 mA
30 mA
Item
342704
342911
342921
342931
342941
342971
342972
342951
342961
342981
342982
342991
342992
346150
346200
346230
346810
346850
346851
346851
347400
Description
MINISFERA keys
Audio LINEA 2000
Absorption
30 mA
30 mA
B/W and Colour Video LINEA 2000
30mA
B/W and Colour LINEA 2000 METAL
30 mA
8/2 WIRE interface

Actuator for generic loads
Door lock actuator
2 WIRE PABX interface
Apartment Interface (INT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=5 (OUT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=0 (OUT terminal)
COAX/2 WIRE interface
110 mA
10 mA
15 mA
15 mA
50 mA
15 mA
The absorption values for the individual source have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA
NOTE: The locally supplied entrance panels must not be considered in the absorption calculation.
Table D - Audio/video receiver absorption

Description
PIVOT audio handset/ Video handset
SWING audio handset/ Video handset
SPRINT audio handset/ Video handset
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY
POLYX VIDEO STATION
POLYX VIDEO STATION
POLYX DISPLAY
Absorption
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*
10 mA*
Description
Floor distribution block
Audio/Video node
Apartment interface (EXT terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=5 (IN terminal)
Expansion module in MOD=0 (IN terminal)
Door lock actuator
Door lock actuator
Light Actuator
Sound System Amplifier H4562 or L4562
Absorption
15 mA
20 mA
5 mA
5 mA
30 mA
15 mA
15 mA
15 mA
5 mA
* If they are locally supplied they absorb 5 mA

The absorption values for the individual receiver have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA
CONFIGURATION
General rules
2
To ensure that each device of the
This operation is completed by
Sound System performs the correct
connecting to the appropriate housings
function, it is necessary that it is
of the devices configurators identified
correctly configured The following
by a number or a letter
must be set:
the device address within the

system (device id);
the operating mode (what does it
A
PF
M
Legend
1. configurato socket
2. description of the configurator socket
3. tool for the connection of the configurator
note: for the specific configuration of each individual item refer to its technical data sheet (see the technical sheets section).
need to do)
ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES USING

THE MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX,
ITEM f441M
The use of the multichannel matrix
configured on output 1 (OUT 1),
entails a specific addressing order
the second room on output 2 (OUT
the connection of stereo sound
for the rooms It must be taken into
2), up to the eight room (OUT 8)
sources
account that in order to ensure
The subsequent 4 inputs are for
It is not possible to have several
Taking into account these
multichannel performance it is
rooms on the same matrix output
requirements, the configuration of
necessary that:
branch
the devices (function of the devices,
The order of the rooms must be

from 1 to 8, with the first room
The first 4 inputs are for the
single configuration, master-slave,
connection of 2 wire entrance
POint-point, etc ) remain unchanged
panels and cameras
in accordance with the indications on

the following pages
cORREcT MODE
A = 2
PF = 1
A = 2
PF = 9
ON
OFF
room 2
A = 1
PF = 9
OFF
A = 1
PF = 1
ON
OFF
room 1
room 4
room 5
room 6
room 7
room 8
OFF
OK
S = 1
350 MY HOME
Sound system
sound sources
OFF
room 3
s=4
s=3
s=2
2 wire video door entry system and cameras
A = 3
PF = 1
A = 3
PF = 9
WRONG MODE
one room per output
NO
one room per output

OFF
OFF
room 2
room 3
ON
OFF
room 1
room 2
room 8
room 3 (out 3) room 8 is in out 8
sources
sources
the first 4 inputs are for to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras
the last 4 are for sound sources
ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES
USING THE AUDIO/VIDEO NODE,
ITEM f441
The configuration of the devices
using the audio/video node does
not require special attention, as
Configure the sources in

chronological order
Taking into account these
shown on the matrix It is however
requirements, the configuration
recommended to follow these
of the devices (function of the
precautions:
devices, single configuration,
Separate the rooms (one room per
master-slave, POint-point, etc )
output)
If possible, maintain a chronological

order of the rooms (room 1 output
remain unchanged in accordance

with the indications on the
following pages
1, room 2 output 2, etc )
CONFIGURATION
General instructions
In order to understand the addressing logic of the devices, it is deemed appropriate to clarify some of the terms that occur
regularly in this guide.
Address of the local

amplifiers (H4562, L4562,
AM5742)
(PF) Loudspeakers
(A) = room
Numeric identification (0-9) of the
Group of amplifiers belonging to a

logic zone (in a home, for example,
the living room, the bedroom, etc.)
single amplifier inside the Room.
(M1 and M2) = mode
Modes for the addressing

of amplifiers
Type of control
housings for special configurations

Point-point
Amplifiers
Configurator socket
Value of the
configurators
A
PL/PF
19
19
Address of the special

controls (H4651M2, L4651M2,
AM5831M2)
(A) = room
(PF/PL) = Loudspeakers/light point
If correctly configured, it can
numeric indicator (0 - 9) of the
control either one single amplifier
individual amplifier inside the Room
(configurator 1 - 9), or a group
(A). When configured in a different
of amplifiers (AMB configurator),
way it can control the switching
or become a general switch-on
on of all amplifiers of the whole
control (GEN configurator) for all
room (the room is identified by the
amplifiers, even when these have
number from 1 to 9 connected to
been configured for different
housing A of the amplifier).
rooms.
(SPE)
To ensure operation of the Sound
System, number 8 must be
configured.
ADDRESS OF SOUND SOURCES
(S) = Source
Numeric identification (1-4) of the
individual sound source within the
Sound system.
352 MY HOME
Sound system
Procedure for the addressing

of special controls
Type of control Special control
Configurator socket
Value of the
configurators
Point-point
A
PL/PF
19
19
Room
A
PL/PF
ROOM
General
A
PL/PF
GEN
19
SINGLE CONFIGURATION
When the amplifiers only are used,
not controlled by special controls or
by Touch Screen, the configuration
of the devices is performed on the A
and PF housings.
ROOM 1
ON
OFF
A = 1
PF = 1
ROOM 2
ON
OFF
A = 1
PF = 2
ON
OFF
A = 2
PF = 1
ON
OFF
A = 2
PF = 2
Amplifiers
Single control
Master/Slave
ROOM 1
CONFIGURATION
Using 2 amplifiers configured with:
ON
1 amplifier: A=1, PF=1

st
2nd amplifier: A=1, PF=1, M1=SLA

If the volume is adjusted on one
OFF
Amplifiers
Master/Slave
A = 1
PF = 1
ON
OFF
A = 1
PF = 1
M1 = SLA
amplifier, it will also automatically

adjust on the other one. Any control
performed on one amplifier, will also
apply to the other one.
This function only applies to flush
mounted amplifiers.
CONFIGURATION
General instructions
POint-point CONFIGURATION
This configuration is achieved using
By configuring the special control:
special controls, or a Touch Screen for
A=1
remote control of the amplifiers.
PL/PF=1
SPE=8 sound system mode)

when the special control is used,
the device will send its own control
to the amplifier configured:
A=1
PF=1
ROOM 1
ON
Point-point control
OFF
Amplifiers
354 MY HOME
A
= 1
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8
A = 1
PF = 1
Sound system
ON
OFF
ROOM 2
A
= 1
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8
A = 1
PF = 2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A
= 2
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8
A = 2
PF = 1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A
= 2
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8
A = 2
PF = 2
room control
configuration
Configuration performed only
Configuring the device:
on special controls, or during the
A=ROOM
By pressing the device keys, all
programming of the TOUCH SCREEN.
PL/PF=1
amplifiers configured with A equal
All management controls found on
SPE=8
to the number of the configurator on
flush mounted amplifiers can be
PL/PF of the device will be affected
performed.
(in this case all amplifiers with A=1)
ROOM 1
ROOM
control 1
ON
OFF
ON
Point-point control
OFF
Amplifiers
ON
A
= 1
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8
A = 1
PF = 1
OFF
ROOM 2
A
= AMB
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8
ON
OFF
ON
ROOM
control 2
A
= 1
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8
A = 1
PF = 2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
A
= 2
PL/PF = 1
SPE = 8
A = 2
PF = 1
A
= AMB
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8
ON
OFF
ON
A
= 2
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8
A = 2
PF = 2
OFF
CONFIGURATION FOR GENERAL

CONTROL
Configuration performed only
Configuring the device:
This configuration enables the
on special controls, or during the
A=GEN
device to control the operation
programming of the TOUCH SCREEN.
PL/PF=(in this configuration pl/pf
of all amplifiers within the
It is possible to perform all controls

as for the room control configuration,
is not configured)
SPE=8
room, irrespective of the type of

configuration of the amplifier itself.
with the exception of volume control.
CONTENTS
MY HOME Wiring diagrams

1 - Residential sector - apartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
2 - Residential sector - small house 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3 - Residential sector - small house 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4 - Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
5 - Service sector: doctors surgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6 - Service sector: restaurant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
7 - Service sector: supermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
8 - Service sector: hotel room 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
9 - Service sector: hotel room 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10 - Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . 376
11 - Residential sector: with 2 wire video door entry system. . . 378
12 - System expansion:
sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration. . 380
13 - System expansion:
system with interface item 346851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
14 -Integration with multimedia interface:
System with multimedia interface and LAN network . . . 384
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - apartment

Below is shown an apartment, on a
An amplifier with 4 pushbuttons is
track or choose the favourite radio
single floor, with four rooms where
installed in each room This amplifier
station from those saved
the music is to be played with the
can switch the loudspeakers on and
Two flush mounted loudspeakers
2 wire Sound System The stereo
off, adjust the volume, cycle the
with 8 Ohm impedance are
control can play the music from the
sound sources available (if there is
connected to the amplifier
Hi-Fi stereo inside the apartment
more than one) and change the CD
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441
L4561N
L4562
L4567
L4911BF
L4911AI
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
Power supply
Audio video node
Stereo control
Wall mounted loudspeakers
Right pushbutton cover
Left pushbutton cover
Line terminator
8-contact connector
1
1
1
4
8
4
4
4
1
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mtiX series
358 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 1 apartment - 4 Flush mounted amplifier - 8 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS

L4567
L4567
ON
OFF
L4562
ON
A =1
PF = 1
OFF
L4562
L4567
ON
A =2
PF = 1
OFF
L4562
ON
A =3
PF = 1
OFF
3499
3499
3499
Hi-Fi stereo system
L4567
L4562
A =4
PF = 1
3499
Cables supplied
346000
L4561
F441
S =1
SCS
230 Vac
Patch cord
supplied
BUS
230 Vac
33698...(2/3/4)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - small house 1

The example gives an AXOLUTE
The system is also managed by a
activate and the loudspeakers will
system but it can also be made with
colour TOUCH SCREEN and special
switch on, first with a low sound
items of the other domestic series
configured controls: one to activate
level then increasing Touching the
For the Sound system inside a house
the whole system (general control)
TOUCH SCREEN or the amplifier OFF
you can position an amplifier in each
and the other to activate all the
pushbutton, the alarm clock switches
room and by using the multi-channel
amplifiers of a room (room control),
off
matrix you can listen to up to 4 sound
such as the living room amplifiers
sources simultaneously Remember
Thanks to a TOUCH SCREEN function
that when using the matrix each
the Sound system can be used as
output is a separate room Flush
an alarm clock In fact by setting the
mounted and DIN rail amplifiers are
time on the TOUCH SCREEN to the
used to make the system
set time the sound source set will
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
Power supply
1
F441M
Multichannel matrix
1
F500
Radio tuner
1
L4561N
Stereo control
1
HS4560
RCA input
1
H4562
4
H4651M2
Special control
2
F502
DIN amplifier
2
H4684
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
1
HS4565
Flush mounted loudspeaker
6
H4570
4
16104
MULTIBOX boxes for H4570
4
L4569
Outdoor loudspeaker
2
HS4911BF
6
HS4911AI
6
3499
Line terminator
4
3494...(14/15)
8-contact connector
1
336904
Twisted cable with 2 conductors
1
and mtiX series
360 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 2 small house - 3 Flush mounted AMPLIFIERS AND 2 DIN RAIL AMPLIFIERS - 6 X 16 ohm
AND 6 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS
NOTE: the DIN amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
F502
F502
BUS
A =1
PF = 1
ROOM 1
A =1
PF = 2
230 Vac
230 Vac
L4569
H4651M2
H4651M2
A = GEN
SPE = 8
A = AMB
PF = 1
SPE = 8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
H4562
A =1
PF = 3
3499
HS4565
H4570
H4570
ROOM 2
ON
OFF
H4562
A =2
PF = 1
3499
Room 4
HS4565
HS4565
ROOM 3
H4684
ON
OFF
H4562
A =3
PF = 1
ON
H4562
A =4
PF = 1
OFF
3499
3499
F441M
F500N
Hi-Fi stereo system
346000
S =1
230 Vac
BUS
L4561N
S =2
HS4560
Patch cord supplied
S =3
3494...(14/15)
230 Vac
Cables supplied
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - small house 2

The example shown is the same as
the previous page, but with the use,
in room 1, of three power amplifiers,
to ensure a detailed and optimum
management of sound levels, for
comfortable listening
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
Power supply
1
F441M
Multichannel matrix
1
F500
Radio tuner
1
L4561N
Stereo control
1
HS4560
RCA input
1
H4562
3
H4651M2
Special control
5
F502
DIN amplifier
2
H4684
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
1
HS4565
6
L4569
Outdoor loudspeaker
6
HS4911BF
8
HS4911AI
8
3499
Line terminator
4
3494...(14/15)
8-contact connector
1
336904
1
and mtiX series
362 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 3 small house - 3 Flush mounted amplifier AND 3 POWER AMPLIFIERS - 6 x 16 ohm and 6
x 8 ohm loudspeakerS
L4569
ROOM 1
L4569
L4569
L4569
L4569
L4569
H4651M2
F503
PRI
LEFT
A =1
PF = 1
OK
RIGHT
AUX
OUT
F503
PRI
LEFT
A =1
PF = 2
OK
RIGHT
A = AMB
PF = 1
SPE = 8
AUX
OUT
PRI
LEFT
ON
OK
RIGHT
AUX
OUT
F503
A =1
PF = 3
OFF
AUX
IN
SCS
AUX
IN
SCS
AUX
IN
SCS
HS4565
ROOM 2
ON
OFF
H4562
A =2
PF = 1
H4651M2
H4651M2
H4651M2
H4651M2
A = GEN
PF =
SPE = 1
A =1
PF = 1
SPE = 8
A =1
PF = 2
SPE = 8
A =1
PF = 3
SPE = 8
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3499
3499
HS565
HS4565
ROOM 3
ON
OFF
Room 4
H4684
H4562
A =3
PF = 1
ON
OFF
H4562
A =4
PF = 1
3499
BUS
3499
F441M
Hi-Fi stereo system
346000
F500N
S =1
230 Vac
Patch cord supplied

HS4560
S =3
L4561N
230 Vac
S =2
3494...(14/15)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - villa

The example given in the following
This solution uses the multi-channel
manage the HI-FI system, (or an IPod
layout refers to a villa where the
matrix as main audio/video mixer and
with dock-station) and an RCA input
Sound system absorption limits must
the audio/video nodes are secondary
to connect a further sound source
be exceeded Thanks to this solution
mixers which, used with item 346851,
The radio tuner must be installed in
several stretches can be made
can expand the system
a zone with enough signal to receive
and the whole house covered in a
The sound sources installed are the
the radiophonic emitters
capillary way
FM RDS ratio tuner, a stereo control to
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441M
F441
346851
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904
Power supply
Multichannel matrix
Audio/Video node
System expansion module
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Flush mounted amplifier*
Line terminator
8-contact connector
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
16
32
8
1
1
and mtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers
364 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 4 VILLA - SYSTEM USING THE INTERfAcE ITEM 346851

L4565
L4565
L4565
L4562
A =1
PF = 1
L4562
A =1
PF = 2
L4565
L4562
A =1
PF = 5
L4562
A =1
PF = 6
3499
L4565
L4565
3499
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 1
L4562
A =1
PF = 3
L4565
L4562
A =1
PF = 8
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 5
ON
OFF
L4562
A =2
PF = 6
3499
3499
L4565
L4562
A =1
PF = 7
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 2
3499
L4565
L4562
A =1
PF = 4
L4565
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 4
3499
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 3
ON
OFF
L4565
L4562
A =2
PF = 8
L4562
A =2
PF = 7
ON
OFF
3499
3499
Line 3 - room 2
Line 2 - room 1
F441
346851
346000
346851
346851
ON
346851
ON
OFF
ON
SCS
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SCS
230 Vac
M =1
346851
346851
ON
OFF
Line 5
346851
346851
ON
ON
Line 4
F441 346000
230 Vac
M =2
M =3
M =4
Line 1
Hi-Fi stereo system
F500n
S =1
F441m
346000
230 Vac
230 Vac
L4561n
S =2
L4560
S =3
33698... (2/3/4)
GENERAL LIMITS
Total length of stretched wire first stretch is 800m
Maximum length of wire between system expansion
module and last amplifier:
200 m con ush mounted amplier
300 m with ampliers on DIN rail
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - doctors surgery

This solution is ideal in surroundings
An amplifier on DIN rail is used in
in general mode to activate all the
where the amplifiers and sound
the waiting room, the Hi-Fi system
loudspeakers of the doctors surgery,
sources should only be controlled by
is positioned in the reception
the other configured to control the
authorised personnel The example
(so that the source is directly
loudspeakers in the waiting room
shows a doctors surgery with a
controlled by the secretary or
In the visiting rooms there are two
waiting room, the reception and two
doctor) and there are two special
flush mounted amplifiers for local
visiting rooms
controls: one control configured
management of the amplifiers
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
L4562
F502
L4651M2
L4567
3495
L/N/NT4911BF
L/N/NT4911AI
3499
336904
Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Amplifier per Service sector
Special control
Source insulator
Line terminator
1
1
1
2
1
2
6
1
4
4
3
1
and mtiX series
366 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 5 DOcTORS SURGERY - 2 fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS+ 1 DIN AMPLIfIER - 3 ROOMS

doCtors surGery no. 1
doCtors surGery no. 2
L4567
L4567
L4562
ON
OFF
L4562
ON
A = 2
PF = 1
A = 3
PF = 1
OFF
3499
3499
wAitinG room
L4567
230 Vac
F502
A = 1
PF = 1
3499
L4651m2
Hi-Fi stereo system
A = GEN
SPE = 8
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
L4651m2
A
= 1
PF/PL = 1
SPE = 8
F441
346000
SCS
L4560
230 Vac
S = 1
Bus
Cable supplied
230 Vac
3495
reCePtion
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - restaurant

The example has two rooms, a bar
amplifiers), two loudspeakers in the
Various scenarios can be saved using
area and bathrooms for men and
bar area and four loudspeakers in the
a scenario module (programmed by
women A sound system can be
bathrooms The system is managed
the TOUCH SCREEN): for example the
constructed inside a restaurant by
by a TOUCH SCREEN and 3 special
loudspeakers can be switched on in
installing Wall mounted loudspeakers
controls
the rooms with different sound levels
for each room (connected to DIN
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
3495
L4561N
F502
L4567
L4651M2
L4684
F420
L/N/NT4911BF
L/N/NT4911AI
3499
Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Source insulator
Stereo control
Amplifier per Service sector
Special control
TOUCH SCREEN
Scenario module
Line terminator
1
1
1
1
1
9
18
3
1
1
3
3
4
33698...(2/3/4)
336904
L/N/NT4575SB
L4572SB
L/N/NT4919SB
8-contact connector
Radio interface
Radio control
Pushbutton covers
1
1
1
1
2
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH and mtiX
series
368 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 6 RESTAURANT - 9 AMPLIfIERS ON DIN RAIL - 18 X 8 OHM LOUDSPEAKERS

* NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
L4567
BAr
F502
A = 4
PF = 1
L4575sB
L4651m2
L4651m2
L4651m2
A
PF
M1
SPE
A
= AMB
PF/PL = 1
SPE = 8
A
= AMB
PF/PL = 2
SPE = 8
A
SPE
=
=
=
=
4
1
1
8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
L4684
= GEN
= 8
L4572sB
3499
L4567
L4567
F502
L4567
F502
A = 1
PF = 1
L4567
F502
A = 1
PF = 2
F502
A = 1
PF = 3
A = 3
PF = 2
LAdies
BAtHroom
room 1
3499
L4567
L4567
F502
A = 2
PF = 1
3499
L4567
F502
L4567
F502
A = 2
PF = 2
F502
A = 2
PF = 3
A = 3
PF = 1
GentLemens
BAtHroom
3499
room 2
346000
Hi-Fi stereo system
F420
A = 0
PL = 1
L4561n
S = 1
F441
230 Vac
Bus
L4560
230 Vac
Patch cord
supplied
S = 2
reCePtion
33698...(2/3/4)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - supermarket

The sound system inside a
loudspeakers) can be reached
manage all the amplifiers, an RCA
supermarket (large area) can be
The configuration of the amplifiers is
input to play the audio signal from a
made using a maximum of 40 DIN
done monophonically
Hi-Fi system and one or more PIVOT
amplifiers (80 ceiling-mounting
Thus, this configuration can be
handsets (using key 4 of the handset)
loudspeakers) with just one audio/
achieved by placing configurator 3 in
to call personnel by means of the
video node Using the system
the M3 socket of the amplifier
loudspeakers inside the supermarket
expansion module up to 70 DIN
The solution presented is made
or installed near the cash desks
amplifiers (140 ceiling-mounting
by installing a TOUCH SCREEN to
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441
346851
L/N/NT4560
F502
L4566
L4684
3495
344082
3499
336904
Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
DIN amplifier
TOUCH SCREEN
Source insulator
Polyx audio handset
Line terminator
1
2
1
1
40+30
80+60
1
1
1
4+3
1
and mtiX series
370 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 7
SUPERMARKET - 2 NODES IN cAScADE AND UP TO 140 LOUDSPEAKERS MONOPHONIc

TRANSMISSION
* NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
L4566
F502
A = 3
PF = 9
M3 = 3
F502
F502
F502
A = 6
PF = 1
M3 = 3
A = 6
PF = 9
M3 = 3
A = 3
PF = 1
M3 = 3
3499
3499
L4566
L4566
F502
A = 1
PF = 1
M3 = 3
F502
A = 1
PF = 9
M3 = 3
F502
A = 4
PF = 1
M3 = 3
F502
A = 4
PF = 9
M3 = 3
3499
3499
L4566
L4566
F502
A = 2
PF = 1
M3 = 3
F502
F502
A = 2
PF = 9
M3 = 3
F502
A = 5
PF = 1
M3 = 3
A = 5
PF = 9
M3 = 3
3499
3499
L4684
346000
Hi-Fi stereo system
F441
230 Vac
346000
230 Vac
F441
Bus
346851
230 Vac
Cable
supplied
L4560
S = 1
344082
M = 43
346851
M = 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - hotel room 1

The example consists of hotel rooms,
and the bathroom) with four flush
Display and the flush mounted
each with a basic sound system, with
mounted loudspeakers connected to
amplifier, bathroom through the
the radio tuner as the only source
two flush mounted amplifiers
flush mounted amplifier
From the Video adapter extends one
The system is managed as follows:
single branch (both for the bedroom
bedroom and hall through Local
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
N4562
N4685
N4565
346830
F500
346000
3499
346904

Local display
Video adapter
Radio tuner
Power supply
Line terminator
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
and mtiX series
372 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 8 HOTEL ROOM- TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - VIDEO ADAPTER AND POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom
BAtHroom
n4565
n4565
n4562
ON
n4562
ON
A = 1
PF = 2
A = 1
PF = 1
OFF
OFF
3499
F500n
s1 = 1
346830
BUS
TK
346000
BUS
PI
n4685
ON
RDS
PS
106.70
A = 1
PF =
FUN = 2
OFF
230 Vac
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - hotel room 2

The example consists of hotel rooms,
supply, with four flush mounted
is no longer required, saving 8 DIN
each with a basic sound system,
loudspeakers connected to flush
modules The system is managed
with the radio tuner as the only
mounted amplifiers, means that the
through the two amplifiers
source The use of the 2 DIN power
10 DIN power supply, item 346000,
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
N4562
N4565
346030
F500
3499
346904

Radio tuner
Line terminator
2
4
1
1
1
1
and mtiX series
374 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 9 HOTEL ROOM - TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom
BAtHroom
n4565
n4565
n4562
ON
ON
A = 1
PF = 1
OFF
n4562
A = 1
PF = 2
OFF
3499
230 Vac
F500n
s1 = 1
346030
PRI
346030
PRI: 220 - 240V~
185-175mA
50/60Hz
SCS A-V
SCS
27Vdc
600mA
SCS A-V
SCS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector: villa with automation system

The two wire sound system can also
Both the sound system and the
The system proposed has automation
be used with MY HOME automation
automation system can be managed
controls, a series of amplifiers and
This is brought about by using an
by the innovative TOUCH SCREEN
loudspeakers, a stereo control to
SCS/SCS interface item F422, where
Video (15 touch monitor) which
control a Hi-Fi system, a radio tuner
the sound system BUS is connected
reproduces the home layout on
and an RCA input Using a scenario
in output (OUT) and the automation
the monitor and, by means of icons
module you can: save the switching
BUS is connected in input (IN)
which can be customised, controls all
on of the sound system, switch
(the interface does not require
the devices
on the lights and raise the rolling

shutters with just one pushbutton
configurations)
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
H4687
F422
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904
Power supply
Audio/Video node
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Video Touch Screen
SCS/SCS interface
Line terminator
8-contact connector
1
1
1
1
1
7
14
1
1
3
1
1
and mtiX series
376 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 10 VILLA - SOUND SYSTEM cOMBINED WITH 2 WIRE AUTOMATION SYSTEM

Video
touCH sCreen
e46AdCn
AutomAtion
L4651m2
For the
Video touCH sCreen
connection
please refer to the
system integration
and control section
F454
A
= AMB
PF/PL = 3
SPE = 8
ETHERNET
ON
OFF
SCS AI
SCS AV
346020
230 Vac
L4565
L4565
L4565
2 wire sound system
L4562
OFF
L4562
A = 1
PF = 1
A = 2
PF = 1
L4262
ON
A = 2
PF = 2
OFF
OFF
3499
L4565
L4565
L4562
L4565
L4562
ON
A = 3
PF = 1
ON
A = 3
PF = 2
OFF
L4565
OFF
L4562
L4562
A = 3
PF = 3
A = 3
PF = 4
3499
Hi-Fi stereo system
346000
out
SCS
F441
230 Vac
Bus
Patch cord supplied
230 Vac
F422
I4 = 1
F500n
L4561n
S = 2
S = 1
33698...
(2/3/4)
Cables supplied
in
L4560
S = 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector:
villa with 2 wire video door entry system
The two wire sound system can
means of the multichannel matrix,
The audio will return to its original
be combined with the two wire
are installed in the system When
volume when the handset is
video door entry system A colour
the entrance panel is activated, the
replaced Using the 4-pushbutton
TOUCH SCREEN and flush mounted
sound system reduces the volume of
block installed in the video door
amplifiers, 1 entrance panel and
the stereo sources so that the sound
entry units the loudspeakers in the
2 PIVOT handsets, combined by
of the bell can be heard
home can be used to page people
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
346000
F441M
L/N/NT4560
L4561N
F500
L4562
L/N/NT4565
L4684
343001
344163
342510
342170
3499
33698...(2/3/4)
336904
Power supply
Multichannel matrix
RCA input
Stereo control
Radio tuner
Colour TOUCH SCREEN
Linea 2000 Metal Entrance Panel
Polyx memory station
Camera Entrance panel
One-family speaker unit
Line terminator
8-contact connector
1
1
1
1
1
6
12
1
1
2
1
1
3
4
1
and mtiX series
378 MY HOME
Sound system
DIAGRAM 11 Villa - SOUND SYSTEM COMBINED WITH 2 wire VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND TOUCH
SCREEN
344163
N = 2
P =
M =
L4565
L4565
ON
L4565
L4684
ON
OFF
L4562
ON
A = 1
PF = 1
OFF
L4562
ON
A = 1
PF = 2
OFF
L4562
A = 1
PF = 2
M1 = SLA
3499
344163
L4565
L4565
N = 1
P =
M =
L4565
OFF
ON
L4562
ON
A = 2
PF = 1
OFF
L4562
ON
A = 2
PF = 2
A = 3
PF = 1
OFF
OFF
3499
3499
F441M
P
N
T
S
343001
=
=
=
=
=
=9
L4562
346000
230 Vac
F500N
BUS
L4561N
S = 1
S = 2
33698...
(2/3/4)
L4560
S = 3
Hi-Fi stereo system
Cables supplied
230 Vac
NOTE: configure the video handsets using the software supplied
WIRING DIAGRAMS
System expansion
DIAGRAM 12 sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration
L4565
L4565
ON
OFF
L4565
L4562
L4562
ON
A =1
PF = 1
L4565
OFF
L4562
ON
A =1
PF = 2
L4565
ON
A =1
PF = 3
OFF
OFF
L4562
L4565
L4562
ON
A =1
PF = 4
A =1
PF = 5
OFF
ON
OFF
3499
3499
349310
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
OUT4
F441
A = 1
PF = 6
3499
230 Vac
N =1
A =2
PF = 1
346851
L4562
346020
346000
OUT
IN
ON
ON
OFF
M = 1
IN4
SCS
230 Vac
346850
To others 346850
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
F422
346000
F441
I4 = 1
OUT
IN
ON
ON
OFF
IN1
343001
MOD= 5
N =
P = 1
S = 9
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS automation
SCS
230 Vac
391657
33698...
(2/3/4)
L4561N
S = 1
380 MY HOME
Sound system
Hi-Fi stereo system
L4565
L4565
ON
OFF
L4562
L4565
ON
A = 3
PF = 1
OFF
L4565
L4562
ON
A = 3
PF = 2
OFF
L4562
L4565
L4562
ON
A = 3
PF = 3
L4565
OFF
3499
346851
OUT2
OUT3
230 Vac
346851
346851
OUT
OUT
ON
IN
OFF
ON
IN1
Rif.
Description
346000
346020
F422
F441
L4561N
33698...(2/3/4)
346851
346850
L4562
391657
343001
349310
3499
Power supply
Additional power supply
SCS interface
Audio/Video node
Stereo control
8-contact connector
Apartment interface
Camera
Linea 200 metal Entrance Panel
Axolute Video Station
Line terminator
IN2
IN3
A =3
PF = 6
OUT4
OUT
M = 2
OFF
L4562
346020
346000
F441
OUT1
ON
3499
3499
349310
IN
A = 3
PF = 5
OFF
N =2
A =4
PF = 1
ON
L4562
ON
A =3
PF = 4
IN4
IN
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CS
S
SSC
230 Vac
M = 3
M = 4
WARNING
Sound sources cannot be connected to the inputs of

the audio/video nodes used to expand the system.
For a video door entry system add an additional
power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
allowing best management of the Sound system.
More than 3 interfaces or system expansion modules
cannot be connected consecutively.
This type of system does not provide for operation of
the intercom.
NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,

LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MTIX series
WIRING DIAGRAMS
System expansion
DIAGRAM 13 system with interface item 346851 for 2 wire video door entry system
integration
Using this type of system the 2 systems, 2 wire Sound system and 2 wire system, can be combined, also at different
moments. In fact this solution has two separate circuits which are combined using module item 346851. The advantage of
using a system made in this way is that of performing the differentiated calculation of the limits for single systems.
349310
349310
230 Vac
349310
349310
230 Vac
346020
230 Vac
230 Vac
346020
346020
346020
N = 1
A = 4
PF = 1
N = 2
A = 4
PF = 2
N = 3
A = 4
PF = 3
MOD = 5
N = XX
F441
346850
EXT
346000
346850
INT
ON
N = 4
A = 4
PF = 4
ON
OFF
SCS
230 Vac
F422
P = 2
P
N = 1
P = 1
S = 9
343001
XX = No. of apartment
382 MY HOME
Sound system
391662
HC4565
ON
OFF
HC4565
HC4562
HC4562
ON
A = 1
PF = 1
HC4565
A = 1
PF = 2
OFF
ON
OFF
HC4565
HC4562
ON
A = 2
PF = 1
OFF
3499
346851
HC4562
ON
A = 2
PF = 2
OFF
HC4565
HC4562
ON
A = 3
PF = 1
OFF
3499
F441
HC4562
A = 3
PF = 2
3499
346000
M = 1
346851
ON
ON
OFF
SCS
230 Vac
F500N
HC4560
S = 1
S = 3
HC4560*
S = 2
Rif.
Description
346000
346020
F422
F441
F500N
HC4560
346851
346850
HC4562
391662
343001
349310
3499
Power supply
SCS interface
Audio/Video node
Radio tuner FM
RCA input
Apartment interface
Camera Entrance panel
Linea 2000 metal Entrance Panel
Axolute Video Station
Line terminator
* intended for battery powered devices

WARNING
For the system limits of the sound system, see the

section General rules for installation.
For a video door entry system add an additional
power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
allowing best management of the Sound system.
NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,
LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MTIX series
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Integration with multimedia interface

DIAGRAM 14 SYSTEM WITH MULTIMEDIA INTERfAcE AND LAN NETWORK
This connection DIAGRAM shows a sound system with multichannel matrix, integrated with a multimedia interface and
home LAN network
L4569
L4569
room 1
Hd4565
ON
OFF
Hd4565
room 3
room 2
H4562
Hd4565
Hd4565
A = 1
PF = 1
H4562
ON
3499
ON
A = 2
PF = 1
OFF
H4562
A = 3
PF = 1
OFF
3499
3499
room 4
Hd4565
ON
Hd4565
H4562
A = 4
PF = 1
OFF
3499
Hi-Fi stereo system
F441m
343001
346000
P = 1
S = 2
230 Vac
F500n
S = 1
mP3 reader
mP3
Cables supplied
384 MY HOME
Sound system
Hd4560
S = 2
iTem
descripTion
QuanTiTY
H4562
L4569
HS4565
3499
H4684
F500
L4561N
F441M
346000
3494...(14/15)
HS4560
3465

Outdoor loudspeaker
Line terminator
Touch screen
Radio tuner
Stereo control
Multichannel matrix
Power supply
8-contact connector
RCA input
Multimedia interface
4
2
6
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
and mtiX series
www
PC
modem
PC
etHernet
switCH
Bus
H4684
3496
Hd4690
230 Vac
346020
sCs
Audio
out
386 MY HOME
CONTENTS
MY HOME - Video door entry and home video

surveillance system
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 387
GENERAL FEATURES
System composition
The 2 wire video door entry system
safety level, it is possible to connect
of trespassing, both the camera
uses the same SCS BUS technology of
2 wire indoor and outdoor cameras,
and the video handset will activate
all the MY HOME applications
the which images will be displayed
automatically In order to complete
Regardless of system complexity, the
directly on the video handsets (home
a 2 wire video door entry system, in
functions needed, and the number
video surveillance function) If a
addition to the Outdoor pushbutton
of video handsets, all the devices are
higher level of safety is required, it
panel and the handsets, a few
connected using the same 2 wire
will be possible to associate an IR
accessory will be needed, connected
cable, and are configured univocally
sensor of the burglar-alarm system
to the 2 wire BUS
In order to increase the system
to each sensor In this way, in case
3
riser (2 WirES)
Electric distribution board or My Home Flatwall
Floor shunt
1
2

Entrance panel
388 MY HOME
1. ENTrANCE pANEL:
rOOM 1
sends the call to the video handset(s)

(available in various look and
installation models)
2. SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE:
it can be used to increase the
performance of the system, for
Polyx Memory display

Video handset
example to increase the distance
between the outdoor pushbutton
rOOM 2
panel and the video handsets

3. ELECTrIC DISTrIBuTION
BOArD Or MY HOME
FLATWALL:
2
It enables the user to install DIN
rOOM 3
devices:
SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY: powers the
BUS and all the devices
5
2
AUDIO/VIDEO NODE: mixes the

audio and video signals from external
rOOM 4
sources (entrance panels, cameras,

sound sources ) and retransmits
them on the 2 WIRE riser (in
Apartment interface
alternative the audio/video matrix

2
can also be used)

4. FLOOr SHuNT:
used for star-connecting 4
apartments, hence saving a lot of
Axolute Eteris Video display
cable In addition, it lets you reach the

maximum extension of the system
The apartment interface enables creating an independent

system inside the apartment.
in this way, it is possible to install apartment handsets with
simultaneous switching on, entrance panels and dedicated
cameras.
5. ApArTMENT INTErFACE:
used for isolating the apartment
from the riser In this way, inside
the apartment it will be possible
Axolute Nighter video station
to install an independent system
with the corresponding MY HOME

applications
6. VIDEO HANDSETS:
audio-video terminal which enables
you to receive calls and to see who
2
is calling Using the icons of the

OSD menu it is possible to manage
and control MY HOME applications
(Available in various look and
installation models)
GENERAL FEATURES
Simple installation
The 2 wire system can be used to
Furthest handset
create any type of systems, both for

the villa and the apartment complex
Entrance panel
600 metres
THE SYSTEM MAY INCLuDE:
3900
5
96
390 MY HOME
Apartments
3900
Handsets
for apartment
Video entrance panel
39
Apartment video
entrance panel
risers with indepedent
sound mode
Devices
ENTrANCE pANEL
Wall
entrance panel
Outdoor video pushbutton panel
outdoor Axolute
entrance panel
with colour camera It can be used

to call the video handsets and
to activate the associated door
lock Available in various look and
installation models
Flush mounted
entrance panel
Axolute Nighter & Whice

Video Station
Polyx memory display
VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets for the audio and
video reception of entrance panel
calls Their icons allow the user
to manage the video door entry
system, and the MY HOME functions
Available in various look and
installation models
Axolute video display
INDOOr CAMErAS
2 WIRE indoor colour camera that can
cameras with
front cover plates
be connected directly to the system

SCS BUS Microphone for the room
monitoring function Available in the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT
TECH versions To be completed with
the corresponding front cover plates
GENERAL FEATURES
Devices
Apartment interface
SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE

Used to increase the number of video
handsets connected to the system
and to achieve maximum installation
distance
ApArTMENT INTErFACE
To create a dedicated system inside
the Apartment, separate from the
apartment complex riser
In the apartment, it will therefore be
possible to create a video door entry
system with dedicated entrance
panels and cameras, integrated with
outdoor camera
the other MY HOME systems
ACTuATOrS
Used for the control of electric locks,
door lock actuator
or the management of generic loads

(e g staircase lights, call repetition,
OuTDOOr CAMErA
etc )
2 WIRE outdoor colour camera with

6 mm fixed optics to be connected
directly to the SCS BUS
Protection index: IP65
Actuator
for generic loads
FLOOr SHuNT
The floor shunt can be used to
create star wiring systems Its use
Floor shunt
is compulsory for installation in

simultaneous switching on systems
392 MY HOME
Audio/video node
AuDIO/VIDEO NODE AND VIDEO

ADApTEr
Video adapter
They perform the function of audio/

video mixers, for the connection to
the system of entrance panels and
video handsets
The audio/video node can be used
to connect up to 4 entrance panels /
cameras and up to 4 risers
The video adapter on the other hand
can be used to connect 2 entrance
panels and 1 riser (or 1 entrance
panel and 2 risers)
during presetting, the inclusion of the
audio/video node is recommended,
to allow for future system expansions.
MuLTICHANNEL MATrIX
Multichannel matrix
It functions is that of an advanced

audio/video mixing device
It has 4 sound source inputs and 4
inputs for video door entry system/
cameras, which can be distributed
simultaneously
To be used in alternative to the
audio/video node, in MY HOME
systems with integrated video door
entry system and sound system
MuLTIMEDIA TOuCH SCrEEN

10" Touch Screen display for the
management and the control of MY
HOME applications
It can be used to answer video door
entry system calls, and to display
images from the cameras connected
to the system It manages audio,
video, and WEB multimedia contents
through the USB connection It has
an SD card slot, and LAN connection
To be completed with the surround
plate
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 1 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH INTErCOM BETWEEN VIDEO HANDSETS
Nighter Video Station
Whice Video Station
Audio/video node
Power supply
Entrance panel
394 MY HOME
LiViNg rooM
349320
=
=5
P =
M =
oN
rooM 1
349321
=
=4
P =
M =
N
BUS
rooM 2
OFF
349320
=
=2
P =
M =
N
OFF
BUS
KiTcHEN
349321
=
=3
P =
M =
N
BUS
rEcEPTioN rooM
OFF
349320
=
=1
P =
M =
N
OFF
BUS
BUS
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN 1
I N2
IN 3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
343001
IN
=
=
N =
T =
S =9
P
IN 4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 Vac
BUS
Item
DescrIptIon
QUAntIty
343001
F441
346000
349320
349321
S
Entrance panel
Audio/video node
Power supply
Whice Video Station
Electrical door lock
1
1
1
3
2
1
Max. 5 handsets
Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
NoTE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
NoTE 2: When a call is received, only the handset configured with n=1 comes on
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 2 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH OuTDOOr CAMErAS
Whice Video Station

Audio/video node
Power supply
outdoor camera
Entrance panel
396 MY HOME
Linving room
344163
ON
=
=1
P =
M =
N
=
=4
P =
M =
N
BUS
Room 2
ROOM 1
349321
OFF
349320
=
=2
P =
M =
N
OFF
BUS
KITCHEN
349321
=
=3
P =
M =
N
BUS
Reception room
OFF
349320
=
=5
P =
M =
N
OFF
BUS
BUS
BUS
F441
342991
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9
P
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN 1
I N2
IN 3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
IN
IN 4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 V
S
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=1
=
=
=
=
=
391670
Item
Description
342991
391670
F441
346000
349320
349321
344163
S
Entrance panel
Outdoor camera
Audio/video node
Power supply
Video Station Nighter
Whice Video Station
Polyx Memory Display
391670
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
QUANTITy
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
=
=2
=
=
=
=
=
Max. 5 handsets
Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
NotE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
Nota 2: The answering machine function is available only using the 344163 video handset, and can only be
activated on 1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)
Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with N=1 comes on
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 3 - Apartment
ApArTMENT WITH DEDICATED ENTrANCE pANEL AND prIVATE CAMErAS
outdoor camera
indoor camera
Axolute Eteris Video display
Apartment
interface
Audio/video node
Power supply
398 MY HOME
344163
ON
Apartment extension
=
=5
P =1
M =
N
344163
BUS
ON
=
=2
P =1
M =
N
349340
BUS
=
=4
P =1
M =
N
OFF
OK
344163
BUS
OFF
=
=1
P =1
M =
N
344163
BUS
=
=3
P =1
M =
N
OFF
BUS
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN 1
I N2
IN 3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
IN
IN 4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 Vac
391661
P
Building
riser
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=1
N =
T =
S =9
P
BUS
346850
391670
ON
342991
OUT
=
=5
M =3
N
IN
ON
Building
riser
ON
OFF
Item
Description
QUANTITy
342991
391670
391661
346000
F441
346850
344163
349340
S
L2000 Entrance panel

Outdoor camera
Axolute indoor camera
Power supply
Audio/video node
Apartment interface
Polyx memory display
Eteris Video Display
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=2
=
=
=
=
=
Max 5 video handsets, 1 apartment EP and 2 apartment cameras

Note 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using
the software supplied with the product
NOTE 2: Configure the entrance panels and the apartment cameras
starting from (P=1)
NOTE 3: The audio/video answering machine can only be activated on
one 344163 video handset (the one configured with N=-1)
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 4 - Complexes of small houses

MuLTI-FAMILY SYSTEM WITH SINGLE INDEpENDENT DWELLINGS AND AT LEAST ONE COMMON ACCESS pOINT
Entrance panel
Apartment interface
400 MY HOME
Audio/video node
Power supply
Inside of the apartment

see previous diagram

SMALL HOUSE 35
SMALL HOUSE 99
346850
346850
=3
=5
M =3
=9
=9
M =3
OFF
OUT
IN
ON
OUT
ON
IN
OFF
ON
BUS

BUS

SMALL HOUSE 1
SMALL HOUSE 26
IN
ON
346850
=
N
=1
M =3
OUT
ON
OFF
346850
OFF
ON
=2
N
=6
M =3
OFF
OUT
ON
IN
ON
OFF
BUS
ON
OFF
BUS
S
F441
346000
346260
=
=
T =
M =
JMP
JMP
P
TMP PL
SCS
SCS
RC
NC NO/S+ S
max 50 m
BUS 2 1
230 Vac
BUS
=
=
S =
P
The EP must be configured and

programmed using the software
supplied with the product
Item
Description
QUANTITy
349140
339213
339313
F441
346000
346850
S
346260
Axolute entrance panel

Front cover plate
Flush mounted box
Audio/video node
Power supply
Apartment interface
Door lock actuator
1
1
1
1
1
1 - 99
1
1
349140
Max 99 apartment interfaces and 1 apartment complex entrance panel
Max 50 metres between entrance panel and audio/video node
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
Communication
Call
Apartment 1
The handset rings and the

monitor switches on
Call
Apartment 2
The conversation
cannot be heard
All the handsets, on the same call, ring and switch

on the monitor.
THE CALL
CONVErSATION SECrECY
SIMuLTANEOuS SWITCHING ON
Pressing the call pushbutton on the
During the conversation between
With video handsets, simultaneous
entrance panel, the system generates
the entrance panel and the video
switching on of the monitor is also
a signal that is only recognised by the
handsets, all external panels and
possible: upon arrival of the call, all
video handsets the call is addressed
handsets that are not involved in
handsets ring and the monitors of all
to (the call will have to be answered
the conversation are temporarily
video handsets switch on When the
within 30 seconds from the moment
excluded in order to guarantee
call is answered, only the monitor of
the pushbutton is pressed)
the privacy of video door entry
the video handset communicating with
Each VIDEO handset is configured in
conversations When calling from an
the entrance panel will remain on
a unique specific way When the call
entrance panel that is temporarily
In order to set this function, all the
is received, the video handset rings
excluded, a time-out tone will be
video handsets but one must be
and the monitor switches on
heard, to indicate that the extension
powered locally using an additional
Press the
line is momentarily busy
power supply, item 346020
pushbutton to
establish the communication

(maximum duration of the
communication is 1 minute) with the
entrance panel Press
again to
stop the communication and switch

the monitor off
402 MY HOME
CL
AK
Call
Pressing the door lock key will open the gate associated
with the handset.
The staircase light function will switch on the system

lights connected to a special actuator
Each time the self-switching on key is pressed

the images displayed change.
DOOr LOCK puSHBuTTON
THE STAIrCASE LIGHT
SELF-SWITCHING ON
The video handsets are fitted with a
FuNCTION
puSHBuTTON
door lock pushbutton Pressing this
The video handsets are equipped
By pressing the self-switching on
pushbutton will open of one of the
with an icons menu
pushbutton while the videohandset
door locks of the system
This function activates a relay for the
is at rest, a connection will be
With the system at rest, the pressure
timed switching on of lights and the
established with the entrance panel
of the pushbutton will cause the
opening of the gate
associated with the handset during
opening of the door lock of the
The function can be performed by
the P configuration of the handset
entrance panel associated with the
installing the actuator item 346200,
itself
handset during the P configuration of
appropriately configured
Pressing repeatedly on the self-
the handset itself On the other hand,
switching on pushbutton, will scroll
if the pushbutton is pressed during
through the various entrance panels
the call, the door lock associated to
and the cameras connected to the
the entrance panel making the call
system
will be opened
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
Apartment 1
INTeRCOM
call
Call
Slave
Master
item 346850 apartment interface enables the iNTErcoM

function between the devices within the one apartment and
the various apartments
Apartment 2
When a call is received, the MASTEr comes on, while the

SLAVE will only ring.
APArTMENT 2
MASTEr-SLAVE FuNCTION
INTErCOM
For multi-family installations the
The system offers an intercom
MASTER-SLAVE function is available:
function, with up to 3 minutes
when the call is received, all the
communications between
apartment handsets ring, but only
videohandsets:
the monitor of the video handset
From dierent apartments
configured as master comes on
Within the same apartment
When the auto-switching on key of
If the apartment has an apartment
a SLAVE is pressed, the monitor of
interface - item 346850 - or is
the MASTER handset turns off, while
a one- family apartment, each
the monitor of the SLAVE itself turns
videohandset of the apartment can
on (without necessarily establishing
be called individually The INTERCOM
communication with the entrance
connection can be established at
panel) If the connection key
the same time as other external
of a SLAVE is pressed, the MASTER
connections The INTERCOM
monitor turns off and communication
connection can be simultaneous to
with the audio-video entrance panel
other connections external to the
is established
apartment If the apartment does not

have an apartment interface - item
346850 - any apartment handset can
call all other apartment handsets
The INTERCOM connection will not
occur at the same time as external
connections Any call received by an
EP, even to any other apartment, will
terminate the INTERCOM connection
404 MY HOME
APArTMENT 1
We are currently out.....
Answering machine active
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
Playback of sounds and images recorded by the answering machine
VIDEO DOOr ENTrY SYSTEM

ANSWErING MACHINE
FuNCTION
Function available only using the
POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY video
handset, item 344163 It is possible
to record voice and images of a call
from an entrance panel
It is also possible to record an audio
message to play back on the entrance
panel following an unanswered call
The video door entry system message
can be recorded in 2 ways:
STILLS: the message includes

a picture of the visitor and the
recorded audio message (160
messages max)
VIDEOS: the message includes a

video feed (duration 16 seconds)
and the recorded audio message
(18 messages max)
Each message will be given a
progressive number, which will be
displayed on the video handset,
together with the date and time
information
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
ir detector
and associated cameras
dinner
is served!
oN
uP
pAGEr FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS
SCENArIO CONTrOL FuNCTION
SWITCHING ON CAMErA
INTEGrATED WITH SOuND
IN SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH
FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM
AuTOMATION SYSTEM
INTEGrATED WITH THE
By pressing the conversation
From the video handsets, it is possible
BurGLAr ALArM SYSTEM
pushbutton
to recall the scenarios saved in the
It is possible to associate a zone of the
F420 scenarios
burglar alarm to the cameras When
on the video
handsets, it is possible to broadcast

a message through all the
an alarm situation is detected, the
loudspeakers of the sound system
NoTE: function possible by configuring the video
images recorded by the camera are
The involved video handsets must be
handsets using the software supplied with the
displayed on the video handset
powered locally
product.
Using the appropriate icons of the
From the video handset menu it
menu of the video handset, it is
is possible to control and display
possible to monitor the status of the
the functions of the sound system
burglar-alarm system: for example,
through the icons of the menu itself
the status of the burglar-alarm

(armed/disarmed), active zones,
alarms occurred

product.

product.
406 MY HOME
CUCINA
20.5 C
off
22.5 (+2)
18.5C
CUCINA
20.5 C
off
22.5 (+2)
18.5C
SupErVISION FuNCTION IN
SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH
THE TEMpErATurE CONTrOL
SYSTEM
From the video handset menu, it is
possible to display the status of the
temperature control system
Using the appropriate icons it is
possible, for example, to change the
temperature parameters, and display
the status of the probes
product.
System composition
The system is classed as SELV (Safety
The conformity to SELV classification
BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE VIDEO
Extra Low Voltage) due to the fact
is only guaranteed only subject to
SYSTEM
that it is powered by non grounded
FULL COMPLIANCE with current
In order to install a system it is
safety double insulation independent
installation regulations and with the
necessary to purchase, in addition to
power supplies with a max. voltage
the entrance panel and the handset,
of 25 Vac (effective) or 60Vdc non-
relating to each single device and
also the 346830 video adapter, or
inverted voltage.
cable, making up the installation.
the F441 audio/video node, and the
In addition, all BTicino devices are
346841 floor shunt with the function
double insulated.
of distributing the video signal.
Video adapter
The video adapter is used to connect
Video adapter
entrance panels and handsets to a 2

wire video system
2
Power supply
A maximum of 3 connections are

allowed on the video adapter.
BUS
TK
Video handset
BUS
PI
PS
Video adapter
Video entrance
panel
Entrance
panels
Handsets
BUS
TK
BUS
PI
PS
Power supply 346000

A maximum of 3 connections are allowed on the video adapter.
(*) Entrance panels Handsets
BUS
TK
Entrance panel Handsets
BUS
PI
BUS
TK
PS
Connection of 2 entrance panels and a riser

for the handsets
BUS
PI
PS
Connection of 1 entrance panel and 2 risers

for the handsets
(*) If either an interface is connected to the entrance panel, only one connection on the TK BUS terminal of the
video adapter is possible.
408 MY HOME
AuDIO/VIDEO NODE
Audio/VidEo NodE
Or VIDEO MATrIX
The F441 audio/video node and the
F441M video matrix must be used in
alternative to the video adapter when

more than 2 entrance panels must be
Video handset
installed in the system, or when more
SCS
Power supply
than 2 risers are needed

The use of the audio/video node
or the video matrix is however
recommended, to allow for future
Video entrance
panel
To the handsets
mY HOme integrations, system
Power supply
Audio/video node
expansions, and/or addition of

cameras.
Allow for one output of the audio/
video node, or the video matrix, for
SCS
each video door entry system video

To the entrance
panels/cameras
handset with table-top installation
FLOOr SHuNT
FLoor SHuNT
When creating video systems, the

use of the floor shunt, item 346841
Apartment 2
is recommended This will provide

important savings on the cable to
Apartment 3
Apartment 1
Apartment 4
be used This is particularly suitable

for multi-family systems, when more
than one living unit on the same floor
or in multi-family systems, where
riser
ART. 346841
max distance between the entrance

panel and all handsets is needed The
Floor shunt enables star connection
2 wire riser
of up to 4 apartments with a max

of 3 handsets for Apartment (max
1 handset per output, if set in
simultaneous switching on)
One output of the audio/video node
For each output:
max. 3 video handsets or bells in the same apartment
max. 1 video handset in simultaneous switching on
max. 1 table-mounted video handset
should be dedicated to each tablemounted video handset installed
System composition
346851 IN MOD = 0
(SYSTEM EXpANSION MODE)
To be used for system expansion, in
order to:
Regenerate the video signal and have

a further 200 m available after the
interface (using the 336904 cable)
Increase the number of devices

connected to the BUS
Use a max of 3 modules, configured

using the MOD = 0 in cascade
As far as the system composition,
distances and topology are
Mod = 0
concerned, within the system 1

section, the system expansion
module item 346851 must be
considered as a handset On the
other side, within the system 2
section it should be considered as an
entrance panel
Entrance panel
System 1 section
2
System 2 section
2
F441
346851
346000
F441
346000
OUT
ON
IN
ON
OFF
SC S
SC S
200 m
200 m
346851
346851
346851
max. 1 item 346851

with Mod = 0 for each output
346851
346000
OUT
ON
IN
ON
OUT
IN
OFF
ON
Entrance panel
OUT
ON
IN
OFF
ON
OUT
ON
OFF
IN
ON
ON
OFF
SC S
F441
2
2
2
346000
The iN clamp of the system expansion modules configured with Mod = 0 must be
connected to a dedicated output of the F441 audio/video node or the 346841 floor
shunt (as a handset with local power supply).
SC S
F441
410 MY HOME

ITEM 346851 IN MOD = 5
(INDEpENDENT rISEr MODE)
This is used in buildings to have
risers with riser entrance panels
and independent audio and video
functions
Mod = 5
riser 1 system section (with independent audio)

riser 1
riser 2 system section (with independent audio)

riser 2
F441
346000
F441
SC S
SC S
riser entrance
panel
346851
346851
OUT
IN
common system section
ON
riser entrance
panel
346000
OUT
ON
IN
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Entrance panel
F441
346000
in the common system section, for the purpose of system composition, distances and layout, the system
expansion modules must be treated as a handsets. on the other hand, in the riser system sections they must
be treated as entrance panels.
SC S
The building entrance panel must be made with alphanumeric or numeric call module
System composition
ApArTMENT INTErFACE
ITEM 346850
This is used to have an apartment
system independent from the
building In this way, the apartment
system can have private cameras
and entrance panels and can be
integrated with all the MY HOME
applications
As far as the system composition,
distances and topology are
concerned, within the building
system, the interface item 346850
must be treated as a handset On
the other side, within the apartment
system, it should be treated as an
entrance panel configured with P = 0
Apartment block system section
Apartment system section

346850
For the completion of the system, any type of cable
F441
OUT
can be used (including existing cables). Maximum

IN
performance and distances are achieved using the
ON
Handset
346000
ON
OFF
SC S
336904 cable.
Entrance panel
F441
346000
Apartment
entrance panel
Apartment camera
SC S
412 MY HOME
Configuration
To configure means to program the
The configurators can be purchased in a case
system. This occurs assigning an

identification and operational mode
number to the devices.
II
This operation is made inserting
0-9
in the appropriate seats some

3501K
configurators (numbered from 0

or individually
to 9), using a clamp provided with

the power supply or contained in
1
1
2
2
3
3
3501/1
3501/2
3501/3
6
6
7
7
8
8
3501/6
3501/7
4
4
5
5
the case of the configurators or

using the configuration software
(recommended).
A seat is left empty corresponds to
3501/8
3501/4
3501/5
S
S
L
L
A
A
0
0
9
9
3501/9
3501/0
3501/SLA
the configuration of a zero.

Example of configured system and its operation
In the system exist two different

numerations to identify respectively
Apartment 1
the entrance panels (EP) and the
Apartment 25
=
=1
P =
handsets.
=2
=5
P =1
The numeration of the EP (0-96) is
generally identified by P, while the

address of the handsets (0-99) is
identified by N.
handset from which we would start

to call.
On the handsets in addition to the N
address, it is necessary to configure
Door lock and auto-switching ON

controls in pause from apartment 25
also the N address relating to the
Call apartment 25
Door lock and auto-switching ON

controls in pause from apartment 1
address it is necessary to configure
Call apartment
On the EP, in addition to the P
in P the EP associated to the same

handset, or the entrance panel
on which the door lock and auto-
=
=
S =
P
switching ON controls work when the
=
=1
S =
P
handset is switched OFF.

Should occur the need to modify the configuration
of a device, it is necessary, in addition to change the
configurators, take off the power supply to the whole
system, wait 1 minute, and then provide voltage again.
For each device exist also particular configurations
which will be detailed in the product technical sheet.
Configuration
ITEM 346851
MOD = 0 for system expansion
The system expansion module can be
M = specific progressive number for interface
configured in 2 different ways:
346851
(the addresses in M with MOD = 0
Mod = 0
M =2
346851
and MOD = 5 do not conflict with
ON
ON
OFF
each other)
Video handset
2
Video handset
Entrance
panel
2
Mod = 0
M =1
346851
ON
ON
OFF
346851
Mod = 0
M =1
Mod = 0
M =2
346851
346851
ON
ON
OFF
Mod = 0
M =4
346851
ON
ON
346851
Mod = 0
M =3
346851
ON
OFF
ON
346851
ON
OFF
ON
346851
F441
SCS
Entrance
panel
414 MY HOME
OFF
346851
MOD = 5 for independent audio risers

M = specific progressive number indicating the riser number
common entrance
panel
iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr
346851
iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr
iNdEPENdENT
2 WirE riSEr
Mod = 5
M =1
346851
Mod = 5
M =2
Mod = 5
M = 39
346851
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
346851
346851
346851
For the common entrance panel, the handsets have address M (riser number) x 100 + N (handset for the riser).
Es. Handset N = 20 of the riser 12 for the common EP = 12 x 100 + 20 = 1220
ApArTMENT INTErFACE 346850

The apartment interface is configured
correct configuration
Wrong configuration
as a normal handset The interface

must be configured in a specific
unique way No other handset can
N =7
N =6
be configured in N using the same

address, in the same system or on the
same riser with independent audio
2
N =6
The factory device is configured with
N =5
M=3
2
2
N =5
N =5
EXT
ON
SYSTEM
EXT
ON
ON
ON
2 WirE BuS
346850
INT
346850
INT
SYSTEM
OFF
OFF
346850
2 WirE BuS
346850
The wiring
SYSTEM WIRING
STAR wiring
The systems can also be wired in 2
The star wiring is made connecting
modes:
the individual apartment to an
in-out wiring
output of the floor distribution block
STAR wiring with floor shunt
Item 346841.
346841 (recommended).
Each line must be terminated by
positioning the micro switch of the
In-out wiring
In-out wiring is connected directly
on the terminal of the appliances
which are connected to the system.
Each riser must be terminated by
positioning the micro switch of the
last handset to ON.
In-out wiring is particularly
indicated for one and two-family
systems and for vertical or horizontal
multi-family systems (with the homes
in rows).
last appliance to ON.

STAR wiring is particularly suitable
for multi-family systems, when more
than one living unit on the same floor
or in multi-family systems, where
max. distance between the entrance
panel and all handsets is needed.
On each output of the shunt it will be
possible to connect up to 3 handsets
maximum.
An output of the floor distribution
block must be dedicated to
each handset with simultaneous
switching on or table-top base
installation.
In-out wiring
STAR wiring
ON
ON
Apartment n
ON
Handsets BUS
Apartment 1
Apartment 5
ON
OFF
ON
Apartment 2
Apartment 2
Apartment 6
ON
ON
Apartment 3
OFF
OFF
Apartment 7
ON
Apartment 3
ON
Apartment 4
Apartment 8
Apartment 4
2 wire BUS
346841
346841
2 wire BUS
416 MY HOME
ON
COMBINED WIrING
Apartment n
Both wiring methods described

previously can be used together, for
the realization of more articulated
OFF
systems
Apartment 2
Apartment 3
The combined wiring (IN-OUT
ON
and Star) allows to execute wiring

systems in order to satisfy the
OFF
greatest quantity of requests

OFF
Floor distribution blocks outputs

can be used to connect a single
device or to generate an apartment
line (on which max 3 devices can
be connected, without using the
apartment interface item 346850)
Apartment 1
To the Bus handset can be connected

in IN-OUT floor distribution blocks or
ON
handsets
346841
The assignation of the handsets
ON
Entrance panel BuS
to the apartments occurs through

configuration (for further information
see technical sheets for the individual
devices)
ON
OFF
ON
Floor shunt
OFF
2
Video entrance
panel
200 m
OFF
Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces
346850
INT
EXT
INT
ON
EXT
ON
160 165 cm
ON
346850
OF F
ON
346850
INT
OF F
160 165 cm
EXT
ON
OF F
ON
OF F
ON
346851
ON
346851
ON
346851
OF F
ON
ON
ON
OF F
NO
HEIGHT OF THE HANDSET
INTErFACES ITEM 346850 AND
HEIGHT OF THE ENTrANCE
When installing the handsets, including
346851
pANEL
standard or video handsets, it is
The interfaces item 346850
When installing the Entrance
recommended that the devices are
(apartment interface) and item
panel, it is recommended that the
positioned at a height of 160 165 cm
346851 (system expansion module)
pushbutton panel is installed at a
(top edge)
cannot be installed in a manhole For
height of 160 165 cm (top edge)
their installation, a sealed electric
The camera must not be installed in
Note: recommended installation heights, unless
cabin with DIN rail must be used (DIN
front of light sources, or in places
otherwise required by local regulations.
switchboard)
where the subject being filmed is in

the shadow
If this condition cannot be respected,
the picture will not have much
contrast in the darker areas This
is because the brightness is selfregulated on the lighter part of the
picture
To solve these problems change the
camera installation height, normally
160 165 cm, to a height of 180 cm
and direct the lens downwards to
improve the quality of the shots
In scarcely lit areas, the installation
of an additional light source is
recommended
418 MY HOME
System performance
The following information provides
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE A ENTRANCE PANEL - FURTHEST HANDSET
The type of system considered is a
Cable section mm2
2 normal cables >

0.2 mm2 or L4669
336904
twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2
one pair of the

multi-pair data cable,
item C9881U/5E
general parameters on the maximum
single family system or system below
5 HANDSETS in/out
50 m
200 m
140 m
140 m
an apartment interface.
5 one-fam Handsets/OUTDOOR EP
50 m
200 m
100 m
70 m
5 one-fam Handsets/EP with local

power supply
50 m
200 m
140 m
170 m
distances that can be achieved, and

the features of the cables to be used.
WARNING: For installation solutions or types other than those shown,

the distances and the current absorptions can be calculated using the You
Diagram software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
346851
346850
MOD = 0
346851
EXT
ON
ON
one pair of the

item C9881U/5E
346850
INT
twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2
Furthest video
handset
Cable section mm2
(2 wire system Technical Guide).
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE C POWER SUPPLY FURTHEST HANDSET
336904
diagrams). Also refer to the specific technical documentation
2 normal cables >

0.2 mm2 or L4669
website www.professionisti.BTicino.it technical service software and
5 Handsets in/out
50 m
110 m
70 m
50 m
5 Handsets (with shunts)
50 m
110 m
70 m
50 m
ON
OFF
ON
MOD = 5
OFF
PS
2 pushbuttons
50 m
200 m
115 m
90 m
OUTDOOR EP
20 m
50 m
30 m
20 m
Entrance panel with local power supply
50 m
200 m
140 m
120
LINE B *
SCS
one pair of the

item C9881U/5E
F441
twisted telephone
pair 0.28 mm2
BUS
PI
336904
LINE A*
BUS
TK
2 normal cables >

0.2 mm2 or L4669
346000
346000 346830
Cable section mm2
LINE C*
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE B ENTRANCE PANEL POWER SUPPLY
346850
MOD = 5
OFF
BTicino SCS cable item 336904
ON
ON
BTicino SCS cable item L4669
ON
OFF
0.28
MOD = 0
346851
EXT
ON
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE D ENTRANCE PANEL DOOR LOCK
346851
346850
INT
Cable section mm2
Entrance panel
S+ S- clamps
30 m
30 m
50 m
100 m
(*) Max. variable distance.

Note: in systems with apartment interfaces only (in/out connection) the distance of
LINE C to be taken into account is 200 m (with BTicino cable 336904)
LINE D*
Door lock
System performance
SYSTEM WITH ApArTMENT
INTErFACE AND SYSTEM
Audio/video connection
between the entrance panel
and the video handset
(3 passages maximum) = oK
EXpANSION MODuLE
Up to 3 interfaces, items 346850
and 346851 may be installed in
cascade Cascade interfaces are
those crossed by an audio/video
connection (Entrance panel
max 200 m
Video entrance
panel
HANDSET) or (HANDSET HANDSET,

e g INTERCOM) Only 2 of these
interfaces (selected by the user)
346851
retransmit the signal for 200 metres
346851
ON
The maximum distance between
max. 200 m
EP and the furthest handset is 600
ON
metres Each LINE (EP INTERFACE),
2
346851
(INTERFACE INTERFACE) and
346851
(INTERFACE H) must be 200 metres
ON
ON
maximum (with BTicino cable
OFF
max. 200 m
336904)
The IN end cap of the system

expansion module configured with
M=0 MUST be wired and considered
max. 200 m
as a H with local power supply

2
346850
INT
It must also be connected to an
EXT
ON
ON
output of the Audio/video node
OFF
346850
F441, or the Floor shunt 346841
420 MY HOME
OFF
CONNECTION OF 16 AUDIO /VIDEO Entrance panels Or cameras
Video door entry system/apartment interface risers
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
IN
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN4
BUS 2 1
SC S
F441
OUT 4
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
F441
OUT 4
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
F441
OUT 4
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SC S
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SC S
3499
4 entrance panels or cameras
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SC S
3499
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
OUT 4
IN4
SC S
3499
3499
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with 1 EP

and 5 intercommunicating video handsets
WArNiNg
dEVicE 3
configure the handsets starting from N = 1
configure and insert the Jumpers with the system
ON
=
N
=3
P =
M =
SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is

modified the power supply to the system must be switched
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.
The intercom function is operating even with a lack of

entrance panel connection.
We recommend that the video handsets are configured

using the software supplied with the product.
dEVicE 5
OFF
BUS
=
=5
P =
M =
344163
dEVicE 2
344163
BUS
=
=2
P =
M =
N
OFF
344163
A use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light

service or generic actuations.
dEVicE 4
B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
OFF
BUS
wire range can be used
=
N
=4
P =
M =
dEVicE 1
344163
c Move the micro switch of the last video or audio handset

at the end of the line to the oN position
d Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the
BUS
OFF
=
N
=1
P =
M =
344163
speaker module for the general call; do not insert any

configurator in N.
e The audio video answering machine can only be used on

1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)
BUS
Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured

with N=1 comes on

F441
BUS PL S+ S-
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
346000
OUT 4
346200
OUT
PS
S1
PE
IN
A
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 Vac
343001
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
NC
NO
230 Vac
422 MY HOME
Item
DescrIptIon
343001
344163
346200
346000
F441
L
EP
PS
S1
Linea 2000 Metal EP

Polyx Memory Display video handset
Staircase light actuator (optional)
Power supply
Audio/video node
Staircase light
Entrance panel
Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current
Two-family systems with 1 EP,

3 handsets per home and intercom between apartments
HoME 2
A
WArNiNg
ON
=
=2
P =
M =
HoME 1
BUS
ON
=
=1
P =
M =
SLAVE
344163
SLAVE
BUS
344163
OFF
=
=2
P =
M =
N
BUS
OFF
=
=1
P =
M =
SLAVE

it is possible to install a maximum of 3 video handsets for

apartment.

using the software supplied with the product
configure Master and Slave devices using the software

When a call is received, the MASTEr rings and switches on,
while the SLAVE will only ring. if the call is answered from
a SLAVE unit, the master unit switches off again, while
the monitor of the SLAVE from where the call is answered
comes on."
344163
A Move the micro switch at the back of the last video or
audio handset at the end of the line to the oN position
SLAVE
344163
B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
BUS
BUS
OFF
=
=1
P =
M =
wire range can be used.
OFF
=
N
=2
P =
M =
c The audio video answering machine can only be used on
MASTEr
1 video handset (the MASTEr video handset)
344163
MASTEr
344163
BUS
c
F441
BUS PL S+ S-
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
PS
S1
PE
IN
IN4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 Vac
343002
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =
P
Item
DescrIptIon
343002
344163
346000
F441
EP
PS
S1
Two-family Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel

Power supply
Audio/video node
Entrance panel (main)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras

dEVicE 2
349321
WArNiNg
BuS Pi
(5 handsets
max.)
OFF
=
N
=2
P =
M =


using the software supplied with the product.
End with the micro switch of the last line/riser handset in

the oN position.
BUS
dEVicE 1
349321
A For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the
OFF
2 wire range can be used.
B Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the Entrance
=
=1
P =
M =
N
panel to make a general call.
BUS
Nota: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with

N=1 comes on
Electric distribution board or

My Home Flatwall
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
346000
OUT 4
OUT
IN
IN4
BUS 2 1
SC S
230 Vac
PE
PE1
391670
391670
cam.1
BUS PL S+ SPS
=
=
=
N
=1
T =
S =9
PS1
S1
S2
342991
424 MY HOME
cam. 2
BUS PL S+ S-
342991
N
T
S
=
=1
=
=1
=
=9
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=2
=
=
=
=
=
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=3
=
=
=
=
=
Item
DescrIptIon
342991
349321
391670
346000
F441
PE-PE1
PS-PS1
S1-S2
Cam.1-Cam.2
Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel

Whice Axolute Video Station
2 wire outdoor camera
Power supply
Audio/video node
Entrance panel
One-family system with 5 video handsets

in simultaneous switching on
230 Vac
WArNiNg
344163
346020
ON
configure the handsets starting from N = 1
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz


using the software supplied with the product
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
=
=5
P =
M =
1- 2
1
2
BUS
use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light

service or generic actuations.
230 Vac
344163
346020
For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2

ON
Move to oN the microswitch, on the Video handset or

audio handset, which ends the line.
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
=
=4
P =
M =
1- 2
1
2
Fit a 9 configurator to be inserted in S on the

speaker module for the general call; do not insert any
configurator in N.
BUS
The audio video answering machine can only be used on

1 video handset item 344163
230 Vac
344163
346020
ON
PRI
230 Vac
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1
2
344163
346020
=
=3
P =
M =
1- 2
ON
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1- 2
BUS
=
=2
P =
M =
N
1
2
BUS
F441
OUT1
OUT 2
O UT3
346000
OUT 4
346200
230 Vac
OUT
344163
346020
IN
OFF
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
BUS 2 1
SC S
1- 2
5
1
230 Vac
6
2
7
3
8
4
230 Vac
343001
BUS PL S+ SPS
PE
S1
=
=
=
N
=
T =
S =9
P
NC
=
=1
P =
M =
NO
1
2
L
BUS
Item
DescrIptIon
343001
Flush mounted Linea 2000 Metal

entrance panel
System power supply
Audio/video node
Staircase light actuator (optional)
Door lock release pushbutton panel
344163
346000
346020
F441
346200
PS
S1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with max 16 cameras

or entrance panels
dEVicE 1
To other handsets / apartment interfaces

=
N
=1
P =
M =
OFF
349320
To other handsets / apartment interfaces
BUS
B
F441
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
346000
OUT4
OUT
IN
IN4
BUS 2 1
SCS
230 Vac
F441
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT
IN
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS
3499
P
N
T
S
PE
=
=
=
=1
=
=9
342991
BUS PL S+ SPS
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=1
=
=
= 391670
=
=
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=2
=
=
=
=
=
cam.2
391670
cam.3
391670
S1
cam.1
426 MY HOME
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=3
=
=
=
=
=
Item
DescrIptIon
3499
349320
F441
346000
342991
391670
EP
PS
S1
Cam1-Cam3
Cam4-Cam7
Line terminator
Axolute Video Station Nighter
Audio/video node
Power supply
Linea 2000 Metal EP
Entrance panel
Outdoor camera
Indoor camera
WArNiNg
When the nodes are used in cascade, the distances of the
various lines are halved.
For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
All the advanced video handsets of the 2 wire range may
be installed.
only use one output for each node and allow for a
terminator item 3499 to be connected to the ScS clamp
configure advanced handsets using a Pc and Software
supplied.
By entering oFF in the first seats of the P configurators,
the microphone of the 2 wire cameras is excluded
(this function is only possible for cameras 0 to 9. The
microphone cannot be excluded on the other cameras).
F441
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
F441
OUT4
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
F441
OUT4
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
IN1
IN2
IN3
OUT4
IN4
SCS
3499
3499
3499
To other entrance panels or other common
cameras(configured with P= 8 P= 11)
cam. 5
cam. 4
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=4
=
=
=
=
=
cam. 6
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=5
=
=
=
=
=
To other entrance panels or other common

cameras(configured with P= 12 P= 15)
cam. 7
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=6
=
=
=
=
=
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
oFF
7
coLoUr InDoor cAmerAs AVAILABLe In tHe FoLLoWInG FInIsHes:

391658
391659
391657
391663
391661
391662
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
LIVING
AXOLUTE - WHITE
AXOLUTE TECH
AXOLUTE - ANTHRACITE
428 MY HOME
CONTENTS
MY HOME Structured cabling system for the home sector

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
MY HOME 429
GEnEraL FEaTUrES
What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?

The advancement of multimedia
of untested solutions, which may
Telephone System, and the Television
services, such as satellite TV and
have unpredictable results
and data signals
terrestrial digital systems, internet
always attentive to technological
a star system is used to connect the
telephone systems and television,
development and to the above stated
cables from the distribution board to
have highlighted the need for a
needs, BTicino offers an ideal and
the user sockets in the various rooms
specific cabling system inside the
convenient solution for the creation
of the house
house, ensuring the distribution of
of a communication area inside the
the available services across various
distribution board, which centralises
rooms, avoiding the implementation
the devices for the distribution of the

Communication area
remote
control device
TV/SAT
IPTV
Telephone line
Internet
IPTV
TV/SAT system
Communication area inside the

MY HOMe Flatwall distribution board
430 MY HOME
MY HOME AUTOMATION
SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
The home structured cabling system
By integrating the Web Server to
allows the integration of devices
the network, it will be possible to
for the control of the MY HOME
remotely control the MY HOME
functions a Multimedia Touch
system using a computer or mobile
Screen can be connected to the data
phone connected to the internet
Data
TV/SAT
network to control all the home

automation functions from a room of
the house, allowing the user can take
advantage of multimedia contents
TV/SAT
(audio and video) stored inside

other PCs connected to the network
TV/SAT
Telephone system
IPTV
TV/SAT
Multimedia Touch Screen 10
Touch Screen 3,5
MY HOME 431
GEnEraL FEaTUrES
The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv
TV/SAT
IPTV
Telephone distribution frame

F555
it can be used to distribute 1
telephone line to 8 dierent sockets,
or 2 telephone lines to 4 sockets.
xDSL filter with telephone

distribution frame F558
to separate the ADSL data line
from the Telephone line. The
Telephone line is available on 3
independent outputs.
Power supply F552

it provides 9 V, 1.6 A, voltage for
the supply of active devices.
432 MY HOME
wa
ate
sG
es
Acc
Access
Gateway
TV/SAT
IPTV
Patch module F550C6

for patching inside the user socket wiring
distribution board.
Wire and patch cord connections are
concealed inside the distribution board and
cannot be seen by the user.
Switch F551
for the distribution of 1 data line to 4
dierent rJ45 sockets.
TV/SAT
IPTV
6-way TV/SAT distribution frame
F553
for the distribution of the television
signal to 6 dierent TV jacks.
Web Server F454

for local and remote management of
MY HOMe applications.
MY HOME 433
GEnEraL FEaTUrES
application examples:
telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and video door entry system
This drawing shows the possibility of
in order to make the iPTV signal
distribution board, of a special
distributing, in addition to telephone
available to the corresponding
Gateway access device supplied by
and data signals, also the iPTV service
decoder, it will be necessary to
the Supplier of the iPTV service
TV/SaT and digital signals
install, inside the communication
TV/SAT
TV/SATTV/SAT
IPTV
rJ45 sockets
Flatwall
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT jacks
434 MY HOME
IPTV
IPT
IPT
The following devices are installed
MY HOMe
inside the distribution board:

Gateway access supplied by the
supplier of the iPTV service
data switch F551
TV/SaT distribution frame F553
Telephone distribution frame F555
Patch modules F550C6
xdSL filter with telephone
MY HOME 435
GEnEraL FEaTUrES
application examples: telephone, data and integration

with MY HOME for local and remote function control
This drawing shows the possibility
This solution makes it possible to use
if the network has an internet
of installing a data and telephone
the 10 Multimedia Touch Screen
connection, it will be possible to
distribution system integrated with
to control the home automation
control all the home automation
the MY HOME system, for local and
functions, and to share the
function also remotely, using a PC, or
remote function control
multimedia content of other storage
a mobile phone
integration is made possible by
devices connected to the data
The following devices are installed
using the Web Server device, which
network
inside the distribution board:
operates as a bridge between the
Gateway access supplied by the
BUS wiring of the MY HOME system,
supplier of the adSL service
and the data network wiring system
Web Server F454

data switch F551
TV/SaT distribution frame
F553 TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT jacks
Multimedia Touch Screen 10
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
rJ45 sockets
DSL InTerneT SerVICe
remote control device
436 MY HOME
IPTV
IPTV
xdSL filter with telephone

Patch modules F550C6
Flatwall
MY HOME 437
GEnEraL FEaTUrES
Cabling structure and components for the home sector

Home structured cabling requires
as well as all active information
in new or refurbished homes, where
a STar type structure: the user
management and distribution
the MY HOME FLaTWaLL solution has
socket connection cables meet in a
devices, are located in general, the
been selected as the general electric
central point called star centre or
communication area is created by
distribution board (for example, to
communication area
grouping together all the devices in
also centralise the MY HOME devices),
This is the area where the
an appropriate distribution board
the communication area must be
connections with the access networks
to be installed near the general
created inside the distribution board
for distribution of various services
distribution board of the home
itself
(Telephone system, TV/SaT),
User socket
User socket
User socket
Communication areas inside the MY HOMe

FLATWALL distribution board
438 MY HOME
in addition to the distribution board

the following items can be identified:
Signal handling and distribution
devices;
Cables for the connection of the
devices to the various user sockets;
User sockets with connectors split
by service type
User socket
User socket
User socket
MY HOME 439
GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Switch F551
THE DEVICES FOR THE

DISTRIBUTION OF SIGNALS
The management of the data
network
To ensure the connection of several
computers to the data network
and the sharing of the internet
connection, the Switch device F551
must be used
The internet network connection

The connection to the internet
network requires an adSL modem,
which may also be supplied by the
internet Service Provider (iSP)
WIRING DIAGRAM
rJ45 socket
rJ45 socket
Patch modules
F550C6
L4665L20/L40
patch cord
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
Switch
F551
To the ADSL modem
440 MY HOME
IP
XDSL filter F558
The management of telephone

signals
The telephone signal does not
require any special management
devices, with the exception of a
special filter F558, which separates
the telephone signal from the digital
signal for the adSL modem The
device has 3 filtered outputs for
the connection of three telephone
jacks For more complex systems, a
distribution frame F555 can be used
to replicate one telephone line to
For a detailed description of the listed devices see the corresponding technical
eight output lines intended for the
sheets .
respective telephone connectors
WIRING DIAGRAM
Patch modules
F550C6
rJ45 socket
TV/SAT
IPTV
XDSL filter
F558
L4665L20/L40
patch cord
Telephone distribution
frame F555
rJ45 socket
TV/SAT
rJ45 socket
Telephone line
rJ45 socket
TV/
IPTV
MY HOME 441
GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Patch module F550C6
The management of the

television signals
The distribution of the television
if, on the other hand, the system
signal (both terrestrial and satellite),
provides two separate signals, one
to several TV jacks, is entrusted to
analogue and one digital, with
the TV/SaT distribution frame F553,
separate cables, one distribution
which has one input connector and
frame and the corresponding TV
six output connectors if the aerial
connectors shall be used for each
system provides mixed analogue and
signal
digital signals, only one device will be

needed
WIRING DIAGRAM
Patch module
F550C6
Socket rJ45
TV/SAT
Socket rJ45
IPTV
Patch cord
L4665L20/L40
Switch
F551
Telephone distribution
frame F555
Socket rJ45
TV/SAT
442 MY HOME
Socket rJ45
IPTV
Signal patching
TV/SAT distribution frame

F553
With this operation it is possible

to reconfigure over time the
correspondence between the user
sockets and the devices in the
communication area it is performed
using special patch modules F550C6,
to which the wiring cables are
connected
The connection with the devices
is performed using patch cords
L4665L20 and L4665L40
The special geometrical conformation
of the device (vertical cable input)
means that the wiring and the patch
cords can be concealed inside the
communication distribution board
WIRING DIAGRAM
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT
IPTV
F553
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
TV/SAT system
IPTV
IPTV
SAT decoder
MY HOME 443
GEnEraL FEaTUrES

THE WIRING
COAXIAL CABLE
in home structured cabling systems
The coaxial cable consists of a central
The Coaxial cable for Television
two types of cables are used:
rigid or flexible conductor, insulated,
applications has a characteristic
coaxial cables for the distribution
using dielectric material, from an
impedance of 75 Ohms and a
external cylindrical conductor called
diameter between 4 and 7 mm
of the television signal;

4 pair twisted cable for the
shield
transmission of telephone and

data signals
The CEi 306-2 (*) guide calls for a
so-called basic wiring characterised
by 1 cable with 4 symmetrical pairs
Cavo COAXIAL
and 1 Coaxial cable destined to the

corresponding rJ45 type connectors
for data transmission, and to coaxial
connectors for the television
The same guide recommends
a so called advanced wiring,
characterised by 2 cables with 4
symmetrical pairs for data/telephone
services, and 2 coaxial cables for TV
signals
CABLE WITH 4 SYMMETRIC

PAIRS
The performance in terms of
due to the current transmission
Used for data and telephone
maximum frequency of the
requirement, the CEi guide
transmission, this cable consists
transmitted signal, is expressed in
recommends 5e category cables
of 4 pairs of twisted cables it is
categories as below:
However, in order to prepare the
available with (STP, S-FTP) or without
Category 5: data transmission up to
network for future applications,
(UTP) external shield For both, the
100 Mbit/s
category 6 or 6a cables are
characteristic impedance is 100
Category 5e: data transmission up to
recommended The typical use
Ohms
1000 Mbit/s (100 MHz)
requires capping with rJ45
Category 6: data transmission up to
connectors
1000 Mbit/s (250 MHz)

Category 6a: data transmission up to
10 Gbit/s (500 MHz)
nOTe (*): CeI 306-2. Guide for
telecommunication and multimedia distribution
wiring inside residential buildings.
Unshielded cable (UTP)
Shielded cable (STP)
444 MY HOME
THE USER SOCKET

in the system configuration described
TV COnneCTOrS
so far, each branch of the Star

HS4214D
centre reaches, and ends in, a user
L4202D
socket normally consisting of one or

more connectors
There are two types of connectors for
the home data network:
TV signal coaxial connector
HC4269F
rJ45 standard connector with 8

contacts for telephone system and
data signals
n4210D
L4269F
Shielded TV and SAT COnneCTOrS in die-cast enclosure
Data network and telephone system connectors
nT4279C6
L4279C6
AM5979C6
n4279C6
rJ45 connectors
For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to

rJ45 type connectors, the use of the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable,
L4664, is recommended
MY HOME 445
Main requirements
STANDARDS
DESIGN CRITERIA
DEFINITION OF THE FUNCTIONS
The design and installation of the
during the design of the home data
REQUIRED
home data network system must be
network system, it is important that
The design of the data network
performed following the indications
the following aspects are defined in
system requires a good knowledge
and requirements contained in the
orderly sequence:
of the multimedia functions to be
following documents:
Functions required (data, Telephone
installed around the home as a way
CEI 306-2: Guide for
system, TV);
of example, attached is the table of
telecommunication and multimedia
Selection of the installation solutions
CEi 306-2 guide For each application
distribution wiring inside residential
based on the features of the building
this table shows the features of the
buildings
irrespective of the type of system and
corresponding wiring setup to be
CEI 64-100/1: residential building
the required functions, it is necessary
implemented for the multimedia
Guide for the presetting of the
that the PLaniMETrY, as well as a
network
infrastructures for electric, electronic,
GEnEraL FUrniTUrE PLan, are made
and communication systems
available to the installer it must also
Part 1: Building risers
be considered that on a design and
CEI 64-100/2: residential building
installation point of view the creation
Guide for the presetting of the
of a home data network system is
infrastructures for electric, electronic,
not very different from that of a
and communication systems
traditional electric power system
Page 2: dwellings (apartments)

CEI EN 50173-1: information
technology - Structured cabling
systems
Part 1: General requirements
CEI EN 50173-4: information
technology - Structured cabling
systems Page 4: Homes
Selection of the cable by application type

CABLES
SERVICE
BAND
CABLE USED
TV
(terrestrial + satellite)
47...2150 Mhz
COAXIAL
Traditional telephone system*
1 Mhz
1 symmetric pair
LAN
1 Gb/s
4 symmetric pairs
* In order to take advantage of the exibility of the home wiring system, it is recommended that also for the telephone system service a 4 symmetrical pair
cable is used, connected to a RJ45 socket, instead of the traditional twisted pair connected to the RJ11/12 socket.
In this case, the same rJ45 socket used to connect the pc to the local ethernet network can be reused, for example, to connect a standard analogue telephone to the telephone line,
without any intervention required on the horizontal wiring. The only action needed will be the patching of the termination of the corresponding cable in the Star centre, moving
the connector from the ethernet switch to the telephone distribution frame. To connect a telephone unit with rJ11 socket to the rJ45 socket, use the corresponding cable rJ11/
rJ45 L4664.
446 MY HOME
Creation of the communication area

On an installation point of view,
it will therefore be necessary to
ZONE FOR HOME WIRING
it is recommended that the
also allow for partitions or similar
DEVICES
communication area is split in two
solutions for the separation of the
This area is occupied by the patch
specific zones:
systems
modules connecting the user
zone for the installation of
if the FLaTWaLL switchboard is used,
sockets to the Star centre, as well
a specific compartment is available
as all devices for the appropriate
for the installation of multimedia
distribution of the various signals to
devices
the sockets themselves
Gateway access devices

zone for home wiring devices
ZONE FOR GATEWAY ACCESS

DEVICES
This area is occupied by all active
and non active equipment, with
corresponding wiring for the
connection of the electric services
coming from the outside of the
home, such as:
Telephone line;
TV/SaT system from the central
unit downstream the aerials
Zone for home wiring devices
an example of active device for

this area is the adSL modem with
integrated switch, and if applicable
the Gateway device for the signals
coming from the optic fiber network
On the other hand, a non active
device can be the filter for the
Zone for Gateway Access devices
separation of the telephone signal

from the adSL data signal
For the operation of active devices, it
will be necessary to allow for
230 V power supply sockets, with the
corresponding disconnection and
protection devices in case of indirect
contact and overload
it must be considered that both
devices and wiring of the telephone
and data networks must be kept
separate from the 230 V electric
power supply devices and wiring
MY HOME 447
GEnEraL rULES FOr inSTaLLaTiOn
Positioning of the user sockets

it is recommended that 2 rJ45
the use of of the user sockets is not
also be installed, inside dedicated
sockets (data and telephone) and 1
prevented by the positioning of the
device holding boxes if no precise
TV jack are installed in each room,
furniture For the power supply of
design is available, the miminum
every 3 75 m of the perimeter of
the connected devices, on the side
requirements recommended for each
the room (ref CEi En 50173-4) The
of each user socket one or more
standard room of the house could be
number of sockets in each room
230 V power supply sockets must
as follows:
must, in any case, be such that

from each zone it will be possible
to reach the user point using a PC
or telephone connection cord not
ROOM TYPE
DEVICES TO BE USED
Kitchen
1 RJ45 socket (on worktop level) + 1 TV/SAT jack
Main bedroom
3 RJ45 sockets (2 of which for the telephone on bedside cabinets) + 1 TV/SAT jack
Second bedroom
2 RJ45 sockets (bedside cabinet and desk) + 1 TV/SAT jack
longer than 5 metres without causing
Living / sitting room
2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack
any transit problems inside the
Study
2 RJ45 sockets
room Obviously, this requirement
Tavern
2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack
must be assessed also taking into
Gym
1 RJ45 socket
account the current or future
Technical room
(laundry room/boiler room, etc.)
1 RJ45 socket
position of the furniture, so that
For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to rJ45 type sockets, use the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable
L4664.
DIAGRAM
example of a possible home wiring system.
448 MY HOME
User socket wiring

in order to ensure access to all types
service and those for the telephone
of services (data, telephone system,
system will be available on all the
and TV), the user socket must be
pins of the connector, as shown in
fitted with rJ45 connectors (female
the following table
Cat. 6 UTP
Connectors
type), and coaxial connectors for

aerial systems, with electric features
compatible with the ones of the
corresponding connection cables
RJ45 CONNECTORS
For the connection of modular rJ45
connectors to the 4 symmetric pair
RJ45 APPLICATION
data cable, two solutions can be

implemented, regulated by
Tia/Eia 568a or Tia/Eia 568B
standards respectively
PIN NUMBER
1
Telephone system
(analogue digital)
ISDN
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mps
From the table it is clear that pins 7 and 8 are not used. However, there are
special applications that also require these pins.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TV COAXIAL SOCKET
rJ45 connector
cablato
EIA 568
Bsecondo
lo standard TIA/eIA 568B.
For the distribution of TV services

in the residential network wiring
These two standards are completely
system it is necessary to install
similar in terms of performance and
the Coaxial cable, which must be
supported applications The only
connected, in the user sockets, to
difference is that pair 2 and pair 3 are
the corresponding F or iEC type TV
switched
The main trend is to install systems
TV coaxial socket
jack (male type) The socket must be

compatible with the cable features
using the Tia/Eia 568B standard
and must assure the transmission,
connection requirements
without relevant attenuation, of the
By using this type of wiring, both the
television signal with frequencies
signals for the distribution of the data
up to 2 150 GHz BTicino has a wide

range of die-cast aluminium TV jacks
for the distribution of TV SaT and FM
radio signals
MY HOME 449
Wiring diagrams
System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets

(*)
RJ45 sockets
(*)
(*)
(*)
Star centre
F550C6
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
F550C6
F551
F552
Power
PLT1
F558
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
230 Vac
ADSL modem
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F551
F552
F558
PLT1
F550C6
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
Switch 10/100 Mbs

Power supply
ADSL filter
Protect. against lightning
Patch module
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
4
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
11
7
11
NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching
450 MY HOME
System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets
(*)
RJ45 sockets
(*)
Star centre
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F555
F552 F551
F551
Power
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
PLT1
230 Vac
F558
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
ADSL modem
LINE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F558
PLT1
F555
F551
ADSL filter
Tel. distribution frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs
2
2
4
4
1
1
1
2
F550C6
F552
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
1
1
14
1
15
14
NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching
MY HOME 451
Wiring diagrams
System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks,

4 data sockets, 1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F555
F551
F552
Power
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
230 Vac
PLT1
F558
a b
IN
Gateway access (*)
PLT1
IPTV output
OUT
a b
LINE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
(*)
Access Gateway
ADSL filter
Telephone distrib. frame
Hub TV
Switch 10/100 Mbs
F558
PLT1
F555
F553
F551
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
2
2
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
F550C6
F552
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
See catalogue
Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
TV connecor
1
1
11
1
14
11
6
NotE (*): Device supplied by the supplier of the IPTV service
452 MY HOME
Television set with integrated DTT decoder (if the

television is not fitted with one, connect it to the TV
jack using an external DTT decoder)
IPTV decoder
SAT receiver
TV jacks
type 4214D
F550C6
F553
Down from TV/SAT aerial
TV distribution board
with mixer
MY HOME 453
Wiring diagrams
System for distribution of telephone system,

data network, TV/SAT signal
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F551
F555
F552
F551
Power
Power
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
230 Vac
230 Vac
PLT1
F558
a b
IN
PLT1
ADSL Modem
OUT
a b
LINE
454 MY HOME
F552
B variant
Down from
aerial
TV central unit
DTT decoder
Multiswitch
IF/IF central unit
SAT receiver
TV
TV jacks
type 4214D
F553
TO THE MY HOME VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F558
PLT1
F555
F551
F550C6
F552
F553
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
See catalogueo
ADSL filter
Telephone distrib.frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs
Patch module
Power supply
Hub TV
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
TV connecor
2
2
4
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
2
11
2
1
13
11
6
MY HOME 455
Wiring diagrams
System with Wireless router modem external to the

distribution board for the management of 4 data sockets
RJ45 sockets
OUT
IN
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6
F550C6
F550C6
F552
F555
F551
Power
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
230 Vac
PLT1
346020
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
Modem (*)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F558
PLT1
F555
F551
F552
F550C6
L4665L40/L20
See catalogue
ADSL filter
Telephone distrib.frame
Switch 10/100 Mbs
Power supply
Patch module
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
2
2
4
4
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
456 MY HOME
Note (*): If the Modem has an RJ11 input connector use the
L4664 adapter cable
Integration of the data and telephone system network

with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control
RJ45 sockets
10 Multimedia Touch Screen

for local control
To the telephone system RJ45 sockets system

Star centre
F550C6
F550C6
F454
ETHERNET
F555
F552
F551
SCS AI
SCS AV
Power
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
230 Vac
TO THE MY HOME SYSTEM
PLT1
ADSL modem
F558
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F454
HC/HS4659
F558
PLT1
F555
Web server
ADSL filter
Tel. distribution frame
10
1
1
1
1
1
F551
F550C6
F552
L4665L40
See catalogue
Switch 10/100 Mbs

Patch module
Power supply
Patch cable
RJ45 connector
4
1
1
1
9
1
10
8
2
2
4
MY HOME 457
Wiring diagrams
Expansion of the number of data sockets

The number of RJ45 sockets for data transmission
shown in the electric diagrams can be extended by
using several F551 switches in cascade, as shown in the
example:
RJ45 sockets
F551
F551
RJ45 sockets
F551
ADSL modem
458 MY HOME
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DIN MOD.
QUANTITY
F551
Switch 10/100 Mbs
CONTENTS
MY HOME System integration and control

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
MY HOME 459
GENERAL FEATURES
System integration
The integration among the various
MY HOME system gives the following
MY HOME functions using a PC or
housework
a mobile device connected to the
It makes it possible to centrally
advantages:
control all the functions using local
internet Integration is achieved
it allows to perform advanced
and remote management devices
using appropriate interfaces that
functions resulting from the
In this way, it will be possible to
connect the BUS of the various
interaction among dierent
check all the systems installed
systems to each other
systems Some examples: the
using only one Touch screen device
The picture below shows the local
possibility of switching the lights
positioned, for example, in the
control devices of the MY HOME
on when the Burglar-alarm system
corridor or in the living room Also,
systems
detects an alarm condition,
when away from home, it will be
of automatically reducing the
possible to check and manage the
volume of the music broadcasted

when a door entry system call is
Video Display
received, and the switching o of

the heating inside a room when
a opened is opened while doing
Local Display
Nighter control
Touch Screen
PC with MHVISUAL software
460 MY HOME
Special
control
Mode of integration
There are two modes of integration:
communication protocols through
Integration among the various MY
TCP/IP interfaces using the BTicino
HOME systems;
Open Web net protocol
Integration between MY HOME

systems and systems using other
INTEGRATION AMONG MY HOME SYSTEMS

TV/SAT
Video door entry and home
video surveillance system
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
SCS/SCS
interface
controllo
TV/SAT
IPTV
lan
SCS/SCS
interface
Burglar alarm
controllo carichi
automazione
automazione
energia
diffusione
sonora
diffusione
sonora
luci
antifurto
Automation
antifurto
tvcc
termoregolazione
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
www
irrigazione
videocitofonia
controllo
Audio/Video node
(or Multichannel matrix)
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
Sound system
TV/SAT
IPTV
antifurto
lan
IPTV
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo carichi
Energy energia
managementcontrollo
luci
lan
tvcc controllo carichi www
energiairrigazione
luci
Integration is achieved as follows:
By sharing of the same BUS wiring,
dierent systems cannot share the
be connected to each other using
as indicated in the description of
same wiring This is for example the
a specific interface
each individual system
case of the burglar-alarm system

and the automation system, the
Using integration interfaces for

those cases when the devices of
which corresponding BUS can only
TV/SAT
IPTV PROTOCOLS
INTEGRATION BETWEEN MY HOME SYSTEM AND APPLICATIONS WITH DIFFERENT
MY HOME integrated system
Open Web Net

communication protocol
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
Devices
with DALI protocol
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
Other home automation

applications
MY HOME 461
GEnErAL FEATUrES
Integration and interfacing devices

Integration is possible thanks to the
The BTicino range of system
MY HOME can also be integrated
use of specific interfacing devices
integration devices consists of:
with systems with different
that enable performing advanced
SCS/SCS interface - F422 (2 DIn)
communication protocols and
home automation functions
Audio/video node - F441 (6 DIn)
technology, as for example Konnex,
Multichannel matrix - F441M (10
DALI and EIB, through TCP/IP
DIn))
interfaces (for example the Web

Server) The devices are the following:
SCS/EIB interface F426;
SCS/DALI interface F429
INTERFACES FOR INTEGRATION WITH DIFFERENT STANDARDS AND PROTOCOLS

SCS/EIB
Audio/Video node
Interface
Multichannel matrix
SCS/DALI
462 MY HOME
Integration among MY HOME systems

AUTOMATION AND ENERGY
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
To keep the two systems separate
systems is achieved without the need
(for example to use independent
for an interface This is because the
electric power supplies), these can
devices share the same BUS cable
be connected to each other using
and power supply
the F422 interface in physical

separation mode: MOD = 6
TV/SAT
IPTV
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
automazione
Light
control
TV/SAT
ENERGY
AUTOMATION
utomazione
ora
The integration between these two
MANAGEMENT
controllo
diffusione sonora
lanantifurto
Shutter
control
controllo
carichi
termoregolazione
energia
videocitofonia
Temperature
sensor
luci
controllo
ww
contro
BUS SCS
TV/SAT
Dimmer
actuator TV/SAT
TV/SAT
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
diffusione sonora
controllo carichi
Actuator2 relays
antifurto
energia
termoregolazione
automazione videocitofonia
diffusione sonora controlloantifurto
luci
Lights
tvcc
www
TV/SAT
IPTV
automazione
IPTV
automazione
termoregolazione
tvcc lan
Temperature
sensor
230 Vac
antifurto
IP
diffusione sonora
antifurto
lan
termoregolazione
controllovideocitofonia
carichi
IPTV
termoregolazione
energiacontrollo
luci
videocitofonia
lan
IPTV
Temperature
control actuator
controllo
tvcc
controllo carichi
lan
wwwenergia
irrigazione
Temperature
control actuator
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
luci
www
tvcc
irrigazione
irrigazione
Shutters
Radiator
Radiator
MY HOME 463
www
irrig
GEnErAL FEATUrES

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
AND SOUND SYSTEM
The integration between the Video
When the entrance panel is activated,
It is also possible to use the video
door entry system and the Sound
the sound system reduces the
handset to broadcast a message
system is achieved using the Audio/
volume of the stereo sources so that
inside the various rooms using the
Video node F441 or the multichannel
the sound of the bell can be heard
amplifiers (pager function)
Matrix F441M
The audio will return to its original
The power supply is the same for
volume when the handset is replaced
both systems
TV/SAT
IPTV
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
SOUND SYSTEM
lan
automazione
energia
controllo carichi
diffusione
lucisonora
Multichannel
matrix
Video Station
230 Vac
Entrance panel
Radio tuner
Outdoor camera
464 MY HOME
antifurto
tvcc
termoregolazione
www
Loudspeaker
RCA input
videoc
irrigaz
INTEGRATION AMONG ALL THE
MOD=4 BURGLAR-ALARM MODE
SYSTEM
The SCS/SCS interface in
In addition to the interfacing
Burglar-Alarm mode (MOD=4)
procedures described in the previous
must be used when integrating the
pages, MY HOME systems can also be
Automation or the Video door entry
integrated using the F422 SCS/SCS
system (even if integrated with the
interface configured in 3 different
Sound System) with the Burglar-alarm
modes:
system Each system has a dedicated
Burglar-alarm: MOD = 4
power supply, as shown in the
Galvanic separation: MOD = 0
following drawings
Physical separation: MOD = 6
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
230 Vac
videocitofonia
Power supply
TV/SAT
controllo
TV/SAT
IPTV
lan
230 Vac
automazione
diffusione sonora
controllo carichi
energia
www
controlloirrig
OUT
SCS interface
MOD=4
SCS interface
MOD=4
IN
IN
TV/SAT
diffusione sonora
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
luci termoregolazionetvcc videocitofonia
Power supply
OUT
automazione
antifurto
230 Vac
IPTVTV/SAT
antifurto automazione
termoregolazione
videocitofonia antifurto controllotermoregolazionelan
diffusione sonora
Power supply
230 Vac
Power supply
IPTV
automazione
controllo
carichi controllo diffusione
energia sonoralan
videocitofonia
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SOUND
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
antifurto
te
luci
controllo carich
MY HOME 465
GENERAL FEATURES

MOD=0 GALVANIC SEPARATION
The SCS/SCS interface in Galvanic
system with the Video door entry
separation mode (MOD=0) must
system or the Sound system. Each
be used when interfacing the
system has a dedicated power
Automation or Energy management
supply.
TV/SAT
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
Power supply
IPTV
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
Power supply
OUT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
230 Vac
lan
SCS interface
MOD=0
automazione
controllo
carichi
diffusione
sonora
energia
antifurto
luci
termoregolazione
tvcc
videocitofo
ww
230 Vac
IN
MOD=6 PHYSICAL SEPARATION

This mode brings together
Each system can be connected both
As described in the previous pages,
the features of the physical
to the OUT and the IN clamp of the
the integration between the two
expansion mode, described in the
interface.
systems does not require the use of
AUTOMATION section, and the
In MOD=6, the interface F422
interfaces. However, the possibility
features of the galvanic separation
can also be used to integrate the
of keeping the two BUSes separate
mode, and can be used for systems
Automation system with the Energy
may be useful if the user also wishes
with devices preset for virtual
Management system, keeping the
to keep the electric power supplies of
configuration.
corresponding BUSes electrically
the systems separate.
separate.
TV/SAT
AUTOMATION
Power supply
IPTV
SYSTEM
TV/SAT
IPTV
ENERGY
MANAGEMENT
Power supply
SYSTEM
automazione
230 Vac
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
OUT
SCS interface
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
MOD=6
controllo carichi
IN
466 MY HOME
energia
luci
tvcc
230 Vac
www
irrigazione
controllo ca
zione
USE OF INTERFACES WITH

DIFFERENT MODES
The two modes described may be
For example, the integration of
of the home in alarm status using the
used together when integrating
the Video door entry system with
monitor of the video handset; at the
different systems and performing
the Automation and Burglar-alarm
same time as the activation of the
advanced functions
systems enable displaying the areas
siren, all the lights inside the home

will also come on
TV/SAT
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
Power supply
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
Power supply
automazione
controllo
TV/SAT
BURGLAR-ALARM
IPTV
diffusione sonora
lan
antifurtocarichi
controllo
termoregolazione
energia
230 Vac
videocitofonia
luci
controllo
tvcc
lan www
230 Vac
OUT
OUT
SCS interface
MOD=0
SCS interface
MOD=4
IN
IN
TV/SAT
Power supply
automazione
diffusione sonora
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
230 Vac
MY HOME 467
la
GEnErAL FEATUrES

It is possible to create a system
If necessary, each of these can be
with three interfaces, to connect an
expanded or interfaced with the
Automation system with physical
Video Door Entry System or the
extension (interface with MOD=6)
Sound System using other interfaces
and a Burglar Alarm system (interface
It is the case, for example, of a villa
with MOD=4) to a single riser
consisting of several large floors
TV/SAT
BURGLAR-ALARM
AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
automazione
SYSTEM
Power supply
diffusione sonora
antifurto
automazione
termoregolazione
diffusione sonora
videocitofonia
antifurto
controllo
TV/SAT
IPTV
Power supply
termoregolazione
lan
230 Vac
videocitofonia
controllo
carichi
controllo
energia
lan
luci
230 Vac
OUT
Power supply
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 =
MOD =
2
6
OUT
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 =
MOD =
IN
1
4
IN
230 Vac
TV/SAT
AUTOMATION
Power supply
SYSTEM
automazione
diffusione sonora
230 Vac
OUT
antifurto
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 =
MOD =
IN
468 MY HOME
IP
termoregolazione
1
2
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
contr
Integration between MY HOME

and systems with different protocols
In order to integrate the MY HOME
Interfacing with other external
system with systems with different
protocols is also possible using the
communication protocols, 2 devices
OPEn WEB nET communication
are available:
protocol, purposely designed
SCS/EIB interface for the
by BTicino for the exchange of
integration of MY HOME with EIB
information and controls with devices
protocol based systems;
compatible with this language
SCS/DALI interface for the
For more information visit the
integration of MY HOME with
website www myopen-legrandgroup
lighting DALI protocol based
com or see the following pages of
systems;
this guide
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
IPTV
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
Power supply
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Actuator
To DALI devices
230 Vac
MY HOME
SYSTEM
Interfacing with DALI devices
MY HOME 469
zione
GEnErAL FEATUrES
System control
The BTicino MY HOME system can
a simple command sent using
monitor and control your home or
the TOUCH SCrEEn, or remotely
office in total safety and privacy
TV/SAT
Control can be performed locally

using the various tools, such as
Mobile access
using the PC, a hand-held
IPTV
computer,telephone or mobile
phone
automazione
diffusione sonora
tvcc
www
antifurto
LOCAL CONTROL
The system can command and
control the MY HOME system, using
videocitofonia
controllo
the controls
installed insidelanthe
controllo carichi
energia
luci
irrigazione
home A single movement controls

several devices inside the home
(blinds, shutters, lights )
Scenario control
iPad with My Home BTicino Application
CONTROL WITH PC AND IPAD

It is also possible to supervise and
control the system using a PC with
MHVISUAL software installed, and

an iPad with the BTicino My Home
The BTicino My Home application is
application Thanks to a simple and
only available from the Apple Store in
customisable graphic interface,
the following versions:
it is possible to control lights and
- Free DEMO, with limited functionality;
shutters, view the images from the
- at a fee, including all the My Home
cameras installed in the various
functions
rooms, change the temperature,

and attend to any alarms occurred
470 MY HOME
termoregol
REMOTE CONTROL
The system can be controlled and
Internet
monitored remotely (when away

from the premises where the MY
HOME system is installed) using
the MY HOME WEB portal or an
internet point-point connection
The extremely quick, private and
safe system provides control of
your home from anywhere, also
performing the CCTV functions and
monitoring the burglar-alarm system
(sending SMS messages or e-mails
with attachments)
Point-point connection:
remote connection can be achieved
the Internet connecting directly
Direct connection to the devices
to the fixed IP address of the line
by means of ADSL line
dedicated to the control system
MY HOME WEB service
The ADSL line gives access to the
This control is performed using
The connection to the system is
MY HOME system by means of
dedicated WEB pages
in two dierent ways:
ensured using the MY HOME WEB

portal This is the virtual platform
for remote management services
dedicated to users with a MY HOME
system equipped with BTicino
remote connection devices
MY HOME WEB is intended both for
installers and users; the installers
Internet
Mobile access
will be able to offer their customers

a remote assistance and remote
TV/SAT
IPTV
system diagnostic service Using

a mobile phone or a PC with
internet connection, users will be
able to remotely control all the
Internet
home automation functions, like

for example the activation of the
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
cameras for the monitoring of
lan
controllo carichi
Point-point connection
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
the home, the reception of video

door entry system calls when away
from the home, the activation of
Web Server
the burglar-alarm system and the

heating system
MY HOME 471
GEnErAL FEATUrES
Local control devices
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED
BaSIC CONTROL
SPECIaL CONTROL
SOFT TOuCH
CONTROL
KNOB CONTROL
H4652/2
L4652/2
AM5832/2
H4652/3
L4652/3
AM5832/3
H4651M2
L4651M2
AM5831M2
HD4653M2/3
HC4653/2/3
HS4653/2/3
HD4563
HC4563
HS4563
L4563
N4563
NT4563
REMOTE CONTROL
3529
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
L/N/NT4654N
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON/OF control with light
intensity adjustment
LIGHTING
General, room,
and group controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
UP/DOWN in normal mode
UP/DOWN in safe mode
General, room, and group
controls
auTOMaTION
Recalling of scenarios saved

in the F420 scenario module
SCENaRIO CONTROL
Activation of scenarios
saved in the MH200N
scenario programmer
(CEN configurator)
BuRGLaR aLaRM
System arming and

disarming and separation
SOuND SySTEM
Amplifier ON/OFF, track

change, and volume
adjustment
TEMPERaTuRE CONTROL
Temperature display and

zone management
ENERGy SaVING
Consumption control and

display
Anti black-out load
management
VIDEO DOOR ENTRy

SySTEM
Control and command of

video door entry functions
MuLTIMEDIaLITy
Display of network
multimedia contents (IP
Radio and Media Server)
472 MY HOME
Electric door lock release

and staircase light control
Electric door lock release

and staircase light control
Electric door lock release and

staircase light control
GREEN SWITCH
CONTROL
BaDGE-HOLDER
POCKET
TRaNSPONDER
REaDER
HC/HD/HS4658
HC/HD/HS4659
L/N/NT4658
L/N/NT4659
H4648
H4649
LN4648
LN4649
HD4607
HC4607
HS4607
L/N/NT4607
CaPaCITIVE NIGHTER
aND WHICE CONTROL
HD4657M3/4
HC4657M3/4
HS4657M3/4
SCENaRIO CONTROL
HD4680
HC4680
HS4680
L4680
N4680
NT4680
MY HOME 473
GEnErAL FEATUrES

LOCaL DISPLay
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED
HD4685
HC4685
HS4685
L4685
N4685
NT4685
TOuCH SCREEN
MuLTIMEDIa TOuCH SCREEN
H4684
L4684
AM5864
HD4690
HC4690
HS4690
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON/OF control with light
intensity adjustment
LIGHTING
General, room,
and group controls
Timed controls
AUTOMATION
Shutter control
UP/DOWN in normal mode
UP/DOWN in safe mode
General, room, and group
controls
Recalling of scenarios saved in
the F420 scenario module
SCENARIO CONTROL
Activation of scenarios saved

in the MH200N scenario
programmer
(CEN configurator)
BURGLAR ALARM
System arming and disarming

and separation
SOUND SYSTEM
Amplifier ON/OFF, track change,

and volume adjustment
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
Temperature display and zone

management
Consumption control and display
ENERGY SAVING
Anti black-out load
management
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM
Control and command of video

door entry functions
MULTIMEDIALITY
Display of network multimedia

contents (IP Radio and Media
Server)
474 MY HOME
Electric door lock release and staircase light control
VIDEO TOuCH SCREEN
VIDEO HaNDSETS
349310
349311/12/13
H4687
349320/21
System status and alarm notification display
Display of camera images
Display of the main screen of the 3465 multimedia interface
MY HOME 475
GEnErAL FEATUrES

The MY HOME system can be
advanced like the TOUCH SCrEEn
as scenarios (which with just one
commanded and controlled used
Just one command manages simple
touch let you switch On lights, raise
various interfaces, from the simplest
functions such as switching on a
shutters, switch on the sound system,
such as the basic control to the most
light and advanced functions such
set the temperature etc )
Soft Touch control - 2 modules
TWO AND THREE AXOLUTE SOFT

TOUCH CONTROLS
With the simple touch of the control,
this device is capable of sending
actuation and adjustment commands
for the automation, sound system
functions
AXOLUTE NIGHTER, WHICE AND

WHITE GLASS CONTROLS
The nighter and Whice control
This effect gives the user the feeling
is a control where the traditional
of activating the control
pushbuttons are replaced by
Using the appropriate configurator it
capacitive sensors
is possible to select different intensity
Moving the finger close to a sensor is
levels
Nighter 3 module control
the same as pressing a pushbutton

The device can therefore be used to
control single or group loads (e g
Lights and Shutters), sound system,
scenarios, and basic door entry
system functions
Its manufactured in the versions with
Whice 4 module control
3 and 4 flush mounted modules, with

6 and 8 keys respectively
Each zone corresponding to a key is
marked at the centre by a light blue
LED
When the user moves a finger close,
its intensity increases sensibly, and
remains so until the finger is moved
away again
476 MY HOME
INFRARED CONTROLS
Ir receiver and new Ir remote
IR receiver
control: with the receiver,manual

control can be replaced or integrated
with a remote control, using the
infrared remote control 3529
IR remote control
Controls intended for 1-relay
motor etc ), scenario managements,
actuators for single loads and 2-relay
Sound system and Video door entry
actuators for double loads (shutter
system
CODE PROTECTED CONTROL

When used in the Automation
system, the device created for
Code protected control
arming/disarming the Burglar-alarm

system can be used to manage basic
and advanced controls, which are
protected and can be activated using
Transponder
a transponder badge
MY HOME 477
GEnErAL FEATUrES

MOVEMENT AND LIGHTING
SENSORS
Thanks to the new sensors of the
Comfort and wellbeing
Lighting Management system,
The new sensors also allow
within the MY HOME system it is now
increasing the level of comfort
possible to control the lighting levels
of the users, with the automatic
based on the presence of people
switching on of the light when
inside the room and the amount of
entering the room, and the
natural light, ensuring:
preservation of the desired
Energy eciency
lighting level based on external
With the new sensors it is possible
Passive presence IR detector
conditions
to eliminate energy waste through

an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place The various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the
user to obtain dierent levels of
energy eciency
Light and presence IR sensor
GREEN SWITCH: ILLUMINATION

ONLY WHEN NEEDED
Green Switch is the intelligent state of
regulations, saving energy without
the art solution for managing lighting
compromising on modern life comfort
without waste in the residential and
today is possible
service sectors The light is switched on
Bticino offers solutions for an
by the user, and goes off automatically
environmentally intelligent
when no one is in the room
management of lighting, and for
respect for the environment and
the control of domestic energy
compliance with the new building
consumptions
478 MY HOME
Passive IR movement sensor

- AUTO MODE-
LOCAL DISPLAY
TOUCH SCREEN
TOUCH SCrEEn OLED technology
This is a room control for all the MY
and customised icons for the light
control device for the control of the
HOME functions It is possible to
points Again, with a simple touch
Automation (scenario management),
switch the lights on and off, lower
on the icon chosen, the lamp or
Temperature control and Sound
or rise the shutters, control garden
lamps associated with it will switch
system functions of the MY HOME
watering, adjust the temperature
on or off
system
in the various rooms, etc , and to

Local display
automatically activate scenarios

based on logic or time conditions
The display shows a home page,
Touch Screen
inside which the applications that

can be managed are graphically
represented
Touch the icon for the application
to be managed (e g Lighting) to
display a page with the included
MHVISUAL AND VIDEO TOUCH

SCREEN
The MHVISUAL applications enable,
MHVISUAL communicates with the
using a graphic interface that can
MY HOME systems using an Ethernet
be easily customised, to control the
card fitted in the VIDEO TOUCH
MY HOME system devices through a
SCrEEn and the generic PC for access
VIDEO TOUCH SCrEEn or a generic
to one or more WEB Servers
PC
The program gives the possibility of
Video Touch Screen with MHVISUAL software
creating a graphic representation of

the system to be controlled, where
the actual devices are represented by
preset, and fully customisable icons
At any time, it will be possible to
control the status of the lighting,
automation and burglar-alarm
system, to activate the HOME VIDEO
SUrVEILLAnCE SYSTEM, and manage
the saved scenarios
MY HOME 479
GEnErAL FEATUrES

10 MULTIMEDIA TOUCH
SCREEN
Within the range of BTicino MY
it is also possible to answer video
connection In this case, it will also be
HOME home automation system
door entry system calls, and visually
possible, using appropriate icons of
control products is the Multimedia
monitor all the rooms inside the
the Home Page, to take advantages
Touch Screen Thanks to the 10
house through the images of the MY
of rSS services such as news and
16/9 LCD screen with Touch Screen
HOME system cameras
weather forecasts, display Webcam
technology, a touch of the simple
In addition to the described functions,
images, and listen to the radio
and intuitive icons is enough to easily
there is also the possibility of
through the internet
managed all the home automation
managing, together with the Sound
Available in three finishes, anthracite
functions, like, for example, the
system, multimedia contents such as
grey (HS4690), metallic grey
automation of lights and shutters, the
audio, video and pictures available
(HC4690), and white (HD4690), the
display of energy consumption levels,
from external sources connected to a
device is completed by teak, brushed
and the monitoring of the burglar-
USB port, or an SD card connector, or
or white aluminium, or nighter &
alarm system status
by connecting the device to a home
Whice glass front cover plates
Using Multimedia Touch Screen
data network with ADSL internet

HA4690LTK
HA4690VNB
HA4690XC
HA4690VSW
HA4690VBB
SUPERVISION AND CONTROL OF THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM USING THE 10 MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN
480 MY HOME
Video Station
VIDEO DISPLAY AND VIDEO

STATION
Devices created for managing the
video door entry system functions,
the VIDEO DISPLAY and the VIDEO
STATIOn, if installed in integrated
MY HOME systems (Automation with
Video Display
Video door entry system, Burglaralarm, Temperature control, etc ),

they are capable of managing the
home automation functions by
activating the customisable menus,
displayed on a colour LCD screen
As far as the Automation functions
are concerned, both devices can
be used to activate an appropriate
menu, and the scenarios saved in the
This is not a TOUCH SCrEEn device
NIGHTER & WHICE VIDEO

STATION
Handset that can be installed in 2
wire video systems, with 8 colour
Whice Video Station
LCD display
Its integrated in the MY HOME
system, and manages the following
functions: Video door entry system,
Temperature control, Sound system,
Scenarios, Alarms
All the home automation functions
are managed using the customisable
menus found on the display
This is not a TOUCH SCrEEn device
MY HOME 481
GEnErAL FEATUrES

SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
These devices can be used to create
watching the television or reading
systems is the activation of a certain
particular and advanced room
a book, following the lifestyle of the
background music, the setting of the
comfort situations called scenarios,
user
temperature and the light level of the
for example by switching on some
Another example of an advanced
house, when entertaining friends
lights to a certain intensity level,
scenario that can be set using
and positioning some shutters for
the various integrated MY HOME
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
Scenario programmer MH200N
Green Switch control and

light/movement sensor
Touch Screen
TV/SAT
Nighter & Whice control
automazione
482 MY HOME
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
The scenarios described are managed
Scenario module F420, 2 DIn
Scenario programmer, MH200n, for
using particular devices capable of
modules, capable of saving 16
the creation and management of
saving in the memory all the Controls
scenarios for automation, sound
advanced scenario, also dependant
that define the scenario, and which
system, temperature control
on time events
the user can recall simultaneously by
pressing one single pushbutton
applications
The devices capable of saving and

programming these functions are the
TV/SAT
following:
automazione
diffusione sonora
IPTV
Special control
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
Video Station (*)
Soft Touch control
Local display
IPTV
controllo carichi
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)
energia
luci
tvcc
www
Scenario control
irrigazione
NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer..
MY HOME 483
GEnErAL FEATUrES

SCENARIO PROGRAMMER
MH200N
and date enables, for example, to
the nine auxiliary channels;
The device, installed in a MY HOME

system, executes the scenarios
An certain hour or date;
simulate a presence inside the home
programmed with the TIMH200n
An event of the burglar-alarm
by automatically activating the

shutters or the lights at certain preset
system;
software (included in the CD

supplied) based on the following
enabling, disabling, block or release
times, when no one is in fact at home
A condition occurring on the
A control pushbutton of the
Temperature control system;
automation system can be
An entrance panel call or the status
events:
Pressure of a control pushbutton

(configured in CEn mode);
of a camera of the video door entry
programmed so that when it is
system;
pressed all currently active scenarios
An event of the sound system
are interrupted (Panic button)
(with the exception of dimmer
Following these events, MH200n
MH200n also operates as a system
light points);
can control the MY HOME system
Gateway See the section remote
applications
control devices
Switching on and o of a light
Automatic operation activation
The execution of a conditioned
(shutter movement);
An event managed using one of
scenario combined with a set time
EXAMPLES OF SCENARIOS
Below are some examples of
to be activated is performed
scenarios that can be set using the
using the appropriate TiMH200n
MH200n device
program supplied together with the
The association of the keys of the
programmer
control devices to the scenarios
automazione
diffusione sonora
F411/2
Scenario 1 Returning home:

When the burglar-alarm is disarmed, at daytime the shutters go up but the
TV/SAT
lights stay off; at night time the lights come on but if closed the shutters
IPTV
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
term
remain closed.
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
F411/1N
automazione
484 MY HOME
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
ir
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
IPTV
IPTV
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
F411/1N
Scenario 2 - Garden lights:

automazione
diffusione
sonora
antifurto everytermoregolazione
videocitofonia
Following
the activation
of the
control device,
evening at 20.00
oclock,
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
or when the light sensor detects that outside is dark, all the lights of the
garden come on automatically.
A=
PL=
M=
1
1
CEN
F411/2
Light
sensor
13 14
automazione
TV/SAT
Scenario 3 - Energy saving:
TV/SAT
IPTV
antifurto
diffusione sonora termoregolazi
antif
IPTV
Following a room control (A=2) for the opening of the shutters, if the light
A=
sensor detects that it is daytime, the scenario automatically turns off all the
lights of that room.
automazione
diffusione
automazione
sonora
F411/1N
diffusione
automazione
sonora
A=
PL=
diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
controllo carichi
lan
energia
controllo carichi
AMB
2
luci
energia
automazione
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
wwwtvcc
irrigazione
A=
Light
sensor
tvcc luci
automazione
diffusione
sonora
diffusione sonora termoregolaz

antif
antifurto
F411/2
IPTV
IPTV
TV/SAT
Scenario 4 - Relax:
The control device can be used to lower the shutters, adjust the dimmer lights
at 20%, and activate the sound system in the desired room.
automazione
diffusione
automazione
sonora
diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
controllo carichi
lan
controllo
energia carichi
luci
energia
tvcc luci
www
tvcc
irrigazion
F411/1N
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
automazione
A=
PL=
M=
videocitofonia
diffusione sonora
controllo
20%
antifurto
lan
termoregolazione
1
1
CEN
MY HOME 485
co
videocitofon
GEnErAL FEATUrES
remote control devices

MY HOME offers the possibility
a hand-held PC or a WAP telephone
MY HOME PORTAL WEB
of controlling all the integrated
connected to the internet network In
In addition to direct connection
functions of the house using a PC, a
both cases the control is performed
control, by using the telephone or the
hand-held PC, a fixed line telephone,
using any browser program to access
internet the Gateway access devices
or a mobile phone
the particular WEB pages saved in the
of the home give the possibility of
In order to enable remote control, the
WEB server, where the functions to be
remotely controlling all the MY HOME
following devices, providing Gateway
managed are represented by simple
functions using the connection to the
access between the MY HOME system
and intuitive icons
MY HOME WEB portal
and the telephone and/or internet
Thanks to the BUS of the MY HOME
In this case, by using a PC connected
network, must be installed inside the
system the WEB server is connected
to the internet or a telephone, it
home
to all the functions installed inside
will be possible to interact with a
F454 Web Server, or MH200n
the home (automation, burglar-alarm,
virtual platform, which exchanges
etc ) Connection to the outside is,
with the MY HOME system all the
as already indicated, though the
information on the status of the
internet
home automation functions of the
If the Web server is used inside
If the Burglar-alarm central unit
house
the home, it will be possible to
is used, connected to the PSTn
connect the system locally using a
or GSM telephone network, the
NOTE: Web Servers, scenario programmers and
PC connected to the LAn nETWOrK
control of certain functions of the
burglar-alarm central unit are flexible devices
of the home, or remotely using a PC,
MY HOME system is performed by
purposely designed to enable remote control of the
remotely sending special telephone
various MY HOME functions using the above modes.
commands
In case of limited control requirements, the following
scenario programmer;
3486 or 3485 burglar-alarm central

unit
3486
devices can be used, which can only be managed

using telephone or SMS commands:
GSM telephone activator F462;
Devices for MY HOME remote control
PSTN F461/2 telephone actuator.

F454
For the features see the following pages
MH200N
3485
F461/2
F462
486 MY HOME
EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A SMARTPHONE AND THE MH300 WI-FI MODEM ROUTER
LAN NETWORK
Ethernet
Modem Router
TV/SAT
My Home system BUS
IPTV
Smartphone
Telephone line
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
ISP
tvcc
Internet
www
irrigazione
EXAMPLE
IPTVOF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A SMARTPHONE AND GPS CONNECTION
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
Smartphone
Web Server
MY HOME 487
GEnErAL FEATUrES

aDSL
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED
MH200N
F454
Automation
- ON/OFF lighting
- Shutter UP/DOWN
Burglar alarm
Energy management
Video surveillance system
max 96 cameras (connecting the F454 to a 2 wire digital video door entry system)
Display the pictures in black and white and colour
Temperature control
Sending e-mail messages following instrusions and technical alarm
Sending an SMS following specific events, request for current status, alarms
Only with MY HOME portal
Sending voice calls in case of intrusion and technical alarm
Sending e-mail with attachment in case of intrusion and technical alarm
Video door entry answering machine: saving and sending the message and pictures recorded
by the entrance panel by e-mail
Forwarding of calls following Stop&Go events
488 MY HOME
GSM
GSM + PSTN
aNaLOGuE TELEPHONE LINE (PSTN)
Art.F462
F461/2
3485
3486
Control of single electric loads
Switching on and o remotely
Control of single electric loads
MY HOME 489
GEnErAL FEATUrES

F454 AUDIO/VIDEO WEB
or no alarm notification) It is
SERVERS
also possible to receive an e-mail
microphone of the selected camera
These devices can be used to operate
message, with images attached, in
(remote noise monitoring;
a MY HOME system installed in the
your mailbox, for the notification of
house or the office The connection
burglar-alarm system events;
Listen to the audio recorded by the
Broadcast the own voice through

the loudspeaker associated to the
selected camera (real time audio
Supervision of the electric system,
can be established using a modem

and/or a data network (wired
with the reception of messages in
communication using the personal
or wireless) By using a Personal
case of tripping of the Stop&Go
computer);
Computer or a hand-held computer
device
Listen and view the messages
with standard browser (e g Internet
In addition, it is possible to perform
recorded using the Video door
Explorer 6), the user can locally or
the following operations:
entry system answering machine
remotely connect to the Web server,
real time audio and video
function
using customisable web pages, and
connection to the cameras of the
The audio messages and the
perform the following operations:
images may also be forwarded by
Supervision and control of the
In particular, it is possible to:
e-mail to an address
Automation, Energy management
View the images broadcasted by
and Temperature control systems;
the selected camera (with the
Supervision of the burglar-alarm
possibility of adjusting the image,
system by receiving the status
the framing and the zoom settings
messages (system in alarm status
of the image using the PC);
TV/SAT
IPTV
MY HOME FUNCTIONS WHICH THE WEB SERVER CAN MANAGE
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
Burglar
alarm
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo
lan
Automation
automazione
controllo carichi
energia
Web server
automazione
energia
diffusione sonora
luci
antifurto
Home video
tvcc
surveillance system
termoregolazione
www
videocitofonia
TV/SAT
Management and control of the MY HOME system using a

automazione
sonora computer,
antifurto
termoregolazione
controllo
lan
personal
computerdiffusione
or avideocitofonia
hand-held
by
connectingtermoregolazione
to the MY HOME portal through a fixed-line or mobile phone,
following a customisable voice menu.
490 MY HOME
lan
controllo carichi
energia
antifurto
luci
Lighting
luci
tvcc
tvcc
irrigazione
MY HOME portal
antifurto
controllo
diffusione sonora
IPTV
Video
door entry
videocitofonia
controllo carichi
system
TV/SAT
Energy
management
controllo
energia
IPTV
lan luci
controllo carichi
tvcc
Monitoring, command and

control of the system by
means of web pages and/or
management programs
energiawww
luci
irrigazione
term
With the activation of the MY HOME
The Web Server can only connect
As well as having the same level of
WEB service, it is possible to remotely
one user with the My Home system;
acces as the user, the administrator
manage the home, using a PC or a
this is fundamental to guarantee
can also access the COnFIGUrATIOn
hand-held PC with internet, fixed
the confidentiality, the coherence
function and define certain Web
line telephone or mobile phone
and the univocity of the operations
Server parameters, such as the
connection
performed
number of pictures to be saved in
The Web Server can also be used as a
The controls, defined during the
the video door entry answering
Gateway for the virtual configuration
programming of the Web server
machine, the e-mail address to which
of the MY HOME devices
using the device software programs
alarm signals and/or messages in
supplied, are password protected to
the answering machine, login and
prevent unwanted access
password for access to the pages as
Two types of users can access the
user, date, time and time zone and
Web pages:
display language of the WEB pages
administrator,
In case of control using the MY
user
HOME WEB service, acces is through

the MY HOME portal via double
identification
Example of control pages for the F454 Web Server

Identification
page
Control Home
Page
NOTE: The privacy of the information exchanged and of the pictures displayed is also guaranteed by the SSL
128 bit protocol.
MY HOME 491
GEnErAL FEATUrES

WEB SERVER FOR CONNECTION TO
THE INTERNET NETWORK
To connect the MY HOME system
configured, an ADSL modem and an
to the Internet and use the MY
ADSL line are required (with fixed or
HOME WEB Portal, in addition to
dynamic IP)
the F454 Web Server, appropriately
PC1
IP: 192.168.1.36
SM:255.255.225.0
PC2
IP: 192.168.1.37
SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.35
SM:255.255.225.0
F454
LAN
IP public
luci
tvcc
Internet
www
492 MY HOME
irrigazione
ADSL Modem
IP: 192.168.1.1
SM:255.255.225.0
PC3
IP: 192.168.1.38
SM:255.255.225.0
WIRELESS EXTENSION OF A
NETWORK
If the ADSL modem is not a wireless
Before being included in the system,
modem, or to extend the radio signal,
repeaters must be wired to the Wi-Fi
it will be possible to use a repeater
router using a LAn cable for Internet
to create extended wireless networks
connection, and must be correctly
in homes with several floors without
configured
wired LAn network

For optimum use, we recommend
to allow for one repeater for each
PC1
IP: 192.168.1.36
SM:255.255.225.0
floor
Repeater
1ST FLOOR
IP: 192.168.1.2
SM:255.255.225.0
GROUND FLOOR
tvcc
Internet
www
LAN
IP: 192.168.1.1
SM:255.255.225.0
IP pubblic
irrigazione
ADSL Modem
LAN
PC3
IP: 192.168.1.38
SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.35
SM:255.255.225.0
F454
MY HOME 493
GEnErAL FEATUrES

BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL
UNIT WITH PSTN OR GSM
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATOR
The telephone communicator, with
Telephone controls
Can be interrogated by telephone
which the 3486 and 3485 burglar-
The devices installed in the home
to give information on the status of
alarm central units are fitted, is
can be commanded using the
the burglar-alarm system;
capable of automatically dialling
fixed-line or the mobile phone
previously programmed telephone
by using predefined codes, or
the system sending, for example, a
numbers and to forward, through
using the MY HOME WEB service
notification that there has been a
the PSTn (3485) or PSTn/GSM (3486)
(through a PC or a hand-held pc
power cut for more than 2 hours
telephone lines, one or more pre-
with internet line, a fixed line
The device also makes available:
recorded messages, following an
telephone, or a mobile phone)
the possibility of setting an extra
intrusion or a technical alarm It also
Allows continuous monitoring of
joker telephone number, common
enables bidirectional communication
MAIN FUNCTIONS
for all the messages, for easier
between the user and the burglar-
The telephone communicator:
tracking;
alarm system or the automation
when there are particular events
automatic recording of the internal
system, for the interrogation of the
such as an alarm (example:
memory of the events which have
status of the burglar-alarm system,
intrusion alarm) or system fault, it
happened and been detected by
and the activation of the loads (lights
automatically calls the telephone
the system,
and shutters) The programming and
numbers previously set, specifying
the remote use are protected by a
by means of pre-recorded
BTicino MY HOME portal
secret code consisting of 5 digits,
messages the type of alarm
This will make the MY HOME WEB
which can be customised by the
detected;
services available, for example the
user; the secret code must also be
commands an automatic operation
entered in case of alarm call, to send
following an event detected by the
monitoring and silencing commands
burglar-alarm system;
Its functions can be divided into 3
using open web net commands
Alarm management
or simplified commands can
When the burglar-alarm system
activate the operation of devices
detects an alarm, it activates to call
inside the home;
the numbers set, specifying the

type of alarm detected
Following events detected by
Burglar-alarm central unit with

PSTN telephone communicator 3485
the burglar-alarm system, it

can determine the automatic
operation of other devices in the
home
494 MY HOME
forwarding of an e-mail when an

alarm occurs
can be called by the user, and
categories:
Automation
The possibility of connecting to the
Burglar-alarm central unit with PSTN/

GSM telephone communicator 3486
EXAMPLES OF USE
5 examples of use of the burglar-
sends a call to the pre-programmed
Interrogating the status of the
alarm control unit with PSTn or
burglar-alarm system
telephone numbers and connects
GSM telephone communicator are
By calling the home number the
to the MY HOME portal The portal
proposed below remember that
communicator can be interrogated
will send an e-mail, an SMS, and a
each device can perform all the
to receive information on the
voice call to the pre-programmed
functions indicated simultaneously
status of the burglar-alarm system
addresses
InTrUSIOn ALArM
(e g on/o, events detected)
Following an intrusion alarm the
Technical alarm (gas leak)
communicator calls the pre-set
By combining the gas detector in
telephone numbers
the burglar-alarm system via an
Tampering alarm and switching on
interface, when there is a gas leak
the garden lighting
the communicator will call and
Following a tampering alarm
inform the user
(window opening) the dialling
Alarm forwarding using the MY
device calls the pre-set telephone
HOME WEB portal
numbers and switches on the
Following an alarm the telephone
lamps in the garden
communicator of the central unit
TV/SAT
INTRUSION ALARM
IPTV
Tampering alarm and switching on the garden lighting

Central unit
3486
Central unit
3486
automazione
IR
sensor
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
Contact
interface
lan
controllo
controllo carichi
Alarms
AT
Mobile phone
TV/SAT
Fixed-line telephone
Mobile phone
TV/SAT
IPTV
Central unit
3486
System
status
diffusione
sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
automazione
diffusione
sonora
lan
antifurto
controllo carichi
termoregolazione
antifurto
controllo
carichi
termoregolazione
energiavideocitofonia
luci controllo
tvcc
lan controllo
www
controllo
carichi
irrigazione
energia
lucienergiavideocitofonia
tvcc
automazione
diffusione sonora
tvcc
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
Interrogation of the burglar-alarm status
automazione
lo
iffusione
sonora lan
Lighting
luci
energia
Alarms
TV/SAT
IPTV
Relay
actuator
Burglar
alarm
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
luci
controllo www tvcc
energia
lan
irrigazione w
luci
Alarms
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV
Mobile phone
IPTV
MY HOME 495
GEnErAL FEATUrES

GSM telephone activator
GSM TELEPHONE ACTIVATOR

F462
It can be used to enable and disable
thermostats to switch the system
the user loads remotely, using simple
On or OFF remotely Using the L/n/
SMS telephone messages
nT4550 timer thermostat one can
The device is set up to have 2
also interrogate the system status
alarm contacts When the status of
remotely and set it to a particular
one of the contacts changes the
temperature
device sends an alarm SMS to the

saved number The device can be
interfaced with the BTicino timer
USE WITH TIMER THERMOSTAT
TV/SAT
USE FOR LOADS ON/OFF

IPTV
System ON-OFF
automazione
diffusione sonora
SMS
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
Interaction
with
videocitofonia
the system
termoregolazione
Timer thermostat
antifurto
termoregolazione
TV/SAT
controllo
lan
Timer thermostat
L/N/NT4450
ALARM NOTIFICATION USE
SMS
496 MY HOME
Close alarm
contacts
videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo
controllo carichi
energia
lan
controllo carichi
energia
SMS
luci
tvcc
www
luci
Light
ON-OFF
Watering
irrigazione
ON-OFF
tvcc
Telephone actuator
TELEPHONE ACTUATOR F461/2

The telephone actuator can control
The activation, deactivation, check
two users (e g boilers, watering the
and programming commands must
garden, staircase light, garden light,
only be sent to the actuator from a
etc ) at a distance by means of the
telephone with touch tone dialling
fixed-line telephone or from the
(DTMF), when using telephones with
mobile phone
pulse dialling (PD) or rotary dial the
The programming and the remote
actuator does not work
controls are protected by a secret
The telephone commands can be
code (password) consisting of 4
sent in the simplified version, with a
digits, which can be customised by
small number of codes for easier use,
the user; the default code is 1234
or in the complete version according
During programming three different
to a standard defined by the Open
operating modes can be selected:
Web net protocol
Lighting
Also, the users can be activated
Can be used to activate/deactivate
locally using the two pushbuttons
telephone switchboard
users such as staircase light,
(C1 and C2) on the front panel
In this application the users can be
garden light, boilers etc
Up to four actuators in parallel on
controlled both from the extensions
the line can be installed on the same
and from an external telephone line
Can be used to operate the shutter
telephone line to command more
When there is a power cut (230V
(up/down) motors or other electric
than two users Actuator operation
a c ) the actuator keeps all the
motors
is guaranteed even if there is an
programming in the memory,
answering machine on the telephone
including the status of the relays
Automatic operation
Temperature control
To activate or deactivate the boiler
line
in combination with BTicino timer
The actuator can also be installed
thermostats
as an extension on a BTicino PABX
Example: Light mode and Temperature control

remotely controls the switching On and OFF
of lights and shutters
and the temperature control
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
automazione
antifurto
diffusione sonora
termoregolazione
Fixed-line
antifurto
telephone
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
IPTV
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
Telephone actuator
controllo carichi
luci
energia
tvcc
Gardenluci
lighting
www
tvcc
Shutters
up/down
automazione
www
diffusione sonora
irrigazione
antifurto
termoregolazion
irrigazione
IPTV
Timer thermostat
HC/HD/HS4451
L/N/NT4451
Mobile phone
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
www
irrigazione
MY HOME 497
GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB
MY HOME Web is a virtual platform
Installer area:
Customer area:
designed by BTicino, to provide
intended for the My Home
solely intended for customers
innovative services to all customers
installers which can register their
interested in the remote management
with a MY HOME system fitted with
own systems Following customers
of their system This service, active
BTicino remote connection devices
request, it is also possible to
since 2003, enables remote control
The platform can be split in two main
activate the remote Assistance
of all the home automation functions
separate areas:
service, which gives the possibility
of the MY HOME system, making
of remotely monitoring the home
available exclusive services that are
of the customer, and receive real
only possible through the web portal
time notifications in case of faults
(danger notifications, web scenarios,

etc )
MY HOME portal
CUSTOMER AREA
(Remote management)
INSTALLER AREA
(Remote assistance)
CONNECTION SAFETY AND

PROTECTION
In developing the MY HOME WEB
These solutions provide high levels of:
portal, BTicino has paid special
Privacy: protection of data from
attention to ensuring high levels of

protection of the data transferred
unauthorised access;
Integrity: safeguard of the
through the network from unwanted
accuracy and completeness of the
access
information;
The most stringent protection criteria
Accessibility: guarantee that both
have been implemented, like:
data and information will be
The use of the special https
available when required
protocol, which makes any
In recognition of the high safety level
information being transferred
offered by the connection with the
through the line unreadable at the
MY HOME WEB portal, BTicino has
origin;
obteined the ISO27001 Information
The use of the 128 bit SSL (Secure

Socket Layer) protocol, certified
technology - Security management

systems certification
by the VeriSign Certification

Authority.
498 MY HOME
MY HOME WEB Installer Area

Installers access their own dedicated
Filing of any activities performed
area in the Installer Portal section MY HOME section, using the Token
on the system through the web;
Enabling of the system remote
and the personal access keys (login
management function for the
and password) Here they will find the
customer
following services:
Token device for the creation of the

password
Menu management and list of
System registration;
regular maintenance activities for
Filing of the device configuration
the single system
files and documents generated by

the YouProject design software,
and by the programming software
programs
System management web page details
DOCUMENTS THAT CAN BE FILED
XML file generated by YouProject
Web configuration file
Server
Configuration files for Multimedia

Touch Screen, Touch Screen, etc
Installers that have been appointed

by the Customer to provide a remote
reception of fault notifications in
ACCESS TO THE PORTAL USING

MOBILE DEVICES
case of:
assistance service, will be able to
- Faulty or exhausted battery;
In addition to using the browser,
ensure a highly professional remote
- Device or zone in intrusion or
the installer can also interact using
assistance service, consisting in the
tampering alarm status;
mobile devices (mobile phones,
following functions:
- Device in panic alarm status;
hand-held phones, etc ), to display
Forwarding of diagnostic
- Loss of communication between
the following information:
commands to ensure correct
the Burglar-alarm central unit or
Customer data;
operation of certain system
the Web Server, and the Portal;
Customer contract and credit
- Temperature control system fault
devices, such as:

- Scenario central unit and actuators
of the Automation system;
situation;
Events from remotely managed

systems
- Burglar-alarm central unit;

- Temperature central unit;
- Web Server
Numero Verde
800-837035
NOTE: For more information or to request the activation of the Installer Area contact the Call Centre, toll-free number 800.837.035
(8.30-19.00 Monday to Friday and 8.30-12.30 Saturday)
MY HOME 499
GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB Customer Area

Customers can check all the MY
through the cameras of the Video
water leaks, or burglary attempts
HOME comfort, safety, saving and
door entry system, activate certain
Depending on the control device
communication functions for their
scenarios, monitor and store on file
used by the Portal to interact with the
own homes
the consumptions of the home and
MY HOME system, it will be possible
For example, they can switch the
much more
to control and use the functions
heating on, check the status of the
They can be informed at any time on
listed in the following table:
Burglar-Alarm system, display on
the status of the home, and receive
screen some areas of the home
prompt notification in case of gas or
CONTROL DEVICES
WEB SERVER (*)
BuRGLaR-aLaRM CENTRaL uNIT
Functions
F454 *
3486 - 3485
Comfort
1
Safety
Energy Management and Load Control
Energy Management and Consumption Display
Audio Video communication
NOTE *: In order to use the MY HOME WEB service with Web Server, an ADSL modem/router must be installed in the system.
NOTE 1: The Web Server only indicates the status of the Burglar-alarm system.
EXCLUSIVE ADVANCED
SERVICE COST
FUNCTIONS PERFORMED WITH
With the on-line procedure
MY HOME WEB
Customers purchase one BTicino
In addition to the remote control
credit, of limited duration and
of the home automation functions,
renewable, which they can use to
the user can also define and use a
manage their system remotely, and
range of exclusive and advanced
which amount varies depending on
functions that are specifically useful
the applications to control
for ensuring a customised use of the

service (see following table)
FuNZIONI
DESCRIPTION
WEB scenarios
Irrespective of the presence of scenario management devices inside the home, it is possible to define web scenarios that can also be enabled by sending SMS messages, or based on events.
Planning
Creation of action sequences that activate automatically at certain times or during certain days, and repeat following a plan.
Notifications and actions
Definition of the actions performed by MY HOME WEB and of the type of notifications forwarded following a system event (SMS notifications, e-mail, etc.).
Multiple users (houses)
Customisation of the portal for access to several systems (several homes)
Multiple users (users)
Customisation of the procedure for accessing the portal depending on user type.
Interface customisation
Creation of customised navigation menus, based on the needs of the user and the management device used (web browser, hand-held PC, etc.)
Event log
Display of the list of the events occurred within the system
500 MY HOME
Page for the display of the electric consumption

Page for the display of the images recorded by
the camera
ACCESS MODE USING MOBILE

DEVICES
In addition to web access, possible
using a PC with web browser
enable/disable the remote

assistance by the installer
Voice access
For this mode, a DTMF touch tone
connected to the internet, the
The list of the functions that can
keypad telephone must be used
customer can communicate with
be managed can be defined by
To establish voice access, the user
the Portal using other channels
accessing the web portal, Mobile
must call 199 240 022 An automatic
taking advantage of mobility, such as
Menu Customisation section
voice message will greet the
mobile phones and hand-held PCs
Access using SMS messages
customer, asking for the personal ID
The functions that can be performed
By sending SMS messages it is
code (telephone login followed by
with each mode of connection are
possible to activate a scenario
telephone password), followed by
the following:
(ordered sequence of actions to be
the * key
Mobile access
performed inside the home)
Once logged in, an automatic
Web Mobile access is possible
The creation of the scenarios and the
message will give the list of the menu
using the web browser (XHTML
association to the SMS message is
functions, and the keys to be pressed
compatible), of mobile devices such
performed during the Customer Area
for their selection After the function
mobile phones and hand-held PCs
customisation stage
has been selected, the voice will
After connecting to the www
By sending SMS messages it is also
explain the procedure for performing
myhome-bticino it website and
possible to know the status of the
the desired operations on the system
completing the authentication
devices
The voice access menu can be
procedure (login and password), it
customised by the customer during
will be possible to:
the Customer Area customisation
Manage the system functions
stage
(lights, automation, burglar-alarm,

temperature control, etc );
MY HOME 501
GEnErAL FEATUrES
System layout for the use of the MY HOME WEB services

CONTROL DEVICES
WEB SERVER FOR CONNECTION
ACTIVE WEB SERVER CONNECTION
In order to use the MY HOME WEB
TO THE INTERNET NETWORK
(WAC)
services, it will be necessary to install
With the F454 Web Server it is
In private networks, where the
a control device connected to the MY
possible to establish real time
system cannot be reached directly
HOME system
communication at any time, using
by the Internet (e g : Fastweb), or the
It is possible to choose between two
the MY HOME system of the home
router cannot be configured for using
categories of devices:
A necessary condition for ensuring
the My Home Web services, it will be
F454 Web Server for connection
the above is the availability of an
necessary to set the WAC connection
ADSL line with Flat 24h contract,
mode (Active Connection of the Web
dynamic or static IP, and the use of an
Server) in the configuration of the
3485 and 3486 burglar-alarm
ADSL modem router, appropriately
Web Server and the system on the
central unit, for connection using
configured using the parameters for
Portal
the PSTn telephone network
connection to the LAn network and
through the internet;
Telephone communicator of the
The two devices may be used at the
the Portal
same time to increase the flexibility

of the remote control of the whole
home by MY HOME WEB
TV/SAT
MY HOME portal
IPTV
Internet IP WAN: fixed or dynamic

(depending on the type of contract)
videocitofonia
controllo
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
tvcc
Web Server F454

IP: 192.168.1.35
NM: 255.255.255.0
www
irrigazione
IP_LAN: 192.168.1.1
NM: 255.255.255.0
LAN NETWORK
192.168.1.x
255.255.255.0
PC 01
502 MY HOME
PC 02
PC 03
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATOR
MY HOME portal
OF THE 3485 AND 3486 CENTRAL

UNIT FOR CONNECTION TO THE
PSTN NETWORK
Using the burglar-alarm central unit
with communicator, it is possible to
control all the MY HOME functions
with the exception of video door
entry system and video surveillance
system functions, which can only be
controlled using the F454 Web Server
Centrale antifurto 3486
Linea telefonica
TV/SAT
automazione
diffusione sonora
antifurto
termoregolazione
videocitofonia
controllo
IPTV
lan
controllo carichi
energia
luci
MY HOME 503
tvcc
GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB Creation and configuration

of the Customer Area
PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS
OPERATION FLOW
A fundamental requirement for the
After compiling, the Excel file can be
The operations to follow for the
creation of the customer area is the
imported in the YouProject program
configuration and activation of the
availability of the XML configuration
for the creation of the corresponding
Customer area consist of two stages:
file of the system, generated by the
system configuration file in XML
Operations to be performed using
project and configuration program
format
YouProject
For the creation of a Customer area,
In case of existing systems, or systems
it will be necessary for the installer
of the control devices in the MY
not designed using YouProjects, it
to have a personal Installer Area
HOME system
will still be possible to obtain the XML
enabled inside the MY HOME WEB
file by compiling the electric system
portal
booklet in Excel format, available
For details on the procedure
from the website www professionisti
refer to the Installer Area User
bticino it or in the CD attached to
Manual available from the www
this guide
professionisti bticino it website
the internet in the Installer Area;
operation for the configuration
The procedure can also be performed

by a Technical After Sale Service
(CAT)
First level
menu
Second
level menu
Installer user
name
Sidebar
Functional
pushbuttons
Operating area
504 MY HOME
MY HOME WEB Creation of the customer area:

operations to be performed in the Installer Area
1. System registration;
2. Loading of the XML file for the
Configuration of the TCP/IP CHANNEL
configuration of the system in the

System documents area;
3. Entering of the parameters of the
control devices (web server or burglaralarm central units) in the Devices
section, as explained below:
3.1 The use of the Web Server
shall be specified by entering the
following parameters:
OPEn password;
Type of connection: DYnAMIC IP

ADSL, STATIC IP ADSL or WAC
(Web Server Active Connection);
Configuration of the DTMF PSTN CHANNEL
Internal IP address associated

to the control device;
number of the port used for

sending the controls
number of the port used for

receiving
Password for camera images

3.2 The use of the burglar-alarm
central unit must be specified by
entering the telephone number
of the PSTn line or the OPEn
password
4. Saving of the page for the creation
Configuration of the parameters for Energy Management devices
of the GATEWAY ID data;

5. Enabling of the rEMOTE
MAnAGEMEnT function in the
Available functions section
The customer will receive an e- mail
containing the necessary link for
the creation of the contract This
document must be printed, signed,
and posted to BTicino, who will then
provide the safety keys (Login and
Password) for the use of the service
6. Configuration, if required, of
the Energy Management devices
installed in the system, by entering
the corresponding parameters in the
specific sections
Note: For the detailed list of the parameters to configure, refer to the documentation available from the www.
professionisti.bticino.it website.
MY HOME 505
GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB Creation of the customer area:

operations to be performed on the control devices
WEB SERVER F454
Configure the device using the
Ethernet page
TIF454 program, entering the

following data:
ETHERNET PAGE
The IP Address, Subnet Mask and
router IP fields are already filled
In this page it will be necessary to
enter the router IP as primary DnS
(normally 192 168 1 1), and the
DnS supplied by the ADSL internet
provider as the secondary DnS
Also specify the type of address (fixed
or DHCP), and set the UPnP IGD
function
MY HOME PORTAL PAGE
Gateway ID
MyHome portal page
Connection
parameters
In this page perform the following

operations:
1. Enable portal access
2. In the GATEWAY ID field enter
the GATEWAY ID code generated
automatically during the
configuration of the control device
3. Select the type of connection:
Fixed IP: In case of fixed IP ADSL

subscription (normally in case of
business customers)
Variable IP: in case of variable
Authentication page
IP ADSL subscription (the most

common one)
Web Server Active Connection

(W A C ): in case of private
networks, where the system
cannot be directly reached by the
Internet (e g Fastweb), or of nonconfigurable router
4. Check the default connection
parameters:
MY HOME WEB address:

portal myhomeweb it
MHWEB email:
mhe pro@myhomeweb it
SMTP Server address:

smtp myhomeweb it
506 MY HOME
AUTHENTICATION PAGE
In this page enter the user login and
Also specify the password of the
password, and the OPEn password
camera used for forwarding images
entered in the portal when entering

the system details
MODEM ROUTER
In addition to the settings for the
ADSL Modem
connection to the ADSL line and the

LAn nETWOrK of the home, this
device must also be correctly natted
following the table shown on the
side
IP_WaN PORT
IP LaN PORT
PROTOCOL
DESCRIPTION
443
443
Tcp
http server (SSL)
20000
20000
Tcp
Open server
Note: if the ports indicated are occupied for other
network devices (hardware and software), called
functions, it will be possible to select other ones
Firewalls, is not the responsibility of BTicino. In
using the configuration software of the Modem
case of intervention by a BTicino engineer, good
Router.
communication between the control device and
Warning: The maintenance and the configuration
the portal will be certified only using the products
of the devices of the LAN network, and the
included in the Catalogue.
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL
UNIT 3485 OR 3486
In order to enable the central unit for
use as control device for the portal,
OPEN password
Burglar-alarm central unit 3485 or 3486
it will be necessary to enter the

following data in the Portal Services
menu item of the configuration
program of the central units:
Jolly number: enter the telephone

number for the connection to the
portal (800 029 498)
System ID: enter the Gateway ID

number automatically generated
by the portal during the
Code: enter the OPEn password

entered in the portal during the
ID Gateway
MY HOME 507
GEnErAL FEATUrES
Open WEB nET language and MY OPEn Community

The previous pages describe how
The customisation of the
THE OPEN (OPEN PROTOCOL
the integration among the various
H/HW/Ln4890/A Touch Screen
FOR ELECTRICAL NETWORK)
functions of Comfort, Safety and
icons for hotel applications, or for
WEB NET LANGUAGE
Savings offered by MY HOME enables
use in public establishments and
For some years BTicino has decided
the user to take advantage of the
showrooms;
to make the Open Web net language
actual home automation benefits
The creation of interfaces for
available This is a high level protocol
In this context, more and more
the control of the light flow and
that can be used to control the
sought after are becoming the
the colour tone of rGB LED low
devices and exploit their potential
tools for ensuring communication
consumption lamps
based on the requirements of the
between the MY HOME system and
The above is only a part of the many
customers
other systems using modes other
possibilities of customising MY
The protocol has been designed
than the ones discussed until now in
HOME, and of integrating it with
to be independent from the
this guide
other systems and applications
communication support: it is
Some examples:
In order to enable field operators to
possible to control and monitor
The use of third party software
develop further solutions meeting
the MY HOME system through the
for the control of the MY HOME
more and more the needs of the
Ethernet network, through an rS232
functions using devices such as
customer, BTicino has decided to
serial connection, through a USB
I-PHOnE, I-PAD and Smartphone;
make the Open Web net language
connection, or through a Gateway
available through the My Open
directly connected to the system
The integration with MY HOME of

devices appropriately configured
Community
for the management of lights and

shutters by disabled people;
Web Server
MY HOME
system
Interface
devices with MY
HOME
508 MY HOME
MY OPEN COMMUNITY:
TOOLS AND DEVELOPMENT
Created in 2006 by BTicino, its a
TOOLS FOR OPEN WEB NET
virtual community that through the
APPLICATIONS
http://www myopenlegrandgroup
For the development of the
com website offers installers, software
applications using the Open Web net
By connecting this device with
developers, and system integrators
language, BTicino has created two
IP port and slave USB to a PC for
several services: upload and download
dedicated tools:
programming purposes, it will be
spaces, development and actual
3504SDK Startkit:
possible to create configuration
L4684SDK touch Screen:
application tools, newsletters and
Product designed for system
files with customised icons, to be
information on events
integrators and developers
used with touch screens Thanks
who want to get closer to MY
to the versatility of the Open
It is also a platform capable of
HOME, Starkit is a functioning
language, it will therefore be
providing information on the MY
miniaturised MY HOME system,
possible to manage, in addition
HOME system and the development
which includes 4 light points, 2
to MY HOME devices, also devices
products available, including any
shutters and 1 camera
from other brands performing
relevant support documentation, as
dierent functions
well as managing a forum, always

active and lively, that provides
continuous exchange of knowledge
and experiences in the Open Web
net language field
For more information visit

http://www.myopen-legrandgroup.com
MY HOME 509
Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Automation system

with the Temperature Control system
The Touch Screen is configured
The system includes a Local Display

and a Touch Screen.
using the software and is capable
The Local Display is configured for
of managing all the functions
the management of the temperature
present, and the scenarios saved in
control and is associated to the
the scenario module.
sensor (ZA = 0, ZB = 1)
ZA = ZB = 2
MOD = SLA
SLA = 1
A =1
PL = 1
F411/N
4695
A =1
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
F411/2
E46ADCN
ZA = ZB = 1
N1 = 1
ZB2 = OFF
N2 = -
F430/2
A =PL = 1
F420
18.0C
23.7C
1
1
2
2
13 : 38
Ven
07
Gen
2
2
F411/1N
2
2
F430/2
F411/2
F420
OK
C
C1
C1
C2
C1
C2
DEL
230 Vac
BUS SCS
H4652/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
HS4693
HS4891
H4890
ON
GEN
OFF
A1 = GEN
PL1 = M1 = O/I
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
510 MY HOME
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 =
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = A2 = 2
PL2 = 1
M2 = O/I
ZA = ZB = 1
MOD = SLA
SLA = 1
ZA = ZB = 1
MOD = 1
FUN = 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
F420
E46ADCN
F430/2
F415
F411/1N
F411/2
H4652/2
HS4891
H4890
H4693
H4695
Scenario module
Power supply
DIN actuator
Dimmer
2 relays DIN actuator
Control
Local Display
Touch Screen
Temperature control probe
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
Integration of the Video door entry system

with the Sound system
An H4651M2 special control
The integrated system includes:
configured for controlling the
Two Video Displays for the
amplifier with address A = 2 PF =1.
reception of entrance panel calls,

and for the management of the
Sound system functions.
346020
L4569
346020
346020
346020
HS4565
L4569
230 Vac
230 Vac
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
230 Vac
HS4565
N =1
P =-
F502
N =2
P =-
344163
POWER
POWER:
344163
100-240V
110-55mA
50-60Hz
LEFT
RIGHT
1Wrms
8
ON
230 Vac
SELV
1Wrms
8
OFF
ON/OFF POWER
H4562
A =1
PF = 1
A =2
PF = 1
H4651M2
ON
OFF
1-2
1-2
BUS
BUS
3499
ON
OFF
3499
A =2
PF = 1
SPE = 8
F441M
346000
230 Vac
391662
S =1
P =S =9
S =2
P =1
HS4560
F500N
MP3 reader
345140
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
F441M
F502
3499
L4569
345140
F500N
346000
Multichannel matrix
DIN amplifier
Line termination
Loudspeaker
DIN radio
Power supply
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
346020
H4651M2
HS4560
H4562
HS4565
344163
391662
Power supply
Control
RCA input
Video Display
Flush mounted camera
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
MY HOME 511
Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system

with the Automation and Temperature Control systems
The integrated system includes the
A Touch Screen configured for the
A Burglar-alarm central unit
following control and management
management of all the functions
configured for activating
devices:
present and the scenarios; it can
automations (switching on of
A Local Display, configured for the
also be used for enabling/disabling
lights) in case of an alarm event
management of the temperature
the Burglar-alarm system and
control, and associated to the
separate the protected zones.
sensor (ZA = 0, ZB = 1)
4072L
3485
E46ADCN
HS4607
HS4611
Z =1
N =1
MOD =
Z =0
N =1
230 Vac
F411/1N
E46ADCN
F411/2
18.0C
1
1
2
2
23.7C
2
2
F411/1N
13 : 38
C1
Ven
07
OK
2
2
C1
F430/2
C1
C2
C2
A =1
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
F422
F411/2
Gen
F420
F430/2
1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N1 = 1
ZB2 = OFF
N2 = -
OUT
F420
F422
DEL
C
A =0
PL = 1
IN
A =1
PL = 1
230 Vac
H4652/2
H4652/2
H4652/2
HS4693
HS4891
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 4
H4890
ON
GEN
OFF
A1 = GEN
PL1 = M1 = O/I
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
512 MY HOME
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 =
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
MOD = SLA
SLA = 1
ZA = ZB = 1
MOD = 1
FUN = 4
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
E46ADCN
E47ADCN
F422
F430/2
F411/1N
F411/2
H4652/2
F420
Power supply
Power supply
SCS/SCS interface
DIN actuator
Control
Scenario module
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
HS4891
H4890
HS4693
HS4611
HS4607
4072L
3485
Local display
Touch screen
Double-technology IR sensor
Transponder reader
Outdoor siren
Central unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with

the Video door entry system and the Sound system
A camera configured for use with
The integrated system includes the

following control and management
the Burglar-alarm IR sensor of zone
devices:
1 (Z = 1).
A Video Display for monitoring and
When an alarm condition occurs
controlling the home entrance and
within the zone, the camera
manage the Sound system; it can
activates and sends the images to
also be used to check the status
the Video display (N = 1), on which
of the Burglar-alarm system and
they can be displayed.
notify alarm events.
4072L
3485
E46ADCN
HS4607
HS4611
Z =1
N =1
MOD =
Z =0
N =1
230 Vac
BUS/SCS
346020
HS4565
344163
HS4565
N =1
P =0
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
P =0
S =9
H4562
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1-2
A =1
PF = 1
ON
F422
OFF
BUS
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 4
3499
F441
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
346000
OUT
035 62
N646
IN
OUT
IN
349140
SCS
230 Vac
P =1
Z =1
N =1
F500N
391662
S =1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
F422
F500N
F441
E46ADCN
346000
346020
H4562
HS4565
SCS/SCS interface
DIN radio
Audio/Video node
Power supply
Power supply
Power supply
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
HS4565
HS4611
HS4607
4072L
3485
344163
391662

Transponder reader
Outdoor siren
Central unit
Video Display
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
MY HOME 513
Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Automation system with the Video door

entry system (with Web server for remote control)
For the control and management of
A Video Display with icon menu.
the functions, the following modes
The Multimedia Touch Screen
and devices are used:
device, which operates as a video
A Personal Computer with
door entry system handset and a
MHVISUAL software for the full
device for the control of the whole
control of all the home functions.
system using the icon menu.
230 Vac
344163
A Local Display configured for the

management of the Sound system
amplifier with address A=1 PF=1.
HS4565
HS4565
N =1
P =0
346020
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ON
OFF
F441
H4562
A =1
PF = 1
F422
346000
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT
OUT4
F422
OUT
IN
IN
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD =
SCS
230 Vac
P =0
S =9
F500N
P =1
Z =1
N =1
S =1
391662
349140
514 MY HOME
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
F420
E46ADCN
F422
F430/2
F414
F411/1N
F411/2
F500N
F454
F441
349140
Scenario module
Power supply
SCS/SCS interface
DIN actuator
DIN dimmer
DIN radio
Web Server
Audio/Video node
1
346000
1
346020
1
H4652/2
1
HS4891
1
HS4690
1
H4562
1
HS4565
1
HS4692
1
344163
1 391662
1

ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Quantity
Power supply
Power supply
Control
Local display
Temperature probe
Video Display
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Crossover Ethernet cable
N =2
F454
ETHERNET
SCS AI
SCS AV
F411/1N
1
1
2
2
F411/2
23.7C
C1
13 : 38
Ven
07
2
2
C1
F430/2
C1
C2
C2
A =1
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
Gen
F420
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
N1 = 1
ZB2 = OFF
N2 = -
F420
DEL
A =0
PL = 1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
MOD = 0
A =1
PL = 1
H4652/2
230 Vac
H4652/2
HS4692
HS4891
A =1
PF = 1
MOD =
FUN = 8
ON
+1
+3
+2
GEN
-2
-1
-3
OFF
OFF
A1 = GEN
PL1 = M1 = O/I
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 =
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
E46ADCN
F411/2
OK
F430/2
1
18.0C
F411/1N
H4652/2
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
MOD = 0
230 Vac
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1-2
S =1
HS4690
MY HOME 515
WIrInG DIAGrAMS
Total integration of the MY HOME systems

with remote function control
The control of the MY HOME
If the system includes a modem
functions is performed with the
router, the program may also
following devices:
be used to manage the remote
A Web Server for the local control
control through the internet
of the system, using a Personal
A Local Display to recall all
Computer with MHVISUAL
scenarios saved in the F420
software
scenario module
L4569
HS4565
L4569
HS4565
230 Vac
H4562
A =1
PF = 1
ON
230 Vac
230 Vac
344163
OFF
A =2
PF = 1
344163
346020
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
POWER
POWER:
A =2
PF = 1
SPE = 8
100-240V
110-55mA
50-60Hz
ON
OFF
ON/OFF POWER
ON
346020
349140
OFF
N =2
P =0
to HS4690
F441M
346000
P =0
S =9
230 Vac
391662
P =1
Z =1
N =1
516 MY HOME
from HS4690
F500N
391670
MP3
HS4560
S =2
P =2
Z =1
N =2
S =1
+
RIGHT
1Wrms
8
H4651M2
N =1
P =0
SELV
+
LEFT
1Wrms
8
PC with MHVISUAL
software
Modem Router/Switch
ADSL line with fixed IP
Direct Ethernet cable

F454
ETHERNET
SCS AI
N =4
SCS AV
F422
1
F411/2
2
2
18.0
F411/1N
13 : 38
Ven
07
C1
H4652
F430/2
C2
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
N1 = 1
ZB2 = OFF
N2 = -
H4652
HS4692
H4652
next >>
ZA =
ZB = 1
MOD = 1
FUN = 1
+3
+2
OFF
-2
HS4891
ON
OFF
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
M1 =
A2 = PL2 = M2 = -
F420
DEL
A =0
PL = 1 230 Vac
GEN
A1 = GEN
PL1 = M1 = O/I
A2 = GEN
PL2 = M2 = -
E46ADCN
A =1
PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2
Gen
ZA = 0
ZB = 2
MOD = 0
A =1
PL = 1
C1
C2
OK
F411/2
23.7C
C1
F420
F430/2
1
-3
IN
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD =
+1
F422
F411/1N
1
-1
OUT
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
MOD = 0
A1 = 1
PL1 = 1
M1 = A2 = 2
PL2 = 1
M2 = O/I
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QuaNTITy
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QuaNTITy
F420
E46ADCN
F422
F430/2
F441M
F502
3499
F414
F411/1N
F411/2
HS4565
F500
F454
Scenario module
Power supply
SCS/SCS interface
DIN actuator
Multichannel matrix
DIN amplifier
Line terminator
DIN dimmer
Loudspeaker
DIN radio
Web Server
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
346000
346020
H4652/2
H4651M2
HS4891
HS4650
H4562
L4569
HS4692
344163
391662
391670
Power supply
Power supply
Control
Special control
Local display
RCA input
Loudspeaker
Video Display
Outdoor camera
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
MY HOME 517
WIrInG DIAGrAMS
Total integration of the MY HOME systems

with remote function control
230 Vac
HS4690
N =3
346020
from F441M (BUS)

to F441M (SCS Audio OUT)
PRI: 220 240 V~

175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A
B
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
4072A
3485
E47ADCN
HS4070
N = 0
MOD = 1
OUT
F422
F422
OUT
IN
F422
IN
I1 =
I2 =
I3 =
I4 = 1
MOD = 4
HS4607
Z =0
N =1
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QuaNTITy
F422
E47ADCN
346020
HS4690
HS4611
HS4607
3480
HS4070
3485
4072A
SCS/SCS interface
Power supply
Power supply
Transponder reader
Contact interface
Indoor siren
Central unit
Outdoor siren
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
518 MY HOME
HS4611
Z =1
N =1
MOD =
3480
Z =2
N =1
MOD =
CONTENTS
MY HOME Software and services

MY HOME 519
General features
YouProject preparing estimates and designing MY HOME

home automation systems
YouProject includes all MY HOME home automation applications (light and automatic movement),
temperature control, energy management, burglar-alarm, technical alarms, sound system, video
door entry system, lighting management, hotel management and local & remote control, which may
be selected by the customer and integrated at their discretion.
It represents a valid tool that can help
the installer or the designer to design
the system correctly The software
Physical/logic extension system

management;
Drag & Drop inclusion of standard
Automatic creation of a full dynamic

set of documentation for the type of
system designed
automatically performs all the functions
home automated rooms or creation/
The documentation includes:
(layout of devices, size and electric
modication of customised rooms;
General description and advantages
calculation, allocation of addresses,
Inclusion/creation/change of
of the MY HOME system;
composition of tables) that are specific
cabinets/distribution boards/ush
to the home automation system The
mounted boxes and junction boxes,
individual functions of the actual
user can also change or customise the
device packets for traditional or
design;
design of the system during all stages
home automation systems, loads and
Bill of quantities items;
of the project
advanced devices;
System conguration and
By using the standard rooms, which
Automatic calculation of the home
Detailed description of the
absorption levels check;
include many different types, fitted
automation implementation
with all home automation devices,
devices, with analysis of the space
irrespective of their actual sizes, and
requirements for DIN devices and
always customisable, it is therefore
of the thermal dissipation inside
connection between control and
possible to quickly produce a system
enclosures;
load);
cost analysis, which will include all the

documentation needed for providing
the necessary indications for preparing
Automatic calculation of the

conguration;
Check of absorption levels for all
estimates and compete in tenders
devices connected to the bus they
The same basis for preparing the
belong to;
estimates used for creating the project

becomes the starting point for the
optimisation of the job, to customise
and complete it, and to create a
standard design on which to work on
The main functions are:
Creation of a system for stand-alone
or integrated management of all the
MY HOME applications;
Creation and check of the system
levels, according to CEI 64-8
standard;
520 MY HOME
Example of a project of a burglar-alarm system
Wired connection (between actuator

and load);
Conguration references (e g
Detailed list of the materials

needed for the installation and
corresponding costs;
By simply dragging the objects (boxes,
obtain one single list of materials to
required for the conguration,
light points, etc ) of the project on the
be purchased It is also possible to
programming and putting into
plan, it is possible to create an executive
generate an XML configuration file,
service of the designed system;
project of the system, including home
which can then be used to define the
automation symbols, configuration
pages for the control of the system
legends, box identification details with
using the MY HOME WEB portal,
corresponding installation heights, one-
the MHVisual software, the Touch
quantities, list of materials, labels,
wire diagram and all that is necessary for
Screen control devices and for the
and project tree view
an immediate and clear reading of the
configuration of the devices using the
YouProject can be opened directly
project
Virtual Configuration software
in AutoCAD (FULL version) or using
The file created with YouProject
the SPAC software distributed by
( mhp) does NOT need exporting
SDProject
in SDF format, and can be directly
Estimate of the working hours
PDF or RTF (Word) printing of the

documentation created;
Export in Excel format of: bill of
opened using the TiPre software, to
Example of documentation
obtained using YouProject
To obtain the software go to the area Servizio TecnicoSoftware e Schemari (Technical Service Software and Diagrams) of the
www.professionisti.bticino.com website.
MY HOME 521
ne
GENERAL FEATURES
Virtual Configurator
Software for the configuration of the Automation and Temperature Control systems using a PC
To simplify the configuration
The configuration is then transferred
In alternative to the configuration kit,
of the AUTOMATION and
to the relevant device using a
one of the following Gateway devices
TEMPERATURE CONTROL systems,
wireless Wi-Fi connection or
can also be used:
BTicino recommends the use of
through an Ethernet connection,
MH200N
the virtual configuration mode
between the PC and an appropriate
F454
The configuration parameters
3503 configuration kit, connected
are no longer manually set using
to the bus of the Automation or
configurators, but using a special
Temperature Control system
program called Virtual Configurator,
Example of screen for the definition of the

Automation system devices
installed on a PC
PC with VIRTUAL
CONFIGURATOR program
Ethernet cable
Kit 3503
BUS
connector
TV/SAT
IPTV
TV/SAT
BUS
diffusione sonora
Shutters
automazione
antifurto
Temperature
control
diffusione
sonora
termoregolazione
antifurto
videocitofonia
termoregolazione
controllo
videocitofonia
lan
controllo
controllo
carichi
IPTV
lan
energia
controlloluci
carichi
Power supply
connector
energia
tvcc
522 MY HOME
luci
www
YouDiagram
Design and configuration of digital 2 wire and 8 wire Door entry- Video door entry-Telephone
systems, Sound system, and CCTV systems
You Diagram is the BTicino software
In just a few minutes, it will be
It is also possible to manage:
for the design of one-family and
possible to create door entry,
Sound systems;
multifamily door entry-video door
video door entry, and integrated
Single channel sound systems
entry-telephone systems created
communication systems using the
integrated with video door entry
using the entire digital 2 wire / 8 wire
product solution that is most suited
systems;
and CCTV catalogue range It enables
to your needs
Multi channel sound systems
to produce the system diagram,
integrated with video door entry
the selection / dressing of entrance
systems;
CCTV
panels, handsets and cameras, the

configuration of the devices, and the
check of the absorption levels for
each system BUS
Example of a video door entry system design
MY HOME 523
GENERAL FEATURES
BTicino responds
BTicino is always attentive to customers needs and offers a range of services to facilitate and simplify
all the installation stages.
Design support
Do you need catalogues, guides, and
Do you need an estimate and
commercial information?
technical information?
Call this toll free number:
Call this toll free number:
Numero Verde
Numero Verde
800-837035
800-293000
The service is only intended for

professional
* All numbers are active from 8 30 a m to 18 30 p m Monday to Friday, and 8 30 a m to 12 30 p m on Saturday
524 MY HOME
System start up support
Technical After Sale Service (CAT):
Or visit the TECHNICAL SERVICE
BTicino offers a system technical after
(SERVIZIO TECNICO) area of the
sales service through authorised CAT.
www professionisti bticino it website
For more information on this service

both during and after the warranty
period, the costs (for services not
covered by warranty), and the details
of the closest CAT, call this tool free
number:
Numero Verde
800-837035
* All numbers are active from 8 30 a m to 18 30 p m Monday to Friday, and 8 30 a m to 12 30 p m on Saturday
MY HOME 525
526 MY HOME Catalogue
CONTENTS
Radio system catalogue
Catalogue MY HOME 527
RADIO SYSTEM CATALOGUE
MY HOME - RADIO ZigBee
AXOLUTE - Automation and technical alarms
HB4596
Item
HA4596
HB4596
HA4597
HB4597
HA4598
HB4598
HA4599
HB4599
HA4589
HB4589
H4586
H4587
H4588
HA4599
H4586
RADIO CONTROL FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION

control to be completed with one 1 module key cover
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the ON/OFF control of 1
group of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery,
supplied.
control to be completed with two 1 module key covers
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the ON/OFF control of 2
groups of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery,
supplied.
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD) for the
control of 1 group of DIMMER actuators - powered by
3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
Item
HD4578
HC4578
HS4578
Item
H4590
SHUTTER CONTROL RF
(item HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915) for the
control of 1 group of actuators for the management
of motorised rolling shutters - powered by 3 V CR2032
battery, supplied.
H4591
H4592
4 SCENES CONTROL RF
(item HC/HD/HS4911) for the management of 4
scenarios- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
Item
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS

technical alarm transmitter. It can be used to
transmit to the radio automation system a danger
signal generated by a gas, smoke, or water detector
connected to its terminals. 12 Vac/dc power supply
using transformer item HC/HD/HS4541 2 flush mounted modules
device to be used in conjunction with the radio
transmitter item H4586 for the control of solenoid
valves and danger optical/light signalling devices (gas,
water, smoke leaks). To be completed with 2 key covers
item HC/HD/HS4911. 100 to 240 Vac power supply
2 flush mounted modules
ADAPTER FOR BACK BOXES
adapter for flush mounted boxes. It gives the possibility
of installing surface mounted radio controls inside flush
mounted boxes
H4593
H4594
H4595
HC4578
GATEWAY SCS / ZIGBEE

SCS/Zigbee gateway for integration with the radio
system of MY HOME control devices and/or system
actuators, BUS Automation - 27 Vdc power supply from
the BUS - 2 flush mounted modules.
ON/OFF RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND
GENERIC LOADS
actuator to be completed with 1 module key cover
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of lamps and
generic loads with 300 W max. power
- power supply 100-240 Vac
- connection to the load without neutral conductor
- status indication LED - 2 flush mounted modules
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of lamps and
- power supply 100 -240 Vac - status indication LED
- 2 flush mounted modules
actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of 2 groups of
lamps and generic loads with 1000 W max. power
- power supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED
DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION
(item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN ) for the
control of lamps and generic loads with 400 Wmax.
power - power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the
load without neutral conductor - status indication LED
- 2 flush mounted modules.
actuator for 0-10 V Ballast with 1000 W max.

powerto be completed with 2 1 module key covers
(item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN) - power
supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED - 2 flush
mounted modules.
SHUTTER SWITCH RF WITH PRESET FUNCTION
(item HC/HD/HS4911AD + HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the
control of rolling shutters - possibility of storing the
position of the rolling shutters - power supply 100-240 Vac
KEY COVER SELECTION SUMMARY TABLE
Mechanism code
Key cover code
Mechanism code
Key cover code
H4590
HC/HD/HS4915BA
H4595
HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915
H4591
HC/HD/HS4915BA
HA4589, HB4589
2 x HC/HD/HS4911
H4592
2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA
HA4596, HB4596
HC/HD/HS4915BA
H4593
HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD
HA4597, HB4597
2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA
H4594
HA4598, HB4598
HA4599, HB4599
HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Anthracite colour device
Neutral item
LIVINGLIGHT - Automation and technical alarms
L4596N
N4599N
RADIO CONTROL FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION

control to be completed with one 1 module key cover
(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the ON/OFF control of 1 group
of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied.
Item
N4596N
L4596N

(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the ON/OFF control of 2
groups of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery,
supplied
(item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN) for the control
of 1 group of DIMMER actuators - powered by 3 V
CR2032 battery, supplied.
N4597N
L4597N
N4598N
L4598N
SHUTTER CONTROL RF
(item L/N/NT4911AHN + L/NT4915AN or N4915LN)
for the control of 1 group of actuators for the
managementof motorised rolling shutters - powered by
3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
N4599N
L4599N
LN4586
NT4578N
Item
GATEWAY SCS / ZIGBEE

SCS/Zigbee gateway for integration with the radio system
of MY HOME control devices and/or system actuators, BUS
Automation - 27 Vdc power supply from the BUS - flush
mounted modules - 2 flush mounted modules
N4578N
NT4578N
L4578N
Item
LN4590
LN4591
LN4592
4 SCENES CONTROL RF
(item L/N/NT4911N) for the management of 4 scenarios
- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
N4589N
L4589N
Item
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
technical alarm transmitter. It can be used to
transmit to the radio automation system a danger
signal generated by a gas, smoke, or water detector
connected to its terminals. 12 Vac/dc power supply
using transformer item L/N/N/T4541 - supplied key
covers - 2 flush mounted modules
device to be used in conjunction with the radio
transmitter item LN4586, for the control of solenoid
valves and danger optical/light signalling devices
(gas, water, smoke leaks).
To be completed with 2 L/N/NT4911N keycovers.
100 to 240 Vac power supply - 2 flush mounted modules
LN4586
LN4587
ADAPTER FOR BACK BOXES

adapter for flush mounted boxes. It gives the possibility
of installing surface mounted radio controls inside flush
mounted boxes.
LN4588
LN4593
LN4594
LN4595

GENERIC LOADS
(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of lamps and
-power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the load
without neutral conductor - status indication LED
(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of lamps and
- power supply 100 -240 Vac - status indication LED
(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of 2 groups of
DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION
(item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN )for the control
of lamps and generic loads with 400 W max. power
- power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the load
without neutral conductor - status indication LED
actuator for 0-10 V Ballast with 1000 W max. power to
be completed with 2 1 module key covers
(item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN)
SHUTTER SWITCH RF WITH PRESET FUNCTION

(item L/N/NT4911AHN + L/NT4915AN or N4915LN)
for the control of motorised rolling shutters - possibility
of storing the position of the rolling shutters - power
supply 100-240 Vac - 2 flush mounted modules
Mechanism code
Key cover code
Mechanism code
Key cover code
LN4590
L/N/NT4915AN
LN4595
LN4591
L/N/NT4915AN
LN4592
L/N/NT4915AN+L/N/NT4915AN
N4589N, L4589N
L/N/NT4911AHN+ L/NT4915N o
N4915LN
L/N/NT4911N+L/N/NT4911N
LN4593
L/N/NT4915AN+ L/N/NT4911ADN
N4596N, L4596N
L/N/NT4915AN
LN4594
N4597N, L4597N
L/N/NT4915AN+L/N/NT4915AN
N4598N, L4598N
N4599N, L4599N
L/N/NT4911AHN+ L/N/NT4915N o
N4915LN
Items with code L.. require round cover plates, those with code N.. required square cover plates.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
RADIO SYSTEM CATALOGUE
MY HOME - RADIO ZigBee
Devices suitable for both the AXOLUTE and the LIVINGLIGHT series
3579
3579
3527N
3527N
3577
3578
3575
WIRELESS MOVEMENT DETECTOR RF ZIGBEE SURFACE MOUNTING

control fitted with infrared movement sensor that
enables creating scenarios (enabling of several
actuators) for when a people move inside the area
covered by an IR sensor. Sensor coverage 11 m,
3-60 min. adjustable time delay - wall mounted
installation- powered by two 1.5 V AA batteries
RADIO REMOTE CONTROLS
radio remote control with 5 pushbuttons for the
control of scenarios - powered by two 1.5 V LR03
batteries, supplied
remote control as above - with 4 pushbuttons
- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
3528N
Item
3571
OPEN WEB NET / ZIGBEE GATEWAY

control interface with 2 independent contacts for
the control of 2 light actuator groups, or one group
of rolling shutter actuators. The device also gives
thepossibility of creating a scenario generated by
devices such as, for example, twilight switches or
humidity detectors, connected to the corresponding
contacts. Basic modularity for flush mounted box
installation
Open/ZigBee gateway for central control of the
functions using Open Web Net communication
protocol devices
Item
3571
3575
Item
3572

GENERIC LOADS
false ceiling mounted actuator for the control of
mobile socket with German standard plug and socket
for the control of lamps and generic loads with 10 A
max. absorption - power supply 100-240 Vac
DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND

GENERIC LOADS
false ceiling mounted actuator for the control of
3573
false ceiling mounted actuator for 0-10 V Ballast

control with 1000 W max. power - power supply
100-240 Vac
3574
mobile socket with German standard plug and socket

for the control of lamps and generic loads max. 500 W
Item
3576
Item
3581
3576
INDIVIDUAL ROLLER BLIND CONTROLLER RF ZIGBEE FOR

MOUNTING IN TECHNICAL COMPARTMENT
500 VA rolling shutter actuator for
installation inside the rolling shutter box
- power supply 100 - 240 Vac
WIRELESS TEMPERATURE SENSOR RF ZIGBEE SURFACE
MOUNTING
radio temperature probe for indoor use with measurement range
between (-10) - (+ 40) C. The device provides activation of 2 separate
scenarios that initiate when the room temperature falls below
(scenario 1) or exceeds (scenario 2) the 2 temperature thresholds set
in the device itself
CONTENTS
AXOLUTE catalogue
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Integration and control
HD4690
Item
HD4891
HC4891
HS4891
H4890
HW4890
3496
H4687
MHVISUAL
H4890
LOCAL DISPLAY
1.2 OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous
management of max. 4 functions: Sound System,
Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load
management, Scenarios - 2 modules it replaces item HC/HS/HD4685
TOUCH SCREEN
3.5 colour Touch Screen for the management of the
following functions: Automation, Lighting, Burglar
Alarm, Temperature Control, Sound System, Scenarios,
22C
Load Management and Consumption Display.
USB front connector for configuration.
Device preset for programming with Open Web Net
protocol language- it replaces item H4684
Touch Screen as above - AXOLUTE ETRIS series
monobloc - can be installed only in boxes 528W (wall)
22C
and PB528W (false ceiling). It replaces item HW4684
TOUCH SCREEN IP ADAPTER

accessory to be used with TOUCH SCREEN - it can be
used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, on the
server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio),
through the loudspeakers of the Sound system - to be
installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units
VIDEO TOUCH SCREEN
flush mounted panel PC with 15 Touch Screen display
for the control of the MY HOME system using the
MHVisual software
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
control and management software of the lighting
functions, Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature
control, Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management
and Video surveillance system
F422
Item
HD4690
HC4690
HS4690
HA4690XC
F429
HD4891

multimedia Touch Screen with 10 16/9 LCD screen for:
- MY HOME system control
- video door entry system functions and video
monitoring systems
- management of multimedia contents on external
sources (USB and SDCard), on the LAN network or IP
(IP radio, RCS, Webcam)
Wall mounted installation. Presetting with cable
collection 506E flush mounted box. To be complete
with the appropriate surround plate
SURROUND PLATE FOR MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN
surround plate - finished aluminium
HA4690VBB
surround plate - white
HA4690LTK
surround plate - teak wood
HA4690VNB
surround plate - Nighter
HA4690VSW
surround plate - Whice
F422
SCS-SCS INTERFACE
interface between SCS BUS based systems, dedicated
to different functions - 2 lowered DIN modules
F426
INTERFACE FOR DIFFERENT SYSTEMS

SCS/EIB interface - for the control of EIB systems in
MY HOME applications - 2 DIN modules
F429
SCS/DALI INTERFACE
DALI dimmer, 8 independent outputs with 230 Vac
16 ballasts maximum load, direct load control device,
6 DIN modules
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by

iPad devices thanks to BTicino MY HOME, the ocial
BTicino application which can be downloaded from
iTunes, in the Free version as well.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the development of integration applications.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

MH200N
3486
F461/2
SCENARIO MODULE
device enabling to save 16 scenarios for Automation,
Sound system, Temperature control and Video door
entry applications - 2 DIN modules
Item
F420
SCENARIO PROGRAMMER
device for the execution of scenarios programmed
using TiMH200N. The scenario may be combined with
times and dates, manual activations, events managed
through AUX channels, or generated by the
automation, temperature control and burglar-alarm
systems. The device can operate as a gateway for
the use of the MHVisual and Virtual Configurator
software. 6 DIN modules
compact power supply for MH200N scenario
programmer - 2 DIN modules
MH200N
346020
WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO

audio/video web server for the remote control of the
system using web pages or the MY HOME portal.
The device can operate as a gateway for the use of the
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software 6 DIN modules. It replaces item F453 and F453AV.
F454
C9451
Item
F461/2
F462
F454
PSTN TELEPHONE ACTUATOR

telephone actuator, 2 independent relays, with
exchange contact, power supply 230 Vac 3 DIN modules
GSM TELEPHONE ACTUATOR

GSM telephone actuator for the enabling/disabling
of loads via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino
timer thermostats, item L/N/NT4450, and the
possibility of managing 2 alarm inputs
- 4 DIN modules
SWITCH
F551
C9451
10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of

1 LAN line to 4 lines. Possibility of adding several
switches for arranging several lines Power supply
using item F552 power supply unit 4 DIN modules
reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with 9
RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
10/100Mbit/s operating speed. Possibility of
connecting up to 8 PCs - 12 Vdc with power supply
included
CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE DIALLING DEVICE

POLYX ALARM central unit with system self-learning
function, and display of the configuration on the
screen. Controlled using the transponder and the
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas.
Possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted with
PSTN telephone dialling device for alarm forwarding.
Programmed using the TiSecurity POLYX application.
Wall mounted using the metal bracket supplied as
standard. Battery powered, using battery item 3506,
supplied as standard
central unit with system self-learning function, and
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled
using IR remote control, the transponder and the
PSTN telephone dialling device and integrated GSM
for alarm forwarding. Programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the
metal bracket supplied as standard or flush-mounted
in MULTIBOX boxes. Power supply with battery item
3507/6.
3485*
3486*
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the development of integration applications.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
(*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.

Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME
Automation
H4651M2
Item
H4651M2
H4652/2
H4652/3
H4652/2
H4652/3
HD4653M2
CONTROL FOR SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

special control allows to control an actuator by
executing all standard functions plus several special
functions: activation of 4 scenarios saved in the F420
module, timing operations, activation of an actuator
installed on a different bus, selection of the dimmer
setting fixed level and soft-start & soft-stop speed,
sound system, lock switching-on control, call to the
floor and staircase light switching-on control,
management of auxiliary channels. To be integrated
with 1 or 2-module, one or two-function key covers
- 2 modules
CONTROL FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS

control which can operate a single actuator for single
or double loads or two actuators for single loads or
independent double loads to be completed with one
2-module key cover for controls with one or
two functions or two 1-module key covers
with one or two functions - 2 modules
control which can operate three actuators for single
loads or independent double loads to be completed
with three 1-module key covers for controls with one
or two functions- 3 modules
Digital glass control installation
Box
503E
Support
H4703
504E
H4704
Control
HD4657M3
HC4657M3
HS4657M3
HD4657M4
HC4657M4
HS4657M4
Item
HD4653M2
HC4653/2
HS4653/2
HD4653M3
HC4653/3
HS4653/3
HD4653M3
HD4657M3
SOFT TOUCH CONTROLS

touch control for the activation and/or adjustment of
one single actuator, or of a scenario saved in the
scenario module, item F420 adjustable LED intensity
2 modules
touch control for the activation and/or adjustment of
one single actuator, or of a scenario saved in the
scenario module, item F420 adjustable LED intensity
3 modules
DIGITAL GLASS CONTROLS

MY HOME control for the control of single loads or load groups
(e.g. lights and shutters), sound system, basic audio door
entry functions (e.g. gate opening). The configuration can be
completed in two separate ways: physical (connecting the physical
configurators to their sockets), or virtual (the control can be
configured remotely). It is fitted with capacitive touch keys that
can be identified using adjustable intensity LEDs.
WHITE GLASS
HD4657M3
6 key control 3 module size
HD4657M4
WHICE
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
NIGHTER
HS4657M3
HS4657M4
Box
Support
NOTE: for white glass controls, contact your local BTicino commercial representative for
availability.
Control
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
HD4563
HS4563
HD4680
HS4680
KNOB CONTROL
knob control for advanced dimmer adjustment (level
from 1 to 99%, soft-start switch on, etc.). Central
ON/OFF pushbutton. - 2 modules
Item
HD4563
HC4563
HS4563
HC4607
Item
3477
HD4680
HC4680
HS4680
SCENARIO CONTROL
scenario control that can be customized for the control
of up to 4 room set-ups of independent Automation
Temperature control and Sound system saved in the
scenario module, item F420 - 2 modules
F428
F420
SCENARIO MODULE
Sound system, Temperature control and video door
F425
HC4607/4
3530S
3540
CONTACT INTERFACE
basic module control interface with 2
independent contacts for the control of 2
actuators for single function loads, or 1 actuator
for double function loads (shutters) the
inputs accepts two traditional switches or
pushbuttons with NO and NC contact, or a
traditional two-way switch, or interlocked
pushbuttons
as above - 2 DIN modules
MEMORY MODULE
module used for saving the status of the actuators to reset the light automation system in case of power
cut 2 lowered DIN modules
CODE PROTECTED CONTROLS

device that allows to save up to 30 transponders
(badges) for the execution of protected controls 2 modules
HD4607
HC4607
HS4607
transponder protected scenario control - it enables

saving up to 30 transponders (badges) for the control
of 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
HD4607Z4
HC4607/4
HS4607/4
TRANSPONDER
portable badge - when moved close to the transponder
reader, it causes its activation, enabling the signal
generated to be transferred to the BUS it does not
require batteries it can be automatically coded using
the transponder reader
as above - key-holder
3530S
tran
HIG
3540
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
TY
Warning:
only controls with production batch no. from 03W18 can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-ring). Older readers are only suitable for use with item 3530 (badge).
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
HD4654
Item
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
3529
HC4654
HS4654
3529
ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS

remote control receiver for remote control item 3529
- up to 16 activations or scenarios saved in the scenario
module, item F420 and scenario programmer item
MH200N - 2 modules
IR REMOTE CONTROL
device for the control of receivers (up to 16
receivers within the same room) - possibility of
direct selection of up to 16 channels - powered
by four 1.5 V AAA batteries
HS4658
Item
HD4658
HC4658
HS4658
HD4659
HC4659
HS4659
HS4659
GREEN SWITCH AND PIR SENSOR

Green Switch: integrated control with movement
sensor, using a combination of passive infrared rays
and ultrasounds, and brightness sensor. Manual
switching on of the light using the front pushbutton,
and automatic switching off based on brightness level
and movement. Switch off delay and brightness sensor
threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001) remote control, physical
or virtual configuration. 2 modules
passive infrared sensor for the detection of movement
and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m wide by 180 and
9 m field depth at an installation height of 1.2 m.
Switch off delay and brightness sensor threshold
adjustable using the one/two-way (BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001) remote control, physical or virtual
configuration. 2 modules
Management of lighting level depending on the presence

of people and the level of natural light:
this means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a
big contribution to energy savings. In the service sector,
savings of 55% to 75% are possible.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
UP TO
55%
SAVINGS
in compliance with
EN15193 standard
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
BMSE1001
Item
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2001
BMSE2005
LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS
passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
movement and light intensity, ceiling mounted
installation, protection index IP20, screw connection,
6 m (28 m2) diameter coverage when installed
at a 2.5 m height, maximum installation height
4 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption
10 mA, virtual or physical configuration adjustment
movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30,12 m (24 m2)
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical
or virtual configuration
connection, coverage 11 m wide by 90, 14 m (120 m2)
remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical
connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30, 9+9 m (36 m2)
BMSE2004
double technology passive infrared and ultrasound
BMSE2005
BUS sensor, for the detection of movement and light
intensity, wall or ceiling mounted installation,
protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 connection,
coverage 14 m wide by 180,7 m (77 m2) field depth
when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation
height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption
12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way remote control
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or virtual
configuration
NOTE: for more information on remote controls BMSO4003 and BMSO4001 refer to the
Lighting Management Catalogue
Item
BMSE2003
SENSOR QUICK SELECTION TABLE

Type of installation
Operation
Type of
operation
Type of sensor
Power supply
Absorption
IP protection index
Coverage at 2.5 m
Angle (vertical/horizontal)
Max. installation height (m)
Sensitivity (lux)
Switch off time delay
Operating temperature
Factory settings
Adjustment with Remote Control
Adjustment using the PC
Type of connection
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
ceiling
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
10 mA
IP20
6 m (28 m2)
90/360
4
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
No
No
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
IP42
2 x 12 m (24 m2)
90/30
6
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
300 lux - 15 minutes
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
BMSE2002
wall/ceiling
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
wall/ceiling
wall/ceiling
ON-OFF, dimmer, movement detection, lighting level
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
PIR
PIR
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
IP42
IP42
IP42
2
2
11 x 14 m (120 m )
2 x 9+9 m (36 m )
10 x 27 m (210 m2)
60/90
90/30
60/140
6
6
6
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
0 sec. 255 hours
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
BMSE2005
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR+US
27 Vdc from BUS
17 mA
IP42
14 x 7 m (77 m2)
60/180
6
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
H4671M2
H4678
3475
ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/DIMMERS

actuator with 2 independent relays - for single, double,
and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament lamps,
500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent
lamps - logic relay interlock via the configuration. The
device may also be configured to manage a remote
actuator 2 modules
1 relay actuator with control-key - for single load: 6 A
resistive or filament lamps, 2 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W fluorescent
lamps - to be completed with single or double function
2 module key cover
dimmer actuator for filament lamps and ferromagnetic
transformers - 60 - 300 VA, 230 Vac - to be completed
with single or double function 2 module key cover 2 modules
Item
H4671M2
H4671/1
H4678
Example of use of actuator item H4671M2 in the actuator and

remote control mode. Press the left key cover to control the
actuator to manage a lamp connected to the device. The right key
cover controls one or more remote actuators for dierent functions
(management of lights, shutters or scenarios).
Flush mounted actuators
BASIC MODULE ACT UATORS

1 relay actuator - for single loads: 2 A resistive or
incandescence lamps and 2 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers suitable for
installation in ceiling light cups or inside flushmounted boxes, behind control devices
ferromagnetic transformers input suitable for a
traditional NO contact pushbutton
3475
3476
Control key cover
for remote actuator

management
Actuator key
cover for
light management
LOADS WHICH CAN BE DRIVEN (230 VAC 50/60 HZ)

Actuators
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
LED lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
Compact fluorescent
lamps
Electronic transformers
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
H4671M2
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
H4671/1
6A
1380 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
H4678
0.25 - 1.30 A
60 - 300 W
0.25 - 1.30 A
60 - 300 VA
3475
3476
2A
460 W
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
Notes:
1) power factor corrected fluorescent lamps, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) in order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer to a 100
VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA. The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be
preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers in parallel. For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using
5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50 W spotlight each.
3) the
symbol shown on the actuators refers to the shutter motor reducers.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F411/1N
F411/2
F411/1NC
F411/4
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
ACTUATORS FOR CENTRALISATIONS

two-way 1 relay actuator - for single loads: 16 A
resistive, 10 A filament lamps, 4 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers, and 4 A for fluorescent
lamps - 2 DIN modules
2 independent relay actuator - for single and double
loads: 10 A resistive and 6 A for filament lamps, 500 W
for motor reducers, 2 A cos 0.5 for ferromagnetic
transformers, and 250 W for fluorescent lamps logic
relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules
4 independent relay actuator - for single, double and
combined loads: 6 A resistive and 2 A for filament lamp,
500 W for motor reducers, 2 cos 0.5 for ferromagnetic
transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent lamps - logic
actuator with 1 two-way NC relay for single loads,
16 A resistive, 10 A for incandescence lamps, and 4 A for
fluorescent lamps. At switch on, the contact of the
device is always closed (ON status), and it opens when
an OFF control is sent. In this way, if there is no power
input from the BUS, the device will remain in the ON
status, keeping the load ON - 2 DIN modules
Item
F411/1N
F411/2
F411/4
F411/1NC
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

actuator with 2 independent NC relays for single loads,
6 A resistive and filament lamps, and 0.65 A for
status, keeping the load ON. - 2 DIN modules
ON/OFF actuator, 1 output with maximum load 16 A at
230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection, IP20 protection
index, power supply 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load
control pushbutton zero-crossing function 4 DIN modules
ON/OFF actuator, 2 independent outputs with
maximum load 16 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control pushbuttons
zero-crossing function - 4 DIN modules
100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control
pushbuttons zero-crossing function
- 6 DIN modules
Item
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

Actuators
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
10 A
2300 W
F411/1N
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4A
920 W
Compact fluorescent
lamps
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Electronic
transformers
4A
920 W
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
-
LED lamps
F411/2
6A
1380 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/4
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/1NC
10 A
2300 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
F411/2 NC
6A
1380 W
0.65 A
150 W
0.65 A
150 W
1 A cos 0.5
230 VA
BMSW1001
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1002
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1003
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
Notes:
3) the
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N
BMDI1001
F414
F415
F416U1
DIMMERS FOR CENTRALISATIONS

1/10 V dimmer, 1 output with maximum load 4.3 A
at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection, IP20
protection index, 6 DIN modules, power supply
pushbutton - 6 modules
1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent lamps
or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single loads
up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection - 27 Vdc
power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility of
connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with direct
load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version
2 modules
1 output dimmer for the powering of filament and
halogen lamps with ferromagnetic transformer 27 Vac power supply - absorption 9 mA - with direct
load control pushbutton, DIN rail mounted version 4 modules
halogen lamps with electronic transformer - 27 Vdc
power supply - absorption 22 mA - with direct load
control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version 4 modules
Item
BMDI1001
F413N
F414
F415
F417U2
F429
MULTILOAD DIMMER FOR CENTRALISATIONS

multiload dimmer, 1 output with maximum load
4.3 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection,
IP20 protection index, power supply 100/240 Vac
50/60 Hz, direct load control pushbutton
- 6 DIN modules
multiload dimmer, 2 independent outputs with
maximum load 1.7 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
pushbutton - 6 DIN modules
DALI Dimmer, 8 independent outputs for the
connection of up to 16 DALI reactors for each output
- power supply 230 Vac 50/60 Hz; 110-240 Vdc - absorption 90 mA - with direct load control
pushbutton DIN rail mounted version 4 modules
dimmer for the management of LEDs and compact
fluorescent lamps (CFL) with adjustable light intensity,
and energy saving halogen lamps with maximum
power 200W, power supply 110 to 230 Vac absorption
10 mA DIN rail mounted version 4 modules
Item
F416U1
F417U2
F429
F418

Actuators
BMDI1001
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
LED lamps
-
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4.3 A
1000 VA
Compact fluorescent
lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
Electronic
transformers
-
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
-
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
-
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
F413N
F414
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
2 A 460 W 4)
Max. 10 ballast type T5,
T8, compact or driver
for LED
-
F415
0.25 - 1.7 A
60 - 400 VA
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F416U1
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F417U2
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
F418
200 W @ 230 Vac

100 W @ 110 Vac
200 W @ 230 Vac

100 W @ 110 Vac
200 W @ 230 Vac

100 W @ 110 Vac
Notes:
3) the
4) only compatible with lamps with 1/10 V Ballast.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms
3486
HD4601
3485
HD4607Z4
HC4601
HD4603Z8
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE

DIALLING DEVICE
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and 8 areas.
central unit with system self-learning function and
using the IR remote control, the transponder and the
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone dialling device,
for forwarding of alarms. Programmed using the
metal bracket supplied as standard, or flush mounted
inside MULTIBOX units. Battery powered, using battery
item 3507/6 not supplied
coaxial extension cable for the central unit aerial,
item 3486 - L = 3.5 metres
Item
3485*
3486*
3483
HC4607/4

on-screen configuration display. Controlled using the
transponder and the keypad. Managing up to 36
zones and 4 areas. Possibility to set up to 4 user
scenarios. Fitted with alarm notification actuator, as
well as doors and windows protection NC contacts
connection terminal. Wall mounted using the metal
bracket supplied as standard. Battery powered, using
battery item 3506, supplied
3485B
HC4603/8
HS4607/4
HS4606
HD4607Z4*
HC4607/4*
HS4607/4*
AREA 1-4 DIVIDER

receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
the transponder badge item 3530S and item 3540 pushbuttons for the control of 4 zones - zone status
and system status LED notifications - possibility of
disabling visual and sound notifications - 2 modules
HD4603Z8
HC4603/8
HS4603/8
AREA 5-8 EXPANSION UNIT

module for the expansion of zones that may be divided
- zones 5 to 8 control pushbuttons - LED zone status
notification - possibility of disabling the visual
notifications - it can be coupled to the zone 1-4 divider
to expand the system to up to 8 zones - 2 modules
Item
HD4608*
HC4608*
HS4608*
GSM aerial protection tamper - to ensure level 2 of CEI

79-2 standard, the tamper protection must be used
3484*
HS4608
HD4606*
HC4606*
HS4606*
KEYPAD CONNECTOR WITH DISPLAY

device fitted with display for arming or disarming the
system using a numeric key, set and saved on the
burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486 or
with transponder badge.
It can be used to display all information, as well as to
manage some functions, of the central unit (division
etc.). Installation inside flush mounted boxes, item
506E, with front cover plate, Powered by battery,
item L4380/B, included - 6 modules
KEYPAD CONNECTOR
device for arming or disarming the system using a
numeric key, set and saved on the burglar-alarm
central unit, item 3485/B, item 3486 and item
HC/HD/HS4601 - 2 modules
as above - flush mounted installation - battery

powered, using battery item L4380/B supplied 6 modules
HD4601
HC4601
HS4601
(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2..
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS
HD4607
3540
Item
TRANSPONDER CONNECTOR
for arming and disarming the system using the
transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit
- LED system status notification - auxiliary channel
available for activations - 2 modules
HD4607*
HC4607*
HS4607*
3530S*
348220
HD4605
HC4605
HS4605
3549
HS4605
HD4610
Item
HD4610*
HC4610*
HS4610*
HD4611*
HC4611*
HS4611*
TRANSPONDER
slim line portable badge
tran
HIG
3540*
348220
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
HD4611B
HC4611B
HS4611B
TY
key-ring portable badge
REMOTE CONTROL
radio remote control with built-in transponder, with
two pushbuttons, for arming or disarming of the
system. Max. distance 50 m without obstructions.
Powered by a 3 V CR2032 type battery - to be used
with radio receiver, item HC/HD/HS4618
N4640
N4640B
KEY DISCONNECTOR
module to switch the system off and block it
by means of a mechanical key
- LED system status notification
fitted with keyhole cover
key with 10,000 combinations 2 modules
EXTENDED 4 PLUS GUARANTEE
BTicino 4 PLUS Guarantee package extended
program guarantee that offers the following
advantages for the installer: - free start up by the
BTicino Technical After-Sales Service Centre - aftersales
assistance supplied by BTicino Technical
After-Sales Service Centres all interventions free of
charge during the 2 year guarantee period, and subject
to fixed fee for the following 2 years - the guarantee
on the burglar alarm system may be extended to
4 years - interventions not covered by the guarantee
will be subjected to a fixed fee at advantageous
conditions - activation of the My home Web service
(on request of the customer)
HD4613
HC4613
HS4613
HC4610
N4640
HC4613
PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS

passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
adjustable sensitivity level (range: 3-9 metres)
- alarm LED with memory 105 angular opening,
14 bands over 3 floors auxiliary pre-alarm channel
that can be activated - 2 modules
volumetric presence detector as above - angular
opening that can be divided from 105 to 0 - lens
adjustable on 2 axis
fixed sensitivity level (range: 6 metres) - alarm LED
with memory - 105 angular opening, 14 bands over
3 floors - only for burglar alarm functions - 2 modules
IR PASSIVE MINI-DETECTORS
adjustable sensitivity (range: 3-9 metres) alarm LED with memory - 105 angular opening,
14 bands over 3 floors - 3 level sensitivity adjustment
through the configuration possibility of activating
the auxiliary pre-alarm channel wall mounted, tilted
and corner, installation
detector as above - preset sensitivity level (range:
6 metres) - only for burglar alarm functions
DOUBLE-TECHNOLOGY DETECTORS
double-technology volumetric presence detector made
up of two sensors: one infrared to detect warm bodies
(IR) and one with microwaves to detect movement
(MW). The alarm is only triggered when both detection
technologies activate. - 2 modules
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3480
F482
3510M
3514
3518
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE

interface module for two NC/NO electromagnetic
contact lines - possibility of connecting a balanced and
unbalanced contact protection line alarm indication
LED with tripping memory auxiliary pre-alarm
channel that can be activated - basic module
as above - for the management of two NC
electromagnetic contact lines and rope sensors for
shutters - 2 DIN
Item
3480*
F482*
Item
3514
3516
NOTE: The item 3480 device is also preset the management of technical alarms in general.
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 VOLT OUTPUT

contact interface module with 12V output to connect to
the system a mechanical rope sensor for shutters (item
3514) or similar, or a contact normally closed or opened
and one IR barrier for windows - basic module
as above - for the management of two contacts - 2 DIN
3480V12
F482V12
MAGNETIC CONTACTS
NC electromagnetic contact interface detectors and
protection line - flush mounted version
3510
3518
CABLE DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS

detector for the protection of shutters or rolling
shutters
WINDOW-BREAKING DETECTOR
piezoelectric window-breaking detector. Installation
by means of double-sided adhesive tape, supplied.
Protection of windows with 3 metre maximum
diagonal opening
IR BARRIERS
Active infrared barriers for the protection of windows and doors.
The device consists of 2 columns, one operates as TRANSMITTER
(TX), the other as RECEIVER (RX). When several IR beams are
broken, the alarm is immediately triggered.
window barrier - 1 metre - 4 beams
3519
door barrier - 2 metres - 8 beams
3518/50
window barrier - 0.5 metres - 2 beams
3518/150
detector as above - made of brass with high

mechanical resistance, for installation in non
ferromagnetic material windows and doors,or in
low section doors and windows
detector as above made of brass, with high
mechanical resistance for installation in all types of
doors and windows and reinforced doors
3510M
3510PB
3511
detector as above - visible mounted version
3512
detector as above - made of die cast aluminium, for

installation on tilting or sliding doors. Preset for
floor installation
3513
detector as above - version for visible installation on

metal surfaces
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS
HD4511V12
HC4511/12
HD4618
3442
Item
3479
F481
HS4512/12
3440
3448
F483
RELAY ACTUATOR MODULE

multiple configuration actuator module with relay
output NO-NC, 24 V 0.4 A cos 0,4 contacts to
be use for the repetition of several types of alarms
depending on the configuration. It may be activated
by: burglar alarms, exhausted battery signals, valve
closing due to technical alarms basic module
as above - 2 DIN
Item
3442
3444
TECHNICAL ALARM INTERFACE

interface module for the reception of alarm signals
from technical alarm sensors like gas detectors,
HD4511V12 and HC/HS4511/12 - HD4512V12 and
HC/HS4512/12 5-12 Vac/dc opto-insulated input
basic module
as above - 2 DIN
3448
HD4511V12
HC4511/12
HS4511/12
HD4512V12
HC4512/12
HS4512/12
HD4618
HC4618
HS4618
3440
NATURAL GAS DETECTORS

NATURAL GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB)
alarm notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset
for the control of signal repeaters - powered by a
12 Vac/dc transformer, item HC/HD/HS4541 or item
F91/12E - 2 modules
LPG DETECTORS
LPG GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB) alarm
notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset for the
control of signal repeaters - powered by a 12 Vac/dc
transformer, item HC/HD/HS4541 or item F91/12E 2 modules
RADIO RECEIVER FOR COMBINED WIRE-RADIO SYSTEM
radio receiver module to be used as interface between
the wire burglaralarm and the radio sensors, for the
installation of combined wire-radio systems it can
also be used for remote assistance functions, together
with remote control item 3448 and radio sensors 2 modules
HA4619
HB4619
HD4919
HC4919
HS4919
3482
PASSIVE INFRARED RADIO DETECTOR

passive infrared volumetric presence detector - alarm
LED with memory 12-metre range, 90 angular
opening, 17 bands over 4 floors possibility of pulse
counter function activation - powered by 1 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
HS4919
HB4619
3445
3481
3482
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
RADIO MAGNETIC AND GLASS BREAKING DETECTOR

magnetic opening detector for doors and windows it can be connected to additional magnetic wire
contacts (items 3510, 3511 and 3513) - powered by
one 3.6 V 1/2 AA battery, included
glass piezoelectric detector - protection of windows
with 3-metre maximum diagonal opening - powered
by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V battery, included

detector for the protection of shutters or
similar winding shutters, consisting of a cable
detector and radio transmitter - possibility of also
controlling an opening magnet (included) for
perimeter control - powered by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
REMOTE CONTROL FOR REMOTE ASSISTANCE
radio remote control for sending remote assistance
notifications - it can be programmed automatically
using the HC/HD/HS4618 radio receiver - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included - battery life 2 years
RADIO FLOOD DETECTORS
detector with sensor, for detecting flooding
caused by any type of liquids - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included. To be
furnished with front cover plate and
key covers and item HC/HD/HS4919 - 2 modules
as above - fit with round cover plate
PAIR OF KEY COVERS

for flood detector, item L4619
FLOOD SENSOR
water detection sensor - to be used together with
the contact interface, item 3480, in technical alarm
mode
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms - Management devices with IR remote control
4072L
HC4070
3507/6
3506
L4630
HD4603/4
3505/12
HC4604
HS4604
4050
EXTERNAL SIREN WITH SYSTEM BATTERY

external siren including the self-supply battery for the
whole system - sound notification can be set from
0 to 10 minutes by means of the central unit - to be
fitted with a 12 V 12 Ah battery, item 3505/12 - sound
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against
tearing and opening - to be used with power supply
item E46ADCN
Item
4072L*
OPTIONAL EXTERNAL SIREN

self-powered external siren - sound notification can
be set from 0 to 10 minutes by means of the control
unit - to be fitted with a 12 V 7 Ah battery - sound
item E47ADCN
4072A*
HD4603/4
HC4603/4
HS4603/4
HD604
HC4604
HS4604
BATTERY FOR EXTERNAL SIREN ITEM 4072L

12 V 12 Ah battery
3505/12
Item
4050
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators. These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the Catalogue - Devices and common accessories page.
ZONE 1-4 DIVIDER

the IR remote control, item 4050 - pushbuttons for
the control of 4 zones - zone status and system status
LED notifications - possibility of disabling visual and
sound notifications. Only for use with central units
item 3486 - 2 modules
CONNECTOR
the remote control, item 4050 - LED system status
notification - possibility of disabling visual and sound
notifications - possibility of setting the activation of
fixed system zones - auxiliary channel available for
activation of access controls (electric locks). Only for
use with central units item 3486 - 2 modules
REMOTE CONTROL
portable infrared remote control for system arming/
disarming - it can be automatically coded from the
central unit - powered by two CR1616 3 V lithium
batteries, included - battery operation time
50,000 operations
INTERNAL SIREN
self-supplied internal siren for installation inside 506E
boxes - to be fitted with a 6 V 0.5 Ah battery, item
3507/6 - sound intensity 90 dB (A) at 3 metres protected against tearing and tampering
HD4070*
HC4070*
HS4070*
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators.These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the Catalogue - Devices and common accessories page.
BATTERIES
6 V battery for internal siren item HC/HD/HS4070
3507/6
3506
7.2 V battery for central unit, item 3485/B
L4380/B
6 V spare battery for central unit, item HC/HD/HS4601

and connector, item HC/HD/HS4608
TAMPER
anti-tamper device for the protection of burglar-alarm
devices - reference notches for any type of flush
mounted box
L4630*

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Temperature control
HD4695
HD4891
Item
HD4695
HC4695
HS4695
3550
HC4695
HC4891
HS4695
HD4693
HD4692
HS4693
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

central unit for the management of a temperature
control system with up to 4 zones - the product also
includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from
PC - 3 modules
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT
PC - wall mounted installation or in MULTIBOX
enclosures
BATTERY
6 V 0.5 Ah temperature control central unit battery
3507/6
HD4891
HC4891
HS4891
3457
LOCAL DISPLAY
Management, Scenarios - 2 modules - it replaces item
HC/HD/HS4685
Item
HD4692FAN
HC4692FAN
HS4692FAN
Item
3455
HD4577
HC4577
HS4577
F430/2
F430/4
EXTERNAL SENSOR
Local Display external sensor
SENSORS
room temperature control sensor for heating and
cooling systems - temperature measurement range
3 - 40 C - 2 modules
HC4692FAN
3550
3480
HD4693
HC4693
HS4693
HC4692
F482
3456
FAN COIL KNOB SENSORS

cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 C manual
adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for
OFF and antifreeze mode selection, with manual/
automatic fan-coil Hydro-relax system speed selection
- 2 modules
RADIO TEMPERATURE SENSOR
radio sensor for the measurement of external
temperature - use with appropriate receiving radio
interface, item HC/HD/HS4577 - solar cell or battery
powered - IP65 wall mounted enclosure
SENSOR RECEIVING RADIO INTERFACES
temperature radio sensor receiving radio interface,
item 3455 - 27 Vdc power supply from BUS
- 2 modules
ACTUATORS
2 independent relay actuator for single and double
loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves and pumps logic relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules
combined loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves,
pumps and fan-coil - logic relay interlock via
configuration - 2 DIN modules

door and window electric contact interface module
for switching on the connected zone - basic enclosure
as above - 2 DIN module enclosure
NOTE: for magnetic contacts see the Burglar Alarm section.

HD4692
HC4692
HS4692
KNOB SENSORS
OFF and antifreeze mode selection - 2 modules
NOTE:
White colour device
3456
Tech colour device
SPLITTER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE

air conditioning unit interface with IR emitter
for the repetition and play back of IR air
conditioning unit remote control signals. It can
be controlled using Touch Screen and
Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic mechanism,
to facilitate installation behind the air
conditioning unit. IR cable length 2 m, power
supply from the 27 V bus
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Energy management
HD4672N
HC4672N
HS4672N
HS4673
F521
F522
F523
F524
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
device for the measurement of electric power on
a maximum of three lines, made possible by
connecting three toroids to the appropriate inputs.
The collected and processed data can be displayed
on Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. DIN rail
mounting version - 1 module The device is supplied
with 1 toroid
additional toroids for the bus meter with three inputs
for toroids, item F520, and actuator with sensor, item
F522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
current. Cable length 400 mm
pulse counter interface for the collection of data
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse
output. The values measured can be displayed on
Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic
module version, for hidden installation. Power
supply from 27 V BUS
Item
F520
3523
3522
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

central unit for the management and control of the
load control system actuators, to prevent the risk of
disconnection of the surge protection device of the
electricity provider. The central unit manages up to
63 loads maximum, with a contract power of 1.5 to 18
kW, and a tolerance of up to +/- 20%.
It includes a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids for the
controlled line. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module
actuator with integrated current sensor for controlled
load consumption module. 1 relay 10 A for
incandescent lamps and 4 A for fluorescent lamps or
ferromagnetic transformers and 500 W for LED lamps
and compact fluorescent lamps - Bistable relay with
zero crossing for load control Management and/or
Automation functions. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module. Earth leakage current control made
possible by connecting an additional toroid, item 3523
1 relay actuator for incandescent lamps, 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers, and
500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
Bistable relay with zero crossing for load control
Management and/or Automation functions. DIN rail
mounting version - 1 module
Device for the central management of energy
consumption data from a maximum of 10 lines
(detected using a bus meter with toroids, F520, load
control unit, F521, or pulse counter interfaces, 3522).
The data can be displayed using appropriate integrated
web pages, connecting the device to a LAN network
through the Ethernet port. It gives the possibility of
configuring several tariffs, and to download the
data. The device features microSD housing for the
backup of the recorded data. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module - Power supply from 27 V BUS
F521
F522
F523
F524
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
3508BUS
Item
HD4672N
HC4672N
HS4672N
HD4673
HC4673
HS4673
3508BUS
3523
3522

1 relay actuator 10 A for incandescent lamps 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers and
for Load Control Management and/or Automation
functions. Forced load operation pushbutton - flush
mounted version 2 modules
panel for the display and the control of the loads
connected to the actuators
ACCESSORIES
plug-in clamp for BUS connection - width 3.81 mm
3508U2
2 pole plug-in clamp
3508U3
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
F441
346030
F500N
F441M
Item
346030
SC
HD4560
HC4560
HS4560
L4561N
3495
L4668BUS/35
L4668BUS/60
H4562
AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS

compact 2 wire power supply with integrated video
adapter. For base sound systems with one installable
sound source only - 2 DIN modules
F441
F500N
L4561N
F502
F503
L4668BUS/35
346830
F441M
HS4560
Item
H4562
video adapter for base sound systems - only one sound

source can be installed - 2 DIN modules - electric power
supply by means of item 346000
F502
audio/video node for audio source mixing (4 sources

maximum) towards 4 outputs - 6 DIN modules - fitted
with DIN rail depth compensator
F503
multichannel matrix with cross connecting

functions, switch mixing and shunting (switch mix
and shunt) for the distribution of both stereo sound
source signals and audio/video signals of the 2wire
intercom/video system - 8 inputs (the first 4 for the
intercom/video 2 wire system, and the next 4 for
stereo sound sources), and 8 outputs - 10 DIN
modules - including DIN rail depth compensator
AMPLIFIERS
flush mounted amplifier - to be completed with
key covers - connection to BUS SCS system and stereo
loudspeakers - functions: ON/OFF loudspeakers,
volume control, source cycling function, and radio
station or CD track change 2 modules
stereo amplifier terminal for system
connection to the SCS BUS and the stereo speakers power supply 100 - 240 Vac - 4 DIN modules
stereo amplifier for accurate reproduction of the
sound signal, both from the SCS/BUS and, in
alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player,
etc.). Wide range of high and low tone adjustments
available, 10 preset equalisation levels + 10
customisable levels, virtual surround, and more.
Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED
graphic display. All the adjustments are performed
using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using
Touch Screen devices - 10 DIN modules
SOUND SOURCES
FM radio tuner with RDS. Storage of up to 5 radio
stations, display of RDS messages and tuned frequency.
Possibility of using the built-in wire antenna, or an
external antenna connected using a coaxial cable
with MCX-F adapter (supplied). 4 DIN modules, DIN rail
depth compensator included
flush mounted RCA input - to be used to control a
stereo source - 2 modules
device for the control of stereo sound sources using the
infrared remote control - programmed using the PC possibility of managing the source from the amplifiers
or the special controls - 4 DIN modules - including
RCA/RCA cable and jack cable for the connection of
the IR transmitter
source insulator for the adaptation of an audio signal
from external sound sources, to preserve the SELV
characteristics of the BUS. To be used when the sound
source is not powered by batteries. 4 female RCA
terminals, split between IN (for the connection of
the external sound source) and OUT (to be connected
to the RCA input item HC/HD/HS4560
PATCH CORD
Type
BUS-BUS
BUS-BUS
Length (cm)
35
60
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME
Sound system
HD4563
HD4653M2 - HD4653M3
HC4653/2 - HC4653/3
HS4653/2 - HS4653/3
CONTROLS
special amplifier management control to be completed
with key covers, for the management of ON/OFF
functions, volume control, change of source and
change of programmed radio station - 2 modules
Item
H4651M2
HD4563
HC4563
HS4563
KNOB CONTROLS
flush mounted knob operated device for ON/OFF,
volume control, programmed radio station and CD
track change - 2 modules
HD4563M2
HC4563/2
HS4563/2
SOFT TOUCH CONTROL

2 module touch control for switching the stereo
loudspeakers on/off and for volume adjustment
AXOLUTE series, light finish
HD4653M3
HC4653/3
HS4653/3
3 module touch control for switching the stereo

loudspeakers on/off and for volume adjustment
AXOLUTE series, light finish
HD4657M3
Item
HC4657M4
HS4685
DIGITAL GLASS CONTROLS

MY HOME control for the control of single loads or load groups
(e.g. lights and shutters), sound system, basic audio door
entry functions (e.g. gate opening). The configuration can be
completed in two separate ways: physical (connecting the physical
configurators to their sockets), or virtual (the control can be
configured remotely). It is fitted with capacitive touch keys that
can be identified using adjustable intensity LEDs.
WHITE GLASS
HD4657M3
HD4657M4
WHICE
HC4657M3
HC4657M4
NIGHTER
HD4657M3
HS4657M4
HD4891
HC4891
HS4891
3496
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
LOCAL DISPLAY CONTROL

HC/HD/HS4685
accessory to be used with H/HW4890 Touch Screen
devices - it can be used for playing audio tracks stored
on the PC, on the server, as well as any IP radio content
(e.g. radio), through the loudspeakers of the 2 WIRE
Sound system - to be installed on the back of Touch
Screen units
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
HC4654
L4567
Item
HD4565
HC4565
HS4565
H4570
HD4565
H4570
L4569
L4566
L4566/10
3499
L4568
FLUSH MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS

16 flush mounted loudspeaker for 506E and PB526
boxes - power 12 W
8 flush mounted 2-way loudspeaker for 4 module
MULTIBOX boxes item 16104 - power 100 W
Item
349418
349414
349415
3499
L4567
L4569
WALL MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS

8 wall mounted 2-way slim line loudspeaker,
D=37 mm - power 40 W - colour white
346841
8 outdoor 2-way loudspeaker, IPx4, with adjustable

inclination fixing brackets - power 140 W - colour black
346851
Item
L4566
L4566/10
L4568
FALSE CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS

8 false ceiling 2-way loudspeaker, L = 240 mm
- power 100 W - colour white
346850
8 false ceiling and plasterboard loudspeaker,

L = 100 mm - power 20 W - colour white
8 loudspeaker with the same size as a standard false
ceiling panel (60x60 cm), for installation on false
ceilings - 50 W power - colour white
HD4654
HC4654
HS4654
3529
NOTE:
349418
3529
White colour device
Tech colour device
346841
349414
346851
349415
346850
CONNECTORS FOR INTERFACING THE BUS CABLE TO SOUND

SYSTEM DEVICES
8-contact connector for the connection of items F500N,
L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS 5 and 6)
LINE TERMINATOR
line terminator - to be installed on the audio/video
node outputs
INTEGRATION AND EXPANSION DEVICES

floor distribution block, to be used with the audio/
video node, item F441 and the DIN rail amplifiers,
item F502 and F503, for complete saturation of one
audio/video node output
system expansion module for the installation of
extended systems, with up to 140 loudspeakers
- 4 DIN modules
apartment interface for connection to an independent
building complex video door entry system riser
integrated with MY HOME applications (Sound system,
Automation, etc.) 4 DIN modules
remote control receiver for remote control - up to 16
activations or scenarios saved in the scenario module,
item F420 - 2 modules
REMOTE CONTROLS
receiver control device (up to 16 receivers within
the same room) - possibility to select up to 16
transmission channels directly - powered by two
1.5 V AAA batteries
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Common devices and accessories
E46ADCN
POWER SUPPLIES
power supply - input 230 Vac, output 27 Vdc SELV
maximum consumption 450 mA DIN rail mounted
model - space requirement 8 DIN modules for flush
mounted or wall mounted switchboards
power supply as above 230 Vac - installation on DIN rail
with 8 module space requirement for wall mounted
boxes, item F115/8A - made for the connection of
12 V 7/12/24 Ah back-up battery
power supply - 8 DIN module version for wall mounted
boxes, item F115/8 A - made for the connection of one
12 V 6.5 - 25 Ah battery for the powering of 12 V
devices (IR barriers, etc.)
compact power supply for Temperature control, Energy
Management and Automation systems - input 230 Vac,
output 27 Vdc - maximum power delivered 600 mA 2 DIN modules
power supply for Video door entry system and Sound
system. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz. Maximum
power delivered 1.2 A. Electronically protected
(without fuse) against short-circuit and overload.
Double insulation SELV device - 8 DIN modules
2 DIN module compact additional power supply. For
local supply of the video door entry entrance panels
and handsets. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz.
Maximum power delivered 600 mA. Protected by
integrated fuse (not replaceable). Double insulation
SELV device
2 DIN module compact power supply for Video door
entry system and Sound system. Maximum power
delivered 600 mA. Protected by integrated fuse (not
replaceable). Double insulation SELV device
Item
E46ADCN*
E47ADCN*
E47/12
E49
346000
346020
346030
3559
335919
E47ADCN
E47/12
3545
VARIOUS ACCESSORIES
spare plug-in clamps
Item
3515
cable for the connection to the PC for the

programming of the Automation, Burglar Alarm,
Temperature Control and Sound System devices for USB port
cable as above - for USB port
335919
3559
VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER SALES SERVICE

Booklet of 5 vouchers for visits by a CAT technician to
service My Home, Video door entry, Telephony, Light
signalling and CCTV systems
3545
For the selection of the power supply, based on the system being installed, refer to the following table.
System
Power supply
E46ADCN
Automation
Burglar alarm
Energy management/Cons. display
Temperature control
Sound system
(1)
E47ADCN
E47/12
(2)
(3)

NOTE (1): for systems with external siren 4072L
(2): for systems with external siren 4072A or without siren
(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barriers)
E49
346000
346020
(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3501/0
F115/8A
F115/8B
502PA
L4669
L4669/500
3501/GR
3501/AMB
3501/AUX
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
502PA
336904
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
DIN wall mounted enclosure for the installation of
power supply item E47ADCN
Item
3504
enclosure for the 12 V 7 Ah battery, for the self-supply

of the burglar-alarm system with power supply item
E47ADCN self-protection contact against opening
attempts
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR MODULAR DEVICES
reduced depth wall mounted installation box - fitted
with anti-tamper device 2 modules complete
with support
ANGULAR BOX
surface mounted box for angular installation fitted
with antitamper device 2 modules complete with
frame and white cover plate (LB)
CONNECTION CABLES
sheathed pair made up of 2 flexible wires with
unshielded plaited sheath - insulation 300/500 V complies with standards CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-20 coil length 100 metres
as above - coil length 500 metres
L4669HF
as above - low toxicity cable without halogens - ideal

for application in environments where fire hazard
safety is critical - maximum length 200 m (1)
L4669S
double sheathed SCS made up of 2 flexible wires with

unshielded plaited sheath for burglar-alarm system
- insulation 300/500 V - complies with standards CEI
46-5 and CEI 20-20 - coil length 100 metres
specific cable with 2 twisted conductors. It can be
installed in underground piping, in accordance with
CEI 20-13 and CEI 20-14 standards. It ensures the best
performance in video systems (higher distance
between EP and Handset when compared with other
cables). Coil length 200 metres
336904
3501/4
3501/GEN
3501/0
502NPA
3501/3
System
Cable
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
L4669S
Automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
NOTE (1): for availability contact your local BTicino sales representative
(2): for systems with underground cable lines
NOTE:
White colour device
336904
(2)(2)
(2)(2)
VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION KIT

kit for the configuration of the Automation system
using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR
software, supplied as standard on CD, and Secure Digit
(SD) memory card. It replaces item 3503N.
CONFIGURATORS SINGLE-TYPE PACKAGE OF 10 PIECES

configurator 0
3501/1
configurator 1
3501/2
configurator 2
3501/3
configurator 3
3501/4
configurator 4
3501/5
configurator 5
3501/6
configurator 6
3501/7
configurator 7
3501/8
configurator 8
3501/9
configurator 9
3501/GEN
configurator GEN
3501/GR
configurator GR
3501/AMB
configurator AMB
3501/AUX
configurator AUX
3501/ON
configurator ON
3501/OFF
configurator OFF
3501/OI
configurator OI
3501/TM

configurator PUL
configurator SLA
configurator CEN
configurator
configurator M
3501K
CONFIGURATOR KIT
kit of configurators from 0 to 9
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
3501K/1
Tech colour device
Item
3501/2
kit of configurators AUX, GEN, GR, AMB,ON, OFF, O/I,

PUL, SLA, CEN, ,
M
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
3501/1
Neutral item
MY HOME

KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 1 AND 2 FUNCTIONS
HD4911
HD4911M2
HD4915
HD4915M2
HC4911
HC4911M2
HC4915
HC4915M2
HS4911
HS4911M2
HS4915
HS4915M2
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 1 FUNCTION

1 module
2 modules
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 2 FUNCTIONS

1 module
2 modules
Item
Item
Item
Item
HD4915
HD4915M2
HD4911
HD4911M2
HC4915
HC4915/2
HC4911
HC4911/2
HS4915
HS4915/2
HS4911
HS4911/2
NOTE: control keys are supplied with

the device as standard.
upper pushbutton
control
key
lower pushbutton
LED
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
key cover
1 function
1 module
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
key cover
2 functions
1 module
key cover
1 function
2 modules
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME

KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING 1 AND 2 FUNCTIONS
HD4915AA
HD4915M2AA
HC4915/2AA
HC4915AC HS4915/2AA
HC4915/2AC
HS4915BA
HS4915/2BA
HD4911AF
HD4911MAF
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

WITH SYMBOLS 1 FUNCTION
Description
OFF
ON
GEN
DIMMER
LIGHT
BED LIGHT
BELL
EXHAUST FAN
KEY
TREBLE CLEF
NURSE
DO NOT DISTURB
REARRANGE
THE ROOM
1 module
2 modules
Item
Item
HD4915AA
HD4915M2AA
HC4915AA
HC4915/2AA
HS4915AA
HS4915/2AA
HD4915AB
HD4915M2AB
HC4915AB
HC4915/2AB
HS4915AB
HS4915/2AB
HD4915AC
HD4915M2AC
HC4915AC
HC4915/2AC
HS4915AC
HS4915/2AC
HD4915AD
HD4915M2AD
HC4915AD
HC4915/2AD
HS4915AD
HS4915/2AD
HD4915BA
HD4915M2BA
HC4915BA
HC4915/2BA
HS4915BA
HS4915/2BA
HD4915BL
HD4915M2BL
HC4915BL
HC4915M2BL
HS4915BL
HS4915M2BL
HD4915BB
HD4915M2BB
HC4915BB
HC4915/2BB
HS4915BB
HS4915/2BB
HD4915BC
HD4915M2BC
HC4915BC
HC4915/2BC
HS4915BC
HS4915/2BC
HD4915BD
HD4915M2BD
HC4915BC
HC4915/2BD
HS4915BC
HS4915/2BD
HD4915BE
HD4915M2BE
HC4915BE
HC4915/2BE
HS4915BE
HD4915BF
HC4915BF
HC4915/2BF
HS4915BF
HC4911AF
HC4911AI
HC4911AG
HC4911BC

WITH SYMBOLS 1 FUNCTION
1 module
Description
ROOM
ALARM
2 modules
Item
Item
HD4915BG
HD4915M2BG
HC4915BG
HC4915/2BG
HS4915BG
HS4915/2BG
HD4915BH
HD4915M2BH
HC4915BH
HC4915/2BH
HS4915BH
HS4915/2BH

WITH SYMBOLS 2 FUNCTIONS
1 module
2 modules
Item
Item
HD4911AF
HD4911M2AF
HC4911AF
HC4911/2AF
HS4911AF
HS4911/2AF
HD4911AG
HD4911M2AG
HC4911AG
HC4911/2AG
HS4911AG
HS4911/2AG
HD4911AH
HD4911M2AH
HC4911AH
HC4911/2AH
HS4911AH
HS4911/2AH
HD4911AI
HD4911M2AI
HC4911AI
HC4911/2AI
HS4911AI
HS4911/2AI
HD4911BA
HD4911M2BA
HC4911BA
HC4911/2BA
HS4915/2BE
HS4911BA
HS4911/2BA
HD4915M2BF
HD4911BC
HD4911M2BC
HC4911BC
HC4911/2BC
HS4915/2BF
HS4911BC
HS4911/2BC
HD4915DD
HD4911BE
HD4911M2BE
HC4915DD
HC4911BE
HC4911/2BE
HS4915DD
HS4911BE
HS4911/2BE
HD4915MR
HD4911AD
HC4915MR
HC4911AD
HS4915MR
HS4911AD
NOTE:
White colour device
Description
ON - OFF - GEN
ON - OFF
UP - DOWN
ON - OFF
ADJUSTMENT
LIGHT
EXHAUST FAN
TREBLE CLEF
+ up and
down
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME
F558
F555
L4665L20
CONNECTOR FOR VERTICAL PATCHING

cat. 6 module for the patching of the wiring inside the
star centre cabinet. Reversible connectors for the
connection of cables to the user sockets from the top
or from the floor - 1 DIN module
Item
F550C6
DIGITAL SIGNAL DEVICES

1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several switches can be added
to setup more lines - 4 DIN modules
F551
TELEPHONE SIGNAL DEVICES

xDSL filter with 3 way telephone distribution frame
for the separation of the ADSL data line from the
telephone line. Possibility of connection to an 8 output
telephone distribution frame, item F555, to increase
the number of lines - 2 DIN modules
8 output telephone distribution frame to distribute
1 telephone line to 8 different sockets, or 2 telephone
lines to 4 sockets. Possibility of connection to several
distribution frames to increase the number of lines 4 DIN modules
F558
F555
ACCESSORIES
9 V 1.6 A power supply for the power supply to the
switch, item F551 - 1.5 DIN modules
F552
FLAT type patch cord with RJ45 connectors - category

6 - PVC cable sheath - with built in SNAGGLE - in
accordance with EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA 568 A/B
standards - length 20 cm
patch cord as above - length 40 cm
L4665L20
L4665L40
32871
LSZH
1000m
coil
32872
PVC
1000m
coil
HD4279C6A
HC4279C6A
HS4279C6A
HD4202D
HC4202D
HS4202D
HD4269F
HC4269F
HS4269F
HD4210D
HC4210D
HS4210D
HD4214D
HC4214D
HS4214D
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
HC4210D
32754
telephone cable, with RJ45 and RJ11 connectors,

for the connection of telephone devices with RJ11
connector to devices with RJ45 connector length 200 cm
L4664
HC4202D
CAT. 6 CABLES
category 6 U/UTP unshielded cable with 24 AWG (0.51) solid
copper conductors, with polyolefin insulation, 4 pair of twisted
conductors with internal partition - performance 500 MHz - in
accordance with ISO/IEC 11801 and 2.0, EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA
568 B2.10 standards - blue
Cable sheath
Length
Packaging
LSZH
305m
coil
Item
TELEVISION SIGNAL DEVICES

universal TV/SAT distribution frame (52400 MHz)
for the distribution of the signal to 6 separate TV
sockets. F type connection clamps - 4 DIN modules
F553
HC4279C6A
RJ45 CONNECTORS
RJ45 connectors fitted with metal screen,
identification plate, and dust cover - 1 module
TELEVISION SIGNAL CONNECTOR

direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user antenna
systems, including remotely powered and centralised
systems, and single use and centralised satellite
systems with feed-through current and signal for
channel selection - shielded connection clamps with
captive screws - diam. 9.5 mm - male connector 1 module
TV CONNECTOR F TYPE
TV coaxial connector F type - impedance 75 Ohm screw connection - 1 module
TV + RD + SAT CONNECTOR
direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user TV
antenna systems, including remotely powered and
centralised shunted systems, and single use and
centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection,
and radio systems - male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector
- 9.5 mm diam. female radio and SAT connector - for
installation inside rectangular box, item 503E, item
504E, item 506L- 2 modules
DEMIXED TV +SAT CONNECTOR
demixed direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user
TV antenna systems, including remotely
powered and centralised shunted systems, single
use and centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection
- male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector - SAT connector
F type- 1 module
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
HOTEL OFFER RANGE

This page lists the devices specifically intended for hotel room services. The BTicino hotel
room offer range, and in more general terms for the hotel sector, includes however many
more devices that are also used in other sectors, and are therefore listed in various sections
throughout this catalogue. Some of them are, for example:
- comfort devices = light, curtain, and scenario controls with dedicated symbols. Also,
thermostats, and temperature probes with knobs
- audio and video devices = connectors for every need, and sound signalling devices
- safety devices = step lights, and emergency lamps
H4549
H4372V230H
HC4033
HD4177
HC4915DD
HC4915MR
HS4547
Item
H4549
H4548
H4649
H4648
HD4547
HC4547
HS4547
HD4915DD
HC4915DD
HS4915DD
BADGE-HOLDER POCKET
badge holder pocket for the power supply inside the
hotel room - slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second
switch-off delay - power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules
- to be completed with front cover in the desired look
hotel room with RFID technology recognition - slot
light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off delay
- power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules - to be
completed with front cover in the desired look
MY HOME SYSTEM BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS

badge holder pockets for the power supply inside the
switch-off delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules
hotel room with RFID technology recognition
- slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off
delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules - to be
FRONT COVERS FOR BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS

front cover for traditional or My Home badge-holder
pocket
Item
HD4921BL
HC4921BL
HS4921BL
KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS FOR AXIAL CONTROLS

bed light
HD4921DD
HC4921DD
HS4921DD
do not disturb
HD4921MR
HC4921MR
HS4921MR
rearrange the room
Item
H4372V230H
HD4177
HC4177
HS4177
HD4033
HC4033
HS4033
LAMPHOLDER FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING

off-door lampholder with double optical signalling:
do not disturb and rearrange the room use 2 LEDs
item LN4742V12T (12 V)
SHAVER SOCKETS
shaver socket with insulation transformer
- input voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
115/230 Vac 20 VA
CORD PUSHBUTTONS
cord pushbutton 1 P NO 10 A for bathroom alarm
KEY COVERS WITH SYMBOLS FOR MY HOME CONTROL

key cover for rocker control devices with
do not disturb symbol
HD4915MR
HC4915MR
HS4915MR
key cover with rearrange the room symbol
HD4915BL
HC4915BL
HS4915BL
key cover with room light symbol
HD4915M2BL
HC4915M2BL
HS4915M2BL
key cover as above - 2 modules
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

Video display and cameras
349313
349311
349320
VIDEO DISPLAY
hands-free video display unit which can be installed
in 2 wire video systems. 2.5 LCD colour display. It
can be combined with the MY HOME system; equipped
with customizable navigation menus via the PC for
managing the followings functions: video door-entry
units, temperature control, sound system, scenarios,
alarms. Keys included: navigation, auto-switch on,
door lock release, hands-free connection and pager.
LED used for: call exclusion, door status, connection.
Configuration via physical configurators and menus.
USB port for programming. flush-mounting
installation in 506 box. Available frames: all those
included in the 506E domestic lines.
Item
349313
349311
349312
NIGHTER & WHICE VIDEO STATION

stereo hands-free video display unit which can be
installed in 2 wire video systems. 8 LCD colour
display. It can be combined with the MY HOME
system; equipped with customizable navigation
menus via the PC for managing the followings
functions: video door-entry units, temperature
control, sound system, scenarios, alarms. In integrated
systems, when using a sound system, the Video
Station acts as an amplifier, hence reproducing all
the audio sources in the system. Keys included:
navigation, auto-switch on, door lock release, staircase
lights, mute, hands-free connection and pager. LED
used for: call exclusion, door status, connection.
Can be connected to the multimedia interface.
USB and RS232 port for programming. Can be
installed on the wall using a special bracket.
NOTE: the size of the display may be slightly different.
349210
Item
349310
349310
391662
VIDEO STATION
stereo hands-free video display unit which can be
installed in 2 wire video systems. 5.6 LCD colour
display. It can be combined with the MY HOME
system; equipped with customizable navigation
menus via the PC for managing the followings
functions: video door-entry units, temperature
control, sound system, scenarios, alarms. In integrated
systems, when using a sound system, the Video
Station acts as an amplifier, hence reproducing all
the audio sources in the system. Keys included:
navigation, auto-switch on, door lock release, staircase
lights, mute, hands-free connection and pager. LED
used for: call exclusion, door status, connection.
USB and RS232 port for programming. Can be installed
on the wall using a special bracket. Glass, wood and
aluminum dedicated frames.
349321
349320
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
349210
FRAMES FOR VIDEO STATION

satin- finished aluminium frame
349211
Kristall glass frame
349212
TEAK wooden frame
391663
391661
391662
2 WIRE SYSTEMS INDOOR CAMERAS

2 wire technology flush mounted colour camera with microphone - 1.3 CCD, 380 horizontal lines
resolution, 3.7 mm lens
Neutral item
AXOLUTE catalogue
AXOLUTE Outdoor entrance panels
339313
Item
339313
349140
339213
339223
349140
339213
348402
OUTDOOR
steel tear proof flush mounted box - 3 modules
electronic module including: speaker phone module,

motorised camera and colour display. A proximity
reader is integrated for access control functions
by means of transponder keys. Programming and
configuration software included.
3 module frame + supporting frame in steel finish.
Anti-housebreaking resistant safety key for assembly
and disassembly provided.
3 module frame + supporting frame in brass finish.
Anti-housebreaking resistant safety key for assembly
and disassembly provided.
NOTE:
White colour device
348400
348401
348402
PROGRAMMER AND TRANSPONDER KEY

transponder key programmer
348200
transponder key black
348201
transponder key red
348202
transponder key green
348203
transponder key blue
348204
transponder key orange
348205
transponder key grey
348206
transponder key yellow
Item
Tech colour device
Neutral item
348402
CONTENTS
LIVINGLIGHT catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

F422
LN4890
Item
N4891
NT4891
L4891
LN4890
LN4890A
3496
N4891
LOCAL DISPLAY
management, Scenarios - 2 modules it replaces item L/N/NT4685
TOUCH SCREEN
22C
Alarm, Temperature Control, Sound System, Scenarios,
Load Management and Consumption Display.
USB front connector for configuration.
Device preset for programming with Open Web Net
protocol language- it replaces item L4684
Touch Screen as above - can be installed with
LIVINGLIGHT AIR cover plates - it replaces item
LN4684A
22C

used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, on the
server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio),
through the loudspeakers of the Sound system - to be
installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the
development of integration applications.
Item
H4687
MHVISUAL
F429
H4687
VIDEO TOUCH SCREEN

flush mounted panel PC with 15 Touch Screen display
for the control of the MY HOME system using the
MHVisual software
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
control and management software of the lighting
functions, Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature
control, Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management
and Video surveillance system
F422
SCS-SCS INTERFACE
interface between SCS BUS based systems, dedicated
to different functions - 2 lowered DIN modules
F426

SCS/EIB interface - for the control of EIB systems in
MY HOME applications - 2 DIN modules
F429
SCS/DALI INTERFACE
DALI dimmer, 8 independent outputs with 230 Vac
16 ballasts maximum load, direct load control device,
6 DIN modules
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by iPad devices

thanks to BTicino MY HOME, the ocial BTicino application which
can be downloaded from iTunes, in the Free version as well.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3486
MH200N
F461/2
SCENARIO MODULE
Sound system, Temperature control and Video door
Item
F420
SCENARIO PROGRAMMER
automation, temperature control and burglar-alarm
compact power supply for MH200N scenario
programmer - 2 DIN modules
MH200N
346020

audio/video web server for the remote control of the
system using web pages or the MY HOME portal.
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software 6 DIN modules. It replaces item F453 and F453AV
F454
C9451
Item
F461/2
F462
F454

exchange contact, power supply 230 Vac 3 DIN modules

GSM telephone actuator for the enabling/disabling
of loads via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino
timer thermostats, item L/N/NT4450, and the
possibility of managing 2 alarm inputs
- 4 DIN modules
SWITCH
F551
C9451

1 LAN line to 4 lines. Possibility of adding several
switches for arranging several lines Power supply
using item F552 power supply unit 4 DIN modules
reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with 9
RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
included
CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE DIALLING DEVICE

3485*
3486*
using IR remote control, the transponder and the
PSTN telephone dialling device and integrated GSM
for alarm forwarding. Programmed using the
metal bracket supplied as standard or flush-mounted
in MULTIBOX boxes. Power supply with battery item
3507/6.
(*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for
the development of integration applications.
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
L4651M2
L4652/2
Item
SPECIAL CONTROL
and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament
lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cos 0.5 for
actuator 2 modules
L4651M2
L4652/3
CONTROLS FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS

lowered section control that can drive a single actuator
for single or double loads, as well as two actuators for
single loads or double independent loads - to be
completed with one 2 module key cover for one or two
functions controls, or 2 one or two-function 1 module
key covers - 4 green/red two-colour LEDs - 2 modules
control that can drive three actuators for single or
independent double loads - to be completed with
three 1 module key covers for one or two-function
controls - 6 green/red two-colour LEDs - 3 modules
Item
L4652/2
L4652/3
MY HOME KEY COVERS

MY HOME key covers have been unified with those for electromechanical control devices.
special controls and for

single or double loads
NOTE: control pushbuttons are supplied with the device as standard.

Key covers must be selected by the customer.
upper pushbutton
control
pushbutton
lower pushbutton
LED
key cover
1 function
1 module
key cover
1 function
2 modules
key cover
2 functions
1 module
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
NOTE ON USE OF THE HINGE

ITEM 4911TDM
new LIVINGLIGHT
3 module support
HINGE
4911TDM
accessory for the installation of

2 module key covers on 503E box
mounted devices
hinge
item 4911TDM
2 module
control key
control
2 module
key cover
1 module
control key
1 module
key cover
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
N4563
N4680
NT4607
L4563
NT4607/4
3530S
KNOB CONTROL
knob control for advanced dimmer adjustment (level
from 1 to 99%, soft-start switch on, etc.). Central
ON/OFF pushbutton. - 2 modules
Item
N4563
NT4563
L4563
Item
3477
L4680
3540
CONTACT INTERFACE
independent contacts for the control of 2
actuators for single function loads, or 1 actuator
for double function loads (shutters) the
inputs accepts two traditional switches or
pushbuttons with NO and NC contact, or a
traditional two-way switch, or interlocked
pushbuttons
N4680
NT4680
L4680
SCENARIO CONTROL
scenario control that can be customized for the control
of up to 4 room set-ups of independent Automation
Temperature control and Sound system saved in the
scenario module, item F420 - 2 modules
F428
F420
SCENARIO MODULE
Sound system, Temperature control and video door
F425
MEMORY MODULE
module used for saving the status of the actuators to reset the light automation system in case of power
cut 2 lowered DIN modules
MHKIT10N
KIT - SHUTTER AUTOMATION

automation kit for automated control of 5 shutters
(or motor controlled curtains) - white, Tech, anthracite
colour controls
CODE PROTECTED CONTROLS

device that allows to save up to 30 transponders
(badges) for the execution of protected controls 2 modules
N4607
NT4607
L4607
transponder protected scenario control - it enables

saving up to 30 transponders (badges) for the control
of 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
N4607/4
NT4607/4
L4607/4
TRANSPONDER
portable badge - when moved close to the transponder
reader, it causes its activation, enabling the signal
generated to be transferred to the BUS it does not
require batteries it can be automatically coded using
the transponder reader
as above - key-holder with same functions
3530S
tran
HIG
3540
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
TY
Warning:
only controls with production batch no. from 03W18 can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-ring). Older readers are only suitable for use with item 3530 (badge).
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
N4654N
Item
N4654N
NT4654N
L4654N
3529
3529
NT4654N

remote control receiver for remote control item 3529
- up to 16 activations or scenarios saved in the scenario
module, item F420 and scenario programmer item
MH200N - 2 modules
IR REMOTE CONTROL
device for the control of receivers (up to 16
receivers within the same room) - possibility of
direct selection of up to 16 channels - powered
by four 1.5 V AAA batteries
L4658N
Item
N4658N
NT4658N
L4658N
N4659N
NT4659N
L4659N
N4659N

switching on of the light using the front pushbutton,
and automatic switching off based on brightness level
and movement. Switch off delay and brightness sensor
threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
passive infrared sensor for the detection of movement
and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m wide by 180 and
9 m field depth at an installation height of 1.2 m.
Switch off delay and brightness sensor threshold
adjustable using the one/two-way (BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001) remote control, physical or virtual
configuration. 2 modules
Management of lighting level depending on the presence

of people and the level of natural light:
this means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a
big contribution to energy savings. In the service sector,
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
UP TO
55%
SAVINGS
in compliance with
EN15193 standard
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2005
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical
Item
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE2002
BMSE2004
BMSE2005
configuration
Lighting Management Catalogue.
Item
BMSE2003
SENSOR QUICK SELECTION TABLE

Operation
Type of
operation
Type of sensor
Power supply
Absorption
IP protection index
Coverage at 2.5 m
Sensitivity (lux)
Factory settings
Type of connection
NOTE:
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
ceiling
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
10 mA
IP20
6 m (28 m2)
90/360
4
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
No
No
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
IP42
2 x 12 m (24 m2)
90/30
6
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
White colour device
Tech colour device
BMSE2002
wall/ceiling
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
wall/ceiling
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
PIR
PIR
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
IP42
IP42
IP42
2
2
11 x 14 m (120 m )
2 x 9+9 m (36 m )
10 x 27 m (210 m2)
60/90
90/30
60/140
6
6
6
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
0 sec. 255 hours
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
Neutral item
BMSE2005
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR+US
27 Vdc from BUS
17 mA
IP42
14 x 7 m (77 m2)
60/180
6
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
LN4671M2
L4678
3475
ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/DIMMERS

and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament lamps,
500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cos 0.5 for
actuator 2 modules
1 relay actuator with control-key - for single load: 6 A
resistive or filament lamps, 2 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W fluorescent
lamps - to be completed with single or double function
2 module key cover
dimmer actuator for filament lamps and ferromagnetic
transformers - 60 - 300 VA, 230 Vac - to be completed
with single or double function 2 module key cover 2 modules
Item
LN4671M2
L4671/1
L4678
Example of use of actuator item LN4671M2 in the local actuator

and remote control mode. Press the left key cover to control the
Flush mounted actuators
BASIC MODULE ACT UATORS

installation in ceiling light cups or inside flushmounted boxes, behind control devices
ferromagnetic transformers input suitable for a
traditional NO contact pushbutton
3475
3476
Control key cover

for remote actuator
management
Actuator
key cover for
light management

Actuators
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
LED lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
Compact fluorescent
lamps
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
LN4671M2
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
L4671/1
6A
1380 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
L4678
0.25 - 1.30 A
60 - 300 W
0.25 - 1.30 A
60 - 300 VA
3475
3476
2A
460 W
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
Notes:
3) the
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F411/1N
F411/2
F411/4
F411/1NC
F411/2NC
BMSW1001

Item
F411/1N
F411/2
F411/4
F411/1NC
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

- 6 DIN modules
Item
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

Actuators
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
10 A
2300 W
F411/1N
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4A
920 W
Compact fluorescent
lamps
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Electronic
transformers
4A
920 W
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
-
LED lamps
F411/2
6A
1380 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/4
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/1NC
10 A
2300 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
F411/2 NC
6A
1380 W
0.65 A
150 W
0.65 A
150 W
1 A cos 0.5
230 VA
BMSW1001
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1002
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1003
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
Notes:
3) the
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N
BMDI1001
F414
F415
F416U1

1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent lamps
or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single loads
up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection - 27 Vdc
power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility of
connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with direct
load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version
2 modules
Item
BMDI1001
F413N
F414
F415
F417U2
F429

- 6 DIN modules
Item
F416U1
F417U2
F429

Actuators
BMDI1001
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
LED lamps
-
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4.3 A
1000 VA
Compact fluorescent
lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
Electronic
transformers
-
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
-
Motor reducers for

shutters 3)
-
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
F413N
F414
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
2 A 460 W 4)
for LED
-
F415
0.25 - 1.7 A
60 - 400 VA
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F416U1
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F417U2
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
Notes:
3) the
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3485
N4601
3486
N4603/8
NT4607/4

DIALLING DEVICE
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone dialling device,
item 3507/6 not supplied
Item
3485*
3486*
3483
N4601
NT4601
L4601

as above - flush mounted installation - battery
powered, using battery item L4380/B supplied 6 modules - do not install with AIR cover plates
L4607/4
L4606
NT4603/8
N4607/4*
NT4607/4*
L4607/4*
AREA 1-4 DIVIDER

N4603/8
NT4603/8
L4603/8

Item
N4608*
NT4608*
L4608*

3484**
3485B
L4608
N4606*
NT4606*
L4606*
KEYPAD CONNECTOR WITH DISPLAY

burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486 or
with transponder badge. If used with the flush
mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code
or the transponder badge used are those saved in the
central unit during the programming of the keypad
and badge connector devices. It can be used to display
all information, as well as to manage some functions,
of the central unit (division etc.). Installation inside
flush mounted boxes, item 506E, with front cover
plate. Powered by battery, item L4380/B, included
- 6 modules - do not install with AIR cover plates
KEYPAD CONNECTOR
device for arming or disarming the system using a
numeric key, set and saved on the burglar-alarm
central unit, item 3485/B, item 3486 and item
L/N/NT/4601. If used with the flush mounted control
unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code used is the one
saved on the central unit during the programming
procedure - 2 modules

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
N4607
N4610
Item
N4607*
NT4607*
L4607*
3530S*
348220
transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit.
If used with the flush mounted central unit, item
L/N/NT4600/4, the transponder used is the one saved
in the central unit during the programming procedure
Item
MHKIT85N
TRANSPONDER
tran
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
N4610*
NT4610*
L4610*
TY
N4611*
NT4611*
L4611*
N4611B
NT4611B
L4611B
REMOTE CONTROL
radio remote control with built-in transponder, with
two pushbuttons, for arming or disarming of the
system. Max. distance 50 m without obstructions.
Powered by a 3 V CR2032 type battery - to be used
with radio receiver, item L/N/NT4618
N4640
N4605
NT4605
L4605
3549
348220
L4605
NT4613
HIG
3540*
3540
NT4610
N4640
KEY DISCONNECTOR
by means of a mechanical key - LED system
status notification fitted with keyhole
cover key with 10,000 combinations 2 modules
N4640B

N4613
NT4613
L4613
BURGLAR-ALARM KIT
burglar-alarm expandable kit formed of:
- 1 central unit item 3485B
- 2 IR sensors item N4640
- 1 power supply item E46ADCN
- 1 external siren item 4072L
- 1 magnetic contact item 3511
- various configurators
DOUBLE-TECHNOLOGY DETECTORS
double-technology volumetric presence detector made
up of two sensors: one infrared to detect warm bodies
(IR) and one with microwaves to detect movement
(MW). The alarm is only triggered when both detection
technologies activate. - 2 modules
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3480
F482
3514
3510M

interface module for two NC/NO electromagnetic
contact lines - possibility of connecting a balanced and
unbalanced contact protection line alarm indication
LED with tripping memory auxiliary pre-alarm
channel that can be activated - basic module
electromagnetic contact lines and rope sensors for
shutters - 2 DIN
Item
3480*
F482*
3518
Item
3514
3516
3480V12
F482V12
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 VOLT OUTPUT

contact interface module with 12V output to connect to
the system a mechanical rope sensor for shutters (item
3514) or similar, or a contact normally closed or opened
and one IR barrier for windows - basic module
MAGNETIC CONTACTS
3510
3510M
3510PB
3518

detector for the protection of shutters or rolling
shutters
diagonal opening
IR BARRIERS
3519
3518/50
3518/150

3511
3512

floor installation
3513

metal surfaces

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
N4511/12
3440
NT4511/12
N4618
3442
3448
Item
3479
F481

multiple configuration actuator module with relay
output NO-NC, 24 V 0.4 A cos 0,4 contacts to
be use for the repetition of several types of alarms
depending on the configuration. It may be activated
by: burglar alarms, exhausted battery signals, valve
closing due to technical alarms basic module
as above - 2 DIN
3482
L4919
Item
3442
3444
3445
3481
F483

interface module for the reception of alarm signals
from technical alarm sensors like gas detectors,
L/N/NT4511/12 and L/N/NT4512/12 5-12 Vac/dc
opto-insulated input basic module
3448
N4511/12
NT4511/12
L4511/12
N4512/12
NT4512/12
L4512/12
N4618
NT4618
L4618
3440

12 Vac/dc transformer, item L/N/NT4541 or item
F91/12E - 2 modules
LPG DETECTORS
transformer, item L/N/NT4541 or item F91/12E 2 modules
RADIO RECEIVER FOR COMBINED WIRE-RADIO SYSTEM
radio receiver module to be used as interface between
the wire burglaralarm and the radio sensors, for the
installation of combined wire-radio systems it can
also be used for remote assistance functions, together
with remote control item 3448 and radio sensors 2 modules
L4512/12
L4619
N4919
NT4919
L4919
3482
RADIO MAGNETIC AND GLASS BREAKING DETECTOR

magnetic opening detector for doors and windows it can be connected to additional magnetic wire
contacts (items 3510, 3511 and 3513) - powered by
one 3.6 V 1/2 AA battery, included
glass piezoelectric detector - protection of windows
with 3-metre maximum diagonal opening - powered
by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V battery, included

detector for the protection of shutters or
similar winding shutters, consisting of a cable
detector and radio transmitter - possibility of also
controlling an opening magnet (included) for
perimeter control - powered by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
REMOTE CONTROL FOR REMOTE ASSISTANCE
radio remote control for sending remote assistance
notifications - it can be programmed automatically
using the HC/NT4618 radio receiver - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included - battery life 2 years
RADIO FLOOD DETECTORS

detector with sensor, for detecting flooding
caused by any type of liquids - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included. To be
furnished with front cover plate and
key covers and item L/N/NT4919 - 2 modules
PAIR OF KEY COVERS
for flood detector, item L4619
FLOOD SENSOR
mode
PASSIVE INFRARED RADIO DETECTOR

passive infrared volumetric presence detector - alarm
LED with memory 12-metre range, 90 angular
opening, 17 bands over 4 floors possibility of pulse
counter function activation - powered by 1 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms - Management devices with IR remote control
4072L
N4600/4
NT4070
N4603/4
4072L*
3505/12
4072A*

item E46ADCN
12 V 12 Ah battery
Item
N4600/4
NT4600/4
L4600/4
N4603/4
NT4603/4
L4603/4

item E47ADCN
N4604
NT4604
L4604
procedure explained in the Devices and common accessories page.
N4070*
NT4070*
4070*
INTERNAL SIREN
4050
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators.These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the Devices and common accessories page.
3507/6
L4600/4
4050
N4604
3505/12
Item
L4604
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

compact system central unit - it enables system
arming/disarming, 4-zone control, programming of
up 30 remote controls, system test completion, and
management of alarms, including their notifications
and memory - possibility of setting alarm times and
tripping delays of zone 1 - 3 modules
ZONE 1-4 DIVIDER

the IR remote control, item 4050 - pushbuttons for
the control of 4 zones - zone status and system status
LED notifications - possibility of disabling visual and
sound notifications. Only for use with central units
item 3486 and item L/N/NT4600/4 - 2 modules
CONNECTOR
the remote control, item 4050 - LED system status
notification - possibility of disabling visual and sound
notifications - possibility of setting the activation of
fixed system zones - auxiliary channel available for
activation of access controls (electric locks). Only for
use with central units item 3486 and item
L/N/NT4600/4 - 2 modules
REMOTE CONTROL
portable infrared remote control for system arming/
disarming - it can be automatically coded from the
central unit - powered by two CR1616 3 V lithium
batteries, included - battery operation time
50,000 operations
BATTERIES
6 V battery for internal siren item N/NT/L4070
3506
7.2 V battery for central unit, item 3485/B
L4380/B
6 V spare battery for central unit, item L/N/NT4601

and connector, item L/N/NT4608
TAMPER
anti-tamper device for the protection of burglar-alarm
mounted box
L4630

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Temperature control
N4695
N4692
Item
N4695
NT4695
L4695
3550
NT4695
N4693
3550
N4891
NT4692FAN
Item
3455

enclosures
N4577
NT4577
L4577
BATTERY
F430/2
3507/6
F430/4
N4891
NT4891
L4891
3457
LOCAL DISPLAY
L/N/NT4685
EXTERNAL SENSOR
Local Display external sensor
L4693
3456
NT4685
NT4692
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

PC - 3 modules
L4695
3480
F482
RADIO TEMPERATURE SENSOR

radio sensor for the measurement of external
temperature - use with appropriate receiving radio
interface, item L/N/NT4577 - solar cell or battery
powered - IP65 wall mounted enclosure
SENSOR RECEIVING RADIO INTERFACES
temperature radio sensor receiving radio interface,
item 3455 - 27 Vdc power supply from BUS
- 2 modules
ACTUATORS

for switching on the connected zone - basic enclosure
SENSORS
N4693
NT4693
L4693
N4692
NT4692
L4692
N4692FAN
NT4692FAN
L4692FAN

cooling systems - temperature measurement range
3 - 40 C - 2 modules
3456
KNOB SENSORS

be controlled using Touch Screen and
Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic mechanism,
to facilitate installation behind the air
conditioning unit. IR cable length 2 m, power
supply from the 27 V bus
FAN COIL KNOB SENSORS

OFF and antifreeze mode selection, with manual/
automatic fan-coil Hydro-relax system speed selection
- 2 modules
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Energy Management
N4672N
NT4672N
3508BUS
F521
Item
F520
3523
3522
F521
F522
F523
F524
F522
F523
L4673
3522
3523
F524
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
on Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. DIN rail
mounting version - 1 module The device is supplied
with 1 toroid
f522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse
output. The values measured can be displayed on
Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic
module version, for hidden installation. Power
It includes a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids for the
load consumption module. 1 relay 10 A for
incandescent lamps and 4 A for fluorescent lamps or
ferromagnetic transformers and 500 W for LED lamps
and compact fluorescent lamps - Bistable relay with
zero crossing for load control Management and/or
Automation functions. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module. Earth leakage current control made
possible by connecting an additional toroid, item 3523
1 relay actuator for incandescent lamps, 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers, and
Bistable relay with zero crossing for load control
mounting version - 1 module
device for the central management of energy
consumption data from a maximum of 10 lines
(detected using a bus meter with toroids, F520, load
control unit, F521, or pulse counter interfaces, 3522).
The data can be displayed using appropriate integrated
web pages, connecting the device to a LAN network
through the Ethernet port. It gives the possibility of
configuring several tariffs, and to download the
data. The device features microSD housing for the
backup of the recorded data. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module - Power supply from 27 V BUS
Item
N4672N
NT4672N
L4672N
N4673
NT4673
L4673
3508BUS

1 relay actuator 10 A for incandescent lamps 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers and
for Load Control Management and/or Automation
functions. Forced load operation pushbutton - flush
mounted version 2 modules
panel for the display and the control of the loads
connected to the actuators
ACCESSORIES
plug-in clamp for BUS connection - width 3.81 mm
3508U2
3508U3
SYSTEM DIAGRAM FOR THE DISPLAY OF THE ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED,
AND LOAD MANAGEMENT
Photovoltaic
panels
Pulse
counter
interface
BUS
2
Actuator
White colour device
Tech colour device
Solar thermal panels
Electricity
meter

NOTE:
L4672N
Neutral item
Load control
central unit
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
F441
346030
F500N
F441M
L4561N
L4560
L4563
L4651M2
Item
346030
AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS

N4563
NT4563
L4563
346830

source can be installed - 2 DIN modules - electric power
supply by means of item 346000
F441

SC
F441M
F500N
N4560
NT4560
L4560
L4561N
3495
L4651M2
SOUND SOURCES
BASIC STEREO SYSTEM DIAGRAM WITH ONE SOUND SOURCE

Loudspeaker

the IR transmitter
to the RCA input item L/N/NT4560
White colour device
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
BUS - Cable 336904
2
Line terminator
Compact power
supply 346030
Sound sources
BUS - Cable 336904
CONTROLS
NOTE:
LOCAL DISPLAY
Management, Scenarios - 2 modules it replaces item L/N/NT4685
N4891
NT4891
L4891

KNOB CONTROLS
flush mounted knob operated device for ON/OFF,
volume control, programmed radio station and CD
track change - 2 modules
Item
Radio tuner
F500N
Tech colour device
Stereo control
L4561N
Neutral item
RCA input
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
336982
L4562
F502
F503
N4575N
N4575SB
N4654N
N4565
H4570
L4567
3529
L4569
3499
L4668BUS/35
AMPLIFIERS
Item
L4562
F502

F503
N4565
NT4565
L4565

boxes - power 12 W
H4570
Item
L4566

L4668BUS/35
L4668BUS/60
NOTE:
PATCH CORD
Type
BUS-BUS
BUS-BUS
White colour device
Length (cm)
35
60
Tech colour device
346841
346851
L4568
346850

L4568

336982
336984
336983
3499
346841

SYSTEM DEVICES
8-contact connector for the connection of items F500N,
L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS 5 and 6)
LINE TERMINATOR
node outputs

- 4 DIN modules
346850

L4569
L4566/10
336983
L4566/10
346851
L4567
L4566
336984
N4654N
NT4654N
L4654N
3529

REMOTE CONTROLS
1.5 V AAA batteries
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
E46ADCN
Item
E46ADCN*
E47ADCN*
E47/12
E49
346000
346020
346030
E47ADCN
E47/12
3559
335919
POWER SUPPLIES
power supply as above 230 Vac - installation on DIN rail
with 8 module space requirement for wall mounted
compact power supply for Temperature control, Energy
Management and Automation systems - input 230 Vac,
output 27 Vdc - maximum power delivered 600 mA 2 DIN modules
SELV device
3545
VARIOUS ACCESSORIES
Item
3515

335919
3559
ADAPTERS
adapter for the installation of 2 LIVINGLIGHT modules
on DIN 35 rail
F80AL
as above - 3 modules
F400A
VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER SALES SERVICE

3545
System
Power supply
E46ADCN
Automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
(1)
E47ADCN
E47/12
(2)
(3)

(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barriers)
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
E49
346000
346020
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3501/0
3501/GEN
3501/GR
3501/AMB
3501/AUX
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
Item
3504

attempts
F115/8B
3501/0
502NPA

with anti-tamper device 2 modules complete
with support
ANGULAR BOX
with antitamper device 2 modules complete with
frame and white cover plate (LB)
502PA
L4669
L4669/500
CONNECTION CABLES
L4669HF

L4669S

336904
System
3501/4
Cable
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
L4669S
Automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
336904
(2)(2)
(2)(2)

using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR
software, supplied as standard on CD, and Secure Digit
(SD) memory card. It replaces item 3503N.

configurator 0
3501/1
configurator 1
3501/2
configurator 2
3501/3
configurator 3
3501/4
configurator 4
3501/5
configurator 5
3501/6
configurator 6
3501/7
configurator 7
3501/8
configurator 8
3501/9
configurator 9
3501/GEN
configurator GEN
3501/GR
configurator GR
3501/AMB
configurator AMB
3501/AUX
configurator AUX
3501/ON
configurator ON
3501/OFF
configurator OFF
3501/OI
configurator OI
3501/TM

configurator PUL
configurator SLA
configurator CEN
configurator
configurator M
3501K
CONFIGURATOR KIT
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
F115/8A
3501/3
502PA
336904
Item
3501/2

PUL, SLA, CEN, ,
M
3501K/1
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
3501/1

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Key covers for MY HOME controls
1 FUNCTION KEY COVERS

NEUTRAL LIGHTABLE KEY COVERS
1 module
2 modules
Description
Item
Item
NEUTRAL KEY COVER WITH

LIGHTABLE BOTTOM SECTION
NT4915N
NT4915M2N
L4915N
L4915M2N
HIGH BRIGHTNESS COVER
N4915LN
N4915M2LN
N4915LN
NT4915N
L4915N
NT4915AN
NT4915BN
NT4915DN
NT4915FN
NT4915M2ADN
NT4915DD
NT4915MR
KEY COVERS WITH DIFFUSER AND LIGHTABLE SYMBOL

Description
KEY COVER WITH
LIGHT SYMBOL
KEY COVER WITH

STAIRCASE LIGHT SYMBOL
KEY COVER WITH

BELL SYMBOL
KEY COVER WITH

KEY SYMBOL
1 module
2 modules
Item
Item
N4915AN
N4915M2AN
NT4915AN
NT4915M2AN
L4915AN
L4915M2AN
N4915BN
N4915M2BN
NT4915BN
NT4915M2BN
L4915BN
L4915M2BN
N4915DN
N4915M2DN
NT4915DN
NT4915M2DN
L4915DN
L4915M2DN
N4915FN
N4915M2FN
NT4915FN
NT4915M2FN
L4915FN
L4915M2FN
N4915M2ADN
KEY COVER WITH

DIMMER SYMBOL
NT4915M2ADN
L4915M2ADN
N4915DD
KEY COVER WITH

DO NOT DISTURB SYMBOL
NT4915DD
L4915DD
N4915MR
KEY COVER WITH

REARRANGE THE ROOM SYMBOL
NT4915MR
L4915MR
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
2 FUNCTION KEY COVERS

NEUTRAL LIGHTABLE KEY COVERS
1 module
2 modules
Description
Item
Item
NEUTRAL KEY COVER WITH

LIGHTABLE TOP AND BOTTOM
SECTION
N4911N
N4911M2N
NT4911N
NT4911M2N
L4911N
L4911M2N
N4911N
NT4911N
L4911N
NT4911AFN
NT4911AGN
NT4911AHN
NT4911AIN
NT4911BFN
KEY COVERS WITH 2 DIFFUSERS AND LIGHTABLE SYMBOLS

Description
KEY COVER WITH LIGHT ON-OFF
SYMBOL AND GEN SCREEN
PRINTING
KEY COVER WITH

ON OFF SYMBOLS
KEY COVER WITH

UP DOWN SYMBOLS
KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS

+ TOP AND
- BOTTOM
KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS
ADJUSTMENT OFF
ADJUSTMENT ON
1 module
2 modules
Item
Item
N4911AFN
N4911M2AFN
NT4911AFN
NT4911M2AFN
L4911AFN
L4911M2AFN
N4911AGN
N4911M2AGN
NT4911AGN
NT4911M2AGN
L4911AGN
L4911M2AGN
N4911AHN
N4911M2AHN
NT4911AHN
NT4911M2AHN
L4911AHN
L4911M2AHN
N4911ADN
NT4911ADN
L4911ADN
N4911AIN
N4911M2AIN
NT4911AIN
NT4911M2AIN
L4911AIN
L4911M2AIN
NT4911ADN
N4911BFN
KEY COVER WITH CHANGE SOURCE
AND CHANGE TRACK SYMBOLS
NT4911BFN
L4911BFN

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME - BUS SCS
KEY COVERS THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED WITH DIFFUSERS, AVAILABLE IN KIT

KEY COVERS THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED
1 module
2 modules
Description
Item
Item
1 FUNCTION KEY COVER

THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED
WITH 1 DIFFUSER*
N4915TN
N4915M2TN
NT4915TN
NT4915M2TN
L4915TN
L4915M2TN
2 FUNCTION KEY COVER

THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED
WITH 2 DIFFUSERS*
N4911TN
N4911M2TN
NT4911TN
NT4911M2TN
L4911TN
L4911M2TN
Description
Item
KIT COMPOSITION AS
SHOWN ON THE SIDE
(5 DIFFUSERS EACH TYPE)
N4915KIT
1 FUNCTION
2 FUNCTIONS
can be customised
with 1 diffuser
can be customised
with 2 diffusers
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
NT4915KIT
L4915KIT
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
Description
Item
KIT COMPOSITION AS
SHOWN ON THE SIDE
(5 DIFFUSERS EACH TYPE)
N4915KIT1
Description
Item
NT4915KIT1
L4915KIT1
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
KIT WITH DIFFUSER SHOWN ON

THE SIDE (50 DIFFUSERS)
N4915SETBL
NT4915SETBL
L4915SETBL
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
MY HOME
F558
F551
Item
F550C6
L4665L20
CONNECTOR FOR VERTICAL PATCHING

cat. 6 module for the patching of the wiring inside the
star centre cabinet. Reversible connectors for the
connection of cables to the user sockets from the top
or from the floor - 1 DIN module
DIGITAL SIGNAL DEVICES
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several switches can be added
to setup more lines - 4 DIN modules
F551
TELEPHONE SIGNAL DEVICES

xDSL filter with 3 way telephone distribution frame
for the separation of the ADSL data line from the
telephone line. Possibility of connection to an 8 output
telephone distribution frame, item F555, to increase
the number of lines - 2 DIN modules
8 output telephone distribution frame to distribute
1 telephone line to 8 different sockets, or 2 telephone
lines to 4 sockets. Possibility of connection to several
distribution frames to increase the number of lines 4 DIN modules
F558
F555
ACCESSORIES
9 V 1.6 A power supply for the power supply to the
switch, item F551 - 1.5 DIN modules
F552
L4665L20
L4665L40
FLAT type patch cord with RJ45 connectors - category

6 - PVC cable sheath - with built in SNAGGLE - in
accordance with EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA 568 A/B
standards - length 20 cm
patch cord as above - length 40 cm
NT4210D
32754
32871
LSZH
1000m
coil
32872
PVC
1000m
coil
N4279C6A
NT4279C6A
L4279C6A
N4202D
NT4202D
L4202D
N4269F
NT4269F
L4269F
N4210D
NT4210D
L4210D
telephone cable, with RJ45 and RJ11 connectors,

for the connection of telephone devices with RJ11
connector to devices with RJ45 connector - length
200 cm
L4664
NT4202D
CAT. 6 CABLES
category 6 U/UTP unshielded cable with 24 AWG (0.51) solid
copper conductors, with polyolefin insulation, 4 pair of twisted
conductors with internal partition - performance 500 MHz - in
accordance with ISO/IEC 11801 and 2.0, EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA
568 B2.10 standards - blue
Cable sheath
Length
Packaging
LSZH
305m
coil
Item
TELEVISION SIGNAL DEVICES

universal TV/SAT distribution frame (52400 MHz)
for the distribution of the signal to 6 separate TV
sockets. F type connection clamps - 4 DIN modules
F553
NT4279C6A
N4214D
NT4214D
L4214D
RJ45 CONNECTORS
RJ45 connectors fitted with metal screen,
identification plate, and dust cover - 1 module
TELEVISION SIGNAL CONNECTOR

direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user antenna
systems, including remotely powered and centralised
systems, and single use and centralised satellite
systems with feed-through current and signal for
channel selection - shielded connection clamps with
captive screws - diam. 9.5 mm - male connector 1 module
TV CONNECTOR F TYPE
TV coaxial connector F type - impedance 75 Ohm screw connection - 1 module
TV + RD + SAT CONNECTOR
direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user TV
antenna systems, including remotely powered and
centralised shunted systems, and single use and
centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection,
and radio systems - male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector
- 9.5 mm diam. female radio and SAT connector - for
installation inside rectangular box, item 503E, item
504E, item 506L- 2 modules
DEMIXED TV +SAT CONNECTOR
demixed direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user
HS4214D TV antenna systems, including remotely
powered and centralised shunted systems, single
use and centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection
- male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector - SAT connector
F type- 1 module

NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
HOTEL OFFER RANGE

LN4549
NT4915TN
L4177
LN4549
LN4548
LN4649
LN4648
N4547
NT4547
L4547
N4915DD
NT4915DD
L4915DD
N4915MR
NT4915MR
L4915MR
N4373H
NT4915DD
NT4915MR
N4033
N4547
Item
N4915SETBL
BADGE-HOLDER POCKET
switch-off delay - power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules
hotel room with RFID technology recognition - slot
light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off delay
- power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules - to be
MY HOME SYSTEM BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS

switch-off delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules
hotel room with RFID technology recognition
- slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off
delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules - to be
FRONT COVERS FOR BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS

front cover for traditional or My Home badge-holder
pocket
Item
N4373H
NT4373H
L4373H
N4915TN
NT4915TN
L4915TN
N4915SETBL
NT4915SETBL
L4915SETBL
N4177*
NT4177 *
L4177*
LAMPHOLDER FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING

do not disturb and rearrange the room use 2 LEDs
item LN4742V12T (12 V)
KEY COVER THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED AND KIT OF DIFFUSERS

key cover for rocker control devices
that can be customised with lightable diffuser
kit of 50 lightable diffusers with bed light symbol
SHAVER SOCKETS
shaver socket with insulation transformer
- input voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
115/230 Vac 20 VA
* Note: in case of installation using AIR cover plates, the box extension must be used to make
wiring easier
N4033
NT4033
L4033
CORD PUSHBUTTONS
cord pushbutton 1 P NO 10 A for bathroom alarm
KEY COVERS WITH SYMBOLS

do not disturb symbol
rearrange the room symbol
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

Video display and cameras
344401
344413
Item
344400
344401
344411
344412
391658
VIDEO DISPLAY
2 wire handsfree video handset for flush mounted
installation. With 2.5 colour LCD display with PC
customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the
management of the following MY HOME applications:
video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, automation (scenarios), and burglar
alarm. Keys available: navigation, auto-switch on,
door lock release, and handsfree connection LED
signalling for: bell exclusion, door status and
connection. Firmware update/programming USB port.
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item
506E boxes. To be completed with the front covers
and front cover plates. It can be configured
using physical configurators, or using the
programming and configuration software supplied
as above - for installation with AIR cover plates
391659
391647
2 WIRE INDOOR CAMERAS

flush mounted colour camera. 3.7 mm fixed optics,
1/3 CCD, 380 horizontal lines resolution. With
microphone. The device must be configured by
connecting physical configurators - 2 modules
Item
391658
391659
391657
COAX INDOOR CAMERAS

camera as above - with video signal output in
coaxial cable - power supply 12 Vdc - 120 mA (max)
391648
391649
391647
front cover
344413
344411
344412
Video display
LIVINGLIGHT AIR version
Example of assembled Video Display
including the cover plate
Video display
LIVINGLIGHT version
Anthracite
front cover
Tech front
cover
White front
cover
Cover plate
Cover plate
Cover plate
NOTE:
White colour device
Tech colour device
Neutral item
CONTENTS
MTIX catalogue
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

F422
Item
AM4890
AM4890
F422
TOUCH SCREEN
alarm, Temperature control, Sound system, Scenarios,
22C
Load management and Consumption display.
Front USB connector for configuration.
Device set up for programming with Open Web Net
protocol language. It replaces item AM5864
Item
H4687
MHVISUAL
3496
IP TOUCH SCREEN ADAPTER

used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, or on
the server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio),
through the loudspeakers of the sound system
- to be installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units
F429
TOUCH SCREEN VIDEO

flush-mounted panel PC with 15 Touch Screen display
to control the MY HOME system by means of MHVisual
software
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
control & management software for the Lighting,
Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature control,
Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management and
Video monitoring system functions
F422
SCS-SCS INTERFACE
interface between systems based on SCS BUS
dedicated to different functions - 2 shallow DIN
modules
F426

SCS/EIB interface - to control EIB system with MY HOME
systems - 2 DIN modules
F429
SCS/DALI INTERFACE
DALI dimmer, 8 maximum load independent outputs
16 230 Va.c. ballasts, direct load control pushbutton
- 6 DIN modules
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the

development of integration applications.
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by iPad devices thanks

to BTicino MY HOME, the ocial BTicino application which can be
downloaded from iTunes, in the Free version as well.
MY HOME - BUS SCS

MH200N
3486
SCENARIO MODULE
device for saving 16 scenarios for automation, sound
system, temperature control, and video door entry
system applications - 2 DIN modules
Item
F420
MH200N
346020
F454
SCENARIO PROGRAMMER
Automation, temperature control and burglar alarm
mini power supply for the powering of the MH200N
scenario programmer - 2 DIN modules

audio/video web server for the remote control of
the system using web pages or the MY HOME portal.
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software
- 6 DIN modules - it replaces items F453 and F453AV
F461/2
Item
F461/2
F462
F551
C9451
C9451
F454

exchange contact, 230 Vac power supply 3 DIN modules

GSM telephone actuator for enabling/disabling of loads
via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino timer
thermostats L/N/NT4450 and the possibility of
managing 2 alarm inputs - 4 DIN modules
SWITCHES
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several Switches can be added to
setup more lines - Powered by power supply item F552
- 4 DIN modules
reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with
9 RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
included
CENTRAL UNIT WITH COMMUNICATOR

screen. It can be controlled by transponder and keypad.
Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas, and
possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted with
PSTM telephone communicator for alarm forwarding.
Can be programmed using the TiSecurity POLYX
application. Wall mounted installation with metallic
item 3506 battery, supplied as standard
3486*
display of the configuration on the screen. It can be
controlled by the IR remote control, transponder and
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas,
and possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted
with PSTM and GSM telephone communicator for
alarm forwarding. Can be programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted installation
with metallic bracket supplied or flush mounted in
MULTIBOX boxes. Battery powered, using item
3507/6 battery
(*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CE179-2
3485*
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for

the development of integration applications.
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
AM5831M2
AM5832/2
AM5787
3529
Item
AM5831M2
AM5832/2
AM5832/3
AM5787
AM5832/3
SPECIAL CONTROL
special control can drive an actuator performing all
the standard functions of a control and also some
special functions: activation of 4 scenarios saved in the
item F420 module, timings, activation of an actuator
installed on a different bus from the control, selection
of the fixed adjustment level and the dimmer softstart
and soft-stop speed, sound system, door lock
operation control, call to the floor control, switching
ON staircase lights and management of auxiliary
channels. To be completed with 1 or 2-module key
covers with 1 or 2 functions - 2 modules
CONTROLS FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS
lowered control which can drive a single actuator
for single or double loads or two actuators for single
loads or independent double loads to be completed
with 1 2-module key cover for controls with one or two
functions or 2 1-module key covers with one or two
functions - 2 green/red two-colour LEDs- 2 modules
control which can drive three actuators for single or
independent double loads to be completed with
3 1-module key covers for controls with one or two
functions- 6 green/red two-colour LEDs - 3 modules
CONTROLS PROTECTED WITH CODE

device which can save up to 30 transponders (badges)
to actuate protected controls - 2 modules
TRANSPONDER
portable badge when brought close to the
transponder reader it activates it allowing the transfer
of the signal generated on the BUS does not require
batteries for power can be automatically coded by
means of the transponder reader
as above- key-ring
tran
HIG
3540
Item
3477
F428
F425
AM5834
3529
3530S
AM5834
3540
CONTACT INTERFACE
independent contacts to control 2 actuators for
single-function loads or to control 1 actuator for
double-function loads (shutters) accepts
in input two traditional switches or pushbuttons
with NO and NC contact or a traditional two-way
switch or interlocked pushbuttons
MEMORY MODULE
module to save the actuator status to reset the light
automation system when there is a black-out
2 shallow DIN modules

receiver for the remote control by means of remote
control 3529 - up to 16 actuations or scenarios saved
in the scenario module F420 and scenario programmer
MH200N - 2 modules
IR REMOTE CONTROL
device for receiver control (up to 16 receivers
within the same room) - possibility to select up to
16 channels directly - powered by two 1.5 V AAA
batteries
scenario control protected with transponder - allows

you to store up to thirty transponders (badges) for
controlling 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
AM5787/4
3530S
AM5787/4
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
special controls and controls

for single and double loads
NOTE: the control keys are supplied with the device as

standard. The customer must select the key covers.
TY
upper pushbutton
control key
lower pushbutton
LED
Warning:
only controls with production batch 03W18 or higher can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-rings). The older readers only work with item 3530 (badge).
key cover
1 function
1 module
key cover
2 functions
1 module
key cover
1 function
2 modules
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
AM5658
AM5659
Item

switching ON of the light using the front pushbutton,
and automatic switching off based on brightness
level and movement. Switch off delay and brightness
sensor threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
passive infrared sensor for the detection of
movement and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m
wide by 180 and 9 m field depth at an installation
height of 1.2 m. Switch off delay and brightness
sensor threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
AM5658
AM5659
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from
BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using onetwoway
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001),
physical or virtual configuration
BMSE2005
remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or
virtual configuration
BMSE2003
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply
from BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using
one-two-way remote control(BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001), physical or virtual configuration
BMSE2004
connection, coverage 10 m wide by 140, 27 m (210
m2) field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply
from BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using
onetwo-way remote control(BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001), physical or virtual configuration
BMSE2005
configuration
Lighting Management Catalogue.
Item
BMSE2002
Management of lighting level depending on the

presence of people and the level of natural light: this
means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a big
contribution to energy savings. In the service sector,
Operation
Type of
operation
Type of sensor
Power supply
Absorption
IP protection index
Coverage at 2.5 m
Sensitivity (lux)
Factory settings
Type of connection
BMSE1001
BMSE2001
ceiling
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
10 mA
IP20
6 m (28 m2)
90/360
4
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
No
No
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
IP42
2 x 12 m (24 m2)
90/30
6
1 - 2000
0 seconds 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
BMSE2002
wall/ceiling
BMSE2003
BMSE2004
wall/ceiling
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
Walkthrough
PIR
PIR
PIR
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
27 Vdc from BUS
12 mA
12 mA
12 mA
IP42
IP42
IP42
11 x 14 m (120 m2)
2 x 9+9 m (36 m2)
10 x 27 m (210 m2)
60/90
90/30
60/140
6
6
6
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
1 - 2000
0 seconds 255 hours
0 seconds 255 hours
0 seconds 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
With clamp and RJ45
UP TO
55%
SAVINGS
in compliance with
EN15193 standard
BMSE2005
wall/ceiling
Auto/Eco/
Walkthrough
PIR+US
27 Vdc from BUS
17 mA
IP42
14 x 7 m (77 m2)
60/180
6
1 - 2000
0 sec. 255 hours
(-5) (+45) C
Yes
Yes
With clamp and RJ45
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
AM5851M2
3475
FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS

actuator/control with 2 independent relays for single,
double or mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A incandescent
lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers and 70 W for fluorescent
lamps logic interlock of the relays by configuration.
The devices can also be configured to manage a remote
actuator 2 modules
actuator with 1 relay with control key for single
loads; 6A resistive or incandescence lamps, 2 A cos
0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W
fluorescent lamps to be completed with 2-module
key covers for single or double function
Item
AM5851M2
AM5851/1
Example of use of actuator item AM5851M2 in the actuator and

remote control mode. Press the left key cover to control the
BASIC MODULE ACTUATORS

actuator with 1 relay for single loads; 2A resistive
or incandescente lamps and 2A cos 0.5 for
installation in ceiling light cups or in flush
mounted boxes behind control devices
actuator with 1 relay for single loads; 2A
resistive or incandescente lamps, 2A cos 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers accepts a traditional
pushbutton with NO contact in input
3475
3476
Control key cover

for remote actuator
management
Actuator key cover for

light management

Actuators
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
LED lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
Compact fluorescent
lamps
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
Motor reducers
for shutters 3)
AM5851M2
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
AM5851/1
6A
1380 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
150 W
Max. 3 lamps
0.65 A
150 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
3475
3476
2A
460 W
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
Notes:
2) in order to calculate the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer to a 100
3) the
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F411/1N
Item
F411/1N
F411/2
F411/4
F411/1NC
F411/2
F411/1NC
F411/4
F411/2NC
BMSW1001

fluorescent lamps. At switch ON, the contact of the
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

fluorescent lamps. At switch ON, the contact of the
- 6 DIN modules
Item
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003

Actuators
F411/1N
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
10 A
2300 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4A
920 W
Compact fluorescent
lamps
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
Electronic
transformers
4A
920 W
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
Motor reducers
for shutters 3)
-
LED lamps
F411/2
6A
1380 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
250 W
Max. 4 lamps
1A
230 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/4
2A
460 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
0.3 A
70 W
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
2A
460 W
F411/1NC
10 A
2300 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
500 W
Max. 10 lamps
4A
920 W
4 A cos 0.5
920 VA
F411/2 NC
6A
1380 W
0.65 A
150 W
0.65 A
150 W
1 A cos 0.5
230 VA
BMSW1001
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1002
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
BMSW1003
16 A
3680 W
2.1 A
500 VA
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
16 A
3680 W
16 A
3680 W
Notes:
3) the
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N
BMDI1001
F414
F415
F416U1

1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent
lamps or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single
loads up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection 27 Vdc power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility
of connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with
direct load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted
version 2 modules
Item
BMDI1001
F413N
F414
F415
F417U2
F429

- 6 DIN modules
Item
F416U1
F417U2
F429

Actuators
BMDI1001
Type
Energy saving
incandescent and
halogen lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
LED lamps
-
Linear fluorescent
lamps 1)
4.3 A
1000 VA
Compact fluorescent
lamps
4.3 A
1000 VA
Electronic
transformers
-
Ferromagnetic
transformers 2)
-
Motor reducers
for shutters 3)
-
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
F413N
F414
0.25 - 4.3 A
60 - 1000 VA
2 A 460 W 4)
for LED
-
F415
0.25 - 1.7 A
60 - 400 VA
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F416U1
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
4.3 A
40 - 1000 W
F417U2
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
1.7 A
40 - 400 W
Notes:
3) the
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3486
Item
3485*
3486*
3483
3484*
3485B
3485

COMMUNICATOR
PSTN telephone communicator for alarm forwarding.
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone communicator,
item 3507/6, not supplied
AM5787/4
Item
AM5787/4*
AM5783/8
AM5786*
AM5783/8
AREA 1-4 DIVIDER


KEYPAD CONNECTOR
burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486
- 2 modules

Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS
AM5787
Item
AM5787*
3530S*
3540
transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit.
AM5790
N4640
Item
BURGLAR-ALARM KIT
burglar-alarm expandable kit formed of:
- 1 central unit item 3485B
- 2 IR sensors item N4640
- 1 power supply item E46ADCN
- 1 external siren item 4072L
- 1 magnetic contact item 3511
- various configurators
MHKIT85N
TRANSPONDER
tran
HIG
3540*
AM57855
EC
H S
spo
URI
nde
TY
AM5790*

AM5791*
AM5785
3549
KEY DISCONNECTOR
by means of a mechanical key - LED system
status notification fitted with keyhole
cover key with 10,000 combinations 2 modules

AM5791B
N4640
N4640B
AM5791

MY HOME - BUS SCS
AM5792
Item
3480*
F482
3480
F482
3510M

interface module for two NC/NA electromagnetic
contact lines elettromagnetici NC/NA - possibility of
connecting a balanced and unbalanced contact
protection line alarm indication LED with tripping
memory auxiliary pre-alarm channel that can be
activated - basic module
electromagnetic contact lines and cable detector for
shutters - 2 DIN
3514
Item
3514
3516
3480V12
F482V12
3510
3510M
3510PB
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 V OUTPUT

contact interface module with 12V output to connect a
sensor with mechanical wire for shutters (item 3514)
or similar, or a normally closed or open contact and
an IR barrier for windows to the system - basic module
MAGNETIC CONTACTS
3511
3512

floor installation
3513

metal surfaces
3518
3518

detector for the protection of shutters or shutters
diagonal opening
IR BARRIERS
3519
3518/50
3518/150
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS
AM5731/12
Item
3479
F481
3481
F483
AM5731/12
AM5732/12
3482

actuator module with multiple configuration and
relay output - C-NO-NC contacts, 24 V 0.4 A cos 0,4
- to be used for the repeating of various types of alarm
on the basis of its configuration. It can be activated by:
burglar alarms, flat battery signals, closing valve for
technical alarms - basic module
as above - 2 DIN

interface module to receive alarm signals from
AM5731/12 and AM5732/2 gas detector technical
alarm sensors availability of 5 12 Vac/dc input
optoisolated - basic module
as above - 2 DIN

12 Vac/dc transformer, item AM5734 or item F91/12E
- 2 modules
4072L
Item
4072L
3505/12
4072A
3482
LPG DETECTORS
transformer, item AM5734 or item F91/12E - 2 modules
FLOOD SENSOR
mode

item E46ADCN
12 V 12 Ah battery

item E47ADCN
procedure explained in the Devices and accessories page.
N4070
AM5732/12
3505/12
INTERNAL SIREN
procedure explained in the Devices and accessories page.
3507/6
BATTERIES
6 V battery for internal siren item N4070
7.2 V battery for central units, item 3485/B
3506
TAMPER
L4630
tamper-proof device for the protection of burglaralarm

mounted box
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Temperature control
AM5875
Item
AM5875
3550
AM5872
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

PC - 3 modules
enclosures
BATTERY
3507/6
3550
Item
F430/2
F430/4
3480
F482
3456
ACTUATORS

for switching ON the connected zone - basic enclosure
AM5872
KNOB SENSORS
3456

be controlled using Touch Screen.
Basic mechanism, to facilitate installation
behind the air conditioning unit. IR cable length
2 m, power supply from the 27 V BUS
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Energy management
F521
Item
F520
3523
3522
F521
F522
F523
F524
F522
F523
F524
3508BUS
3523
3522
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
on Touch Screen. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module
f522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse output.
The values measured can be displayed on Touch Screen.
Basic module version, for hidden installation. Power
Item

Integrates an electrical energy measurer for the
load consumption module. 1 relay - for single loads,
16 A resistive, 10 A for incandescent lamps, and 4 A
for fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers bistable relay with zero crossing for load control
mounting version - 1 module. Earth leakage current
control made possible by connecting an additional
toroid, item 3523
1 relay actuator - for single loads, 16 A resistive,
10 A for incandescent lamps, and 4 A for fluorescent
lamps or ferromagnetic transformers - Bistable
relay with zero crossing for load control Management
and/or Automation functions. DIN rail mounting
version - 1 module
device for the centralisation of the power consumption
data from a max. of 10 lines (measured with F520
measurers with toroids, F521 load control unit or 3522
pulse-counter interface). The data can be displayed
by integrated web pages connecting the device to a
LAN network by its Ethernet port. It allows the
configuration of different tariffs and the downloading
of data. The device has a slot for microSD for further
backup of the recorded data.
Version for fixing on DIN rails - 1 module
Power supply from 27 V BUS
SYSTEM DIAGRAM FOR THE DISPLAY OF THE ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED, AND LOAD
MANAGEMENT
ACCESSORIES
plug-in clamp for BUS connection
- width 3.81 mm
3508BUS
3508U2
3508U3
Solar thermal panels
Photovoltaic
panels
Electricity
meter
Pulse
counter
interface
BUS
2
Washing
machine
Microwave
oven
Actuator
Actuator
Load control
central unit
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
F441
L4561N
Item
346030
346030
AM5831M2
AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS

F441
SC
F500N
AM5740
L4561N
3495
AM5740
F441M
346830
F441M
F500N
AM5742
F502
F503
L4668BUS/35
AMPLIFIERS
Item
AM5742

source can be installed - 2 DIN module - electric power
supply using item 346000
F502

F503


SOUND SOURCES
the IR transmitter
to the RCA input item AM5740
PATCH CORDS
Type
BUS-BUS
BUS-BUS
L4668BUS/35
L4668BUS/60
Length (cm)
35
60
BASIC STEREO SYSTEM DIAGRAM WITH ONE SOUND SOURCE

Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Amplifier
Amplifier
BUS - Cable 336904
2
Line terminator
Compact power
supply 346030
Sound sources
AM5831M2
CONTROLS
BUS - Cable 336904
Radio tuner
F500N
Stereo control
L4561N
RCA input
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
N4565
336985
H4570
L4567
L4569
346851
L4566
L4566/10
L4568
3529
Item
N4565
H4570
L4567
L4569

boxes - power 12 W
L4566/10

L4568

LINE TERMINATOR
node outputs
346841
346850
AM5834
3529
AM5834
3499
346851
L4566
346850
336985


346841

SYSTEM DEVICES
8-contact connector for the connection of items
F500N, L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS
5 and 6)
Item


3499

- 4 DIN modules

REMOTE CONTROLS
1.5 V AAA batteries
MY HOME - BUS SCS
E46ADCN
Item
E46ADCN*
E47ADCN*
E47/12
E49
POWER SUPPLIES
power supply as above - installation on DIN rail with
8 module space requirement for wall mounted
compact power supply for Temperature control and
Automation systems - input 230 Vac, output 27 Vdc maximum power delivered 600 mA - 2 DIN modules
346000
346020
346030
3559
335919
E47ADCN
E47/12
VARIOUS ACCESSORIES
Item
3515

335919
3559
VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER-SALES SERVICE

3545

SELV device
3545
System
Power supply
E46ADCN
Automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
(1)

(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barrier)
E47ADCN
E47/12
(2)
(3)
E49
346000
346020
Mtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3501/0
F115/8A
F115/8B
502PA
L4669
L4669/500
3501/GR
3501/AMB
3501/AUX
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
502PA
336904
Item
3504

attempts
with tamper-proof device 2 modules complete
with support
ANGULAR BOX
with tamper-proof device 2 modules complete
with frame and white cover plate (LB)
CONNECTION CABLES
L4669HF

L4669S

336904
3501/4
3501/GEN
3501/0
502NPA
3501/3
System
Cable
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
L4669S
Automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
Sound system
336904
(2)(2)
(2)(2)

using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR software,
supplied as standard on CD, and (SD) memory card.
It replaces item 3503N

configurator 0
3501/1
configurator 1
3501/2
configurator 2
3501/3
configurator 3
3501/4
configurator 4
3501/5
configurator 5
3501/6
configurator 6
3501/7
configurator 7
3501/8
configurator 8
3501/9
configurator 9
3501/GEN
configurator GEN
3501/GR
configurator GR
3501/AMB
configurator AMB
3501/AUX
configurator AUX
3501/ON
configurator ON
3501/OFF
configurator OFF
3501/OI
configurator OI
3501/TM

configurator PUL
configurator SLA
configurator CEN
configurator
configurator M
3501K
CONFIGURATOR KIT
3501/PUL
3501/SLA
3501/CEN
3501/T
3501K/1
Item
3501/2

PUL, SLA, CEN, ,
M
L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF
3501/1
MY HOME - BUS SCS

KEY COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING
1-FUNCTION AND 2-FUNCTION KEY-COVERS WITHOUT

SILK-SCREEN PRINTING
AM5915AC
AM5915AA
AM5915BA
AM5915/2AA
AM5911
AM5911AF
AM5911AI
AM5915BE
AM5911BF
Item
WITH 1 FUNCTION SYMBOL
1 module
AM5911
AM5911/2
AM5911/2
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

1 and 2 functions
key cover without silk-screen printing - 1 mod.
key cover without silk-screen printing - 2 mod.
2 modules
Description
Item
Item
OFF
ON
GEN
DIMMER
LIGHT
BELL
EXHAUST FAN
KEY
TREBLE CLEF
NURSE
ALARM
AM5915AA
AM5915AB
AM5915AC
AM5915AD
AM5915BA
AM5915BB
AM5915BC
AM5915BD
AM5915BE
AM5915BF
AM5915BH
AM5915/2AA
AM5915/2AB
AM5915/2AC
AM5915/2AD
AM5915/2BA
AM5915/2BB
AM5915/2BC
AM5915/2BD
AM5915/2BE
AM5915/2BF
AM5915/2BH

WITH 2 FUNCTION SYMBOL
1 module
2 modules
Item
AM5911AF (*)
AM5911/2AF
ON - OFF - GEN
AM5911AG
AM5911/2AG
ON - OFF
AM5911AH
AM5911/2AH
UP DOWN
ON - OFF
AM5911AI (*)
AM5911/2AI
ADJUSTMENT
SOUND SYSTEM
AM5911BF (*)
SYMBOLS
AM5911BE (*)
TREBLE CLEF
NOTE (*): key covers that can be used with Sound System devices as well.
Description
Item
Mtix catalogue
HOTEL OFFER RANGE

AM5765
AM5460
Item
AM5765
A5765
AM5052H
AM5064VH
BADGE-HOLDER POCKET
badge-holder pocket with switch to switch ON lights
and devices in hotel rooms - slot light with built-in
lamp - switch-off delay - max. load 30 VA 230 Vac - 3
modules - white
pocket as above - colour ivory
L4546
Item
AM5460
A5460
SHAVER SOCKET
shaver socket with insulation transformer - input
voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
115/230 Vac 20 VA - 3 modules - colour white
shaver socket - as above - colour ivory
key-holder card for badge-holder pocket AM5765

- A5765
AM5006
AM5064VH
AM5006
CHANGEOVER SWITCH AND LAMPHOLDER

FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING
do not disturb and rearrange the room use 2
LEDs item LN4742V12T (12V)
AM5052H
PLEASETURB
DIS
DO NOT
PLEASEROOM
UP THE
MAKE
1P 16 A 250 Vac double-key changeover switch

1-0-2 with interlock and double signalling:
do not disturb and rearrange the room.
To be used with the lampholder AM5064VH
A5006
CORD PUSHBUTTON
1P (NO) 10 A - 250 Vac cord pushbutton
- colour white
1P (NO) 10 A - 250 Va.c. cord pushbutton
- colour ivory
CONTENTS
FLATWALL catalogue
FLATWALL catalogue
Base, device-holder supports and accessories

Wall Base MODUle
Item
3750
3751
3823
3750
3751
Description
base module h 240 - 270 cm for masonry walls consisting of: lower module back,
telescopic module back, upper end cap, bracket with adjustable feet, duct fastener
plate and masonry mesh
module as above, for plasterboard walls
ush mounted module h 150 cm for masonry and plasterboard walls
3823
DeViCe-HOlDer sUPPOrts aND aCCessOries

Item
3787
3788
3787
3788
3789
3801
3802
3805
3790
3756
3803
3789
3801
3805
3804
3828
3831
3802
3790
3803
3756
3828
3804
Description
device-holder support h30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod.
device-holder support for free fi xing of non DIN devices, or for fi xing cables when
used as a riser
device-holder support h60 cm, max. 72 DIN mod.
bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home 506E modular devices
bracket for the installation of 3 My Home 506E modular devices
pair of brackets for non modular central units
kit including a pair of trunkings and DIN rails for 3788
horizontal partition (optional)
extension module. to be used as joining piece when crossing oors.
Its use is compulsory in the riser solution
vertical partition h 300 cm to separate cables in the riser solution
multimedia box to be completed with F496/MF clips
cable gland kit for multimedia box
Finishing elements
PaNels
3794
3795
3796
3791
3792
3793
3797
3798
3829
3799
Item
Description
3794
front cover panel h 120 cm for 1 506E modular device
3795
front cover panel h 120 cm for 2 506E modular devices
3796
3791
front cover panel h 30 cm for 1 506E modular device
3792
3793
3797*
glass DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3798*
metal sheet DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3829
multimedia box panel h 30 cm
3799*
plastic DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3757
front cover panel h 30 cm
3759
3785
3786
3771
upper and lower end caps for 240 and 270 versions
3825
upper and lower end caps for 150 version
3761**
front cover panel for non modular central units
* Use white blanking modules, F215FP, to close any free compartments
** Use white blanking modules, 16133, to close any free compartments
3757
3759
3785
3786
3825
3771
3761
sUrrOUND Plates aND PrOFiles
3817
3818
3821
3822
3826
Item
3817
3818
3821
3822
3826
Description
surround plate for AxolUtE items
surround plate for lIVING items
side finishing profiles h 270 cm
FLATWALL catalogue
MY HOME Flatwall 240 - 270

Assembly guide: switchboard solution
BASE SETUP:
BACK
DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS AND

ACCESSORIES
SUPPORTS FOR
MY HOME
DEVICES
INSTALLABLE
ACCESSORIES
Touch Screen
H4684
L4684
3802
Bracket for the
installation of
3 My Home 506E
modular devices
3803
Extension module
(compulsory for the riser solution)
Burglar alarm
central unit
HD/HC/HS4601
HD/HC/HS4608
L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4608
3801
Bracket for the
installation of
1 or 2 My Home
506E modular devices
3787
Device-holder support
h 30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod.
Video Display
349311 (light)
349312 (dark)
Support
for 506E
H4726
(AXOLUTE)
3756
Horizontal
partition
(optional)
Power supplies and other

My Home DIN module devices
3789
DIN protection devices
3788
for free installation of
non DIN modules
3790
Kit including a pair of
trunkings and DIN rails
for 3788 (optional)
3828
Box for multimedia devices
F496/MF
Clips
3750
Flush mounted back
3751
Flush mounted back for
plasterboard (without
masonry mesh)
3787
3805
Brackets for non
modular central unit
support
3550
Temperature
3486
GSM burglar alarm
central unit
FINISHING ELEMENTS: PANELS, END CAPS AND SURROUND PLATES ***
FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3817
Surround plates
for AXOLUTE items
3794
Front cover panel
h 120 cm for one
506E modular device
3795
Front cover panel
h 120 cm for two
3796
Front cover panel
h 120 cm for three
3818
Surround plates
for LIVING items
3791
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3792
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3793
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3797**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, glass
3798**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, metal sheet
3799**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, plastic
3829
Multimedia
box panel
h 30 cm
3757
Front cover panel
h 30 cm
3759
Front cover panel
h 60 cm
3785
Front cover panel
h 90 cm
3786
Front cover panel
h 120 cm
3821
3822
Side surround
plates h 270 cm
and h 240 cm
* Use white blanking modules, 16133, to close any free

compartments
** Use white blanking modules, E215FP1N, to close any
internal free compartments
*** Panels and upper and lower end caps must always be
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822)
3771
Upper and lower
end caps
(to be fitted last)
3761
Front cover panel for non
modular central units*
FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: switchboard solution
BASE SETUP:
BACK
DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS AND

ACCESSORIES
SUPPORTS FOR
MY HOME
DEVICES
INSTALLABLE
ACCESSORIES
Touch Screen
H4684
L4684
3802
Bracket for the
installation of
3 My Home 506E
modular devices
Burglar alarm
central unit
HD/HC/HS4601
HD/HC/HS4608
L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4608
3801
Bracket for the
installation of
1 or 2 My Home
3787
Video Display
349311 (light)
349312 (dark)
Support for
506E
H4726
(AXOLUTE)
3756
Horizontal
partition
(optional)

3789
DIN protection devices
3823
Flush mounted back
3788
for free installation of
non DIN modules
3790
trunkings and DIN rails
for 3788 (optional)
3828
Box for multimedia devices
F496/MF
Clips
3787
3805
Brackets for non
modular central
unit support
3550
Temperature
3486
GSM burglar alarm
central unit
3791
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3792
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3817
Surround plates
for AXOLUTE items
3818
Surround plates
for LIVING items
3797**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, glass
3798**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, metal sheet
3799**
DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, plastic
3757
Front cover panel
h 30 cm
3759
Front cover panel
h 60 cm
3829
Multimedia
box panel
h 30 cm
FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3793
Front cover panel
as above h 30 cm
3785
Front cover panel
h 90 cm
3826
Side surround
plates h 150 cm
* Use white blanking modules 16133, to close any free

compartments
** Use white blanking modules F215FP, to close any internal
free compartments
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822).
3825
Upper and lower end caps
(to be fitted before the front
cover panels)
3761
Front cover panel for
non modular central units*
FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: electric distribution board solution
BASE SETUP:
BACK
AND ACCESSORIES
SUPPORTS FOR
MY HOME
DEVICES
INSTALLABLE
DEVICES
3787
3756
Horizontal
partition
(optional)
3789
h 60 cm, max. DIN 72 mod.
3823
Flush mounted back
3788
Device-holder support for
free installation of non
DIN modules
3790
trunkings and DIN rails for
3778 (optional)

3759
Front cover panel
h 60 cm
FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3785
Front cover panel
h 90 cm
3825
(to be fitted before the front cover panels)
3826
Side surround plates
h 150 cm
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822).
FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: oor riser solution
BASE SETUP:
BACK
BRACKETS AND ACCESSORIES
3803
Extension module
(compulsory for
the riser solution)
3788
Device-holder support for
cable fixing
3804
Vertical
partition
h 300 cm
3790
Kit including a pair of trunkings
and DIN rails for 3778 (optional)
3750
Flush mounted back
3751
Flush mounted back for plasterboard
(without masonry mesh)
Floor slab
3803
Example of installation of the extension module
Extension
module
FINISHING ELEMENTS: PANELS AND END CAPS ***
3759
Front cover panel
h 60 cm
3771
Upper and lower
end caps
(to be fitted last)
3785
Front cover panel
h 90 cm
FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3786
Front cover panel
h 120 cm
*** Panels and upper and lower end caps must

always be installed after the side surround
plates (3821 or 3822)
3821
3822
Side surround
plates h 270 cm
and h 240 cm
FLATWALL catalogue
Examples of composition
Composition with switchboard for protection devices h 270 cm.
Back modularity
View of the whole unit

Material list
Item
3750
3789
3786
3785
3797
3821
3771
Description
Flush mounted back
Device-holder support h 60 cm
Front cover panel h 120 cm
DIN switchboard glass h 30 cm
Pair of side surround plates h 270 cm
Quantity
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
Composition with switchboard for protection devices h 240 cm.

Back modularity

Material list
Item
3750
3789
3787
3785
3797
3822
3771
Description
Flush mounted back
DIN switchboard metal sheet h 30 cm
Quantity
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
Composition with switchboard for protection devices and My Home devices 3 + 3 modules h 270 cm
Back modularity

Material list
Item
3750
3789
3801
3785
3795
3797
3821
3771
3817
Description
Flush mounted back
Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home devices
Front cover panel h 120 cm for 2 506E modular devices
Axolute surround plates
Quantity
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Composition with switchboard for protection devices and non modular My Home devices 270 cm
Back modularity

Material list
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Item
3750
3789
3787
3805
3761
3785
3797
3821
3771
Description
Flush mounted back
Brackets for non modular central unit support
Front cover panel for non modular central units
Quantity
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
FLATWALL catalogue
Examples of composition
Composition for riser column h 270 cm
Back modularity

Material list
Item
3750
3788
3786
3821
3771
3803
Description
Flush mounted back
Device-holder support for cable fixing
Extension module
Quantity
1
4
2
1
1
1
Flatwall h150 composition with multimedia box and My Home devices 3 + 3 modules
Back modularity

Material list
Item
3823
3787
3789
3801
3757
3792
3828
3829
3759
3825
3826
3817
Description
Flush mounted back
Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home devices
Front cover panel h 30 cm for 2 506E modular devices
Multimedia box
Front cover panel h 30 cm for Multimedia box
Axolute surround plates
Quantity
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Note: To ensure maximum design integration with the room where it is installed, MY HOME FLATWALL front cover panels, supplied in their original white colour, may also be
painted using the same paint as the walls.
Examples of aesthetic compositions

GSM burglar alarm central unit 3486 and temperature control
central unit 3550
Switchboard for electrical protection devices
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
OK
1
4
7
Material list
Item
3805
3761
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Description
Pair of brackets for non modular central units
Material list
Quantity
1
1
Item
3797
F215FP
Description
White blanking modules for closing any free compartments
Quantity
1
***
*** Use 1 blanking module for each free DIN module

GSM burglar alarm central unit 3486
Multimedia box
Material list
Item
3805
3761
16133
Description
Pair of brackets for non modular central units
White blanking modules for closing a free compartment
Material list
Quantity
1
1
2
My Home, Touch Screen, Video Display, etc. devices
Item
3828
3829
F496/MF
3831
Description
Box for multimedia devices, with cable gland cut-outs
Door for 30 cm high multimedia box
Clips for the installation of multimedia devices. 6 clips are already
supplied as standard with the 3828 box
Cable gland kit for multimedia box. 4 cable glands already supplied
as standard with the 3828 box
Quantity
1
1
n*
n*
* Depending on installation requirements
Material list
Item
3801
3792
3817
Description
Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 506E devices
Front cover panel for 2 My Home devices
Surround plates for AXOLUTE items
Quantity
1
1
2
622 MY HOME
Technical sheets
CONTENTS
MY HOME Technical sheets

Radio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Automation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Burglar alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Load control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Video door entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Structured cabling system for the home sector. . . 1095
Control and integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1108
Technical sheets
MY HOME 623
Technical sheets
The pages that follow provide all
the technical information to assess,
design, and install a MY HOME
automation system
For detailed information on individual
devices refer to the corresponding
The technical sheets may also

be viewed by accessing the
Professionals section of the
www.bticino.com
624 MY HOME
Technical sheets
Technical Sheets These can be

selected by Item code No.
For each device, the corresponding
technical sheet offers information on:
Product description;
Related items;
Dimensional and technical data;

Conguration;
Wiring diagram, if required
Icons of the systems the device belongs to
Description
HC/HS 4690
Front view
2
Related items
Surround plate:
Power supply:
5
HA4690XC, HA4690VBB, HA4690LTK, HA4690VNB, HA4690VSW
346020
Rear view
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Description
Multimedia Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling all the functions of the
MY HOME system by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on the 10 16:9 LCD
Touch Screen.
In addition to the management of the automation functions, lights, temperature control, sound system, burglar alarm, and scenarios, by using the device it is also possible
to answer to video door entry system calls, and display the images transmitted by the
entrance panel, or the connected cameras. Thanks to the USB device and SD card inputs,
Multimedia Touch Screen can manage multimedia files, allowing the users to listen to
their favourite music or to view films and images.
When integrated with a domestic LAN network with internet connection, the device
enables (following the activation of specific icons) receiving RSS services such as news
and weather information, displaying images transmitted through webcams, and listening to internet radio channels.
Device drawing
6 7 8 9 10 11
Technical data
T
18 27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
600 mA
50 mA
5 45 C
17
PSTN
BUS
Configuration
2 1
12
ON
16
ETH
OFF
SCS AUDIO OUT
Power supply from SCS BUS:

Local power supply (1 2):
Maximum local absorption (1 2):
Absorption from SCS BUS:
Operating temperature:
Assembly, Installation
13
Dimensional data
15 14
13
Legend
1. 10 Touch Screen colour LED display
2. Microphone
17 mm
305 mm
3. USB connection
4. Mini USB PC connection
5. SD card connector
6. Sound system source output connector
7. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
HC/HS 4690
8. LAN connection signalling LED
228 mm
9. PSTN telephone line connector (future application)

10. 2 wire video BUS/SCS connector
12. End of line ON/OFF micro switch
13. Loudspeaker
14. Bracket fixing screw
15. Factory configuration reset pushbutton
16. NiMh 7.2 V battery compartment; 160 mAh
Configuration
Installation
Multimedia Touch Screen must be configured using the TiMultimediaTouchScreen software supplied as standard. In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed,
or to update the firmware, connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the PC using one of the
three solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- serial connector (3559);
- Ethernet cable.
17. RS232 PC connector
USB connection
Connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the system and fix it to the wall using the bracket
supplied with the product.
TECHNICAL SHEETS
11. 1-2 power supply connector
Dimensional data
Technical data
Wiring diagrams
Ethernet cable
Legend
230 Vac
PSTN
BUS
2 1
PR I
346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175 - 165 mA
47 / 63 Hz
ETH
Wiring diagrams
1-2
346020
Power supply
BT00318-a-UK
F441M
Multichannel matrix
SCS AUDIO OUT
1-2: 27 Vdc
600 mA
Audio SCS BUS
Technical sheets
MY HOME 625
626 MY HOME
Technical sheets Radio system
CONTENTS
MY HOME 627
Remote control 5 pushbuttons

Description
3527N
Front view
Remote control with 5 scenario control pushbuttons.

The device can be set to operate as an IR remote control (mode not possible for ZigBee
Radio automation devices).
Technical data
Power supply:
Duration of the batteries:
Technology:
Radio frequency capacity:
No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V LR03

2 years
5 45 C
2.4 GHz Radiofrequency ZigBee standard
100 m free field, 10 m in rooms with
concrete walls
10 m free field
Infrared capacity:
Dimensional data
183 mm
46 mm
Rear view
17 mm
Configuration
Push and Learn self-learning type.
2
3
4
5
BT00392-a-UK
Legend
1. Scenario activation pushbutton
2. NETWORK key
3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. LEARNING key
628 MY HOME
Remote control 4 pushbuttons

Description
3528N
Front view
Remote control with 4 scenario control pushbuttons.
6
5
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
1
2
3
No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type

5 years
5 45 C
concrete walls
Dimensional data
Rear view
50 mm
21 mm
7
8
76 mm
Legend
1. Scenario no. 1 activation pushbutton
Configuration

5. LEARNING LED
6. LEARNING key
7. NETWORK LED
8. NETWORK key
BT00393-a-UK
MY HOME 629
Integration module switch 1X2500W RF

Description
3571
Front view
Actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 2500 W, with ON/OFF control
pushbutton for system testing.
In enclosure suitable for installation inside false ceilings.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

Power/absorption of the loads driven:
Voltage
Incandescent
lamp
5
4
3
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
Halogen lamp
Fluorescent
tube lamp
1
2
Ferromagnetic
transformer
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 VA
110 Vac
1250 W
1250 W
625 W
1250 VA
Voltage
Electronic
transformer
Compact
fluorescent
tube lamp
LED lamps
Motors
230 Vac
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
250 VA
110 Vac
1250 W
625 W
625 W
125 VA
3. ON/OFF key
4. LEARNING LED
5. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
Voltage
Dimensional data
N
50 mm
L
N
BT00394-a-UK
38 mm
141 mm
Configuration
630 MY HOME
Important:
Protect the device with a 10 A fuse.
Connect a load before performing any scenario learning procedure.
For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their rated
power must be connected.
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of
0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
Integration module dimmer 1 X 600W all load RF

Description
Front view
Dimmer actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 600 W, with ON/OFF
control and adjustment pushbuttons for system testing.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

Voltage
3572
Incandescent
lamp
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
Halogen lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformer
Electronic
transformer
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
230 Vac
110 Vac
3. + key: press and release to switch the load ON at 66% of its power, press and hold
down to increase the power to the maximum value
Max.
600 W
600 W
450 VA
600 VA
4. - key: press and release to switch the load ON at 33% of its power, press and hold
down to decrease the power to the minimum value
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
5. LEARNING LED
Max.
300 W
300 W
225 VA
300 VA
6. LEARNING key
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
Dimensional data
7. Load selection micro-switch: ON
/ OFF
8. ON/OFF key
Wiring diagram
50 mm
38 mm
Configuration
Important:
BT00395-a-UK
141 mm
MY HOME 631
Integration module dimmer 0-10V 1000W RF

Description
3573
Front view
Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power up
to 1000 W max. The device has pushbuttons for ON/OFF control and for the adjustment
of the power to the load for system testing.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
Ballast 0 10 V
Voltage
230 Vac
1000 VA
110 Vac
500 VA
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data
50 mm
5. LEARNING LED
6. LEARNING key
38 mm
7. ON/OFF key
141 mm
Configuration
Wiring diagram
BT00396-a-UK
Important:
For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their
rated power must be connected.
For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency
of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency
of 0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
N
632 MY HOME
Mobile switched dimmer socket RF

ZigBee for Schuko Standard
Description
3574
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for dimmer control of a load with
maximum power 500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top section
of the device.
The device is protected from overheating caused by overload through an appropriate
protection circuit that intervenes automatically by reducing the power to the load.
2
3
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

100 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee
150 m free field;
15 m in rooms with concrete walls
see following table
3574_front
Voltage
Incandescent
lamp
Halogen lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformer
Electronic
transformer
Detail point 1
c
b
a
Voltage
230 Vac
110 Vac
max.
500 W
500 W
500 VA
500 VA
min.
50 W
50 W
60 VA
60 VA
max.
250 W
250 W
250 VA
250 VA
min.
50 W
50 W
60 VA
60 W
d
e
Legend
1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
protection:
a. CONTROL key
b. LEARNING LED
c. NETWORK LED
d. NETWORK key
e. LEARNING key
Dimensional data
82
2. key: press and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
3. + key: press and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value
29
85
Assembly, installation
BT00489-a-UK
46
3574_front
3574_Top
Size in mm
Configuration
Socket

3574_montaggio
MY HOME 633
Mobile switch socket RF ZigBee

for Schuko Standard
Description
3575
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for ON/OFF control of a load with
maximum power 2500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top
section of the device.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

Voltage
Incandescent
lamp
100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
150 m free field;
see following table
Halogen lamp
Fluorescent
tube lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformer
3575_front
Voltage
Detail point 1
230 Vac
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 VA
110 Vac
1250 W
1250 W
625 W
1250 VA
Electronic
transformer
Voltage
Compact fluorescent
tube lamp
LED lamps
Legend
Voltage
230 Vac
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
110 Vac
1250 W
625 W
625 W
1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
protection:
a. CONTROL key LED
b. LEARNING LED
c. NETWORK LED
d. NETWORK key
e. LEARNING key
f. CONTROL key
Dimensional data
82
BT00490-a-UK
29
85
46
3575_front
Size in mm
3575_Top
Configuration
Socket

3575_montaggio
634 MY HOME
Individual roller blind controller RF ZigBee

for mounting in technical compartment
Description
3576
Front view
Actuator device for the control of rolling shutter and shutter motors with maximum
power 500 VA.
The actuator is inside an appropriate enclosure for installation in rolling shutter boxes
or junction boxes.
Technical data
100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
5 45 C
150 m free field;
see following table
3
2
1
Shutter motor
Voltage
230 Vac
500 VA
100 Vac
270 VA
Legend
5
6
3576_front
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

1. LEARNING LED
Dimensional data
2. NETWORK key
3. Fixing hook
4. Wiring for connection to the power line and to the load
5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
blue
brown
blu
marrone
120
black
grey
nero
grigio
3576_lato
3576_front
35
BT00491-a-UK
27
55
Size in mm
Configuration
Important: Connect a load before performing any scenario learning procedure.
MY HOME 635
3576
Configuration
Select the operating mode
The device may operate in two different modes:
- Bistable (to operate the rolling shutter press and immediately release the UP or
DOWN keys).
- Monostable (to operate the rolling shutter press and hold down the UP or DOWN
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change
the operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than
4 seconds both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.
> 4 sec.
Use of the device in bistable mode

Opening and closing the rolling shutter:
Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter control
Shutter control
Adjustment of the blade position:

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
BT00491-a-UK
> 1 sec.
50%
50%
Shutter control
Shutter control
> 1 sec.
50%
+
636 MY HOME
=
50%
50%
=
50%
3576
Use of the device in monostable mode
Press and hold down the UP and DOWN Pushbuttons until the desired rolling shutter position.
Shutter control
Shutter control
50%
50%
BT00491-a-UK
MY HOME 637
3576
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position)
The rolling shutter control device for the management of the actuator can also
be enabled to set the rolling shutters to a preset position, using the appropriate
pushbutton (Preset).
The procedure for storing the position is performed in two different stages:
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
- saving of their positions. .
Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;:

1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an
electronic limit switch.
2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture
for more than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of
electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move
to the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time.
Now proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
> 4 sec.
Shutter control
100%
0%
50%
<1 sec.
Shutter control
Saving the rolling shutter position:
1. Operate the UP and DOWN PUShbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling
50%
shutter to the desired position.
BT00491-a-UK
2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
control for more than 10 seconds.
>10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
638 MY HOME
RF ZigBee transmitter with auxiliary inputs (2 inputs)

Description
3577
Front view
This device gives the possibility of integrating traditional control devices (Two-way
switch, switch, or pushbutton) in MY HOME radio systems.
The interface has 3 cables identified with C, 1, and 2 respectively, which connect to a
two-way switch, or to a pushbutton.
The definition of the type of device connected (two-way switch, or pushbutton), and
therefore of the interface operating mode, is done using appropriate pushbuttons
found on the device itself; the preset mode (at the factory) requires connection to
a two-way switch.
By configuring the A, PL, and MOD sockets, it will be possible to use this interface,
together with the SCS/ZigBee gateway, for the radio extension of a MY HOME BUS
system. The device is inside a Basic container with reduced sizes, for installation in
flush mounted boxes, junction boxes, rolling shutter boxes, and trunking. Particularly
advantageous is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning the item at the
back of the flush mounted box, behind traditional devices.
8 7 6
Related items
Gateway SCS/ZigBee:
HC/HD/HS4578, L/N/NT4578N.
Technical data
Legend
Power supply:
Duration of the battery:
Technology:
Capacity:

No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type

5 years
5 45 C
2
150m free field;
1
15m in rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
Size:
basic module
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LEARNING LED
SCS My Home Configurator socket
Local CONTROL key
SCS My Home Configurator socket
NETWORK LED
NETWORK key
Wiring for connection to traditional devices
LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
Connection to a two-way switch
BT00492-a-UK
2
1
Connection to two pushbuttons

2
MY HOME 639
3577
Configuration
Configuration of the ZigBee network
Definition of the interface operating mode
The interface is already configured during production for connection to a two-way
switch or to a switch. If connecting one or more pushbuttons, change the operating
mode as indicated below:
1. Press the two pushbuttons on the interface for at least 5 seconds.
2. When the two LEDs (green on the left and orange on the right) flash slowly,
release the pushbuttons. The interface is now preset for connection to one or more
pushbuttons.
To restore switch/two-way switch mode, press the two interface pushbuttons for at
least 5 seconds, and release them when the two LEDs come on steady (not flashing).
Operating test
After completing the wiring and defining the operating mode, the operation of the interface can be tested using the traditional devices connected, or the two pushbuttons:
- If the interface is in two-way switch mode, use the left pushbutton to send an ON
command to the radio actuator associated to the two-way switch. Use the right pushbutton to send the OFF command.
BT00492-a-UK
640 MY HOME
- If the interface is in pushbutton mode, use the right pushbutton cyclically to send a
cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator associated with the P1 pushbutton.
Use the left pushbutton to send a cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator
associated with the P2 pushbutton.
Open Web Net/Zigbee Gateway

Description
3578
Front view
Interface for interaction with the functions of the ZigBee radio system using a Personal
Computer and an Open Web Net communication protocol.
The device must be connected to a USB port of the computer and features a radio
transmitter for sending/receiving data to and from ZigBee devices installed in the
electric system.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
From USB 2.0 socket

5 45 C
150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls
2
3
Side view
BT00493-a-UK
Legend
1. USB connector
2. Data traffic indicator LED
3. NETWORK key
4. NETWORK LED
MY HOME 641
3578
Configuration
Connecting the device to the network
1. In the system identify the actuator device with Zigbee network coordinator
function, and press the NETWORK key for 3 seconds.
Disconnecting the interface from the network

1. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will flash quickly.
3 sec.
2. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and after a few instants will
start flashing quickly.
2. Press the NETWORK key again for at least 10 seconds. The NETWORK LED will
flash quickly twice and then will turn off. The interface is no longer connected to
the ZigBee network.
10 sec.
3. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will come on
steady during the network search procedure and then will start flashing slowly.
4. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device;
The corresponding NETWORK LED will flash three times while the interface
NETWORK LED will turn off.
BT00493-a-UK
642 MY HOME
Wireless movement detector RF ZigBee

surface mounting
Description
3579
Front view
Each scenario can consist of the timed activation of one or more ON/OFF
and/or Dimmer actuators, depending on the brightness of the room and the presence
(scenario 1), or absence (scenario 2) of people inside the area covered by the IR sensor.
1
LEARN
Related items
ON/OFF radio actuator: 3571, 3575, H4591, LN4591

Dimmer radio actuator: 3572, 3574, H4593, LN4593
DETECT
Rear view
Technical data
Power supply:
Timing ON:
Minimum brightness threshold for
scenario activation:
IR sensor sensitivity:
Technology:
Radio frequency capacity:
No. 2 batteries, AA 1.5V LR06

2 years
15 minutes (1)
IR sensor covering area:
see drawings on page 2
1000lux (1)
100% (1)
5 45 C
concrete walls
Note (1): the values can be changed using the BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 remote
controls
Dimensional data
9
8
7
3
LEARN
DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
4
5
Legend
1. LED:
- Exhausted battery (flashing slowly)
82
40
- presence of people detected inside the area (flashing)

2. Fresnell lens (the IR sensor is underneath)
3. NETWORK LED
4. NETWORK key
5. END DETECT key for the creation of scenario No. 2
6. Closing screw. Remove to open the sensor and replace the batteries
7. DETECT key for the creation of scenario no. 1
8. LEARNING key
9. LEARNING LED
BT00520-a-UK
105
Size in mm
MY HOME 643
0.4 m
0.2 m
3579
0.2 m
3m
Dimensional data - IR sensor covering area
Configuration
Configuration of the device inside the network: Push and Learn self-learning type.
Configuration of the time period, of the IR sensor sensitivity, and of the
brightness threshold.
The device is supplied with the following factory set parameters:
- AUTO mode
- Timing ON: 15 minutes
- IR sensitivity: 100%
- Brightness threshold for activation: up to 1000 lux maximum
Other modes can be configured using remote controls BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 (see
the instruction leaflet for the details).
Creation of scenario 1 active when people are present in the area controlled by
the sensor.
1. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will
flash slowly.
90
Passage sensor
12 m
Installation height 2.3 m
LEARN
0.4 m
1.5 m
2.3 m
LEARN
NETW
0.2 m
1.2 m
DETECT
END_DETECT
DETECT
3m
12 m
2. Then press the DETECT pushbutton. The LEARNING LED will flash quickly.
Installation height 0.4 m
90
0.4 m
LEARN
LEARN
NETW
END_DETECT
0.2 m
DETECT
N
L
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
0.2 m
12 m
3m
3. Press the LEARNING key of the actuator used for the scenario.
The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will flash slowly.
90
N
L
BT00520-a-UK
N
L
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
NETW
DETECT
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
12 m
LEARN
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
HOME
644 MY
N
L

N
L
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
N
L
N
L
LEARN
LEARN
NETW
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
END_DETECT
DETECT
3579
4. Press the ON pushbutton of the actuator. The connected load will come on and the
LEARNING LED will flash more quickly.
Creation of scenario 2 active when people leave the area controlled by the
sensor.
1. Repeat the operations described for the creation of scenario 1, using the END
DETECT pushbutton
to perform the operations described in point 2.
N
N
L
LEARN
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
NETW
LEARN
NETW
N
L
END_DETECT
DETECT
END_DETECT
N
L
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
5. Repeat the procedures at points 3 and 4 for each actuator to associate to the
scenario during its creation.
NOTE: For more information on the amendment of the set scenarios (addition and
removal of actuators) refer to the instruction leaflet supplied with the sensor.
6. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The corresponding LEARNING LED and those of all
the associated actuators will go off.
N
L
LEARN
NETW
END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
NETW
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
N
L
END_DETECT
T
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
N
L
N
L
N
L
ETW
ND_DETECT
BT00520-a-UK
MY HOME 645
Wireless temperature sensor RF ZigBee

surface mounting
Description
3581
Front view
Device capable of activating several actuators (scenarios) based on the measured

temperature.
it is possible to manage up to 2 scenarios: the first activates when the temperature falls
below a T1 level, the second when the temperature exceeds a T2 level.
temperatures
activation of scenario 2
T2
Threshold
Threshold
T1
2
activation of scenario 1
The sensor is battery powered, it features an LCD display for the display of the measured
temperature, and a probe with 0.5C precision tolerance. It can be easily wall mounted
using screws.
Internal view
Technical data
Power supply:
Duration of the battery:
Measured temperature range:
Tripping threshold:
Precision:
Technology:
Capacity:
No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V AAA type

2 years
(-25) (+ 40) C
1 C
0.5 C
0 40 C
150 m free field, 15m in rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
UP
76 mm
+
DOWN
116 mm
BT00494-a-UK
UP
-
+
DOWN
Legend
1. Battery exhausted LED
2. Measurement probe
3. LEARNING LED
Configuration
Configuration of the ZigBee network: Push and Learn self-learning type. For the
association of the scenarios that can be enabled based on the temperature measured
refer to the installation manual supplied with the sensor.
646 MY HOME
4. LEARNING key
5. Probe connection clamp
6. Configuration menu navigation joystick
7. NETWORK key
8. NETWORK LED
H4586
LN4586
Transceiver for technical alarms

Description
Front view
Device to be used together with a detector, for the protection of the home from water,
gas, or smoke. In case of danger, the device will send a radio signal to the radio actuator
for the activation of acoustic/luminous indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
Technical data
Power supply:
12 Vdc (also with 12 Vac L/N/NT4541

transformer)
5 45 C
concrete walls
Technology:
Capacity:
Legend
Dimensional data
Size:
1. ON/OFF key
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
Configuration
4. LEARNING key
5. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
230 V
Radio interface H/LN4586
Aux
Gas detector
L/N/NT4511/12
L/N/NT4512/12
HD/HC/HS4511/12
HD/HC/HS4512/12
12 Vdc
12 Vac transformer
L/N/NT4541
HD/HC/HS4541
BT00397-a-UK
MY HOME 647
H4587
LN4587
Actuator RF for technical alarms

Description
Front view
Radio actuator device with relay output to be used for the notification of an alarm
through the activation of visual/acoustic indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
The actuator is used together with the specific Radio interface for technical alarms,
H/LN4586.
2
3
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
2500 W (240 Vac)
1250 W (100 Vac)

Dimensional data
Size:
Legend
1. NETWORK LED
2. LEARNING LED
3. Key
Configuration
4. LEARNING key
5. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
Aux2 Aux1
BT00398-a-UK
648 MY HOME
HA4589 L4589N
HB4589 N4589N
4 scenario control RF
Description
Front view
Radio control device used for saving and managing up to 4 scenarios max.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
10
No. 1 lithium battery, 3 V, CR2032 type

5 years
5 45 C
150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
Size:
3
M
2 modules
5
7
Radio system: Push and Learn self-learning type.

Wire system: If the device is integrated with the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
SCS/Zigbee interface, it will be possible to manage scenarios saved in the scenario module
item F420, which address must be specified by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and
M housings as indicated:
Use with scenario module F420:
A = Room
PL = Light point
M = operating mode (1 4). It associates to the 4 pushbuttons the scenarios saved by the
scenario module (max. 16). The correspondence between the 4 control keys and the scenario
numbers saved in the module is as follows:
Scenario saved
scenario 1 4
scenario 5 8
scenario 9 12
scenario 13 16
Legend
1. LEARNING key
2. NETWORK key
3. Scenario no. 2 key
4. Configurator socket (A, PL)
6. NETWORK LED
7. LEARNING LED
9. Configurator socket (M)
NOTES:
Once the necessary operations have been completed, lock the programming procedure,
by pressing the lock/unlock key of the scenario module for at least 0.5 seconds, until the
corresponding LED turns red.
To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
1. The scenario module must be enabled for programming;
2. press the pushbutton of the scenario to delete for at least 10 seconds. The corresponding
LED will flash quickly for approx. 2 seconds, confirming that the scenario has been deleted.
If the LED does not flash, the procedure has been unsuccessful.
To reset the whole memory, press the DEL key of the scenario module for 10 seconds. The yellow
LED, reset scenarios, will flash quickly.
BT00399-a-UK
Scenario programming
To program, change or delete a scenario, the programming of Module F420 must be enabled.
This is confirmed by the status LED turning green (press the lock/unlock key of the scenario
module for at least 0.5 seconds). After this has been done, proceed as follows:
1. press one of the four control keys to which the scenario should be associated to for 4
seconds. The corresponding LED starts flashing;
2. Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
control, Sound system, etc. functions;
3. confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit the
programming mode;
4. to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1;
To recall an already set scenario, a quick pressure of the corresponding key on the scenario
control is enough.
PL
Configuration
Configurator in M
1
2
3
4
MY HOME 649
Switch RF without neutral 400W

with LEDS status
Description
H4590
LN4590
Front view
Actuator for the control of loads with maximum power 400 W, with ON/OFF LED.
For the connection of the device to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table

Incandescent
lamp
Voltage
Halogen lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformer
3
4
Electronic
transformer
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
3. LEARNING LED
4. ON/OFF key
230 Vac
110 Vac
Max.
400 W
400 W
400 VA
400 VA
5. Load ON/OFF LED
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
6. LEARNING key
Max.
200 W
200 W
200 VA
200 VA
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
Dimensional data
Size:
Configuration
Wiring diagram
BT00400-a-UK
Important:
Connect a load before performing any scenario learning
procedure.
For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%
higher than their rated power must be connected.
For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)
L
650 MY HOME
Universal switch RF with neutral 2500W

with LEDS status
Description
H4591
LN4591
Front view
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers up to 2500 W, with
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
Voltage
Incandescent
lamp
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
Halogen lamp
Fluorescent
tube lamp
3
4
Ferromagnetic
transformer
5
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac
2500 W
2500 W
1250 W
2500 VA
3. LEARNING LED
110 Vac
1250 W
1250 W
625 W
1250 VA
4. ON/OFF key
Electronic
transformer
Compact
fluorescent
tube lamp
LED lamps
230 Vac
2500 W
1250 W
1250 W
250 VA
110 Vac
1250 W
625 W
625 W
125 VA
Voltage
5. Load ON/OFF LED

6. LEARNING key
Motors
Wiring diagram
Voltage
Dimensional data
Size:
Important:
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
BT00401-a-UK
Configuration
MY HOME 651
Universal switch RF with neutral 2 X 1000W

with LEDS status
Description
H4592
LN4592
Front view
Actuator for the control of 2 different loads with maximum powers up to 1000 W, with
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
Incandescent
lamp
Voltage
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
Halogen lamp
Fluorescent
tube lamp
3
4
Ferromagnetic
transformer
6 5
Voltage
Legend
230 Vac
110 Vac
2 x 1000 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 1000 W
2 x 500 W
Voltage
Electronic
transformer
Compact
fluorescent
tube lamp
2 x 500 W
2 x 250 W
2 x 1000 VA
2 x 500 VA
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
LED lamps
Motors
4. ON/OFF key
5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. ON/OFF key
7. LEARNING key
Voltage
230 Vac
110 Vac
2 x 1000 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 250 W
2 x 500 W
2 x 250 W
2 x 100 VA
2 x 50 VA
Wiring diagram
Dimensional data
Size:
Configuration
BT00402-a-UK
652 MY HOME
Important:
All load dimmer RF without neutral

300W with LEDS bargraphe
Description
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers 300 W, with ON/OFF
LED. For the connection of the Dimmer to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required. The selection of the ON/OFF mode based on the load to drive
(resistive or inductive) is performed using a micro-switch.
H4593
LN4593
Front view
1
2
8
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table

Incandescent
lamp
Voltage
Halogen
lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformer
110 Vac
Legend
1. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
Max.
300 W
300 W
300 VA
300 VA
2. NETWORK LED
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
3. LEARNING LED
Max.
150 W
150 W
150 VA
150 VA
Min.
60 W
60 W
60 VA
60 VA
4. - key:press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
Dimensional data
Size:
6 5
Electronic
transformer
Voltage
230 Vac
3
4
Configuration
5. Load ON/OFF LED

6. ON/OFF key
7. LEARNING key
8. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
Important:
BT00403-a-UK
MY HOME 653
H4594
LN4594
Dimmer RF for ballasts 0-10V 1000W

Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power
up to 1000 W max , with ON/OFF LED.
2
3
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
concrete walls
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
4
5
see following table

Ballast 0 10 V
7 6
Voltage
Legend
1. NETWORK key
230 Vac
1000 VA
2. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
110 Vac
500 VA
3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. - key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
Dimensional data
Size:
6. Load ON/OFF LED
7. ON/OFF key
8. LEARNING key
Configuration
Wiring diagram
BT00404-a-UK
+
654 MY HOME
Important:
procedure.
For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%
higher than their rated power must be connected.
For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)
H4595
LN4595
Shutter switch RF with preset function

Description
Actuator for the control of electric rolling shutter or shutter motors with maximum power 500 VA.
Front view
2
3
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
100 240 Vac 50/60 Hz

5 45 C
concrete walls
see following table
4
5
Shutter motor
7 6
Voltage
230 Vac
110 Vac
Max.
500 VA
Min.
270 VA
Max.
250 VA
Min.
135 VA
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. UP key
3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. DOWN key
6. Load ON/OFF LED
Dimensional data
Size:
7. STOP key
8. LEARNING key
Configurazione
Wiring diagram
BT00405-a-UK
Important:
procedure.
MY HOME 655
H4595
LN4595
Configuration
DOWN keys).
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds
both the UP and DOWN keys of the rolling shutter control at the same time.
> 4 sec.
Shutter control

Press and release the UP and DOWN keys.

Press the UP and DOWN keys for more than 1 second.
BT00405-a-UK
> 1 sec.
50%
50%
> 1 sec.
50%
+
656 MY HOME
+
50%
50%
=
50%
H4595
LN4595
Press and hold down the UP and DOWN keys until the desired rolling shutter position.
Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one key.
The procedure is performed in two different stages:
- saving of their positions.
1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
limit switch.
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the key shown in the picture for more than 4
seconds. Press the key for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now
proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
50%
> 4 sec.
50%
Shutter control
50%
BT00405-a-UK
MY HOME 657
100%
0%
< 1 sec.
Shutter control
H4595
LN4595
1. Operate the UP and DOWN keys of the radio control to move the rolling shutter to
50%
the desired position.
2. To save the desired position press the Preset key of the rolling shutter radio control
for more than 10 seconds.
=
>10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset key of the control device
is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved position.
BT00405-a-UK
658 MY HOME
HA4596 L4596N
HB4596 N4596N
Switch control RF 1 gang

Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator or group of
actuators.
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:
No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type

5 years
5 45 C
concrete walls
3
4
6
Dimensional data
Size:
2 modules
Legend
1. LEARNING key
Configuration
Wire system: if the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated.
2. NETWORK key
3. Configurator socket (A,PL)
4. ON/OFF key
5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING LED
A = Room
PL = Light Point
M = Operating mode
Function
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON timed - 1 minute
ON timed - 2 minutes
ON timed - 500 ms
O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF
OFF control
ON
ON control
PUL
monostable ON/OFF control (key)
BT00406-a-UK
Configurator in M
MY HOME 659
HA4597 L4597N
HB4597 N4597N
Switch control RF 2 gangs

Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of two separate or two groups of ON/OFF or Dimmer
type actuators.
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

5 years
5 45 C
concrete walls
4
6
Dimensional data
Size:
2 modules
Legend
1. LEARNING key
Configuration
Wire system: If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the
Gateway SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which
address must be configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL1, PL2, and M
housings as indicated.
3. Configurator socket (A, PL1)

4. ON/OFF key No. 2
5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING LED
7. ON/OFF key No. 1
A = Room
PL1 = Light Point N1
8. Configurator socket (PL2, M)
PL2 = Light Point N2

M = Operating mode (see table)
BT00407-a-UK
Configurator in M
Function
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON timed - 1 minute
ON timed - 500 ms
O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF
OFF control
ON
ON control
PUL
Monostable ON/OFF control (key)
660 MY HOME
2. NETWORK key
HA4598 L4598N
HB4598 N4598N
Dimming control 1 gang

Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator, or a group of
actuators.
When controlling ON/OFF actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off.
2
3
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

5 years
5 45 C
concrete walls
Dimensional data
Size:
2 modules for surface mounted installation
Configuration
If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/Zigbee
interface it will be possible to manage BUS dimmer actuators, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A and PL.
Legend
1. LEARNING key
2. NETWORK key
4. Configurator socket (A,PL)
6. NETWORK LED
7. LEARNING LED
8. ON/OFF key
9. Configurator socket (not used)
BT00408-a-UK
MY HOME 661
HA4599 L4599N
HB4599 N4599N
Shutter control RF
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of one actuator or of one group of actuators for the
control of motorized rolling shutters or shutters. It has a STOP/PRESET pushbutton to
stop the movement of the rolling shutter/shutter, and to move it to a preset position.
Technical data
Power supply:
Technology:
Capacity:

5 years
5 45 C
concrete walls
5
7
Dimensional data
Size:
2 modules
Legend
Configuration
If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/
Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage 2 relay actuator, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated:
A = Room
PL = Light Point
M = operating mode (see below)
Configurator in M
Function
Press and immediately release UP and DOWN

keys to rise or lower the rolling shutter; to stop
the movement press the STOP key.
Press and hold down the UP or DOWN keys to

send the command to rise or lower the rolling
shutter; to stop the movement release the
pushbutton.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LEARNING key
NETWORK key
UP key
Configurator socket (A,PL)
DOWN key
NETWORK LED
LEARNING LED
STOP/PRESET key. Stops the rolling shutter during its movement. If pressed when
the rolling shutter is stopped, it activates its movement to a preset position, saved
in the Shutter actuator H/LN4595.
Configuration
BT00409-a-UK

DOWN keys).
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds
both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.
662 MY HOME
> 4 sec.
HA4599 L4599N
HB4599 N4599N
Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter
actuator
Shutter
actuator

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
Shutter
actuator
Shutter
actuator
> 1 sec.
50%
50%
> 1 sec.
50%

+ rolling shutter position.
=
Press and hold down the UP and DOWN Pushbuttons until the desired
Shutter
actuator
Shutter
50%
50%
actuator
+
+
BT00409-a-UK
50%
MY HOME 663
HA4599 L4599N
HB4599 N4599N
Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one pushbutton.
The procedure is performed in two different stages:
- saving of their positions.
1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
limit switch.
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture for more
than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit
switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now proceed
with saving the desired position (Preset).
> 4 sec.
100%
0%
50%
< 1 sec.

1. Operate the UP and DOWN PUShbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling
50%
shutter to the desired position.
BT00409-a-UK
2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
control for more than 10 seconds.
=
> 10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
664 MY HOME
L/N/NT4578N
HD/HC/HS4578
Gateway SCS/ZigBee
Description
Front view
Device for interfacing the ZigBee radio Automation system with the My Home BUS
Automation system.
It makes it possible to extend a wire Automation system and to management the
corresponding actuators, using the ZigBee radio controls. .
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
Absorption:
20 mA
Maximum number of ZigBee devices that can be managed: 32
5 45 C
Technology:
Radio 2.4 GHz standard
ZigBee
Capacity:
150 m free field, 15 m in
rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
Size:
Rear view
Configuration
The interface must be configured by assigning the address following the procedure used
for BUS Automation systems.
A = Room 1 9
PL = Light Point 1 9
M = - (no configurator)
Note: assign an address not used for other Automation devices.
Legend
1. NETWORK LED
2. LEARNING LED
3. LEARNING key
4. NETWORK key
5. Configurator socket (A,PL and M)
6. BUS clamp
BT00410-a-UK
MY HOME 665
666 MY HOME
Technical sheets - Automation
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Automation
MY HOME 667
Basic radio actuator
3470
Description
This device can be used to exploit the benefits of radio technology in a combined
radio-wire BUS system. The basic radio actuator can be driven by the Automation
system controls, by means of transmitting interface item L/N/NT4576N and item
HC/HS4576. The device can also be installed in flush mounted boxes and is fitted with
input connection cables for a switch or a traditional pushbutton.
The actuator has a LED that turns ON steadily when the load is active, and flashes in case
of wrong configuration.
Technical data
Power supply:
Power/Absorption of driven loads:

Radio frequency:
Size:
230 Vac 50 Hz
0 40 C
- incandescent lamps 500 W / 2 A
- resistive loads 500 W / 2 A
- ferromagnetic transformers 500 VA / 2 A cos 0.5
868 MHz
basic module
Legend
1. Configurator socket
2. Programming pushbutton
3. LED
Wiring diagram
External
pushbutton
230 Vac 50 Hz
L
N
BT00104-b-UK
668 MY HOME
3470
Configuration
The actuator must be configured by inserting the configurators in sockets A, PL, M and G.
If, for example, the actuator is configured with A =5 and PL = 3, it will be managed by
the wire control with address A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address
52 or less (A = 5 and PL = 2). The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that
can be configured directly on the radio control devices, apart from those which use two
interlocked relays.
If the external contact is connected to the actuator, it is possible to choose one of the
operating modes included in the table below. The operating mode of the external
contact is determined by the type of configurator in the M socket.
Possible function
Combination configurator in M and type of external contact

Pushbutton
Switch
Cyclical ON/OFF
No configurator
Monostable mode.
If installed in a MY HOME Automation system, the actuator will ignore Room and General
controls
PUL
ON/OFF
0/1
Timed ON
1)
1) If controlled by an external pushbutton, the device will turn off after a given time
period determined by the Configurator in M, as specified in the table.
18
Configurator
Time (minutes)
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
Programming
This operation is necessary to create a link between the radio control devices and the
actuator. Follow the procedure below:
1) Power up the device.
2) Hold down the programming pushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the pushbutton.
4) Within 20 seconds press the programming radio interface pushbutton or press the
wire control device key.
5) Programming will be completed when the LED flashes and then turns off.
6) Repeat the operating sequence from 2 through 5 for all the radio control devices to
be programmed.
BT00104-b-UK
To cancel all programming in the actuator proceed as follows:

2) Hold down the pushbutton (see figure); after 4 seconds, the LED will turn ON; hold
down the pushbutton until the LED turns off.
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all previously programming will be
cancelled.
MY HOME 669
Basic actuator
3475
Description
Front view
The device forms part of the Basic automation and is therefore small in size. This actuator
can be used in flush mounted boxes, junction boxes, rolling shutter boxes and trunking.
Particularly suitable is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning the item at
the back of the flush mounted box, behind lowered automation devices, or behind
traditional type devices (pushbuttons, switches, etc.).
The actuator has cords for connection to the load to be controlled and a LED.
L1
4 1
ART. 3475
230V
2A cos = 0,6
Technical data
2A
Power supply from BUS:

Operating power supply with SCS BUS:
Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
Halogen lamp
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
13 mA
LED lamps
Compact fluorescent lamp
Ferromagnetic
transformers
Side view
3
230 Vac
460 W
2A
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
Size: basic module
Configuration
Legend
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on
the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays.
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
actuator are listed in the table below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Configurator socket
LED
0.75 mm2 cords for connection to the load
BUS
Possible function
Configurator in M
Pushbutton (monostable ON) ignores the Room and General controls
PUL
BT00076-c-UK
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator which has the same address
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control.
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
14
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control
activates the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the
same time. The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan
working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as
indicated in the table.
670 MY HOME
Configurator
Time (minutes)
Basic control actuator
3476
Description
Front view
The device is part of the Basic automation system, and is therefore characterized by a
compact size, which makes it possible for it to be installed inside flush mounted boxes,
junction boxes, other boxes and trunking. Particularly suitable is the installation inside
junction boxes, positioning the item at the back of the flush mounted box, behind
lowered automation devices, or behind traditional type devices (pushbuttons, switches,
etc.). This actuator/ control accepts on the input a traditional pushbutton with NO
contact. The control/actuation device has a BUS inlet made by means of the blue cables,
an inlet to connect the external pushbutton by means of the grey and black cables and a
relay contact to control the load by means of the two white cords.
Side view
3
1
L1
2 1
ART. 3476
230V
2A cos = 0,6
Technical data
2A

Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
Halogen lamp
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
13 mA
LED lamp
4
Ferromagnetic
transformers
Legend
230 Vac
460 W
2A
40 W
Max. 1 lamp
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA
1.
2.
3.
4.
Configurator socket
LED
0.75 mm2 cords for connection to the load
BUS
Size: basic module

Configuration
Configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF
No configurator
ON/OFF mode
0/1
Pushbutton (On monostable) ignores Room and General controls
PUL
Actuator as Slave.
Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address
SLA
Timed ON 1)
1 8 1)
1) If controlled by external pushbutton the device switches off after a time set by the
configurator in M as indicated in the table below.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
BT00077-c-UK
Possible function
MY HOME 671
Basic contacts interface
3477
Description
This devices let you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in
advanced systems with BUS operating logic.
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the automation system and Lighting
Management in rooms where traditional systems are already present or in historic and
prestigious environments whereby the complete or partial remaking of the electric
system involves heavy masonry work. The old but valuable switch with its no longer
compliant wiring can therefore continue to be used with it as the connection to the
load to be controlled is carried out safely by connecting it with its SCS interface with
no-voltage contact.
The PL1 contact drives the PL1 light point, the PL2 contact drives the PL2 light point.
The interface is fitted with two LEDs for the notification of correct operation and three
cables for connection to traditional devices. The device is made with Basic enclosure,
with reduced dimensions and can be used in flush mounted and junction boxes and
trunkings. The installation in boxes is particularly advantageous, with the positioning
of the item inside the flush mounted box, behind lowered automation devices or behind
traditional devices (pushbuttons, circuit breakers etc.).
The device may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using specific
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Project&Download).
Technical data
3477
PL1
PL2
Legend

Absorption:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
3.5 mA
Dimensional data
Size: basic module

MY HOME configuration
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
BT00272-a-UK
672 MY HOME
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
(attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
2. LED
3. Cords for connection to traditional devices
4. BUS
3477
Physical configuration
The interface includes two independent central units, identified with positions PL1 and
PL2. The two units can send:
- controls to two actuators for two independent loads (ON, OFF or adjustment) identified
with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified in M or;
- a control to the scenario module item F420;
- a double control intended for a single load (motor for rolling shutter UP/DOWN, OPENCLOSE curtains) identified with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified M.
The interface is fitted with a LED to signal correct operation, and three clamps for
connection to traditional devices such as:
- two traditional NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) switches or pushbuttons;
- a two-way switch.
1) SPE=0 mode - Standard functions - Automation

Value configurator in M
Possible function
single function
double function
Cyclical ON-OFF for short press and adjustment with long pressure
no configurator
ON
ON
18
OFF
OFF
OFF pressing the key connected to PL1 - ON pressing the key connected to PL2 and
adjustment with long pressure (dimmer) 2)
0/1
UP/DOWN rolling shutter to end of stroke
UP/DOWN rolling shutter monostable
Pushbutton
PUL
ON timed
1)
1) The device sends an OFF control after a time set by the configurators used as indicated in
the table below.
Configurator
Time (min.)
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
2) As a function of the receiver actuator operating mode.

NotE: If circuits are connected to the interface clamps, the operating mode to select is PUL.
If normally open (NO) pushbuttons are connected all the other operating modes indicated in
the table are performed.
BT00272-a-UK
MY HOME 673
3477
2) Operating mode with the configurator in M and in SPE
Possible function
Value configurator in SPE
Locks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed
single function
double function
Unlocks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed
Unlocks with key connected to PL2

and locks with key connected to PL1
On with flash 1)
none 9
ON (key in PL2) - OFF (key in PL1) without adjustment
0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF without adjustment (only NO contact)
19
Call the scenarios of module F420
see table (3)
Management of scenario module item F4203)
see table (3)
ON timed (2 seconds)
ON timed (10 minutes)
1) Device to be combined with an OFF control for switching OFF.

The flash time is indicated in the table:
3) With SPE=4 it is only possible to recall the scenario saved in the F420 module; with SPE=6
it is possible to recall and program the scenarios saved in the F420 module. M=1-8: group of
scenarios to be controlled:
Selection adjustment level fixed at 10 to 90 % of the dimmer
2)
Configurator
Time configurator (sec.)
none
0.5
First contact (PL1)
Second contact (PL2)
1.5
2.5
10
3.5
11
12
13
14
4.5
15
16
A=0 to 9 and PL1=1 to 9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be
controlled. PL2 must be the same as PL1, or not configured (in this case the second contact is
disabled).
2) Device to be combined with the dimmer actuator and an OFF control for switching OFF.
The configurator defines the adjustment in % of the load power.
BT00272-a-UK
Configurator in N
% P of load
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
674 MY HOME
3477
Scenario programmer: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to
enable the programming mode of the Module item F422 so that the status LED is green
(press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with
the following operations:
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly.
To cancel a scenario completely, keep the corresponding pushbutton pressed for about ten
seconds.
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario is to be associated to for 3 seconds. The
corresponding LED will begin to flash.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls belonging to the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system functions, etc.
3) confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode;
4) To change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1.
3) Mode with SPE=7 - Automation standard functions - normally closed contact
This mode can perform the controls envisaged by the Basic operating mode with SPE = 0 when NC pushbuttons or switches are connected to the interface clamps.
4) Mode with SPE=5 - sound system When the interface is correctly configured, the following functions are performed:
M=1 Source cycling/track cycling mode
M=0 ON/OFF mode:
N1 contact: cycle source
N1 contact:
N2 contact: cycle track
With a short pressure, the following sequence is sent:
In this operating mode:
- ON of the sources. PL2 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on.
If PL2=0, source 1 is turned on (follow-me mode)
- room controls
- ON of the A/PL1 amplifier.

With extended pressure the following happens:
- For point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted (VOL+);
if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;
A = 1-9 is the amplifier room

- General controls
A = GEN for general controls
PL1=PL2=0
- For AMB or GEN controls, only the volume is adjusted.

N2 contact:
With a short pressure, the OFF command of the A/PL1 amplifier is sent
With an extended pressure the volume is adjusted (VOL -)
Point-point control
- A = 1-9 amplifier room
- PL1= 0-9 amplifier speaker
BT00272-a-UK
Room control
A = AMB
PL1 = 1-9 amplifier room the control is intended for
General control
A = GEN
PL1 = 0
PL2 = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on.
If PL2=0, follow-me mode is activated
MY HOME 675
3477
Lighting Management configuration
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
below:
- contact;
- single light control;
- single disable control;
- single scenario control;
- single CEN control;
- single scenario PLUS control;
- single CEN PLUS control;
- single AUX control.
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed below:
- contact
- single light control
- single disable control
- single scenario control
- single CEN control
- single scenario PLUS control
- single CEN PLUS control
- single AUX control
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets
chapter.
Wiring diagram
Basic interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
Historical actuator
3477
PL1
PL2
1
1
Historical switch
C1
SCS BUS
L
N
BT00272-a-UK
676 MY HOME
2
2
3
4
C2
Mobile actuator
3526 - 3526/10 - 3526/16
Description
This plug-in actuator provides radio control, through transmitting interfaces
L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576, of the connected load using the internal 16 A relay.
The relay contact is of the normally open type. In this way, when idle the load connected
to the actuator is off.
The actuator is available in three versions:
- 3526 with German standard plug for connection to the network socket, and universal
socket (German standard, 10 A and 16 A) for connection of the load.
- 3526/10 with 10 A plug for connection to the network socket, and German
standard/10 A plug for connection of the load.
- 3526/16 with 16 A plug for connection to the network socket, and universal socket
(German standard, 10 A and 16 A) for connection of the load.
2
3
A
PL
MOD
G
230V
4A cos =0,5
16A
Technical data
4A
Power supply:
230 Vac @ 50 Hz
0 40 C
Power/Absorption of driven loads for 3526 and 3526/16:



- fluorescent lamps 1000 W / 4 A

- electronic transformers 1000 W / 4 A

Power/Absorption of driven loads for 3526/10:





Radio frequency:
868 MHz
Legend
1. Set up for customisations with label.
2. LED
3. Pin pushbutton for manual activation/deactivation and programming of the load.
4. Socket for connecting the load.
5. Configurator socket.
ART. 3526
4A
10A
4
Programming
1) Plug in the device.
2) Hold down the pin key until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the key.
be programmed.
1) Plug in the device.
2) Hold down the pin key; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn ON; hold down the
pushbutton until the LED turns off.
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all programming will be cancelled.
Configuration
Possible function
Configurator in MOD
The actuator ignores the Room and

General controls
PUL
Normal operation
LED
BT00105-b-UK
No configuration is required when installed in traditional systems, or systems only

consisting of radio devices. When integrating the device to a MY HOME system, or when
advanced functions are required, at least the A and PL positions must be configured. The
configuration as belonging to the G group is only possible if also A and PL are configured.
For example, if the actuator is configured with A = 5 and PL = 3, it will be managed by
the wire control with address A=5 and PL=3. The radio interface must have an address
not higher than 52 (A=5 and PL=2). If a PUL configurator is connected to the MOD
position, the actuator will ignore Room and General controls.
Mobile actuators execute all the basic operation modes that can be configured directly on
radio control devices, except for the ones requiring interlocked relays. If the configuration
is wrong, the signalling LED will start flashing, and will do so until a correct combination
of configurators is connected.
MY HOME 677
Radio remote control 6 channels
3527
Description
This remote control is a transmitting radio device that can drive the radio actuators item
F470/1, F470/2, 3526, 3526/10 and 3526/16; when used in conjunction with receiving
interfaces HC/HS4575 and L/N/NT4575N, it can also be used to control devices of the
MY HOME system. This remote control has six radio channels and six customisable keys
which are back-lit and emit a sound when selected.
The remote control can also be used as a flashlight. There is an orange LED which
indicates that the radio transmission has occurred after pressing a key; if this indicator
turns red, it means that the batteries are dead and must be replaced.
led
key 1
key 2
key 3
key 4
Technical data
Power supply:

Radio frequency:
Range:

Type of modulation:
key 5
2 AA 1.5 V pen batteries
(not provided, min. duration: 3 years)
0 40 C
868 MHz
100 m in free field
(metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range)
FSK
key 6
Torch function:
When you press keys 5 and 6, the remote control will act as a flashlight.
Warning, in this mode the duration of the battery is sensibly decreased.
Key 5
BT00099-b-UK
678 MY HOME
Key 6
3527
Configuration
To configure the remote control, it is not necessary to use traditional configurators:
Switches are used instead as indicated in the following table. To access the switches
remove the upper part of the remote control.
NOTE: Switches 3 and 4 must be left with the factory settings; switch no. 4 is used to set
the volume level of the audible signal of the keys, and to change the key scanning time
for the disabled function.
Programming
To associate a different control to each of the alarm radio remote control channels, follow
the procedure below:
1) Press the interface radio programming pushbutton, configured in self-learning
mode, for 3 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily; release the pushbutton.
2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the remote control you want to program; the red
LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming mode.
3) Within 5 minutes, set the function you want to associate to the remote control key
using the actuator and/or corresponding control; the red LED will start flashing
quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the programming has been
completed.
4) You can repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated (in case you want to change it). A maximum of 24 self-learning
operations are possible (e.g. 4 remote controls item 3527).
To cancel the programming of one of the remote control keys, follow the procedure
below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton on the radio interface for at least 8 seconds
(after 4 seconds the red LED will turn ON steadily and then after another 5 seconds it
will turn off). Release the key. The red LED will turn ON again steadily.
2) If you want to cancel the programming condition of a key, press it on the remote
control within 20 seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds,
thus confirming the cancellation.
3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the
programming pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily
after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off and after another 4 seconds
it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all
programming conditions.
Release the key. Here you can completely reset the device by cancelling both the
associated radio codes and the controls associated to the various remote control keys.
Switch
Switch 2
Choose the level of the key audible signal:

1 - Move switch no. 4 to programming mode (UP).
2 - Hold down keys 1 and 3 simultaneously; after 2 seconds, keys 1 and 2 will light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to listen to the audible signal associated to it (key 1 higher
level).
4 - Hold down the key corresponding to the required level for more than 2 seconds.
5 - The level will be stored when an audible signal is emitted and when the key starts
flashing.
6 - Move switch no. 4 to normal operation mode (DOWN).
Position
Operating mode
It lights up when the remote control key is pressed.
Up
Key lighting = ON
It does not light up when the remote control key is pressed.
Down
Key lighting = OFF
Up
Audible signal = ON
An audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
Down
Audible signal = OFF
No audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
BT00099-b-UK
Switch 1
1 2 3 4
MY HOME 679
3527
Remote control functions for disabled people
The radio control is provided with a 3.5 mm standard mono jack input for connecting a
detector (for disabled people) and a screw connection for installation on wheelchair or
on bedside.
Thanks to signals issued by an external sensor, the main functions of the remote control
can also be recalled by a disabled person (control devices that enable to recover the
residual capacity of movement of a disabled person).
SCANNING OF KEYS - the first signal from the external sensor starts the remote control
keys scanning sequence; the key reached by the scanning sequence may be identified by
a luminous and/or audible signal.
KEY SELECTION - the second signal from the sensor stops the scanning sequence when
the selected key is reached.
CONTROL ACTIVATION - the third signal from the sensor corresponds to a standard
pressure of the selected key. A short pressure corresponds to the key being pressed for a
short time, and then released; in case of extended pressure, the remote control will wait
for a fourth signal from the sensor, which will be interpreted as the key being released.
The time between the third and the fourth signal is interpreted as an extended pressure.
The scanning time for each individual key may be changed whilst in programming
mode. The remote control is sold factory set with a standard scanning time of 1 second.
2 - Press keys 1 and 6 at the same time for at least 2 seconds; the first four keys light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to perform a scanning test to ascertain the associated
time. Scanning times are as follows: Key 1 = 2 sec., Key 2 = 1 sec., Key 3 = 0.5 sec.,
Key 4 = 0.3 sec.
4 - Press and hold down the key corresponding to the desired time for at least
2 seconds.
5 - The successful completion of the programming procedure is confirmed by the
pressed key flashing
BT00099-b-UK
680 MY HOME
jack input
screw connection

4 channels
3528
Description
key 4
This remote control is a transmitting radio device which can drive MY HOME devices,
if used together with the receiving radio interface HC/HS4575 and item L/N/NT4575N;
it gives the possibility of directly driving radio actuators F470/1, F470/2, 3526, 3526/10,
3526/16 and item 3470.
The remote control has 4 keys, the same as the number of radio channels available.
There is an orange LED which signals, when a key is pressed, that the transmission radio
has occurred.
key 1
LED
Technical data
Power supply:
Radio frequency:
Range:

Type of modulation:
3V battery type CR2032 (min. duration: 2 years)

0 40 C
868 MHz
100 m in free field
FSK
key 3
key 2
Configuration
The remote control is supplied with 2 switches to define the operating mode for the
operation in radio systems (remote control and radio actuator), as shown in the figure.
In MY HOME applications leave the switch in the preset positions.
M P
To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the pin
pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily after 3 seconds;
after another 5 seconds, it will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing
quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all programming
conditions.
BT00100-b-UK
Programming
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the radio interface, configured in self-learning
mode, for 3 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily; release the pushbutton.
completed.
associated (in case you want to change it).
below:
re-programmed.
MY HOME 681
3529
Description
The IR remote control is a device capable of performing the following functions:
- directly drive traditional devices with integrated IR receivers currently on our catalogue
(L4425, 1 channel receiver with relay output, and L4426, 2 channel receiver with 2
interlocked relay outputs);
- interface to the SCS BUS using the IR receiver L/N/NT4654N , HC/HS4654 and AM5834
IR receivers, for the creation of controls for 1 relay actuators for single loads, and for 2
relay actuators for double loads (shutters motor etc.), adjust the dimmer, generate or
recall scenarios saved in the scenario module, or operate sound systems and video door
entry systems.
The IR remote control includes:
- 16 keys that may be lit individually by a blue LED.
When a key is pressed, its light comes on and stays on until released, when the light
gradually goes off;
- 16 windows for entering an icon representing the function saved by the pushbutton;
- a buzzer emitting an audible signal when the key is pressed
- a standard 3.5mm jack input, enabling the remote control to be used through a signal
coming from a sensor for disabled people.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Technical data
Power supply:
Absorption:

Frequency:
3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)

such to ensure that the batteries will last for a period of
2 years, based on 100 pressures per day
5 35 C
36.7 KHz in PCM modulation
Configuration
Inside the battery housing is a 4-way Dip Switch type changeover switch with two
positions, for selecting the operating modes as indicated in the table.
BT00109-b-UK
Dip Switch changeover switch

with factory configuration
682 MY HOME
3529
Switch
Position
Operating mode
Up
Key lighting = ON
It lights up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4
Down
Key lighting = OFF
It does not light up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4
Up
Audible signal = ON
An audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4
Down
Audible signal = OFF
No audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4
Up
Programming of the key scanning speed for the disabled user function.
Down
Normal operation.
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Remote control functions for disabled people

The radio control is provided with a 3.5 mm standard mono jack input for connecting
a detector (for disabled people) and a screw connection for installation on wheelchair
or on bedside. Thanks to signals issued by an external sensor, the main functions of the
remote control can also be recalled by a disabled person (control devices that enable to
recover the residual capacity of movement of a disabled person).
SCANNING OF KEYS - the first signal from the external sensor starts the remote control
keys scanning sequence; the key reached by the scanning sequence may be identified by
a luminous and/or audible signal.
KEY SELECTION - the second signal from the sensor stops the scanning sequence when
the selected key is reached.
CONTROL ACTIVATION - the third signal from the sensor corresponds to a standard
pressure of the selected key. A short pressure corresponds to the key being pressed for a
short time, and then released; in case of extended pressure, the remote control will wait
for a fourth signal from the sensor, which will be interpreted as the key being released.
The time between the third and the fourth signal is interpreted as an extended pressure.
- If the control activation (third closing) does not occur within three times the
selected scanning time, the scanning procedure starts again.
- Time out due to extended pressure from jack: 1 min.
BT00109-b-UK
The scanning time of each individual key may be changed whilst in programming
mode.
2 - The first four keys light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to perform a scanning test to ascertain the associated time.
Scanning times are as follows:
Key 1 = 2 sec.
Key 2 = 1 sec.
Key 3 = 0.5 sec.
Key 4 = 0.3 sec.
4 - Press and hold down the key corresponding to the desired time for at least 2
seconds.
5 - The successful completion of the programming procedure is confirmed by the
pressed key flashing
MY HOME 683
Dimmer actuator
BMDI1001
Description
110 230 Vac control device for electronic ballast or driver power supply with dimmer
function; it can supply fluorescent lamps or LED lamps and adjust their brightness
depending on the voltage, with values between 1 and 10V, with which they are driven.
From any specially configured control point connected to the BUS system one can switch
the lights connected ON and off or set their brightness. A short pressure of the control
key will switch the load ON or off, while an extended pressure can be used to adjust the
brightness level.
configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download)
1 2 3 4
Technical data
Power supply:
110 - 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Max. absorption:
165 mA
Number of outputs:
1 x 4.3 A
Operating:
dimmer
(-5) (+ 45) C
Max. No. of ballasts that can be connected: 160
Type of connection:
RJ45

clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2

clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2

and 1 x 2.5 mm2
Incandescent lamps, halogen lamp and
compact fluorescent lamp 4.3 A / 1000 VA
Legend
1. Load status indication LED
Standards, Certifications, Marks
Standards: IEC60669 - 2 - 1
2. Load activation pushbutton

3. Learn Mode status indication LED
4. Learn Mode pushbutton
Dimensional data
5. Clamps for the connection to the 100 230 Vac power supply
6. 1 10 V output voltage clamps
Size: 6 DIN modules
7. Contact clamps
MY HOME Configuration
- Physical configuration, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the
web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
BT00314-b-UK
684 MY HOME
8. BUS RJ45 connector

BMDI1001
The actuator performs all the Basic operating modes that can be configured directly on
the control, apart from those which require the use of 2 interlocked relays.
1) Operating mode with Configurator in M
Possible function
Configurator in M
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address
SLA
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls
PUL
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1)
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time.
The next OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active
for the period of time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as
2) Operating mode with configurator in L Selection of the minimum brightness level:

the configurator in the L position establishes the minimum output voltage between the
1 - 2 clamps when the load is ON, thus allowing the minimum intensity level to be selected.
5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard 0-10V is possible as well as
the standard 1-10V.
3) Configurator in TYPE Selecting the type of load used:

In the TYPE position the configurator determines the type of load used on the basis of the
following table. If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical switching ON delay of 1.5 s are
used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON control taking account of the delay. If
power supplies for LED lamps must be controlled instead the device will send an immediate
soft/start switching ON control.
1 4 1)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
1.5
0.5
Configurator TYPE
Load driven
No configurator
Fluorescent ballast
LED driver
Using the Virtual configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
below:
- dimmer
BT00314-b-UK
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
- dimmer
chapter.
MY HOME 685
BMDI1001
Operating mode
When in Test mode, by pressing the pushbutton of the actuator it will be possible to enable or disable the associated load.
DIMMER FUNCTION
100 %
0%
ON-OFF
0%
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16
F881NA/2
C16
C2
230V
230V
BT00314-b-UK
686 MY HOME
ON/OFF
Passive infrared
ceiling sensor
Description
BMSE1001
Device with cover
Control and command device, powered by the SCS BUS, with two different sensors, the
combination of which enables managing the light level inside the room, taking into
account both the presence of people, and the level of natural light, therefore ensuring
efficient energy savings and better user comfort.
The device has an IP 20 protection index, and is intended for ceiling mounted installation.
The sensor is fitted with:
- BUS wiring connector;
- PIR movement sensor;
- light sensor;
- internal microcontroller;
- two-colour LED;
- multifunction key;
- configurator socket.
PIR movement sensor:
it detects the presence of people inside the room. Its used inside rooms with free view,
without obstacles, for the detection of people.
Light sensor:
it detects the light level inside the room, switching the load ON or OFF based on whether
the light threshold set on the sensor (adjustable by the user) is lower/higher than the
value detected. The light sensor has priority on the movement sensor: if the PIR sensor
detects a presence, but natural light is sufficient, no load management signal is sent
by the device. In order to avoid continuous switching ON and OFF, a tolerance on the
threshold values must be set.
Device without cover
The sensor may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system using specific
configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data
Power supply:
27 Vdc
Absorption:
10 mA
Operation:
ON/OFF, dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
Sensor type:
PIR
Protection index:
IP20
Sensitivity:
1 2000 lux
Time delay:
30 s 255 h
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 6m(28m2)
Covering angle:
90/360
Maximum installation height:
4m
Type of connection:
screw clamps
Legend
1. LED indicator:
- fixed green = BUS detected

- orange flashing once = movement detected.
- orange-green flashing quickly = no configuration or wrong configuration.
- orange-green flashing for 1 second = configuration being performed
- red flashing quickly = acquiring the Set Point
- red-green flashing quickly = sensor calibration being performed
2. Light sensor
3. Infrared PIR movement sensor
4. Multifunction key:
- Short pressure to select the device when using the virtual configuration.
EN 50428
- Pressure for 2 seconds, for the acquisition of the Set Point when working in Stand
Alone Mode.
- Two short pressures to enter the Push&Learn procedure during operation with the
Lighting Management system.
- A short pressure, followed by an extended pressure of 10 sec. to reset the sensor.
BT00295-a-UK
5. BUS connection screw clamps

MY HOME 687
BMSE1001
Dimensional data
Covering range for item BMSE 1001
The movement sensor is supplied with a lens with actual covering range area as
shown in the figure below.
75 mm
2.5 m
8m
40 mm
m
4
Adjustable sensitivity level
20 mm
15 mm
The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their functions
depend on the operating mode:
Room:
A=19
Light point: PL = 1 9
Mode:
M=08
PIR movement sensor sensitivity:
Load ON time:
S =0 3
T=09
WARNING: Addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist

BT00295-a-UK
688 MY HOME
Low
(m) S (m2)
2
3
3
7
3
7
Medium
A (m)
(m) S (m2)
2.5
3
7
3
4
13
4
5
20
Legend:
A = installation height (m)
= diameter (m)
S = surface (m2)
(m)
5
6
7
High
S (m2)
20
28
38
(m)
6
7
8
Max.
S (m2)
28
38
50
BMSE1001
Possible function
Configurator in M
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the
device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (Auto Mode). The PIR movement
sensor sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure). If the user
switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time set in T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the
device switches the load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN,
ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the
lighting value. In this case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and
GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the
scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a
dimmer); when a movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level
(Auto Mode). When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until
the time set with the configurator connected to T expires.
During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the outside light level
increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure).
It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next
switching ON.
In this mode the device operate as a pure twilight switch and manages the load directly, maintaining a constant light level inside the room, disabling
the presence sensor (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer). The switching ON of the load is manual, while the switching OFF is
managed automatically by the sensor based on the desired light level (Eco Mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load
on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator
connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. Once the load has been
switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but will wait for the user to do so manually. For correct
operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure).
It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next
switching ON.
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=0). The switching ON of the load is manual and the device
keeps the load on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Eco Mode).
In this mode the device maintains a constant light level inside the room (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=3). The switching ON of the load is manual and the
device keeps the load on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Eco Mode).
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=1). The switching ON of the load
is manual and the device keeps the load on based on desired light level (Eco Mode).
In this mode the device operates as a pure twilight switch and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room, disabling
the movement sensor (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=4). When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the load on, and switches it
off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode).
WARNING: when managing scenarios using the information from the sensor, using the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured exclusively in M=2 mode.
BT00295-a-UK
MY HOME 689
BMSE1001
1) Table of the active load times based on the configurator connected to T:
2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator
connected to S:
Configurator in T
Active load time in min.
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
15
No configurator
Low
30 sec.
Medium
High
Very high
10
15
20
30
40
Procedure for the acquisition of the sensor lighting set-point:

- Press the pushbutton for two seconds.
- The LED will start flashing red quickly.
- Move away from under the sensor, so that it can perform a correct measurement
- After about 20 sec. the LED stops flashing and the sensor finishes the acquisition.
NOTE: it is important that the set-point is reacquired every time the sensor position is
changed, and every time that what is under the sensor changes.
below:
- local lighting/movement detector
- local lighting sensor
- local movement sensor
- central lighting detector
- central lighting sensor
- central movement sensor
following ways:
- Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
- central lighting detector
chapter.
Installation mode
The sensor must never be installed near heat sources or near the splitter of the cooling
system.
BT00295-a-UK
690 MY HOME
BMSE1001
BT00295-a-UK
MY HOME 691
Wide band
wall/ceiling sensor
BMSE2001
Description
The device has an IP42 protection index and must be installed indoors, either on the wall
or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied.
6
1
2

- RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable;
- passive infrared PIR movement sensor;
- light sensor;
- two-way IR receiver for adjustment using the remote control BMS04001 and BMS04002;
- pushbutton for enabling the adjustment of the parameters using the remote control;

Light sensor:
Standards:
- CE directive
Safety standard:
EN 60669-2-1
Legend
Technical data
BT00296-a-UK
Power supply:
Absorption:
Operation:
Functions:
Sensor type:
Protection index:
Sensitivity:
Time delay:
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m:
Covering angle:
Type of connection:
692 MY HOME
27 Vdc
12 mA
ON/OFF and dimmer
Auto/Eco/ Walktrough
(-5) (+45) C
PIR
IP42
1 2000 lux
30 s-255 h
2 m x 12 m(24 m2)
90/30
6m
RJ45
1. Light sensor
3. Two-way IR receiver
4. Pushbutton enabling remote control adjustments
6. LED indicator
7. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor
BMSE2001
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm
Coverage of the PIR sensor

30
91 91
mmmm
2.5 m
12
69.6
69.6
mmmm
1.25
0
0.75
Low
Medium
L P S
A L P S
(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
2.5 1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11 15.5
3
1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11 15.5
4
1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17
5
1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17
6
1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
High
Max.
L
P
S
L
P
S
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
1.5 11
17 1.5 11 17
1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17
1.5 12
20
2
12 20
1.5 12 20
2
12 20
1.5 12 20
2
12 20
The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their
functions depend on the operating mode:
Room:
A= 19
Mode:
M=04
BT00296-a-UK
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S = 0 3

Load ON time:
T= 09
Lighting sensor sensitivity:
D= 05
MY HOME 693
BMSE2001
Possible function
Configurator in M
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device
switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (auto mode). The PIR movement sensor sensitivity is
set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected to D. If the
user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the load
on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected.
In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value. In this case
the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode
the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer); when a
movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Auto Mode). When a movement is
detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T
expires. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the
device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected
to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
In this mode the device operates as a twilight device, and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor
manages a dimmer), and disabling the movement sensor. The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending on the desired light
level (Eco mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During its operation the sensor
maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load
driven. Once the load has been switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but will wait for the user to do so manually. For
correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a
control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next switching ON. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that
changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
3) Sensitivity table for the ligthing sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
BT00296-a-UK
Configurator in T
Configurator in D
Sensitivity in Lux
No configurator
15
No configurator
Wall mounted: 300 Ceiling mounted: 500
30 sec.
20
100
300
500
10
1000
15
20
30
40
2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator connected to S:
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
Low
Medium
High
Very high
694 MY HOME
BMSE2001
below:
- PLUS IR scenario control
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00296-a-UK
MY HOME 695
BMSE2001
Operating mode
Auto mode:
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator,
depending on peoples presence and the desired light level as detected by the BUS
sensor. The AUTO mode does not require the installation of a BUS control.
However, it is nevertheless possible to add a BUS control, with the function of forcing the
switching ON/OFF of the automatism set by the dimmer/actuator.
The system remains in manual operation while a presence is being detected: after the
switching OFF time delay due to non-detection of presence has elapsed, the system
returns to automatic mode.
255 h
25530h s
255 h
Eco mode:
The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending
on peoples presence and the desired light level. The ECO mode requires the installation
of a control. The function of the pushbutton is mainly to activate the automatism of
the sensor: at the first pressure, the sensor compares the desired light level with the
actual light level inside the room, and decides if the lights must be switched on or not.
A subsequent pressure of the pushbutton will force the switching ON/OFF of the
automatism determined by the sensor. The system remains in manual operation while
a presence is being detected: after the switching OFF time delay due to non-detection
of presence has elapsed, the system returns to automatic mode. A further functionality
of the ECO mode is the temporary AUTO mode operation (30 seconds), following a
switching OFF due to no presence being detected. After 30 seconds from switching OFF,
the sensor returns to operate in ECO mode, therefore without performing an automatic
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s
255 h 25530h s
255 h
59 min
30 s
30 s
0s
30 s
30 s
0s
In addition to the two modes above, the following functions are also available:
Walkthrough: the device switches the lights off 3 minutes after somebody has entered
the room, if no presence is detected for 20 seconds (if the time delay is set to less than
3 minutes, that value will apply). If a presence is detected within the 20 seconds, the
system uses the set time delay.
BT00296-a-UK
Audible signal: 1 minute, 30 seconds, and 10 seconds before the expiry of the set time
delay, an audible signal is emitted
255 h
255 h
30 s
Settable parameters
Parameters
Time delay
PIR Sensitivity (%)
LUX Sensitivity (Lux)
Operating mode1)
Walktrough
Adjustment range
30 s 255 h
0 100
1 2000
Auto/Eco
Enabled/Disabled
NOTE: All parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
1) these modes may be set using the physical configuration
696 MY HOME
Factory settings
15 min
100
300 +/- 15%
Auto
Enabled
30 s
BMSE2001
The device is intended for indoor installation, on the wall or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied.
Ceiling mounted installation
5
BT00296-a-UK
MY HOME 697
Narrow beam
wall/ceiling mounted sensor
BMSE2002
Description
6
1
2

- light sensor;

Light sensor:
Standards:
- CE directive
Safety standard:
EN 60669-2-1
Technical data
Legend
BT00297-a-UK
Power supply:
27 Vdc
Absorption:
12 mA
Operation:
ON/OFF and dimmer
Functions: Auto/Eco/Walktrough
(-5) (+45) C
Sensor type:
PIR
Protection index:
IP42
Sensitivity:
1 2000 lux
Time delay:
30 s - 255 h
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 11 m x 14 m (120 m2)
Covering angle:
60/90
Maximum installation height: 6 m
Type of connection:
RJ45
698 MY HOME
1. Light sensor
6. LED indicator
BMSE2002
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm

Copertura del sensore PIR
5.5
3.5
91 mm
91 mm
90
3.5
5.5
m
2.5 m
m
14
69.669.6
mmmm
Low
P
(m)
13.5
13.5
14
14
14
Medium
L P
S
(m) (m) (m2)
10 14 68
10.5 14 68
10.5 14 70
10.5 14 70
10.5 14 70
A L
S
(m) (m)
(m2)
2.5 10
65
3
10
66
4
10
68
5
10
68
6
10
68
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
High
Max.
L
P
S
L
P
S
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
10.5 14 68 11 14 70
10.5 14 70 11 14 70
11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
Room:
A= 19
Mode:
M=04
BT00297-a-UK
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S = 0 3

Load ON time:
T= 09
Sensitivity of the lighting sensor: D = 0 5
MY HOME 699
BMSE2002
Possible function
Configurator in M
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the device
switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (Auto Mode). The PIR movement sensor
sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity of the lighting sensor with the configurator
connected to D. If the user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a
time indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches
the load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators
cannot be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value.
In this case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be
connected. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer); when
a movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Auto Mode). When a movement
is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected
to T expires. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level
increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the
configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point
until the next switching ON.
In this mode the device operates as a twilight device, and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the
sensor manages a dimmer), and disabling the movement sensor. The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending on the
desired light level (Eco mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During
its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device
decreases the brightness of the load driven. Once the load has been switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but
will wait for the user to do so manually. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected
to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next switching
ON. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
BT00297-a-UK
Configurator in T
Configurator in D
Sensitivity in Lux
No configurator
15
No configurator
30 sec.
20
100
300
500
10
1000
15
20
30
40
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
Low
Medium
High
Very high
700 MY HOME
BMSE2002
below:
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00297-a-UK
MY HOME 701
BMSE2002
Operating mode
Auto mode:
255 h
25530h s
255 h
Eco mode:
The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
depending on peoples presence and the desired light level. The ECO mode requires
the installation of a control. The function of the pushbutton is mainly to activate the
automatism of the sensor: at the first pressure, the sensor compares the desired light
level with the actual light level inside the room, and decides if the lights must be
switched ON or not.
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s
255 h 25530h s
255 h
59 min
30 s
30 s
0s
30 s
30 s
0s
Walkthrough: The device switches the lights off 3 minutes after somebody has entered
BT00297-a-UK
255 h
255 h
30 s
Settable parameters
Parameters
Time delay
PIR Sensitivity (%)
Operating mode1)
Walktrough
Adjustment range
30 s 255 h
0 100
1 2000
Auto/Eco
Enabled/Disabled
NOTE: All parameters adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
702 MY HOME
Factory settings
15 min
100
300 +/- 15%
Auto
Enabled
30 s
BMSE2002
5
BT00297-a-UK
MY HOME 703
Two-way narrow beam

BMSE2003
Description
65
1
2

- light sensor;

Light sensor:
76
Standards:
- CE directive
Safety standard:
EN 60669-2-1
Legend
Technical data
BT00298-a-UK
Power supply:
27 Vdc
Absorption:
12 mA
Operation:
ON/OFF and dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
Sensor type:
PIR
Protection index:
IP42
Sensitivity:
1 2000 lux
Time delay:
30 s -255 h
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 2 m x 9 m + 9 m (36 m2)
Covering angle:
90/30
6m
Type of connection:
RJ45
704 MY HOME
1. Light sensor
6. LED indicator
BMSE2003
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm
1.25
91 mm 91 mm
0
0.75
m
4

Low
P
(m)
15.5
16
16
16
16
Medium
L P
S
(m) (m) (m2)
1.5 16 22
1.5 16 24
1.8 17 31
1.8 17 31
1.8 17 31
69.6 mm69.6 mm
A L
S
(m) (m)
(m2)
2.5 1
20
3 1.5
22
4 1.5
26
5 1.5
26
6 1.5
26
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
High
Max.
L
P
S
L
P
S
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
1.5 16 24 1.5 16.5 26
1.5 16.5 28
2
17 31
2
18 32
2
18 34
2
18 32
2
18 34
2
18 32
2
18 34
Example of coverage of the PIR sensor with devices BMSE2003 and BMSE2004 (e.g. a corridor).
1.75 x H
1xH
1xH
1xH
1xH
1.75 x H
Room:
A= 19
Mode:
M=04
BT00298-a-UK

S= 03
Load ON time:
T= 09
Sensitivity of the lighting sensor:
D= 05
MY HOME 705
BMSE2003
Possible function
Configurator in M
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value. In this
case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected.
In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
15
No configurator
Low
30 sec.
Medium
High
Very high
10
15
20
Configurator in D
Sensitivity in Lux
30
No configurator
40
20
100
300
500
1000
BT00298-a-UK
Configurator in T
706 MY HOME
BMSE2003
below:
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00298-a-UK
MY HOME 707
BMSE2003
Operating mode
Auto mode:
255 h
25530h s
255 h
Eco mode:
The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
switched ON or not.
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s
255 h 25530h s
255 h
59 min
30 s
30 s
0s
30 s
30 s
0s
255 h
255 h
30 s
BT00298-a-UK
Settable parameters
Parameters
Time delay
PIR Sensitivity (%)
Operating mode1)
Walktrough
Adjustment range
30 255 h
0 100
1 2000
Auto/Eco
Enabled/Disabled
Factory settings
15 min
100
300 +/- 15%
Auto
Enabled
Note: all the parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
708 MY HOME
30 s
BMSE2003
5
BT00298-a-UK
MY HOME 709
One-way narrow beam

BMSE2004
Description
6
1
2

- light sensor;

Light sensor:
Standards:
- CE directive
Safety standard:
EN 60669-2-1
Technical data
Legend
BT00299-a-UK
Power supply:
27 Vdc
Absorption:
12 mA
Operation:
ON/OFF and dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
Sensor type:
PIR
Protection index:
IP42
Sensitivity:
1 2000 lux
Time delay:
30 s -255 h
Covering angle:
60/140
6m
Type of connection:
RJ45
710 MY HOME
1. Light sensor
6. LED indicator
BMSE2004
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm
70
91 mm 91 mm
5
3
0
3
5
m
12
2.5 m
m
10
18
27

69.6 mm69.6 mm
Low
Medium
L P
S
A L P S
(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
2.5 8.5 25.5 95 9 26 103
3 9.5 26 107 9.5 26.5 111
4 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116
5 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116
6 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
High
L
P
(m) (m)
9.5 27
9.5 27
10 28
10 28
10 28
S
L
(m2) (m)
115 9.5
116 10
123 10
123 10
123 10
Max.
P
(m)
27
27
28.5
28.5
28.5
S
(m2)
115
117
128
128
128
Example of coverage of the PIR sensor with devices BMSE2003 and BMSE2004 (e.g. a corridor).
1.75 x H
1xH
1xH
1xH
1xH
1.75 x H
Room:
A= 19
Mode:
M=04
Load ON time:
WARNING: there is no address
S=03
T= 09
D=05
A = 0 and PL = 0
BT00299-a-UK
MY HOME 711
BMSE2004
Possible function
Configurator in M
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
15
No configurator
Low
30 sec.
Medium
High
Very high
10
15
20
Configurator in D
Sensitivity in Lux
30
No configurator
40
20
100
300
500
1000
BT00299-a-UK
Configurator in T
712 MY HOME
BMSE2004
below:
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00299-a-UK
MY HOME 713
BMSE2004
Operating mode
Auto mode:
255 h
25530h s
255 h
Eco mode:
The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
switched ON or not.
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s
255 h 25530h s
255 h
59 min
30 s
30 s
0s
30 s
30 s
0s
255 h
255 h
30 s
BT00299-a-UK
Settable parameters
Parameters
Time delay
PIR Sensitivity (%)
Operating mode1)
Walktrough
Adjustment range
30 255 h
0 100
1 2000
Auto/Eco
Enabled/Disabled
NOTE: All parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
714 MY HOME
Factory settings
15 min
100
300 +/- 15%
Auto
Enabled
30 s
BMSE2004
5
BT00299-a-UK
MY HOME 715
Double technology
BMSE2005
Description
Control and command device, powered by the SCS BUS, with three different sensors,
the combination of which enables managing the light level inside the room, taking into
5
1
2

- RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable
- US ultrasound movement sensor
- light sensor;
- two-way IR receiver for adjustment using the remote control BMS04001 and BMS04002
- pushbutton for enabling the adjustment of the parameters using the remote control
- configurator socket

US movement sensor:
it detects the presence of people inside the controlled room thanks to the emission of
ultrasound pulses, detecting any return echo caused by the presence of people within
the rated covering range. Its used in rooms where obstacles are present.
Light sensors:
Legend
Standards:
- CE directive
Safety standard:
EN 60669-2-1

3. US ultrasound movement sensor
Technical data
BT00300-a-UK
Power supply:
27 Vdc
Absorption:
17 mA
Operation:
ON/OFF and dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
Sensor type:
PIR and US
Protection index:
IP42
Sensitivity:
1 2000 lux
Time delay:
30 s 255 h
Covering angle:
60/180
Maximum installation height: 6 m
Type of connection:
RJ45
716 MY HOME
1. Light sensor
5. LED indicator
BMSE2005
Dimensional data
116 mm
116 mm
2.5 m
14 m
m
9191
mm
mm
PIR L
(m)
2.5 3
3
3
4
3
5
4
6
4
Low
P
(m)
1
1
2
2
2
US L
(m)
2.5 4
3
4
4
4
5
4
6
3
Low
P
(m)
2
2
2
2
2
S
(m2)
10
10
14
19
25
Medium
L P
S
L
(m) (m) (m2) (m)
5
3 20
8
5
3 20
8
6
3 28
9
7
4 38 11
8
4 50 12
S
(m2)
19
19
19
19
14
Medium
L P
S
L
(m) (m) (m2) (m)
7
4 38 11
7
4 38 11
7
4 38 11
7
4 38 11
6
3 28
9
7070
mm
mm
7m
High
Max.
P
S
L
P
S
(m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
4
29 10
5
39
4
29 10
5
39
5
42 12
6
57
5
58 14
7
77
6
75 16
8 100
High
Max.
P
S
L
P
S
(m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
5
58 14
7
77
5
58 14
7
77
5
58 14
7
77
5
58 14
7
77
5
42 12
6
57
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
Room:
A= 19
Mode:
M=04
BT00300-a-UK

S= 03
Load ON time:
T= 09
D= 05
MY HOME 717
BMSE2005
Possible function
Configurator in M
connected to D. If the user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time
indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the
load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot
be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until
the next switching ON.
BT00300-a-UK
Configurator in T
Configurator in S
Sensitivity
No configurator
15
No configurator
Low
30 sec.
Medium
High
Very high
10
15
20
Configurator in D
Sensitivity in Lux
30
No configurator
40
20
100
300
500
1000
718 MY HOME
BMSE2005
below:
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00300-a-UK
MY HOME 719
BMSE2005
Operating mode
Auto mode:
255 h
25530h s
255 h
Eco mode:
The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
switched on or not.
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s
255 h 25530h s
255 h
59 min
30 s
30 s
0s
30 s
30 s
0s
255 h
255 h
30 s
BT00300-a-UK
Settable parameters
Parameters
Time delay
PIR Sensitivity (%)
US Sensitivity (%)
Operating mode1)
Walktrough
Adjustment range
30 s 255 h
30 s 100
0 100
1 2000
Auto/Eco
Enabled/Disabled
Factory settings
15 min
100
100
300 +/- 15%
Auto
Enabled
Note: all the parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
720 MY HOME
30 s
BMSE2005
5
BT00300-a-UK
MY HOME 721
1 relay actuator
in DIN module
BMSW1001
Description
1 relay actuator for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac and installation inside DIN rail
switchboards or distribution boards. This device is fitted with local load control
pushbuttons.
Technical data
Power supply:
100 - 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Absorption:
5 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 2.8 W
Number of outputs:
1 x 16 A
Operation: ON/OFF
(- 5) (+45) C
Type of connection:
RJ45


clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2
Protection index:
IP20
Cable section
2.5 mm2
7

Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp
LED lamp
Electronic transformer - Ferromagnetic transformers
Legend
1. L1 Load status indication LED
230 Vac
3680 W
16 A
Linear fluorescent lamp
500 VA
2.1 A
5. L1 load connection clamps
6. L1 Load activation pushbutton
7. BUS RJ45 connector- RJ45 BUS connector RJ45/SCS adaptor, item BMAC1001 8. Configurator socket
10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A

BT00311-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
722 MY HOME
BMSW1001
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or the
Possible function
Configurator in M
PUL
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF
control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1)
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the
light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time.
The OFF control switches the light OFF immediately and leaves the fan working for the time
set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
1 4 1)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
below:
- light actuator
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
BT00311-b-UK
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
MY HOME 723
BMSW1001
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16
F881NA/2
C16
C2
230V
230V
BT00311-b-UK
724 MY HOME
2 relay actuator
in DIN module
BMSW1002
Description
Actuator with 2 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards.
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The PL1 and PL2 positions can never have the same configurator, because the device
cannot manage the interlock of the 2 relays. This means that it cannot manage motors
of rolling shutters, curtains, etc.
The actuator may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both
physically and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using
specific configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data
Power supply:
100 - 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Number of outputs:
2 x 16 A
Absorption:
5 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 1.7 W
Operation: ON/OFF
(-5 ) (+45) C
Type of connection:
RJ45


Protection index:
IP20
Cable section:
2.5 mm2
Legend
LED lamp
1. L1, L2 Load status indication LED

5. L1, L2 load connection clamps
230 Vac
3680 W
16 A
500 VA
2.1 A
6. L1, L2 Load activation pushbutton

10 X (2 X 36 W)
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
BT00312-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
MY HOME 725
BMSW1002
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the kit or the Web
server. The Virtual Configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Possible function
Configurator in M
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1). This mode is only operative if PL1PL2.
none 4 1)
SLA
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF
control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with
configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
WARNING: the PL1 and PL2 positions must never have the same configurator.
below:
- light actuator
BT00312-b-UK
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
726 MY HOME
PUL
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
BMSW1002
1
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
1
F881NA/16
F881NA/2
C16
C2
230V
230V
BT00312-b-UK
MY HOME 727
4 relay actuator
in DIN module
BMSW1003
Description
Actuator with 4 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac, and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards.
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The PL1, PL2, PL3 and PL4 positions can never have the same configurator, because the
device cannot manage the interlocking of the 2 relays. This means that it cannot manage
motors of rolling shutters, curtains, etc.
The actuator may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both
physically and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using
specific configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data
Power supply:
110 - 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Number of outputs:
4 x 16 A
Operation: ON/OFF
(-5 ) (+45) C
Type of connection:
RJ45


Protection index:
IP20
Cable section:
2.5 mm2
Legend
1. L1, L2, L3, L4 Load status indication LED.
LED lamp

4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
5. L1, L2, L3, L4 load connection clamps.
6. L1, L2, L3, L4 Load activation pushbutton.
230 Vac
3680 W
16 A
BT00313-b-UK
10 X (2 X 36 W)
500 VA
2.1 A
4.3 A
1150 W
5A
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
728 MY HOME
BMSW1003
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the web
server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Questa modalit operativa solo se PL1PL2PL3PL42).
Possible function
Configurator in M
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator
deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1).
This mode is only operative if PL1PL2PL3PL42).
none 4 1)
SLA
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF
control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with
configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
PUL
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
below:
- light actuator
BT00313-b-UK
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Downlaod,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
MY HOME 729
BMSW1003
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16
F881NA/2
C16
C2
230V
230V
BT00313-b-UK
730 MY HOME
Power supply
E46ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to supply power to the MY HOME and Lighting
Management systems. On the output, the unit supplies a 27 Vdc continuous low voltage,
with a maximum current of 1 A. It is electronically protected (without fuses) against
short circuit and overload.
Its a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN60065, and can therefore
be used in conjunction with a SELV source in accordance with paragraph 11.1.2.5 of CEI
64-8-4.
The power supply unit is fitted inside a 8 DIN rail module enclosure, and its installation
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
In general, the following requirements must be met:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents.
- A two-pole circuit breaker must be installed, with contact separation of at least 3 mm
located nearby the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the power
supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Technical data
Power supply voltage:

Input MAX power consumption:
Output voltage:
Maximum power delivered:
Maximum power consumption:
Reference standards:
Protection index:
2 1
Legend
230 Vac 10% @ 50/60 Hz

300 mA
27 Vdc
1.2 A
11 W
EN60065
IP30
5 40 C
1. Clamps (1-2) with 27 Vdc output voltage

2. Clamps (BUS) for the connection of the BUS/SCS
3. Clamps for connection to the power supply voltage
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
BT00273-a-UK
MY HOME 731
1 relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/1N
Description
Actuator for installation in DIN rail distribution boards or switchboards. This device
incorporates a two-way relay and a local load control pushbutton, only active if the
actuator has been configured.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
or virtually. In the last case, by configuring the G1, G2, and G3 positions, the actuator may
be associated to a maximum of three separate groups. When installed as a component of
the Lighting Management system, specific configuration procedures are used (Plug&go,
Project&Download).
F411/1N
Technical data
C1

Absorption:
Number of outputs:
Incandescent lamps
Halogen lamp
LED lamp
Compact fluorescent
lamp
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
22 mA
1x10 A
3
2

Electronic transformer
Ferromagnetic
transformers
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
230 Vac
2300 W
10 A
500 W Max. 10 lamps
Dissipated power with max. load:

920 W
4A
4 A cos 0.5 920 VA
1,5 W
(-5) (+45) C
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

Configuration MY HOME
BT00274-b-UK

732 MY HOME
F411/1N
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays.
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator are listed in the table below.
Possible function
Configurator in M
PUL
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for a point-point type control.
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has
elapsed1)
1 4 1)
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time.
The OFF control switches the light OFF immediately and leaves the fan working for the
time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
below:
- light actuator
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
Wiring diagram
N
L
1 2
F411/1N
L N
C1
BT00274-b-UK
MIN 3 m
MY HOME 733
1 NC relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/1NC
Description
Front view
incorporates a two-way NC relay and a local load control pushbutton. When compared
with actuator F411/11, the device inverts the relay control logic: at switching ON the
relay contacts are always closed (status ON LED ON), and open following an OFF control
(LED OFF) In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS, the device will remain in
the ON status, keeping the load ON. In the configurator sockets the device shows the
positions G1, G2 and G3, in additions to positions A, PL, and M, which make it possible
for up to 3 separate belonging groups to be associated to the actuator.
F411/1NC
C1
Technical data
Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
Halogen lamp
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
22 mA
LED lamp
Compact fluorescent
lamp
3
1
2
Ferromagnetic
transformers
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
230 Vac
2300 W
10 A
Size:
500 W Max. 10 lamps
920 W
4A
Configurator socket
BUS
LED
Pushbutton
4 A cos 0.5 920 VA
5 - 35 C
2 DIN modules
Configuration
BT00190-c-UK
Possible function
Configurator in M
PUL
Actuator as Slave.
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator.
Only for a point-point type control.
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
the time set with the configurators has elapsed1)
1 4 1)
1) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which
expiry the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE
Configurator
Time (minutes)
734 MY HOME
2 relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/2
Description
incorporates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local
control pushbuttons for each individual load, which are only active if the actuator has
been configured.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and configured physically or virtually.
In this case when the PL1 and PL2 positions are configured using the same configurator
the device interlocks the relays, to which it is possible to connect motors of rolling
shutters, curtains, etc.
When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system, specific
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
Technical data

Absorption:
Number of outputs:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
28 mA
2x6A
Incandescent lamps
1380 W
6A

250 W
Ferromagnetic transformers
C2
LED lamp
Halogen lamp
230 Vac
C1
Max. 4 lamps
Motor reducers for rolling shutters
Legend

2. BUS
3. LED
230 W
1A
2 A cos 0.5

Number of outputs:
460 VA
460 W
2A
4. Pushbutton
1.7 W1)
(-5) (+45) C
2x6A
BT00275-b-UK
NOTE: 1) the dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: no. of loaded relays, IN: load current corresponding to
the N relay.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the Web
MY HOME 735
F411/2
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
Possible function
Configurator in M
Timed stop for motors. The device deactivates after the time set has elapsed . This mode is only operative if LP1 = LP2
(same configurators), i.e. with the two relays interlocked
none 9 1)
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed2). This mode is only operative if PL1PL2.
none 4 2)
SLA
PUL
1)
2) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which the
actuator disables its own slave
below:
- light actuator
- rolling shutter actuator
BT00275-b-UK
following ways:
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
736 MY HOME
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
10
infinite or until the next control
20 sec.
10 sec.
5 sec.
15 sec.
30 sec.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
F411/2
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for the connection of lighting devices

A
PL
M
G1
G2
N
L
P
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
1 2
3 4
L N
L N
MIN 3 m
C1
C2
P L
Diagram for the control of a 230 Vac motor with 2 windings

N
L
L1
F411/2 actuator
M L2
M = motor in AC
with 2 windings
L1-N = clockwise rotation
L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
BT00275-b-UK
MY HOME 737
2 NC relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/2NC
Description
Front view
incorporates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local
control pushbuttons for each individual load.
When compared with actuator F411/2, this device inverts the relay control logic: at
switching ON the relay contacts are always closed (status ON LED ON), and open
following an OFF control (LED OFF) In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS,
the device will remain in the ON status, keeping the loads ON.
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2NC
Technical data
Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
Halogen lamp
C1
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
28 mA
C2
4
3
Ferromagnetic
transformers
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
230 Vac
1380 W
6A
Size:
150 W
0.65 A
1 A cos 0.5
Configurator socket
BUS
LED
Pushbutton
230 VA
0 40 C
2 DIN modules
Configuration
BT00191-c-UK
The actuator performs all the basic functions that can directly be configured on the
control device, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays.
The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected
to position M of the same actuator.
Possible function
Configurator in M
PUL
Actuator as Slave.
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator.
Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1).
1 4 1)
1) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which
expiry the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE
Configurator
Time (minutes)
738 MY HOME
4 relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/4
Description
incorporates four independent relays with a common clamp, for the activation of four
loads, with local control pushbuttons for each individual load only active if the actuator
has been configured.
The device can be installed as part of a MY HOME system, and configured physically or
virtually. In this case if two adjoining positions (e.g. PL2 and PL3) are assegned the same
configurator, the actuator may set two of the four relays in interlocking mode, for the
control of loads such as rolling shutter motors, curtain motors, etc. If all the PL positions
have the same configurator, the actuator sets the four relays for the control of motorised
rolling shutters.
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F411/4
Technical data

Absorption:
Number of outputs:
Incandescent
Motor
lamps
reducers
Halogen lamp
for rolling
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
40 mA
4x2 A
LED lamp
Compact fluorescent Electronic transformer
lamp
C1
C2 C3 C4
3
2
Ferromagnetic
transformers
shutters
Legend

2. BUS
230 Vac 460 W 2 A
460 W
2A
70 W Max. 2 lamps

70 W
0.3 A
2 A cos 0.5 460 VA
3.2 W
(-5) (+45) C
1)
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
BT00276-b-UK
NOTA: 1) the dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2+...IcN]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: no. of loaded relays, IcN: load current corresponding to
the N relay.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

MY HOME 739
F411/4
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator
are listed in the table below.
Possible function
Delayed stop for rolling shutter motor operation. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed1).
This mode is only operative if PL...=PL...+1 (same configurators), i.e. with the two relays interlocked
Delayed stop for shutter motor operation. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed.
This mode is only operative if PL1=PL2=PL3=PL4, with interlocking of relays in pairs 2)
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with has the same address
1) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time. At the end of
this time, the actuator will deactivate.
Example 1:
A=1 PL1=3 PL2=5 PL3=5 PL4=2 M=none
In this case the relays (PL1) and (PL4) are activated on the basis of the mode defined by the
controls configured A=1 PL=3 and A=1 PL=2. Relays (PL2) and (PL3) are interlocked and
are activated by control A=1 and PL=5 with mode defined in M. Relays (PL2) and (PL3)
deactivate after a minute.
Example 2:
A=1 PL1=3 PL2=2 PL3=4 PL4=6 M=none
In this case all the relays (PL... PL...+1) and (PL4) activate on the basis of the mode defined
by the controls configured A=1 PL=3, A=1 PL=2, A=1 PL=4 e A=1 PL=6. Whether there are
configurators 1 to 4 in position M of the actuator or not makes no difference.
2) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time. At the end of
this time, the actuator will deactivate.
Example:
- if M=1, the total opening/closing operation time is 15 seconds.
- if M=3 the opening and closing operations are performed while the corresponding control
is pressed.
below:
- light actuator
- rolling shutter actuator
- curtain actuator
Configurator in M
none 9 1)
none 1, 2 or 3
SLA
PUL
Configurator
No configurator
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Time (minutes)
1
2
5
10
infinite or until the next control
20 sec.
10 sec.
5 sec.
15 sec.
30 sec.
Configurator
No configurator
1
2
3
Time (sec.)
20
15
25
60
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets chapter.
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for the connection of lighting devices

N
L
BT00276-b-UK
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F411/4
1 2
3 4 5
L N
MIN 3 m
C1
740 MY HOME
C2 C3 C4
L N
L N
L N
F411/4
Diagram for shutter movement control
M1
Ap
M2
Ch
Ap
Ch
N
L
PL1 PL2PL3 PL4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F411/4
C1
M1 =
motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter
M2 =
motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
PL1 - PL2 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must
always be fitted to the internal rabbet shutter
PL3 - PL4 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must
always be fitted to the external rabbet shutter
C2 C3 C4
BUS
WARNING: configure PL1 = PL2 = PL3 = PL4

BT00276-a-UK
Operation:
- The opening of the shutter with external rabbet must start before the one with internal
rabbet. The opening of PL1 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL3.
- The closing of the shutter with external rabbet must start after the one with internal
rabbet. The closing of PL4 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL2.
- The total time for the full opening/closing of the shutters must be adjustable between
15 and 25 seconds. This adjustment is possible during installation, based on the size of
the shutters, to allow for strong winds.
MY HOME 741
Dimmer actuator
in DIN module
F413N
Description
Control device for electronic ballast or driver power supply with dimmer function; it can
supply fluorescent lamps or LED lamps and adjust their brightness depending on the
voltage, with values between 1 and 10V, with which they are driven.
From any specially configured control point and connected to the BUS system one can
switch the lights connected on and off or set their brightness. A short pressure of the
control key will switch the load on or off, while an extended pressure can be used to
adjust the brightness level. The minimum brightness level and the type of load connected
(Ballast for fluorescents or driver for LED) can be selected during the configuration.
1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V
ART. F413N
C1
4
3
Technical data

Absorption:
Linear fluorescent lamp:

27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
30 mA
(-5) (+45) C
2 A / 460 W
MAX. 10 ballast type T5, T8, compact or
driver for LED
1W
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
BT00277-b-UK
742 MY HOME
Legend
(attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration).
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
F413N
The actuator performs all the Basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control, apart from those which require the use of 2 interlocked relays.
1) Operating mode with configurator in M
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1)
1 4 1)
Normal operation
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next
OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of
time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
2) Operating mode with configurator in L Selection of the minimum brightness level:

The configurator in the L position establishes the minimum output voltage between the 1 - 2 clamps when the load is on, thus allowing the minimum intensity level to be selected.
5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard 0-10V is possible as well as the standard 1-10V.
Configurator L
Minimum output voltage (V)
none
1.5
0.5
3) Configurator in TYPE Selecting the type of load used:

In the TYPE position the configurator determines the type of load used on the basis of the following table.
If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical switching ON delay of 1.5s are used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON control taking account of the delay.
If power supplies for LED lamps must be controlled instead the device will send an immediate soft/start switching ON control.
Configurator type
Load driven
No configurator
Fluorescent ballast
LED driver
BT00277-b-UK
below:
- dimmer
MY HOME 743
F413N
Add the section before the wiring diagrams:

following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed below:
- dimmer
chapter.
Wiring diagram
3m
N
L
L
1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V
+ NC NO
Ballast
LED driver
ART. F413N
Fluorescent lamp
LED lamp
C1
1
1
SCS BUS
2
2 NC 3
0 10 V
MAX 6mA
NC
036 56
C1
BT00277-a-UK
744 MY HOME
Dimmer actuator
in DIN module
F414 - F415
Description
T5H 250V
Item F414 and item F414/127 controls resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers
while item F415 and item F415/127 controls electronic transformers.
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and to the load, the light intensity can
be adjusted from any correctly configured control point. Press the control pushbutton
quickly to switch the load ON or OFF, while press it for longer to adjust the light intensity.
The actuator can signal any load problems such as, for example, the breaking of the
lamp. It is also protected by fuse, which can easily be replaced if it blows.
F414
Technical data

Absorption F414:
Absorption F415:
Number of outputs F414:
Number of outputs F415:
Dissipated power with max. load - F414:
Dissipated power with max. load - F415:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
9 mA
22 mA
1x4 A
1x1,7 A
(-5) (+45) C
10 W
11 W
F414 Power/Absorption of driven loads:

Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp - Ferromagnetic transformers
0245 06
Legend
1. Load
3. BUS
4. Key
230 Vac
0.25 4.3 A / 60 1000 VA
5. LED
6. Fuse
F415 Power/Absorption of driven loads:

230 Vac
0.25 1.7 A / 60 400 VA
BT00278-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
MY HOME 745
F414 - F415
Configuration MY HOME
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator
are listed in the table below.
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the
Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1)
1 4 1)
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next
OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of
time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
below:
- dimmer
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below:
- Dimmer
chapter.
BT00278-b-UK
746 MY HOME
Configurator
Time (minutes)
F414 - F415
Wiring diagram
L
N
L
N
T5H 250V
T5H 250V
Lamp
0245 06
F414
F415
0245 06
400 VA
F415
F414
SCS BUS
SCS BUS
BT00278-b-UK
MY HOME 747
Multi-load 1000 W
Dimmer Actuator
F416U1
Description
This item controls resistive loads, ferromagnetic transformers and electronic transformers.
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and the load, the brightness can be
adjusted from any correctly configured control point. A short pressure of the control key
will switch the load ON or OFF, while an extended pressure can be used to adjust the
brightness level. The The actuator can signal any load faults such as a faulty lamp.
WARNING: it is not possible to connect devices with electronic transformer and devices
with ferromagnetic transformer on the same line
1 2
11
10
9
ON/+
F416U1
4,3 A
RL/C
OFF/-
Technical data
Power supply:
Number of outputs:
Operation:
Type of connection:

Protection index:
Cable section:
100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz

1 x 4.3 A
dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
RJ45
IP20
2.5 mm2
Legend
1. Learn Mode status indication LED:
Green flashing in forced inductive mode

Incandescent and
Orange flashing in forced capacitive mode

halogen lamps
Orange steady in automatic capacitive mode

Green steady in automatic inductive mode
3. Load manual forcing pushbutton
230 Vac
40 1000 W
4.3 A
40 1000 W
4.3 A
40 1000 VA
4.3 A
5. Load connection clamps

6. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load
Dimensional data
BT00315-b-UK
Size: 6 DIN modules
748 MY HOME
7. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load

9. Load type indication:
Green: inductive
Orange: capacitive
10. Orange LED ON: load fault
Green LED ON: load active (from 1 % to 100 %)

F416U1
the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the
same actuator are listed in the table below.
Possible function
Configurator in M
PUL
PUL
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1
1 4 1)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
below:
- dimmer
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
BT00315-b-UK
below:
- dimmer
chapter.
MY HOME 749
ON/+
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
RL/CRL/C
OFF/OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
F416U1
ON/+
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
Operating mode
RL/CRL/C
OFF/OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON/OFF
DIMMER FUNCTION
ON/+
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
F416U1
OFF/OFF/-
4,3
4,3
AA
F416U1
F416U1
F416U1
4,3 A
4,3
4,3
AA
ON/+
ON/+
RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
F416U1
RL/C
RL/CRL/C
OFF/OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
OFF/OFF/-
RL/CRL/C
OFF/-
Manual forcing of the type of load

ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
ON/+
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
4,3
4,3
AA
RL/C
RL/C
RL/C
OFF/OFF/-
ON/+
RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 A
OFF/-
<1s
CAPACITIVE
<1s
ON/+
ON/+
< 1 s = ON
F416U1
F416U1
4,3
4,3
AA
ON/+
4,3 A
ON/+
OFF/-
OFF/OFF/-
ON/+
RL/C
ON/+
F416U1
RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
OFF/OFF/-
RL/C
ON/+
RL/C
F416U1
4,3 A
FORCED INDUCTIVE
RL/C
OFF/-
FORCED
CAPACITIVE
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
4,3 A4,3 A
OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
OFF/-
<1s
INDUCTIVE
BT00315-b-UK
750 MY HOME
10 s = confirm changes
< 1 s = exit without saving changes
F416U1
Wiring diagram
L
N
ON/+
230V
C16
RL/C
F416U1
026 11
F881NA/16
100-240V~
4,3 A
OFF/-
50-60Hz
BT00315-b-UK
MY HOME 751
Multi-load 2x400 W
Dimmer Actuator
F417U2
Description
1 2
14
WARNING: it is not possible to connect devices with electronic transformer and devices
with ferromagnetic transformer on the same line
M
G2
PL2
G1
PL1
A
The item controls resistive loads, ferromagnetic transformers and electronic transformers.
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and the load, the brightness can be
adjusted from any correctly configured control point.
A short pressure of the control key will switch the load on or off, while an extended
pressure can be used to adjust the brightness level. The The actuator can signal any load
faults such as a faulty lamp.
F417U2
2x400 VA
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/-
OFF/-
RL/C
Technical data
Power supply:
Number of outputs:
Operation:
Type of connection:

Protection index:
Cable section:
100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz

2 x 1.7 A
dimmer
(-5) (+45) C
RJ45
IP20
2.5 mm2
7 6
Legend
1. Learn Mode status indication LED:
Green flashing in forced inductive mode

Incandescent and
13 12 11 10 9 8
Orange flashing in forced capacitive mode

halogen lamps
Orange steady in automatic capacitive mode

Green steady in automatic inductive mode
3. Load manual forcing pushbutton
230 Vac
40 400 W
1.7 A
40 400 W
1.7 A
40 400 W
1.7 A
5. Load 2 connection clamps

6. Load 1 connection clamps
7. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 2
8. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 2

9. Orange LED ON: load 2 fault
Green LED on: load 2 active (from 1% to 100%)

Dimensional data
BT00316-b-UK
Size: 6 DIN modules
10. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 1

11. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 1
12. Orange LED ON: load 1 fault
Green LED on: load 1 active (from 1% to 100%)

752 MY HOME
F417U2
- Physical configuration, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the
same actuator are listed in the table below.
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1)
1 4 1)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
below:
- dimmer
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
BT00316-b-UK
below:
- dimmer
chapter.
MY HOME 753
F417U2
F417U2
2x400
VA VA
2x400
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
OFF/OFF/-
RL/CRL/C
F417U2
F417U2
F417U2
Operating mode
2x400
VA VA
2x400
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
OFF/OFF/-
RL/CRL/C
ON-OFF
DIMMER FUNCTION
F417U2
F417U2
2x400VA
VA
2x400
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
OFF/OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
F417U2
F417U2
2x400
VA VA
2x400
F417U2
F417U2
ON/+
F416U1
4,3 A
2x400VA
VA
2x400
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
OFF/OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
RL/C
F417U2
F417U2
2x400
VA VA
2x400
OFF/-
Manual forcing of the type of load
ON/+
RL/C
ON/+
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
ON/+
RL/C
RL/C
F417U2
F417U2
F416U1
2x400VA
VA OFF/2x400
OFF/-
4,3 A
OFF/-
< 1 sec.
CAPACITIVE
< 1 sec.
< 1 s = ON
F417U2
F417U2
ON/+
2x400VA
VA
2x400
ON/+
F416U1
4,3 A
ON/+
OFF/-
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
OFF/OFF/-
ON/+
RL/C
RL/C
ON/+
RL/C
F416U1
4,3 A
FORCED
INDUCTIVE
RL/C
OFF/-
FORCED
CAPACITIVE
F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1
4,3 A
ON/+
ON/+
OFF/OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
ON/+
F416U1
F416U1
4,3 A4,3 A
OFF/-
RL/C
RL/C
OFF/-
<1s
INDUCTIVE
BT00316-b-UK
754 MY HOME
10 sec. = confirm changes

< 1 sec. = exit without saving changes
Scenario module
F420
Description
This device allows you to manage scenarios for Automation, Sound system and
Temperature Control systems which have been created, modified and activated using
different devices of the Automation system. Up to 16 scenarios may be saved in the
scenario module, with up to 100 controls each. The scenarios can also give door entry
and Video door entry controls for one-family systems to switch on the staircase lights
and open the door lock. If installed in large systems with interface item F422 in logical
expansion, the module can save automation controls for the system where it is installed.
On the front cover of the item there are two keys and two LED. The first pushbutton
(padlock) locks or unlocks the programming procedure avoiding involuntary operations
such as cancelling the scenarios and the corresponding LED indicates the status: green
programming possible, red programming blocked, orange temporary block.
The second pushbutton (DEL) cancels all the scenarios, the LED underneath indicates
that the cancellation has taken place or that the device is performing the learning
procedure.
ART.F420
DEL
Technical data
Absorption:
Size:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
20 mA
0 40 C
2 DIN modules
Configuration
The combination of the scenario module with a control device is ensured by assigning
to both items the same address. This is identified by the configurators with a numeric
value for position A = 0-9 and position PL = 1-9. When using a Touch Screen, the
address of the scenario module must be specified during programming, using the
Tidisplay software. Several scenario modules may be installed in one system, allocating
a different address to each module.
Scenario programmer
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
following operations:
If the module does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning
procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted. To cancel a scenario completely,
keep the corresponding pushbutton pressed for about ten seconds.
To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for
10 seconds, the yellow reset scenarios LED flashes quickly. Once the operations have been
performed lock the programming by pressing the lock/unlock pushbutton for at least 0.5
seconds, so that the corresponding LED becomes red.
Legend
1. Scenario cancellation pushbutton
2. Scenarios/learning reset LED
4. BUS
5. Programming status LED
6. Lock/unlock programming pushbutton
key 1
led key 1-3

key 3
key 2
LED key 2-4

key 4
NOTES:
Inside the system itself one Scenario module can be programmed at a time as the
other devices are temporarily locked; during this phase the programming status LED
becomes orange signalling the temporary Lock.
During the learning procedure and when there are timed controls or group controls,
the Scenario module does not save events for 20 seconds. You must thus wait before
continuing with creating the scenario.
During the scenario learning procedure only the changes of status are saved.
The Scenario module should be configured with a different A and PL address from
that of an actuator. Use A=0 and PL=1 to 9, which cannot be used by actuators. If the
configuration is wrong the Programming status LED flashes ORANGE.
In case of virtual configuration the LED flashes RED.
BT00067-b-UK
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3 seconds.
The corresponding LED starts flashing;
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions;
programming mode;
4) to change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the
procedure starting from point 1.
Front view
MY HOME 755
SCS-SCS
gateway
F422
Description
The SCS/SCS gateway is an interface that provides communication among BUS systems
with SCS technology, even if they perform different functions. The interface has two BUS
clamps, IN and OUT.
On the front is a C key for virtual configuration and a LED for the notification of:
- correct power supply and configuration (on steady),
- BUS not detected (off),
- configuration not detected or incorrect configuration (flashing).
The device may operate in six different modes:
OUT
- Physical expansion for MY HOME and Lightingh Management: can increase the total
BUS length or exceed the absorption limit of 1200 mA for the individual power supply.
- Logical expansion for MY HOME: can increase the number of devices of a system, which
is 175 (max 11 in rooms defined with A = 0 to 10 and 16 light points with PL = 0 to 15).
Address A = 0, PL = 0 is not permitted.
- Burglar alarm/automation interface for MY HOME: it allows communication between
these two systems.
- Public riser: it provides alarm event supervision for the common parts of the video door
entry system.
- Galvanic separation for MY HOME: can interface two different functions (ex.: Sound
system with Automation).
- Separazione fisica: raggruppa le caratteristiche della modalit Espansione fisica e della
modalit Separazione galvanica. Utilizzabile per impianti con dispositivi predisposti
per la configurazione virtuale.
NOTE: regardless of the interface mode of use, it must be taken into account that
the two Buses connected constitute at all effects two systems, and, as such, they
must be subjected to all existing sizing and installation rules.
Technical data
4
3
IN
2
Legend
2. BUS
3. Signalling LED

27 Vdc
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 27 Vdc
IN clamp absorption:
25 mA
OUT clamp absorption:
5 mA
1W
4. Pushbutton for virtual configuration

5. OUT clamp
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

Configuration
I1 I2 I3 I4 MOD
BT00280-c-UK
Sockets l1, l2, l3, and l4 are used to uniquely identify, using numerical configurators, the
addresses of the interfaces inside the system. The interface may also be configured using the
Virtual Configuration application as indicated in the software User Manual.
1) Operating mode Physical expansion - configurare MOD = 1 With the interface configured in this mode, it will be possible to extend the physical
limit of the maximum length of the BUS, or exceed the limit of 1200 mA delivered by the
individual power supply, but not the maximum number of actuators (max. 175).
The positions identified with I1 and I2 must not be configured. The separation address
between the two buses connected to the interface must instead be defined in positions
I3 and I4. Supposing as in the example that I3=3, I4=2:
756 MY HOME
- On the input BUS (IN) the addresses must go from A=0 / PL=1 and A=3 / PL=1;
- On the output BUS (OUT) the addresses must be beween A=3 / PL=3 and A=9 /
PL=9 or the address of the next interface. As it can be seen from the example, all
the automation BUS 1 addresses are lower than that of the interface, while all the
automation BUS 2 addresses are higher; the interface address therefore separates all
the addresses of which the complete system might be made up of into two or more
blocks.
F422
Installation example
A/PL = 33 53
Automation
Automation
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
3
2
1
IN
IN
A/PL = 01 31
Automation
OUT
OUT
F422
A/PL = 78 175 (*)
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
5
4
1
IN
IN
A/PL = 55 76
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
7
7
1
IN
Automation
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with virtual configuration of the devices.
Installation rules:
- Configure both I3 and I4 with configurators from 1 to 9, to set the separation between
the two Buses.
- I1 and I2 must not be configured.
- If several interfaces are installed in series, the addresses of the devices between one
interface and the other must be within those of the two interfaces (see system example).
- In this mode, it is not possible to install two interfaces in parallel on the same BUS.
- It is possible to install up to four interfaces in series, which subdivide the system in 5
separate sections, individually powered.
BT00280-c-UK
- The scenario module, the memory module, the IR emitter for the control of air
conditioning units, and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode,
must be installed on the BUS section corresponding to the own local address (e.g. if
the scenario module is configured as A=0/PL=1, it will have to be placed on system
no. 1 - see system example).
- The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with
the lowest addresses (system 1 in the drawing).
- All the control devices configured to send Point-point, Room, Group and General
controls can be connected on either branch of the system (1 or 2) regardless of their
addresses in A and PL positions.
- This is also true in the case of actuators configured in the slave operating mode.
- Interface item F422 allows the transit between the various systems of the Point-Point,
Group, Room and General controls. As an example, install a control configured with
A=1 and PL=5 in system 2 to control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed in system 1.
- Within the system, no device must be configured with the same address as the
interface.
MY HOME 757
F422
2) Logic expansion operating mode - MOD = 2 configurator
A typical example may be a large villa on several floors: A system may be installed for
each floor, all connected to each other through another system operating as a riser.
The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) connected to the riser must be configured.
This mode enables separation of control systems, with each of them therefore capable
of using all the addresses available. It is therefore possible to connect several systems
to an automation BUS, with each system having all the 175 addresses available. The
BUS to which all others are connected therefore operates as main riser. This BUS must
necessarily belong to an automation system. It is recommended that this mode is used
for systems installed in large villas or in the service/industrial sector.
A/PL = 01 99 (*)
A/PL = 01 99 (*)
Automation
Automation
OUT
Automation
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
F422
F422
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
A/PL = 01 99 (*)
1
2
IN
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
IN
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
3
2
IN
Main riser
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with physical configuration. Maximum 175 addresses may be managed with virtual configuration.
Installation rules:
- Configure I4 to give a number from 1 to 9 to the Buses connected to the riser.
- I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured.
- The BUS of the individual system connected to the main riser must be connected to the
OUT clamp of the interface.
BT00280-c-UK
- The main riser must consist of an Automation system in which, in addition to the
corresponding control devices and actuators, it will also be possible to install the
Energy management central unit, temperature central unit, and the MH200N scenario
programmer.
- In this mode up to nine interfaces may be connected to the main riser; it is possible to
manage up to ten systems as if they were a single one. Each system connected to the
riser can have all 81 addresses allowed.
- The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with
the lowest addresses (system 1 in the drawing).
758 MY HOME
- From the main riser (IN clamp), arrive the general controls (rolling shutters and lights),
group controls (this allows a minimum centralisation of the controls, using standard
devices of the control system), and power management controls (to allow positioning
of the power management central unit on the riser). On the other hand, point-point
controls are stopped by the interface, and therefore remain inside the individual
system, including the riser. The controls of all systems other than automation,
including AUXILIARY controls, travel in the two directions without any processing. In
order to send controls from one system to the other, the special controls H4651M2,
L4651M2 and AM5831M2 may be used in extended control mode.
- The interface address cannot be the same as that of other devices (e.g. configure the
interface l1= -, 12= -, 13= -, l4=1 and MOD = 2, if a scenario module is configured
with A = - and PL = 1).
F422
3) Burglar alarm/automation interface mode- MOD = 3 configurator -
This mode is indicated when display of burglar alarms and technical alarms are
required, generated within the common sections, using a switchboard, item 346310,
installed on the backbone or the riser of the video door entry system.
Simple diagram for the display of alarms on common parts
Riser 1
Riser 2
Riser 3
OUT
OUT
OUT
346851
346851
ON
ON
346851
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
IN
ON
IN
OFF
IN
OUT
287
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
&
,1
IN
Common system section
=
=
=
*
=*
= 3
Burglar Alarm System

(contact interfaces,
gas/water sensors, etc.)
For the electric diagram see the switchboard

technical sheet.
Installation rules:
BT00280-c-UK
On the common sections it is possible to connect contact interfaces, or technical

alarms (gas/water leak), up to a total of 9 auxiliary channels; these must be
connected to the IN clamp of interface item F422.
(*) Use a free address of the video handset.
MY HOME 759
F422
4) Interface between burglar alarm and automation/video door entry system/
sound system mode - MOD = 4 configurator -
This mode can be used to interface the Automation system to the burglar alarm system,
to facilitate interaction and exchange of information between the two BUS. Thanks to this
function, it is possible to remotely control the automation system using the telephone
communicator. The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while
in the l4 position, the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured.
5) Operating mode Galvanic separation - configurator

MOD = no configuration
This configuration enables keeping the power supplies of the two buses separate,
allowing interfacing of different MY HOME functions (e.g. sound system and automation).
In some cases, the use of this interface is necessary (for example when the sound system
is installed). In other cases installation alternatives are possible; for example, it will be
possible (but not compulsory) to install Temperature Control on a separate BUS, and
interface it with Automation using an interface in Galvanic Separation mode.
The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured.
Burglar alarm
Sound system
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
4
IN
IN
Automation
Sound system
BT00280-c-UK
Installation rules:
- Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9.
- The BUS of the Burglar Alarm system must be connected to the OUT clamp of the
interface.
- It is not possible to connect other interfaces to the Burglar Alarm system, to physically
extend the BUS, or to increase the maximum number of devices.
- Only one interface may be connected to the Burglar Alarm system. It is therefore not
possible to connect together two Automation systems through the Burglar Alarm system.
- Installation of the Automation system actuators within the Burglar Alarm system is not
allowed.
- The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system.
760 MY HOME
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
IN
Automation
Installation rules:
- Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9.
- The Automation BUS must be connected to the IN clamp. The other systems must be
connected to the OUT clamp (e.g. Sound System).
- It is not possible to connect several Automation systems to the same Sound System.
- Thanks to this mode, using the Web Server A/V it is possible to control a one-family
system (a video door entry system and an Automation system, at the most subdivided
into lines, following the physical and/or logic expansion mode procedure).
F422
6) Physical separation mode - MOD=6 configurator
This mode brings together the features of the physical expansion mode and the
galvanic separation mode.
Each system may be connected to both the OUT and the IN clamps of the interface and,
differently from what is required for physical expansion MOD=1, the addresses of the
devices of the two systems may be selected freely.
A/PL = 15
A/PL = 26
In view of the above, it will no longer be necessary to indicate the system separation
address in positions I3 and I4; therefore, the interface will have to be configured by
assigning any address from 01 to 99, including any address already used by actuator
devices installed in the connected systems. If several interfaces are used, these must
have different addresses.
A/PL = 48
A/PL = 27
Automation
System No. 2
OUT
A/PL = 78
Automation
System No. 3
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
6
IN
A/PL = 11
A/PL = 35
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
2
6
IN
A/PL = 35
A/PL = 62
Automation
System No. 1
BT00280-c-UK
MY HOME 761
F422
The use of the interface with this mode may be useful to keep the Automation system
and the Temperature control system separate (for example when using independent
power supplies).
Automation
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
6
IN
Energy management
BT00280-c-UK
Installation rules:
- Each individual system connected to the IN or OUT clamps of the interface must be
powered by its own power supply.
- It is possible to use up to 4 interfaces in MOD=6 for the connection of the Automation and/
or Energy Management, and Temperature Control systems to each other.
- In case of cascade connection of several Automation and/or Energy management, and
Temperature Control systems, each individual system must be connected to the OUT clamp
of one interface and the IN clamp of the other. Therefore, do no connect the system to the
two interfaces only using the OUT clamps.
- Do not configure positions l1 and l2.
- In positions l3 and l4, address l3=0 to 9 and l4=1 to 9 of the interface must be specified.
This address may also correspond to that of other actuator devices installed in the
connected systems. If several interfaces are installed, these must have different addresses.
- The scenario module and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode can
be connected to any branch of the system (no. 1 or no.2). The memory module must be
connected to the system connected to the OUT clamp of the last interface.
- All control devices configure for sending Point-point, Room, Group, and General controls
may be connected to any branch of the system (no.1 or no. 2), without limitation,
irrespective of their respective addresses in the A and PL positions.
- The above also applies to actuators configured in slave operating mode.
- Interface f422 allows Point-point, Group, Room, and General controls to travel through the
various systems. It is therefore possible to install, for example, in system no. 2 a control
configured as A=1 and PL=5 that will control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed in system
no. 1.
762 MY HOME
Configuration:
For correct operation, the interface must be configured to:
- define its address within the system;
- acquire the address of the devices of the systems connected to the IN and OUT clamps.
Configuration of the interface address:
The device may be configured in 3 different modes:
- using numerical configurators, 0 to 9, in positions I3 and I4;
- using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
- using the self-configuration procedure as indicated below:
1. press the interface pushbutton for a few instants; the LED flashes slowly.
2. press the pushbutton again; the LED flashes quickly and the device starts the selfconfiguration procedure.
3. Once the configuration procedure has been completed correctly, the LED comes on steady.
Repeat this operation for all the interfaces in MOD-6 of the system.
Acquisition of the addresses of the connected devices:

This procedure must only be carried out after the configuration of the interface address (or
several interfaces, as applicable). It is possible to select one of two modes:
- using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
- pressing the interface pushbutton for at least 2 seconds. Any other interfaces in MOD=6
installed in the system will automatically acquire the configuration of the devices.
Before performing this operation check that all system interfaces and actuators have their
addresses configured.
F422
7) Use of interfaces with different modes
For home automation systems of a certain complexity, several systems may be

integrated with interfaces configured in different modes. For example, it is possible to
create a system with three interfaces for the connection of two Automation systems and
one Burglar alarm system to one single riser.
If necessary, each of these can be expanded (physical expansion mode) or interfaced

with the Video Door Entry System or the Sound System using other interfaces.
For example, in case of a villa consisting of several large floors.
Example N. 1
Automation
Burglar alarm
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
F422
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
IN
=
=
=
=
=
2
6
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
4
230 Vac
IN
Automation
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
IN
BT00280-c-UK
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
MY HOME 763
F422
Example no. 2: system with logic expansion
1a
A/PL = 01 31
1b
A/PL = 33 53
Automation
(intermediate addresses)
Automation
(low addresses)
OUT
Automation
(high addresses)
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
F422
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
IN
1c
A/PL = 55 175
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
IN
IN
=
=
=
=
=
3
2
1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
IN
IN
=
=
=
=
=
5
4
1
IN
Main riser
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
IN
BT00280-c-UK
IN
OUT
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
2
2
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
F422
Automation
764 MY HOME
OUT
Automation
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
4
IN
Burglar alarm
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
IN
Sound
system
F422
Example no. 3: system without logic expansion
1b
A/PL = 33 53
Automation
(intermediate addresses)
1c
A/PL = 55 175
Automation
(high addresses)
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
F422
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
3
2
1
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
IN
IN
A/PL = 01 31
=
=
=
=
=
5
4
1
IN
1a
Automation
(low addresses)
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
F422
IN
F422
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
1
4
IN
IN
I1
I2
I3
I4
MOD
=
=
=
=
=
IN
BT00280-c-UK
Burglar alarm
Sound
system
MY HOME 765
Memory
module
F425
Description
The memory module is connected to a system and permanently saves the status of all the
actuators configured to manage the lights, after each control sent.
This device is very useful in case of a black-out or short power cuts (minimum 400 mS),
because it can reset the status of all the lamps controlled by the system once the power
returns. The reset operations take about 10 seconds. Just one memory module can be
connected to the BUS for each system installed (i.e. each power supply), unless two or
more systems are being connected using the SCS/SCS gateway (item F422) configured
in physical expansion mode. In this case just one is needed for all the systems connected
together.
The device must be put into operation once the system is already installed and powered.
F425
The multicolour LED indicates the status of the device:

- OFF:
device too far from the power supply
- fixed green:
normal operation
- fixed orange:
system not yet acquired
- fixed red:
device exclusion being performed
- flashing red:
acquisition being performed
- flashing orange:
wrong or missing configuration
4
3
Legend
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS:

27 Vdc from BUS
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 27 Vdc
- Absorption:
5 mA
- Operating temperature:
0 - 40 C
- Dissipated power with max. load: 0.1 W
2. BUS
3. Multi-colour LED
4. Key
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

Configuration
BT00281-a-UK
- Connect the memory module, switch the BUS ON and make sure that the loads of the
dimmers are connected and powered (all the loads must be OFF).
- Press the key on the front for at least five seconds, when the red LED turns on steadily
release the key.
- Switch the loads which are not to be managed ON one by one (all the loads left OFF will
be managed).
- Press the device key within 30 minutes, the red LED will start to flash quickly to show
that the device is performing the learning procedure.
- After about 30 seconds the LED turns green steady to signal that the learning procedure
has ended and the memory module is operative.
- If the programming procedure has not been completed within 30 minutes, the LED
shines orange to signal that the system status has not been saved.
At the end of the programming procedure a test should be performed to check that the
device is set correctly:
- Switch on some of the controlled loads (i.e. those not explicitly excluded during the
programming procedure).
- Switch off, simulating a black-out, for at least 15 seconds.
- Switch back on again; after a few seconds the status of the controlled loads must be
reset (i.e. those which were ON before the black-out must switch back ON), while the
unmanaged loads must however remain OFF.
766 MY HOME
NOTES:
- Rolling shutter actuators are not managed.
- The memory module is configured using the Project&download procedure.
- The timed switchings ON will be activated as simple switchings ON.
- It is important to configure the Memory module with an address A and PL different
from that of an actuator. We thus recommend using A=0 and PL=1 - 9, which cannot
be used by actuators.
- For modifications to the system, repeat the save procedure..
WARNING:
The memory module is installed near the power supply (possibly in the same electrical
panel); the distance must not however be greater than 10 metres.
DIN contacts interface
F428
Description
This devices let you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in
advanced systems with BUS operating logic.
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the Lighting Management system in rooms
where traditional systems are already present or in historic and prestigious rooms
whereby the complete or partial remaking of the electric system would entail heavy
masonry work.
The old but valuable switch with its no longer compliant wiring can therefore continue
to be used with it, as the connection to the load to be controlled is carried out safely by
connecting it with its SCS interface with no-voltage contact.
Contact N1 controls light point PL1, contact N2 controls light point PL2.
The device is fitted with 2 LEDs for the notifications of contact closure, programming/
deletion, and the status of the control devices.
1
C N1 N2
F428
5
4
N1
N2
2
Technical data

27 Vdc
Absorption:
9 mA
0.2 W
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
Legend
1. Clamps for connection to traditional devices
(attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration).

3. BUS
4. LED
5. Key
BT00283-a-UK
MY HOME 767
F428
A PL1 PL2 M SPE
The interface includes two independent central units, identified with positions N1 and
N2. The two units can send:
- Controls to two actuators for two independent loads (ON, OFF or adjustment) identified
with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified in M
or;
- A control to the scenario module item F420;
- A double control intended for a single load (motor for rolling shutter UP/DOWN,
OPEN-CLOSE curtains) identified with the address PL1 = PL2 and mode specified M.
The interface has two LEDs to signal correct operation and three clamps to connect to
traditional devices such as:
- Two traditional NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) switches or pushbuttons;

- A two-way switch.
The interface also has a pushbutton to enable virtual configuration
1) SPE=0 mode - Standard functions - Automation

Possible function
single function
double function
Cyclical ON/OFF with short pressure and adjustment with long pressure
No configurator
ON
ON
ON timed
1-8
OFF
OFF
OFF pressing the key connected to N2 - ON pressing the key connected to N1 and adjustment with long pressure (dimmer) _
0/1
Pushbutton
PUL
2)
(1) The device sends an OFF control after a time set by the configurators used as indicated in
the table below.
BT00283-a-UK
Configurator
Time (minutes)
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
768 MY HOME
(2) As a function of the receiver actuator operating mode.
NotE: If circuits are connected to the interface clamps, the operating mode to select is
PUL.
If normally open (NO) pushbuttons are connected all the other operating modes
indicated in the table are performed.
F428
2) Operating mode with Configurator in M and SPE
Possible function
Value configurator in SPE

single function
double function
Unlocks with key connected to N1

and locks with key connected to N2
On with flash 1)
none 9
ON (key in N1) - OFF (jkey in N2) without adjustment
0/1
19
Cyclical ON/OFF without adjustment (only NO contact)

Selection adjustment level fixed at 10 to 90 % of the dimmer
2)
Call the scenarios of module F420
See table (3)
Management of scenario module item F420 3)
See table (3)
Timed ON (2 sec.)
Timed ON (10 min.)
(1) Device to be combined with an OFF control for switching OFF.

The flash time is indicated in the table:
(3) With SPE=4 it is only possible to recall the scenario saved in the F420 module; 3) With
SPE=6 it is possible to recall and program the scenarios saved in the F420 module. M=1-8:
group of scenarios to be controlled:
Configurator
Time (sec.)
none
0.5
First contact (N1)
Second contact (N1)
1.5
2.5
10
3.5
11
12
13
14
4.5
15
16
(2) Device to be combined with the dimmer actuator and an OFF control for switching OFF.
The configurator defines the adjustment in % of the load power.
% P of load
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
BT00283-a-UK
Configurator N
A=0 to 9 and PL1=1 to 9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be
controlled.
PL2 must be the same as PL1, or not configured (in this case the second contact is disabled).
MY HOME 769
F428
Scenario programmer: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary
to enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green
(press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
To completely delete a scenario, press the corresponding key for 10 seconds.
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
control, Sound system, etc. functions;
programming mode;
3) Mode with SPE = 7 - Automation standard functions - normally closed contact

This mode can perform the controls envisaged by the Basic operating mode with SPE = 0
when NC pushbuttons or switches are connected to the interface clamps.
4) Mode with SPE = 5 - Sound system

When the interface is correctly configured, the following functions are performed:
- M=1 Source cycling/track cycling mode
- M=0: ON/OFF mode
- N1 contact: cycle source
- N1 contact:
- N2 contact: cycle track
With short pressure the following sequence is sent:

- ON of the sources. PL2 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on. If
PL2=0, source 1 is turned on (follow-me mode).

- Room control:
- ON of the A/PL1 amplifier.
A = 1-9 is the amplifier room
With extended pressure the following happens:
General type controls:
- For point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted (VOL+);
if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;.
A = GEN for PL1=PL2=0 general controls
- For AMB or GEN controls, only the volume is adjusted.

- N2 contact:
- With a short pressure, the OFF control for the A/PL1 amplifier is sent.
- With an extended pressure the volume is adjusted (VOL -).
BT00283-a-UK
- Point-point control:
A = 1-9 amplifier room ;
PL1=0-9 amplifier speaker.
- Room control:
A = AMB
PL1 = 1-9 amplifier room the control is intended for
- General control:
A = GEN
PL1 = 0
PL2 = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on. If PL2=0 the
follow-me mode is activated.
770 MY HOME
F428
below:
- contact;
following ways:
- Project&Download,
below:
- contact;
chapter.
Wiring diagram
M
Interfaccia
modulo DIN
Attuatore
1
C N1 N2
1 2 3 4
ART. F428
ART. F430/2
C1
N1
C2
N2
SCS BUS
BT00283-a-UK
L
N
MY HOME 771
SCS/DALI
gateway
F429
Description
The device is an interface between MY HOME/Lighting Management systems and

devices driven using the DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) protocol. It has
eight independent outputs to which up to 16 DALI devices can be connected for each
output. Three pushbuttons with notification LED set the operating mode. Key P1 sets up
the device for the virtual configuration, key P2 is used to select one of the eight outputs
which connect with the DALI devices and key P3 is used to switch the output which has
been selected with key P2 ON, OFF and to dim it. On pressing key P3 quickly one can
switch the load ON or switch it OFF cyclically, while pressing it for a long time adjusts
the brightness.
1_
2_
3
4
+ _ + _
OUTPUT
5
6
8
7
+ _ + _ + _ + _
1
2
Technical data
Power supply:
Absorption:
Dissipated power:
No. of DALI outputs:
110 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz; 110 240 Vdc

5 mA
(-5) (+45) C
4W
8 x 16 ballast
Dimensional data
Legend
1. Pushbuttons
Size: 6 DIN modules

2. LED
3. Power supply
4. BUS

5. Configurator socket (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with
BT00284-a-UK
772 MY HOME
physical configuration)
F429
For the configuration there are 3 sockets identified A, G and M as specified below:
- A = 1 - 9 light point room address. The number of light points PL is defined with key P2.
If pressed, the LED will flash a number of times equal to the number of the port selected. If
pressed again, the next output is selected.
- G= 1 - 9 group address
- M= Operating mode
The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected to
position M of the same actuator.
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the
Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time has elapsed
1 = 1 min
2 = 2 min
3 = 3 min
4 = 4 min
Depending on the configurator connected to A, the outputs will take the following address:
OUTPUT
A=
A=1
PL=1
A=1
PL=2
A=1
PL=3
A=1
PL=4
A=1
PL=5
A=1
PL=6
A=1
PL=7
A=1
PL=8
A=2
PL=1
A=2
PL=2
A=2
PL=3
A=2
PL=4
A=2
PL=5
A=2
PL=6
A=2
PL=7
A=2
PL=8
A=3
PL=1
A=3
PL=2
A=3
PL=3
A=3
PL=4
A=3
PL=5
A=3
PL=6
A=3
PL=7
A=3
PL=8
A=4
PL=1
A=4
PL=2
A=4
PL=3
A=4
PL=4
A=4
PL=5
A=4
PL=6
A=4
PL=7
A=4
PL=8
A=5
PL=1
A=5
PL=2
A=5
PL=3
A=5
PL=4
A=5
PL=5
A=5
PL=6
A=5
PL=7
A=5
PL=8
A=6
PL=1
A=6
PL=2
A=6
PL=3
A=6
PL=4
A=6
PL=5
A=6
PL=6
A=6
PL=7
A=6
PL=8
A=7
PL=1
A=7
PL=2
A=7
PL=3
A=7
PL=4
A=7
PL=5
A=7
PL=6
A=7
PL=7
A=7
PL=8
A=8
PL=1
A=8
PL=2
A=8
PL=3
A=8
PL=4
A=8
PL=5
A=8
PL=6
A=8
PL=7
A=8
PL=8
A=9
PL=1
A=9
PL=2
A=9
PL=3
A=9
PL=4
A=9
PL=5
A=9
PL=6
A=9
PL=7
A=9
PL=8
Note: The PL configurator is not required, as the value is set by the output to which the DALI device is connected. All the outputs belong to the same group connected to G.
below:
- dimmer
following ways:
- Project&Download,
BT00284-a-UK
below:
- dimmer
chapter.
MY HOME 773
F429
Wiring diagram
DALI
DEVICE
DALI
DEVICE
DALI
DEVICE
DALI
DEVICE
MAX. 16
DEVICES
FOR EACH OUTPUT
DALI
DEVICE
1_
2_
3
4
+ _ + _
OUTPUT
5
6
8
7
+ _ + _ + _ + _
SCS BUS
BT00284-a-UK
774 MY HOME
L
N
2 relay radio actuator

in DIN module
F470/2
Description
radio-wire BUS system. In addition to being driven by the local micro-pushbutton,
the radio actuator can also be driven by wire controls (using the transmitting interface
L/N/NT4576N and HC/HS4576).
The actuator consists of two interlocked relays for double loads (e.g. motor reducer), and
can also be used with only one relay, for single loads.
1
1
2
2
ART.F470/2
Technical data
Power supply:

Radio frequency:
Size:
L N
230 Vac 50 Hz
0 40 C
- incandescent lamps 500W / 2 A
- fluorescent lamps 70 W / 0.3 A
- electronic transformers 70 W / 0.3 A
- motor reducers for rolling shutters 2 A / 500 W
868 MHz
2 DIN modules
5
4
3
Front view
Configuration
Legend
Actuator F470/2 has two independent relays to operate two loads. If positions PL1 and
PL2 have the same address (same configurator) the device activates the interlock of the
two relays to which rolling shutter, curtain, etc. motors can be connected. If positions
PL1 and PL2 have different addresses (different configurators), the device works with
two independent relays with addresses A, PL1 and A, PL2. If the actuator is configured
to use just one relay (position A and PL1), position PL2 must not be configured. Actuator
F470/2 performs all the basic operating modes, that can be configured directly on the
control. Moreover operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Possible function
Configurator in M
The actuator ignores the Room and General controls

Timed stop. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed
Relay contact
Power supply 230 Vac @ 50 Hz
Configurator socket
LED
Micropushbutton
PUL
1)
none 4 1)
-
1) The value of the configurator indicated in the table defines the final time, after
which the actuator switches off. Only if the relays are interlocked (PL1 = PL2)
Configurator
Time (minutes)
No configurator
10
Infinite or until the next control
BT00107-a-UK
Normal operation
MY HOME 775
F470/2
Programming
2) Hold down the Micropushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the key.
be programmed.
2) Press the micropushbutton for 11 seconds (after 4 seconds the LED will turn on, after
another 7 seconds it will turn off).
3) Release the key.
BT00107-b-UK
776 MY HOME
1
1
2
2
L N
ART.F470/2
LED
DIN radio actuator

for single loads
F470/1
Description
1
2
radio-wire BUS system.
In addition to being driven by the local micro-pushbutton, the radio actuator can also be
driven by wire controls (using the transmitting interface L/N/NT4576N and HC/HS4576).
1
1
Technical data
Power supply:

Radio frequency:
Size:
C1
4
3
Configuration
Front view
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Relay contact
Power supply 230 Vac @ 50 Hz
Configurator socket
LED
Micropushbutton
1 2 3
1
Possible function
Configurator in M
The actuator ignores the Room and

General controls
PUL
Normal operation
L N
ART.F470/1
230 Vac 50 Hz
0 40 C
- incandescent lamps 1400W / 6 A
868 MHz
2 DIN modules
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be directly configured on
the control, apart from those which involve the use of two interlocking relays.
In traditional systems or systems only consisting of radio devices no configuration is
required. When integrating the device in a MY HOME system, or for advanced functions,
at least the A and PL positions must be configured. The configuration as belonging to
the G group is only possible if also A and PL are configured. If a PUL configurator is
connected to the M position, the actuator will ignore Room and General controls. Also,
The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected
to position M of the same actuator. To cancel all programming in the actuator proceed
as follows:
2) Press the Micropushbutton for 11 seconds (after 4 seconds the LED will turn on, after
another 7 seconds it will turn off).
3) Release the key.
2
2
L N
ART.F470/1
LED
BT00106-b-UK
Programming
2) Hold down the Micropushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the key.
be programmed.
MY HOME 777
Actuator 16 A
F523
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with zero crossing functionality,
intended for the Load control and/or Automation functions.
The actuator is capable of assessing frequency (50 Hz) and voltage (230 Vac) in an
isolated way.
In load control mode:
The actuator will be given a priority indicating the tripping order that will be followed by
the F521 central unit for load management (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled
if the threshold is exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in
all configuration software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to
re-enable the load for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load
forcing previously set.
Front view
6
2
3
In automation mode, the actuator can perform the following functions:

- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception
of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays;
- possibility of group configuration (G);
- additional modes using the M configuration socket.
In mixed load control and automation mode, the following rules are followed:
The local key performs the load control management function (forcing/end of forcing)
- if the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the
Automation system.
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay
does not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by
a control, ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation
commands in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required
by the last automation command.
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling.
If during DISABLING stage the relay is switched off due to the scheduling settings, when
re-enabling takes place it will stay switched off.
Top view
Bottom view
7
1
5
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage
from the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided
with socket for 6 configurators: A, PL, G, M, P1, P2.
Technical data
BT00362-b-UK
Operation power supply with BUS SCS:

18 27 Vdc
Absorption:
10 mA max
0 40 C
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Incandescent and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W

LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps

500 W / Max. 10 lamps

Linear fluorescent lamp and

electronic transformers 4 A / 920 W

Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cos 0.5 / 920 VA
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
778 MY HOME
Legend
1. 230 Vac connection
2. Load forcing pushbutton
3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future application)
4. Configurator sockets
5. BUS connection
6. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
7. Load connection
F523
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct
sockets (Physical configuration)
The device is provided with socket for six configurators, which define:
- A/PL/G/M local address (room, light point), group, and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2
priority in the load control management system, (P1 = tens, P2 = units)
1) Automation Mode:
The actuator performs all the operating modes that can be configured on the control
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; it can
also accept extended switch on, switch off, and time delay controls.
In addition, the following table lists the operating modes required for the configurator
connected to the M position of the actuator itself.

In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicate the device address, while the P1
and P2 positions must be configured equal to zero.
The pushbutton operates in ON/OFF cyclical mode.
Possible function
Configurator in M
Actuator as slave. It receives a command sent by a Master actuator with the same address
SLA
PUL
Master actuator with delayed Off control on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point type control.
With the Off control, the Master actuator is disabled; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time set using the
configurators has elapsed1)
1 41)
In the Off delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set
using the 1 - 4 configurator connected to M as shown in the table:
1)
Configurator in M
Time (minutes)
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in automation mode:
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Load OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Load ON
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
2) Load control management mode:

BT00362-b-UK
In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, the
A, PL, G and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in load control management mode:
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Enabled
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
Forced
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Disabled
OFF
Fixed ON
RED
MY HOME 779
F523
2) Load control management and automation:
In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63.
In A and PL it will be necessary to indicate the device address.
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in load control management and automation mode:
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Enabled + ON
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
Enabled + OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Disabled
OFF
Fixed ON
RED
Forced + ON
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
Forced + OFF
Flashing 1 s/1 s
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flashing 1s/1s
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Common LEDs signalling:
Device status
Installation error (230 Vac not detected)
OFF
Flashing 100 ms/900 ms
RED flashing 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error
Fixed ON
Flashing irregularly
ORANGE irregularly on GREEN
No configuration
Fixed ON
ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on

GREEN
BT00362-b-UK
780 MY HOME
F523
Wiring diagrams
Actuator connection:
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BT00362-b-UK
BUS
CARICO
MY HOME 781
Flush mounted 2 relay

radio actuator
H4573/2 - L4573/2
Description
radio-wire BUS system. The 2 relay radio actuator can be driven by the controls of the
automation system, using the transmitting interface L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576.
When used in a traditional system, the device can be driven directly by radio controls, or
using the local controls on the device.
The actuator consists of two interlocked relays for double loads (e.g. motor reducer), and
can also be used with only one relay, for single loads.
1
3
2
Technical data
Power supply:

Radio frequency:
Type of modulation:
Size:
Front view H4573/2*
230 Vac 50 Hz
0 40 C
868 MHz
FSK
N C1
L C2
4
A
PL1
PL2
M
G
Rear view
* NOTE: in the L4573/2 version, the position of the programming pushbutton
and the bottom LED are inverted.
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
LED
Programming pushbutton
Local pushbuttons
Configurator socket
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
Light connection wiring diagram
Rolling shutter wiring diagram
NN
NN
LL
LL
BT00103-b-UK
N NC1 C1
L1 L1
L LC2 C2
782 MY HOME
N NC1 C1
A A
PL1 PL1
PL2 PL2
M M
G G
L L C2 C2
A A
PL1 PL1
PL2 PL2
M M
G G
N N
MM
L2 L2
H4573/2 - L4573/2
Configuration
The device can also be used for operating rolling shutters and curtains as well as for
controlling a single load. The actuator must also be configured by placing the appropriate
configurators in the sockets of configurators A, PL1, PL2, M and G. If you want to use
the device for operating rolling shutters or curtains, configure A, PL1 and PL2 leaving
PL1=PL2. If you want to use the device for operating a single load, configure A and PL1
with PL1=19 and leave PL2 unconfigured. In this case, only one relay is used.
Example: The actuator with address A = 5 and PL1 = PL2 = 3 is managed by the wire
control configured with A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address 52 or
less (A = 5 and PL = 2).
Possible function
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON by pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key
Cyclical ON/OFF (only in Automation system)
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) as long as the key is pressed.
For radio controls, it deactivates after 1 minute
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) to end of travel.
TThe actuator ignores the Room and General controls and it deactivates after 1 minute
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) to end of travel.
The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed 1)
1) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time.
At the end of this time, the actuator will deactivate.
The configuration and/or customisation operations must be performed
when the actuator is NOT powered.
Combination of key cover used

and configurator in M
Combination of key cover used

and configurator in M
No configurator
PUL
0/1
-
PUL
none - 4 1)
Configurator
No configurator
1
2
3
4
Time (minutes)
1
2
5
10
Infinite or until the next control

2) Hold down the programming pushbutton; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn on; hold
3) Release the key.
cancelled.
BT00103-b-UK
Programming
1) Power up the actuator.
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the transmitting radio interface programming pushbutton
or press the wire control device key.
be programmed.
WARNING! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

Press the programming pushbutton using a phase-tester or electrically-insulated
screwdriver only. This operation must be carried out by qualified personnel only.
MY HOME 783
1 relay radio actuator
H4574 - L4574
Description
This device can be used to exploit the benefits of radio technology in a combined radiowire BUS system. The two-way radio actuator can be driven by the Automation system
controls, by means of transmitting interface item L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576.
When used in a traditional system, the two-way radio actuator can be driven directly by
a radio control, or using the local control on the device.
1
3
Technical data
Power supply:

Radio frequency:
Type of modulation:
Size:
2
230 Vac 50 Hz
0 40 C
- incandescent lamps 50 500 W / 0.2 2 A
- resistive loads 50 500 W / 0.2 2 A
- fluorescent lamps 12 a 70 W / 0.05 0.3 A
- electronic transformers 12 70 W / 0.05 0.3 A
- ferromagnetic transformers 50 500 VA / 0.2 2 Acos 0.5
868 MHz
FSK
Front view H4574*
C1 C2
A
PL
M
G
Rear view
*NOTE: in the L4574 version, the positions of the programming pushbutton
and the bottom LED are inverted.
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
LED
Programming pushbutton
Local pushbuttons
configurator socket
Wiring diagram
L
N
Wiring diagram for load controlled from one point only

L
N
C1
C2
A
PL
M
G
BT00102-b-UK
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram for load controlled from two or more points
L
N
L
C1 C2
A
PL
M
G
784 MY HOME
H4574 - L4574
Configuration
The actuator must be configured by connecting the configurators which define the
actuator address and operating mode in sockets A, PL, M and G. The actuator performs
all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the radio control
devices, apart from those which use two interlocked relays. For the configuration details
refer to the table below.
Example: The actuator with address A = 5 and PL = 3 is managed by the wire control
configured with A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address 52 or less (A
= 5 and PL = 2).
Possible function
Combination of key cover used and

configurator in M
Combination of key cover used and

configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF
No configurator
ON pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key
0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF (only in Automation system)

PUL
The configuration and/or customisation operations must be performed when the actuator is not powered.
Programming
1) Power up the actuator.
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the transmitting radio interface programming pushbutton
or press the wire control device key.
be programmed.
2) Hold down the programming pushbutton; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn on; hold
3) Release the key.
cancelled.
WARNING! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

Press the programming pushbutton using a phase-tester or electrically-insulated
screwdriver only. This operation must be carried out by qualified personnel only.
BT00102-b-UK
MY HOME 785
My Home system
key card switches
Description
H4648 - H4649 - LN4648 - LN4649

Front view
Hotel room power supply key card switch, available in the basic or in the RFID version (13.56
MHz frequency key card recognition). Thanks to the LED backlit slot, the device can be found in
the dark. An automatic switch off delay can also be set.
It can be used with key cards with sizes between 45 mm and 54 mm (ISO).
The configuration can be performed in two ways:
- physical configuration, by inserting the configurators in their sockets
- virtual configuration, using the virtual configurator software.
On completion of the installation procedure, the device must be fitted with a front cover in
the desired look (note: to be purchased separately; the item number will depend on the look
selected).
2
3
Technical data
Max. absorption:
Stand-by Absorption:
RFID key card frequency:
18-27 Vdc
6 mA
5 mA
(-10) (+45) C
13.56 MHz
H4649 - LN4649
Dimensional data
Two modes:
- CENTRALIZED, to recall scenarios managed by the scenario programmer. When the key card
is inserted and removed, the device forwards a signal to the scenario programmer, which
depending on the scenarios set will activate the corresponding functions programmed.
A = 1-9 (CEN command address)
PL = 1-9 (CEN command address)
M1 = CEN
M2 = no configurator
DEL1 = no configurator
DEL2 = no configurator
Note: the insertion of the key card corresponds to Pushbutton 1 of the control, while the
removal of the key card corresponds to Pushbutton 2 of the control
2
H4648 - LN4648
Rear view
- SCENARIO, where by inserting the key card a group of actuators is enabled, and an entrance
scenario is activated (through the scenario module), and by removing the key card an
exit scenario is activated (through the scenario module), thanks to which all the group
actuators will switch off and then disable after a set time delay.
BT00496-a-UK
A = 1-9 (as scenario module)

PL = 1-9 (as scenario module)
M1 = 1-8 (activation of the corresponding scenario: see table B)
M2 = no configurator
DEL1 = 0 - 9 (switching on time delay at the insertion of the key card: see table A)
DEL2 = 0 - 9 (switching off time delay after the removal of the key card: see table A)
Legend
1. Programming key: Learn IN
2. Programming key: Learn OUT
3. LED
786 MY HOME
5. BUS connector
H4648 - H4649 - LN4648 - LN4649

Table A
Table B
Configurator value
Time
Configurator value
Scenario - Group
Scenario-group (Sce1=1, Sce2=9, Gr=1)
1 min.
2 min.
3 min.
4 min.
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
15 sec.
30 sec.
Note: Sce 1 = scenario activated on insertion

Sce 2 = scenario activated on removal
Gr = group of actuators
SCENARIO mode programming

SCENARIO mode programming
This operation is performed to create a link between the key card switch and the scenario
module. The procedure is as follows:
1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming mode, with
the green LED on;
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn OUT) until the LED starts
flashing (approximately 3 seconds);
3) Create the scenario using the system controls and actuators;
4) Once the scenario has been saved, briefly press programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn
2) to exit the programming status;
5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario module
technical information).
2
3
Cancelling the programming in SCENARIO mode:

1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming mode, with
the green LED on:
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn 2) for 8 seconds. after 3
seconds the LED will turn on, after a further 5 seconds it will turn off again;
3) Release the key;
4) The LED flashing, followed by the LED switching off, indicates that the programming has
been cancelled;
5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario module
technical information).
H4649 - LN4649
H4648 - LN4648
BT00496-a-UK
MY HOME 787
1. Programming key: Learn IN

2. Programming key: Learn OUT
3. LED
Special control
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
Description
The two-module flush mounted and lowered special control has 4 pushbuttons and
2 green/red two-colour LEDs (Living and Mtix versions), or 4 blue/red two-colour
LEDs (Axolute version). The LEDs may be adjusted or excluded using the pushbutton on
the control. The control can be used for performing both standard and special functions
(timed ON, scenario control, timer control, dimmer, functions for video door entry
system and sound system).
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
3
5
Technical data

27 Vdc
Absorption with maximum LED intensity: 6 mA for H4651M2

8.5 mA for L4651M2

and AM5831M2
5 35C
A
PL/PF
M
LIV1/AUX
LIV2
SPE
I
Dimensional data
Size: 2 flush mounted modules
7
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or the
Legend
1. LED
2. Upper pushbutton
3. Lower pushbutton
4. LED
5. Pushbutton for LED adjustment/exclusion
BT00285-a-UK
The special control may also be used in systems with SCS/SCS gateways (item F422). If
the control is installed on the BUS of an interface, it will be possible to directly control
the actuator on the BUS of another interface, without the need for intermediate auxiliary
controls. For this, the I configurator, representing the interface address on which BUS is
the actuator to control, must be used. The logic expansion interfaces on the system must
be numbered from 1 to 9. When I=0, the device on the local line is controlled, while if
I=CEN, the line controls a device installed on the riser. With the new control, it is therefore
possible to set addresses for 81x9 devices connected to the buses for the 9 interfaces +
81 devices in the riser, for a total of 810 addresses. The M, LIV1 and LIV2 sockets are also
used for timer control functions.
Depending on the configuration of SPE, the device performs functions for several systems:
SPE = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, ON for Automation system
SPE = 7 for Video door entry system
SPE = 8 for Sound system
788 MY HOME

7. BUS
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2

1) Mode with SPE=0 - Standard functions - Automation
Possible function
Cyclic control. For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are performed by a short pressure, while a longer pressure
will be used for the adjustments; for the other controls only the ON/OFF functions are performed
No configurator
ON control only
ON
OFF control only
OFF
On control using the upper key, Off control using the lower key. For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are
performed by a short pressure, while a longer pressure will be used for the adjustments
0/1
Control of rolling shutter UP/DOWN to end of stroke

Control of monostable rolling shutter UP/DOWN (duration of the control for the whole time the key is pressed)
0/1
Pushbutton mode
PUL
Timed ON control
18
The control, which address is indicated in A and PL, sends a control for the scenario programmer, item MH200N
CEN
1) The controlled actuator switches off after an amount of time set by the configurators
used, as shown in the table.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
2) Enabling the T1 (upper) and T2 (lower) keys to manage scenarios of the programmer
MH200.
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
2) Mode with SPE=1 - advanced functions - Automation
Possible function
Unlocks with upper key and locks with lower key
ON short timed 2 seconds
Timed ON 10 min.
8
BT00285-a-UK
MY HOME 789
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2

3) Mode with SPE=2 - Flashing - Automation
Possible function
On with flash
09
1)
1) When an actuator receives a flashing control, this is performed by closing

and opening the relay for a time equal to T.
The T time depends on the configurators used in M, as shown in the table:
Configurator
Time (sec.)
0.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
4.5
4) Mode with SPE=3 - Dimmer level - Automation

Possible function
Selection of the adjustment level of Dimmer1
19
1) The configurator in M determines the adjustment in % of the load power.

as indicated in the table
Configurator
% P of load
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
5) Mode with SPE=4 - scenario repetition - Automation
BT00285-a-UK
Possible function
Repetition of scenario 1 - 9 of the scenario module which address is specified in A and PL
19
790 MY HOME
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2

6) Mode with SPE=5 - enhanced dimmer functions - Automation
Possible function
Selection of the 0 9 SOFT-START and SOFT-STOP speeds (see table below) and selection of the fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99% through the
LIV1=0-9 and LIV2=0-9 sockets. Control is cyclic, with ON at the selected level, and OFF. If LIV1=LIV2=0, the control enables to switch between ON (at the
last saved level) and OFF, with a short pressure. When using point-point controls, the adjustment occurs with a long pressure. The function is only active if
the device address corresponds to a dimmer actuator.
09
Configurator
Soft-start and soft-stop time (sec.)
10
20
40
1 min.
2 min.
4 min. 15 sec.
7) Mode with SPE=6 - Scenario control - Automation
The special control does not manage the scenarios by saving them in its own memory,
but has the function of recalling, creating or changing 4 scenarios in the scenario
Module F420.
The A and PL positions of the special control must correspond to those of the scenario
module, while the association of each key of the control with one of the scenarios
saved, is performed by configuring the M socket.
Key 1 (T1)
Key 2 (T2)
Key 3 (T3)
Key 4 (T4)
scenario 1
scenario 2
scenario 3
scenario 4
scenario 5
scenario 6
scenario 7
scenario 8
scenario 9
scenario 10
scenario 11
scenario 12
scenario 13
scenario 14
scenario 15
scenario 16
NOTE: M=1 4 identifies the group of the scenarios to control with the four keys, T1, T2, T3 and T4.
Scenario programmer:
Scenario management keys
key 1
key 2
LED key 1
LED key 3
key 3
BT00285-a-UK
Scenarios: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the

programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the lock/
unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the following
operations:
1) Press one of the four keys on the special control to which the scenario is to be associated for
3 seconds, the corresponding LED will begin to flash.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
control, Sound system, etc. functions.
3) Confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the special control to
exit programming mode.
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly. To completely delete a
scenario, press the corresponding key for 10 seconds.
LED key 4
key 2
NOTE: The image is shown as reference. The position of the keys is the same for all the
Legrand automation ranges.
MY HOME 791
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2

8) Mode with SPE=7 - Video door entry system
Possible function
Possible function
Door lock control; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the entrance panel for which to control the door lock using the T3 key
(bottom left); the T4 key (bottom right) controls the door lock of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+2, the T1 key (top left) controls the
door lock of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+1 and the T2 key (top right) the one of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+3.
Control for call to the floor; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the handset to call.
Control to switch on the staircase lights; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the handset from where the staircase lights are
controlled.
9) Mode with SPE=8 - Sound system
This function is used to control the amplifiers and the sound system sources.
When A, PL/PF and M are correctly configured, the following functions are performed:
1) A = 19 address of the amplifier room to control
PL/PF = 09 amplifier address to control
M = 0 (Follow-me mode)*
2) A = AMB - Room configuration
PL/PF = 0-9 configuration of the room to control ( in this case all the amplifiers of the
same room will be controlled)
M = 1 (activation of sound source S=1)*
3) A = GEN this control enables switching ON all the amplifiers in the home
PL/PF = M = 4 (activation of sound source S=4)*
NOTE (*): M = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on.
If M=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching OFF the sources (follow-me
mode).
In all SPE=8 modes, the sockets of LIV1, LIV2 and I must not be configured.
Example:
- if A=1, PL/PF=1 and M=3, the radio control will manage the amplifier with address A=1
and PF=1, and will activate source no. 3.
In sound system mode the keys on the special control perform the following functions:
1) With a short pressure of T1, the following sequence is sent:
- ON of the sources, source 1 is switched on only if M=0;
- ON of the amplifier.
2) With an extended pressure of T1:
- for point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted
(VOL+); if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;
- for Room, Group and General controls, only the volume is adjusted.
3) With an extended pressure of T3, the volume is adjusted (VOL-). A short pressure sends
the OFF control to the amplifier.
4) When T2 is pressed the source is changed.
5) T4 is the control for the active source.
10) Mode with SPE=9 - enhanced dimmer functions version 0/I - Automation
Possible function
Selection of the SOFT-START and SOFT-STOP speed (see table below) and selection of the fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99%
through the LIV1=0-9 and LIV2=0-9 sockets, according to the table for SPE=5. Control is ON at the level selected with the upper key
and OFF at the one selected with the lower key. If LIV1=LIV2=0, a short pressure of the upper key will be enough for the ON control (at
the last level saved), and of the lower key, for the OFF control; only in case of point-point controls, an extended pressure will give the
possibility to perform adjustments (upwards with the upper key and downward with the lower key), on 100 levels at variable speed.
09
BT00285-a-UK
792 MY HOME
H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2

11) Mode with SPE=ON - timer control
In this mode the control only works as a timer. In order to use this special control as a
timer control, the meaning of the configurators is as follows:
S value (LIV2)
Time (sec.)
M becomes M1
LIV1 becomes M2
LIV2 becomes S
10
Configure the M1 and M2 sockets for setting the timer minutes, and S for the timer
seconds, in 5 sec. steps; see table.
If M1=M2=S=9, a control is sent with a 0.5 sec. time value. If M1=M2=S=0, the control
is not timed and works in cyclic ON-OFF on the bottom left pushbutton. By correctly
selecting the sub keys, it is possible to only send timer controls or, using the two right
keys, the usual ON, OFF or dimmer adjustment controls.
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
12) Management of input auxiliaries (AUX)

The configurator in AUX indicates the auxiliary channel number which activates the control. On receiving a message sent on the AUX channel indicated, the device sends the control
for which it is configured, as if its own control pushbutton had been pressed.
below:
- double light control
- double disable control
- double scenario control
- double CEN control
- double scenario PLUS control
- double CEN PLUS control
- double AUX control
- double video door entry system control
- double sound system control
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
- double disable control
- double video door entry system control
- double sound system control
chapter.
LED adjustment
BT00285-a-UK
30%
DEFAULT
PUSH t > 2 s
60%
0%
100%
MY HOME 793
Basic control
for 2 independent loads
H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2
Description
Two-module, flush mounted and lowered special control with 4 pushbuttons and 2
green/red two-colour LEDs (LIVING and Mtix versions), or 4 blue/red two-colour LEDs
(AXOLUTE version). The LEDs may be adjusted or excluded using the pushbutton on the
control.
The device can control one single actuator for single or double loads, or two actuators
for single or double loads, independent from each other.
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
3
5
Technical data

Absorption with maximum LED intensity:

27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
6 mA for H4652/2
8.5 mA for L4652/2
and AM5832/2
Dimensional data

A
PL/PF
M
LIV1/AUX
LIV2
SPE
I
7
Legend
1. LED
2. Upper pushbutton
3. Lower pushbutton
4. LED
5. Pushbutton for LED adjustment/exclusion

7. BUS
BT00286-b-UK
794 MY HOME
H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2

Possible function
Combination of key covers used/Configurator in M1 and M2

1 function
2 functions
ON
OFF control
OFF
Timed ON control2)
Dimmer - ON control (upper key)
OFF (lower key) + adjustment 1)
Cyclical ON-OFF control + adjustment 1)
18
0/I
no configurator
Activation of scenarios managed by the programmer MH200N3)
PUL
CEN
1. If the control is sent to a dimmer actuator;
Configurator
Time (minutes)
2. The controlled actuator switches off after an amount

of time set by the configurators used, as shown in the
table.
1
2
3
1
2
3
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
Monostable rolling shutter UP/DOWN

Bistable rolling shutter up-down movement.
Blades adjustment if the pressure time is less than 1.5 s.
Up-down to the end of travel if the control is pressed for
more than 1.5 s.
Pushbutton (ON monostable)
3. Enabling of keys T1 (upper) and T3 (lower) with 2

module key cover; Enabling of keys T1 T2 (upper)
and T3 T4 (lower) with 1 module key cover; For
MH200N programmer scenario management. If
the device is used only to manage the scenario
programmer MH200, do not configure positions A2,
PL2.
below:
BT00286-b-UK
ON control
MY HOME 795
H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2

LED adjustment
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00286-b-UK
796 MY HOME
30%
DEFAULT
PUSH t > 2 s
60%
0%
100%
Basic control
for 3 independent loads
H4652/3 - L4652/3 - AM5832/3
Description
Three module flush mounted control, with six pushbuttons and three LED (in the LIVING
and Mtix version) or 6 LEDs (in the AXOLUTE version), which signal the status of the
control. The device can drive 1 relay single load actuators.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and configured physically or virtually.
In this mode the control can drive actuators with 2 interlocked relays and send controls
for the management of advanced devices, if configured using the CEN configurator.
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data

27 Vdc
Absorption:
9 mA
Dimensional data

A1
PL1
A2
PL2
A3
PL3
M
Legend
1. Upper pushbutton
2. Lower pushbutton
3. LED

5. BUS
BT00290-a-UK
MY HOME 797
H4652/3 - L4652/3 - AM5832/3

The device consists of three independent controls, and found on the back of the devices
are three separate A and PL positions, which relate to the keys on the front of the control.
From left to right, the three front buttons correspond to control 1 (A1, PL1), control 2 (A2,
PL2), and control 3 (A3, PL3).
Configurator value in position M
No configurator
Key covers used/function
Cyclical ON/OFF
NotE: if the control is associated to a dimmer actuator item H/L4678 item H/L4674
with operating modes cyclical ON-OFF, ON (upper key) and OFF (lower key) the
brightness can also be adjusted.
UP/DOWN
monostable UP/DOWN
ON (upper key)
OFF (lower key)
CEN
enabling the T1-T2-T3 (upper) and T4T5-T6 (lower) keys to manage scenarios of
the programmer MH200N*
Note (*): Do not configure positions A2, PL2 and A3, PL3.
9
BT00290-a-UK
below:
- double rolling shutter control
Cyclical ON/OFF
Cyclical ON/OFF
Cyclical ON/OFF
UP/DOWN
monostable
UP/DOWN
ON (upper key)
OFF (lower key)
Cyclical ON/OFF
Cyclical ON/OFF
Cyclical ON/OFF
UP/DOWN
monostable
UP/DOWN
ON (upper key)
OFF (lower key)
following ways:
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets chapter.
798 MY HOME
Flush mounted 1 relay actuator
H4671/1 - L4671/1 - AM5851/1
Description
Front view
This device incorporates an electromechanical relay to control a single load. it therefore

offers the advantage of being suitable for use as a control device, thanks to the front
pushbuttons.
Technical data
Operation power supply with BUS:
Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
Rear view
LED lamp
Compact fluorescent
lamp
Halogen lamp
2
3
27 Vdc from BUS

18 27 Vdc
16.5 mA
Ferromagnetic
transformers
PL
G1
G2
5
L
L1
Legend
230 Vac
1380 W
6A
150 W

Size:
Max. 3 lamps
150 W
0.65 A
0.9 W
2 A cos 0.5 460 VA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Configurator socket
Power line
BUS
2x2.5 mm2
BT00072-c-UK
MY HOME 799
H4671/1 - L4671/1 - AM5851/1

Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be directly configured on
the control, apart from those which involve the use of two interlocking relays. Also, the
following table lists further operating modes possible with the configurator in the M
position of the same actuator. The configurators connected to the G1 and G2 positions
make it possible for the device to be associated to two separate belonging groups.
Possible function
Combination key cover used and configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF
No configurator
O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
PUL
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for 1-4
point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator
is disabled after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
The control is configured in the M = 0/1 socket.
same time. The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan
working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as
BT00072-c-UK
800 MY HOME
Configurator
Time (minutes)
Control/actuator
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2
Description
Front view
This device, with 4 pushbuttons and 4 two-colour LEDs at the front (green/red in the
LIVING and MTIX versions, and blue/red in the AXOLUTE version), is fitted with two
independent relays for the management of:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads, independent;
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor).
The actuator may also be configured for the management of the connected load, whilst
at the same time operating as a control device for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating modes typical of control device item art. H/L4652/2.
Below are the possible operating modes of the device and the combination with the
key covers.
3
4
1. Actuator for rolling shutter automation and remote control function

Rolling shutter management
actuator key cover

key cover
Rear view
5
7
2. Lighting and remote control function actuator

Light management
actuator key cover
6
key cover
Legend
3. Lighting actuator (2 independent loads)

Light 1 management
actuator key cover
1. LED:
Light 2 management
actuator key cover
LIVING LIGHT: green with motor stopped, or orange (green + red) with motor in
operation

green with light OFF, and orange with light ON
AXOLUTE:
blue with motor stopped, or blue + red with motor in operation
blue with light OFF, or blue + red with light ON
2. Upper pushbuttons
3. Lower pushbuttons
4. Lighting and rolling shutter automation actuator
4. LED adjustment/disable pushbutton

5. Configurator socket (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with
physical configuration)
6. BUS
7. Clamps (3x2.5 mm2) for connection to the load
BT00411-b-UK
Rolling shutter management

actuator key cover
Light management
actuator key cover
MY HOME 801
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2

Technical data

Stand-by Absorption:
230 Vac
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
14 mA max
0 40 C
(-5) (+45) C
Incandescent lamps -
Motor reducers for rolling
LED lamp
Halogen lamp
shutters
460 W
2A
460 W
Linear fluorescent lamp - Electronic transformer
70 W
0.3 A
2A
70 W
Max. 2 lamps
2 A cos 0.5
460 VA

EN50090-2-2 Home and building electronic systems (HBES)
EN50090-2-3 General functional safety requirements for products intended to be

integrated in HBES
EN50428 Switches and related accessories for use in home and building

electronic systems (HBES)
Dimensional data

Wiring diagram
Light connection wiring diagram
Rolling shutter wiring diagram
N
N
LL
BT00411-b-UK
L1
N
M
L2
802 MY HOME
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2

Configuration
The PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION is performed by connecting the relevant configurators to

the 6 corresponding sockets:
A1, PL1 and M1= definition of address and actuator operating mode
A2, Pl2 and M2= definition of address and remote actuator Control, or Actuator 2
mode operating mode.
Actuator operating mode left pushbutton.

The A1 and PL1 positions define the address of the actuator.
The configurator in position M1 sets the function performed by the load connected to
the device, as per the following table:
Combination of key covers used/Configurator in M1
Possible function
1 function
Lighting function
Cyclical ON/OFF
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave
actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the Master
actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time set in the
Master actuator (see note 1)
Cyclical ON/OFF
Automation Function
Rolling shutter up-down movement with stop 2 minutes after the key has
been pressed; the actuator ignores Room and General controls
Rolling shutter up-down movement with stop after the time set by the
configurator (see table 1)
Bistable rolling shutter up-down movement. Blades adjustment if the
pressure time is less than 1.5 s. Up-down movement to the end of travel if
the control is pressed for more than 1.5 s.
Table 1: START/STOP time
no configurator
14
O/I
PUL
OFF
58
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the
Configurator M1
Time (minutes)
6, M,
Configurator M1
Time (minutes)
infinite until the next control
BT00411-b-UK
Note: for the lighting functions connect the load to clamps L1-C
2 functions
MY HOME 803
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2

Remote control actuator operating mode right pushbutton.
The A2 and PL2 positions define the A and PL address of the remote actuator to manage.
The configurator in position M2 sets the function as per the following table:
Combination key covers used and configurator in M2
Possible function
1 function
Lighting function
ON control
OFF control
Timed ON control2)
Dimmer - ON control (upper key)
OFF (lower key) + adjustment 1)
Cyclical ON-OFF control + adjustment 1)
2 functions
ON
OFF
18
0/I
no configurator
Automation function

PUL
Activation of scenarios managed by the programmer MH200N3)
CEN
Configurator
Time (minutes)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
15
30 seconds
0.5 seconds
BT00411-b-UK
1) If the control is sent to a dimmer actuator;

2) The controlled actuator switches off after an amount of time set by the configurators used, as shown in the table;
3) Enabling of keys T1 (upper) and T3 (lower) with 2 module key cover; enabling of keys T1 T2 (upper) and T3 T4 (lower) with 1 module key cover. For MH200N programmer
scenario management. If the device is used only to manage the scenario programmer MH200, do not configure positions A2, PL2.
804 MY HOME
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2

Actuator operating mode for two separate loads left and right pushbuttons
M1=CEN
When the CEN configurator is connected to the M1 position, the actuator is preset for
the management of two separate loads, connected to contacts C-L1 and C-L2 of the
two relays, controlled locally using both front pushbuttons, right (load connected in
C-L2) and left (load connected in C-L1). In practice, the lighting functions for the left
pushbutton (see page 3) are also applied to the right pushbutton.
In the positions A1, PL1 and A2, PL2 it will be necessary to define the Room and Light
Point addresses of the two loads.
When the M2 position is configured, the possible functions are:
Combination key covers used and configurator in M2
Possible function
1 function
Cyclical ON/OFF
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the
corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point
control. With the OFF control the Master actuator
deactivates; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time
set in the Master actuator (see note 1)
Cyclical ON/OFF
2 functions
no configurator
14
O/I
PUL
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the
Configurator M1
Time (minutes)
4
BT00411-b-UK
MY HOME 805
Dimmer actuator
H4678 - L4678
Description
Front view
The device is a dimmer for controlling resistive loads or ferromagnetic transformers.

Lets you switch on, switch off and adjust the illumination intensity of the load; it can be
controlled with the BUS or local key. If you press the key briefly, the load will switch on or
switch off. If you hold it pressed longer, the brightness can be adjusted.
The actuator can signal any load problems such as, for example, the breaking of the
lamp. It is also protected by a fuse, which can easily be replaced if it blows.
The LED on the actuator changes colour based on the status of the device:
- green/blue LED: voltage load off
- red: load ON
- flashing LED: wrong configuration
2
3
Rear view
Technical data
Absorption:
Incandescent lamps
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
9 mA
0 40 C
Halogen lamp
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
230 Vac
60 - 300 W

Size:
Connection
N
0.25 - 1.30 A
0.25 - 1.30 A
60 - 300 VA
3W
L
clamp
white = adjusted
brown = line
BT00075-c-UK
A
PL
M
G
fuse
806 MY HOME
configurators
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Configurator socket
Fuse
H4678 - L4678
Configuration
Possible function
Combination key cover used and configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF with short pressure and adjustment with long pressure
No configurator
ON pressing the upper key and adjustment UP.

OFF on the upper key and adjustment DOWN.
O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
PUL
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for 1 4
point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator
deactivates after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
same time.
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for
the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the
table.
Configurator
Time (minutes)
BT00075-c-UK
MY HOME 807
Radio control with battery
HA4572 - HB4572 - L4572 - H4572PI - L4572PI
Description
The radio control is used to drive wire actuators and recall scenarios of the system
through the receiving interface (HC/HS4575 and L/N/NT4575N).
Its available on the catalogue in two versions:
- HA/HB/L4572 with surface mounting frame for installation using double sided
tape (supplied) or using standard wall plugs. No flush mounted box or masonry
work required. When used with Living cover plates remove the side sections of the
supporting frame.
- H/L4572PI with frame, for flush mounted installation inside traditional supports.
The radio control is battery operated. When using the control for the first time make
sure the battery protection tab is removed.
PL2
M
A
PL1
Technical data
Power supply:
Radio frequency:
Range:

Type of modulation:
Size:
3V battery type CR2032 (Min. duration: 2 years)

0 40 C
868 MHz
100 m in free field (metal and reinforced concrete walls
reduce the range)
FSK
2 modules
4
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tab for removing battery

Pushbuttons
Configurator socket
LED
Control composition table

Residential series
Control
Key cover
Cover plate
Support
Square
SURFACE
AXOLUTE
HA4572
HC4919
HS4919
HA4802...
HB4572
HC4919 HS4919
HB4802...
L4572
L4919
Elliptical
NT4919
L4802...
N4819... NT4819...
PL2
M
N4919
AXOLUTE
LIVING
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
L4572PI
808 MY HOME
HC 4919 HS 4919
HA4802...
HB4802...
H4702
PL2
M
H4572PI
A
PL1
FLUSH MOUNTED
BT00095-b-UK
A
PL1
LIVING
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
L4919
N4919
NT4919
L4802...
N4819... NT4819... L4702
N4719
HA4572 - HB4572 - L4572 - H4572PI - L4572PI

Configuration
The radio devices must be configured using the numeric configurators only; virtual
configuration is therefore not applicable in this case.
Possible function
The radio control must be configured by placing the appropriate configurators in sockets
A, PL1, PL2 and M. If position PL2 is not configured, the right key will be disabled.
Fitting of spacer below the key covers
Combination of key covers used / Configurator in M
ON control
YES
ON
OFF control
YES
OFF
ON control pressing the upper key, OFF pressing the lower

key and long press to adjust the intensity
NO
0/1
Rolling shutter UP/DOWN control - to end of stroke
NO
Rolling shutter up/down control for the time the key is

pressed
NO
Pushbutton mode
YES
PUL
Key A: Cyclical ON/OFF

Key B: Up/Down rolling shutters
Key cover A: YES

Key cover B: NO
Key A: Cyclical ON/OFF

Key B: Rolling shutters Up/Down
Key cover A: YES

Key cover B: NO
Key A: ON - upper key, OFF - lower key

Key B: Up/Down
NO
Key A: ON - upper key, OFF - lower key

Key B: Rolling shutters Up/Down
NO
Cyclical ON-OFF control and intensity adjustment with

extended pressure
YES
No configurator
Scenario management (see the following table)
58
CEN control to manage MH200
CEN
KEY B
The control activates a scenario from 1 to 16, depending on the configurator placed in
position M and the key pressed, as described in the following table.
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Scenario 5
Scenario 6
Scenario 7
Scenario 8
Scenario 9
Scenario 10
Scenario 11
Scenario 12
Scenario 13
Scenario 14
Scenario 15
Scenario 16
BT00095-b-UK
M=5 8 scenario module

This mode can be used only if the system includes a Scenario Module item F420 that allows
you to activate (not program) a previously stored scenario. In this operating mode, positions
A and PL1 represent the address of the scenario module on which one can operate.
KEY A
MY HOME 809
Flat radio control no battery
HA4572SB - HB4572SB - L4572SB
Description
1
The radio control is used to control the MY HOME system using the receiving interface
HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB. This special devie does not require the use of a battery as its
already fitted with a piezo-electric generator.
The control does not require flush mounted boxes as it can be installed with doublesided adhesive tape (supplied) or using standard wall plugs. no masonry work is
therefore required.
Technical data
Power supply:
Radio frequency:
Range:

Type of modulation:
Size:
piezo-electric generator
0 40 C
868 MHz
70 m in free field
ASK
2 modules
Configuration
Front view
Legend
The radio control does not have positions for the configuration of the operating modes,
as these are set by configuring the SPE position of the radio receiver HC/HS/L/N/
NT4575SB.
1. Pushbutons
2. Piezo-electric generator
Control composition table

Residential series
Control
Key cover
Cover plate
HA4572SB
HC4919SB HS4919SB
HA4802...
HB4572SB
HC4919SB HS4919SB
HB4802...
L4572SB
L4919SB N4919SB NT4919SB
Square
SURFACE
AXOLUTE
Elliptical
BT00097-b-UK
LIVING
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
810 MY HOME
L4802...
N4819... NT4819...
2 module flush mounted

actuator 16 A
Description
HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N

L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Front view
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with local pushbutton for load
forcing/local control for the Automation and/or Load control management functions.
the F21 load control unit (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled if the threshold is
exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in all configuration
software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load
for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load forcing previously set.
- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception
of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays;
- possibility of group configuration (G);
Automation system.
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay
does not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by
a control, ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation
commands in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required
by the last automation command.
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling. If
during DISABLING stage the relay is switched off due to the scheduling settings, when
re-enabling takes place it will stay switched off.
Rear view
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
6
L1
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage
from the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The device consists of 2 modules, so that it can be installed in supports of the Living,
Light, Light Tech and Axolute series, and is provided with socket for 6 configurators: A,PL,
G, M, P1, P2.
Technical data
Legend
1. Local pushbutton for load forcing/local control
2. LED RED
3. Green/red two-colour LED
5. BUS connection
6. Load connection
7. Phase connection
BT00363-b-UK
Operating power supply

with SCS BUS:
18 27 Vdc
Absorption:
10 mA max
0 40 C
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Incandescent and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W

LED lamp and Compact fluorescent lamps

500 W / Max. 10 lamps

Linear fluorescent lamp and electronic
transformers 4 A / 920 W

Dimensional data
MY HOME 811
HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N

L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Configuration
sockets.
- A/PL/G/M local address (room, light point), group, and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2
priority in the load control management system, (P1 = tens, P2 = units)
1) Automation Mode:
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; it can
also accept extended switch on, switch off, and time delay controls.

In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicate the device address, while the P1
and P2 positions must be configured equal to zero.
The pushbutton operates in ON/OFF cyclical mode.
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
1 41)
1)
Configurator in M
Time (minutes)
Device status
Two-colour LED
Result
Red LED
OFF
GREEN
OFF
Fixed ON
ORANGE
OFF
green
red
Load OFF
Fixed ON
Load ON
Fixed ON
BT00363-b-UK
812 MY HOME
HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N

L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, the
A, PL, G and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
Device status
Two-colour LED
Result
Red LED
Fixed ON
ORANGE
OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
OFF
Forced
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s on GREEN
OFF
Disabled
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Fixed ON
Result
Red LED
Green
Red
Enabled ON
Fixed ON
Enabled OFF
Device status
Two-colour LED
Green LED
Red LED
Enabled + ON
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
OFF
Enabled + OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
OFF
Disabled
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Fixed ON
Forced + ON
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s on GREEN
OFF
Forced + OFF
Flashing 1 s/1 s
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s
OFF
Result
Red LED
Two-colour LED
Green LED
Red LED
No configuration
Fixed ON
Flashing
128 ms/128 ms
ORANGE flashing
128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
OFF
Configuration error
Fixed ON
Flashing irregularly
ORANGE flashing
irregularly on GREEN
OFF
BT00363-b-UK
Device status
MY HOME 813
HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N

L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Wiring diagrams
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
LOAD
A
PL
G
M
P1
P2
L1
SCS BUS
BT00363-b-UK
814 MY HOME
HD4563 - HC4563 - HS4563

L4563 - N4563 - NT4563
Regulation rotative control

Description
The regulation rotative control is used for the advanced management of dimmer
actuators and sound systems. The central pushbutton can be used to switch the
controlled dimmer on and off, with times (soft-start and soft-stop) and switch-on
intensity (from 1 to 99%) that can be set by configuring the device. The rotary knob
instead accurately adjusts the controlled power from the minimum to the maximum
value
In the sound system its used to send to the BUS controls for the management of various
devices such as amplifiers and sound sources; the central pushbutton can be used for
ON/OFF, CD track, or saved radio station cycling control, while the knob can be used
to adjust the volume of the loudspeakers. The control may be configured as point-point,
room, and general.
1
2
Front view
Technical data
Max. Absorption:
Size:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
5 mA
5 35 C
Configuration
A1
PL/PF
M
LIV1
LIV2
SPE
I
Rear view
A
PL/PF
M
LIV1
LIV2
SPE
I
ROOM
Light point/voice point
(Sound system)
mode
adjustment level 10 90
adjustment level 1 9
special
address of the device to be controlled
(see table 1 for details)
Legend
1. Knob
2. Pushbutton/LED
1) Mode with SPE=0 - enhanced dimmer functions Can switch a dimmer actuator ON, selecting the level from 1% to 99%, and the soft-start and soft-stop speed. The times shown in the table refer to the maximum level.
The knob perform adjustment on 99 levels.
Possible function
Configurator in M
Configurator in LIV1
Configurator in LIV2 (unit)
(tens)
ON-OFF cyclic with selection of soft-start and soft-stop speed (see table 2).
19
09
09
If LIV1=LIV2=0 the load switches ON at the last level saved
ON-OFF cyclic with switching ON at the level from 1-99%. If LIV1=LIV2=0 the load 09
09
switches ON at the last level saved
Configurator in I
19
0
CEN
Address
Systems with logical extension. Address of interface
item F422 the BUS of which the dimmer to be driven
is found on
The dimmer is found in the same system as the control
Systems with logical extension. The dimmer is
found in the riser BUS and the knob control in one
of the connected systems
Table 2: start/stop time

Configurator in M
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Time (sec.)
default
1
3
5
10
20
40
1 min.
2 min.
4 min. and 15 sec.
BT00066-b-UK
Table 1: address of the device to be controlled
MY HOME 815
HD4563 - HC4563 - HS4563

L4563 - N4563 - NT4563
2) Mode with SPE=1 - Sound system mode Possible function
Follow-me mode (*)
1 9 volume level when the amplifier is

activated, without configurators the last set level activates
Address of the first source to activate
14
1 9 volume level when the amplifier is

activated, without configurators the last set level activates
The A room can be configured from 1 to 9 for point-point function, or with AMB to identify a room, and finally with GEN for the activation of all the amplifiers of the house.
NOTE (*): the Follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one in the
current room.
3) Mode with SPE=2 - basic dimmer functions Can switch a dimmer ON, selecting the level from 1 to 9. If M = 0 the load switches ON at the last level saved. Unlike the mode with SPE=0 the knob can perform adjustments on 9 levels.
Possible function
Configurator in LIV1 (tens)
Configurator in LIV2 (unit)
Cyclical ON/OFF with switching ON at level 1 to 9
19
BT00066-b-UK
816 MY HOME
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575

L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N

Description
The interface lets you use radio controls to operate one or more actuators with a wire
BUS, thus allowing you to create combined radio and wire systems.
This device cannot interact with the radio control without batteries (HA/HB/
L4572SB).
Technical data
Operating power supply SCS BUS:
Absorption:
Radio frequency:
Size:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
22 mA
0 40 C
868 MHz
Front view
A
PL
M
Configuration
There are four ways to configure the interface:
- Physical expansion for expanding Automation systems;
- SELF-LEARNING, used in combination with the remote controls item 3527 and item 3528;
- SCENARIO PROGRAMMER for the control of devices item MH200.
- REMOTE SCENARIOS, for managing scenarios stored by the scenario module item F420.
The interface has three configuration sockets: A and PL for the address and M for the
operating mode.
1) Physical expansion mode - configurator M=1 In this mode it is possible to install only one receiving interface for each system; it may
be used on the same system of the transmitting interface item HC/HS4576 or item L/N/
NT4576N (only if it is likewise configured in Physical expansion mode M = 1).
Only radio control devices with a configurable address (sockets A, PL, M, G etc.) must be
used, such as item HA/HB/L4572 and item H/L4572PI, etc.; these devices must also be
configured.
The configurators in A=1 9 and PL= 1 9 separate the wire system from the radio
system; all addresses lower than A and PL are reserved for the wire system while all
addresses higher than A and PL are reserved for the automation system. In the example
below, the address of the receiving interface is A=6 PL=1; all the messages of controls
with an actuator with address lower than 61 (59, 58, etc.) as recipient are transmitted on
the BUS.
Receiving interface item L/N/NT4575N
A
PL
M
A =6
PL = 1
M =1
WYRE SYSTEM
RADIO SYSTEM
Available addresses
from 11 to 59
Available addresses
from 62 to 99
If there is an HC/HS4576 and L/N/NT4576N transmitting interface in the system,

configured with M=1, the latter should have an address next to the one of the receiving
interface. Example: A=6 PL=1 M=1 for the receiving interface and A=6 PL=2 M=1 for
the transmitting interface.
3
Rear view
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
Programming/reset pushbutton
Configurator socket
BUS
LED
Programming
To associate a radio device to the receiving interface, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the radio interface programming pushbutton for 3 sec.: the red LED will turn
on steadily; release the key.
2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the radio control you want to program; The
red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the
programming has been completed.
3) Now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface (max. 128 codes).
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the pushbutton for at least 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on
steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off). Release the key. The red
LED will turn on again.
2) Within 20 seconds press the key on the transmitting device using the key of the
channel you want to cancel: the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
seconds, thus confirming the cancellation.
3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer send any control to the BUS until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel all codes from the receiving interface, press the pushbutton for about 12
seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will
turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds,
thus confirming that all programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.
BT00096-b-UK
BUS
MY HOME 817
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575

L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
2) Self-learning mode - configurator M = 0 This operating mode enables associating a single function to any key of the alarm radio
remote control. By following the procedures below, the user can set, delete, or change
this association.
It is necessary to insert the numeric configurators in the two A = 0 9 and PL = 1 9
positions of the interface in order to determine the address of the device in the system,
which must be different from the actuator address.
Arrangement of keys on the

3528 remote control
4
1
BT00096-b-UK
Programming
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the radio interface for 3 seconds: the red LED
will turn on steadily; release the pushbutton.
completed.
associated (in case you want to change it). A maximum of 24 self-learning
operations are possible (e.g. 4 remote controls item 3527).
818 MY HOME
2
3
4
NOTE: only radio controls or radio remote controls that cannot be configured can
operate in this mode (e.g. 3527, 3528...).
It is also necessary that no transmitting interface, HS4576 and L/N/NT4576N is installed
in the system, although several receiving interfaces may be present.
Functions that the receiving interface can learn:
a. Automation
- ON/OFF - actuator; operation in cyclical mode. Actuator ON/OFF with short pressure,
and dimmer adjustment with long pressure (point-point control only).
- Timed ON.
- Flashing.
- Rolling shutters UP; UP functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode.
Long pressure executes UP function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Rolling shutters DOWN; DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode.
Long pressure executes DOWN function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Lock/Unlock actuator.
- Scenario activation.
b. Video door entry system
- Door lock control (also during a conversation).
- Staircase light control.
- Floor call (also general).
- Auto-switching ON and cycling of cameras(only with SCS F442 modulator)
c. Sound system
- ON amplifier (always in follow-me mode) amplifier ON with short pressure, volume
Up with extended pressure.
- OFF amplifier. amplifier OFF with short pressure, Volume Down with extended
pressure.
- Cycling of sources.
- Change radio station or music track.
5
6
Arrangement of
keys on the 3527
remote control
d. Auxiliary channels
- Auxiliary lights ON/OFF; operation in cyclical mode.
- Rolling shutters UP; UP functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode. Long pressure
executes UP function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Rolling shutters DOWN; DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode. Long
pressure executes DOWN function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Reset.
below:
re-programmed.
To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the pin
pushbutton for about 12 seconds:
the red LED will turn on steadily after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn
off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
confirming the cancellation of all programming conditions.
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575

L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
3) Scenario programmer mode - configurator M=CEN
In this mode press one of the keys of remote control item 3527 and item 3528 to activate
the scenarios which are programmed and managed by the scenario programmer device
item MH200.
In this operating mode the system must not have the transmitting interface item HC/
HS4576 or item L/N/NT4576N; several receiving interfaces item HC/HS4575 and item
L/N/NT4575N can also be installed.
The numeric configurators to define the address different from that assigned to the
actuators must be connected to the two positions A = 0 9 and PL = 0 9 of the
interface (A and PL must not be 0 at the same time)
Arrangement of keys on
the 3528 remote control
4
1
NOTE: only radio controls or radio remote controls that cannot be configured can
operate in this mode (e.g. 3527, 3528...).
Furthermore, it is possible to install different receiving interfaces item HC/HS4575 or
L/N/NT4575N.
Scenario number
in the scenario
module
Configurator
M=6
Scenario 1
Key 1 *
Scenario 2
Key 2 *
Scenario 3
Key 3 *
Scenario 4
Key 4 *
Scenario 5
Key 5
Scenario 6
Key 6
Configurator
M=7
Key 1 *
Scenario 8
Key 2 *
Scenario 9
Key 3 *
Scenario 10
Key 4 *
Scenario 11
Key 5
Scenario 12
Key 6
3
5
6
Arrangement of
keys on the 3527
remote control
NOTE: The keys shown with * refer to remote control item 3528 with 4 channels.
Configurator
M=8
Scenario 13
Key 1 *
Scenario 14
Scenario 15
Key 2 *
Key 3 *
Scenario 16
Key 4 *
BT00096-b-UK
Scenario 7
2
4
Programming
The programming procedure is that described in the Programming chapter interface in
mode Physical expansion Configurator M=1.
4) Remote scenario mode - configurator M = 6 8
This operating mode enables you to associate each scenario stored by the scenario
module item F420 to any key of the radio remote control item 3527 and item 3528.
In the two positions of the interface, A = 09 and PL =1-9, it will be necessary to
connect the configurators corresponding to the scenario module to control.
The configuration in M determines the correspondence between the keys of the remote
control and the scenarios stored, as shown in the table below.
MY HOME 819
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575

L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
Programming
To program a scenario it is necessary:
1) To enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming
status LED is green (press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5
seconds).
2) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will
turn on steadily.
3) Within 20 seconds press the Alarm radio remote control key of the scenario you
want to program on the radio remote control: the red LED will begin to flash, hence
indicating the activation of the programming mode.
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators of the MY HOME system.
5) Press the interface pushbutton to exit the programming mode: the red LED will turn
off
6) Repeat 2) through 5) for all the scenarios you want to program (maximum 128
codes).
7) To disable the possibility of programming, or of cancelling any scenarios, press the
lock/unlock key of the scenario module until the corresponding LED turns red.
To cancel a scenario, follow the procedure below:

1) Enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming
status LED is green
2) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red
LED will turn on steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off again).
Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again.
3) Within 20 seconds press the alarm radio remote control key of the scenario to
be cancelled from the remote control: when the scenario module confirms the
cancellation the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it
will turn off.
4) Repeat 2) and 3) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
To cancel all programming of the interface simultaneously, press the programming
pushbutton for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily,
after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start
flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation). Release the
key.
NOTE: This operation will not cancel the scenarios saved in the Scenario Module.
Cancelling all scenarios: to execute this operation, it is necessary to hold down the DEL
key directly on the Scenario Module for 10 seconds after pressing the self-learning key
so that the LED turns green.
BT00096-b-UK
820 MY HOME
HD4575SB - HC4575SB - HS4575SB

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB

Description
The receiving interface must be used to allow the radio control without batteries item
HA/HB/L4572SB to operate the MY HOME system.
A
PL1
M1
PL2
M2
SPE
Technical data
27 Vdc
Absorption:
33 mA
0 40 C
Radio frequency:
868 MHz
Size:
Front view
The interface can be configured in five different modes:

- SELF LEARNING
- STANDARD
- REMOTE SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
- Sound system
- Video door entry system
Positions A, PL1 and PL2 define the receiver addresses in the MY HOME system.
Positions M1 and M2 define the operating modes.
Rear view
pair of
keys 1 and 3
1) Self-learning mode - SPE=0This operating mode enables you to associate one of the following functions to each pair
of keys, pair 1-3 and pair 2-4 of the radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB.
pair of
keys 2 and 4
Front view of the radio control

item HA/HB/L4572SB with key covers
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
LED
Configurator socket
BUS
d) Auxiliary channels
- ON/OFF auxiliary lights; operation in O/I mode. The ON control is automatically given
by the upper key of the pair while the OFF control is given by the lower key.
- Rolling shutters UP/DOWN; UP/DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable
mode. The upper key of the pair is automatically associated with the UP control (UP
with long pressure, STOP with short pressure) whereas the lower key is associated
with the DOWN control (DOWN with long pressure, STOP with short pressure).
- Reset. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
09
PL1
19
M1
PL2
M2
SPE
BT00098-b-UK
a) Automation
- ON/OFF - actuator; operation in O/I mode. Actuator ON/OFF with short pressure, and
dimmer adjustment with long pressure (point-point control only). The upper key of
the pair is automatically associated to the ON control and UP intensity adjustment,
whereas the lower key is associated to the OFF control and DOWN intensity
adjustment.
- Timed ON. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Flashing. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Rolling shutters UP/DOWN; UP/DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable
mode. The upper key of the pair is automatically associated to the UP control (UP
with long pressure, STOP with short pressure) whereas the lower key is associated to
the DOWN control (DOWN with long pressure, STOP with short pressure).
- Lock/Unlock actuator. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Scenario activation. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
b) Video door entry system
- Door lock control (also during a conversation). Both keys of the pair execute the
same function.
- Staircase light control. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Floor call (also general). Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Auto-switching ON and cycling of cameras(only with SCS F442 modulator). Both
keys of the pair execute the same function.
c) Sound system
- ON/OFF amplifier; ON always works in Follow me mode. With short pressure
amplifier ON/OFF, volume adjustment with extended pressure. The amplifier ON and
Up volume adjustment controls are automatically associate to the upper key, while
the amplifier OFF and Down volume adjustment controls are associated to the lower
key.
- Cycle source/station-track change. The source cycling control is automatically
associated to the upper key, while the station-track change control is associated to
the lower key.
Configuration
MY HOME 821

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Self-learning mode programming
It is possible to associate up to 24 functions to each single receiving interface (hence, for
each interface it is possible to associate up to 12 radio controls L4572SB). The association
between the required function and the pair of keys is made by following the procedure
described below.
In order to associate a function to each radio control key pair, follow the procedure
below:
1) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 3 seconds. When the red LED turns
on steadily. Release the pushbutton.
2) Within 20 seconds press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control;
the red LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming
mode.
3) Within 5 minutes set the function you wan to associate to the radio control key,
using the corresponding device (e.g. control, actuator, amplifier, etc.). The red LED
will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the association
has been achieved;
4) Repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all key pairs to be associated, even for a pair that has already
been associated (in case you want to change it).
To cancel the programming of a radio control key pair, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds; after 3
seconds the red LED will turn on steadily; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off.
Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again steadily.
2) If you want to cancel a programming condition, press the key of its pair within 20
seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming
the cancellation.
3) From now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel all interface associations simultaneously, press the programming pushbutton
of the receiving interface for about 12 seconds; after 3 seconds the red LED will turn
on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off nd after another 4 seconds it
will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all
programming conditions. Release the pushbutton.
2) Standard mode - SPE=1 This operating mode allows you to implement the automation standard functions (e.g. controlling lights and rolling shutters). In addition to positions A, PL1 and PL2 which
determine the receiving interface address item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB in the Automation system it is necessary to configure positions M1 and M2, which determine the operating
modes of the pair of keys (pair 1-3 and pair 2-4) of the associated radio control.
Possible function
Configurator in position M1
Pair of keys 1 and 3
BT00098-b-UK
Cyclical ON/OFF control 2) and intensity adjustment with

long pressure 2)
ON control 2)
OFF control 2)
ON control by pressing the upper key,
OFF by pressing the lower one and intensity adjustment
with long pressure
UP control (buttons 1 and 2) and DOWN till end (buttons 3
and 4) of travel
UP control (buttons 1 and 2) and DOWN (buttons 3 and 4)
rolling shutter as long as the key is pressed
Pushbutton mode 2)
Timed ON control 1) 2)
CEN control to manage MH200
No configurator
No configurator
ON
OFF
0/1
ON
OFF
0/1
PUL
18
CEN
PUL
18
CEN
1) depending on the configurator placed in the control, the actuator turns OFF
automatically after a time period specified in the table.
2) mount the shim supplied on the back of the key cover, so that only the lower key is
used.
NotE: if positions A2 and PL2 are not defined the pair of pushbuttons 2 and 4 will be
disabled.
822 MY HOME
Configurator in position M2
Pair of keys 2 and 4
Configurator
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rated time (min.)

1
2
3
4
5
15
30 sec.
0.5 sec.

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Standard mode programming
In order to associate a radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB to the receiving interface HC/
HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure below:
turn on steadily; release the key.
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control;
The red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the
3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum of 128.
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure
below:
1) press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds. (after 3
seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off).
Release the key. The red LED will turn on again.
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming
condition on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
3) from now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel all programming from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press the
programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another
4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming that all
programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.
3) Remote scenario management mode - SPE=6 This operating mode can be used to manage the scenarios saved in the F420 scenario
module using the HA/HB/L4572SB radio control. The configuration in A and PL1 of the
receiving interface must correspond to that (A and PL) of the scenario module to be
controlled.
The configuration in M1 determines the correspondence between the keys of the radio
control and the scenarios stored in the Scenario Module.
A
PL1
M1
PL2
M2
SPE
1
2
3
4
09
19
14
0
0
6
Key 1
Scenario 1
Scenario 5
Scenario 9
Scenario 13
Key 2
Scenario 2
Scenario 6
Scenario 10
Scenario 14
Key 4
Scenario 4
Scenario 8
Scenario 12
Scenario 16
2) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red
LED will turn on steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off again).
Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again.
3) Within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to cancel on the radio
control: when the scenario module confirms the cancellation, the red LED will start
flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it will turn off.
4) Repeat 2) and 3) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
To cancel all programming of the interface simultaneously, press the programmings pushbutton
for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it
will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
confirming the cancellation). Release the key.
NOTE: This operation will not cancel the scenarios saved in the Scenario Module.
BT00098-b-UK
Scenario programming
To program a scenario it is necessary:
1) In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming status LED is
green (press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds).
turn on steadily.
3) Within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to program on the radio
control: the red LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the
programming mode.
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators of the MY HOME system.
5) Within 35 minutes, press the programming key on the interface to exit the
programming mode: the red LED will turn off.
6) Repeat 2) and 5) for all the scenarios you want to program.
7) To disable the possibility of programming, or of cancelling any scenarios, press the
lock/unlock key of the scenario module until the corresponding LED turns red.
1) Enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming
status LED is green.
Key 3
Scenario 3
Scenario 7
Scenario 11
Scenario 15
Cancelling all scenarios: to execute this operation, it is necessary to hold down the DEL
key directly on the Scenario Module for 10 seconds after pressing the self-learning key
so that the LED turns green.
MY HOME 823

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
4) Sound system mode - SPE=8 This operating mode enables implementing the sound system functions. In this
operating mode the keys of the radio control operate as follows:
- Key 1: a short pressure activates the source and the amplifier. An extended pressure
increases the volume.
- Key 3: a short pressure switches the amplifier off. An extended pressure decreases
the volume.
- Key 2: changes sound source.
- Key 4: changes track or radio station.
The Room (A) and Loudspeaker (PL1/PF1) must be configured following the procedure
below:
- A= 0 9: is the amplifier room; PL1/PF1= 0 9: is the amplifier loudspeaker;
- A=AMB: is for room controls; PL1/PF1= 0 9: is the room the control is intended for;
- A=GEN: for general type controls; PL1/PF1 must be 0.
The configuration M1=1-4 defines the source to activate before switching ON the
amplifier; If M1=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching Off the sources
(Follow-me mode).
The PL2 and M2 configurators must be equal to zero.
Sound system programming

3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum
of 128.
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the
procedure below:
5) Video door entry system mode - SPE=9 This operating mode gives the possibility of interacting with the video door entry
system, assigning to the radio control some functions like: staircase light switching ON,
floor call, and entrance panel door lock opening.
BT00098-b-UK
The M1 (pair of keys 1 and 3) and M2 (pair of keys 2 and 4) mode configurators must be
configured in one of the following ways:
- M=1: double door look release control
A and PL1 (if M1=1 and M20) are the address of the entrance panel from which
the door lock is controlled: key 3 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1),
while key 1 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1)+1. A and PL2 (if M2=1)
are the address of the entrance panel from which the door lock is controlled: key 4
controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL2), while key 2 controls the door lock
of entrance panel (A/PL2)+1. The address of the entrance panel specified in A/PL1
or in A/PL2 must be lower or equal to 95.
824 MY HOME
pair of
keys 1 and 3
pair of
keys 2 and 4
Front view of the radio control

item HA/HB/L4572SB with key covers
Example:
- if A=1, PL1/PF1=1 and M=3, the radio control will manage the amplifier with address
A=1 and PF=1, and will activate source no. 3.
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming
condition on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
re-programmed.
To cancel all programmings from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press
the programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
- M=2: Floor call control

A and PL1 (if M1=2) and/or A and PL2 (if M2=2) are the address (two digits) of the
handset to call.
- M=3: staircase light switching ON control
A and PL1 (if M1=3) or A and PL2 (if M2=3) are the address (two digits)
corresponding to the handset from which the staircase lights are controlled.

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Example of Configuration
Configuration radio interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB
A
PL1
M1
PL2
M2
SPE
Entrance panel 22
Entrance panel 21
Radio control
HA/HB/L4572SB
1
13
3
4
2
4
2
If the PL2 and M2 positions have not be configured, the right side keys (2 and 4) are
disabled.
The only exceptions are as follows:
- M1=1, M2=0, PL2=0: quadruple door lock release.
PL1
M1
PL2
M2
SPE
1
Entrance panel 15
Entrance panel 13
Radio control HA/

HB/L4572SB
3
1
4
2
Entrance panel 16
Entrance panel 14
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the
procedure below:
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming conditon
on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
confirming the cancellation.
re-programmed.
To cancel all programmings from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press
the programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
BT00098-b-UK
Video door entry system programming

3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum
of 128.
Staircase lights26
A and PL1 are the address (two digits) of the entrance panel for which the door
lock is to be controlled: Key 3 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1), key
4 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1)+1, key 1 that of entrance panel
(A/PL1)+2, and key 2 that of entrance panel (A/PL1)+3. The address of the entrance
panel specified in A/PL1 must be lower or equal to 95.
Radio interface configuration - HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB

A
Staircase lights26
MY HOME 825
HD4576 - HC4576 - HS4576

L4576N - N4576N - NT4576N
Radio transmitting interface

Description
The interface lets you control one or more radio actuators from a control in the
Automation wire system, thus allowing you to create combined radio and wire systems.
Technical data
Absorption:
Radio frequency:
Range:

Size:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
40 mA
0 40 C
868 MHz
100 m in free field (metal and reinforced
concrete walls reduce the range)
4
Front view
Configuration
The interface can be configured in physical expansion mode.
It is possible to install only one interface item HC/HS4576 or item L/N/NT4576N for each
system; it may be used on the same system of the receiving interface item HC/HS4575
and item L/N/NT4575N (only if it is configured in physical expansion mode M = 1.
The configurators in positions A and PL separate the wire system from the radio system;
all addresses lower than A and PL are reserved for the wire system. All addresses higher
than A and PL will be reserved to the radio part of the Automation system.
In the example below, the address of the receiving interface is A=6 PL=2; all control
messages having an actuator with address higher than 62 (63, 64, etc.) as their recipient
are radio-transmitted.
If there is a receiving interface, item HC/HS4575 and item L/N/NT4575N, in the
system configured with M=1, the latter should have an address next to the one of the
transmitting interface item HC/HS4576 and item L/N/NT4576N.
Example: A=6 PL=1 M=1 for the receiving interface and A=6 PL=2 M=1 for the
transmitting interface.
A
PL
M
3
Rear view
Legend
1. Programming/reset pushbutton
3. BUS
4. LED
A
PL
M
Transmitting interface
A =6
PL = 2
M =1
BUS
BT00101-b-UK
Wire system
WIRE SYSTEM
Available addresses
from 11 to 61
826 MY HOME
Radio system
RADIO SYSTEM
Available addresses
from 63 to 99
HD4653M2 - HC4653/2 - HS4653/2

HD4653M3 - HC4653/3 - HS4653/3
Soft touch control

Description
Two-module and three-module touch control. The difference between the who versions
is only mechanical, the configuration procedures and the operating modes are the same.
If the device is properly configured, it is possible to send controls for the automation
system and sound system and to manage the scenarios stored in the scenario module.
Technical data

27 Vdc
Max. Absorption:
18 mA
5 35 C
Size:

for item HC/HS4653/2
Size:
3 flush mounted modules for item HC/HS4653/3
Legend
Configuration
A
PL/PF
M
M2
SPE
INT
A
PL/PF
M
M2
SPE
INT
room
Light point/voice point
(sound system SPE=8)
mode
mode 2
(scenario selection SPE=6)
special
LED intensity adjustment
1. LED
2. Sensitive area
SPE
None
M
None
None
None
None
None
1
2
3
8
Audio and video door entry functions
Activation of scenarios managed by the scenario programmer MH200
None
1-8
ON
OFF
PUL
7
None 9
19
Se = 0 Follow-me mode (*)
If = 1 4 Address of the first source to activate
If=1 Door lock ON control; A/PL address (2 digits)
of the entrance panel from which the door lock
is controlled.
If=2 floor call control; A/PL address (2 digits) of
the handset to call
If=3 staircase light control; A/PL address (2 digits)
of the handset from which the lights are controlled
CEN
BT00065-b-UK
Possible function
For point-point controls, it executes the cyclical ON/OFF function for short approaching and load power
adjustment (dimmer actuators) for long approaching. As for the other controls, it executes only ON/OFF
Timed control. The device sets the actuator to OFF after a predetermined time (see table 1)
ON control
OFF control
Cyclic ON/OFF without adjustment
ON control with flash. Flashing time (see table 2)
Selects the fixed adjustment level of the dimmer ( see table 3)
Sound system function
NOTE (*): the Follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one in the
current room.
MY HOME 827
HD4653M2 - HC4653/2 - HS4653/2

HD4653M3 - HC4653/3 - HS4653/3
Table 1
SPE = none
Table 2
SPE = 2
Table 3
SPE = 3
Time
Time
% power on the load
1 min.
None
0.5 sec.
10 %
2 sec. (SPE=7)
1 sec.
20 %
2 min.
1.5 sec.
30 %
10 min. (SPE=7)
2 sec.
40 %
3 min.
2.5 sec.
50 %
4 min.
3 sec
60 %
5 min.
3.5 sec.
70 %
15 min.
4 sec.
80 %
30 sec.
4.5 sec.
90 %
0.5 sec.
5 sec.
Operating modes for scenario management

By connecting configurator 6 in the SPE socket, the touch Control can call, program and
cancel any of the 16 scenarios contained in a Scenario Module item F420.
Table 4
A - PL
M2
Scenario number
...
...
...
16
Programming a scenario
1) the Scenario Module must be enabled in order to execute the programming process;
2) put your hand near the detector zone of the control (the LEDs will switch on at their
maximum intensity) and keep it in position. The intensity of the LEDs will decrease
to their lowest level after 3 seconds; now move your hand away from the control;
3) the LEDs will begin to flash with a very low frequency, hence indicating the
activation of the programming mode;
4) set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators;
5) put your hand briefly near the control to exit the programming mode; the LEDs will
stop flashing and will return to their lowest level of intensity.
BT00065-b-UK
Selecting the intensity of the LEDs (INT configurator)

Connect the configurators in the INT socket to choose different LEDs brightness levels,
according to the installation requirements. Specifically:
INT = none
when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are lit at 30%, with load
on (only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 60%
INT = 1
when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are lit at 45%, with load on
(only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 70%
INT = OFF
when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are unlit, with load on
(only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 30%
828 MY HOME
The scenario number can be selected using configurators 1-9 in positions M and M2, as
in the following table. The address of the Scenario Module to control must be indicated
in positions A and PL.
Address (2 digits) of the Scenario Module to be controlled
Cancelling a scenario
1) The Scenario Module must be enabled in order to execute the programming process;
2) put your hand near the detector zone of the control (the LEDs will switch on at their
maximum intensity) and keep it in position. The intensity of the LEDs will decrease
to their lowest level after 3 seconds; keep your hand in position for about another 5
seconds;
3) the LEDs will start flashing at a high frequency, thus indicating that the scenario has
been cancelled; they will then return to their lowest level of intensity.
NOTE: To cancel all scenarios of the module, use the reset key directly on the scenario
module.
HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N

N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
IR receiver
Description
The receiver enables adding or replacing the manual control with an infrared remote
control item 3529. It is possible to associate to the remote control pushbuttons controls
intended for 1-relay actuators for single loads and 2-relay actuators for double loads
(rolling shutter motor etc.), manage scenarios, as well as sound system and video
door entry systems. In addition to the IR receiving lens, the front of the device shows a
programming pushbutton and a notification LED, to confirm that the IR signal sent by
the remote control has been received, and notification of the programming procedure.
2
Front view
A
PL1/PF1
PL2/PF2
PL3/PF3
PL4/PF4
M
6
5
4
Rear view
3529
Technical data
Legend

27 Vdc
Absorption:
8.5 mA
5 35 C
Size:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Receiving lens
Channel selection
BUS
Two-way switch, to enable programming
Operating modes
Room number receiving the control
LED
Configuration
The IR receiver can be set up for 5 different operating modes depending on the
configuration of positions A, A, PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4 and M:
M
Possible function
A - remote control
14
Repeating of 4 generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) with the 4 remote control keys. The desired control are saved in the receiver
during installation by connecting the configurators in the A, PL1-PL4 and M position. The modification of the preset functions will
require the reconfiguration of the IR receiver.
B - advanced scenarios
CEN
Activation of scenarios managed by the scenario programmer item MH200
C - remote self-learning
none
Repeating of generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) with the remote control keys. In this case the receiver saves the controls by
performing a self-learning procedure. The customer can change the succession and the controls saved to be recalled with the
remote control at any time.
D - scenario module control
Management with the remote control of a maximum of 16 recorded scenarios in the scenario module item F420.
E - Sound system
Management using the remote control of the amplifier to be controlled.
BT00071-b-UK
Mode
MY HOME 829
HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N

N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
1) Mode A (remote control) M = 1 4
This mode lets the user associate generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) intended for
single loads or double loads to the remote control keys.
The correspondence between the remote control keys and the loads controlled is
determined in the installation phase by the configuration of positions A and PL 1 to PL
4 of the IR receiver, as shown in the table below. The following can be associated to the
remote control pushbuttons:
- Point-point controls, i.e. intended for single or double loads (rolling shutter motor)
whose address is specified by configurator 1 to 9 in positions PL 1 to PL 4. The various
operating modes are determined by the association of the configurators to the PL
positions.
- Controls intended for actuators for single and double loads belonging to the room
defined with configurator 1 to 9 in position A. In this case the operating modes are
defined by the configurators marked by the graphics of the function performed,
connected to positions PL 1 to 4.
Function
Type of control
Position A
Position PL1/PF1
Position PL2/PF2
Position PL3/PF3
Position PL4/PF4
Cyclical ON/OFF with

short pressure +
adjustment (dimmer)
Light point in the

room indicated in A
19
19
19
19
19
Cyclical ON/OFF
Room control 2)
19
AMB
AMB
AMB
AMB
Rolling shutter
UP/DOWN 1)
Light point n the room 1 9

indicated in A
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
Monostable rolling
shutter UP/DOWN1)
Room control 2)
19
19
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
UP/DOWN rolling
shutter to end of
stroke1)
Room control
19
M
M
M
2)
19
ON control
Room control 2)
19
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF control
Room control
19
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2)
BT00071-b-UK
1) The two PL positions must have the same configurator. The UP control is associated
to the first PL position and the DOWN control with the second PL position.
Example 1: if on the receiver configurator 7 is connected to positions PL2 and PL3, the
remote control operates double actuator No. 7 of the room indicated in A, raising the
rolling shutters with pushbutton 2 and lowering them with pushbutton 3.
830 MY HOME
2) The control is intended for devices belonging to the room indicated in A.

Example 2: if on the receiver confi gurator is connected to positions PL2 and
PL3, and configurator 2 is connected to position A,the remote control operates all the
actuators in room 2, raising the rolling shutters with pushbutton 2 and lowering them
with pushbutton 3.
HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N

N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
Up to 4 IR receivers can be installed in the room considered. They can manage maximum
16 separate controls.
The correspondence between the channels of a remote control and the respective IR
receiver is established by configuring position M of the IR receiver correctly.
2) Mode B (advanced scenarios) M=CEN

This mode uses the IR remote control item 3529 as scenario control to activate one or
more advanced scenarios saved in the Programmer item MH200.
The IR receiver must be also configured in positions A and PL using the numeric
configurators for the definition of the address in the system.
The association between one or more remote control pushbuttons (maximum 6) with
the scenarios created and saved in the Programmer item MH200 is performed when
creating the scenario itself using the TiMH200 application.
3) Mode C (remote self-learning) M=0

This mode enables to associate a single control to any key of the remote control.
Using only one receiver it is possible to associate up to 16 controls to a remote control.
Configure the receiver with address A=0 and PL=1-9 that cannot be used by actuators.
Controls that the receiver can learn:
- ON/OFF actuator (ON/OFFcyclical functioning with short pressure and adjustment
with long pressure)
- Timed ON
- Flashing
- UP/DOWN rolling shutter (UP/DOWN until end of stroke)
- Lock/Unlock actuator
- ON/OFF lights - auxiliary, (Cyclical ON/OFF functioning)
- Up/down rolling shutter auxiliary (UP/DOWN until end of stroke)
- Video door entry system (door lock and staircase lights)
- Sound system (management of the amplifier to be controlled)
Configurator in M
CH1
CH9
CH2
CH10
CH3
CH11
CH4
CH12
CH5
CH13
CH6
CH14
CH7
CH15
CH8
CH16
Detail of the TiMH200 program

to define pushbutton 3 of the
remote control for the activation
of the Night scenario.
Address A=1 and PL=3 of the
IR receiver is specified in the
Object field.
To cancel the programming of one of the remote control channels, follow the procedure
below:
1) press the programming pushbutton for at least 8 seconds: the LED will turn
on steadily after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off; release the
pushbutton within 4 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily;
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the channel you want to cancel on the remote
control: The LED will start flashing quickly for about 4 seconds, thus confirming the
cancellation;
3) from now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel the programming of all remote control channels simultaneously, press the
programming pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily after
3 seconds; it will turn off after another 5 seconds; after another 4 seconds, it will
start flashing quickly for about 4 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all
programming conditions.
NOTE: with the two-way switch in the closed padlock position programming and
cancelling the IR receiver are forbidden.
BT00071-b-UK
To associate a different control to each of the remote control channels, follow the
procedure below:
1) press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will turn
on steadily;
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the channel you want to program on the
remote control: the LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the
programming mode;
3) set up the control you want to associate to the remote control key using the controls
and/or corresponding actuator: the LED will turn on steadily;
4) you can now repeat 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated, in case you want to change it;
5) press the key to exit the programming mode: the LED will turn off.
Configurator in M
MY HOME 831
HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N

N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
4) Mode D (Scenario module control) M=6
This mode enables creating, deleting or changing the scenarios saved in the scenario
module, item F420, and to recall them using the remote control. The procedure lets you
store up to 16 scenarios using all 16 channels of the remote control.
To program, change or delete a scenario, the programming of Module item F420 must
be enabled, confirmed by the programming status LED turning green (press the lock/
unlock key for at least 0.5 seconds), and the two-way switch on the back of the IR
receiver must be in the padlock open position. Follow the procedure below:
1) press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will turn
on steadily; Release the pushbutton;
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to program on the
remote control: the LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the
programming mode;
3) set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators;
4) press the key to exit the programming mode: the LED will turn off;
5) repeat 1) and 4) for all the scenarios you want to program.
5) Mode E (Sound system) M=9

In the Sound system, the IR receiver can control up to 4 amplifiers.
The control is always in follow me (*) mode, and the functions that can be performed
are:
- Key A: With a short pressure, the ON control is sent. An extended pressure will
increase the volume
- Key B: With a short pressure, the OFF control is sent. An extended pressure will
decrease the volume
- Key C: cycling of the radio stations saved, or CD track change
- Key D: cycling of the sources

1) Press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 8 sec.: the LED will turn on
steadily after 3 seconds; it will turn off again after another 5 seconds; release the
key within 4 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily;
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to cancel on the remote
control; when the scenario module sends the deleting confirmation, the LED will
start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it will turn off;
3) repeat 1) and 2) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
The entire memory can only be reset from the scenario module. To prevent the possibility
of programming or deleting the scenarios from the IR receiver, move the two-way switch
on the back to the lock closed position.
NOTE: configure the device with address A=0 and PL=1-9 which cannot be used by
actuators. For example, if the scenario module is configured with A=0 and PL=3, the IR
receiver must be configured with A=0; PL=3 and M=6.
The association of the A-B-C-D keys to those of the remote control is performed as
shown in the table:
PF1
Key A
Key B
Key C
Key D
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
PF2
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
PF3
Ch 9
Ch 10
Ch 11
Ch 12
PF4
Ch 13
Ch 14
Ch 15
Ch 16
Where:
- PF1 = 0 9 address of the 1st amplifier to control
- PF2 = 0 9 address of the 2nd amplifier to control
- PF3 = 0 9 address of the 3rd amplifier to control
- PF4 = 0 9 address of the 4th amplifier to control
- A = 1 9 room receiving the control
NOTE (*): the follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after
switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one
in the current room.
BT00071-b-UK
832 MY HOME
AXOLUTE
NIGHTER and WHICE control
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3

HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
Description
The Nighter and Whice control is a control where the traditional pushbuttons are replaced
by capacitive sensors.The device can be used to perform the functions typical of a special
SCS control by simply moving a finger close to the surface. It is produced in the 3 and
4 module flush mounted version, 6 and 8 keys respectively. Each zone corresponding to
a key is marked at the centre by a light blue LED. When the user moves a finger close
to the zone, its intensity increases sensibly, and remains so until the finger is moved
away again. The brightness level of the LEDs can be changed using the appropriate
adjustment pushbutton.
The Nighter and Whice control can operate in 4 different ways: self-learning, scenarios,
swivelling, CEN.
- The self-learning mode (cyclic or non-cyclic) allows to associate to each key most of
the typical automation system, sound system, video door entry system (staircase light,
open-door, call to the floor, door lock, and cycling of cameras) functions, in addition to
auxiliary controls.
- The scenario mode can be used to recall, program and delete 6 scenarios of a scenario
module.
- The swivelling mode can be used to drive the 3 or 4 consecutive light points or rolling
shutters (or rooms or groups).
- The CEN mode enables using the control with the scenario programmer
item MH 200.
In order to clean the device, it is possible to temporarily disable the sensitive zones
by pressing two diagonally opposite zones at the same time. The LEDs will flash in
sequence. Normal operation is automatically reinstated after 10 seconds.
Front view
2
P
Technical data
HC/HS4657M3

Max absorption HD/HC/HS4657M3:
Max absorption HD/HC/HS4657M4:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
20 mA
25 mA
040 C
Installation
Rear view
Legenda
Nighter and Whice can be easily wall mounted using the following items, available to order:
- for the 3-module control: box, item 503E, and screw support, item H4703
- for the 4-module control: box, item 504E, and screw support, item H4704
1. LED intensity programming and adjustment pushbutton

3. BUS
Boxes:
503E
504E
BT00110-d-UK
Supports:
H4703
H4704
Control:
HC4657M3
HS4657M3
HC4657M4
HS4657M4
MY HOME 833
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3

HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
Configuration
The configuration of the Nighter & Whice control can be made in two different modes:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION: by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION: the control can be configured remotely, when no physical
configurators are available. (For the details refer to the Virtual Configuration).
Regardless of the mode, an A/PL address must always be assigned to the control.
room
PL
Light point
mode
INT
LED display mode
For the activation of the programming pushbutton and the LED adjustment, only use
the screwdriver provided
1) Self-learning mode M=0
Possible function
This operating mode can be used to associate one individual control to any key of the device. It is 0
possible to create, delete or change each control. The device may be configured using any A/PL
address already present in the system, or a unique address not used by other devices.
Programming the Keys

To associate a different control to each key, proceed as follows:
1) Press and release the key on the back, the LEDs come on in succession;
2) Lightly touch the key to be programmed within 20 seconds: he LED will start
flashing, confirming that the programming mode is active;
3) Set up the control you want to associate to the key using the controls and/or
corresponding actuator. The LEDs start flashing in succession
4) You can now repeat 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated, in case you want to change it;
5) Press the pushbutton to exit programming, or wait 20 seconds to exit programming
automatically.
Deleting the programming of the keys

2) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key for which programming
is to be cancelled; from now on, no controls will be activated when this key is
pressed, until the key is programmed again.
3) The corresponding LED flashes for 4 seconds in alternative to the others, after which
it will be possible to repeat point 2, to delete other programming sequences;
4) Short press the pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to automatically exit delete
programming.
NOTE: To cancel the programming of all keys at the same time press and release the
key on the back. The LEDs will come on in succession. Press the pushbutton on the back
again, and hold it down for 10 seconds: all LEDs will flash for about 4 second to confirm
that all programming has been deleted.
BT00110-d-UK
2) Non-cyclical self-learning mode M=6

Possible function
This mode is a variant of the self-learning mode (M=0), in which, however, the keys never 6
work cyclically. Therefore, if for example, the ON of an actuator or dimmer is learnt, the
couple of keys is configured automatically to switch on or increase the light intensity level for
the upper key, and switch off or decrease the level of intensity for the lower one.
If, on the other hand, a single function is learnt (e.g. recalling of a scenario), the other key
of the pair remains without function, or retains the previous function. The device may be
configured using any A/PL address already present in the system, or a unique address not
used by other devices.
834 MY HOME
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3

HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
3) Scenario mode M = 1 4
Possible function
This operating mode is useful if the system includes a scenario module, item F420. 1 4
The combination is ensured by assigning to both items the same address, identified by
A=0-9 and PL=1-9. The user may create, delete or change the scenarios saved in the
scenario module, and can recall them using the keys. With this procedure it is possible to
save up to 16 scenarios using two 8-key devices or three 6-key devices .
The following table shows the correspondence between the number of the scenario saved in the scenario module, and the keys of the control in the possible configurations:
3 module control (6 scenarios)
No. of the key
M=1
M=4
M=3
Key 1
Scenario 1
Scenario 7
Scenario 13
Key 2
Scenario 2
Scenario 8
Scenario 14
Key 3
Scenario 3
Scenario 9
Scenario 15
Key 4
Scenario 4
Scenario 10
Scenario 16
Key 5
Scenario 5
Scenario 11
Key 6
Scenario 6
Scenario 12
4 module control (8 scenarios)
No. of the key
M=1
M=2
Key 1
Scenario 1
Scenario 9
Key 2
Scenario 2
Scenario 10
Key 3
Scenario 3
Scenario 11
Key 4
Scenario 4
Scenario 12
Key 5
Scenario 5
Scenario 13
Key 6
Scenario 6
Scenario 14
Key 7
Scenario 7
Scenario 15
Key 8
Scenario 8
Scenario 16
Programming a scenario
For the programming of the scenario, the procedure is as follows:
1) The self-learning configuration of the scenario module, item F420, must be enabled
(to do so press the self-learning pushbutton, so that the corresponding LED turns
green; if the LED is red, self-learning is disabled);
2) Press and release the key on the back; the LEDs of the keys enabled and programmed
for the scenario function will flash (1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF);
ART.F420
3) Touch the key corresponding to the scenario to be programmed: the LED will start
flashing (upon receiving the update of the scenario module), confirming that
DEL
programming mode is active;
Scenario cancellation
Lock/unlock
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators;
pushbutton
programming
Scenarios/learning
5) Press the pushbutton to exit programming: the LEDs flash in succession, it is now
pushbutton
reset LED
possible to repeat points 2, 3 and 4 for all scenarios, including those keys that have
Programming
already been associated, if they need changing;
status LED
6) Press the pushbutton to exit programming, or wait 20 seconds to exit programming
automatically.
F420
BT00110-d-UK
Cancelling a scenario
1) The scenario module, item F420 must be in configuration mode with self-learning
enabled;
3) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key of the scenario to be
cancelled; ;
4) The LEDs for the deleted key of the device will flash for 4 seconds. It is now possible
to repeat the instruction at point 2 to delete other programs. .
5) Briefly press the pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to automatically exit delete
programming mode.
NOTE: the entire memory can only be reset from the scenario module: press and hold
down the DEL key for 10 seconds after enabling programming on the scenario module.
MY HOME 835
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3

HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
4) Swivelling modes M=0/I; ; M

These modes enable quick installation without the need for learning procedures or scenario modules, allowing control of 4 or 3 consecutive light points or rolling shutters. The A PL
address is the light point or rolling shutter controlled by the first pair of keys. The subsequent pairs control the subsequent light points or rolling shutters. If the configurators Amb or
Gr are connected to A, in the same way the 4 or 3 pairs of keys control consecutive rooms or groups, starting from the one indicated by the configurator in PL.
NOTE: the maximum value of PL is 6 for the 4 module version, and 7 for the 3 module version.
Possible function
ON/OFF control: On control using the upper key, Off control using the lower key.
For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are performed by a short pressure, while a
longer pressure will be used for the adjustments; for the other controls only the ON/OFF
functions are performed
Control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters): up-down control to end of stroke
Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters): up and down control for the time the
key is pressed
0/I
5) Scenario programmer mode, M=CEN

The association of a scenario configured in the scenario programmer MH200N and the corresponding Nighter & Whice control activation keys, is performed during the programming
of the scenario itself using the software TiMH200N.
Possible function
Always assign to the control a specific A/PL address on the system (not to be used by any other CEN
device installed on the BUS). The A=0, PL=0 configuration cannot be accepted.
This operating mode can only be used if the system includes a scenario programmer
(MH200N).
6) Selecting the intensity of the LEDs
Once the device has been configured, it is possible to adjust the LED intensity by pressing and holding down (t>2 sec.) the pushbutton on the back. The pushbutton operates on 3
intensity levels: starting from the default value (25%), the intensity changes every 2 seconds, showing the 3 levels that can be set, as per the following drawing. To select the desired
level simply release the pushbutton. Using the virtual configuration, the LED intensity may be adjusted to 10 different levels.
40%
DEFAULT
25%
BT00110-d-UK
0%
If the user has decided that the keys should lit up when pressed (status return), the brightness level will depend on the adjustment of the LEDs as shown below:
LED intensity level
25%
40%
0%
836 MY HOME
status return intensity

65%
70%
20%
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3

HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
7) LED display selection mode SET position
Using the SET configurator it is possible to select:
- if in the idle conditions the unused/not configured LEDs should stay off or on;
- if the LED should come on or not when the corresponding key is pressed (status return); for optimum status return effect, it is recommended that the LED brightness level is kept low.
- if the fade effect on the lighting pushbuttons should be enabled or disabled.
Configurator in the SET socket
Behaviour
LED on even if the key has not been configured

No status return
Fade effect enabled

No status return
Fade effect disabled
LED on only if the key has been configured (not configured -> LED off)
No status return
Fade effect enabled
No status return

Status return enabled
Fade effect enabled

Fade effect enabled
Once the device has been installed, wait two minutes for the self-calibration procedure to be
completed. During this period, controls may be automatically sent to the system.
BT00110-d-UK
MY HOME 837
Green Switch
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658
Description
Front view
This devices features a PIR and US (ultrasound) movement detector, and a brightness
sensor for automatic activation of various types of loads following the detection of a
movement, and a brightness level lower than the set level. The enabling/disabling of
the load can also be performed manually using the appropriate front pushbutton and/or
using an external BUS control device. It is possible to configure several operating modes;
for the detailed descriptions see page 4.
7
6
1
5
Technical data
Voltage:
Absorption:
Collegamento tra rilevatore e attuatore:
Sensor type:
27 V=
17 mA
BUS SCS connector
movement detector (PIR+US) with 180
detection angle and brightness sensor.
40 mm
60 g
IK04
IP20
5 sec. - 59 min. 59 sec
5 lux - 1275 lux
(- 5) - (+ 45)C
(- 20) - (+ 70)C
Flush mounted box depth:

Weight:
Shock resistance:
Penetration of solids and liquids:
Time delay:
Brightness:
Storage temperature:
4
Legend
1. PIR sensor
2. LEARN LED
3. US sensor
Dimensional data
4. ON-OFF key
Size:

A
5. LEARN key
6. Movement detector sensor (under the lens)
7. Infrared transmitter (under the lens)

8. Light sensor
45
45
51
Wiring diagram
BT00473-c-UK
BUS/SCS
838 MY HOME
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658

Installation
Detector position
PIR
US
Position the detector so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
present in the room.
1m
2.5 m
2.5 m
Configuration
Detection parameters:
Sensor parameters
Preset value
Adjustable parameters
Configuration tools
BMSO4001
Time delay
Detection
mode
Mode
Sensitivity
Alarm
3,5,10,15,20 min
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s
PIR (molto alta) / US (alta) Low, medium, high, very high
BMSO4003
Available in
Distributed
Central
mode
mode
15 mn
Auto
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Walkthrough
Active
Activate/Deactivate
Eco
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Iniziale
PIR and US
PIR and/or US, PIR, US
Maintenance
PIR or US
PIR and/or US, PIR, US
Retrigger
PIR or US
PIR and/or US, PIR, US, Deactivate
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Sensitivity: detection interval setting.

Mode:
Auto:
Automatic switch on:
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient..
Automatic switch off:
- if no movement is detected, at the expiry of the time delay set;
- or if the level of natural light is sufficient (set brightness threshold).
Another detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient
Walkthrough:
- If a movement is detected for a period of time of less than 20, the sensor will
switch the load off after 3 minutes;
- Otherwise the load will be switched off after the set time delay. .
Eco:
Manual switching on/automatic switching off:
After switching off, if the detector detects a movements within 30 seconds the
lights automatically come on; after 30 seconds the lights must be switched on
manually.
BT00473-c-UK
Time delay: the time delay after which the load is switched off, if no movement
is detected and the lighting level is sufficient
Available but
not separate
MY HOME 839
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658

Detection mode:
Initial detection: the lights are switched on upon detection, if the natural light is
below the brightness threshold.
Maintenance: the lights stay on if another movement is detected.
Retrigger: If the sensor detects a movement during the 30 s immediately after

switching off of the load, this is immediately switched on again. After the 30 s the
sensors returns to normal operation. After 30 seconds the device must be switched on
manually
Alarm: before the device is switched off a sound signal is emitted (1 minute, 30 seconds,
and 10 seconds before switching off),
Brightness parameters:
Sensor parameters
Preset value
Configuration tools
BMSO4001
300 lux
20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux

0 - 1275 lux
0 - 99995 lux
Brightness adjustment Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Light contribution
Automatic - 1275 lux
Brightness threshold
Advanced
mode
BMSO4003
Available in
Distributed
Central
mode
mode
Calibration
Automatic
Brightness threshold: value at which the lights come on if the brightness level
is below the set values, and switch off if above this threshold.
Advanced mode:
Calibration: For calibration to be performed, it is necessary to measure the
brightness level present using a lux metre, sending the value to the sensor using
a configuration remote control (BMSO4001).
Brightness adjustment: function for the switching off of the lights 10 minutes
after the brightness threshold set is reached. In addition to this time there is a
further time interval (safety threshold to avoid inappropriate switching off).
Light contribution: amount of supplementary light supplied by the lighting device
switched on.
Modification of the parameters using the configuration tools

BMSO4001 : advanced configuration tool
BMSO4003 : simplified configuration tool
When the detector receives an IR command from a configuration tool, it emits a sound
that confirms that the modification has been acquired.
Return to the factory settings:
1st pressure: press and release LEARN, the LED flashes slowly.
2nd pressure: press and hold down LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED starts flashing
quickly.
BT00473-c-UK
Performance
Height
6m 3m
(PIR/ (PIR/
US)
US)
1.2 m
4
Small movements
840 MY HOME
Large movements
5 m (PIR/US)
8 m (PIR/US)
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658

My Home configuration
If the sensor is installed in a My Home system, it can be configured in two ways:

- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the configurators to the relevant sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the system to the PC, using the kit Cat. no. 3503N, or the Web server. In this case the virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Note: when configuring the product using the PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION or the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, it will not be possible to use the configuration remote controls. Therefore,
the advanced functions (not settable using configurators) will not be accessible.
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Sensitivity of the movement sensor: S = 0 3
Mode: M = 0 4
Control timer: T = 0 9
Sensitivity of the light sensor: D = 0 5
Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
BT00473-c-UK
Possible function
Configurator mode
The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the
configured value, the system switches the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T
(automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator in S. For appropriate operation, the Sensitivity of
0
the light sensor must be configured using the configurator in D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disabled the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configurator
1
A = 1 and PL 1-9, configurators GEN, AMB (room), and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB,
2
and GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor
manages the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the
lighting threshold configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the configured value, the system
switches the specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T. During operation the sensor
3
keeps a consistent brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor
reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured
using the D configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold,
until the next activation.
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a consistent brightness
level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually
switched on, and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the brightness threshold configured (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights
are off, the sensor does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a consistent
brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the
4
brightness of the light unit controlled. When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on. but it waits
for the user to switch them on manually. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D
configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the
next activation.
Warning: to manage scenarios using the sensor signals, through the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.
MY HOME 841
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658

1) Duration of the light timer based on the configurator connected to T:
Configurator in T
No configurator
1
Light timer in minutes

15
0.5
1
2
5
10
15
20
30
40
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2) Sensitivity PIR movement detector based on the configurator

connected to S:
Configurator in S
No configurator
1
2
Sensitivity
Low
Medium
High
Very high
3) Sensitivity of the light sensor based on the configurator connected to D:

Configurator in D
No configurator
1
2
3
4
5
Sensitivity in lux
300
20
100
300
500
1000
The virtual configurator software can offer all the functions listed below:
- brightness/movement detector, local
- brightness sensor, local
-movement detector, local
- brightness/movement detector, central
- brightness sensor, central

- movement detector, central
- IR PLUS scenario control
Configuration of the light management function
If the sensor is used in the Lighting Management system, it can be configured with the following modes:
- Plug&Go, Push&Learn (see the specific technical manual)
- Project&Download.
Maintenance
Standards
BT00473-c-UK
Keep the lenses clean.

Clean the surface using a cloth.
Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene.
Maintenance using the following products: - hexane (En 60669-1)

- methylated spirit

- soapy water

- diluted ammonia

- bleach, diluted 10%

- glass detergents
Warning : an initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance
products.
842 MY HOME
For more detailed information on the functions, see the glossary at the beginning of the
Technical Sheets section.
Directive: EC
installation norms:
NFC 15-100
Product norms:
IEC 60669-2-1
Environmental standards:
- UE 2002/96/EC directive:
-UE 2002/95/EC directive:
- Standard:

RAEE (electric and electronic device waste).

RoHS (restriction on the use of dangerous
substances)
ERP (public buildings)
ERT (buildings used as workplaces)
IGH (very high buildings)
Light / movement sensor - PIR

Description
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

Front view
This devices features a PIR movement detector, and a brightness sensor for automatic
activation of various types of loads following the detection of a movement, and a
brightness level lower than the set level.
It is possible to configure several operating modes; for the detailed descriptions see
page 4.
Technical data
6
5
1
3
Voltage:
Max. Absorption:
Connection between detector and actuator:
Sensor type:
27 V=
15 mA
SCS BUS connector
PIR movement detector with 180
detection angle and brightness sensor.
40 mm
60 g
IK04
IP20
5 sec - 59 min. 59 sec
5 lux - 1275 lux
(-5) - (+45) C
(-20) - (+70) C
Flush mounted box depth:

Weight:
Shock resistance:
Penetration of solids and liquids:
Time delay:
Brightness:
Storage temperature:
Legend
1. PIR sensor
2. LEARN LED
3. LEARN key
4. Light sensor
5. Movement detector sensor (under the lens)
Dimensional data
Size:
6. Infrared transmitter (under the lens)

45 mm
51 mm
45 mm
Wiring diagram
BT00474-c-UK
BUS/SCS
MY HOME 843
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

Detection mode:
Initial detection: the lights are switched on upon detection, if the natural light is
below the brightness threshold.
Maintenance: the lights stay on if another movement is detected.
Retrigger: If the sensor detects a movement during the 30 s immediately after

switching off of the load, this is immediately switched on again. After the 30 s the
sensors returns to normal operation. After 30 seconds the device must be switched on
manually
Alarm: before the device is switched off a sound signal is emitted (1 minute, 30 seconds,
and 10 seconds before switching off),.
Brightness parameters:
Sensor parameters
Preset value
Configuration tools
BMSO4001
BMSO4003
300 lux
20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux

0 - 1275 lux
0 - 99995 lux
Brightness adjustment Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Light contribution
Automatic - 1275 lux
Brightness threshold
Advanced
mode
Available in
Distributed
Central mode
mode
Calibration
Automatic
Brightness threshold: value at which the lights come on if the brightness level
is below the set values, and switch off if above this threshold.
Advanced mode:
Calibration: For calibration to be performed, it is necessary to measure the
brightness level present using a lux metre, sending the value to the sensor using
a configuration remote control (BMSO4001).
Brightness adjustment: Automatic switch-off of the load 10 minutes after the

light level threshold is exceeded combined with an additional safety threshold (to
avoid unintended switch-off).
Light contribution: amount of supplementary light supplied by the lighting device
switched on.
Modification of the parameters using the configuration tools

BMSO4001 : advanced configuration tool
BMSO4003 : simplified configuration tool
When the detector receives an IR command from a configuration tool, it emits a sound
that confirms that the modification has been acquired.
Return to the factory settings:
1st pressure: press and release LEARN, the LED flashes slowly.
2nd pressure: press and hold down LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED starts flashing
quickly.
BT00474-c-UK
Performance
Height
6m
(PIR)
1.2 m
4
Small movements
844 MY HOME
Large movements
3m
(PIR)
5 m (PIR)
8 m (PIR)
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

My Home configuration
If the sensor is installed in a My Home system, it can be configured in two ways:

- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the configurators to the relevant sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the system to the PC, using the kit Cat. no. 3503N, or the Web server. In this case the virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Note: when configuring the product using the PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION or the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, it will not be possible to use the configuration remote controls. Therefore,
the advanced functions (not settable using configurators) will not be accessible.
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Local: A = 1 9
Sensitivity of the PIR movement sensor: S = 0 3
Light point PL = 1 9
Control timer: T = 0 9
Mode: M = 0 4
Sensitivity of the light sensor: D = 0 5

Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
BT00474-c-UK
Possible functions
Configurator mode
The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the
configured value, the system switches the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T
(automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator in S . For appropriate operation, the Sensitivity of
0
the light sensor must be configured using the configurator in D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disabled the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configurator
1
A = 1 and PL 1-9, configurators GEN, AMB (room), and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB,
2
and GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor
manages the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the
lighting threshold configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the configured value, the system
switches the specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T. During operation the sensor
3
keeps a consistent brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor
reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured
using the D configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. Quindi il nuovo valoreviene configurato come nuova soglia
dal sensore, fino allattivazione successiva
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a consistent brightness
level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually
switched on, and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the brightness threshold configured (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights
are off, the sensor does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a consistent
brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the
4
brightness of the light unit controlled. When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on. but it waits
for the user to switch them on manually. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D
configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the
next activation.
Warning: to manage scenarios using the sensor signals, through the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.
MY HOME 845
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

Installation
Detector position
Position the detector so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
present in the room.
1m
2.5 m
2.5 m
Configuration
Detection parameters:
Sensor parameters
Preset value
Configuration tools
BMSO4001
BMSO4003
Available in
Distributed
Central mode
mode
15 min
Sensitivity
PIR (very high)
3,5,10,15,20 min
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s
Low, medium, high, very high
Auto
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Walkthrough
Active
Activate/Deactivate
Eco
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Initial
PIR
Cannot be modified
Maintenance
PIR
Cannot be modified
Retrigger
PIR
PIR/Deactivate
Not active
Activate/Deactivate
Detection
system
Mode
Time delay
Alarm
BT00474-c-UK
Time delay: the time delay after which the load is switched off, if no movement
is detected and the lighting level is sufficient
Sensitivity: detection interval setting.
Modalit:
Auto:
Automatic switch on:
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient..
Automatic switch off:
- or if the level of natural light is sufficient (set brightness threshold).
Another detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient.
846 MY HOME
Available but
not separate
Walkthrough:
- If a movement is detected for a period of time of less than 20, the sensor will
switch the load off after 3 minutes;
- Otherwise the load will be switched off after the set time delay. .
Eco:
Manual switching on/automatic switching off:
After switching off, if the detector detects a movements within 30 seconds the
lights automatically come on; after 30 seconds the lights must be switched on
manually.
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

1) Duration of the light timer based on the configurator connected to T:
Configurator in T
No configurator
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Light timer in minutes

15
0.5
1
2
5
10
15
20
30
40
2) Sensitivity PIR and US movement detector based on the configurator

connected to S:
Configurator in S
No configurator
1
Sensitivity
Low
Medium
2
High
3
Very high
When using the configurators it is not possible to individually set the sensitivity of the
detection technology. Both will have the value set by the S configurator.
3) Sensitivity of the light sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
Configurator in D
No configurator
1
2
3
4
5
Sensitivity in lux
300
20
100
300
500
1000

Configuration of the light management function
If the sensor is used in the Lighting Management system, it can be configured with the following modes:
- Plug&Go, Push&Learn (see the specific technical manual)
For more detailed information on the functions, see the glossary at the beginning of the
- Project&Download.
Technical Sheets section.
maintenance
Warning: an initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance

products.
Directive: EC
installation norms:
NFC 15-100
Product norms:
IEC 60669-2-1
Environmental standards:
- UE 2002/96/EC directive:
- Direttiva UE 2002/95/CE:
- Standard:

BT00474-c-UK
Keep the lenses clean.

Clean the surface using a cloth.
Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene.
Maintenance using the following products:
- hexane (En 60669-1)
- methylated spirit
- soapy water
- diluted ammonia

- bleach, diluted 10%
- glass detergents
Standards
RAEE (electric and electronic device waste).

RoHS (restriction on the use of dangerous
substances).
ERP (public buildings)
ERT (buildings used as workplaces)
IGH (very high buildings)
MY HOME 847
HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680

L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Scenario control
Description
The Scenario Control is a device that does not directly manage the scenarios by storing
them inside. It Basically acts as a control to activate, create and change 4 scenarios
stored in the Scenario Module item F420 for the MY HOME system, or in Lighting
Management devices, provided that this has been enabled for change using the
programming block/unblock key.
configuration procedures (Project&Download).
Technical data

27 Vdc
Absorption:
9 mA
Dimensional data

Legend
1. Key 1
2. Key 2
3. Key 3
4. Key 4
BT00288-a-UK
848 MY HOME
Pausa
Riunione
Conferenza
Proiezione
4
HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680

L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Positions A and PL of the scenario control must correspond to those in the scenario module
item F420. The association of each key of the control to one of the scenarios stored by the
module is made by configuring socket M. It is possible to configure positions N and DEL to
set the number of the scenario to be activated with a delay (from 15s to 15m).
Correspondence between the 4 keys of the scenario control and the number of scenarios stored in the module item F420:
Configurator M
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Scenario 5
Scenario 6
Scenario 7
Scenario 8
Scenario 9
Scenario 10
Scenario 11
Scenario 12
Scenario 13
Scenario 14
Scenario 15
Scenario 16
Depending on the configurators connected to position N, it is possible to set a delay to be

associated to one or all scenarios before actuation is performed.
The configurator in the DEL position determines the delay in activating the scenario.
Configurator N
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Configurator DEL
Delay
None
None
None
None
None
Delay ON
None
None
None
1 min.
None
Delay ON
None
None
2 min.
None
None
Delay ON
None
3 min.
None
None
None
Delay ON
4 min.
Delay ON
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
15 min.
30 min.
Delay ON
Delay ON
Delay ON
BT00288-a-UK
MY HOME 849
HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680

L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Scenario programmer


1) the scenario module must be enabled for programming.
2) press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 10 seconds: the
corresponding LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that
the scenario has been cancelled. . If the LED does not flash, it means that the control
has failed.
To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for
10 seconds, the yellow reset scenarios LED flashes quickly.
3) confirm the scenario by briefly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode;
NOTES:
Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the
lock/unlock pushbutton, of the senario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the
corresponding LED becomes red.
Controls to the MH200N programmer:
by configuring M = CEN, N = 0 and DEL =0, the pressure of a key sends to a MH200N a
control with A/PL address and pushbutton number the same as the key pressed.
below:
following ways:
- Project&Download,
below:
chapter.
BT00288-a-UK
850 MY HOME
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
Local display
Description
Local Display is a device that gives the possibility of 4 home automation functions by
means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 1.2 OLED display with touch screen
technology.
It can be used to manage the temperature control, sound system, energy management,
and scenario functions.
The back of Local Display has a USB socket, which can be used to connect the device
to a PC, to update the configuration, the set of characters, and the icon, as well as the
firmware.
Front view
Technical data
- Power supply from BUS:
- Stand-by Absorption:

- Operating absorption:

- Size:
18 27 Vdc
max 10 mA @ 27 Vdc
max 15 mA @ 18 Vdc
max 50 mA @ 27 Vdc
max 70 mA @ 18 Vdc
5 35 C
Configuration
Local Display may be configured in two ways:
- physical configuration, by connecting the configurators to the appropriate sockets.
This mode gives the possibility of configuring with basic parameters only 1
function to manage, among the ones listed below. For the configuration of the
advanced parameters use the TiLocalDisplay software.
- from the PC, using the dedicated TiLocalDisplay software. This mode gives the
possibility of configuring all the parameters, for the management of 1 to 4
functions listed below.
Funzioni gestibili
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Scenario control
Temperature control with external probe 3457
Temperature control with probe HD/HC/HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693.
Sound system
Consumption display
Load management
Advances scenarios (with MH200N programmer installed in the system), to be
configured using the software only
Rear view
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
OLED technology Touch Screen

Configurator socket
BUS clamp
Clamp for the connection of the external temperature probe
USB connector
BT00517-a-UK
MY HOME 851
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
Installation
Main functions that can be set using the Tilocal Display software
Local Display is installed using a traditional procedure, using a box, support, and
AXOLUTE or LIVINGLIGHT cover plate; the device is not fitted with a temperature probe.
Therefore, it will not be necessary to comply with the probe installation requirements.
The recommended installation height is 150 - 160 cm.
Local Display physical configuration
- Scenario control mode - FUN = 1
Main possible functions using the software:

- selection of the operating mode to set for the device, temperature control, scenarios,
sound system, load management, consumption display.
- configuration of the settings of the probe and of its parameters;
- definition of the type of temperature central unit;
- parameters for the measurement of energy production, or consumption costs;
- configuration of the general device parameters;
- icon style definition.
Thanks to this mode, it will be possible to manage and change 4 different associated
scenarios of the F420 scenario module, and activate them by pressing one of the 4 icons
shown on the display.
A
Room
0 9, room of the scenario module

item
PL
Light point
1 9, light point of the scenario

module item F420
MOD
Mode
1 4, scenario number (*)
FUN
Function
(*) Correspondence among the 4 icons and the numbers of the scenarios that can be
saved in the F420 module
Configurator MOD
Icon 1
Icon 2
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 5
Scenario 6
Scenario 9
Scenario 10
Scenario 13
Scenario 14
Configurator MOD
Icon 3
Icon 4
Scenario 3
Scenario 4
Scenario 7
Scenario 8
Scenario 11
Scenario 12
Scenario 15
Scenario 16
BT00517-a-UK
Scenario programmer
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3
seconds. The screen shows the name and icon of the selected scenario and
the programming bar, to indicate that the learning procedure has started
If the device does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning
procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted;
3) confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the display
4) to change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
852 MY HOME
scenario 1
scenario 3
1 2
3 4
scenario 2
scenario 4
NOTE: Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the
lock/unlock pushbutton, of the senario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the
corresponding LED becomes red.
1) the scenario module must be enabled for programming.
2) press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 7 seconds;
The display will confirm that the scenario has been deleted and return to the main
screen.
To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module
pressed for 10 seconds, the yellow reset scenarios LED flashes quickly.
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
Sound system control mode - FUN = 2
With this mode, for the associated amplifier the user can control the switching ON or OFF,
the volume, the cycling through the sources, and their management (where allowed).
Information on the currently active source is also displayed.
In this mode the parameters that can be configured are the local address of the display (which
must coincide with the A/Pf address, and the M1 mode of the associated amplifier), and the
name of the sources that can be controlled.
Room
0 9, amplifier room
PF
Loudspeaker
1 9, Amplifier loudspeaker
MOD
Mode
0 8, Source switching ON (*)
FUN
Function
ON
RDS
6
5
106.70
OFF
3
4
NOTA (*): If M=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching OFF the sources
(follow-me mode).
Functions
A quick pressure of keys 5 and 7 will respectively switch ON and OFF the associated
amplifier. If the associated amplifier is on, an extended pressure of keys 5 and 7 may be
used to adjust the volume, the intensity of which will be displayed by means of an icon
5. A short pressure of keys 2 and 4, will respectively cycle through the sources installed
in the system, and launch a control for the currently active source. If the associated
amplifier is off and no source is on, the screen
will not show any information. Press key 4 for 3 seconds to configure the alarm clock (see
the user manual for details).
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Indication of the amplifier status or radio frequency

Cycling of sources (radio/aux)
Active source indication
Change radio station
Associated amplifier OFF and volume decrease
Volume level indication
Associated amplifier ON and volume increase
BT00517-a-UK
MY HOME 853
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with external probe FUN = 3
Warning: the physical configuration can only be performed if the system includes a
99-zone temperature central unit.
An external temperature probe, item 3457, with the following characteristics, can be
connected on the back of Local Display:
- 10 K at 25 C BETA 3435
- max. length of the connection 10 metres
Local Display shows the temperature value measured by the external probe, the set
temperature value, and the local selector adjustment. The operations that may be
performed by user are:
- variation of the temperature set using the local selector,
- FAN-COIL speed management,
- operating mode management.
temperature
probe
BUS - SCS
ZA
Zone address
0 9, Local Display address
ZB
Zone address
1 9, Local Display address
MOD
Mode
0 8, Slave probe number
FUN
Function
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate
the number of slaves present.
For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Legend
1. Set temperature
2. Fan-Coil adjustment
3. Fan-Coil speed indication
4. Temperature variation indication
5. Fan-Coil operation indication
6. Change operating mode
7. Measured temperature
8. Decrease temperature
9. Operating mode indication
10. System status indication
11. Increase the temperature
10
25.5
26.3
BT00517-a-UK
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
+/-3 C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of
key 6 can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/
thermal protection, and automatic statuses respectively. Each mode of operation is
identifi ed by a diff erent icon. A short pressure of key 2 will force the speed the fan-coils,
cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.
+ 2
2
3
4
5
6
Functions
854 MY HOME
11
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with item HC4693,
HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693 probe - FUN = 4
Warning: physical configuration can only be used if a 99-zone temperature control
central unit is installed in the system
This mode is different from the previous one in the fact that the external probe is not
connected to Local Display. Being unable to autonomously establish the temperature,
it must be associated to at least one probe, items HC4693, HS4693, L4693, N4693, or
NT4693. The user is shown the temperature value measured by the associated probes,
the set temperature value, and the adjustment of the local selector.
The possible operations for the user are the adjustment of the set temperature using
the local selector, and the change of status of the probe. In this mode, the parameters
that can be configured are the local display address (which must coincide with the
ZA/ZB address of the associated probe), the type of control of the pump, the type of
mode, and the number of slave probes.
ZA
Zone address
0 9, probe address
ZB
Zone address
1 9, probe address
MOD
Mode
1 8, Slave probe number
FUN
Function
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate
the number of slaves present.
For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47) with Local Display and probe
item HC4693, HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693
Local
display
Slave
probe
Local Display
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4891)
Sonda Slave
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Socket
Configurator
Configurator
ZA
ZA
ZB
ZB
MOD
MOD
SLA
FUN
SLA
Functions
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
+/-3C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of
key 6 can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/
thermal protection, and automatic statuses respectively.
BT00517-a-UK
Each mode of operation is identified by a different icon. A short pressure of key 2 will
force the speed the fan-coils, cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.
MY HOME 855
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Energy Management Mode consumption display FUN=5
It is possible to display the consumptions and the production of several energies of the
system, with monitoring of up to a maximum of ten lines.
Warning: with physical configuration, only the consumptions of one line can be
displayed.
For each line, the consumptions and the instantaneous, daily, monthly, and annual
economic evaluation are displayed.
It will be possible to set two maximum consumption values, with the device emitting
visual and sound notifications if these are exceeded. In this case, the displayed value will
be green when below both limits, yellow when one has been exceeded, and red when
both have been exceeded.
ZA
Line address
09
ZB
Line address
19
MOD
Type
0 = ELECTRICITY
1 = WATER
2 = GAS
3 = DHW
4 = HEATING/COOLING
FUN
Function
Functions
Once the device has been configured, it will be possible to scroll through the various
lines using icon 4. For each measurement interface, by pressing briefly icon 3 it will then
be possible to display the consumptions or the economic evaluation.
Press and hold down icon 3 to access a submenu where it will be possible to change the
basic value of the economic evaluation.
Consumption and economic evaluations are themselves split into: instantaneous, daily
(D), monthly (M), annual (Y). It is possible to scroll through these settings using icon 1.
Press and release icon 2 to access a submenu that can be used to set the time, the date,
the threshold levels (if enabled), and the possibility of enabling or disabling the beep
emitted when the threshold is exceeded.
m3
Kw
D/M/Y
Total
115.4
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
BT00517-a-UK
kwh
Legend
856 MY HOME
selection of display times

setting of the functions (time, date, max. power, etc.)
economic display of the consumptions
selection of the lines to display
HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891

L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- LOAD MANAGEMENT mode
This mode, only available if Local Display is configured using the software, gives the
possibility of displaying loads, with their priority levels, and force their activation. The
device can manage up to 20 loads; if these are connected to actuators with current
sensor it will be possible to display other load information, like the instantaneous power
consumption.
When the central unit for load management intervenes on a load, the device (if enabled
during the configuration) notifies the event with an indication on the display and an
audible notification.
Oven
3
Functions
After the configuration of the device it will be possible to select the various loads using
icon 1.
Icon 4 is disabled until the moment the central unit disables the load; when this
happens, the icon becomes active, and can be selected to force the activation of the load.
In this condition, icon 3, used to intervene on the status of the load, is disabled.
However, if icon 4 is disabled, it will be possible to select icon 3 to pre-force the load,
and avoid disconnection in case of intervention of the central unit when consumptions
are exceeded.
If the loads are connected to actuators with current sensor, use icon 2 to access a
submenu that can be used to display the instantaneous power consumption, as well as
information form the line total consumption meters. While in this submenu, you can use
the RESET icon to reset the meters. Press key 2 for 3 seconds to access the menu used for
setting the time, the date, and the sound notification (beep).
ON
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
selection of the load to control

display of consumption data and device setup
activation/deactivation of the load
forced activation of the load disconnected by the energy management central unit,
due to consumptions being exceeded.
- Advanced CEN SCENARIO mode

For systems with MH200N scenario programmers, Local Display can be used to enable 1
of the 4 scenarios displayed. This is done using the associated icons.
This function is only available if Local Display has been configured using the software.
1
1 2
3 4
1. scenario indication icon
BT00517-a-UK
Legend
MY HOME 857
BUS cable
Technical data
Description
The grey BUS/SCS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation
of the Automation, Temperature Control and Burglar Alarm systems. This cable is used
for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to all system
devices.
The cable consists of a grey external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.35 mm2, one blue and one white.
The cable is sold in 2 different type of coils:
- 100 m coil, item L4669
- 500 m coil, item L4669/500
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all
the devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and ducts as the power
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac).
WARNING
Although the construction of the grey cable ensures 300/500 V category electric
insulation, correct system operation is not guaranteed when installed together with
the power cables in the following cases:
- industrial environments,
In residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power
supply to:
- lift,
- inverters,
- pumps,
- motors and controlled motors,
- metal iodines lamps.
The grey BUS/SCS cable is not suitable for underground installation.
BT00289-a-UK
858 MY HOME
L4669 - L4669/500
Insulation voltage:
Can be buried:
Reference standards:
300/500 V
NO
It complies with the tests required by the
following regulations: EN60811, EN50289,
EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,EN50395,
EN50396 as described inside the IMQ CPT 062
document
External sheath colour:
grey (RAL 7001)
External sheath diameter:
5.5 +/- 0.1 mm
External sheath thickness:
0.8 mm
External sheath material:
PVC (RZ)
Number of internal conductors:
2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with
sheath
Colour of internal conductors:
white and blue
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2)
Conductor material:
red electrolytic copper
Conductor section:
0.35 mmq (12 x 0.20 mmq)
15 - 70 C
Maximum short circuit temperature: 150 C
Coil length:
100 m or 500 m
Halogen free BUS cable

Description
This white BUS-SCS cable has been purposely designed and built for the installation of
Automation and Temperature control systems in rooms with high risk of fire.
Produced without halogens, the cable will burn without releasing toxic substances or
heavy, dense smoke, significantly increasing the safety level.
This cable, consisting of an external sheath and two internal twisted conductors, is
used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to all system
devices.
The cable has 450/750 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all
the devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and ducts as the power
WARNING
Although the construction of the white cable ensures 450/750 V category electric
insulation, correct system operation is not guaranteed when installed together with
the power cables in the following cases:
- industrial environments,
In residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power
supply to:
- lift,
- inverters,
- pumps,
- motors and controlled motors,
- metal iodines lamps.
L4669HF
Technical data
Insulation voltage:
450/750 V
Can be buried:
YES inside appropriate protective conduits
white (RAL 9010)
5.2 +/- 0.1 mm
0.8 mm
LDFRPE Thermoplastic quality M1,

hardness 95 A Shore
2 unshielded twisted flexible

conductors with sheath
brown and brown/white
Sheath material of internal conductors: LDPE polyethylene
Conductor material:
Conductor section:
0.52 mmq (7 x 0.308 mm)
(-15) (+70) C
Maximum short circuit temperature:
150 C
Coil length:
100m
It complies with the tests required by the following regulations: UL13, UL1581,
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,EN50395, EN50396 as described
inside the IMQ CPT 062 document
The cable may be installed underground (inside appropriate protective conduits)

Marks:
BT00522-a-UK
MY HOME 859
860 MY HOME Technical sheets Burglar alarm
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Burglar alarm
Technical sheets Burglar alarm MY HOME 861
Radio IR detector
3440
Description
This device, sensitive to the movement of warm bodies, is suitable for the protection of
interiors. The configuration can be changed to adjust the tripping sensitivity and set
the system to perform typical Automation functions, such as, for example, the delayed
switching on of lights, when the person crosses the protected area.
The sensor is powered by a 3.6V AA battery and is self protected against opening. Its free
field range is 100 m.
After some detections, these sensors automatically deactivate for 3 minutes, to prevent the
intruder to guess the sensor covering area. It also permits to save energy, thus extending
the life of the battery.
Technical data
- Power supply:
- Minimum battery duration:
- Radio frequency:
- Range:

- Modulation:
3.6 V lithium battery - type 1/2 AA

5 - 40C (indoor use)
3 years
868.35 MHz
100 metres free field
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage)
FSK
CONFORMITY DECLARATION
Item 3440 meets the essential requirements of directive 1999/5/CE, as it complies with
the following standards:
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3.
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007
Dimensional data
Front view
Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
2 - LED: Two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
exhausted.
Covering range
105
12
10
BT00055-b-UK
8
6
4
2
Mt
105
65
45
2,00
10
11
12
3440
Configuration
M A Configurator
Z N O U
D X socket
Infrared radio detectors require assigning of the zone they belong to, of the progressive
sensor number within the zone, setting of the detection mode and the allocation of an
auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector.
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to
a maximum of 8 zones.
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the detector inside the appropriate
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 zones.
MOD
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode.
It can be used, for EXAMPLE, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
disturbance (window or radiator), and its position cannot be changed.
Configurator
Mode
1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity)
2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2
1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity) delayed2
2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2
3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2
The device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified

channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed
NOTE:
1) Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations
(radiators etc.).
2) Feature available on central units produced starting from week 08W06.
NOTE: When the system is armed, the detector generates a normal burglary alarm.
AUTOMATION Timed control mode:
Passive IR detectors can generate and send an ON timed control directly to one or more
actuators of the automation system.
ON timed control
For this mode, configure in the Z and N positions of the detector the addresses A and PL
of the actuator to control respectively.
To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
The switching ON period is set by connecting numerical configurators 1 to 9 to the AUX
position as shown in the following table:
AUX
Time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
AUTOMATION mode GENERIC CONTROL USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS

In this case, the control intended for the actuator is managed by a control device, item
H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2, which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M
position, activates the actuator with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item
H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position
and specifying, with numeric configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the
auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally set the auxiliary channel, also the
AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
Pairing IR radio sensors
1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red
LED comes on.
3. Press the sensor tamper contact twice.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio
receiver will go off.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means
that the device memory is full.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2.
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
Cancelling the IR radio sensors
2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
to the radio receiver.
4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly.
If the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
off, cancellation has been completed.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit maintenance mode.
BT00055-b-UK
AUX
This configurator activates the prealarm function and assigns an auxiliary channel (AUX).
To enable and use the AUX channels, refer to the description for wired IR detectors.
Tamper/learning
Radio glass-breaking detector
3442
Description
This sensor protects doors and windows and generates an alarm signal in case of unwanted
opening. The device consists of two elements:
- a magnet, to be installed on the window /door, with corresponding bracket/spacer;
- a battery powered radio transmitter with NC contact to be installed on the window/door
frame.
The alarm is generated when, by opening the door or the window, the magnet is moved away
from the corresponding radio transmitter. Up to 3 NC additional contacts can be connected to
the device, protecting 3 more units (doors/windows).
Magnet
Radio transmitter
Technical data
1
- Power supply:
- Operating temperature: +5 +40C (indoor use)
- Minimum battery duration: 3 years
- Radio frequency:
868.35 MHz
- Range:

- Modulation:
FSK
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3
2
6
Dimensional data
3
120
25
32
Radio transmitter
30
4
Transmitter internal view
37
Magnet
12
45
BT00052-b-UK
Legend
1 - Additional contact line clamp;
2 - Configurator socket;
3 - Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
5 - Battery housing;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
exhausted.
3442
Configuration
The device requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive number of the
sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the detection mode, as well as the
possible allocation of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8
zones.
M A
Z N O U
D X
MOD
The configurator connected to this socket specify the detection mode associated to the
NC contact supplied and any other, max. 3, NC contacts connected to the internal clamp.
Configurator
Operating mode
Not delayed
Delayed(1)

channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed.
AUX
Prealarm function. With the system armed or disarmed, the

device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position. If the zone it belongs to is
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled.
Configurator
socket
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/
HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
The configurator in the AUX socket activates the auxiliary function of the corresponding
auxiliary channel. It therefore enables controlling auxiliary actuator devices, provided
that they have been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type HD/HC/ HS/L/N/NT4614
and AM5794 see the appropriate technical sheet.
BT00052-b-UK
3442
Configuration
Pairing magnetic contacts
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the
red LED comes on.
3. Press the tamper contact twice.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the receiver
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED
flashes, it means that the device memory is full.
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper.
Cancelling magnetic contacts

2. Remove the power supply from the radio receiver.
the remote controls are cancelled.
After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
only the sensors are cancelled.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit maintenance
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
In addition to the standard NC magnetic contact, the sensor can also control the opening
of other optional NC contacts (max. of 3) connected to an appropriate clamp of the
transmitting unit, as shown in the following diagram.
Tamper line *
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the corresponding magnetic contact, or
any additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment
the device starts operation.
T
C
-
N.C.
BT00052-b-UK
Balance resistance
68K
Note (*): short circuit contacts and T if no tamper line is installed
Radio glass-breaking detector
3444
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the sensor detects the vibrations cause by
the breaking of door or window glass. It consists of two elements:
- a vibration sensor, to be installed on the glass of the door or window to protect;
- a battery powered radio transmitter, to be installed on the frame;
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
Technical data
- Power supply:
- Operating temperature: 5 40C (indoor use)
- Radio frequency:
868.35 MHz
- Range:

- Modulation:
FSK
Radio
transmitter
Sensor
1
Dimensional data
120
32
25
Radio transmitter
2
32
32
3
Sensor
4
Legend
BT00053-b-UK
1 - Sensor connection clamp;

3 - Additional Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is exhausted.
3444
Configuration
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z
N
zones.
M A
Z N O U
D X
Configurator
socket
MOD
The configurator connected to this socket specifies the detection mode associated to the
glass-breaking sensor supplied and the NC contact with additional magnet.
Configurator
Operating mode
Not delayed
Delayed(1)

AUX

HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
BT00053-b-UK
3444
Configuration
Pairing detectors
red LED comes on.
Cancelling detectors
After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
only the sensors are cancelled.
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
The sensor must be connected using the transmitting unit as shown in the figure.
Do not extend the probe cable.
Glass-breaking detector
1m
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the glass-breaking detector, or any
additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment the
device starts operation.
T
C
-
Tamper line (*)
T
C
BT00053-b-UK
To the glass-breaking detector
Note (*): short circuit contacts and T if no tamper line is installed
Radio rolling shutter

opening detector
3445
Description
This device is the radio version of the wired detector, item 3514. It generates an alarm if
anyone attempts to open a rolling shutter.
It consists of two elements:
- a coil guide type rope detector to be fitted to the rolling shutter;
- a battery powered radio transmitter to be installed inside the box of the rolling shutter
or on the frame of the window to be protected.
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
The alarm is generated when the rope of the detector changes length following an
attempt to open the rolling shutter.
Rope rolling shutter detector

Radio transmitter
Technical data
- Power supply:
- Operating temperature: 5 40C (indoor use)
- Radio frequency:
868.35 MHz
- Range:

- Modulation:
FSK
Dimensional data
15
100
120
90
25
32
77
93
Radio transmitter
BT00054-b-UK
Rope rolling shutter detector
17
3445
Configuration
1
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery

disconnected
Z
N
zones.
M A
Z N O U
D X
MOD
The configurator connected to this position, specifies the detection mode associated to
the rolling shutter sensor.
Configurator
Operating mode
Not delayed
Delayed(1)

AUX

HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
Configurator
socket
Legend
1 - Rope rolling shutter detector connection clamp;
3 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
exhausted.
BT00054-b-UK
3445
Configuration
Pairing detectors
red LED comes on.
Cancelling detectors
the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If
the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the rolling shutter detector must be
activated within 12 hours from the moment the device starts operation.
1,5m
+
C
-
Rope rolling
shutter detector
battery
BT00054-b-UK
Red Green Black

wire wire wire
NOTE: do not extend the cable of the detector.
Radio remote control for teleassistance
3448
Description
1
Radio device with three pushbuttons, for sending remote assistance requests.
Pressing the larger pushbutton a radio signal is sent, which is transferred on the BUS of
the Burglar-alarm system through the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
The two round pushbuttons are used to configure the device and for resetting (silencing)
the current alarm.
3
Technical data
- Power supply:
3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Operating temperature: 5 40C
- Radio frequency:
868.35 MHz
- Range:

- Modulation:
FSK
Dimensional data
2
Front view
Legend
48
60
13
1 - LED: when pressing one key:

it flashes twice if the battery is charged;
it flashes once if the battery is exhausted;
2 - Generates an alarm;
3 - Alarm reset (press for 5 seconds for learning to be performed on the receiver).
Configuration
Cancelling remote controls
mode.
BT00051-b-UK
Pairing remote controls

red LED comes on.
3. Press one of the round pushbuttons for 5 seconds.
7. Program the remote controls on the central unit.
3448
Battery replacement
3
4
BT00051-b-UK
Relay actuator
3479
Description
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free
contacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the
auxiliary channel (AUX).
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.).
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts. By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety
mode of the internal relay.
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces: 3841 and F483
4
5
Technical data
Legend

Max. absorption:
Contact output:
1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS

3. LED indicating activated relay.
4. Relay contact
5. Tamper line
27 Vdc
20 mA
24 V 1 A cos 0.4
5 40 C
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit.
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so
on for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
AUX and MOD
In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating
mode on the basis of the following table.
Configurators
AUX
MOD
none
none
Description
It activates by...
It resets by...
Repetition of the siren alarm
Siren activation
Silencing
none
System fault notification
Activators red LED notification
none
System status notification
Activation
BT00483-a-UK
Opertating mode
Deactivation
3479
Auxiliary operating mode
Configurators
MOD
AUX
none
3
1-9
none
1-9
4
5
6
Description
It activates by...
It resets by...
Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary

channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with
memory of any technical alarm.
Signalling with memory of the activation of the corresponding
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of
a specific technical alarm.
Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory
of a specific technical alarm.
As mode 3 but with relay normally not excited.
Any AUX device of the system
Pressure of the needle key on any technical

alarm interface with AUX configurator from 1
to 9
Technical alarm interface with

corresponding AUX channel
pressure of the needle key on the interface of the

alarm interface with AUX configurator from 1
to 9
Technical alarm interface with

pressure of the needle key on the interface of the
NOTES
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total
system safety.
EXAMPLE: Activation of the solenoid valve in case of gas leak

Relay actuator configuation:
N
AUX
MOD
active technical alarm
- The S key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this has
been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode 0 or 4 (technical alarm).
- In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes
with memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.
Technical alarm interface configuration
Value
1
1
6
N
AUX
MOD
Value
2
1
4
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS

Technical alarm
interface
BT00483-a-UK
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
Relay
actuator
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
to the gas detector
Solenoid valve
Gas detector
Contact interface
3480
Description
This interface is used to connect 2 independent contact lines that can be balanced by
means of a resistance, and which tripping can be delayed, as well as one tampering
protection line. It can be used to achieve centralisation of all interfaces inside junction
boxes. A LED on the interface confirms appropriate operation of the device during the
system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system
is armed. This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor
line (that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed)
requiring 12V V power supply.
2
3
4
5
Front view
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
- Max. absorption:
5 mA
Dimensional data
- Size: 2 Basic modules
Legend
1. BUS;
2. Configurator socket;
3. Line activated LED;
4. Contact line 2;
5. Contact line 1;
6. Tamper line;
7. Anti-tamper device.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
- C1 - C2
Z1
N1
MOD1
Z2
N2
MOD2
ART.F482
Z2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2.
T
C2 C1
N1
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the NC magnetic contact within the
zone determined in position Z1.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones.
MOD1 and MOD2

In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
The interface can operate in two modes:
- as interface for the management of alarm contacts, system connection
pushbutton, and auxiliary channel generation;
- as interface for the management of technical alarms.
BT00045-c-UK
N2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2 (zone Z2).
3480
Configuration
Managing alarms/system arming/auxiliary channel generation management
In this mode, two independent contact lines can be connected to the interface. The
corresponding addresses must be specified in positions Z1, N1, and Z2, N2.
The configurator in position MOD1 and MOD2 specifies the type of contact for the
generation of the alarm, as per the following table:
Configurator
none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUX
Sensor connected
NC contact
NC contact - balanced
NC contact - delayed (1)
NC contact delayed and balanced (1)
Contact NC and contact status forwarding
Contact NC balanced and contact status forwarding
Contact NC delayed and contact status forwarding
Contact NC delayed balanced and contact status forwarding
NO contact
NO contact for system arming from remote N.O. pushbutton (2)
NC contact forwarding of contact status (3)
1
9
Tamper line
N.C.
68 Kohm
P
N.O.
Alarm contacts mode: management of a balanced NC contact line with N.O.

system arming pushbutton
Notes:
(1) Follows the delay set on the central unit:
this function is only available with central units item 3486, 3485/B and item
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601. With central units item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must
be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set (see the central unit configuration).
(2) The system is activated when the pushbutton is pressed for a minimum period of 3
seconds.
(3) This operating mode does not generate an alarm signal, but a contact status signal,
useful for Automation and Temperature control applications (automatic switching
off of the heating system when a window is open).
Technical alarms management
In this mode, the interface can only manage one contact line connected to the C1
and clamp, to which the NC or NO contact for the generation of the technical alarm
is connected. A NO pushbutton for resetting the generated technical alarm, can be
connected to the - and C2 clamps of the second line. The Z and N address of the interface
must only be specified in the positions Z1 and N1.
8
3
Selection of the alarm contact:

Configurator
in MOD1 position
none
8
Type of contact
NC contact
NO contact
Water detector
(N.O. contact)
BT00045-c-UK
When a technical alarm with intermittent sound of the indoor siren is generated, it will
also be possible to generate an Auxiliary signal. The channel of the Auxiliary signal is
defined by the numeric value of configurator 1 to 9 entered in the position MOD2. If the
OFF configurator is entered in this position, no auxiliary channel is generated (only the
technical alarm with intermittent sound of the siren).
Alarm reset
Technical alarms mode: management of a water detection probe. If flooding occurs,

a sound alarm will be generated by an internal siren, and a signal will be sent to
auxiliary channel no. 3. To reset the alarm press the P pushbutton.
3480
Energy saving management with Temperature control
If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to optimise
energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible:
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and not
both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/or MOD2
sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign the address
from 1 to 99 to the device within the system.
The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to
the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control

system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
F422 interface.
The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer
to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
BUS
Tamper line
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Balance resistance
68 k 5% 1/4 W
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded
cable.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Balance resistance
68 k 5% 1/4 W
NOTE: It is recommended to install the

68 k 5% 1/4 W balancing resistance in
correspondence with the last line contact.
Unshielded
twisted cable
Used for managing a technical alarm

(*) The N.C. pushbutton can be replaced by a NO pushbutton. The type of
pushbutton activating the alarm is defined through the configuration of the MOD1
position of the device.
It is possible to also connect a water detection probe, as well as NC/NO contacts for
smoke or gas detectors. For the water detection probe use item 3482.
BUS
BT00045-c-UK
N.C. pushbutton (*)

N.O. pushbutton
Technical alarm activation
Alarm Reset
3480
Flooding alarm management
BUS
N. O. pushbutton
Tamper line
Alarm Reset
Probe item 3482
BT00045-c-UK
12 v contact interface
3480V12
Description
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor line (that
can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed) requiring
12 V power supply.
Produced in the basic modular version, the device can be used when centralizing all the
interfaces in junction boxes. A LED on the device confirms the appropriate operation
of the same during the system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm
system, when the system is armed.
2
7
Technical data

Max. absorption:

Output:
27 Vdc
5 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added
5 40 C
12 V Max 50 mA
4
5
Dimensional data
Size: 2 Basic modules
Configuration
Legend
The interface requires the allocation of the zone Z it belongs to, of the N progressive
number of the sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD contact line
protection mode.
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact
connected to line 1.
1. BUS;
3. Line activated LED;
4. 12 V power line;
5. C contact line;
6. Tamper line;
7. Device tamper protection against opening
N1
MOD
In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the line. it is possible
to create a balanced and unbalanced protection line, with the possibility of generating
the alarm with a delay, as for zone 1. For the details of the various operating modes, refer
to the table below.
N
MOD
BT00480-a-UK
3480V12
Configuration
Configurator
none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sensor connected
NC contact
NC contact - delayed *
NC contact - delayed * - balanced
NC contact and AUX event generation
Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation
Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation
Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors

Configurator
Sensor connected
Pulses (*)
Rolling shutter rope sensor delayed*
12 (approx 20 cm)
25 (approx 45 cm)
Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:

this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
(see central unit configuration).
Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.
If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible:
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected
to the temperature control BUS It autonomously and independently manages
the contact line. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD sockets.
Then configure the Z and N sockets, in order to assign the address from 1 to 99 to
the device within the system. The coupling between the interface contact line and
the temperature control zone must be performed using the TiThermo application.
For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
The interface must be configured in Z and N following the requirements and features of
the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must be connected to
the MOD position, corresponding to the management of NC contacts with generation
of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the actual coupling between the
interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using the
TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control
guide.
Wiring diagram
BT00480-a-UK
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30 metre

maximum length.
Sensor tamper
Balance resistance
100 k 5% 1/4 W
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line
3480V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX
TX
S1
13,8
13,8
PT0
PT0
GND
GND
PT1
PT1
ALL0
Reset
ALL1
LED
JP10
COM T COM C
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to one interface only.
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded cable.
BT00480-a-UK
3480V12
Installation
The maximum length of the interface connection line depends on the absorption of the connected loads, as for the following table
Siren
4072L
Siren
4072A
Power supply
E46ADCN
Power supply
E47ADCN
Interface
Interface
Absorption of the loads connected to the interfaces
Maximum distance
A
50 mA
100 mA
(2 interfaces with maximum load on the same line)
150 mA
200 mA
Note (*): this configuration requires the use of 2 sirens, item 4072L.
In case of extension of an existing system (for which it is not possible to know the exact
distances, and how many devices are connected to the BUS line the interface must be
connected to), it is necessary to perform the following test, to check that it is suitable
to install the interface:
BT00480-a-UK
1
2
3
4
5
Switch the system to maintenance mode

Connect the interface to the load to power
Measure the BUS voltage at the extremities of the interface
If the voltage exceeds 25 V, installation is possible
If the voltage is below 25 V, a dedicated cable must be connected to the interface.
175 (*)
175
150 (*)
3481
Description
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications,
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve.
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line
between the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system.
They are assigned by configuration of the device(s).
Related items
Relay actuator:
F481 and 3479
Technical data

Max. absorption:
27 Vdc
6 mA
5 40 C
4
5
Dimensional data

Configuration
Legend
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface),
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N

3. Line activated LED
4. External sensor connection clamp
5. Traditional external sensor connection clamp
6. Reset pushbutton connection
AUX and MOD

Activation from the technical alarm interface
Configurators
Description
MOD
none
none
Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact

Internal siren (MOD 0 or 2) sounds intermittently until one of the following events occurs:
a) there is no longer an alarm
b) pressure of S key on the 3 module flush mounted central unit, or deactivation from the central unit with display;
c) pin key on the device itself pressed.
none
Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact

Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none
Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact

BT00485-a-UK
AUX
3481
Configurators
Relay opertating mode (description)
AUX
MOD
1-9
none
Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel

a) there is no longer an alarm;
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel.
1-9
Anti-burglary automation with NC contact

It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
1-9
Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel

Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
1-9
Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)

It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
1-9
Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel

a) there is no longer an alarm;

Relay actuator configuration:
Value
Value
AUX
AUX
MOD
MOD
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS
Technical alarm
interface
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
BT00485-a-UK
Relay
actuator
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
To the gas detector
Solenoid valve
Gas detector
Advanced central unit

with telephone communicator
3485
Description
The central unit has the function of supervising the burglar-alarm system, enabling the
management of the zone sensors independent from one another.
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs.
Its fitted with built-in telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case
of alarm, or to check the status of the system using a fixed or mobile phone, when away
from home. Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement
devices, it is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the
intruder.
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this
service consult the installer).
Main functions
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator;
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display;
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad;
- independent management of each sensor;
- can be programmed by PC;
- detailed event memory and alarm only memory;
- customisation of alarm messages;
- phone book for sending alarms;
- connection with surveillance central unit using the Ademco Contact ID protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters;
- blocking for 1 minute the possibility of arming or disarming, or access to the navigation
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or
transponder);
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones;
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit
keypad;
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to
the surveillance central unit;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad.
Management of burglar-alarm functions
5
7
8
2
Front view
Legend
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
and the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
commands directly from the transponder keys.
3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
4 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by
means of telephone.
5 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
6 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations.
7 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
8 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages.
Telephone communicator
- Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home
automation system;
- if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone
numbers previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what
type of event has happened;
- it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to
the automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
- the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by
telephone;
- it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service
available, for example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to
download the history of events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units,
using the Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
BT00022-b-UK
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones:

- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9);
- zones from 1 to 8 are reserved for the sensors;
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.).
It performs the following functions:
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to
give the alarm;
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires;
- up to 16 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs;
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the
use of the key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band;
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system
has recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion
alarm);
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display.
3485
Legend
9
8
b
a
b
ART.3485
T1
3
4
OF F
ON
BUS
Rear view
2 - Tamper line (see note);
3 - T1 local tamper;
4 - Reset key;
5 - Serial connector for PC programming;
6 - Burglar alarm BUS;
7 - ON/OFF slide switch;
8 - Telephone line OUT;
9 - Telephone line IN.
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the
use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
55 (stand by) 90 mA
- Installation:
wall mounted
Dimensional data
Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, TiSecurity POLYX.
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products.
Software configuration
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent
modification, or save it as a backup copy.
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit.
BT00022-b-UK
Ademco Contact ID functionality

Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
- Anti-panic alarm
- Anti-burglary alarm
- General intrusion alarm
- Tamptest (device interconnection alarm)
- Device tampering alarm
- No power supply
- System battery faulty
- Activation / deactivation / cancellation*
- Sensor deactivation
- Periodical functionality test (routine check of the telephone line and the installation)
NOTE*: cancellation is the silencing of an alarm following the disarming of the system itself.
In this case the event is sent to the vigilance body, which can therefore check if its been
caused by a tampering attempt.
Relating to the technical alarms:

- Fire alarm (AUX=8)
- Gas leak alarm (AUX=1)
- Freezer alarm (AUX=2)
- Flooding alarm (AUX=3)
- Remote assistance alarm (AUX=9)
- Auxiliary device tampering (Z=9)
For every event, where required, the origin of the alarm is also forwarded, in terms of zone
and device.
3485
Wiring diagram
It is good practice to protect the system from lightning by using surge protective devices,
SPD, belonging to class II, as per the diagram shown.
In particular, to protect the burglar-alarm central unit from overvoltage from the
telephone line, the use of the appropriate PLT1 device is recommended, taking care to
connect the corresponding earth clamp with the earth reference of the SPD discharger
installed in the apartment distribution board (see diagram). The connection shall have as
low an impedance as possible, and will be performed using a conductor with minimum
section of 2.5 mm2, and maximum length of 30 metres.
Riser distribution board
Power meter
Apartment distribution board
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
system
S type earth
leakage
SPD1
SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
ART.3485
BT00022-b-UK
b
a
b
_
T1
OF F
ON
BUS
Advanced central unit with telephone communicator
Base central unit
3485B
Description
It is possible to save up to 4 activation scenarios and use them based on actual needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events, to generate separation
scenarios.
Main functions
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display;
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum);
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times;
- association of a user set name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
keypad;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad;
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay.
The central unit manages a total of 6 zones;
Performs the following functions:
give the alarm;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display;
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay:
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder.
BT00023-b-UK
5
3
2
Front view
Legend
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
directly from the transponder keys.
6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
50 mA
- Load of local relay contacts: 12/24 V 1 A
- Installation:
wall mounted
Dimensional data
3485B
Legend
1
b
a
b
2
ART.3485B
NC
T1
NA
4
OF F
2 - Local contact;
5 - Reset key;
6 - Firmware update serial connector;
9 - Relay for automation in case of alarm.
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for
the use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
ON
BUS
Rear view
Configuration
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity
Basic.
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions
published by BTicino.
Example
Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
- Detection of devices
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Select
Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
zone: 0
num.: 1
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
After pressing OK, the

following screen appears
Learning
ended
BT00023-b-UK
Press OK to start learning
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
unit)
v i sthe
u amanual
l i z z aof
z ithe
o ncentral
e?
invia
= OK
non invia = CLEAR

Predisporre
l impianto
Advanced central unit

with telephone communicator
3486
Description
1
management of the zone sensors independent from one another. It is possible to save up
to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs. Its fitted with built-in
telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case of alarm, or to check the
status of the system when away from home, using a fixed or mobile phone.
Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement devices, it
is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the intruder.
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this
service consult the installer).
Main functions
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator (on GSM and PSTN line);
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display;
- can be controlled by IR remote control, transponder and keypad;
- can be programmed by PC;
- customisation of alarm messages;
- phone book for sending alarms;
- connection with surveillance central unit using the Ademco Contact ID protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or
transponder);
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones;
keypad;
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to
the surveillance central unit;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad.
BT00021-b-UK

- Zone 0 is reserved for the acivators (max. 9);
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/auxiliaries (gas detector etc.);
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to give the
alarm;
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the use of the
key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band;
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system has
recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion alarm);
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display.
8
7
OK
CLEAR
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
Front view
3
6
9
Legend
1 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages and play voice messages in the
room by means of the telephone;
and the events which have occurred;
3 - IR receiver: receives the switching on and off commands sent by the burglar-alarm
system remote control;
commands directly from the transponder keys;
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols;
6 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by
means of telephone;
7 - CLEAR key: exit the current menu and the programming;
8 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations;
9 - GSM antenna with cable L = 1.5 metres: to be positioned upon verification of
GSM signal reception.
Telephone communicator
- Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home automation system:
- if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone numbers
previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what type of event has
happened;
- it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to the
automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
- the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by telephone;
- it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service available, for
example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to download the history of
events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units, using the
Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
3486
Legend
12
11
impianto
on off
1
2
3
4
10
5
6
7
Rear view

2 - Telephone line OUT;
3 - Telephone line IN;
4 - Reset key;
8 - MY HOME sound system BUS;
9 - SIM card housing;
10 - Serial connector for PC programming (with cable item 335919 or item 3559);
11 - Battery housing (item 3507/6);
12 - GSM antenna connector.
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the
use of the local tamper T1 (wall mounted installation on metal base); For installations inside
MULTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for the
tamper function; alternatively, short clamps -/T2. In this case the central unit will not be
protected from tampering.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
50 (stand by) 120 mA
- Installation:
wall mounted or Multibox switchboard
Dimensional data
Configuration
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity
GSM. For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the
products.
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent
modification, or save it as a backup copy.
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit.
Ademco Contact ID functionality

Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
NOTE*: cancellation is the silencing of an alarm following the disarming of the system itself.
In this case the event is sent to the vigilance body, which can therefore check if its been
caused by a tampering attempt.
Relating to the technical alarms:
- Fire alarm (AUX=8)
- Gas leak alarm (AUX=1)
- Freezer alarm (AUX=2)
- Flooding alarm (AUX=3)
- Remote assistance alarm (AUX=9)
- Auxiliary device tampering (Z=9)
For every event, where required, the origin of the alarm is also forwarded, in terms of zone
and device.
BT00021-b-UK
Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID

The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
- Anti-panic alarm
- Anti-burglary alarm
- General intrusion alarm
- Tamptest (device interconnection alarm)
- Device tampering alarm
- No power supply
- System battery faulty
- Activation / deactivation / cancellation*
- Sensor deactivation
- Periodical functionality test (routine check of the telephone line and the installation)
3486
Wiring diagram
It is good practice to protect the system from lightning by using surge protective devices,
SPD, belonging to class II, as per the diagram shown.
In particular, to protect the burglar-alarm central unit from overvoltage from the
telephone line, the use of the appropriate PLT1 device is recommended, taking care to
connect the corresponding earth clamp with the earth reference of the SPD discharger
installed in the apartment distribution board (see diagram). The connection shall have as
low an impedance as possible, and will be performed using a conductor with minimum
section of 2.5 mm2, and maximum length of 30 metres.
Riser distribution board
Power meter
Apartment distribution board
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
S type earth
leakage
to the electric
system
SPD1
SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
impianto
on off
BT00021-b-UK
Advanced central unit with telephone

communicator
Magnetic contacts
3510/M/PB - 3511 - 3512 - 3513
Description
Magnetic sensors are normally installed on the top side of windows or doors, opposite
to the hinges, so that even with small forced openings, the distance created between
the two components (magnet and reed contact) will be enough to cause an alarm. The
electromagnetic sensors included in the offer are of the NC contact and protection line
type.
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510 and item 3510M
These cylindrical sensors have been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation,
as shown in the figure, for doors and windows with small sections. Sensor item 3510
is suitable for wooden doors and windows; sensor item 3510M is made of brass, has
high mechanical resistance, and is suitable of all types of non ferromagnetic doors and
windows (wood, PVC, aluminium).
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510PB
These cylindrical sensors of large diameter (20 mm) have an enhanced magnet, and
have been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation in reinforced doors, doors,
and large entrance doors, of any material.
Sensor for exposed installation, item 3511
When Flush mounted installation is not possible, this type of sensor may be used. White
in colour, and very small in size, it is designed for exposed installation. It can be used
both on wood and plastic, but also on non ferrous metal doors and windows, such as
aluminium ones. This magnetic sensor has a NC contact and protection line.
Sensors for doors made of ferrous metal, item 3512 and 3513
Made of metal, and intended for installation on ferrous metal doors and windows. The
item 3512 sensor is suitable for the protection of sliding or tilting garage doors. thanks
to its die-cast aluminium structure capable of withstanding the passage of vehicles, it
can be set on the floor. The connection cables are protected by steel sheathing.
item 3513 sensor can be used on sheet steel doors, such as those of cellars and
warehouses, and on ferrous metal doors and windows.
Magnet
Contact
Magnet
Contact
Protection
line
NC contact
Contact
Magnet
Magnet
Contact
Protection
line
NC contact
Contact
Protection
line
Configuration
Sensors do not require configuration.
NC contact
Contatto
Magnet
BT00041-b-UK
3510/M/PB - 3511 - 3512 - 3513

Dimensional data
40
Magnet
30
14
17
18
78
67
3511
59
10
Reed
contact
enclosure
6 6 6
35
3513
3510
<12
10
20
24
18
10
26
<12
17.5
3510PB
25.5
0.8
26.5
3510M
86
25
15
32
72
65
BT00041-b-UK
42
Maximum distances from the magnet and the contact
25
15.5
72
140
3512
Steel door
Other doors
40
40
35
50
Rolling shutter detector
3514
Description
1
This device can protect rolling shutters, or similar winding devices, and is made up of a
reel-type cable detector to be positioned in the shutter box.
The end of the cable, which can be extended up to 3.1 metres, is fastened to the base of
the rolling shutter. The device features a movement/time excursion cycle designed to
avoid false alarms due to accidental movements of the rolling shutter due to vibrations,
slow sliding and blasts of wind.
This detector is recommended to provide perimeter protection because it offers the
advantage of giving the alarm when the thief tries to lift the rolling shutter and thus
before he enters the home.
In order to use the detector, use the contact interface item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4612/12 or
item F482, which can control the impulses generated by the detector itself in case the
rolling shutter is forced open.
3
Configuration
Front view
The sensor does not require configuration.

Legend
Dimensional data
1 - Cable detector;
2 - BUS;
3 - Cable to be fastened to the rolling shutter.
15
100
93
77
90
17
3514
Wiring diagram
Balanced line
Max. 3 detectors
Possible
Tamper
line
!
burglar alarm BUS
Max. 30m
Z
N
MOD
AUX
-
BT00042-b-UK
item 3514
10.5 V
35mA
Glass-breaking detector
3516
Description
This glass breaking detector is positioned on the window to be protected using the
double-sided adhesive tape supplied. The break, or even a strong shock against
the glass, causes the emission of a noise with characteristic frequency which the
piezoelectric detector captures. A specific electronic circuit generates the alarm signal
which is interpreted by the contact interface (any for flush mounted installation or 3480
or F482) to which the detector must be connected.
For proper operation, do not connect more than three detectors in series to the clamps
of the interface.
Sensor
item 3516
Technical data
- Resistance: typical (normally closed):
in alarm (open):
- Opening in alarm:
- Max. circuit voltage:
- Max. circuit current:
- Lightning suppression:
- Sensitivity:
- Fastening method:
14 (max. 24 )
min. 1 M
1-10 sec.
15 Vcc
15 mA
400 W per 1 m/sec.
(-18) (50)C
factory-set
High adherence acrylic tape
Contact interface
Configuration
40
The sensor does not require configuration.
Burglar alarm BUS
Wiring diagram
Dimensional data
120
32
25
Z
N
AUX
T
BUS
Max. no. 3
detectors in series
BT00040-b-UK
32
32
105
Max
20m
IR barriers for windows
3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Description
The device consists of 2 columns, one operating as a transmitter (TX), and the other
as a receiver (RX). Both have a microprocessor for the management of the alarm and
the synchronisation of the infrared beams. The table that follows shows the alarm
tripping times based on the rays broken:
OR: alarm with at least one ray broken (maximum sensitivity) AND: alarm with at least
two rays broken (minimum sensitivity).
1
2
Microswitch setting
Tripping
time
OR
AND
Rays
broken
100
200
100
200
only 1
2 sec.
2 sec.
2 not adjoining
1 sec.
1 sec.
1 sec.
1 sec.
2 adjoining or all
100 ms
200 ms
100 ms
200 ms
Anti insetti
Per installazioni con distanza tra RX e TX maggiori di 1 m, loscuramento di un solo raggio
se avviene direttamente su una delle barriere (per esempio a causa della presenza di
un insetto), non provoca allarme. Lallarme per immediato se vengono interrotti altri
raggi.
Range and connection
The barriers have a maximum range of 12 m indoors and 6 m outdoors. They are
connected to the rest of the burglar-alarm system by contact interfaces. If the maximum
absorption of the burglar-alarm allows it, it is possible to connect one or more barriers
using interface 3480V12 o F482V12 (one interface per barrier, and only for item 3518/50
and 3518). In alternative, due to absorption limitation or when barriers 3518/150 and
3519 are installed, contact interfaces 3480 or F482 must be used for the connection to
the burglar-alarm system, as well as a power supply E47/12 for powering the barriers.
In this way up to a maximum of seven barriers 3518 or six barriers 3519 can be installed.
Legend
Technical data
- Range:
- Power supply:
- Max. absorption:
- Protection index:
12 m high power indoors and 6 m outdoors, 3 m low

power both indoors and outdoors.
12 Vdc +/- 2 Vdc
50 mA
(-25) (+55)C
IP44
1 - Receiver;
2 - Transmitter;
3 - IR emission zone.
Dimensional data
22.5
Item
Lenght A (mm)
3518
1080
3518/50
580
3518/150
1580
3519
2080
BT00039-c-UK
10
23
3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Configuration
The barriers are sold configured for operation in AND mode, with tripping time: 200ms.
To change the mode use the internal microswitch as shown in the following table:
OR 100ms
OR 200ms
1 2 3 4
AND 100ms
1 2 3 4
AND 200ms
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
* default
Wiring diagram
Connection of the barrier to the item 3480V12 or F482V12
3480V12
(or DIN F482V12 version)
TX
RX
S1
Reset
13,8
13,8
PT0
PT0
GND
GND
PT1
PT1
ALL0
ALL1
JP10
LED
COM T COM C
If the max. consumption of the system allows it, it is possible to connect the 3518 or 3518/50 barrier directly to only one interface item 3480V12 or F482V12.
BT00039-c-UK

Connection table
MS1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Receiver (RX)
+13.8V
GND
PT0 Tamper C
PT1 Tamper N.C.
All0 Alarm C
All1 Alarm N.C.
MS1
1
2
3
4
Transmitter (TX)
+13.8V
GND
PT0 Tamper C
PT1 Tamper N.C.
3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Configuration
The barriers are sold configured for operation in AND mode, with tripping time: 200ms.
To change the mode use the internal microswitch as shown in the following table:
OR 100ms
OR 200ms
1 2 3 4
AND 100ms
1 2 3 4
AND 200ms
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
* default
Wiring diagram
Connection of the barrier to the item 3480V12 or F482V12
3480V12
(or DIN F482V12 version)
TX
RX
S1
Reset
13,8
13,8
PT0
PT0
GND
GND
PT1
PT1
ALL0
ALL1
JP10
LED
COM T COM C
If the max. consumption of the system allows it, it is possible to connect the 3518 or 3518/50 barrier directly to only one interface item 3480V12 or F482V12.
Connection table
MS1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Receiver (RX)
+13.8V
GND
PT0 Tamper C
PT1 Tamper N.C.
All0 Alarm C
All1 Alarm N.C.
MS1
1
2
3
4
Transmitter (TX)
+13.8V
GND
PT0 Tamper C
PT1 Tamper N.C.
BT00039-c-UK
Alarm IR remote control
4050
Description
This easy to use IR remote control enables performing all the system arming and
disarming operations, and to confirm the settings. Its coded automatically by the control
unit and has 4,000,000 code combinations. The specific programming procedure makes
it impossible to detect the code, thus assuring full safety. In any case, the user can easily
modify this code. Every system can recognise up to 30 remote controls when item L/N/
NT4600/4 control unit is installed, or up to 50 remote controls with control unit item
3486. The remote controls can be programmed to work with several installations, thus
permitting, for instance, to control both the home and the office systems with a single
remote control.
With systems with control units item 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601, the
remote control does not operate.
Technical data
1
2
3
4
Front view
Legend
- Power supply:
- Max. no. of manoeuvres:
1 - IR transmission zone;
2 - LED for transmission confirmation;
3 - Control pushbutton;
4 - Key-ring.
3 Vdc (2 CR1616 battery)

50.000
Battery replacement
To replace the 2 remote control batteries proceed as shown in the following figures.
Note: dispose of exhausted batteries following current regulations. Do not insert a fully
charged battery and a partly charged battery inside the same remote control.
CR1616
- - +
+
+
BT00031-b-UK
K
CLAC
sheets Burglar alarm

902 MY HOME Technical
Outdoor siren
4072L-4072A
Description
These sirens have been designed so that they can be installed easily, are tamper resistant
and withstand atmospheric agents.
A tamper screw protects the sirens against pulling off/opening; when installing make
sure that the tamper screw is correctly positioned.
Outdoor siren item 4072L
If there is a power cut the battery inside the siren gives the whole system a minimum life
of 24 hours (as required by standard CEI 79-2).
This solution means that only one battery need to be used instead of the two of
traditional systems, thus reducing maintenance and increasing system reliability. The
central unit can be miniaturised with no effect on safety.
1
2
3
Front view
Outdoor siren item 4072A

This siren is a system optional and can only be installed in combination with power
supply item E47ADC.
It is useful for identifying which room the alarm is coming from but is not obligatory
because the system back-up battery will be connected to the power supply. The housing
inside the siren holds the self-power supply 12V 7Ah battery.
Technical data
Front view of the siren without external cover
Legend
1 - Plastic external cover;
2 - Sound signaller;
3 - Sight signaller;
4 - Internal metal protection;
5 - Anti-foam grid to prevent penetration inside the casing.
Dimensional data
220
128
BT00057-b-UK
300

- Max. absorption:
5 mA (item 4072A)
- Operating temperature: (-25) (+55)C
- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres
- Frequency:
1500 Hz.
- Alarm autonomy:
15 min.
- Flashes per minute:
30 - 60
- Weight (without battery): 2.5 kg
- Protection index:
IP34
- Self-protected from removal and opening
- Battery protection fuse: F1: F5AL
4072L-4072A
Configuration
The external siren requires configuration of the progressive number. This is done by
means of the jumper (1) of the internal control card.
If the system has 2 external sirens the jumper (1) of the second siren must be cut.
Internal siren card - connections
A
Power supply-BUS twisted pair- (WHITE CABLE)
battery:
battery positive (RED cable)
battery negative (BLACK cable)
loudspeaker (GREY cable)
Control card internal view
C
Yellow LED
Yellow LED: if on check the Tamper

protection
Red LED
Red LED: if on invert the BUS

polarity.
Installation procedure
1 - Remove the two screws (1) and take off the external cover (2).
2 - Remove the four screws (3) and pull out the internal protection cover (4).
3 - By using the drilling template (5), position the hole (6) near the wire-outlet pipe and
mark the position of the 5 holes.
NOTE: use a 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.
3
3
1
1
2
3
3
4 - Insert the screw plastic plugs into the holes and partly tighten the top screws (7) and the
tamper screw (8).
8
6
5 - Adjust the tamper screw by using the notch (9) on the drilling template, as shown in the
picture.
10
Wall
Template
6 - Attach the siren to the two top screws (10).

Tighten the two bottom screws (11). Tighten the four screws completely.
7 - Place the battery (12) 12V - 6.5-7.2 Ah (for item 4072A and 77673) or 12V - 12 Ah (for item
4072L) into the special housing without connecting the Faston clamps.
Wall
11
BT00057-b-UK
12
If the installation or the adjustment of the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
system will not work.
8 - On the siren internal board, connect the power supply pair (BUS) to the white wires (A), the
battery to the Red and Black wires (B) and the siren to the Grey wires (C).
A
B
If the red LED lights up, reverse

the polarity of the BUS
Yellow LED
C
Red LED
Before performing any

operations on the siren,
switch the system to
maintenance mode.
High voltage present near the
flasher lamp.
Connections to the wires of the electronic card

Colour
Connection
White
White
Red
Black
Grey
Grey
Telephone pair (BUS)

Telephone pair (BUS)
+ Battery positive
+ Battery negative
Sound signaller
Sound signaller
Alarm radio remote control
348220
Description
Radio wave control device recommended for all those installations where an exposed
control device is not desired.
It can also used with the video door entry system, to control accesses.
The remote control must be used with the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
4
1
Technical data
- Power supply:
3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Radio frequency:
868.35 MHz
- Range:

- Modulation:
FSK
Front view
Legend
1 - Arming pushbutton;
2 - Disarming pushbutton;
3 - Key-ring;
4 - Control forwarding notification LED.
Dimensional data
48
60
13
Configuration
mode.
BT00050-b-UK

LED comes on.
3. Press the arming pushbutton for 5 seconds.
348220
Battery replacement
3
4
BT00050-b-UK
12 V output power supply
E47/12
Description
Device for the power supply of 12 V devices (e.g. IR barriers), designed for connection to
a 12 V - 6.5 - 24 Ah back-up battery.
The power supply can be installed in flush mounted switchboards item F115/8A,
or in suitable electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate
anti-tampering device L4630.
For the 7.2 Ah battery it is recommended that the item F115/8B container is used, preset
for opening protection.
The twisted pair of the burglar-alarm system can be connected to the BUS clamps,
enabling the status of the battery to be read from the control unit display.
The power supply is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065,
which creates a SELV system (Safety Extra Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8
standard (ref. CEI 64-8-4 part 411.1.2.5).
The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations.
In general, the following rules must be followed:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures;
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays;
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
3mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Technical data
- Power supply:
230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz
- Max. absorption:
300 mA
- Output voltage:
10.4-13.8 Vdc
- Maximum current supplied: 2 A
- Battery charging current: 400 mA
- Protection index:
IP30
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
Front view
Legend
1 - Battery status LED;
2 - 12 V device power supply connection clamps;
3 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
4 - SCS BUS connection clamps (optional);
5 - Tamper protection device socket;
6 - Network voltage connection clamps.
Maximum current delivered by the devices
type of battery installed
7.2 Ah
duration in case
of power line
failure
12 Ah
24 Ah
24 h
300 mA(*)
500 mA(*)
1A
15 h
480 mA
800 mA
1.6 A
8h
900 mA
1.5 A
2A
(*) In these cases the system complies with level 1 of CEI 79-2 standard.
BT00194-b-UK
Alarm power supply 230 V
E47ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to power the burglar-alarm system.
It supplies continuous 27 Vdc low voltage with a maximum current of 1 A, and is electronically
protected (without fuse) against short circuit and overload.
Its a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065, which provides
power supply to all the system devices connected to the system using the twisted 2-wire
SCS/BUS cable, creating a SELV system (Safety Extra - Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8
standards (ref CEI 64-8-4 par 411.1.2.5).
The power supply must be connected to the 12 Vdc 7.2 to 24 Ah battery to ensure the operation
of the system in case of power cut, to be installed inside an item F115/8B enclosure, protected
against unwanted opening.
To guarantee physical protection, the power supply unit must be installed in appropriate
electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate Tamper device, item
L4630.
The device is enclosed in an 8 module DIN rail container, and its installation must be in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures, item F115/8A;
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays;
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm
must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the
power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Technical data
- SELV double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065 standard
- Power supply:
230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz
- Max. absorption:
300 mA
- Maximum current supplied: 1A
- Battery charging current: 400 mA
- Dissipated power:
15 W
- Protection index:
IP30
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
BT00059-b-UK
08W20
12V
230 10% V~ 50-60Hz

I MAX= 300 mA
BUS 27V
1A BAT 400 mA
T=540C F1= F5AL
Front view
Legend
1 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS;
3 - Tamper protection device socket;
4 - Network voltage connection clamps.
Maximum current delivered by the devices
type of battery installed
7.2 Ah
Duration in case of
power line failure
12 Ah
24 Ah
24 h
110 mA(*)
190 mA(*)
380 mA
15 h
180 mA
300 mA
600 mA
8h
340 mA
560 mA
700 mA
(*) In these cases the system complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standard.
Relay actuator
F481
Description
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free
contacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.).
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts.
By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety mode of the internal
relay.
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces:
3841 and F483
Technical data
Legend

Max. absorption:
Contact output:

2. Relay active notification LED
3. Clamp for the connection of alarm devices
27 Vdc
20 mA
24 V 1 A cos 0.4
5 40 C
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N
BT00482-a-UK
AUX and MOD

Operating mode
Configurators
Description
It activates by...
It resets by...
Silencing
AUX
MOD
none
none
Repetition of the siren alarm
Siren activation
none
System fault notification
Activators flashing red LED notification
none
System status notification
Activation
Deactivation
F481
Auxiliary operating mode
Configurators
MOD
AUX
none
3
1-9
none
1-9
4
5
6
Description
It activates by...
It resets by...
Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary

channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with memory
of any technical alarm.
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of a
specific technical alarm.
Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory
of a specific technical alarm.
Come modo 4 con rel normalmente non eccitato

alarm interface with AUX configurator from
1 to 9
NOTES
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total
system safety.

N
AUX
MOD
Value
1
1
6

with pressure of the needle key on the interface of the



alarm interface with AUX configurator from
1 to 9
with pressure of the needle key on the interface of the
- The S key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this
has been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode 0 or 4 (technical alarm).
- In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes
with memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.

N
AUX
MOD
Value
2
1
4
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
A - +
Solenoid
valve
12 Vac
BT00482-b-UK
Relay
actuator
Technical alarm
interface
Burglar alarm BUS
Gas detector
Contact interface
F482
Description
These interfaces are used for connecting 2 independent contact lines - which can be
balanced with a resistance, delayed on operation - and a protection Tamper line.
Made in the modular version with 2 DIN modules these devices can be used as an
alternative to interfaces item L/N/NT4612 and item AM5792 in case it is necessary to
centralise all interfaces in a board or in junction boxes.
LED indicators inside the devices indicate proper operation of the interface when testing
the system and when the burglar-alarm starts operating while the system is on.
In order to install the interface item F482 safely, it is recommended to use protected DIN
switchboards on the opening of a tamper contact to be connected to the appropriate
clamps on the interface.
For level 2 systems (CEI 79-2) the central unit must also be protected from removal
(tearing protection).
1
T
Dimensional data
- Size: 2 DIN modules
AR T .F482
7
T
C2 C1
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 6 mA
- C1 - C2
Front view
Legend
1. Contact line 2;
2. Contact line 1;
3. Line 2 activated LED;
6. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Tamper active LED;
8. Tamper line.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
You will not need to configure both lines if one is not used.
T
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
ART.F482
N2
Z1
N1
MOD1
BT00046-c-UK
Z2
N1
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones.
- C1 - C2
C2 C1
MOD2
N2
Z2
F482
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2
A configurator is connected to this position for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines. It
is possible to have balanced and unbalanced protection lines with the possibility to
produce the alarm with a delay as with zone 1. For details concerning the different
operating modes, please refer to the table below.
Configurator
none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sensor connected
NC contacts
NC contacts - balanced
NC contacts - delayed *
NC contacts - delayed * - balanced
NC contacts - balanced and AUX event generation
NC contacts - delayed and AUX event generation
NC contacts - balanced delayed and AUX event generation

Configurator
Sensor connected
Pulses (*)
Flush detector for rolling shutters

- delayed**
12 (about 20 cm)
Flush detector for rolling shutters

- delayed**
25 (about 45 cm)
Note (*): impulses generated by the detector according to the opening range, in cm, of
the window before producing the alarm.
** Follows the delay set up in the central unit:
this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4601. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1
with a time delay set (see central configuration).
* Follows the delay set up in the central unit:

this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4601. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1
with a time delay set (see central configuration).
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and
not both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/
or MOD2 sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign
the address from 1 to 99 to the device within the system.The coupling between the
interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using
the TiThermo application.
- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control

system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
F422 interface.
The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
features of the burglar alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
zone must be performed using the TiThermo application.
Wiring diagram
N.C.
N.C.
Balance resistance
10 k 5% 1/4 W
N.C.
Balance resistance
10 k 5% 1/4 W
Note: It is recommended to install the

10 k 5% 1/4W balancing resistance in
correspondence with the last line contact.
C2 C1
N.C.
BT00046-c-UK
N.C.
ART.F482
N.C.
T - C1 - C2
Twisted, unshielded cable with

maximum length 30 metres
Tamper line
* It is recommended that no more than 3 rope sensors are installed on each line
12 V contact interface
F482V12
Description
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to two sensor lines
(that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed)
requiring 12 V power supply.
Produced in the DIN modular version, the device can be used for centralizing all the
interfaces inside a cabinet. Two LEDs confirm the correct operation of the interface
during system testing, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system
is armed. To ensure that the interface is installed safely the use of DIN switchboards is
recommended, with their opening protected by a tamper contact connected to another
interface.
Technical data
Power supply:
Max. absorption:

Output:
27 Vdc from the BUS

6 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added
5 40 C
12 V Max 100 mA
Dimensional data
Legend
1. Contact line 2 or tamper;
2. Contact line 1;
5. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Output 12 V
Configuration
For each of the two contact lines, independent from each other, the interface requires
the assigning of the Z zone it belong to, the N progressive number of the sensors present
within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
- If the address of contact 2 is not configured, a Tamper line can be connected to
clamps C2 and COM; If not required, the C2 clamp must be shorted at the COM
contact.
BT00481-a-UK
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact
connected to line 1.
Z2
N1
N2
Z1
N1
MOD1
MOD2
N2
Z2
F482V12
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2

In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the interface
according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
It will be possible to create both balanced and non balanced protection lines, with the
possibility of generating a delayed alarm as for zone 1. For the details of the various
operating modes, refer to the table below.
Configurator
none
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sensor connected
NC contact
NC contact - delayed *
NC contact - delayed * - balanced
Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation
Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation

Configurator
Sensor connected
Pulses (**)
12 (approx 20 cm)
25 (approx 45 cm)
Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:

this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
(see central unit configuration).
Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected
to the temperature control BUS e gestisce in modo autonomo ed indipendente le
due linee C1 e C2. Non obbligatorio configurare entrambe le linee ma solo quella
utilizzata. Inserire poi nella sede MOD1 e/o MOD2 il configuratore AUX. Then configure
sockets [Z1/2] and [N1/2] to assign the address 1 to 99 of the device within the system.
The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the
MY HOME Temperature control guide.
- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements
and features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7
must be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of
NC contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the
MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Balance resistance
100 k 5% 1/4 W
BT00481-a-UK
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30

metre maximum length.
Balance resistance
100 k 5% 1/4 W
NOTE: it is recommended that the
100 k 5% 1/4 W balancing resistance
is installed by the last line contact.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line
F482V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX
TX
S1
13,8
13,8
PT0
PT0
GND
GND
PT1
PT1
ALL0
Reset
ALL1
LED
JP10
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to the interface only.
NOTE: If Z1 and N1 are configured, while leaving sockets Z2 and N2 empty, contact C2 will operate as a tamper line.
BT00481-a-UK
F483
Descriptione
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications,
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve.
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line between
the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system. They are assigned by
configuration of the device(s).
Related items
Relay actuator:
F481 and 3479
27 Vdc
6 mA
5 40 C
Technical data

Max. absorption:
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

Configuration
Legend
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface),
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
4. Reset key

3. Operation indication LED
5. Clamp for the connection of external devices
AUX and MOD

In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating mode
on the basis of the following table.
Configurators
Description
BT00484-a-UK
AUX
MOD
none
none
Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact

c) Reset key on the device itself pressed.
none
Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact

Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none
Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact

c) Reset key on the device itself pressed.
F483
Configurators
AUX
1-9
MOD
none
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
Relay opertating mode (description)

Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm,
Anti-burglary automation with NC contact
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)
It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm,

Value
Value
AUX
AUX
MOD
MOD
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
Gas detector
A - +
Solenoid valve
12 Vac
BT00484-a-UK
Relay
actuator
Technical alarm
interface
Burglar alarm BUS
Signalling interface
F80CMD
Description
Item F80CMD is a signalling and control interface for the associated device, for example
the Stop&Go device item F80/SG.
It consists of two signalling relays, two contacts for the connection of two pushbuttons,
and one mode selector.
4
5
3
3
Technical data
- Power supply:
RL2
ART. F80CMD
from the associated device

5 40C
P1
4
Dimensional data
RL1
P2

Configuration
Warning: All the configuration operations must be performed with item F80CMD
disconnected.
Front view
Configuration
1 - Open item F80CMD.

2 - Select the desired mode using a flat screwdriver.
RL2 RL1
3
RL2
ART. F80CMD
RL1
Signalling
relayP2
P1
4
Relay status depending on the signalled event
BT00258-b-UK
Mode
Relay 1
Relay 2
Faulty
Blocked
Faulty
Not faulty
Blocked
Not blocked
Open
Closed
NOTE: if the set configuration mode is different from the expected ones, Stop&Go enters
mode =0
3 - Close item F80CMD.
4 - Wire the relays and the pushbuttons.
5 - Connect item F80CMD to the associated device.
1 - Mode selector, from 0 to 9;

2 - Contacts of pushbuttons P1 and P2;
3 - Contacts of signalling relays RL1 and RL2
(A1 load; maximum voltage 230 Vac);
4 - Signalling LED flashing red: data transfer;
5 - Signalling LED green: interface ON.
6 - Stop&Go connector.
F80CMD
Wiring diagram
1 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG;
2 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG and alarm event signalling
through the burglar-alarm system.
ASSOCIATED
DEVICE
ASSOCIATED
DEVICE
Burglar alarm BUS

Aux channel interface
item HC/hd/HS/L/N/NT4615
Control
interface
item F80CMD
3
ART. F80CMD
RL2
RL1
P1
4
N
AUX
MOD
ART. F80CMD
P2
6
1
Normally
Open
pushbutton
Normally
Closed
pushbutton
BT00258-b-UK
Base central unit
L/N/NT/HD/HC/HS4601
Description
1
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the
needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events to generate separation
scenarios.
Main functions
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display;
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum);
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times;
- association of a set user name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
keypad;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad;
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay.
give the alarm;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display;
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay:
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder.
BT00189-b-UK
6
C
OK
5
2
4
Front view
Legend
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
directly from the transponder keys.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
50 mA
- Operating teamperature: 5 40C
- Installation:
wall mounted
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 modules
L/N/NT/HD/HC/HS4601
Legend
1
8
PROG
RESET
2
HC4601HS4601
_
_
ON
Rear view
BUS
NC NA
1 - Serial connector for the update of the firmware using a PC;

2 - Reset key;
3 - Local contact;
6 - Relay for automation in case of alarm;
7 - Socket for tamper device item L4630;
8 - Battery housing.
OFF
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the device
itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software TiSecurity Basic.
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions
published by BTicino.
Example
Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
- Detection of devices
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Select
Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
zone: 0
num.: 1
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
After pressing OK, the

following screen appears
Learning
ended
BT00189-b-UK
Press OK to start learning
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
v ithe
s umanual
a l i z zof
a zthe
i ocentral
n e ? unit)
invia
= OK
non invia = CLEAR

Predisporre
l impianto
Radio flooding detector
HA/HB/L4619
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the contacts of the corresponding sensor
make contact with water.
The signal is then processed by the alarm central unit, which activates the siren and the
Telephone communicator (if installed), for sending a telephone message.
Better protection can be ensured by installing a relay actuator within the Burglar-Alarm
system, which will order an electrovalve to shut off the main water supply in case of
flooding.
Two front pushbuttons can be used to interrupt the alarm signalling and to test the
operation of the sensor.
1
2
Technical data
- Power supply:
- Minimum battery duration:
- Radio frequency:
- Range:

- Modulation:
Battery 3 V type CR2032

5 40C
2 years
868 MHz
FSK
Items HA/HB4619 and L4619 comply with the essential requirement of directive
1999/5/CE as they meet the following standards:
- ETSI EN301 489-3
- ETSI EN300 220-3
Dimensional data
4
3
Flooding detector item HA4619 with front cover plate
Legend
1 - Reset key;
2 - LED: If the TEST or RESET pushbutton is press for 1 second, the LED will normally flash
twice; if the battery is exhausted the LED will only flash once;
3 - Flooding probe;
4 - TEST pushbutton.
10
70
Front view
item L4619
115
10
92
100
93
BT00056-b-UK
100
item HA/HB4619
HA/HB/L4619
Configuration
N
Z
Z
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to a
maximum of 8 zones Configurator 9 assigns the device to the group of auxiliary devices.
MOD
AUX
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z N
MOD AUX
N
zone.
Internal view
MOD
Do not configure.
AUX
LED comes on.
3. Press the RESET key for 5 seconds.
BT00056-b-UK

mode.
BUS cable
Description
The red SCS-BUS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation of
burglar-alarm systems This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and
the operating signals to all system devices.
The cable consists of a red external sheath and two twisted flexible conductors, with a
section of 0.35 mm2, one yellow and one red.
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all the
devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and conduits as the power
WARNING
Although the construction of the cable ensures 300/500 V category electric insulation,
correct system operation is not guaranteed in the following cases, when installed
together with the power cables:
in industrial environments;
in residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power
supply to one of the following:
lifts
inverter
pumps
motors and controlled motors
metal iodines lamps.
The SCS-BUS cable is not suitable for underground installation.
BT00256-b-UK
L4669S
Technical data
- Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
- Can be buried: NO;
- Reference standards: it complies with the tests required by the following regulations:

EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,

EN50395, EN50396 as described in the document

IMQ CPT 062;
- External sheath colour: red;
- External sheath diameter: 5.5 +/- 0.1 mm;
- External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm;
- External sheath material: PVC (RZ);
- Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with sheath;
- Colour of internal conductors: white and blue;
- Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm;
- Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2);
- Conductor materials: red electrolytic copper;
- Conductor section: 0.35 mmq (12 x 0.20 mmq);
- Operating temperature: 15 - 70C;
- Maximum short circuit temperature: 150C;
- Coil length: 100 m.
Passive IR detector
N4640-N4640B
Description
The passive IR detector is of volumetric type and sensible to movement of warm bodies.
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels. The
detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in order
to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
Its available in the version with reduced sizes and is suitable for wall mounted
installation in systems preset or not preset for traditional sensors. For the sensor item
N4640 the covering range can be adjusted on three levels (3, 6, or 9 metres), while the
sensor item N4640B has a fixed sensitivity level (6 metres).
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
4.5 mA
5 40C
Front view
Covering range
Legend
30
1 - Alarm warning LED;

2 - Fresnel lens.
30
105
B
Dimensional data
A
10
C
2
35
23
molla
tamper
60
12
Surface
mounted
1,20
C
0
B
3
MA X
10
MA X
$

$
%

11
&
0$;
0$;
Slanting
installation

&
& &

BT00038-b-UK
N4640-N4640B
Configuration N4640
Infrared ray detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the progressive
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
zone.
MOD
Configurator
Mode
1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses)
2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse)
3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse)
1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse),

but with delay.
1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses),

but with delay.
2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),

but with delay.
3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse),

but with delay.
AUX
Auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system

status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
BT00038-b-UK
High sensitivity = maximum coverage 9 metres

Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been connected to the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of
the configurator in this position activates the auxiliary function assigned to the 1 to 9
number of the auxiliary channel.
If no configurator, or one of the configurators from 1 to 7 is connected to the MOD
position, the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
Internal view
N4640-N4640B
Configuration N4640
AUTOMATION mode Timed control:
actuators.
AUX
Time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
Example of configuration
IR detector
Actuator
A
PL
M
G1
G2
41
5 ON 4 1
L L1
item L4671/1
BT00038-b-UK
AUTOMATION mode GENERIC CONTROL

USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS:
In this case, the actuator is managed by a control device, item H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2,
which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M position, activates the actuator
with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item H/
L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position,
auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally establish the auxiliary channel, also
the AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
N4640-N4640B
Configuration item N4640B
This device is the model with preset sensor sensitivity level, item N4640 and it only
performs burglar-alarm system functions as it does not manage auxiliary channels
or automation modes; it requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive
number of the sensors within the zone, and the setting of the detection mode.
Z
N
zone.
MOD
Configurator
Mode
1 pulse
pulse counter(1)
1 pulse with delay
pulse counter with delay
The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
period of 30 seconds.
(1)
BT00038-b-UK
Z
N
MOD
Indoor siren
HC/HD/HS/N/NT4070
Description
This siren is fitted with battery (item 3507/6); up to a maximum of 3 indoor sirens can be
installed inside the protected area.
It can be installed in flush mounted boxes, item 506E. The indoor siren can be
programmed for signalling intrusion alarms through a continuous sound (frequency
1880Hz) and/or auxiliary alarms through a modulated sound.
This siren is self-protected against opening and rip-off by means of a self-adjusting
tampering device. Do not use batteries different from the ones indicated.
Technical data
- Self powering battery:
item 3507/6
- Max. absorption:
8 mA
- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres
- Frequency:
1880 Hz.
Front view
Dimensional data
44
115
115
Configuration
The indoor siren requires assignment of the progressive number and the operating
mode. It gives an intermittent sound to signal the activation of any one of the auxiliary
channels generated by an auxiliary channel interface in mode 0 and 4 (technical alarm).
No.
N
MOD
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number in the internal siren unit.
No configurator or configurator 1 identifies the first siren, configurator 2 the second and
configurator 3 the third.
MOD
This configurator assigns the signalling mode based on the type of alarm received.
No configurator: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled.
Configuratore 1: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled.
Configurator 2: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled.
Configurator 4: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled. System ON/OFF
sound signal.
Rear view
BT00058-b-UK
NOTE: Systems with external siren 4072A:

If the system has an external siren 4072A, it must be considered as siren No. 1; if there
are two, they must be considered as No. 1 and No. 2.
The internal sirens will be counted in sequence. There must be a maximum of 3 sirens
(internal and external).
MOD
Configurator 5: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled.System

ON/OFF sound signal.
Configurator 6: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled. System
ON/OFF sound signal.
4-zone central unit
L/N/NT4600/4
Description
The 4-zone central unit contains all system controlling functions and is contained in 3
modules only; in order to facilitate the comprehension of its functioning, it can ideally be
divided into 3 separate sections: activation, dividing and system control.
IR receiver
Activation section
This section carries out the activation function; visible are the IR receiver and 2 LEDs that
report the system status as follows:
- green LED on, system disarmed;
- red LED on, system has detected an alarm;
- red LED flashing, the battery inside the external siren is down, not connected or
defective.
Dividing section
In this section, there are four pushbuttons and four LEDs for controlling those zones into which
the system can be divided.
By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/disarmed.
Within four seconds after the last pressure, the separation made must be confirmed by
transmitting an impulse by means of the remote control.
Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically restored.
Red LEDs on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that they are disarmed.
No more than 3 zones at the same time can be excluded.
At least one zone must be enabled.
Indication armed/
disarmed system
Front view
Alarm warning
LED and pushbutton for

controlling of zone 1



System control section

In this section are visible LEDs and pushbuttons used for monitoring the central unit
and the system.
The green LED ~ on shows that the system is powered. The red LED 24h on shows that
a tampering alarm (24H alarm) has been detected.
The red LED Aux on shows that an alarm has been detected from an auxiliary channels
interface.
The red LEDs 24h and Aux flashing alternatively show that the central unit is in
maintenance condition and thus non active.
The yellow LED Test on shows that the system is in a test phase.
A yellow LED Prog on shows that the central unit is in the remote controls programming
phase.
The pushbutton S and the microswitch P in combination with the remote control are
used for selecting the different functions.
Pushbutton for selection of functions

Warning 24H alarm
Indication
powered
Indication system
in test phase
Microswitch for
programming of remote controls
Indication central unit

in remote controls
programming phase
Indication auxiliary alarm
Rear panel
BT00024-b-UK
On the back of the central unit are visible:

- connection clamps
- ON/OFF switch, that makes it possible to put the central unit in maintenance mode
- Configurator sockets for ALARM and ZONE 1 times to adjust the alarm time and the
delay of the last output/first input.
Configurators
Zone 1
Clamp for burglar alarm

BUS
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
25 mA
ON/OFF
switch
Rear view
Alarm
L/N/NT4600/4
Dimensional data
4-zone central unit
Size: 3 modules
Alarm
Configuration
By means of configurators the system central unit can set the following timings.
ALARM
This configurator sets the length of the alarm time (siren sound).
To select the times use the configurators as shown in the table below:
Configurator No.
Alarm length
no configurator
0 (only a short pulse)
1 30
2 30
3 30
10
Zone 1
Example
NotE: To choose the alarm time check the local regulations.

Zone 1
This configurator sets the delay times for activating the ZONE 1 sensors (Last output/
first input delay).
To select the time use the configurators as shown in the table below:
Output time
Input time
none
0 (instant)
0 (instant)
30
30
15
30
30
Value
ALARM
ZONE 1
1
1
BT00024-b-UK
Example
Alarm time (siren sound) 2 minutes and last output/first input delay time 30 and 7
respectively.
2
2
IR divider
for zones 1 4
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4603/4
Description
The IR divider carries out the function of arming and disarming the system by means of the
IR remote control and to activate or disactivate the 4 zones.
It allows repeating the functions of the main central unit in several places of the installation,
in case of big houses.
It has the same functions described in the section dividing of the 4-zone central unit.
N
LED
BIP
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
15 mA
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Front view
Legend
1 - IR receiverNzone;
LED
BIP
2 - LED and pushbutton
for controlling of zone 2;
3 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 4;
4 - Indication System ON/OFF;
5 - Alarm warning;
7 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 1.
Configuration
The zones 1 to 4 divider is part of the group of activators, and therefore requires setting of
the progressive number, as well as the possibility of programming the special functions.
No.
LED
BEEP
NN
LED
LED
BIP
BIP
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number to the activator within the group.
Configurator 1 will identify the first device, configurator 2 will identify the second and so
on to a maximum of 9 activators (expanders, dividers or activators).
Clamp for burglar-alarm BUS
Rear view
LED
This configurator sets the operating mode of the luminous signals given by the LED.
In fact, the signals can be concealed when, as an example, the device is installed in a
bedroom and the light emitted by the LED is unwelcome.
No configurator the LED will indicate the active zones by switching on permanently.
Configurator 1 the LED will only light up when any one of the pushbuttons is pressed
for 4 seconds.
For more information concerning the indications given by the LED in the various modes
of operation consult the Instructions for use manual.
BT00027-b-UK
BEEP
This configurator enables or disables the audible signal the device gives when it receives
a signal from a remote control.
No configurator the signalling is enabled.
Configurator 1 the signalling is disabled.
Example
N
LED
BIP
N
LED
BIP
Example
N
Configuration
LED of zones 1 to 4 divider.
BIP
Third connecting key device with optical signal permanently enabled and audible signal
disabled.
Value
LED
none
BEEP
3
N
LED
BIP
Expander 5 8 zones
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4603/8-AM5783/8
Description
1
This device can be used with the 4 zone central unit item L/N/NT 4600/4. or with advanced
central units items 3485 and 3486, to ensure a total coverage of the system with 8 separable
zones. It performs the same functions of the dividing section of the 4-zone central unit,
item L/N/NT4600/4. By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/
disarmed. Within four seconds from the last pressure, the separation performed must be
confirmed by moving a transponder or a remote control saved in the central unit to a zone
1-4 separator. Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically
restored. Red LEDs on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that
they are disarmed.
6
7
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
10 mA
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
The zones 5 to 8 expander is part of the group of activators ant therefore requires setting
of the progressive number with the possibility of programming the special functions.
Front view
Legend
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number within the group of activators.
on to a maximum of 9 connecting key devices (expanders, dividers or activators).
LED
This configurator sets the operating mode of the luminous signals given by the LED.
In fact, the signals can be concealed when, as an example, the device is installed in a
bedroom and the light emitted by the LED is unwelcome.
No configurator the LED will indicate the active zones by switching on permanently.
Configurator 1 the LED will only light up when any one of the pushbuttons is pressed
for 4 seconds.
N
LED
No.
LED
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
Rear view
N
LED
BT00029-b-UK
IR activator
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4604
Description
The activator performs the function of arming and disarming the system by means of the
remote control and offers the same possibilities described for the connecting section of
the 4-zone central unit.
The luminous indications given by the LEDs on the front part and the audible signal given
on each system state change can be disabled. It can be enabled for the fixed division of
zones pre-set in the configuration stage.
The activator, configured as auxiliary device (configurator 1-9 in the AUX socket) works
in an alternative way to the burglar-alarm system, and therefore does not arm/disarm
the system.
In this mode, using the remote control, it activates the corresponding auxiliary control,
enabling to obtain actuations that are typical of access control systems.
Technical data

Max. absorption:
27 Vdc
8 mA
5 40C
N
MOD
P.N
AUX
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
The activator must be allocated a progressive number It can also program the special
functions.
N
on to a maximum of 9 activator devices (activators, dividers or expanders).
MOD
This configurator sets the operating mode of the signals given by the LED (1) and enables
or disables the audible signal emitted by the activator when it receives a signal from a
remote control.
Configurator value
BEEP enabling
LED ON
none
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
BT00030-b-UK
P. N
This configurator sets the activation of fixed system zones on the basis of the number
assigned.
The divider selected is activated or deactivated by using the remote control to operate
the activator.
In this way, for example, a system with many zones can be divided into day zone and
night zone which can be automatically divided by means of the connecting key.
Example
No configurator: system on/off.
Configurator 1: zone 1 active, remaining zones not active.
Configurator 6: zones 1 to 6 active, remaining zones not active.
When switched off by the remote control, the previous division is reset.
Legend
1. LED indicating system status;
2. LED indicating the alarm system status;
3. IR receiver zone;
4. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS.
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4604
AUX
auxiliary channel. It therefore enables controlling auxiliary actuator devices, provided that
they have been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
WARNING: the AUX configurator, and in alternative the P.N configurator, which assigns
instead a burglar-alarm function
Example
Example: configuration of an activator.
Third activator device with optical signalling enabled and audible signalling disabled,
with assignment, by the remote control, of fixed active zones (from 1 to 5 = day zone) of
the system and separation of the remaining zones (from 6 to 8 = night zone).
Value
MOD
P.N
AUX
none
Example
Example of activator with auxiliary configuration; third activator device with optic
signalling enabled and audible signal disabled, with allocation, both with the system
armed and disarmed, of auxiliary channel no. 4 (for example the opening of an electrical
door lock).
Value
MOD
P.N
none
AUX
BT00030-b-UK
Keylock disconnector
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4605-AM5785
Description
This module makes it possible to disarm and block in the current state the burglar-alarm
system. It can be used in emergency situations, if the remote controls are lost.
The mechanical key is a safety key with 10,000 combinations and can be extracted from
the lock both in position ON and OFF.
This device requires no configuration.
ON
Technical data
2
OFF

- Max. absorption:
5 mA
Dimensional data
Front view
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
This device requires no configuration.
BT00032-b-UK
Legend
1 - Lock closing lid;
2 - Lock for safety mechanical key;
3 - LED indicating blocked and disarmed system.
Keypad activator
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4606-AM5786
Description
This device arms or disarms the system by keying a secret code previously stored in burglaralarm systems central units with display, or in three module flush mounted central units.
By pressing two pushbuttons (o and P) and entering the secret code, the system can be
disarmed, while at the same time sending a silent alarm (robbery function).
Indications supplied by the LED and the Buzzer
(sound signalling device)
Event
Green LED
Red LED
Buzzer
Keying-in
Flashing
Active
Code entering
Active
System armed
OFF
OFF
System disarmed
ON
OFF
Wrong code entered Flashing (5s)
ON
Intrusion alarm
OFF
ON
24 hour alarm
ON/OFF
ON
1
2
Front view
4
Rear view
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
5.5 mA
Legend
1 - Red LED: alarm status;
2 - Green LED: system status
OFF: ON, ON: OFF;
4 - BUS;
5 - Anti-tamper device socket.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the group
of devices (any free zone in the system).
To configure it as belonging to the activator group, no configurator must be connected.
Configurator 9 assigns the device to the group of auxiliary devices (Aux channel
interface or Relay actuator).
N
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators).
Central unit used
Configurator value
3486 - 3485/B
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4600/4
NOTE: When used with central units with display, the secret code is the one saved in
the central units themselves (maximum 25 or 50 codes depending on the type of central
unit). If used with the flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code must be
programmed in the central unit itself. In this case, up to 29 codes must be saved.
In order for the keypad to operate as activator of the system with three-module central
unit, it will be necessary to first program the code in the central unit itself following the
procedure below:
1. Place the central unit in maintenance mode by moving the back slide switch to the
OFF position;
2. Press P and check that the yellow LED comes on (PROG);
3. Program the remote controls first (see chapter STARTING AND TESTING);
4. Enter o + the desired 5 digit code;
5. Ensure that a long beep is emitted by the keypad, and that the central unit responds
with a short beep;
6. To memorize further codes, or several keypads with different codes, repeat 4 and 5;
7. Once the last code has been set, press S on the central unit (the yellow PROG LED goes
off) and move the central unit slide switch back to the ON position;
8. Send a pulse signal using the IR remote control;
9. Perform some arming/disarming tests.
BT00026-b-UK
MOD
The configurator of this location specifies the type of control unit installed in the system.
Configuration for use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4
Disabling the keypad BUZZER when keys are pressed

Irrespective of the type of central unit installed, the keypad sound can be enabled/
disabled. To do this press key 1 for 5 seconds, until the activator beeps and flashes
quickly twice.
To switch the sound back on repeat the same procedure.
1-4 zone transponder

divider
Description
This device is used to arm, disarm, and separate the zones of the system by placing a
transponder badge (item 3530S and item 3540 previously stored in the central unit) in
front of the zone transponder badge receiver.
When used in an automation system it performs the control function for the management
of scenarios.
By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/disarmed.
Within four seconds from the last pressure, the separation performed must be confirmed
by moving a transponder saved in the central unit close to the device.
Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically restored. Red LEDs
on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that they are disarmed.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
15 mA
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Front view
Legend
1 - Transponder badge receiver zone;
4 - Indication System ON/OFF;
5 - Alarm warning;
Configuration
BURGLAR-ALARM mode:
Since this item belongs to the activator group, it needs to be set up with the number of
the group assigned and the progressive number of the devices in the group. It can also
be programmed to perform Automation functions (scenario management).
See Automation MY HOME guide for details.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the group
of devices (any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the activator
group, no configurator must be inserted.
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number within the group of activators.
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators).
NOTE: If all 9 permitted devices have already been assigned to the activator group,
it could be possible to assign to configurator Z (zone it belongs to) a value between
1 and 9, taking into account the progressive number.
BT00028-b-UK
MOD
It assigns the modes of the audible signals (BEEP) and luminous signals (LED ON)
provided by the divider when controlled by the transponder; it is used as a activators/
disconnector of the Burglar-alarm system.
Z
No.
MOD
AUX
=
1
02'
$8;
Clamp for burglar

alarm BUS
Rear view
Central unit
used
1
Configurator
02'
$8;
value
LED ON
Enabling
BEEP
3486
3485/B
HD/HC/HS/L/N/
NT4601
none
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
L/N/NT4600/1
A/AM5780/1
5
6
7
=
1
02'
$8;
AUX
Position not configurable for the Burglar-alarm function; configure only if it is
necessary to enable the device for Automation functions (management of the scenarios
stored in the unit or scenario module).

=
Configuration
AUTOMATION mode SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:
Z
This configurator with value 0-9 coincides with the A position of the scenario module.
=
1
02'
$8;
N
This configurator with value 1-9 coincides with the PL position of the scenario module.
Z
No.
MOD
AUX
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. Connect configurator 9.
AUX
It assigns one of the scenarios programmed on the scenario module to the four
pushbuttons (SCE = 1-9) as per the table.
Pushbutton no.
Associated scenario no.
pushbutton 1
SCE
pushbutton 2
SCE + 1
pushbutton 3
SCE + 2
pushbutton 4
SCE + 3
Example
If configurator 3 is connected to AUX, use pushbutton 1 to recall scenario no. 3, pushbutton
2 to recall scenario no. 4, pushbutton 3 to recall scenario no. 5, and pushbutton 4 to recall
scenario no. 6
Pairing transponders
=
1
02'
$8;
=
1
02'
$8;
Erasing the memory
1. Move the programming block switch to the open padlock and then:
1. Move the programming block to the open padlock.
2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 5 seconds until the alarm
LED status comes on for 0.5 second and an audible signal is heard.
2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 10 seconds and check that
the LED flashes slowly 4 times, and that there is an audible signal.
3. Release pushbuttons 1 and 4.
3. Release pushbuttons
1 1 and 4.
4. Move the transponder being programmed close to the device:

- if the transponder has been correctly saved the alarm status LED will slowly flash
twice and an audible signal will be heard. Go to step 6.
- if the code is already in the memory there will be 2 audible signals and the led will
flash quickly twice.
- if the memory is full there will be 5 audible signals and the LED will flash quickly 5
times.
4. The transponder zones activator will remain in programming mode, ready for a new
programming sequence.
6. Move the programming block switch back on the closed padlock to exit
programming. Otherwise the device will exit programming mode after 1 minute of
inactivity.
5. Move the switch back to the closed padlock position to exit the erasing procedure.
BT00028-b-UK
5. To store other transponders repeat the procedure in step 4, otherwise go to step 6.
02'
$8;
Transponder reader
Description
The transponder reader is a device which activates when the Transponder badge is in its
immediate vicinity (1-2 cm). The signal generated by the approach of the badge is then
transferred to the bus (BUS cable item L4669S). The transponder reader is fitted in the
wire burglar-alarm system and works like a traditional activator; it is thus connected to
the BUS cable like any other burglar-alarm device.
The transponder does not need a power supply battery. When compared with the
traditional remote control, the transponder reader/transponder system offers better
safety due to the code encryption system. Also, the possibility of saving up to 50 badges
(depending on the central unit used) offers better flexibility in the management of
the system, particularly in those environments (companies, offices, shops), where the
number of people enabled to use the system is high and changes regularly.
Front view
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
12 mA
5 40C
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Legend
1 - Three-colour LED for operation indications;
2 - Reset pushbutton (NOT ACTIVE).
Configuration
BURGLAR-ALARM mode:
The transponder reader used as burglar-alarm system activator/disconnector must
be assigned to the group of activator; it thus requests the assignment of the group
number attributed (see below) and the progressive number of the devices in the group.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone in the group of devices
(any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the group of activators, no
configurator must be inserted.
- Configurators 1, 8 instead would assign the transponder reader to the sensor (IR
detectors or contact interface) group while configurator 9 would assign it to the
group of auxiliary devices (auxiliary channel interface or relay actuator).
N
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the transponder reader inside the
zone attributed. Configurator 1 identifies the first reader-transponder, configurator 2
the second and so on until a maximum of 9 receiver devices for each of the zones.
BT00033-b-UK
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. It assigns the operating mode. In order for it to operate
as activator, use configurator 1 with flush mounted central units item 4600/4, and
configurator 0 for other central units.
The transponder is saved in the burglar-alarm central unit. The maximum number that
can be managed is:
- 29 with flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4.
- 50 with central unit with display, item 3486 or 3485.
- 20 with central unit with display, item 3485B or HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
No.
MOD
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
Rear view
NOTE: when all the 9NZ devices allowed have already been inserted in the group of
MOD
activators, a value between
1 and 9 could be assigned to configurator Z (appropriate
AUX
zone) taking account of the progressive No.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Configuration
Night function: when the system is disconnected, it is possible to activate the zones up
to the numeric value of the configurator in AUX position. This function can be enabled
with configurator 7 in MOD position if central units with a display are used or with
configurator 8 if flush mounted central units item L/N/NT4600/4 are used.
Example: MOD = 7, AUX = 3
In this case, when the burglar-alarm with the central unit and communicator are
activated, only the first three zones will be enabled.
AUX
This configurator activates the activator auxiliary modes of operation, assigning an
auxiliary channel.
To use the activator as auxiliary device, refer to the My Home application guide.
Example
configured in this way the transponder reader works as 4th device of the activator group.
Value
none
MOD
AUX
none
Use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4

The transponder (badge) programming operation is necessary in order for it to work as a
normal infrared remote control, item 4050.
The initial programming - which is carried out when installing the Transponder reader
shall be carried out with the central unit in MAINTENANCE mode (selector switch located
on the back in OFF position).
Proceed as indicated below:
1) With central unit in maintenance mode, press the P key and check if the yellow LED
PROG lights up.;
AUTOMATION mode ON/OFF TIMED:
It can be used for the actuation of an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
AUX
No configurator.
Example: If Z=3, N=2 and MOD=2 the device sends an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second
(e.g. electrical door lock release) to an actuator with address A=3 and PL=2.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
NZ
N
MOD
MOD
AUX
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
4
4 1
1
N
2) Program the IR remoteMOD
controls first;
3) Now, move the badgesAUXtowards
the transponder reader;
Z
N
4) Make sure that two short MOD
tones
are emitted: the first is emitted from the transponder
AUX
reader, the second is emitted
from the central unit.;
5) Repeat points 3 and 4 for all available badges;
6) When you have finished programming the last badge, press the S pushbutton on the
central unit (the yellow PROG LED turns off) and flip the back selector switch to ON.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Example
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
BT00033-b-UK
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
AUX
Example
Z
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system; (it assigns the
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed from 1 to 9 -).
N
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the
actuation must be performed from 1 to 9 -).
Z
N
MOD
AUX
3
2
Z
N
MOD
AUX
2 4
1
Configuration
N
It coincides with the PL position (configurator from 1 to 9) of the scenario module.
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
AUX
It assigns the correspondence between the required scenario and the scenario module.
The configurators that can be used are those between 1 and 9 and coincide with the
corresponding scenario of the scenario module, item F420.
F420
Z
N
MOD
AUX
3
2
2
4
Transponder reader
3
2
AUTOMATION mode SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:

Z
It coincides with the room of the scenario module item F420 where the actuation is
performed from 0 to 9 (reference socket A on the scenario module).
Scenario module
Example: configured in this way the control activates scenario no. 4 of the scenario
module item F420 with address A=3, PL=2.

It enables the actuation of an ON timed control
Z
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system (it assigns the
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed from 1 to 9).
N
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the
actuation must be performed from 1 to 9).
MOD
It assigns the operating mode. To obtain an ON timed control connect configurator 6.
AUX
It assigns the duration of the time delay based on the value of the configurator used, as
shown in the following table.
Aux
Time
BT00033-b-UK
1 min.
2 min.
3 min.
4 min.
5 min.
15 min.
30 sec.
0.5 sec.
9 (not used)
---
=
1
02'
$8;

Transponder reader
Example: configured in this way, the transponder reader sends to an actuator with
address A = 1 and PL = 3 an ON control with a delay of 5 minutes (e.g. switching on
a service light).
SLAVE control
It enables reproducing an enabled control on a Master transponder reader. The
transponder keys used must only be saved in the Master device.
Z
It coincides with the Z configurator of the master device.
N
It coincides with the N configurator of the master device.
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. To obtain SLAVE devices connect the SLA configurator.
AUX
It coincides with the AUX configurator of the master device.
Configuration
AUTOMATION mode AUXILIARY CONTROL:
This mode can be obtained by connecting the AUX configurator to MOD. This will
generate a 1 sec. ON/OFF control on the assigned auxiliary channel. The difference
when compared with the auxiliary function generated with the reader connected to the
burglar-alarm system (MOD=1) is that in this case the codes of the transponders are
saved in the reader itself, with the possibility of managing 120 badges at the same time.
Z
It assigns the no. of the zone it belongs to, form 0 to 9.
N
It assigns the progressive no. inside the zone.
MOD
It assigns the operating mode. For the auxiliary functions connect the AUX configurator.
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4614
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
3
1
AUX
2
Transponder reader
3
1
AUX
2
N
AUX
MOD
N
AUX
MOD
1
2
6
1
2
6
Relay actuator
Example: when configured in this way, as auxiliary device no. 1 (N=1) in zone 3 (Z=3),
the control sends an ON/OFF command on auxiliary channel 2 (AUX=2) intended for the
relay actuator item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4614 configured with AUX = 2.
AUX
It assigns the auxiliary channel.
BT00033-b-UK
Display keypad
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4608
Description
Using the transponder key, or a secret code set on the central unit, this device with
display and digital keypad can be used to arm/disarm the system and separate the zones
with the same flexibility and using the same procedure as for burglar-alarm central unit
with display, or three module flush mounted central units.
In this way the central units can be installed in an appropriate equipment room, out of
sight.
All system status details are shown of the large backlit display.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
28 mA
5 40C
6
C
OK
5
2
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 modules
Front view
Legend
and the events which have occurred.
commands directly from the transponder keys.
BT00025-b-UK
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4608
Configuration
The activator with display must be configured by assigning a zone address (Z), indicating
the activator group it belongs to, and a progressive number (N) within the group.
To configure it as belonging to the activators group, no value must be entered in Z.
The configuration is performed using a specific menu shown on the display, following
Selecting the central unit installed in the system

1. Select type of central unit.
1. Ensure that the system is in maintenance mode.
2. Select the type of burglar-alarm central unit installed:

- Display for central unit item 3486, item 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 No display for central unit item L/N/NT4600/4 and AM5780/4.
2. Upon switching on the activator, the SETTING screen appears in Italian language.
3. Press OK to confirm.
3. Select Address (address).
4. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure
on the central unit.
4. Enter the Z and N address to assign to the activato and press OK to confirm.
5. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure
on the central unit.
Address configuration menu
For further device customisation procedures refer to the information on the CD supplied
with the product.
Address configuration menu

SETTINGS
Language
Address
Central unit type
Address--
SETTINGS
Language
Address
Central unit type
Address 12
SETTINGS
Language
Address
Central unit type
Display
SETTINGS
Language
Address
Central unit type
No display
WARNING
Modified address
run system
learning
in progress...
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
Language
Address
Central unit type
No display
BT00025-b-UK
Language
Address
Central unit type
Address12
Passive IR detector
Description
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with fixed lens, sensitive to the
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
It can also be used in the automation system for timed ON/OFF functions, or to activate
auxiliary controls.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
4.5 mA
5 40C
Front view
Covering range
Legend
30
1 - Fresnel lens;
2 - Alarm warning LED.
30
105
B
A
12
10
C
2
+2
0
C
0
-6
10
11
Dimensional data
BT00035-b-UK
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
assignment of an auxiliary channel.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
zone.
Z
No.
MOD
AUX
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
Rear view
Z
N
MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator
Mode

but with delay.

but with delay.
2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),

but with delay.

but with delay.
AUX
auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system

status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
nd
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
2
Z
N
MOD
AUX
1
1
BT00035-b-UK

Z
N
MOD
AUX
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,

the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.
Configuration
actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
IR detector
A
PL
M
G1
G2
1 4 NO 5
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Actuator
L L1
item L4671/1
BT00035-b-UK

41
AUX
Time
Passive IR detector
Description
Horizontal adjustment
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens, sensitive to the
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available
for installation in the high sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres.
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room
to protect.
It is also possible to change the sensitivity threshold, and to generate auxiliary functions
when the system is disarmed.
Vertical adjustment
30
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
4.5 mA
5 40C
28
30
1
2
25
Front view
Covering range
Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
2 - Covering reducing lid;
30
30
105
B
10
C
2
0

C
0
-25
11
+2

28
-6
C
2
10
11
25
BT00036-b-UK
10
Vertical adjustment
12
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
zone.
Z
No.
MOD
AUX
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
Rear view
Z
N
MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator
Mode
1 level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)

but with delay.

but with delay.
2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),

but with delay.

but with delay.
AUX
pre-alarm function activation. The device, in any

system status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary
alarm to the channel specified in the AUX position. If
the assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command
will be disabled
st
nd
BT00036-b-UK

AUX
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,
the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
MOD
AUX
2
Z
N
MOD
AUX
1
1
Configuration
actuators.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
IR detector
A
PL
M
G1
G2
1 4 NO 5
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Actuator
41
AUX
Time
L L1
item L4671/1
BT00036-b-UK

Passive IR detector
L/N/NT4611B-AM5791B
Description
These devices are the simplified version of sensors item L/N/NT4611 and item AM5791.
They have a fixed level of sensitivity (6 metres).
Also in this case, the passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens,
sensitive to the movement of warm bodies.
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels.
The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in
order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available for installation in the high
sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres.
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room
to protect.
Vertical adjustment
30
28
25
Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
2 - Covering reducing lid;

- Max. absorption:
4.5 mA
5 40C
Covering range
30
30
105
B
A
10
C
2
0
2,00
A
C
BT00037-b-UK
B
2
10
-25
11
+2
1,20
Vertical adjustment
12
28
0
B
C
0
-6
6
10
25
11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
1
2
Front view
Technical data
30
L/N/NT4611B-AM5791B
Configuration
They require that the zone they belong to and the progressive sensor number within the
zone are assigned. They also require setting of the detection mode.
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Z
N
zone.
Z
No.
MOD
Clamp for burglar
alarm BUS
Rear view
Z
N
MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator
Mode
1 pulse
pulse counter (*)
1 pulse with delay
pulse counter with delay
Z
N
MOD
AUX
(*) The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
period of 30 seconds.
NOTE: Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations
(radiators etc.).
Z
N
MOD
AUX
2
1
1
BT00037-b-UK
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Double technology
IR+MW detector
HS/HD/HC/L/N/NT4613
Description
This device consists of two sensors: one infrared sensor (IR) to detect the presence of warm
bodies, and one microwave (MW) sensor to detect moving bodies.
The combination of these technologies guarantees greater immunity against false alarms.
In fact the device is programmed to give the alarm only if both the detection technologies
are activated, and this guarantees a high standard of safety.
The volume of the protected zone is split into 14 bands on 3 floors.
Due to the fact that the sensors do not operate correctly if their covering ranges overlap
those of double technology sensors, the installation of several sensors in the same room is
not recommended.
The detectors, configured in the AUX socket, activate the auxiliary operating modes,
assigning an auxiliary channel. The device performs all its burglar-alarm functions, but
when the system is disarmed it activates the corresponding auxiliary channel (unless
separated). The auxiliary function can therefore be excluded by separation of the zone it
belongs to. It also enables activating any auxiliary actuator devices, provided that they have
been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: do not mount in places where there are moving metal parts (e.g. thermoconvectors
or air-moving blades).
Z
N
MOD
AUX
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc

Max. absorption:
35 mA for the first detector installed, 7 mA for all the others
5 40C
Covering range
30
30
105
B
A
12
Legend
10
C
2
BT00034-c-UK
1,20
C
0
10
11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
1. Fresnel lens;
2. Alarm warning LED;
3. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS.
HS/HD/HC/L/N/NT4613
Configuration
Double-technology detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the

progressive number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and
possibly assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
Z
N
zones.
MOD
It can be used, for example, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
Configurator
Mode
1st sensitivity level
2nd sensitivity level
3rd sensitivity level
1st sensitivity level with delay.
2nd sensitivity level with delay.
3rd sensitivity level with delay.
AUX
Activation of the pre-alarm function, irrespective of

the system status (armed or disarmed). The device
sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
separated, the auxiliary command is disabled.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type F or 3479, see the
appropriate technical sheet.
EXAMPLE
First sensor belonging to zone 2.
Value
MOD
none
AUX
none
Example
Example of IR detector with auxiliary configuration. First sensor belonging to zone 2, and
with high sensitivity, and pre-alarm on auxiliary channel no. 3 with the system
disarmed (e.g. activation of bell when someone goes through the area).
With the system armed, the device only operates as burglar-alarm sensor.
Value
MOD
none
AUX
BT00034-c-UK
High sensitivity (1st level) = maximum coverage 8 metres

Medium sensitivity (2nd level) = maximum coverage 6 metres
Low sensitivity (3rd level) = maximum coverage 3 metres
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been installed in the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of the
configurator in this position activates the pre-alarm function, assigning the 1 to 9
If no configurator, or one of the 2 to 7 configurators, are present in the MOD position, the
device only activates the pre-alarm function when the system is disarmed.
Alarm radio receiver
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618
Description
The radio receiver, fitted in the MY HOME burglar-alarm system, allows the use of
devices which transmit radio wave signals (volumetric sensors, perimeter sensors,
technical alarm sensors, radio system remote control, radio remote control for remote
assistance) inside the burglar-alarm system, transferring the radio signal on SCS cable
(item L4669S). The radio receiver will thus be connected to the SCS cable like any
burglar-alarm device and must be configured depending on whether it is used with
radio sensors or remote control.
The connection between receiver and radio sensors or remote control does not
need conductors because each device is supplied by batteries and the information is
transmitted via radio.
Front view
NotE: for more information consult the manual supplied with the product.
Technical data
- Max. absorption:
15 mA
Legend
1 - Operation indication LED;
2 - Reset or programming key.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
Z - This configurator assigns the number of the zone it belongs to within the device
group(any free zone in the system).
Configurators 1 - 8 assign the receiver zone within the group of sensors (IR detectors or
interface contacts);
configurator 9 assigns the receiver zone within the group of auxiliary devices (auxiliary
channel interface or relay actuator);
no configurator assigns the receiver zone within the group of activators (activator,
divider, zone expander).
N - This configurator assigns the progressive receiver number inside the zone attributed.
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 the second and so on up to a
maximum of 9 expander devices for each of the zones.
Z
N
AUX
Clamp for burglar

alarm BUS
Rear view
AUX - This configurator activates the prealarm (with volumetric and/or perimeter
sensors) or technical alarm function (with technical alarm sensors) and assigns an
NotE: if the system is configured to have technical alarms, prealarms CANNOT be
generated with the system switched off.
Z
N
AUX
BT00049-b-UK
Z
N
AUX
Z
No.
AUX
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Load control
MY HOME 957
Pulses counter interface
3522
Description
The device detects, counts and processes the information (water, gas, etc.) received from
meters with pulse outputs, and makes it available to the SCS Bus.
The processing and accounting functions are:
- calculation of the instantaneous value (calculated as the average of two pulses received
during the time unit);
- hourly, daily and monthly pulse meter (one year memory).
The pulse meter may be installed in a MY HOME Automation/Temperature Control
system, or in a system only intended for the display of consumption levels. In this case a
mini power supply will be required, to power the BUS, as well as a Touch Screen, for the
displaying of consumptions levels.
The device may be installed in flush mounted boxes, behind traditional type devices, or
also inside distribution boards, but without taking up any DIN rail space.
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch
Screen). If this is not available, the meter will be unable to archive the data, and will
continue to increase the meters of the totalizers, and to calculate the instantaneous
variables (number of pulses within the time unit).
The device has been designed to save the partial data in the memory in case of power
cut. The pulse counter interface is provided with socket for 6 configurators: A1, A2, A3,
G, M, SM.
Front view
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
3522
OUT
Legend

Stand-by absorption:
18 27 Vdc
7.5 mA max
0 40 C
Dimensional data
Basic module: - Length: 40mm

- Width: 40 mm
- Height: 23 mm
Configuration
BT00359-a-UK
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to their own
sockets (physical configuration).
The pulses counter interface is provided with socket for six configurators, which define:
- A1/A2/A3 device address (A1 for the hundreds, A2 for the tens, A3 for the units);
The maximum number of addresses is 255;
- G the group it belongs to (future developments);
- M type of value measured, 1-4;
- SM under 0-3 mode.
958 MY HOME
IN
NOTE: the meter cannot detect pulses of less than 50 ms, and cannot be connected to
sensors sending more than 5 pulses per second (minimum period 200 ms).
Technical data
1
SCS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pulse input
Opto isolated pulse input repetition
Red LED: pulse detection
Green LED: device active
Virtual configuration pushbutton (for future applications)
Configurator socket
SCS/BUS connection
3522
The M configurator indicates the type of value measured by the sensor as shown in the
table:
The SM configurator indicates if the increases of the counted and saved variables, must
be performed every 1, 10, 100 or 1000, pulses as shown in the table:
Configurator in M
Measured value
Configurator in SM
Splitter
Gas volume
Heat
10
Water volume
100
Generic sensor (for future uses)
1000
When configured in 1, 2, 3, 4 mode, it processes and/or saves the following variables:

- Number of units/h: it calculates the number of pulses within the observation time, and
multiplies the result by a set multiplying coecient.
- Total number of pulses: it calculates the total number of pulses.
- Unit count profile: it archives the unit meter information for each hour of each day of
the month, on the basis of the internal clock.
It is generally recommended to leave SM=0. In this case, the value shown coincides with
the one released by the meter pulse output.
Explanatory table:
Unit of measur to display
Meter pulses every
Splitter
Resolutions
Full scale
Litres
Litre
1 (SM=0)
1 Litre/hour
254 Litres/hour
1 m3/ hour
254 m3/ hour
1000 Litres=1m
1 (SM=0)
100 Litres
10 (SM=1)
10 Litres
100 (SM=2)
1 Litre
1000 (SM=3)
Cubic metres
Wiring diagrams
BUS SCS
A1
A2
A3
G
M
SM
IN
3522
Pulse output meter
BT00359-a-UK
SCS
OUT
MY HOME 959
Bus meter with 3 inputs

for toroids
F520
Description
The SCS device measures currents and voltages of separate lines (up to 3), connecting
maximum three toroids to the appropriate inputs (one toroid, item 3523 supplied as standard).
The meter processes and saves the following variables:
- instantaneous power in W;
- total energy accumulated in Wh.
The device has an internal memory that allows saving the following information:
- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the last 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
Front view
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch
Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive the data,
and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided
with socket for 5 configurators: A1, A2, A3-Ta, A3-Tb, A3-Tc.
Technical data

Absorption:
Rated current:
Maximum current:
18 27 Vdc
35 mA max
16 A
90 A
5 40 C
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
3
4
Top view
Configuration
sockets (Physical configuration).
The device is provided with socket for five configurators:
- A1 for the hundreds
- A2 for the tens
- A3Ta for the units
- A3 Tb for the units
- A3 Tc for the units
The combination of the configurators defines:

- A1/A2/A3-Ta address of meter A
- A1/A2/A3-Tb address of meter B
- A1/A2/A3-Tc address of meter C
BT00358-a-UK
The maximum number of addresses is 255.

WARNING: The A3-Ta configurator cannot be zero, differently from configurators A3-Tb
and A3-Tc, which can have a zero value (if the corresponding input is not managed).
The meter must be installed as close as possible to the power supply, to ensure a high
BUS voltage, and enable correct management of memory savings in case of voltage cut.
If the supply voltage is insufficient (below 21 Vdc), the meter will cause the green
LED to flash to signal the installation error. The device will work regularly, but will not
guarantee correct saving and recovery of data in case of BUS failure.
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:
1 Press the key; after 20 seconds the orange LED flashes quickly; release the key.
2 All the cumulative energy data are reset.
960 MY HOME
Legend
2. Pushbutton for the deletion of cumulative energy data
3. Configurator sockets closing door
4. SCS/BUS connection
6. Ta, Tb, Tc connectors for toroids, item 3523
F520
LED notifications based on the status of the power meter:
Device status
LED
Normal operation
GREEN
BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected)
GREEN flashing 500 ms/500 ms
Configuration error
ORANGE flashing irregularly on GREEN
No configuration
ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Wiring diagrams
Connection of the meter to the bus, the line, and the toroid
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BT00358-a-UK
BUS
BUS
MY HOME 961
F521
Description
The central unit for load management is an SCS device that measures the power
consumed by the electric system and controls the status of the Load Management
system actuators, to prevent the risk of tripping of the electric meter.
The device can manage up to 63 actuators (electric loads) per each phase.
The central unit is also capable of processing and saving currents and voltages,
to provide information on energy and power
- instantaneous power in W;
- total energy accumulated in Wh.
Front view
The device has an internal memory that allows saving the following information:
- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the last 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
This information is then made available on the user interfaces, and is displayed through
instantaneous values, totalizers and graphs.
In order to allow the central unit to archive consumption information, the system must
be fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g.
Touch Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive
the data, and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
Technical data

Absorption:
Rated current:
Maximum current:
18 27 Vdc
28 mA max
16 A
90 A
0 40 C
Top view
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
BT00360-a-UK
Configuration
Legend
The central unit for load management is provided with socket for 5 configurators, which
define:
- A1/A2/A3 central unit address (A1 for the hundreds, A2 for the tens, A3 for the units);

The maximum number of addresses is 255.
- P
rated power Rpow
- TOL
tolerance
962 MY HOME

2. Switch on and deletion of cumulative energy data procedures pushbutton
3. Configurator sockets closing door
6. Toroid connection, item 3523
F521
The P configurator is used to select the rated power (Rpow) as shown in the table:
P
Rated power Rpow (kW)
The TOL configurator is used to select the rated power tolerance as shown in the table:
Approximate value in Ampere at 230 Vac(*)
TOL
Tolerance
13
1.5
6.5
-5%
4.5
20
-10%
26
-15%
40
-20%
10.5
46.5
+5%
12
52
+10%
14
61
+15%
15
65
+20%
18
78
NOTE (*): The reference value for the load control thresholds is the one of the rated power
in kW. The Ampere value can be used as general indication to help the installer in those
cases when the service manager supplies the current information.
Load control actuators acquisition
Once the installation stage has been completed, the central unit must acquire the actuators on the bus; unless this operation is carried out, the device will continue signalling lack of
information (fixed orange LED), and no load control function will be carried out.
The procedure for the acquisition of the actuators on the BUS is as follows:
1. Press the key; after approximately 10 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily; release the key.
2. The red LED flashes quickly and the central unit interrogates the system to identify the actuators installed.
3. Once the procedure has been completed, if no actuators have been found the acquisition failed notification (orange LED on steady) remains active, otherwise the LED turns green,
and the central unit starts operating correctly.
The procedure for the acquisition is inhibited if the central unit is not installed correctly (voltage of the bus too low, or 230 V missing), or if an overload is present; it is therefore only
possible to complete the acquisition procedure if the LED is orange steady (installation correct but no actuator acquired), or green steady (system already configured and actuators
acquired).
If the power supply voltage is insufficient (lower than 21 V approximately), the central unit causes the green LED to flash to indicate the installation error: the device works correctly,
but does not ensure the correct saving and recovery of the data in case of BUS error.
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:
1. Press and hold down the key; after approximately 10 seconds, the red LED will turn on steadily; continue holding down the key.
2. After 10 seconds the orange LED flashes quickly. release the key.
3. All the cumulative energy data are reset.
BT00360-a-UK
MY HOME 963
F521
LED notifications based on the status of the Central unit for load management:
Device status
LED
Normal operation (below threshold with all loads enabled)
GREEN
Current threshold exceeded
RED
System not acquired
ORANGE
Current system acquisition
BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected)
GREEN flashing 500 ms/500 ms
Configuration error
ORANGE flashing irregularly on GREEN
No configuration
ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Wiring diagrams
Central unit for load management connection
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BT00360-a-UK
BUS
964 MY HOME
Actuator 16 A with current sensor
F522
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with zero crossing functionality, intended
for the load control and/or automation functions.
The actuator is capable of assessing frequency (50 Hz) and voltage (230 Vac) in an isolated way.
the F521 central unit for load management (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled
if the threshold is exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used
in all configuration software programs. The actuator is fitted with a current sensor for
the measurement of the controlled load consumptions, as well as for the display of the
instantaneous consumption, and 2 energy totalizers that can be reset independently.
In this mode the device can process the following functions:
- measure the input power of the controlled load;
- measure the total power;
- measure the earth leakage current and display on the Touch Screen the status of the
controlled load. This function is only available by connecting the optional external toroid,
item 3523, to the actuator.
Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load for 4 hours after
DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load forcing previously set.
- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception of
those requiring the use of two interlocked relays (shutters);
Automation system.
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay does
not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by a control,
ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation commands
in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required by the last
automation command.
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling. If during
DISABLING stage the relay is switched OFF due to the scheduling settings, when re-enabling
takes place it will stay switched OFF.
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage from
the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided with
socket for 6 configurators: A, PL, M, P1, P2, PF .

with SCS BUS:
18 27 Vdc
Absorption:
30 mA max
Measurement interval:
100 mA 16 A
0 40 C
Incandescent lamps and halogen lamp 10 A / 2300W
LED lamp and compact fluorescent lamp 500 W / Max. 10 lamps
Linear fluorescent lamp and electronic transformer 4 A / 920 W
6
2
3
Top view
Bottom view
7
8
1
5
Legend
2. Load forcing pushbutton
3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future application)
5. BUS connection
7. Toroid connection (Item 3523) for earth leakage current measurement
8. Load connection
BT00361-b-UK
Technical data
Front view
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
MY HOME 965
F522
Configuration
- A/PL/M local address (room, light point) and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2 address/priority in the load control management system (P1= tens, P2= units).
- PF Power Factor for power calculation.
The PF is configured as shown in the table:

PF
Power Factor
Typical loads
0.925 (default)
Hoover, Microwave, Television
Oven, iron, electric heaters, hair straightener, incandescence,

electronic transformers, toroid transformers,
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
CFL lamps
Washing machine, dishwasher, PC (desktop)
Other electronic devices

(Home theatre, DVD recorder, PC notebook, etc)
The parameters listed in the table are only indicative

1) Automation Mode:
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays.
In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicated the device addresses in order
for this to be reached as automation actuator. In order to display the instantaneous and
cumulative consumptions of the controlled load (saved inside the actuator), it will be
necessary to configure also P1 and P2. In this case P1 and P2 shall indicate the address to
be entered in the software programs in order to make it possible to display consumptions
in the dedicated pages.
Possible function
Configurator in M
SLA
PUL
1 41)
1)
BT00361-b-UK
Configurator in M
Time (minutes)
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Load OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Load ON
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
966 MY HOME
F522
In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, in
PF (see table), the A, PL and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Enabled
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
Enabled with consumption lower than

50 W
Fixed ON
Flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF
ORANGE flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF

on GREEN
Forced
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
Disabled
OFF
Fixed ON
RED
Device status
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Enabled + ON
Fixed ON
Fixed ON
ORANGE
Enabled + OFF
Fixed ON
OFF
GREEN
Enabled + ON with consumption lower

than 50 W
Fixed ON
Flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF
ORANGE flahing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF

on GREEN
Disabled
OFF
Fixed ON
RED
Forced + ON
Fixed ON
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flahing 1s/1s on GREEN
Forced + OFF
Flashing 1 s/1 s
Flashing 1 s/1 s
ORANGE flahing 1s/1s
Green LED
Red LED
Result
Device status
OFF Flashing
Configuration error
Fixed ON
Irregularly flashing
ORANGE irregularly on GREEN
No configuration
Fixed ON
ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on

GREEN
BT00361-b-UK
MY HOME 967
F522
Wiring diagrams
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BUS
BT00361-b-UK
3523 (optional)
WARNING: Cables carrying high currents installed vertically
near the actuator (< 5 cm) may cause false measurements
of the integrated current sensor.
In this case move the cables away and keep the phase and
the neutral coupled.
968 MY HOME
LOAD
Energy Data Logger

Description
F524
Lower view
The energy data logger is a device that can be used to:

- Display on the PC or other device (e.g. Smartphone) consumption/production data,
recalling the web pages using an Internet Browser.
- Concentrate and save data consisting of 10 separate energy lines maximum. The lines
can be the electric power lines, by connecting F520 meters, or an F521 Central unit for
load management, or lines for water, gas, or heat consumption, by connecting 3522
pulse counter interfaces.
- Have a more detailed recording of electric data (using the Web pages included in the
device it is possible to download an excel file to have in hand every 15 minutes details
of each single electric line).
- Set several time bands for a more detailed conversion of the electric power value
into an economic value (it is in fact possible to configure up to 8 different tariffs. E.g.
two-hourly tariff, three-hourly tariff). For water and gas lines there are monetary
conversion values without time bands.
- Export the data in excel file
- Have a simple data backup: the device features a housing for a micro SD memory card,
on which consumption details for each individual line are saved daily.
5
2
Technical data

Absorption:
18 - 27 Vdc
30 mA
5 40 C
4
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
Configuration
The device is configured using the WEB pages in the device. For the activation and the
setup of the WEB pages refer to the CD supplied.
WARNING: To activate the Energy Data Logger functions, the date and time must be set
(from WEB pages or other device).
Legend
1. Ethernet cable connection
2. Pushbutton
3. Micro SD memory card housing door
5. Power line/device status LED
BT00521-a-UK
MY HOME 969
970 MY HOME Technical sheets Temperature control
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Temperature control
Technical sheets Temperature control MY HOME 971
Radio outdoor
temperature probe
3455
Description
1
The outside temperature can be measured by means of this radio probe. The data
is then sent through radio waves to the receiving interface, and to the temperature
control system. Central units item HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, item AM5875 and item 3550 can
simply display this data. The automations are reserved just to the 99-zone central unit
item 3550 and can activate controls on the basis of exceeding particular temperature
thresholds set by means of the TiThermo software.
These automations also allow the management of enhanced systems with combination
boiler. Up to nine temperature probes can be installed in a system.
The radio probe is practically maintenance-free and is supplied by a small solar cell
installed on the device. Special care should be taken to install the solar cell in positions
which can guarantee sufficient irradiation.
For applications in badly lit or dark places, where the solar cell cannot supply the
device, power can be supplied by means of a Lithium battery (type LS14250/1/2AA),
to be inserted in the battery compartment. To guarantee the operation of the
battery-supplied probe the battery should be replaced at least every 5 years.
The effective battery lifetime depends on the data updating time setting (see
configuration section).
On the probe printed circuit there is a small key to be used during programming and
when the receiving interface is acquiring the radio probe details.
3
4
5
Front view
Legend
1. Temperature sensor: to measure the temperature
2. Transmission key: allows the association between radio probe and receiving interface
3. Compartment: for lithium battery
4. Solar cell: supplies the entire device
5. Jumpers: to set the temperature update interval
6. IP65 enclosure
Technical data
- Power supply: - solar cell

- 3.6 V / 1.1Ah type LS14250/1/2AA lithium battery
- Operating temperature: (-25) (+40) C
- Measurement field: (-20) (+60) C
- Radio frequency: 868 MHz
- Transmission power: < 10 mW
- Range: 70 m in free field (metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range);
- Protection index: IP65
Side view
Probe installation
CE CONFORMITY
89/336/EWG Electromagnetic compatibility
R&TTE 1999/5/EC Directive on radio and telecommunication devices
BT00182-b-UK
CONFORMITY TO REGULATIONS
ETSI EN 301 489-3
ETSI EN 300 220-3
EN 60669-2-1
EN 60950
EN 60065
EN 60529
NOTE: the probe must be installed in a position away from direct sunlight, as
this may cause a false temperature reading. Avoid both excessively shady and
excessively bright areas.
3455
Temperature display
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor
temperature display
PROBE for temperature

detection and transmission
OK
INTERFACE for
data reception
OK
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor

temperature display
Automation - threshold exceeded LED
T - C1 - C2
on
ART.F482
OK
1
4
7
Interface
for data reception
3
6
9
99-zone central unit
LED
T
C2 C1
Control implementation
actuator
t > 3 C
BT00182-b-UK
Probe for temperature

detection and transmission
2
5
8
0
t < 3 C
TITHERMO for threshold setting

and automation
3455
Automations - system with integration boiler
RISCALDAMENTO
integration
boiler
switching
valve
chiller
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
OK
T
probe
interface
Setting the temperature update interval

The radio probe sends the temperature reading to the receiving interface at regular
intervals that can be manually set using the jumpers, which must be connected to the
T1 and T2 sockets. The update time is calculated following the formula below: T=T1xT2.
The correspondence between the settable times and the jumpers is shown on the
table. When the factory settings are used, the temperature will be updated every 1000
seconds. A change in the factory settings will also entail a variation on the solar cell
recharging time, or the duration of the battery (if applicable).
C2 C1
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
actuator
BT00182-b-UK
T1/T2
1 sec.
99-zone
central unit
BUS
Jumper sockets
Jumper/time table
Jumpers
3
6
9
Factory settings
10 sec.
100 sec.
T = 10 x 100 = 1000 sec
}
}
T1
T2
3455
HC/HS 4577 and L/N/NT4577 receiving interface configuration
In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be
performed, followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs
configuring. Up to 2 probes may be combined with each interface, therefore
providing the system with two detection points for each interface. Up to a
maximum of 9 temperature probes may be installed in one system.
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes addresses.
They are: A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the
second address. The two addresses must always be different from each other,
PL1/N1 PL2/N2. Only one radio probe may be associated to each address. Only
used addresses must be configured. The interface must be configured in
temperature control mode by connecting configurator 1 to M1 and M2.
With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not used, therefore no
configurator needs to be connected.
Programming of devices:
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate the radio probe to
the interface following the programming procedure:
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on.
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators PL1/
N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator is
connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure.
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators PL2/
N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again.
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds.
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the
second address and vice versa.
2) After choosing the address, The radio probe should be associated to, within 20
seconds press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key
will send the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the
red LED of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming
is complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
A/PL1/N1
M1
A2/PL2/N2
M2
Configurator
socket
Interface
P back view
If necessary repeat the operation to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates that
the radio message has been received, and the temperature data has been sent through
the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing indicates
that the radio message has been received, and the temperature data has been sent
through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete all codes
from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds from pressing
the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will start flashing
quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
NOTES:
- If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
- If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected to
the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be possible to
switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
BT00182-b-UK
Air conditioning units control IR emitter
3456
Description
The air conditioning units control IR emitter is a device capable of controlling the air
conditioning units of the air conditioning system by sending infrared controls. All the
controls are sent to the splitter using the Touch Screen, or Multimedia Touch Screen, of
the MY HOME system.
The device may be installed inside flush mounted boxes, behind traditional devices, in
distribution boards, without using a DIN rail space, or inside the splitter. It is fitted with
an IR transmitter with a two metre wire, for connection to the splitter receiver.
The IR transmitter has sockets for 4 configurators: ZA/A, ZB/PL, N, M.
Bottom view
1
6
2
Technical data

with SCS BUS:
Absorption:

18 27 Vdc
15 mA in stand-by
25 mA during transmission peak
5 40 C
Dimensional data
Basic module
Legend
1. BUS connection
3. Remote control IR receiver
4. IR transmitter connector
5. Software programming USB connector
6. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future use)
Configuration
The device can be configured in two separate ways:

1. Physical configuration: by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
2. Virtual configuration: the device is configured remotely, when no physical configurators
are connected (future use).
BT00357-a-UK
1) Basic mode M = 1
In this mode the device can learn up to 20 controls from the air conditioning unit remote
control. These can be recalled by all the devices controlling the scenarios (scenario
control, Local Display, Touch Screen, Multimedia Touch Screen, MH200, MHVisual, Web
server).
In this mode, the device fully becomes part of the automation system, with A/PL
address (the N configurator must be equal to 0). Acquisition of the control is ensured by
connecting the device to the PC with the dedicated software.
Using the IR emitter it is possible to acquire the IR controls from the remote control,
which can then be saved in a personal database.
Using the software, each control can be associated to a number from 1 to 20, and then
downloaded on the IR emitter.
2) Advanced mode M = 0
In this mode the IR emitter provides control of the main functions of the air conditioning
units (temperature, mode, speed and swing) from the Touch Screen and the Multimedia
Touch Screen.
This mode is available for the air conditioning units listed in the database supplied with
the product.
If used with the right air conditioning unit model, the following controls are possible:
- temperature: adjustment 16 30 C
- mode: auto, heating, cooling, dry and fan
- speed: auto, minimum, medium, maximum
- fins oscillation (swing): on - off
3456
Wiring diagrams
IR transmitter connected to the PC for the acquisition of the remote control using the dedicated software
IR transmitter connected to the splitter and the BUS
BUS
BT00357-a-UK
99-zone central unit
3550
Description
This central unit can manage temperature control systems up to 99 zones, set the
system and modify the system operating mode. It is more complete than the 4-zone
flush mounted version; in fact just with item 3550 it can manage the magnetic contacts
installed on the window frames to activate the energy-saving function (switching OFF
the zones affected by any changes of air).
Equipped with management software with guided menus shown on the display, it
allows the user to chose the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various
zones and display and modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs,
while the maintenance menu, reserved for the installer (password protected), allows
access to the system settings (zone configuration, system test, total reset, etc.).
The Central unit can provide both heating and cooling and can manage up to 99 different
zones (with one Master probe for each zone plus possible Slave sensors) and up to 9
circulation pumps.
A contact can be connected in input for remote control by means of a telephone actuator
to switch from the anti-freeze mode to the automatic mode and vice versa (function not
available with item HC/HS4695 and item L/N/NT4695 and AM5875).
By using the serial connector and the TiThermo software, it is possible to program the
unit from a PC.
Legend
1
1
1
4
7
3
6
9
4
5
Technical data

Max. absorption: 75 mA
Operating temperature: 0 40 C
Temperature adjustment range: 3 - 40 C +/ 0.5 C
Size: L=140 mm, H=210 mm, D=35 mm
Rear view
BT00187-b-UK
2
5
8
0
Front view
1. Graphic display: shows the messages which guide the programming operations
and the system state.
2. Navigation keypad: allows navigation within the menus and confirms or deletes
programming operations.
3. Alphanumeric keypad: allows manual entry of all those programming operations
which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
4. Battery compartment: housing for battery item 3507/6.
5. Reset pushbutton: pushbutton to reset the hardware.
6. Serial connector: connects to a PC via cable item 335919 (for RS232) or item 3559
(for USB).
7. Remote control: connection clamp.
8. BUS: BUS connection clamp.
-
-
-
-
-
-
OK
OK
CLEAR
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
YUV
WXVZ
CLEAR
OK
OK
CLEAR
2
3
DEF
2
3
DEF
5
6
JKL
MNO
0
5
6
JKL
MNO
8
9
YUV
WXVZ
8
9
YUV
WXVZ
Graphic display
0
In normal working conditions the Central unit display shows the following
0 information
PQRS
1
1
4
GHI
4
GHI
7
PQRS
7
PQRS
ABC
ABC
3550
Operating mode
on the initial page:
Name of the program

being run
Weekly
Example
Winter
Wed. 01 Oct
Date
Navigation keypad
The scroll keys scroll through the list of items in the menu.
OK
CLEAR
MODE
1 : Weekly
2 : Manual
3 : Scenarios
OK
OK
4 : Holiday
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
The selection keys can select the functions in the menu.
OK
MANUAL
ALL ZONES
1 : Zone 1
2 : Zone 2
OK
OK
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
OK
OK
Manual
OK
00:01
Settimanale
State:
Weekly
Esempio
Example
Winter
(heating)
Weekly
Inverno
Winter
Example
Summer
(Cooling)
Winter
Mer. 01
01
01Ott
Oct00 :00:01
Hour Wed.
Wed. 01 Oct 00:01
MODE
Settimanale
MODE
11:: Weekly
Manuale
12:: Manual
Weekly
2
Scenari
23:: Scenarios
Manual
3
4
:
Festivo
3
:
Scenarios
4 Holiday
4 : Holiday
MANUALE
MANUAL
TUTTE
LE ZONE
ALL
ZONES
MANUAL
ZonaZONES
11
ALL
11:: Zone
2
:
Zona
1 : Zone 22
1
2
2 : ZoneManuale
2
Manual
Manual
Key to confirm the selection or data entered.
CLEAR Key to delete the selection and return to the previous screen; OK
if kept pressed quits the Temperature control menu.
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
OK
OK
OK
BT00187-b-UK
3550
Programming
To complete the learning procedure of all zones within the system, use the item
Configure Zone of the Maintenance menu. It will be necessary to define if the zone
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one. Using the same
menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between: ON/OFF, OPEN/
CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL, and GATEWAY, and indicate which pumps the zone must control,
and the delay. When performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to
the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
Circulation pump
In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps.
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the
Pump item; inside the Maintenance menu, select the zones that must be served by
a circulation pump.
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump
that hydraulically supply them.
To complete the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be
selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system.
Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one circulation pump or several
circulation pumps may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups.
If necessary, it is also possible to set a pump switch-on delay, in relation to the opening
of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary, or needed:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
- in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
- in system where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
conditioning units or electric heating control).
NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
System with one circulation pump

The system shown only has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones,
controlled by two solenoid valves. The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator
configured in zone 00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled
by two different actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of
the two valves remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
BUS
1 2 3 4
2 3
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
ZONE 1
BT00187-b-UK
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
6
ZONE 2
Legend
1. circulation pump
2. pump actuator
3. zone 1 solenoid valve
4. zone 1 actuator
6. zone 2 actuator
3550
System with two circulation pumps
The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators.
The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open
and will stop when both valves are closed. The second group is similar to the first one,
1 2 3 4
2 3
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
but the actuator controlling the pump of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with
progressive number equal to 2 (N=2). Although belonging to the same system, the two
pump/solenoid valve groups are totally independent from each other (see also actuator
configuration).
BUS
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
ZONE 1
8
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
ZONE 2
10
4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
2 3
2 3
ART.F430/2
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
Legend
1. zone 1 and 2 circulation pump
2. pump actuator
4. pump actuator
6. zone 1 actuator
8. zone 2 actuator
10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
ZONE 3
12
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
ZONE 4
BT00187-b-UK
11
3550
TiThermo software
TiThermo is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic graphic
interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central unit,
defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and the profiles
of the various operating programs.
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central unit
firmware.
The software can be used to:
- customize the zones
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF,
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway)
- manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating,
cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
- customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central unit
(e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
- create up to 16 scenarios for each operating mode of the system (Heating and Cooling).
In each scenario also set different temperatures for each area
- export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
with the products.
The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
(see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must therefore be
purchased separately.
TiThermo screenshots
BT00187-b-UK
Actuator 2 relays
F430/2
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as motorised valves, pumps and
electric radiators.
It has two independent relays which can be used to control two distinct loads with
ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/close function.
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
of the two relays and contact C1 must be considered for the opening control and contact
C2 for the closing control.
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2

3
4
C1
C2
Front view
Technical data
Legend

- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 25.5 mA
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock): 14 mA
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA
- Current load of individual relays: 6 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators

2 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps
- Maximum power consumption: 1.7 W
- Operating temperature: 5 40 C
Configuration
configurator
socket
RL1
ZA
ZB1
N1
configurator
socket
RL2
ZA
ZB2
N2
C1 contact
RL1
C2 contact
RL2
The operation of one of the two relays may be excluded. To do this, connect the OFF
configurator to the socket corresponding to ZB1 or ZB2. The two relays may also be
used to control a single load with OPEN/CLOSE function, such as, for example, solenoid
valves with opening and closing control. For the management of these loads, it will be
necessary to configure the actuator with logic relay interlocking, connecting the same
numeric configurator both to ZB and N, therefore ZB1=ZB2 and N1=N2. In using the
contacts, consider contact C1 for the opening control and C2 for the closing control. A
relay configured in zone 00 operates as a circulation pump actuator; for this function,
the two relays cannot be configured as interlocked.
BT00184-b-UK
The item must be configured by connecting the two configurators identifying the
actuator address and the number of the zone they belong to the ZA and ZB sockets.
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during
the definition of the zone.
A probe and an actuator belonging to the same zone will require the same numeric
configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. On the front of the two-relay actuator are five
sockets dedicated to the configurators:
ZA, ZB1, N1, ZB2, N2. The configuration sockets are distributed on the two relays in
the following way:
ZA ZB1 Relay 1 zone address
N1
Relay 1 progressive zone address
N2
Relay 2 progressive zone address
The two relays on the device are independent, and may be used to activate two separate
loads with ON/OFF function, such as: pumps, on/off type motorized valves, and electric
radiators. The diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and
the relay contacts.
1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton

C2 clamps 3 - 4 relay forcing pushbutton
The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
ZB1 or the ZB2 configurator sockets.
2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
F430/2
Configurator summary table:
Socket
Function
Configurator
ZA
zone address
09
ZB1
Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management circulation pump mode - OFF zone
0 9 OFF
N1
progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management circulation pump progressive number
19
ZB2
Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management circulation pump mode - OFF zone
0 9 OFF
N2
progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management circulation pump progressive number
19
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of the solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in two different zones (zone 1 and zone 2). The progressive zone number is 1.
Legend
1. actuator
4. zone 1 radiator
5. zone 2 radiator
2
5
1
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
BT00184-b-UK
C1
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C2
L
BUS
Actuator configuration
ZA
0
ZB1
1
N1
1
ZB2
2
N2
1
RL1/C1
ON/OFF
RL2/C2
ON/OFF
F430/2
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two electric radiators within the same zone (zone 4). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
Legend
1. actuator
2. electric radiators, zone 4
1
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
C1
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C2
L
BUS
ZA
0
ZB1
4
N1
1
ZB2
4
N2
2
RL1/C1
ON/OFF
RL2/C2
ON/OFF
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of a zone pump (in zone 7). The progressive zone numbers is 1. As relay RL2 is not used, it is excluded.
3
4
Legend
1. actuator
2. check valve
3. zone 7 pump
4. radiant panels
N
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1
L
BT00184-b-UK
C1 C2
C2 DISCONNECTED
BUS
ZA
0
ZB1
7
N1
1
ZB2
OFF
N2
-
RL1/C1
ON/OFF
RL2/C2
Excluded
F430/2
Example 4
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two circulation pumps (zone 00). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
Legend
1. actuator
2. boiler
3. refrigerator (chiller)
4. heating circulation pump
5. cooling circulation pump
6. radiator
7. fan-coil
HEATING
1
N
C1
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C2
3
ZA
0
ZB1
0
N1
1
ZB2
0
N2
2
RL1/C1
Pump 1
RL2/C2
Pump 2
BUS
COOLING
Example 5
Configuration and connection of the 2 interlocking relays actuator, for the control of a solenoid valve with opening and closing control in zone 16.
C1
1 2 3 4
1
2 3
OPEN
N
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C2
CLOSE
BT00184-b-UK
BUS
ZA
1
ZB1
6
N1
2
ZB2
6
N2
2
RL1/C1
OPEN
RL2/C2
CLOSE
Legend
1. actuator
2. solenoid valve with open/close control
3. zone 16 radiator
4. zone 16 radiator
Actuator 4 relays
F430/4
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as 3-speed fan-coils, motorised
valves, pumps and electric radiators.
It has four relays,with independent control but common contacts, which can be used to
control two distinct loads with ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/
close function.
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
of the two relays and contacts C1/C2 respectively must be considered to open and close
the first valve and contacts C3/C4 to open and close the second valve.
The contacts assume different functions when the actuator is used to control fan-coils.
Contact C1 is an ON/OFF contact and controls the valve. Contacts C2, C3 and C4 control
the ventilation minimum, average and maximum speed respectively. The fan speed is
selected automatically depending on the difference between the temperature set by the
user and the room temperature.
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1
C2 C3 C4
1
2
3
4
Front view
C1
C2
C3
C4
Technical data
Legend

- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 37.5 mA
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock or Fan Coil control): 20.5 mA
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA
- Current load of individual relays: 4 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators

1 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps
- Maximum power consumption: 3.2 W
- Operating temperature: 5 40 C
1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton

The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
ZB1, ZB2, ZB3 or the ZB4 configurator sockets.
2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
Configuration
the OFF configurator to the ZB socket corresponding to the relay not being used.
However, RL1 cannot be excluded.
The actuator may also be used to control two single loads with Open/Close function,
such as, for example, solenoid valves with opening and closing control. For the
management of these load it will be necessary to configure the actuator with logic
relay interlocking, connecting two consecutive identical configurators in the ZB socket,
therefore ZB1=ZB2 and ZB3=ZB4. For the use of the contacts consider C1 and C2 for
the opening and the closing of the first valve respectively, and contacts C3 and C4 for the
opening and the closing of the second valve.
The contacts of the relays perform different functions if the actuator is used to control
fan-coils. To activate this function, connect 4 identical configurators to the ZB position,
therefore ZB1=ZB2=ZB3=ZB4.
The C1 contact is an ON/OFF type contact and controls the valve, controls C2, C3 and C4
control the minimum, medium and maximum ventilation speeds respectively.
BT00185-b-UK
In the same way as for the 2-relay actuator, it is necessary to connect the two
configurators that identify the item address, and the number of the zone the item
belongs to, to the ZA and ZB sockets. A probe and an actuator belonging to the same
zone will require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets.
On the front of the 4-relay actuator are six sockets dedicated to the configurators: ZA,
ZB1, ZB2, ZB3, ZB4, N. The configuration sockets are distributed on the four relays in
the following way:
N
progressive zone number
The relays on the device are independent and may be used to activate four separate
loads with ON/OFF function. Therefore, if all ZB configurators are different from each
other, the four relays are configured to control four loads in four different zones. The
diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and the contacts
of the relays. The operation of one or more relays may be excluded. To do this, connect
F430/4
The ventilation speed is selected automatically by the temperature control function
based on the difference between the user set temperature and the room temperature.
This actuator cannot be used to control the system circulation pump (configurator in
zone 00), and to control separate loads belonging to the same zone.
common
C1 contact RL1
ZA
ZB2
C2 contact RL2
configurator
socekt RL3
ZA
ZB3
C3 contact RL3
configurator
socket RL4
ZA
ZB4
C4 contact RL4
configurator
socket RL1
ZA
ZB1
configurator
socket RL2

Socket
ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
N
Function
zone address
zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - Fan-Coil management - OFF zone
Configurator
09
0 9 OFF
0 9 OFF
0 9 OFF
0 9 OFF
19
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of four solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in four different zones (zone 11, zone 12, zone 15 and zone 18).
The progressive zone number is 1.
C1
1
BT00185-b-UK
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Legend
1. actuator
6. zone 11 radiator
7. zone 12 radiator
8. zone 15 radiator
9. zone 18 radiator
C2
C3
C4
N
L
BUS
ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
RL1/C1
RL2/C2
RL3/C3
RL4/C4
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
F430/4
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 4 interlocking relays actuator for the control of two solenoid valves, with opening and closing control in zones 2 and 3.
The progressive zone number is 2.
2
4
Legend
1. actuator
4. zone 2 radiator
5. zone 3 radiator
C1 OPEN
C2 CLOSE
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C3 OPEN
C4 CLOSE
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
3
5
BUS
ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
RL1/C1
RL2/C2
RL3/C3
RL4/C4
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of a 3 speed fan-coil in zone 69. The progressive zone numbers is 4.
1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
Note
If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature probe
for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted sensor is used,
an effective solution is to install an immersion thermostat
on the water return pipe. The contact of the thermostat
controls a remote switch, to which the fan-coil power
supplies are connected.
C1 SOLENOID VALVE
C2 MIN. SPEED
C3 MEDIUM SPEED
C4 MAX. SPEED
BT00185-b-UK
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Legend
1. actuator
2. 2-pipe 3-speed fan-coil
BUS
ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
RL1/C1
RL2/C2
RL3/C3
Valve
Minimum Medium
speed
speed
fan
fan
RL4/C4
Maximum
speed
fan
F430/4
Example 4
Configuration and connection of two 4-relay actuators (one for the cooling, and one for
the heating system), for the control of a 4-pipe, 3 speed fan-coil. For both actuators the
corresponding zone is 28. The progressive number for the cooling actuator is 5, while for
the heating actuator is 6.
The C1 contact of each actuator controls the corresponding solenoid valve, selected by
the temperature control function based on the system setting (summer or winter). The
C2, C3 and C4 contacts of the two actuators must be connected in parallel, to control the
switching on and the speed of the ventilation system electric motor.
COOLING
HEATING
RISCALDAMENTO
L
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
BUS
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1
SOLENOID VALVE
C2
MIN. SPEED
C3
MEDIUM SPEED
C4
MAX. SPEED
Legend
1. refrigerator (chiller)
2. boiler
3. cooling actuator
4. heating actuator
5. 4-pipe fan-coil
Note
If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature
sensor for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted
sensor is used, an effective solution is to install an
immersion thermostat on the water return pipe.
The contact of the thermostat controls a remote switch,
to which the fan-coil power supplies are connected.
1 2 3 4 5
BUS
1 2 3 4 5
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1
SOLENOID VALVE
C2
MIN. SPEED
C3
MEDIUM SPEED
C4
MAX. SPEED
BT00185-b-UK
Cooling actuator configuration

ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
RL1/C1
RL2/C2
RL3/C3
RL4/C4
Valve
Minimum
speed fan
Medium
speed fan
Maximum speed
fan
Heating actuator configuration

ZA
ZB1
ZB2
ZB3
ZB4
RL1/C1
RL2/C2
RL3/C3
RL4/C4
Valve
Minimum
speed fan
Medium
speed fan
Maximum speed
fan
Gateway
Description
This device represents the interface between the MY HOME Temperature control system
and the Climaveneta IDRORELAX system.
The item allows the passage of the controls produced by the bus system toward the
fan-coil. It is necessary to consider one for each fan-coil, thus correctly scaling the bus
system as regards absorption and configuration.
As a matter of fact, the item is housed inside the fan-coil during the production phase
thus it is already connected to it by means of the connector located at the top of the front
side. Basically, after performing the hydraulic and electrical connection, you will only
need to connect the bus using the appropriate clamp.
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connector: for Climaveneta fan-coil connection

Configurator socket: socket for the configurators
Removable connector clamp for SCS BUS connection
LED: not used.
Key: not used.
5
4
3
Technical data
-
-
-
-
-

Size: 2 DIN modules
Front view
Configuration
The item is the interface that can be found on the Climaveneta Chiller and the Fan-Coil. It
is necessary for the connection to the temperature control BUS. As for the actuators, also
for this device it will be necessary to connect to the ZA and ZB sockets two configurators
that identify the address, and the number of the zone it belongs to.
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during
the definition of the zone. A probe and a Gateway belonging to the same zone will
require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets.
The TYPE socket must be configured to indicate the type of load to be managed.
If the Gateway manages a Fan-Coil, the numeric configurator 0 must be connected to the
TYPE socket, If it manages a Chiller, numeric configurator 1 will be required.
When the Gateway is configured for the management of the Chiller, it will be possible to
read the external temperature coming from the Climaveneta Chiller.
This information may be simply displayed, or , in case the system is managed by the
99 zone central unit, item 3550, it may be used to program and activate temperature
control automations.
Depending on needs, temperature control automations may activate certain actions with
certain temperature conditions. For example, in case thresholds that may be manually
set are exceeded, the temperature control system may automatically switch the settings
from summer to winter, and vice versa. On the front of the interface are four sockets
dedicated to the configurators:
ZA ZB zone address
N
TYPE type of load to control (Fan-Coil or Chiller)
NOTE: Gateway is a Climaveneta product that can already be found on fan-coils. For
further information and for the technical documentation of the Climaveneta IDRORELAX
system, contact the Customer Service Toll Free number 800.019.190 (8.30-12.30
and 14.00-18.00 Monday to Friday - calls are free of charge).
Socket
Function
Configurator
ZA
Zone address
09
ZB
Zone address
09
Progressive zone number
19
Fan-Coil management
Chiller management
TYPE
BT00186-b-UK
Radio interface for outdoor

temperature probes
HD4577 - HC4577 - HS4577

L4577 - N4577 - NT4577
Description
The radio interface is indispensable to receive the temperature data transmitted by the
radio probe. Up to two probes can be associated with each interface thus giving the
system two measuring points for each interface. Up to nine temperature probes can be
installed in a system.
Both the interface and the communication probe use radio waves with a frequency of
868 MHz. The maximum distance of communication between the receiving interface
and the temperature sensor is 70 m in free air. This distance is less if there are walls in
cement, metal or other material between the devices.
LED
programming
pushbutton
Technical data
-
-
-
-
-
-

-
Front view

Radio frequency: 868 MHz
Range: 70 m in free field (metal walls and surround plates
and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range);
A
PL1/N1
M1
A2/PL2/N2
M2
Configuration
In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be performed,
followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs configuring. Up to 2 probes
may be combined with each interface, therefore providing the system with two detection
points for each interface. Up to a maximum of 9 temperature sensors may be installed in one
system.
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes address.
They are: A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the second address.
The two addresses must always be different from each other, PL1/N1 PL2/N2. Only one
radio probe may be associated to each address. Only used addresses must be configured.
The interface must be configured in temperature control mode by connecting
configurator 1 to M1 and M2. With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not used, therefore
no configurator needs to be connected.
Programming of devices:
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate The radio probe to
the interface following the programming procedure below:
BT00183-b-UK
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on.
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators
PL1/N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator
is connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure.
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators
PL2/N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again.
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds.
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the
second address and vice versa.
configurator
socket
BUS
Rear view
If necessary repeat the operation, to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
the memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates
that the radio message has been received, and the temperature data has been sent
through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing
indicates that the radio message has been received, and the temperature data has
been sent through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete
all codes from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds
from pressing the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will
start flashing quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
NOTES:
- If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
- If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected
to the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be
possible to switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
2) After choosing the address the radio probe should be associated to, within 20 seconds
press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key will send
the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the red LED
of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming is
complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692

N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Probe with selector

Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit.
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to 3C with respect to
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults.
-3
1
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it.
Antifrost/thermal protection mode
In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in master configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points. This
function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can vary
appreciably.
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received,
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter
setting.
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8
slave probes (4693).
3
4
Front view
ZA
ZB
SLA
configurator
socket
BUS
Rear view
Legend
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
2. Knob: for manual temperature setting ( 3C), to select the antifrost/thermal
protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off).
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
4. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P, MOD and DEL
configurator sockets have been removed.
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS cable: 1827 Vdc
Absorption: 6 mA
Operating temperature: 0 40C
Size: 2 modules
Installation height: 1500 m from the floor
BT00179-b-UK
-
-
-
-
-
-
HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692

N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and
ZB sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled
Socket
ZA
ZB
SLA
by the probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the
same zone address.
Function
zone address
zone address
Master/Slave mode
Configurators
09
09
08
The probe can be configured remotely with Virtual Configuration. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
Using the Configure zones item of the Maintenance menu of the temperature control
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating
system, a cooling system, or a combined one.Using the same menu item, also select the
Master and Slave probe
A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points within
the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, throughout
which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, one probe must
be configured as Master, and one or more probes must be configured as Slave(max 8). The
Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, and the temperatures
measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate operations. Configure
the Master probe by connecting to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47), with one Master, and three
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD
sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes).
number of Slave probes within the zone (8 max). To configure a Slave probe, connect
the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively
assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it
is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing
any numbers. The HC/HS/L/N/NT4692 and AM5872 probe can only operate as
MASTER probes. Therefore only the probe without knob, item 4693, may be
used as a SLAVE probe.
Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the Master probe (there are three Slave
probes inside the zone); Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA sockets of the
three Slave probes respectively (progressive number of the probe within the zone).
SLAVE 2
PROBE
SLAVE 1
PROBE
SLAVE 3
PROBE
-3
MASTER
PROBE
type of load to control, among the following: ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When
performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to the installation
manual supplied with the central unit itself.
-2 -1
+3
+2
OF
+1
t ROOM = 20C
t ROOM = 19C
t ROOM = 18C
t ROOM = 21C
BT00179-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.5C
Master probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692 and AM5872)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
4
ZB
7
SLA
3
Slave 1 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
4
ZB
7
SLA
1
MOD
SLA
Slave 2 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
4
ZB
7
SLA
2
MOD
SLA
Slave 3 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
4
ZB
7
SLA
3
MOD
SLA
HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692

N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Circulation pump
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the Pump item; inside
the Maintenance menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump.
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating,
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one
circulation pump or several circulation pumps may be installed, to supply one or more
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a pump switch-on delay, in relation
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
Pump switch-on delay

If necessary, it is also possible to set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
manufacturer.
Probe calibration
Probes dont normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
(perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
the room.
Note: For more details on the calibration procedure and the programming operations
using the central unit, refer to the installation manual of the central unit.
BT00179-b-UK
Fan-coil probe
with selector
HD4692FAN - HC4692FAN - HS4692FAN

L4692FAN - N4692FAN - NT4692FAN
Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit.
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to 3C with respect to
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults.
6
5
4
-3
-2
-1
+1

In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in master configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points.
This function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can
vary appreciably.
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received,
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter
setting.
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8
slave probes (4693).
Legend
BT00181-b-UK
1. Knob: for manual temperature setting ( 3 C), to select the antifrost/thermal

protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off).
2. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
4. Key used to enable virtual configuration, and for the switching of the mode and
speed of the fan-coil. Use this key to select between Automatic (fan speed
managed by the probe) and Manual (fan speed selected among minimum,
medium, and maximum) mode.
5. Red LED: when on, it indicates that Automatic mode is active, when off, it
indicates that Manual mode is active.
6. Red LEDs: they indicate the fan speed settings: from left to right, the speeds are:
minimum, medium, maximum.
+3
+2
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it.
OFF
3
2
Front view
ZA
ZB
SLA
configurator
socket
BUS
Rear view

Configuration
This probe has been specifically designed to manage 3-speed fan-coils and Climaveneta
fan-coils. The probe only has 3 configurator sockets: ZA, ZB, SLA. The ZA and ZB sockets
must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting two configurators,
Socket
ZA
ZB
SLA
identifying the address of the device, and the number of the zone controlled by the
probe itself.
The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the same zone address.
Function
zone address
zone address
Master mode
Configurators
09
09
08
The probe can be configured remotely with Virtual Configuration.

When no physical configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software
version 2.1 must be used.
Programming
system, a cooling system, or a combined one.
Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming
operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the
central unit itself.

calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas,
throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function,
one probe must be configured as Master, and one or more probes must be configured as
Slave (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature,
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate
operations. The 4692FAN probe can only operate as Master. Therefore only probe 4693
may be used as Slave. To configure the Master probe, in addition to the zone address, it will
be sufficient to connect to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the number
of Slave probes installed within the zone (max 8). To configure a Slave probe, connect the
configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively assign
a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it is essential
to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to zone 59, connect configurators 5 and 9 to the ZA
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the
Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone). The SLA configurator must
be connected to the MOD sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes).
Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 respectively to the SLA socket of the three Slave
probes (progressive number of the probe within the zone).
MASTER
PROBE
SLAVE 2
PROBE
SLAVE 1
PROBE
SLAVE 3
PROBE
-3
-2
-1
OFF
+3
+2
+1
t ROOM = 17C
t ROOM = 21C
t ROOM = 19C
t ROOM = 20C
Master Probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692FAN)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
5
ZB
9
SLA
3
Slave 1 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
5
ZB
9
MOD
SLA
SLA
1
Slave 2 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
5
ZB
9
MOD
SLA
SLA
2
Slave 3 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
5
ZB
9
MOD
SLA
SLA
3
BT00181-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.25C

Circulation pump
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the temperature central
unit. Through the Pump item, inside the Maintenance menu, select the zones that
must be served by a circulation pump. Using the programming procedure, set a logic
link between the zones, and the pump that hydraulically supplies them. To complete
the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be selected, thus
defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on
the needs of the hydraulic system, one circulation pump or several circulation pumps
may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set
a pump switch-on delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves.
In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:

- in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
Probe calibration
the room.
BT00181-b-UK
HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693

L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Probe without selector

Description
The device can be used to control the room temperature, based on daily rhythms, both in
winter and in summer. On the front of the device are a green and a yellow LED. The green
led indicates that the device is working correctly.
The yellow LED indicates the status of the actuators, and any possible fault on the same.
The front of the item does not have any controls. This makes the device ideal for
installation in public places, so that any improper intervention may be prevented. The
anti-freeze/thermal protection and OFF modes can only be selected from the central
unit.
OFF mode
Set this mode to turn the corresponding zone off.
2
3

By selecting this mode, if the temperature control system is set for heating, the probe
operates in anti-freeze mode. If the system is set for cooling, the probe operates in
thermal protection mode. The probe can also operate together with other probes of the
same type in slave or master configuration, to enable the central unit to calculate an
average of the temperatures taken from several detection points. This function is useful
for the management of very large areas, throughout which the temperature may change
consistently. In case of central unit fault, the probe will continue to work implementing
the last settings received, and therefore the last temperature set in the summer or
winter programs. However, the OFF mode also has priority in case of central unit fault.
Therefore, in this case the zone controlled by the probe will stay off. The probe can be
used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators and 8 slave probes of the same type.
Front view
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
configurator
socket
BUS
Legend
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
2. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the actuators
in the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
3. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active.
Rear view
NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P and DEL configurator sockets
have been removed.
Technical data
-
-
-
-
-
-

Absorption: 6 mA
Size: 2 modules
BT00180-b-UK
HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693

L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and
ZB sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled
Socket
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
by the probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the
same zone address.
Function
zone address
zone address
Master/Slave mode
Master/Slave mode
Configurators
09
09
0 - SLA
08
The probe can be configured remotely with Virtual Configuration. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
system, a cooling system, or a combined one.
Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When performing programming operations from
the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.

throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function,
one probe must be configured as Master, and one or more probes must be configured as
Slave (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature,
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate
operations. The 4693 probe can operate as Master if configurator 0 is connected to the
MOD socket, and a configurator indicating the number of SLAVE probes present inside
the zone (max 8) is connected to the SLA socket. The same probe can operate as Slave if a
configurator marked as SLA is connected to the MOD socket, and a configurator with the
progressive SLAVE probe number within the ZONE is connected to the SLA socket. During
this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is
respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 0 to the MOD socket of the
Master probe. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD socket of the three
Slave probes (definition of Slave probes). Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of
the Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone); connect configurators
no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA socket of the three Slave probes respectively (progressive
number of the probe within the zone).
t ROOM = 21C
t ROOM = 19C
t ROOM = 18C
t ROOM = 20C
SLAVE 3
PROBE
SLAVE 2
PROBE
SLAVE 1
PROBE
MASTER
PROBE
BT00180-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.5C
Master Probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
Slave 1 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
Slave 2 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
Slave 3 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
ZA
ZB
MOD
SLA
4
7
0
3
4
7
SLA
1
4
7
SLA
2
4
7
SLA
3
HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693

L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Circulation pump
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
Pump switch-on delay

If necessary, it is also possible set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
manufacturer.
NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
Probe calibration
the room.
BT00180-b-UK
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
4-zone central unit

Description
This central unit can manage MY HOME temperature control systems with up to 4 zones,
with a maximum of 9 circulation pumps. It can control heating or cooling systems and
can set the system and modify the system operating mode.
The central unit is made up mechanically of two parts: a base to fasten on the supporting
frame for wall mounted boxes to which the bus is connected and a removable front
cover for easy programming with the settings required. The device communicates
with and is supplied by the bus, while the two AA batteries supply power when the
removable part is not inserted in the supporting frame. The central unit has a probe
which already represents a system zone and the configuration sockets are in fact on the
back part. Another three probes can be connected to reach the absolute number of zones
which the system can manage in this case (a maximum of 4 zones in total). Coming
with management software with guided menu shown on the display, it lets the user
select the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various zones and display
and modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs; the maintenance
menu, reserved to the installer and code protected, allows access to the system settings
(zone configuration, system test, total reset, etc.).
The temperature central unit has a graphic display with blue back-lighting in the
AXOLUTE series and green back-lighting in the LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and Mtix
series. By means of the six keys on the device front cover all the functions can be used
interacting with the various menu items. The complete programming of the central unit
by PC can be activated through the serial connector and the TiThermo BASIC software.
OK
Plug-in section
front view
9
Legend
Plug-in section
back view
1. Graphic display: displays the system state and guides the programming operations.
2. Selection keys: can set the operating mode and select the functions.
3. OK key: to access the main menu or confirm the selection displayed.
4. Sensor: to measure the room temperature.
5. C key: to cancel the selection.
6. Scroll keys: to modify the temperature using the main screen;
to scroll the menu items.
7. Connector: connection to the electronics in the back base.
8. Serial connector: for connection to the PC and use of TiThermo BASIC.
9. Battery compartment: socket for 2 AA 1.5V batteries.
10. Screw: to block central unit extraction.
11. Configurator socket: socket of the configurators for the combined probe.
12. BUS: connection for cable bus.
10
ZA
ZB
SLA
11
12
Fixed section
back view
Technical data
BT00178-b-UK
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc and 3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)
Absorption: 30 mA with the light on
Absorption: 8.5 mA with the light off
Size: 2 modules
Summer/Winter
system state
18.0C
20.6C
weekly
program
02 : 45
Graphic display
During normal operation the central unit graphic display shows the system basic
information, while the screen light stays off. When a key is pressed, the display illuminates
and the central unit is ready to implement any instructions entered by the user.
hour
Mar
22
Ago
measured
temperature
daily profile
date
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Removable system
The central unit is made up of a base for the connection to the system bus cable and a
removable front cover with batteries. The system so formed lets the user perform the
programming operations and replace the batteries easily.
Configuration
Differently from the 99 zone version, the 4 zone flush mounted central unit must be
configured. This central unit is fitted with an integrated temperature probe, and
therefore it must be configured. The configuration sockets on the back of the central
unit are in fact intended and reserved for the integrated probe. They are: ZA, ZB and SLA.
The ZA and ZB sockets must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting
two configurators that identify the address, and the number of the zone controlled by
the probe itself. It is not necessary to start with zone 01, although it is fundamental
that the values of the subsequent zones are immediately after those of the central unit
itself. The configuration procedure requires the completing of the operations using the
Configuration menu of the central unit, and the activation of the Learning function.
In fact, the search within the system is performed on 3 zone addresses that follow the
one assigned to the central unit itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be
configured with the same zone address.
Base
Removable
front cover
Socket
Function
Configurators
ZA
zone address
09
ZB
zone address
09
SLA
Master mode
08
+3
+1
-3
-2
-3
-2
-1
-3
OFF
-2
+1
OFF
-1
OFF
Gen
+2
+3
07
Zone 15
probe
+2
Ven
+3
13 : 38
+2
23.7C
Zone 14
probe
+1
Zone 13
probe
18.0C
-1
Zone 12
central unit
OK
Power supply
BUS
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
Zone 12
actuator
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
Zone 13
actuator
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
Zone 14
actuator
ART. F430/2
C1
C2
BT00178-b-UK
1 2 3 4
Zone 15
actuator
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Programming
The central unit must be used to set the operating mode of the integrated probe fitted
inside. Using the Configuration item of the Maintenance menu, define if the zone
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one.
Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between:
ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming
operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the
central unit itself.
throughout which the temperature may change consistently
To activate this function, one probe must be configured as Master, and one or more
probes must be configured as Slave (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average
between its own temperature, and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and
then performs the appropriate operations. The integrated probe fitted inside the central
unit can only operate as Master. Therefore, for the slave function, only probe item 4693
may be used. In addition to the zone address, in order to configure the integrated probe
as Master it will be sufficient to connect a numeric configurator to the SLA socket, which
should indicate the number of Slave probes within the zone, up to 8 maximum.
4 zone central unit calibration

The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off
for at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g.
by opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
the room.
To configure a Slave probe, connect the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket.
Use the SLA socket to progressively assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone.
During this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the
sequence is respected, without missing any numbers.
SLAVE 1
PROBE
MASTER
PROBE
CENTRAL
UNIT
C
SLAVE 2
PROBE
SLAVE 3
PROBE
OK
t ROOM = 21 C
t ROOM = 18 C
t ROOM = 19 C
t ROOM = 20 C
AVERAGE t = 19.5 C
BT00178-b-UK
Central unit/Master Probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875)
Slave 1 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Slave 2 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Slave 3 probe
(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket
Configurators
Socket
Configurators
Socket
Configurators
Socket
Configurators
ZA
ZA
ZA
ZA
ZB
ZB
ZB
ZB
SLA
MOD
SLA
MOD
SLA
MOD
SLA
SLA
SLA
SLA
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
System with a circulation pump
The system shown only has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones,
controlled by two solenoid valves. The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator
configured in zone 00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled
by two different actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of
the two valves remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
Circulation pump
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary,
or needed:
4 zone central unit calibration

The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off
for at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g.
by opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
the room.
BUS
1 2 3 4
2 3
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
ZONE 1
2 3
ART.F430/2
6
ZONE 2
Legend
1. Circulation pump
2. pump actuator
4. zone 1 actuator
6. zone 2 actuator
BT00178-b-UK
1 2 3 4
C1 C2
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
System with two circulation pumps
The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators. The circulation
pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open and will stop
when both valves are closed.
1 2 3 4
2 3
The second group is similar to the first one, but the actuator controlling the pump
of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 2 (N=2).
Although belonging to the same system, the two pump/solenoid valve groups are totally
independent from each other (see also actuator configuration).
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
BUS
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
ZONE 1
8
1 2 3 4
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
ZONE 2
10
4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
2 3
2 3
ART.F430/2
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
C1 C2
ZONE 3
12
1 2 3 4
BT00178-b-UK
2 3
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
11
ZONE 4
Legend
2. pump actuator
4. pump actuator
6. zone 1 actuator
8. zone 2 actuator
10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695

N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
TiThermo Basic software
TiThermo Basic is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic
graphic interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central
unit, defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and
the profiles of the various operating programs.
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central
unit firmware.
The software can be used to:
- customize the zones
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF,
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway)
- manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating,
cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
- customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central
unit (e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
- export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
with the products.
The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
(see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must therefore be
purchased separately.
ART. 3559
item 3559
TiThermo Basic screenshots
BT00178-b-UK
1008 MY HOME
Technical sheets Sound system
CONTENTS
MY HOME 1009
Insulator for sound sources
3495
Description
The insulator for sound sources is a device which can adapt the audio signal from the
external sound sources to the Sound system keeping the BUS with SELV features. The
insulator for sound sources must always be used when the sound source is not battery
powered. The device is made up of 4 female RCA clamps divided between IN and OUT.
Connect the external sound source on the IN clamps, and connect the stereo interface
to the OUT clamps, (RCA input item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4560 - AM5740).
3495
L
IN
Technical data
OUT
Legend
IN clamps:
OUT clamps:
Response in frequency at mW/600 :
Response in frequency at mW/600 :
IN/OUT insulation:
RCA female impedance 680

RCA female impedance 680
60 Hz-20 kHz
30 Hz-20 kHz
1500 Vrms
1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input

2. RCA female connectors for stereo interfaces (inputs RCA).
RCA-RCA cable supplied.
BT00001-c-UK
1010 MY HOME
IP Touch Screen
adapter
3496
Description
This accessory, to be used in conjunction with L4684, H4684, HW4684 or AM5864 TOUCH
SCREENS can be used to play remote audio files found on the server (e.g. on the PC
connected to the local network), or audio IP Contents (e.g. radio streaming), through
2 wire stereo sound systems. By using the RJ45 connection of the TOUCH SCREEN, and
connecting this to the local network linked to the PC, server etc., the TOUCH SCREEN
adapter sends the audio files of the various devices towards the Sound System.
3496
Installation mode
H4684
HW4684
L4684
AM5864
3496
Ethernet (1)
BUS (2)
(3)
F441
F441M
BT00007-b-UK
NOTE: (1) cable connection to the local LAN network.

(2) the BUS line output must be connected to the mixers item F441 or item F441M, or to the power supply line of the BUS themselves. In case of integration with the
Automation system, it may be connected to the automation BUS.

(3) when connected to the F441M matrix, the device cannot be wired to the S1 clamp of the sound sources.
MY HOME 1011
Radio tuner
F500N
Description
The radio tuners item F500N can receive FM radio stations. The front pushbuttons and
the backlit display adjust the device locally, save 15 radio stations and display RDS
messages and the tuned frequency.
It is also capable of performing two types of station searches: manual and automatic.
The device can be managed (switching ON and OFF, frequency change, etc.) both locally
and remotely (via the SCS BUS) using the flush mounted amplifier, or the MY HOME
control devices (e.g. Touch Screen and Local Display).
In order to receive the radio channels correctly the type of antenna used must be
selected: if the F500N is installed in a zone of the building with sufficient signal
strength, the wire antenna can be used. If the signal strength inside the building is not
sufficient, the external antenna can be used (e.g. antenna installed on the roof), using
the coaxial connector and the appropriate adapter cable. The type of antenna is selected
using the configurator.
1
2
7
Technical data

Max. absorption:
Absorption in stand-by:
Dissipated power:
FM reception band:
18 27 Vdc
20 mA @27 V 25 mA @18 V
5 mA @27 V 9 mA @18 V
0.5 W
5 - 45 C
87.5 108 MHz
Antenna to be connected
Maximum level (*):
Minimum level (*):
70 dBV
40 dBV (mono) - 50 dBV (stereo)
(*) The maximum and minimum levels that must be guaranteed at the antenna socket
for correct FM band reception.
Legend
1. Wire antenna
2. MCX connector for the outdoor antenna (e.g. roof antenna) (*)
3. Green LED on steady: good quality signal reception
4. Red LED on steady: stereo reception (mono reception when off)
Dimensional data
6. Removable 2 pole connector for the connection to the SCS BUS of the sound system
4 DIN modules
7. Radio tuner programming and radio program scanning keys
Configuration
S MEM ANT
Frequency decrease
Frequency increase
Selection/storage of stations (short/extended pressure)
Frequency scanning mode: manual/automatic

Press at the same time for 5 seconds to store the station in the memory
S:
1 4 local address of the source
8. LED backlit display for the display of frequency, RDS messages, and stored stations
BT00391-a-UK
MEM: number of stations that can be stored

Configurator
No. of stations
10
15
ANT: this indicates the type of antenna used by the radio

Configurator
Type of antenna
Indoor (wire)
Outdoor (Coax)
1012 MY HOME
(*) Cable with MCX-F connector supplied as standard.
Amplifier for DIN rail
F502
Description
This amplifier, fitted with hooking device for installation on DIN rail, is particularly suited
for non residential applications, or in more general terms, where there are no space
constraints inside distribution boards/switchboards. Directly powered by the power line
voltage, the low level of current consumption on the BUS makes multiple installations
possible (max. 40 amplifiers and 80 loudspeakers). Depending on its configuration, a
stereo or a mono signal can be set on the output towards the loudspeakers. Loudspeakers
with both 8 and 16 impedance may be connected to the amplifier. The device may be
controlled using either its own keys, the TOUCH SCREEN, or special controls.
6
5
Technical data
BUS voltage:
Power supply:
Absorption on the BUS:
Absorption on the line:
Dissipated power:
Power (on 8 ):

TYP channel balancing:
MIN channel balancing:
Frequency range @ -3 dB:
18-27 Vdc
110-230 Vac (50 60 Hz)
5 mA
110 mA (at 110 Vac) 56 mA (at 230 Vac)
2W
5 - 45 C
2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms)
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
0.5 dB
1.5 dB
20 Hz20 kHz (su 8 )
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
Configuration
A: 1-9
PF: 0-9
M1*: -

4
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
clamp for connection of the power supply

clamps for loudspeaker connection
configurator socket
removable clamp for BUS connection
the LED under ON/OFF indicates the amplifier state: if it is off there is no BUS, if it is
green the device is in Stand-By, if it is orange the amplifier is on. The LED under POWER indicates: when off, no power line voltage is detected, if it is RED the amplifier
is powered.
6. pushbuttons for local switching on or off of the amplifier (simple touch), and for
volume adjustment (prolonged pressure).
stereo cable
110230 Vac
(5060 Hz)
BT00015-d-UK
address of the amplifier room

amplifier address
(no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and MUTE mode:
in this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the volume
of the sound sources will be decreased

1 volume level equal to 20% but MUTE mode not available

2 volume level equal to 50% and MUTE mode: in this mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will
be decreased


4 volume level equal to 100% and MUTE mode: in this, mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources
will be decreased

M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
was on is activated, FOLLOW ME mode

1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
as that set on the device itself switches on (example amplifier with M2=2,
in this case the source with S=2 will switch on), NO FOLLOW ME mode.
M3 - (no configurator) working correctly

1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel

2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel

3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
outputs
* this mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the pager function and
the volume level is set via the configurators.
BUS
MY HOME 1013
Power amplifier
F503
Description
The stereo amplifier, item F503, ensures accurate reproduction of the sound signal, both
from the SCS/BUS and, in alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player, etc.). The
wide range of adjustments of high and low tones available, the 10 preset equalisation
levels, as well as the additional 10 levels that can be customised by the customer, the
virtual surround, to name a few, ensure pleasurable listening in each room, following
the taste of the user. Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED graphic display.
All the adjustments are performed using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using the
Touch Screen devices.
PRI
LEFT
OK
BUS voltage:
Power supply (PRI):
Absorption on the BUS:
Absorption on the line:
Dissipated power:

Potenza (su 8 ):

Low tones adjustment:
High tones adjustment:
AUX input:
AUX Output:
Equalisation adjustment:
RIGHT
AUX
OUT
F503
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
110 240 Vac @ 50 60 Hz
12 mA
85 mA (at 110 Vac) 45 mA (at 230 Vac)
stand-by 3.5 Wmax - ON: 13 Wmax @ 1 kHz
input tone
5 45 C
60 Wrms (3 Wrms + 30 Wrms) 480 Wpmpo
(240 Wpmpo + 240 Wpmpo)
20 dB max
20 dB max
20 Hz20 kHz (on 8 )
1 Vrms max
1 Vrms max, @Rout = 600
8 dB max
AUX
IN
SCS
10
A
PF
M1
M2
M3
Dimensional data
10 DIN modules
Legend
1. 110 230 Vac power supply clamps
2. Graphic OLED display
3. Left channel loudspeaker connectors
4. Right channel loudspeaker connectors
5. AUX audio output (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
6. AUX audio input (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
7. Selection and navigation keys
9. SCS audio input (sound system BUS/SCS)
10. Status LEDs*
* The LEDs are under the plastic front cover plate, and can only be seen when the device is on:
- Upper LED (power supply status), blue for STAND BY/ purple for ACTIVE
- Lower LED (110 to 230 Vac power supply), blue for power supply PRESENT
BT00271-b-UK
1014 MY HOME
F503
Description

volume level equal to 100% and MUTE mode: in this, mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources
will be decreased


SLA amplifier slave operation mode:
M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which

1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
M3 - (no configurator) working correctly

1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel

2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel

3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
outputs
To access the configurator sockets remove the protection cover. A description of the
configurators is printed on the inside of the cover.
A: 1-9
PF: 1-9
M1**: -

1
2
PF M1 M2 M3

address of the amplifier sound source:
(no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and MUTE :
mode: this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the
volume of the sound sources will be decreased
volume level equal to 20% but MUTE mode not available
volume level equal to 50% and MUTE mode: in this mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will
be decreased
volume level equal to 50% but MUTE mode not available
** This mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the pager function and
the volume level is set via the configurators.
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram with SCS BUS connected (the power amplifier plays back
the sources from the 2-wire sound system).
Wiring diagram with SCS BUS disconnected (the power amplifier is independent
from the SCS BUS and plays back the source connected to the AUX IN input).
110 230 Vac

(50 60 Hz)
110 230 Vac

(50 60 Hz)
+
PRI
F503
SCS
RIGHT
LEFT
AUX
OUT
RIGHT
AUX
OUT
PRI
F503
OK
OK
SCS
AUX
IN
F503
AUX
IN
LEFT
PRI
SCS
OK
RIGHT
LEFT
AUX
OUT
OK
SCS
RIGHT
AUX
OUT
Sound source
(CD player, iPOD)
AUX
IN
AUX
IN
BT00271-b-UK
F503
LEFT
PRI
Note: The desired input, SCS or AUX IN, must be selected using the local keys (see the installation manual for the correct procedures).
MY HOME 1015
Flush mounted loudspeakers
H4570
Description
100 W, 8 impedance, flush mounted loudspeaker, for installation inside MULTIBOX boxes,
item 16104, with AXOLUTE series finish.
Preset for back installation of a DIN amplifier, item F502.
Technical data
Type:
2 separate ways
Power:
50 Wrms/100 W musical
Impedance:
8
Frequency range:
50 - 20 kHz
Sensitivity:
88 dB (1 W/1 m)
Feature:
loudspeaker to be installed in flush mounted boxes
item16104. The loudspeaker has a compartment for

the installation of the DIN item F502 amplifier.
Weight:
1.74 kg
H4570
Dimensional data
Size:
Depth of the flush mounted box:
256x347x82 mm (lxhxd)
80 mm
Dimensions and installation mode

256
230Vac
347
230Vac
item 16104
BT00011-b-UK
1016 MY HOME
L4560 - N4560 - NT4560

HC4560 - HD4560 - HS4560 - AM5740
RCA input
Description
The device allows the interfacing and adaptation of the signal level of an external
stereo audio source. It is connected with the audio signal by means of two RCA female
connectors (red = right channel; white = left channel) on the front of the device. There
is also a knob to adjust the input signal sensitivity and two LEDs to indicate the device
state (ON/STANDBY) and the correct adjustment.
Connections:
- directly to the RCA input, if the sound source is battery powered
- through the sound source insulator (item 3495), if the sound source is powered by the
mains network (230 Vac or 127 Vac).
S
M1
M2
18-27 Vdc from BUS

30 mA
12 mA
5 C-45 C
14 k
100 mVrms-1 Vrms
0.5 dB
1.5 dB
20 Hz-20 kHz
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
S: 1-4
local address of the source
Technical data
Power supply:
Max. absorption:
RCA input impedance:
Input sensitivity:
Legend
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
RCA female connectors for stereo audio input

sdjustment knob for the audio output to the BUS
LED for audio adjustment on the BUS:
off: no audio signal
green: signal with minimum level
ashing orange: best adjustment
steady orange: signal too high
dtate indication LED:
green: standby
orange: device ON
configurator socket
removable clamp for BUS connection
BT00018-c-UK
MY HOME 1017
HC4565 - HD4565 - HS4565

L4565 - N4565 - NT4565
Flush mounted loudspeakers

Description
Flush mounted loudspeakers to be used with the AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT
TECH series. The loudspeakers must be installed inside item 506E, PB526 boxes. They do
not need support and are supplied complete with all thats needed.
Technical data
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:

wide band
6 Wrms/12 W musical
16
160 -16 kHz
80 dB (1 W/1 m)
loudspeaker for installation inside flush mounted boxes, item
506E, PB526
Dimensions
L/N/NT4565
BT00003-b-UK
1018 MY HOME
115
HC/HD/HS4565
120,5
120,5
120,5
120,5
115
115
115
Stereo control
L4561N
Description
The device manages and interfaces an external stereo audio source
(e.g. Hi-Fi system) with infrared remote control and only one IR detector.
The device can save and reproduce the controls given by the stereo source remote control.
The controls saved by the stereo control are sent to the external stereo control through
a cord with infrared transmitter (supplied). In this way one can, by means of the various
control devices (special controls and Touch Screen, etc...) and the amplifiers, manage the
switching on of the saved stations and activation of a CD reader and change the CD track.
On the front of the stereo control there are pushbuttons which, with the aid of an
indication Led, adjust the audio signal entering the device.
Stereo control must be programmed using the configuration software supplied with the
product. During normal operation of the stereo control, when the device activates the
Hi-Fi, the loudspeakers directly connected to the system also come on. When the last
amplifier goes off, following an OFF control, the loudspeakers also go off, but the HI-FI
system remains active for one minute.
L4561N
TX-IR
Technical data
Power supply:
Max. absorption:
Signal learning capacity:
RCA input impedance:
Input sensitivity:
Legend
18-27 Vdc
40 mA
12 mA
5 C - 45 C
20 kHz80 kHz
14 k
20 mVrms-1 Vrms
0.5 dB
1.5 dB
20 Hz-20 kHz
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
RCA female connectors for stereo audio input

Keys, LED and sensors to adjust the output audio on the BUS
configurator soket
Mini-USB input for device programming
Jack input for connection of cable with IR detector (supplied)
Clamp for connection of the stereo control to the BUS by patch cord
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
Configuration
S1: 1-4 local address of the source
M1: 1-4 Configuration of how many devices must be controlled inside the same
device, Max 4 (example HI-FI systems with radio, cd reader etc...).
M2: 1-6 time which elapses between a control and the next during the source
switching on sequence (see instruction sheet).

L4561N
L
TX-IR
LH
RH
BT00014-d-UK
When using the multichannel matrix, item F441M, the configuration must
be M=1 (management of one source only).
MY HOME 1019
Flush mounted stereo amplifier
L4562 - H4562 - AM5742
Description
This device amplifies the stereo signal on the BUS and controls up to two loudspeakers
with impedance between 8-16 . On the front the amplifier has two pushbuttons which
can: switch the loudspeakers ON/OFF, adjust the volume in output, change the audio
source and cycle the saved stations (for the radio) or change the CD tracks. Correctly
configured the amplifier can have two modes:
- FOLLOW ME mode: function which allows the same music in another room after
the amplifier of the room previously occupied has been switched off and switching
on the amplifier on the room you are now in.
- NO FOLLOW ME mode: when another amplifier is switched on, on changing room,
the source configured the same as the configurator (inserted on M2) inserted on the
amplifier switches ON, not necessarily the source which was being listened to before.
The device is completed by appropriate 1 module key covers, item L/N/NT4911... (item
L4562) or item HC/HD/HS4911... (item H4562). By using the + input of one channel
and the - input of the other channel, it is possible to install only one loudspeaker and
create a monophonic system.
18-27 Vdc
250 mA with 8 loudspeaker on 2 L-R outputs
130 mA with 8 loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
40 mA (MUTE)*
6 mA
5 C - 45 C
2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms)
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
0.5 dB
1.5 dB
20 Hz20 kHz
0.1%
68 dB
A
PF
M1
M2
1. control to switch on the amplifier (simple touch) and increase the volume
(extended pressure)
2. control to cycle and activate the available stereo sources
3. control to scan the stations saved (for the radio)
4. control to switch off the amplifier (simple touch) and decrease the volume
(extended pressure)
5. screw clamps for connection of the loudspeakers
6. removable clamp for BUS connection
7. configurator socket
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
BT00008-b-UK
Configuration
amplifier address
(no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
1020 MY HOME
RIGHT
* take into account this value when the Sound system is integrated with the 2-WIRE
video door entry system.
1-4
Legend
Power supply:
Max. absorption:

Power (on 8):

TYPS distortion:
Noise signal ratio:
LEFT
Technical data
A: 1-9
PF: 0-9
M2: -
False ceiling mounted loudspeakers
L4566/10
Description
20 W ceiling mounted loudspeakers. Thanks to its small size (diameter 10 cm) and easy
hooking (by springs) the loudspeaker can be installed with just a few operations.
Technical data
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:
Weight:
wide band
8
200 - 20 kHz
86 dB (1 W/1 m)
loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
400 g
L4566/10
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter:
External diameter:
Depth:
90 mm
100 mm
57 mm
Dimensions
133
100
6
52
66
57
68
BT00006-b-UK
MY HOME 1021
L4566
Description
100 W loudspeaker for false ceiling installation, suitable for installation in large rooms.
Technical data
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:
Weight:
2 way coaxial
8
50 - 20 kHz
88 dB (1 W/1 m)
loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
1.7 kg
L4566
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter:
External diameter:
Depth:
210 mm
240 mm
140 mm
Dimensions
157 mm
205 mm
240 mm
BT00010-b-UK
1022 MY HOME
L4567
Description
Reduced thickness loudspeakers (37 mm thickness only), for direct wall installation.
Technical data
2 ways
8
75 - 20 kHz
88 dB (1 W/1 m)
shallow loudspeaker to be installed on the wall
(complete with fastening screws and 4 m of cable)
1 kg
L4567
Dimensions
184
37
271
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:

Weight:
BT00005-c-UK
MY HOME 1023
L4568
Description
The dimensions, the same as a false ceiling panel (60x60 cm), make it particularly
suitable for rooms of the service sector. This ultra-at (only 5 mm thickness) and light
loudspeaker has a power of 50 W.
Technical data
acousticPanel DML
8
90 - 18 kHz
87 dB (1 W/1 m)
loudspeaker to be installed on the false ceiling,
replacing the false ceiling panel (60x60 cm)
1.74 kg
L4568
Dimensions
5
593
593
593
L4568
BT00004-b-UK
1024 MY HOME
593
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:

Weight:
Outdoor loudspeakers
L4569
Description
2 way loudspeaker with IPx4 protection index, black colour, impedance 8 , power
140 W. This particular loudspeaker may be installed outdoor using the brackets provided.
Technical data
Type:
Power:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sensitivity:
Feature:
Weight:
Protection index:
2 separate ways
8
45 - 20 kHz
88 dB (1 W/1 m)
outdoor loudspeaker
4.4 kg
IPx4
L4569
Dimensional data
Size: 300x215x208 mm (lxhxd)
Dimensions
265
208
60
100
215
50
300
BT00009-b-UK
MY HOME 1025
1026 MY HOME Technical sheets Video door entry system
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Video door entry system
Technical sheets Video door entry system MY HOME 1027
SCS AV cable
336904
Description
The white BUS-SCS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation
of Video door entry systems and Sound Systems. However, it is also suitable for use in
Automation, Temperature Control and Burglar Alarm Systems.
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to
all BUS system devices.
The cable consists of a white external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.5 mm2, one brown and one brown/white.
The cable is sold in 200 m coils.
It is thus suitable to be used:
- in the open air, inside trunkings, passage-ways and pipes
- laid underground by means of suitable pipes
- inside walls with suitable pipes.
Technical data
Insulation voltage:
Can be buried:
450/750 V
YES (see installation notes)
white (RAL 9010)
5.0 +/- 0.1 mm
0.7 mm
PVC (RZ)
2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors
with sheath
brown brown/white
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: 1.70 mm
Sheath material of internal conductors: XLPE polyethylene
Conductor material:
Conductor section:
0.50 mm2 (16 x 0.20 mm2)
(-15) (+70) C
Coil length:
200 m
Installation notes
Underground cable installation
The 336904 BUS SCS cable can be installed underground (protected using appropriate
piping), together with other signalling cables, provided the voltage is <50V.
it is however strictly forbidden to install the 336904 cable in the same conduit as power
supply cables with voltages >50V. Failure to comply with the installation requirements
will relieve BTicino of all responsibilities for the operation of the system installed.
Installation together with other cables
Although the construction of the white cable guarantees the necessary electrical
insulation level for installation together with 450/750 V system cables, it is however
not capable of guaranteeing immunity from any electromagnetic disturbances that may
occur when installed in the same conduits used for the power supply cables.
It is therefore strongly recommended that the white BUS/SCS cable and the power
supply cables are installed in separate conduits.

Reference standards: - It complies with the tests required by the following standards:
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, EN50265-2-1, EN50395, EN50396 as described
in the IMQ CPT 062 document.
Marks obtained:
BT00159-b-UK
SFERA speaker module

with 2 call pushbuttons
342170
Description
Speaker module for 2 WIRE system.
The following devices can be connected to the speaker module:
- Colour camera module to realize the video systems item 342550
- Black and white camera module to realize video systems item 342510
- Nameplate module item 342200
- Pushbuttons module item 342240
- Numeric digital call module item 342610
- Alphanumeric digital call module item 342600
All the described modules are connected to the speaker module by means of the
appropriate multi-cables. The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100
handsets and the opening of an electric door lock directly connected between clamps
S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied
by a transformer or using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260.
1
2
Legend
Related items
332111 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal)
332112 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - White)
332113 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Alugray)
332121 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
332122 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - White)
332123 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
1 - Socket for configurators and potentiometers to adjust the microphone and

loudspeaker volume, jumper for adaptation to the type of door lock and the
alphanumeric call module.
2 - Connection socket for the camera connector.
3 - Socket for the connection of the nameplate module, the pushbuttons module or the
digital call module
4 - Removable connector for the connection of the BUS, the electrical door lock, and the
entrance hall door lock release pushbutton.
5 - Removable connector for the connection of the additional power supply
Technical data
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
18 27 Vdc
25 mA
75 mA
(-25)-(+70)C
Dimensional data
89 mm
100 mm
BT00130-b-UK
342170
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In common entrance panels made using pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels. When the entrance panel is
made with speaker module and digital call module (item 342630 or item 342610) no
configurator must be inserted in N.
T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.
1 sec. 2 sec.
3
3 sec.
4*
as
6 sec.
pushbutt.
8 sec. 10 sec.
S - type of call signal

The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
0 1 2 3
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.
JUMPERS (JMP1) and ( JMP2) - Critical door lock power supply:
Remove the JMP1 and JMP2 jumpers to connect to the speaker module a door lock with
independent power supply.
JUMPER (JMP3) - EP local power supply
Remove the JMP3 jumpers when the speaker module is powered by an additional power
supply.
* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
= disconnected jumper
= connected jumper
BT00130-b-UK
JMP 3
JMP 1
JMP 4
JMP 2
342170
Installation and connection
Supplied as standard with the speaker module is a closing accessory with connector.
The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the pushbutton panel,
after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables with connectors.
It must not be used if the pushbutton panel only consists of a 1 or 2 pushbutton speaker
module, in addition to a camera module that may be installed.
Camera module
Speaker module
Camera module
Pushbuttons module
Speaker module
Accessory
Example: speaker module consisting of camera module, speaker module and
4-pushbutton module; the accessory supplied as standard must also be used.
Accessory
Example: entrance panel consisting of camera module and speaker module. It
does not require the accessory supplied with the product.
- With entrance panels with less than 26 calls, it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902, and to fit in the last
pushbutton module the accessory supplied as standard.
- For entrance panels with more than 26 calls it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902 . After the sixth key
module (or after 26 calls), fit item 346903 and invert the flat supplied as standard.
In the last key module fit the accessory supplied as standard.
346902
Accessory
346902
346902
346903
1
BT00130-b-UK
Example - Connection of
pushbutton panel with less
than 26 calls
4
180
Accessory
Connection item 346903 and flat inversion.
Example - Connection of pushbutton panel with more than 26 calls.
SFERA
Nameplate module
342200
to the speaker
module or to other
pushbuttons or
nameplate module
Description
SFERA nameplate module which can be used to enter the street number or any other
information. Can be used to enter a caption in pushbutton panels with numerical call
module item 342610. To be used with the Nameplate modular front cover.
Nameplate lighting by green LEDs.
A flat-cable for the connection to other modules is supplied.
The device must not be configured.
Related items
332201 (Allmetal nameplate front cover)
332202 (White nameplate front cover)
332203 (Alugray nameplate front cover)
Technical data
18-27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)C
Dimensional data
Legend
1 - Namecard for address number, legend of call addresses or other information.
2 - Input socket for connection with other modules.
3 - Connector socket for output connection with other modules, and housing for the
electronic card supplied as standard with the speaker module (to be used on the last
nameplate module only)
89 mm
100 mm
to other
pushbuttons
or nameplate
module
BT00124-b-UK
SFERA,
Colour camera module
342550
Description
SFERA swivel colour camera module
CCD technology, fitted with white LEDs so that it can be used in
poorly lit surroundings. To be used together with 2-wire speaker modules (connection
using a multicable).
During installation it is possible to swivel the lens horizontally and vertically.
3
1
2
1

Related items
342170 (Speaker module with 2 call pushbuttons)
342350 (Speaker module with 4 call pushbuttons)
342630 (Speaker module with Graphic display)
332511 (modular camera front cover - Allmetal)
332512 (modular camera front cover - White)
332513 (modular camera front cover - Alugray)
1 2
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Camera sensor:
Lens:
Interlace:
Horizontal resolution:
Vertical resolution:
Night lighting:
Brightness adjustment:
18-27 Vdc
165 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)C
1/4
f : 2.8 mm; F : 3 mm
2:1
> 330 lines
400 lines
white LEDs
automatic (linear)
Legend
1 - White LEDs for night lighting
2 - Lens
3 - Lens slant adjustment
4 - Multicable for connection to speaker module
Lens adjustment
Dimensional data
1
100 mm
89 mm
(-15) - (+15)
BT00122-b-UK
(-15) - (+15)
1 2
SFERA audio video

speaker module
342560
Description
1
Audio/video speaker module for 2 wire system fitted with colour camera with LED
lighting for night viewing.
Camera with slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by 20.
The connections to the system are made by wiring the removable clamp supplied; the
nameplates are illuminated by green LEDs. A closing card to be inserted in the last
pushbutton module is supplied.
To be completed with the modular Audio/video front covers.
The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100 handsets and the opening of
an electric door lock directly connected between the clamps S+ S (18 V 4 A impulsive,
250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied with a transformer, or
using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260.
Related items
Front view
342461 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Allmetal)

342462 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - White)
342463 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Alugray)
342471 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
342472 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - White)
342473 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Alugray)
342481 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
342482 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - White)
342483 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Alugray)
Legend
1 - Loudspeakers
2 - Colour camera
4 - Green LED for door status notification
5 - Microphone
6 - Call pushbuttons
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
40 mA
160 mA
(-25)-(+70)C
1.5 mm ; f: 4.3 mm
1/3
2:1
330 lines
white LEDs
automatic
1 2 3 4
ART.342560
10
USB
J2
J1
P
N
TS

Lens: F:
Sensor:
Interlace:
Night lighting:
BUS
PL S+ S
Dimensional data
40
Rear view
BT00133-b-UK
Legend
89 mm
100 mm
40
1 - Microphone volume adjustment

2 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
3 - J1: remove to enable additional power supply
4 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one column is active
5 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
6 - Connection to the 2 wire BUS
7 - Connection to the additional power supply
8 - Connection to the additional pushbuttons
9 - Configurator socket
10 - USB connector for PC connection
342560
Configuration
(J1)
(J2)

The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
ART.342560
J2
J1
USB
P
N
N - call number
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
audio and video handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.
TS
BUS
PL S+ S

configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.
1 sec. 2 sec.
4*
as
3 sec.
6 sec.
pushbutt.
8 sec. 10 sec.
MOD=5.
J1 - EP local power supply

Remove the JMP1 jumpers when the speaker module is supplied by a dedicated power
supply.
J2 - activation of pushbutton columns
When connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected only
one column is active.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. One can thus
differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
ART.342560
USB
N
P
TS
BUS
PL S+ S

Configurator
0 1 2 3
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0.
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
Supplied as standard with the audio and video speaker module, is a closing accessory
with connector. The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the
entrance panel, after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables.
Configurator
4 5 6 7
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
The camera must not be installed facing strong light sources, or in locations where the
area being shot is strongly backlit. In order to resolve these problems, we recommend
that the camera is installed at a height of 180 cm, instead of the usual 160-165 cm,
with the lens pointing down. This will improve image quality. In low light situations,
the colour rendition of the image displayed by the colour camera may decrease.
This is to ensure that the person being displayed can be better recognised. To ensure
optimum vision in low light conditions, the installation of an additional light source is
recommended.
BT00133-b-UK
Camera installation notes
Wall mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel
342991-342992
Description
Wall mounted 2-wire pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover, colour camera, and
night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-15, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Blue LED backlit name plate
Related items
346250 (gate release relay module)
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc

20 mA
Max. operating absorption: 240 mA
(-25) - (+70)C
PI against mechanical impact: IK07
Dimensional data
3
Legend
106
mm
185
mm
160 165
cm
1 - Call keys
3 - Microphone
4 - Loudspeaker
5 - Colour camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by 15
6 - Clamps for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an electric
door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
holding current 30 Ohm max)
7 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
35
mm
BT00115-b-UK
342991-342992
Configuration
configurator number

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
or video handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset
must be inserted in N.
0= No
configurator
4 sec.
1 sec. 2 sec.
3
3 sec.
as
6 sec.
pushbutt.
8 sec. 10 sec.
S - type of call signal

Configurator
0 1 2 3
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 configure the general call.
BT00115-b-UK
Flush mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel
3
343001-343002
3
8
Description
Flush mounted 2-wire audio and video speaker module with Zamak front cover, colour
camera and night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-20, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Flush mounted box supplied
as standard.
346250 (gate release relay module)

Technical data
Zamak front without panel
9 10
11
9 10
11
J2
14
Dimensional data
Related items

40 mA
(-20) - (+70)C
PI against mechanical impact IK10
Sensor:
1/3
Lens:
f: 4,3 mm; F: 1.5 mm
Interlace:
2:1
Resolution:
330 horizontal lines
Night lighting:
white LEDs
automatic
5
1
TS
163 mm
136 mm
Rear view
BUS
PL S+ S
13
12
J2
14
TS
Legend
BT00117-b-UK
1 - Loudspeakers
BUS PL S+ S
2 - Colour camera
4 - Green LED for door status notification
5 - Microphone
6 - Call keys
13 12
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
9 - Microphone volume adjustment
11 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one
12 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
13 - Connection to the 2-wire SCS BUS.
343001-343002
Configuration
N - call number
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.

configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.
1 sec. 2 sec.
3
3 sec.
4*
as
6 sec.
pushbutt.
8 sec. 10 sec.
MOD=5.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
Configurator
0 1 2 3
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
Installation
The camera must not be installed in front of intense light sources, or in locations where
the subject might be backlit. To avoid these problems try to change the installation
height of the camera, normally from 160-165 cm, to a height of 180 mm, and to
direct the lens downwards so that the shooting quality may be improved. In low light
conditions, the picture of the colour camera may be reproduced with a lower colour
rendition, in order to ensure the possibility to better identify the subject. For optimum
rendition, it is however recommended that an extra light sources is installed in scarcely
illuminated locations.
Flush mounted box
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification
beep
Frame
Speaker module
BT00117-b-UK

Configurator
4 5 6 7
Type of bell
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone

1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz

600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
Protrusion from
the wall: 21 mm
Audio Polyx
344082
Description
9
2 WIRE handsfree handset for wall mounted installation.

Its fitted with keys for: EP activation/cycling, door lock release, staircase light switching
on and 4 programmable keys, which operating mode is set through the configuration.
Specific audible and visual signals mean that it is also suitable for use by disabled people.
Fixing bracket supplied.
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
5 mA
55 mA
5 - 40C
10
Dimensional data
30 mm
Front view
128 mm
124.5 mm
11
13
BUS
OFF
ON
5 1
12
P M
P M
14
ART.344082
Rear view
Legend
BT00138-b-UK
1 - 4 programmable keys (through configuration)

2 - EP Activation/cycling
3 - Bell volume adjustment and exclusion + LED
4 - Door lock key + LED
5 - Loudspeaker
7 - Connection key+ LED
8 - Microphone
9 - Call signalling LED
10 - Staircase light key
11 - Clamps for the connection to the 2 WIRE BUS
12 - Clamps for the connection of the Floor call auxiliary services and extra bell
13 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
344082
Configuration
N - handset number
Assigns to each handset an identification number within the system. The handsets
must be configured in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same
N configurator.
P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
on which the audio is activated when the ( ) key is pressed, as well as which door lock
is activated when the key
is pressed while the handset is idle.
M - Operating mode of the keys
In addition to the door lock opening key
and the staircase light key ( ), the
handset also has 4 programmable keys ( - - - ). These keys may be associated
to different operating modes (e.g. activation of external actuators, intercom, activation
of additional EPs, etc., based on the type of configurator connected to M).
Configurator in P
0-9

key ( ) function
Entrance panel audio activation
(configured with P=09)
Configurator in P
0-9

key function
Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P=0-9)
The handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with pre-programmed
ringtones, which can be associated to the following type of calls:
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0)
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=1)
- Intercom call
- Call to the floor
(See the bell programming table in the following pages)
BT00138-b-UK
344082
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable
keys:
MODE
KEY
FUNCTION
NOTES
MOD =
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)
MOD =
1
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
N=1
N=2 N=2
N=3 N=3
N=1
N=3 N=2
N=1 N=3
N=1
N=2 N=2
N=3 N=3
N=2
Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
MOD =
N=1
N=2
BT00138-b-UK
NEXT >>
344082
MODE
MOD =
KEY
FUNCTION
NOTES
N=1
N=5 N=2
N=1 N=3
N=1 N=4
N=1 N=5
N=1
N=2 N=2
N=5 N=3
N=2 N=4
N=2 N=5
N =1
N =3 N=2
N=3 N=3
N=5 N=4
N=3 N=5
N=1
N=4 N=2
N=4 N=3
N=4 N=4
N=5 N=5
N=1
N=2 N=2
N=1
N=2
N=3
N=4

MOD =
N=1
MOD =
BT00138-b-UK
<< PREVIOUS
344082
MODE
KEY
MOD =
FUNCTION
NOTES
1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module
(SCENARIO 1)
(SCENARIO 2)
4
7
MOD =

the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
N=1
N=3 N=2
N=1 N=3
N=1
N=2 N=2
N=3 N=3
N=1
N=2
MOD =
MOD =
(SCENARIO 1)
(SCENARIO 2)
(SCENARIO 1)
(SCENARIO 2)
(SCENARIO 3)
(SCENARIO 4)
1 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.

4
MOD =

N=1
12
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850
BT00138-b-UK
N=2
4

NEXT >>
344082
MODE
MOD =
KEY
FUNCTION
NOTES
N=1
13
N=2
N=3
N=4
MOD =
16
(SCENARIO 1)
(SCENARIO 2)
3 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.

<< PREVIOUS
BT00138-b-UK
344082
Configuration
20
40
60
80
30
50
70
90
21
41
61
81
22
42
62
82
32
52
72
92
23
43
63
83
33
53
73
93
24
44
64
84
20 = B
40 = C
60 = D
80 = E
25
45
65
85
26
46
66
86
36
56
76
96
27
47
67
87
28
48
68
88
A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function
C Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + PAGING function
D Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + HANDSFREE function
E Configuration selected for the operation of the keys, OFFICE and PAGING function
BT00138-b-UK
344082
OFFICE function detail
With the function active, when a call is received from
the entrance panel, the video handset rings and the
associated door lock is automatically released, without
the need for pressing the door lock release key on the
handset.
To ENABLE the function
Led ON
Led ON
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON
To DISABLE the function
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

WARNING: the OFFICE function cannot be activated together with the DOOR STATUS function.
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
BT00138-b-UK
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
CLAK
344082
DOOR status function
This function notifies the status of the door lock. If open, the door lock LED flashes, if
closed, the LED stays off.
NOTES: it can only be enabled if the enabling option is included in the system; It
CANNOT be activated together with the OFFICE function.
PaGING function
This function can be used to send voice messages using the microphone of the device
through the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press the Connection key
while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by the
green LED coming on. To DISABLE the function press the Connection key again.
PuSH TO TaLK function

If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will
be possible to enable the PUSH TO TALK function, which will provide a better quality
of communication.
To enable the PUSH TO TALK function during the conversation proceed as follows:
- Press the Connection key for at least 2 seconds, to enable the communication with the
entrance panel.
The LED stays green.
- Release the key to listen to the entrance panel. The LED turns red.
- To end the connection press the Connection key briefly. The LED turns off.
HaNDSFREE function
The HANDSFREE function automatically activates the microphone and the loudspeaker
when a call is received, without the need for pressing the Connection key to answer (the
connection is automatically established when the call is received).
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Enable/disable key sound
In the base configuration, when a key is pressed, a beep is emitted. This function may be
disabled/enabled with the following procedure:
BEEP
BEEP
BT00138-b-UK
>3s
>3s
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s
>3s
344082
Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0)
1
1
1
21
12
121
22
21
16
12
16
12211
16
16
17
12
17
1
17
21122
17
211
17
2211
17
212
17
17
17
221
17
21
17
21
17
12
17
17
21
17
1
1
17
2
16
17
12
16
1
16
21122
16
211
17
22111
17
21
17
17
17
2221
17
2112
17
2
17
1712
1
17
17
1221
17
17
17
12
17
12
17
2112
17
16
211
16
22111
16
21
16
17
2211
17
212
17
21
17
17
21
17
221
1
17
17
12
17
17
1122
17
2
17
1
17
21
17
2211
17
121
17
16
2211
1612
16
1712
16
172121
17
122
17
17
12
17
12
17
211
17
17
21
17
221
17
17
2
17
22
17
17
16
17
16
16
16
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
BT00138-b-UK
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE
>3s PANEL (S=1)
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
EXTERNAL INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
(only with interface item 346850) >3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
FLOOR CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
1
1
1
11
11
11
11
11
11
111
111
1111
112111
121
111212
112
2
12112
122
1122
112
22
21122
222
222
22322
232
222333
2233
2323
233
22333
223
33
3223333
333
333
33433
343
33344
3343
343
3444
3344
334
44
43344
444
444
4444
44
444
444
4
4
44
44
4
4
Polyx Memory Display

Description
344163
Front view
2 WIRE wall mounted speaker phone video handset with audio and video memory.
With 3.5 colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. With video door entry
system answering machine with call memory function.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel, and
answering machine status. It can be wall mounted using the appropriate bracket
(supplied).
Programming and configuration using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied
with the product.
Related items
12
2
3
11
10
9
4
5
346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of the

video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.
8
Retro
Technical data
Power supply dal SCS BUS:

18 27 Vdc
10 mA
330 mA
0 - 40 C
17
16
Dimensional data
168 mm
30 mm
Legend
1. Microphone
150 mm
2. 3.5 LCD colour display

3. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
4. Entrance panel/camera cycling activation key
5. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
6. Connection status LED
7. Loudspeaker
BT00385-a-UK
8. Door lock status LED

9. Door lock activation key
10. Audio video answering machine status LED
11. Answering machine key: enable/disable the answering machine function
(if enabled by the menu)
12. Bell exclusion notification LED

13. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
15. Additional power supply connector (1-2)
16. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
17. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection
13
14
15
344163
Configuration
Polyx Memory Display can be configured in two different modes:

- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection);
- Advanced configuration (using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied).
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their own
sockets on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
- create customized menus;
- customize text messages;
- access all home automation functions.
PM
Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software
or to update the firmware, connect POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY to the PC using the
USB-miniUSB cable.
N handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
USB-miniUSB
P entrance panel association

The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
and which door lock is activated when the key
to activate before pressing the key
a is pressed while the video handset is idle.
BT00385-a-UK
M Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).
To ensure that the communication is successful, the POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY must be
powered and not physically configured.
Inductive LOOP module
344165
Description
2 WIRE inductive LOOP module to be used with Polyx Memory Display 344163 video
handset, to enable use by people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector).
The device must be configured with the same address (N) of the corresponding video
handset. Wall mounted installation without the need of accessories.
1
WARNING: The inductive loop module must only be activated AFTER establishing the connection of the associated video handset to the entrance panel.
Technical data

18 27 Vdc
5 mA
200 mA
5 - 40 C
Dimensional data
24.5 mm
88 mm
122 mm
8
ON
OFF
ON OFF
Configuration
Legend
1. Activation key
2. Status signalling LED:
green flashing = call notification
green steady = connection established
4. Jumper, to be removed to enable additional power supply connection
BT00384-a-UK
N = associated video handset number

The N configurator assign to the device the same number of the handset of the associated video handset (configure with the same N of the video handset).
5. Additional power supply connection clamps

6. Microphone
8. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
(*) = Not used
AV Power supply 230 V
346000
Description
2-wire system power supply to be used in audio systems with 2-wire speaker modules or
with the universal speaker unit item 346991, for the creation of systems with up to 100
handsets (up to 56 when using item 346991), and in video systems with item 346830,
with the audio/video node item F441, or the matrix item F441M.
The power supply must also be used for powering the sound systems. It can be used
as local power supply - additional power supply (output 1 2) for video door entry
system advanced handsets.On the output it supplies 27 Vdc continuous low voltage,
with a maximum current of 1.2 A. Its electronically protected (without fuses) against
short circuit and overload. It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI
The power supply unit is inside a 8 DIN modules rail enclosure, and its installation must
be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
PRI (Power supply Vac input):

220 240 Vac
230 250 mA
207 253 Vac
50 60 Hz
44.9 W (max)
11 W (max)
4.2 W (max)
5 40 C
IP30
SEC (Vdc output):

Rated voltage (BUS):
Rated voltage (1-2):
Rated current:
Rated power:
BUS
2 1
Legend
Technical data
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Working voltage range:
Working frequency range:
Input power at full load:
Dissipated power:
Input power without load:
Protection index:
346000
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps

2 - SCS BUS output connection clamps
3 - Output 12 connection clamps
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3
mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc

27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc
0 1.2 A
32.4 W

Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4 (par. 411.1.2.5)
Marks obtained:
Dimensional data
8 DIN modules
BT00153-b-UK

230 V
346020
Description
2 DIN module devices which allows to:

- locally supply the single video door entry handsets and entrance panels.
- supply some accessories of the Communication and MY HOME catalogues (ex: Web
server, A/V server, scenario programmers, 2 WIRE/IP interface, switch 10/100, ADSL
modem router, Hub-TV and SCS modulator).
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply is enclosed by a 2 DIN module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
PR I
Technical data
346020
PRI: 220 - 240V~
175-165mA
50/60Hz
PRI (AC power supply input)

Rated voltage:
220 240 Vac
Rated current:
180 190 mA
187 265 V
Working frequency range: 47 63 Hz
20 W max
Dissipated power:
3.8 W (max.)
Performance at full load: 80% typ.
Power in stand by:
<1W
5 40 C
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
1 - 2 (DC output):
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Rated power:
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules
3
1- 2
27 V +/- 100 mV
0 0.6 A
16.2 W

Standards: CEI EN60065
1-2: 27Vdc
600mA
Legend
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps
2 - Output 1 2 connection clamps
3 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) normal operation of the power supply
(RED ON) output current overload
BT00156-b-UK
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures

mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Mini power supply 230 V
346030
Description
1
2 DIN module device for:

- basic video door entry systems (e.g. apartment intercom)
- mini SOUND SYSTEMS (absorption up to 600 mA).
It is a double insulation safety device.
The power supply is inside a module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation must be in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
PRI
Technical data
PRI (power supply input AC):
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Working frequency range:
Dissipated power:
Performance at full load:
Power in stand by:
Integrated fuse (PRI side):
220 240 Vac

200 - 190 mA
187 265 V
47 63 Hz
21.5 W max
5.3 W (max.)
80% typ.
<1W
5 40 C
F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
SCS A-V; SCS:

Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Rated power:
27 V +/- 100 mV
0 0.6 A
16.2 W
4
SCS A-V
SCS
WARNING: THE (SCS A-V) AND (SCS) OUTPUT CANNOT BE USED AT THE
SAME TIME

Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules
Legend
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps 50-60 Hz
2 - SCS AV output connection clamps (27 V)
3 - SCS output connection clamps (BUS 27V)
4 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) - normal operation of the power supply
(RED ON) - output current overload
BT00155-b-UK

mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
Actuator
346200
Description
Relay actuator for digital systems. It allows to switch on lights, to open gate door locks,
to control other devices and to repeat call on bell (badenia type).
MOD
N/P
Technical data
Contact output:

18 27 Vdc
15 mA
300 mA
5 40 C
230 Vac - 6 A resistive - 2 A inductive (cos = 0.5)
SELV device
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire BUS and power supply 1 - 2
2 - Clamps for the connection of the load to be controlled
3 - Clamps for the connection of an additional pushbutton
BT00160-b-UK
346200
Configuration
MOD
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
N/P T
MOD = Operating mode

The configurator in MOD establishes the operating mode of the actuator (see following
tables)
M = number of the riser

In systems with several risers, it identifies on which riser the actuation must be
performed
N/P = Handset/Entrance panel number
It defines the association with the Handset or the EP address from which the actuation
must be performed.
T = relay closure time delay
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay (see corresponding
table).
MOD = 0 - Staircase light from any handset and EP
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset and the light
key on the entrance panel
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
MOD = 1 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from

handset unit
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset belonging to
a group
- Insert in M the ten and the units of the first handset of the group
- Insert in N/P the ten and the units of the last handset of the group
NOTES: a group is a sequence set of handsets.
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all riser handsets

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the staircase light key of all riser handsets
- Connect the M configurator of the system expansion interface, item 346851
(configured with MOD = 5) to M
MOD
N/P
T = 0 closes the contact for 30
Example
MOD
N/P
1
Tens
Unit
MOD
Tens
N/P
1 1 2 1
Door lock control from the light key of the

handsets configured from 1 to 12
Unit
Example
MOD
N/P
MOD
2
Tens
N/P
2 1 9
Staircase light control from all handsets of
the riser 19
Unit
MOD
N/P
BT00160-b-UK
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all entrance panel (if fitted with the
corresponding key)
- With (MOD = 2) the actuator activates when the light pushbutton of any (preset)
entrance Panel is pressed
Not inserting the configurator

corresponds to insert 0
346200
MOD = 3 - Sundry services from single handset
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one handset.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay
Example
MOD
N/P
MOD
N/P
MOD
4
Unit
N/P
N/P
3 5

handset configured with P=3
T=5 closes the contact for 1 min
MOD
Tens
BT00160-b-UK
MOD = 7 - Light on for illumination of the viewing field

At the same time as sending a call from the entrance panel or activating a camera (N/P
configuration), the actuator also closes the contact, keeping it closed until:
- if the call is answered, the contact opens when the communication is terminated or
the conversation timeout activates (<1 min.)
- if the call is not answered, the contact opens after 30 seconds (at the end of the call
forwarding timeout).
1 5 1
Example
MOD
Unit
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause.
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of
the P configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the door lock.
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the 4
additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating technical sheets.
Example
MOD
Tens
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from all handsets

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. The actuator is enabled by pressing
the door lock pushbutton of all handsets.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the associated entrance panel that controls the door
lock.
N/P

handset configured with 15
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s
Unit
Tens
MOD = 4 - Staircase light from EP

- With (MOD = 4) the actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one
entrance panel.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay
N/P
2 1
Door lock control of the entrance panel

configured with P=2 from the door lock
pushbutton of all the associated handsets
Example
MOD
N/P
MOD
N/P
21
Door lock control by pressing the key

2 of the 4 keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT
configured with P = 0)
P+1
P+2
P+3
P+4
Example
MOD
N/P
7
The number of the EP or camera to
associate to the actuator
MOD
N/P
Closing of contact upon call from the

EP configured with P=2.
The contact opens after the call is
terminated or after 30 seconds
(if there is no answer)
346200
MOD = 9 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from
PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause.
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of the P
configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the service.
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the
4 additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating sections configurations.
Example
MOD
N/P
MOD
N/P
3 2
Device control by pressing the key 2 of the 4

keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT congured with P = 2)
P+1
P+2
P+3
P+4
MOD = SLA - Call repetition on Badenia bell

- Repeat the calls coming from the entrance panel on Badenia bell.
- Customize the time through the configurator T. (with configurators O (-), 5, 6, 7, 8, the
bell rings for 30 s max)
- Insert in N/P the tens and units of the handset associated to the function.
Example
MOD
S
L
A
* The SLA configurator must be bought separately from the configurator kit
(item 3501K). Item code for SLA configurator: item 3501/SLA.
N/P
MOD
S
L
A
3
Unit
Tens
N/P
1 6 3
The Badenia bell rings for 6 seconds each

time there is a call addressed to the handsets
configured with N=16
T =3 the Badenia bell rings for 6 s and stops
when the call is answered
T configuration (timing)
The T values mentioned in the examples are only an indication of the times commonly
used for the different applications.
By inserting in the T socket a configurator (as mentioned in the table) the relay door
locking time can be customized.
T configurator
Time
none
3 min.
1 sec.
3 sec.
6 sec.
10 sec.
1 min.
6 min.
10 min.
pushbutton
cyclic (ON/OFF)
BT00160-b-UK
346200
Wiring diagram
5
1
BUS IN
6
2
8
4
7
3
BUS OUT
NC C NO
230V~
6A
2A
= 0,5
SELV
2-wire standard wiring diagram

HANDSET Bus
TK Bus
346000
346200
BUS BUS
TK
PI
PS
BUS
346830
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
NC
NO
230 Vac
~
2
C NO
BT00160-b-UK
Door lock actuator
346230
Description
2-wire system door lock actuator.
It can be used to actuate an electrical door lock without the need for a local transformer,
activated by a dedicated handset key.
In systems with handsets with specific LED, it enables to perform the LOCK STATUS
function when a CISA ELETTRIKA door lock is used.
1
2 PL
S+ S-
346230
Related items
346240 CISA ELETTRIKA door lock accessory
Technical data
Contact load (PL/S+):
J J
18 27 Vdc
10 mA
300 mA
5 40 C
6 A 24 Vac max (cos=1)
T M M M
P P
3
Legend
Dimensional data
1 - Clamps for the connection of door lock and additional pushbutton

3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps
2 DIN modules
Configuration
P - Associated entrance panel number
A configurator like the one connected to P of the entrance panel must be connected to
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.
J J
T M M M
P P
T - Door lock relay timing

The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
following table:
The accessory item 346240

must be fitted inside the
door lock.
18V 4A
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.
1 sec. 2 sec.
3
3 sec.
as
6 sec.
pushbutt.
8 sec. 10 sec.
2 PL
ELETTRIKA
S+ S-
P
P
J J
J M
J
T M1 M
1 2
P P
J J
T 1 M M
P P
M=1
BT00161-b-UK
M - Operating mode
M=0 - Door lock relay standard operation
M=1 - Door lock relay operation + door lock status control only with handsets fitted
with door lock status LED and specific CISA ELETTRIKA door lock with Accessory item
346240.
M=4 - With interface 349410 only it enables:
- with analogue system and audio Tersystem, the direct control of the electrical door lock
- with videoporter 2000, the call to the switchboard
JMP - Jumpers to be removed when an auxiliary transformer is used (4A max.)
346230
Wiring diagram - 2-wire standard
Wiring diagram - with auxiliary transformer
SCS-BUS
SCS-BUS
18 V - 4 A impulsive
250 mA holding current
*A
*A
*A = door lock release

pushbutton
1
2 PL
S+ S-
S+ S-
2 PL
346230
346230
J J
P
J J
P
T M M M
P P
T M M M
P P
346000
V~
346000
Remove the jumpers

*A= door lock release
pushbutton
BT00161-b-UK
J J
M M
P P
Door lock relay
346250
Description
Relay module for gate opening to be used only with audio/video SFERA item 342560,
LINEA 2000, LINEA 2000 METAL and MINISFERA entrance panels.
It allows to open door locks (NOT managed by BUS) by means of the above mentioned
entrance panels (NOT fitted with relay). The device must not be configured.
S- S+
NC NO
Related items
342560 (SFERA audio/video speaker module)
342702 (MINISFERA audio speaker module)
342708 (MINISFERA video speaker module)
342911/21 (LINEA 2000 audio EP)
342951/61 (LINEA 2000 video EP)
342971/72 (LINEA 2000 METAL audio EP)
342981/82 (LINEA 2000 METAL b/w video EP)
342991/92 (LINEA 2000 METAL colour video EP)
343001/02 (LINEA 2000 METAL flush mounted EP)
Legend
1 - Clamps for connection to the entrance panel
2 - Clamps- contacts for connection to the electrical door lock
Connection example
BUS
PL
S+
S-
346250
S- S+
NC NO
NO
NC
C
24 Vac/24 Vdc
24 Vac
24 Vac
D - EP - relay distance
Max. distance (D) depending on the cable used
TYPE OF CABLE
CABLE SECTION
mm
0.28
BTicino
Item 336904
BTicino
Item L4669
mm
1
30 m
50 m
30 m
100 m
A = door lock release pushbutton

BT00172-b-UK
Timed door lock

actuator
346260
Description
Timed door lock actuator for 2 WIRE system.
It can be used for switching the lights on, opening gates, or manage electromagnetic
door locks, timed door opening, and door status (with NC contact).
The DOOR STATUS function can only be used with door entry systems and video door
entry systems fitted with signalling LEDs, and when a magnetic door status contact is
present.
It may also be used in systems integrated with an appropriately configured ACCESS
CONTROL system.
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
5 mA
250 mA
5 40 C
- TMP PL RC
C NC
NO/S+ S-
ART. 346260
T= -5 +45C
IP 30
5
6
1
SCS
J J
M M
P P
4
- TMP PL RC
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
WARNING: if the TMP and RC contacts are not used,

short circuit TMP and RC with (-)
Legend
2 - Door status connection clamps:
(-) Common
(TMP) Anti tamper line contact (normally closed on -)
(PL) Door opening pushbutton contacts (normally open on -)
(RC) Door status magnetic contact (normally closed on -)
3 - Electromagnetic door lock connection clamps:
(C) Common
(NC) Normally closed contact
(NO/S+) Normally open contact
(S-) Contact for door lock power supply from BUS (to be used with NO/S+)
5 - Door opening local pushbutton
6 - Notification red LED: flashing in case of system tampering
7 - Notification orange LED: on when the relay is active
(flashing orange + red LEDs for open door notification)
BT00165-b-UK
346260
Configuration
P - Associated entrance panel number

A configurator like the one inserted in P of the entrance panel must be connected to
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.
Management of
access control
Management of 2 WIRE
Actuator relay status
A B C
J1 J2
J J
M M
P P
A = DO NOT USE (access control only)

B - C = P CONFIGURATOR SOCKETS
M = Operating mode
Assigns the operating mode to the internal relay of the actuator, based on the following
table:
M=
YES
YES
Signal
repetition
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Normally
open
Normally closed.
Electromagnetic
door lock
Signal
repetition
Normally closed.
Electromagnetic
door lock
Normally
open
Normally
closed
Normally
open
R = Enabling/disabling of the anticipated relay switching function(1)

Configurator
Advance of closing
Enabled (2 sec.)
Disabled
T = Door lock relay timing

Configurator
Configurator
Time
Time sec.
sec.
44
11
10
10
20
20
40
40
60
60
90
90
180
180
J1 - J2 = Jumpers for the selection of the door lock power supply

CONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY THE BUS
DISCONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
NOTES:
(1) If enabled, 2 seconds after the opening of the entrance, anticipated relay switching
occurs, irrespective of the T time set (this function can be used with door status
magnetic contact and for T = s).
(4) Operation as signal repeater. In case of system intrusion or opening of a door,

the relay output can also activate an external notification device (sound or visual
notification), based on the time value set in T.
BT00165-b-UK
(2) The device supplies the NC and NO contacts of the internal relay. It is therefore
possible, also with M = 0, to use the internal relay as normally closed.
It must be NOTESd that in case of power cut from the power line (230 Vac), the relay
stays normally closed and, if the power supply of the electric door lock is fitted with
a back-up battery, the door lock stays closed.
(3) In this mode, the software forces the relay to perform the opposite operation
(positive safety). The NO contact stays in the closed status, and is opened in order to
open the door (passage). In case of power cut from the main power line (230 Vac),
the relay opens, and the door lock opens, even if the power supply line of the door
locks is fitted with a back-up battery.
(5) Integration mode between video door entry system and access control (see
instructions of item 348000).
346260
Connection example
S2
A
EP: P=1
18 V 4 A
T S
1
BUS
H
TK BUS
PL
C NC
NO/S+ S-
T= -5 +45C
IP 30
BUS
TK
346000
BUS
- TMP PL RC
ART. 346260
SCS
PS
BUS
2 1
A
S1
230 Vac
A
= Door lock pushbutton in the entrance-hall
*S+ S- = 18V 4A impulsive 250mA
holding current
BUS
PI
S+ S-
346830
BT00165-b-UK
J J
M M
P P
M R T J1 J2
15
J J
M M
P P
Video adapter
346830
Description
2 WIRES video adapter that must be used wih the power supply item 346000 in the
installation of video systems (or audio/video combined), video door entry systems and
sound systems.
Allows the connection to its 3 BUS clamps. Hence it is possible to realize installations
with 2 video entrance panels and 1 riser and installations with 1 video entrance panel
and 2 risers.
The device must be installed next to the system power supply item 346000.
Related items
BUS
TK
BUS
PI
PS
346000 (2 WIRE system power supply)

Technical data
5 - 40C
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules.
1
Legend
1 - BUS PS input from the power supply (removable clamp)
2 - BUS TK output towards the EP (fixed clamp entrance panels)
3 - BUS output towards the handsets (fixed clamp handsets)
BT00170-b-UK
Floor call
interface
346833
Description
Floor call interface which allows, by means of a traditional pushbutton, to make the
following functions:
- general floor call
- addressed floor call
- staircase light switching on
- Door lock opening (with specific actuator)
- associate the video image to the call to the floor
WARNING: the maximum connection distance between the interface and the
connected pushbuttons must not exceed 3 metres.
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
5 40C
Legend
Dimensional data
BASIC plastic enclosure
18 mm
40 mm
40 mm
1 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
2 - Clamps for the connection to the 2-wire BUS
3 - Clamps for the connection of the pushbuttons / contacts (connect a pushbutton
between PL1 and C and one between PL2 and C)
Configuration
N = address of the handset to call
(To be used only with MOD = 0)
P = address of the entrance panel associated to the door lock to open
(To be used only with MOD = 2 and MOD = 3)
BT00167-b-UK

the configurator connected to MOD assigns the operating modes to the pushbuttons
connected between (PL1 and C) and (PL2 and C), as shown in the table:
MOD N
0
Handset address (00-99)
1
-
2
-
3
-
4(*)
Handset address (00-99)
P
-
-
Door lock address (00-95)
Door lock address (00-95)
Camera address (00-95)
PL1
Addressed floor call
General floor call
Door lock opening
Door lock opening
-
(*): see installation notes on next page.
PL2
Staircase lights from Handset with 00
Door lock opening (P+1)
-
346833
Installation notes
The MOD = 4 configuration mode enables associating the video image of a camera to the
call to the floor generated by the off-door pushbutton.
To use this function correctly, the following must be taken into account:
- The involved handsets, the 346833 interface, and the camera must be physically
connected on the same SCS BUS.
- In multi-family systems connect the involved devices downstream the apartment
interface item 346850 - (cameras and handsets are local resources of the individual
user).
- The active function keeps the SCS BUS busy for approximately 30, during which no
other call can be forwarded. If the handset connects, the BUS will be busy until the
TIME OUT period elapses, or the handset itself is disconnected.
- Only the following 2-wire BTicino cameras that can be used for this function: 391670
391657 391658 391659 391667 391668 - 391669 391661 391662
391663.
BT00167-b-UK
Floor shunt
346841
Description
The floor distribution block can be used for video door entry systems with a star
distribution of the wiring.
The distribution block is in a plastic enclosure with much reduced dimensions for easier
positioning (above all during the refurbishments) even with the installation inside flush
mounted boxes.
It is also possible to install systems with combined wiring risers, where a part can be of
IN/OUT type and the other part is used for the floor distribution block.
The device automatically adapts the video signal.
Max. 3 devices (handsets, bells or additional bells) can be connected on the same output.
ART. 346841

Legend
Technical data
1 - 4 outputs (P1, P2, P3, P4) - handset BUS

2 - Input/output of riser (IN-OUT) on the same pair of clamps
18 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
5 40 C
Dimensional data
ART. 346841
18 mm
40 mm
40 mm
BT00164-b-UK
Apartment interface
346850
Description
Interface to be used to install a dedicated 2-wire system inside the home, isolated from
the riser.
The system downstream the interface may include local CCTV, sound system, and MY
HOME applications control.
It can be used for calls within the building, as well as outside calls.
346850
INT
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 27 Vdc

5 - 40C
Dissipated power:
2.25 W
from the INT 15 mA connection
from the EXT 5 mA connection
ON
Operating Maximum absorption:

from the INT 50 mA connection
from the EXT 30 mA connection
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
EXT
ON
OFF
Legend
1 - Configurator socket: N = interface address, M = 3 (connected at the factory)
2 - Interface status notification LED:
Flashing green LED = STAND BY
Fixed green LED = EXT-INT connection active
3 - Video signal status notification LED:
Green LED = OK
Green/red LED = operation close to the limit
Red LED = no video signal or limits exceeded
4 - Not used
5 - Clamp for the connection to the 2 WIRE riser
6 - Clamp for the connection of the apartment 2 WIRE system
BT00168-b-UK
346850
Installation
example

N = device ID number
The configurator assigns to the interface a unique handset number inside the system.
M = Operating mode
factory configuration with 3
346850
IN T
N = 13
EXT
ON
system identification
number on the
handsets side
3M
3
123
OF F
N = 12
operating mode
NO
N
M
1N 2 3M
ON
N = 12
N=1
the interface must

be considered as
handset number 12
BT00168-b-UK
2 WIRE riser
No handset within the system can be

configured with N = 12
System expansion
interface
346851
Description
Interface for the installation of independent audio risers, to double the length of
the riser line, or to increase the performance of the 2-wire system in one-family, or
apartment systems.
Technical data
346851

5 40 C
Dissipated power:
2.25 W
Absorption:
IN clamp (MOD=0)
Stand by absorption: 30 mA
IN clamp (MOD=5)
OUT clamp (MOD=0)
OUT clamp (MOD=5)
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
ON
ON
OFF
Legend
2 - Interface status notification LED:
- flashing green = STAND BY
- fixed green = active IN-OUT connection
3 - Video signal level notification LED:
- fixed green = operation OK
- green/red = operation close to the limit
- fixed red = no video signal or limits exceeded
4 - Not used
5 - Clamps for BUS connection in input
6 - Clamps for BUS connection in output
BT00169-b-UK
346851
Configuration
MOD
M = progressive number inside the system

It identifies the interface number within the system
MOD = 0 (Galvanic separation mode)
MOD = 5 (Independent risers mode)
NOTES: with (MOD =5) and (MOD = 0), with the same progressive no. it is possible to
have inside the same system no. 2 interfaces item 346851, configured, for example, one
with (M=1) and (MOD=0) and the other with (M=1) and (MOD=5).
Galvanic separation mode (MOD=0):
used to double the length of the line, or to increase the performance of the system.
M = progressive number of the interface inside the system (from 1 to 99)
Independent risers mode (MOD=5):
M = number of the riser (from 1 to 39)
The handsets connected to the single riser will be identified at the main entrance
panel by the M configurator of 346851 x 100 + the N configurator of the single
handset.
Riser 7
MOD
5
No. of the riser
interface for
independent
risers
Handset 18
riser
1
riser
2
riser
3
346851
M=1
MOD = 5
346851
ON
ON
M=2
MOD = 5
346851
ON
OFF
ON
718
M = 39
MOD = 5
N = 18
346851
ON
OFF
ON
346851
OFF
M=7
MOD = 5
ON
ON
OFF
BT00169-b-UK
2 wire backbone
Main entrance
panel
2 wire backbone
As far as the main EP is concerned, the handset is number 718: this is the M of 346851
(7) x 100 + N of the handset connected to the riser (18).
(7 x 100) + 18 = 718
Coaxial - 2 WIRE
interface
347400
Description
Interface used for connecting the cameras with 12 Vdc power supply (max. absorption
150 mA) and coaxial video output (1 Vpp @ 75 ohm) to the 2-wire video BUS.
The interface provides direct power supply to the camera.
the device can be used as an interface for the separate camera; to associate a camera to
an audio entrance panel simply configure both the camera and the entrance panel using
the same configurator in P.
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
5 mA
210 mA - see NOTES (*)
(-20) (+70)C
(*) NOTES: max. 150 mA when the interface supplies power to the 12 V camera
Distance
347400 - COAX cameras
max. 3 m
Legend
Dimensional data
18 mm
40 mm
40 mm
1 - Clamps for the connection of the camera power supply (12 Vdc - 150 mA max.)
2 - Clamps for the connection of the camera video signal output
4 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
BT00162-b-UK
347400
Configuration
P
P = camera address
The configurator in seat P of the interface assigns to it a recognition number inside
the system. The interface is considered as a video entrance panel, therefore it must be
configured with a progressive number in relation to (P) of the entrance panel.
N Z M A PL
N = address of the handset called in case of alarm

In those systems integrated with Bticino burglar alarm systems, the configurator
connected to N of the interface, determines which handset must be called in case of
alarm occurred in the Z zone configured in the interface. Then, the handset will display
the images of the interface associated to the Z zone.
Z = zone of the burglar-alarm system associated to the camera
M = Operating mode
M = 0 - standard operation
M = SLA - Configuration for association to several audio EP
A/PL = Address of the SCS light actuator connected to the camera
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
In systems integrated with BTicino automation applications, the configurator connected
to A/PL of the interface associates the switching on of the camera with the activation of
a SCS actuator configured with the same A/PL.
(Example: switching on of lights to illuminate the field of view, only with camera active).
PI
M= SLA
S
N Z L A PL
A
BT00162-b-UK
PN
PI - PN = Range of audio EP associated

to the camera (max 5).
347400
Configuration
EP 1
Interface
CAM. 1
EP 2
P
T S
Interface
CAM. 2
T S
N Z M A PL
N Z M A PL
System with 2 video EP and 2 cameras.
EP 1
Interface
CAM. 1
P
T S
Interface
CAM. 2
N Z M A PL
N Z M A PL
System with audio EP and 2 camera (CAM. 1 associated to the EP)
N Z M A PL
1
S
L
A
PI
N Z M A PL
PN
S
L
A
BUS
TK
346000
BUS
PI
BT00162-b-UK
Pi: address of the first audio EP

Pn: address of the last audio EP
PS
346000
P=0
P=1
P=2
BUS
2 1
346830
Coupling the switching on of the camera with several audio EP (max. 5)
AXOLUTE Outdoor
entrance panel
349140
Description
Front view
Axolute outdoor entrance panel suitable for connection to the 2-WIRE system BUS or to
be used in BTicino IP systems. Its fitted with capacitive soft touch control backlit keypad,
motorised colour camera (which swivelling operation can be controlled from the preset
handsets), colour display with home page that can be fully customised by the installer,
and transponder reader for the release of the door lock, which may also be activated
using a numeric code for residents. Module to be completed with flush mounted box
and surround plate. Programming, residents directory, and the configuration are
completed using the appropriate software supplied with the product.
Related items
339313 (Steel flush mounted box with tearing protection)
331130 (SFERA plastic flush mounted box)
339213 (Surround plate + frame, steel finish)
339223 (Surround plate + frame, brass finish)
5
6
Technical data
220 mA
(-25)-(+70)C
Connections:
2-WIRE SCS BUS

Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec
Protection index:
IP54
PI against mechanical impact: IK07
Rear view
7
8
Dimensional data
50 mm
104 mm
35.5 mm
84 mm
11
Legend
Electric module
27.5
mm
139 mm
30 mm
355 mm
330 mm
BT00134-b-UK
Steel surround plate + frame

Protrusion from the wall:
11 mm
12
10
253 mm
300 mm
Flush mounted box
139 mm
Brass surround plate + frame

Protrusion from the wall:
13.5 mm
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
Loudspeakers
Colour camera that can be swivelled
LCD colour display
Capacitive alphanumeric keypad: to search for the extension and for sending the
call, as well as for enabling the installer to complete the programming procedure
5 - Transponder reader: to open the door lock using the transponder
6 - Microphone
8 - Mini-USB connector: for PC connection, for programming or firmware update
9 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
10 - Additional power supply connection clamps
11 - Cable fastener
12 - Ethernet connector: for connection to the IP BTicino system and for programming
and firmware update from PC
349140
Configuration
The device can be configured in three different modes:
1) Physical connection fo the configurators to their sockets:
The configurator connected to P socket assigns an identification number within the
system to the EP. The numbering of the EP must always start from P=0.
The EP configured with P=0 must be the main one.
Entrance panel
address
Ring tone selection /

general call
S - selection of the ring tone to send to the Handset and general call
When a call is received: S=0 (RING TONE 1 - Default)
S=1 (RING TONE 2)
S=2 (RING TONE 3)
S=3 (RING TONE 4)
S=9 (GENERAL CALL TO ALL THE HANDSETS)
2) Directly from the keypad of the electronic module:
Using the installer menu (Password protected function)
Configuration
Configuration of the
SCS address of the
entrance panel
WARNING: the presence of physical configurators in the configurator sockets

WILL PREVENT keypad configuration.
BT00134-b-UK
349140
Configuration
3) Using the TiAxoluteOutdoor Software supplied:
For the connection to the PC use an USB-mini cable or an Ethernet cable (cross cable).
The dedicated application can be used for configuration, programming, device Firmware
update, fill the residents list, save all information, and download to the device.
USB connection
BUS
Ethernet connection
Cross cable
BT00134-b-UK
BUS
If the Axolute EP is installed and has Ethernet connection, remote connection is also possible.
WARNING: in order for the communication to take place, the EP must be powered and not physically configured.
349140
Wiring diagrams
2-WIRE SCS BUS connection
349140
230 Vac
346000
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
346830
or
F441
OUT4
OUT
1 2 PL S+ S-
346230
346230
or
346260
346020
35,

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175A
50/60
165m z
H
127Vdc
600 A
2:
m
IN
3 7

IN1
BUS 2 1
IN2
IN3
IN4
SCS
BUS
230 Vac
OPTIONAL
NOTES (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)
IP Ethernet connection
349140
230 Vac
12 Vac 1 A
1 2 PL S+ S-
346230
346000
346230
or
346260
346020
35,

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175A
50/60
165m z
H
127Vdc
600 A
2:
m

3 7
SWITCH C9455
BUS 2 1
230 Vac
IP
OPTIONAL
BT00134-b-UK
'&,Q
BUS
NOTES (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)
AXOLUTE
VIDEO STATION
349310
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation.
With 5.6 colour LCD display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion.
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an amplifier,
enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the
product.
10
4
5
Related items
Front view
349210 - Surround plate (satin-finished aluminium)

349211 - Surround plate (KRISTALL glass)
349212 - Surround plate (TEAK wood)
Legend
1 - 5.6 colour LCD display
2 - Navigation keypad and confirmation inside the menu
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the diffusion of voice and stereo sound
4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Microphone
6 - Connection status LED
7 - LED for call exclusion notification
8 - Door lock status LED
9 - Door lock opening key
10 - Keys for video door entry functions
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
10 mA
410 mA
5 - 40C
Dimensional data
257 mm
307 mm
161 mm
1
2
226 mm
105.5 mm
35
120.5 mm
140 mm
BT00137-b-UK
165 mm
Rear view
Legend
4 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
349140
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxolutestation software (CD supplied),
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the
product.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the
appropriate socket on the back of the device itself.
Warning: If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment,
configuration of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
- create flexible menus

- customize text messages
- access all home automation functions
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxolutestation software,

or to update the firmware, connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the
USB-mini cable.
USB-miniUSB
To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station

must be powered and not physically configured.
WARNING
The device configuration
made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED using
the software.
P M

The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00137-b-UK
N - numero del Handset

The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive mode. Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside the apartment without item 346850) must be
configured with the same N configurator. Additional audio handsets, video handsets
and/or bells can be installed in parallel to the basic video handset.
M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
preset functions (see manual supplied with the product).
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY
349311-349312-349313
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5 colour LCD
display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the management of the
following MY HOME applications: video door entry system, temperature control, sound
system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. LED signalling for: call exclusion,
door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item 506 boxes. To be completed with front
cover plate (all those suitable for item 506E of the AXOLUTE series).
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product.
1
10
9
Related items
item 506E
item PB526
item HA/HB4826...
item 349319
2
3
4
3+3 modules flush mounted box

3+3 modules plasterboard box
3+3 modules front cover plate (see AXOLUTE finishes)
VIDEO DISPLAY table-top base
Front view
7 6 5
Legend
Technical data
1 - 2.5 colour LCD display

2 - Loudspeaker
3 - LED for call exclusion notification
4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Connection status LED
6 - Entrance panel and cycling activation key
7 - Door lock status LED
8 - KEY Door lock opening
9 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
10 - Microphone
18 27 Vdc
10 mA
320 mA
5 - 40C
Dimensional data
105.5 mm
118 mm
2,5
9.5 mm
1
2
30.2 mm
AXOLUTE
127 mm
1 2
BUS
OFF
BT00136-b-UK
141.5 mm
ON
Rear view
Legend
Maximum space requirement with front cover plate

3 - 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
4 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
5 - Clamp for connection of the additional power supply
349311-349312-349313
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the
appropriate sockets on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of
the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software (CD supplied),

provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxoluteDisplay software, or to
update the firmware, connect AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using an USB-miniUSB
cable.
WARNING: The configuration of the device is performed using configurators and

cannot be changed from the menu.
BUS
P M
To ensure that the communication is successful, AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY must be


with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00136-b-UK
M - Operating mode
functions (see manual supplied with the product).
AXOLUTE
Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION
349320-349321
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation. With 8 colour LCD
display, backlit capacitive keypad with soft touch controls and PC customisable OSD
navigation icon menu for the management of the following MY HOME applications:
video door entry system, temperature control, sound system and multimedia,
automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion.
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an
amplifier, enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
It can be integrated with MY HOME, also in combination with the Multimedia interface,
item 3465 - (in this case, allow for a local video door entry system power supply).
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiNighterandWhiceStation software supplied
with the product.
2
3
Technical data
18 27 Vdc
30 mA
520 mA
5 - 40C
Front view
Legend
Dimensional data
230 mm
25 mm
1 - 8 LCD colour display

2 - Microphone
3 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
4 - Led and video door entry function keys
305 mm
Rear view
1
2
6
5
3
BT00135-b-UK
Legend
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the broadcasting of voice and stereo sound
4 - Screw used to fasten the Video Station to the metal base
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
349311-349312-349313
Configuration
AXOLUTE Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndWhiceStation
software (CD supplied)
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry functions.
This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the appropriate
housing on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the
video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation

software (CD supplied), provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with
the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- customize text messages
- access all home automation functions
To transfer the configuration performed using the

TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation software, or to update the firmware,
connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the USB-mini cable.
WARNING
The device configuration made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED from the software.
BUS
To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station

must be powered and not configured physically.

M - Operating mode
functions (see manual supplied with the product).
BT00135-b-UK

with idle video hanset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
Axolute Etris Video Display

Description
349340
Front view
2 WIRE speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation.

With 2.5 colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. LED signalling for: call
exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel.
Flush mounted / plasterboard installation using the appropriate boxes.
To be completed with dedicated front cover and front cover plate available in the Axolute
white, anthracite, and tech colour variants.
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product.
10
9
2
3
4
Related items
528W
PB528W
349243
349241
349242
HW4826HD
HW4826HC
HW4826HS
346020

Flush mounted box

Plasterboard box
White front cover
Axolute tech front cover
Anthracite front cover
White front cover plate
Axolute tech front cover plate
Tech front cover plate
(additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of
the video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.
Rear view
7 6 5
11
12
Technical data

18 27 Vdc
10 mA
320 mA
0 40 C
15
13
14
Dimensional data
128 mm
29 mm
Legend
1. 2.5 LCD colour display
2. Loudspeaker
3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
5. Connection status LED
BT00386-a-UK
6. Entrance panel/camera cycling activation key
128 mm
7. Door lock status LED

8. Door lock activation key
9. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
10. Microphone
31 mm
11. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC

13. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1-2)
349340
Flush mounted box 528W
Plasterboard box PB528W

128.5 mm
116.5 mm
58 mm
TOP TOP
TOP
128.5 mm
58 mm
116.5 mm
TOP
TOP TOP
Configuration
The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
Axolute Etris Video Display can be configured in 2 different modes:

- Advanced configuration (using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied)
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their own
housing on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
connect Axolute Etris Video Display to the PC using the USB-miniUSB cable.
3
2
USB-miniUSB
BT00386-a-UK
N numero del Handset

The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
P entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel to
activate before pressing the key and which door lock
with video handset at rest is activated, when the key
is pressed.
M Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).
To ensure that the communication is successful, the video handset must be

Flush mounted
2 wire indoor colour camera
391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663
Description
2 wire indoor colour camera for video monitoring system functions. Flush mounted
or wall mounted installation using the dedicated accessories of the AXOLUTE, LIVING,
LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
3
Related items
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.
Technical data
Sensor:
Lens:
Interlace:
Scanning:
Horizontal frequency:
Vertical frequency:
Image elements:
Video signal:
Minimum illumination:
18-27 Vdc
from 1/3 colour CCD
5 mA
140 mA
semi pin-hole 3.7 mm
2:1
Standard CCIR
15625 Hz
50 Hz
537 (H) x 597 (V)
380 TV lines at the image centre
PAL compatible
5 lux
5 40 C
Legend
2 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamp
3 - Microphone
Dimensional data
Camera adjustment
43 mm
+ 30
43 mm
65 mm
P
N
Z
M
A
PL
+ 25
- 30
- 25
BT00174-b-UK
391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663
Configuration
P Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
NOTES (*) : connect an OFF configurator here to disable the microphone
(function available for cameras configured from 0 to 9, for other cameras the
microphone cannot be excluded).
N Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Z Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M Mode of operation when a camera is switched on
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M
M = 0
M = 1 - 9
A/PL
Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
P
PL
BT00174-b-UK
Outdoor 2-wire
colour camera
391670
Description
2-wire compact outdoor (IP65) colour camera.
It can be used for video monitoring system installations, or for turning audio systems
into video systems, using a separate camera.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
Technical data
Enclosure:
Sensor:
Lens:
Image elements:
Minimum illumination:
Protection index:
P
18 27 Vdc
aluminium
1/3 CMOS colour
5 mA
65 mA
f: 6 mm; F: 2.3 mm
628 (H) x 586 (V)
330 TV lines at the image centre
2 Lux F=2.0
(-20) (+70) C; RH 95% max
IP65
Configuration
P Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
N Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Dimensional data
Z Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to

98 mm
85 mm
38 mm
N Z M A PL
M Mode of operation when a camera is switched on

Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M
M = 0
M = 1 - 9
M = SLA

A/PL
Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
Configuration of the audio entrance panel associated to the camera
(see following details)
M = SLA
PI
PN
BT00173-b-UK
S
L A PL
A
Pi - Pn = range of audio EP associated to the camera (max.5)

PI - PN = Audio entrance panels associated to the camera (max. 5)
PI = Address of first associated EP
PN = Address of last associated EP
A/PL = Address of the SCS control associated to the camera
Audio/video node
F441
Description
The audio/video node is a mixer device enabling distribution of up to 4 sound sources or

2-wire audio/video risers.
The 4 outputs will all have the same signal coming from the input selected among the
4 available.
WARNING : Connections using both screw clamps and patch cords at the same
time are NOT possible.
Technical data
Absorption from BUS:
20 mA
Dissipated power:
0.5 W
5 40 C
Number of inputs available: 4
Number of outputs available: 4
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules
Legend
1 - Output clamps (OUT1 - OUT2 - OUT3 - OUT4) for the connection of 2-wire video risers
or amplifiers
2 - Sockets for patch cord connection
3 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
4 - Input clamps (IN1 - IN2 - IN3 - IN4) for the connection of sound sources or entrance
panels / cameras
BT00017-b-UK
Multi-channel matrix
F441M
Description
The multi-channel matrix is a device which can distribute up to 4 stereo sound sources
and a video signal from entrance panels or cameras simultaneously.
The matrix is made up of 8 inputs and 8 outputs (to wire 8 rooms).
Video entrance panels and cameras (first 4 inputs) and stereo sound sources (last 4
inputs) can be wired in input.
On each output of the matrix there is a clearly separate room.
The rooms must be set in ascending order (room 1 - OUT, room 2 - OUT 2 etc.).
The stereo signals are distributed at the same time and independently on any output.
However, it is not possible for the audio signals of two separate sound sources to be
mixed on the same output branch.
The stereo signal of a sound sources and the video signal of one of the 2-wire video
door entry sources can travel at the same time on the same branch (entrance panel or
camera).
1
OUT 1
TK1

Absorption da BUS:
46 - 60 mA
Dissipated power:
1.5 W
5 45 C
Number of inputs available: 8
Number of outputs available: 8
OUT 3
TK2
TK3

Technical data
OUT 2
OUT 4
TK4
OUT 5
S1
OUT 6
OUT 7
S2
S3
OUT 8
S4
BUS
Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the amplifier and the video door entry system handsets.
2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
3 - Clamps for the connection of the input sound sources (S1-S2-S3-S4)
4 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire cameras / entrance panels (TK1-TK2-TK3-TK4)
Dimensional data
10 DIN modules
BT00016-b-UK
CONTENTS
Technical sheets Structured cabling system for the

home sector
Technical sheets Structured cabling system for the home sector MY HOME 1095
SCS/TV
modulator
F442
Description
OUT
IN
RS 2
5 6
5 6
8 9
10
RS 1
234
234
F442
01
01
DC - In PWR
SCS
Legend
Power supply 346000
1. Output for TV + SAT jacks distributed around the room, or to the TV HUB
2. Television antenna + SAT input
Technical data
Power supply:
Absorption:

Dissipated power:
Rated frequency:
Output power (S band):
No. of F type outputs:
8 9
Related items
The SCS/TV modulation device is a device that can be installed on DIN 35 rail, giving the
possibility of displaying on the home television set the video signal from the entrance
panel of the 2-wire video door entry system. In this way, the caller can be displayed
directly on the television set. This device (which can be used on one-family systems)
must be connected to the terrestrial or satellite antenna, on the specific F type input,
and to the television set, on the specific output connector. On the bottom are two screw
clamps, for the connection of the 2-wire BUS, shunted from the entrance panel of the
video door entry system.
In order to display the call on the television set, this must be set to the correct video
channel, which must be the same as the one selected on the modulation device using the
front adjustments (the left one for the tenths, and the right one for the units).
The television set must be enabled for the selection of the S band channel, to be selected
between S11 and S41.
It will be necessary to associate to the channel of the selected S band for the display of
the SCS signal the Video CH program that can be selected using the television remote
control. This is the one that can be accessed using the remote control to display the SCS
video output.
The SCS/TV modulation unit is preset with a selector that must be positioned near the
letter A if the device is the last one of the SCS chain. In addition to a green LED confirming
the presence of the power supply, a red alarm LED is also present: if the red ALARM LED
turns on, check the wiring and the connections.
3. Selector for the selection of the tenths of the SCS channel
10 - 35 Vdc
210 mA at 12 Vdc
100 mA at 24 Vdc
90 mA at 27 Vcc
3W
5 - 45 C
40 W- 2150 MHz
88 dBV/750
1
4. Selector for the selection of the units of the SCS channel

5. SCS BUS input
6. Selector for the selection of the device as the last one (A) of the SCS chain
7. Alarm LED
8. Power supply
LED
OUTpresent signalling IN
9. Power supply clamps
10. Push-button for the selection of the SCS video band
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules
8 9
8 9
01
Tenths setup
234
5 6
RS 2
5 6
BT00019-a-UK
RS 1
234
F442
It will be necessary to configure the device in order to assign the number of the S band
video channel used for transmitting the signal to send to the television set.
P
This operation is performed using the two front adjustment controls (units and tenths).
The same video channel number must be set on the television set.
01
Configuration
Units setup
1096 MY HOME Technical sheets Structured cabling system for the home sector
F442
Wiring diagram
TV
SAT
OUT
IN (TV-SAT)
OUT
89
89
0 1
DC - In PWR
2 34
5 6
RS 2
5 6
RS 1
2 34
0 1
F442
IN
SCS
10 35 Vdc
Entrance panel
Handset
3
2
1
0
BT00019-a-UK
SCS Video door entry system
Patch module
F550C6
Description
Patch module fitted with Toolless connector for the capping of the cable from the user
socket. Possibility of device rotation to accept wiring cables coming either from the top
or the base of the electric distribution board.
Fitted with visual indicator, for the identification of the service transmitted.
Connects to other data network devices using patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
FLAT L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cords

Technical data
Category:
6
5 40 C
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
Fitting and installation
Device rotation for best positioning based on the side the wiring is coming
from.
legran
Legend
1. RJ45 input port
d
legran
2. Visual indicator
3. RJ45 output port
180
180
180
180
180
BT00321-a-UK
180
180
F550C6
Wiring
OK
NO
OK
NO
OK
NO
BT00321-a-UK
5 port switch
F551
Description
Front view
Device use for distributing the data network to several points of the home.
It has 5 RJ45 ports (1 input and 4 outputs) and supports 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
connections, automatically adapting to the maximum speed supported by the network
terminals connected to each port. Should It be necessary to extend the home data
network to more than 4 terminals, a port may be connected to a second switch.
For the connection use patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
Power supply F552

Technical data

Absorption:
Transmission speed:
9 Vdc
220 mA
10/100 Mbit/s
5 40 C
Side view
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
2
3
Bottom view
BT00322-a-UK
Legend
1. RJ45 output ports
2. Orange LED: - OFF: speed 10Mbit/s
- ON: speed 100Mbit/s
3. Green LED: - flashing: data transmission
- ON: device active
4. Electric power supply connector (F552)

5. RJ45 input port
F551
Wiring diagram
Patch module
F550C6
Patch cords
L4665L20 L4665L40
Switch
F551
Power
Power supply
F522
LAN input
Connection of the switches in series, to increase the number of LAN lines available on the output
BT00322-a-UK
LAN input
Power supply
F552
Description
DIN modularity device for providing power supply to the Switch, item F551.
Related items
Switch F551
Technical data

Output voltage:
Maximum current delivered:
Power
115 - 230 Vac 50 - 60 Hz

9 Vdc
1.6 A
5 40 C
Dimensional data
1.5 DIN modules
Fitting and installation
The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations.

- The device must be installed inside appropriate containers;
- It must not be exposed to water drips or sprays;
- Do not obstruct the air vents;
- In order to ensure overload and direct contact protection, it must be powered using a
two-pole circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm, located nearby the
device.
Legend
1. Clamps for the connection of the device power supply
2. 230 V network present LED
3. Power line voltage connection clamps
BT00323-a-UK
F553
Description
This device, which does not require electric power supply, is used for the distribution of
the television signal to 6 TV/SAT jacks.
It is fitted with an F type input connector for the signal from the TV switchboard, and of
six output connectors, for the connection of the TV/SAT jacks, which must have electric
features compatible with the device, and be of the shunted type.
The distribution frame is supplied with 3 plugs in case protection of the unused outputs
is required.
1
Front view
Related items
Shunted TV/SAT jacks HC/HS/L/N/NT4202D, HC/HS/L/N/NT4269F, A/AM5173D,

A/AM5175D, C4202D
Technical data
Frequency range:
Impedance:
5 - 2400 MHz
75O Ohm
Direct loss (db):

Frequency (MHz)
5 - 470
470 - 862
950 - 2150
Type
13
13
16
Max.
13.5
14
17
Return loss- (db):

Frequency (MHz)
5 - 40
40 - 1000
1000 - 2150
2150 - 2400
Type
11
13
15
15
Max.
10
14
14
14
5 40 C
Top view
Bottom view
EN 50083
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
BT00324-a-UK
Legend
1. F type output connector
2. F type input connector
F553
Wiring diagram
TV
TV
SAT
Shunted TV/SAT jack
Type 4214D
Distribution
frame
BT00324-a-UK
SAT
Television
antenna
Telephone distribution frame
F555
Description
Device with two input ports and eight RJ45 output ports for the distribution of one or 2
telephone lines in the following way:
- one telephone line can be shunted on all the output ports;
- two telephone lines can be shunted on two groups of output ports.
The selection of the mode of shunting is made using the changeover switch, as shown
in the following table:
IN
Front view
OUT
1
1
L1+L2
2
x
3
x
L1
L1+L2
L1
L1
2
1
L2
L1
L2
1
Top view
In alternative to the connection using the RJ45 connector, the input line cables may also
be connected using traditional screw clamps.
Should it be necessary to distribute more than eight telephone lines, a second similar
device may be connected in cascade to the main distribution frame.
Related items
L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
Technical data
5 40 C
Bottom view
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Legend
BT00325-a-UK
1. RJ45 ports, output telephone line

2. RJ45 port, line 2 input
3. RJ45 port, line 1 input
4. Screw clamp, line 2 input
5. Screw clamp, line 1 input
F555
Wiring diagram
Diagram for the shunting of one telephone line
Diagram for the shunting of two telephone lines

Line 2
To tel. No. 5, 6, 7 and 8

Telephone No. 4
Telephone No. 3
Telephone No. 2
Telephone No. 1
To tel. No. 1, 2, 3 and 4

Telephone No. 4
Telephone No. 3
Telephone No. 2
Telephone No. 1
Line 1
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L1
L2
L2
L1
L1+L2
L1
L2
Input telephone
line
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L1
L2
L2
L1
L1+L2
L1
L2
Telephone line
1 input
In series connection of the distribution frames to increase the number of available

telephone lines
To the telephones
To the telephones
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
BT00325-a-UK
L1+L2
L1
L1
L2
L1
L2
Input telephone line
Telephone line
2 input
xDSL filter with telephone distribution frame

Description
F558
Front view
This device, with one input port and four output ports, RJ45 type, performs a double
action:
- it makes the ADSL signal intended for a modem available to an output port;
- it makes the telephone signal intended for the other three telephone lines available to
the other three output ports.
In alternative to the RJ45 connector, the input telephone line can also be connected
using a traditional screw clamp.
The filter is compatible with ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL and VDSL2 standards.
If more than three telephone lines are required, it will be possible to use the device
in conjunction with the F555 telephone distribution frame using patch cords L4665L20
and L4665L40.
LINE
Related items

L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
Top view
PHONE 2 PHONE 3
Technical data
Audio frequency range:
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
Bandwidth splitter
from continuous current up to 16 kHz
DSL frequency range:
32 kHz - 30 MHz
Input signal rated voltage:
21 mV pp - 5.4 Vpp
Telephone call voltage:

Line impedance:
40 - 150 Vrms
2
PHONE 1 MODEM
250 - 75O Ohm

Bottom view
DSL loss (db):

Frequency Type
32 kHz - 138 kHz
> 45
138 kHz - 30 MHz
> 55
5 40 C
2 DIN modules
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
BT00326-a-UK
Dimensional data
RJ45 port, output telephone line

RJ45 port, output ADSL line to the modem
Screw clamp for input telephone line
RJ45 port for input telephone line
1108 MY HOME
Technical sheets Control and integration
CONTENTS
MY HOME 1109
Audio/Video Web Server
F454
Description
Audio/Video Web Server for local and remote control of MY HOME applications using
dedicated web pages.
The Web Server can also be used as a gateway for the management of the system using
devices like PCs and Smartphones, and for virtual configuration, using a dedicated
software.
ETHERNET
Technical data

Absorption:
18 27 Vdc
125 mA max (with active video interface)
5 35 C
SCS AI
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules
Configuration
Legend
The audio/video web server is configured using the TiF454 software thanks to a LAN
connection (with cross-over cable if the connection between PC and F454 is direct,
without using a HUB/SWITCH) or using a standard USB and mini USB cable.
1. RJ 45 for 10/100Mbit Ethernet LAN

2. Under the door are:
- USB ports for PC configuration and Firmware update

- RESET pushbutton
- Serial connector RS232
3. User interface:
- Speed: Connection speed; ON = 100 Mbit;

OFF = 10 Mbit
- Link: ON it indicates the presence of the Ethernet network
- System: when the power supply is connected, it comes on, goes off, and then

comes on again, to indicate that the web server is working
4. 2-wire BUS for video door entry system connection
5. 2-wire BUS for burglar alarm system
BT00519-a-UK
1110 MY HOME
SCS AV
Telephone actuator
F461/2
Description
The telephone actuator enables remote control of two users (e.g. boilers, garden
watering, staircase light, garden light, rolling shutters, etc.) using the fixed, or the
mobile telephone line.
Remote control and programsng are protected by a password consisting in a 4 digit
code that can be customised by the customer; the default code is 1234. During the
programsng procedure, it is possible to select three operating modes:
- LIGHTING
It can be used to enable/disable users such as staircase lights, garden lights, boilers, etc.
- AUTOMATISMS
It can be used to activate the rolling shutter motors (up/down movement), as well as
other motors.
- TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To enable or disable the boilers; used together with the BTicino timer thermostat.
The activation, deactivation, check and programsng controls must be sent from the
actuator using only a DTMF telephone; if other types of telephones are used, the
actuator does not work. In order to control more than two users, it is possible to install
on the same telephone line up to four actuators, in parallel on the line.
The operation of the actuators is guaranteed even if an answering machine is installed
on the telephone line.
Technical data
Network Power supply:

Dissipated power:
Absorption:
Telephone network:
Weight:
Connection to the
telephone network:
Connection to the PABX
Dialling system:
Relay number:
Relay output contacts:
Dimensional data
3 DIN modules.
Front view
11
10
9
2
3
4
Legend
230 Vac 10 % 50Hz

11 VA
50 mA
0 35 C
analogue (PSTN)
270 grams
1. Screw clamps (C2): uscita contatti in scambio del rel 2

2. Yellow LED: relay (C2) status. ON = relay active
3. RJ8 female connector: to connect the actuator to the telephone using the cable
supplied, and activate the programming procedure

4. Pushbutton (C2) for local activation of relay 2
5. PROG/LINE selector:
two-wire with telephone pair

two-wire with telephone pair
only with touch tone dialling (DTMF)
2 with independent control and changeover contacts
230 Vac 6A resistive, 2A inductive both between N-NC and N-NO
- in PROG position: operation in programming mode

- in LINE position: normal operation
6. Screw clamps (LU): telephone line input
7. Screw clamps (PRI): power supply 230 Vac
8. Green LED : operating mode:
OFF = actuator faulty or incorrectly powered
On steady = powered and normal operation
ON flashing = powered and in programming mode operation
9. Pushbutton (C1) for local activation of relay 1
10. Yellow LED: relay (C1) status. ON = relay active
11. Screw clamps (C1): output of changeover contacts of relay 1
BT00380-a-UK
MY HOME 1111
F461/2
Configuration
The programming procedure is performed using a standard touch tone telephone, connected
to the RJ8 socket of the actuator, using the appropriate cable, supplied as standard.
1.............. 4.............. 7..............

2.............. 5.............. 8..............
3.............. 6.............. 9..............
To program the telephone actuator move

the selector (3) to PROG, and enter the
commands on the telephone connected to
the connector (4). The programming cable
is supplied as standard.
The actuator can be programmed to operate in three different modes:

- lighting: to enable or disable lights, boilers, etc.;
- automation: to activate the rolling shutter motors (closing opening), or other motors;
- temperature control: to activate or deactivate the heating or the air conditioning
system to be used with the BTicino timer thermostat item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and
item AM5721.
Also, in the three operating modes the two relays can themselves be programmed to
operate with the monostable function (once timed, the relay closes for the programmed
time; ideal, for example, when timed switching on of the staircase lights is required), or
bistable (ON - OFF, at every command the relay changes its status and keeps it until a new
command is received, behaving as a switch).
The actuator can also be connected to an internal telephone extension (shunted), when
a PABX BTicino telephone switchboard is present (to expand the number of relays that
can be selected remotely); it is also possible to connect in parallel to each other on the
same telephone line up to 4 actuators, even if an answering machine is also installed.
At the end of each programming operation the actuator sends to the telephone receiver a
confirmation (programming correct) or an error (programming failed) tone.
LIGHTING MODE
In this mode the two relays can be enabled independently, and can also be programmed
with different functions.
A user can be activated with impulsive monostable operation using relay 1 (Example
1: timed switching on of the staircase light), and with ON/OFF bistable operation using
relay 2 (Example: boiler activation/deactivation).
TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE
This mode enables to combine the telephone actuator to the operation of the BTicino
timer thermostat, item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and item AM5721.
Using this mode, it is possible to remotely change the operation of the timer thermostat.
If the timer thermostat is in any AUTO, MAN, ANTIFREEZE, PARTY, HOLIDAY, or OFF
condition, by activating the following controls on the actuator:
- ANTIFREEZE, the timer thermostat will switch to the antifreeze condition, until an
unlocking command is received;
- AUTO, the timer thermostat will switch to the automatic condition.
AUTOMATISM MODE
In this mode, the two relays are both controlled using the same command and cannot be
activated independently from each other.
Therefore, when relay 1 is programmed, the actuator will automatically also manage
relay 2.
The AUTOMATISM mode is recommended for controlling users interlocked with each other,
such as the operation of a rolling shutter (up/down), motors (forward/backwards), etc.
For more details see the instruction leaflet supplied with the device.
BT00380-a-UK
1112 MY HOME
F461/2
Wiring diagrams
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive
U
User 2
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive
Telephone line
U
User 1
a b
IN
Telephone
actuator
PLT1
Telephone
protection
It is possible to connect up to 4 devices on the same

telephone call. The devices must be numbered
progressively. It is very important that each device
has its own unique identification number.
OUT
a b
230 Vac
50 Hz
Telephone line
U1
NOTE:
The devices must be numbered
progressively during the programming
procedure. It is very important that each
device has its own unique identification
number.
U2
U7
C1
Actuator No. 1
(main)
a b
IN
Telephone
protection
PLT1
OUT
a b
230V
0,5A
2A
C2
5A cos=0,5
6A
Timer thermostat
NA C NC
230V 50 Hz
50 mA
Remote
a
LU
ext NTC
To the loads
to be controlled
Remote
activation
BT00380-a-UK
Actuator No. 4
(secondary)
PRI
230 Vac
50 Hz
U8
Contact open
automatic program
(last one selected)
Contact closed
manual antifreeze
program
MY HOME 1113
GSM telephone actuator
F462
Description
The F462 GSM actuator is a GSM terminal suitable for the remote management of all the
heating systems, particularly if there is no fixed telephone line.
It is also possible to control two remote inputs and one remote output.
The communication is between a mobile phone and the GSM modem of the device,
using an SMS message.
The F462 GSM actuator connected to a timer thermostat, item L/N/NT4450 enables,
using appropriate SMS messages, to read the status of the timer thermostat (measured
room temperature, program set, etc.), to change the set program, and change certain
temperature control parameters; In alternative, it can be used with the timer thermostat,
item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4451 , with the ON-OFF function only.
The device is capable of sending an SMS message to the telephone numbers saved inside
the device itself, when an alarm situation caused by the closing/opening of the contacts
occurs.
Front view
4
5
6
7
1 2
F462
Technical data
Power supply:
Absorption:
Contact output:
Contacts free from voltage
Quad band:
Output power:

Sensitivity:

Protection index:
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
10 20 Vac/Vdc
Idle 30mA 500mA MAX
4(2)A-250Vac
E GSM850/900/1800/1900 MHz
Class 4 (2W) for 850/900 MHz
Class 1 (1W) for 1800/1900 MHz
107dBm@ 850/900MHz
106dBm@ 1800/1900MHz
IP40 (when correctly installed)
11
Legend
1. Outdoor antenna connector
2. Alarm input connections
3. Relay or HC/HS/L/N/NT4451 timer thermostat output connections
4. Network status LED: OFF = Not powered

FLASHING QUICKLY = Searching for network

FLASHING SLOWLY = Standby
5. Input 1 (alarm 1) status LED, and field intensity notification
6. Relay status LED, and field intensity notification
7. Input 2 (alarm 2) status LED, and field intensity notification
8. L/N/NT4450 timer thermostat connections
9. Power supply input
10. Battery connector
11. SIM card housing (remove the bottom cover)
BT00379-a-UK
1114 MY HOME
10
F462
Configuration
The device configuration operations consist in defining the coded SMS messages
following several criteria depending on the control to actuate remotely, or remote status
information for the managed devices. As a coding example here is the message for the
control of the timer thermostat (item L/N/ NT4450).
#STATUS to know the status of the timer thermostat, the alarms and the relays
#FROST to set the antifreeze program
#ECONOMY to set the MANUAL program with temperature T1
#COMFORT to set the MANUAL program with temperature T3
#AUTO to set the automatic program
#RESUME to return to the program set on the timer thermostat.
For the full list of codes see the instruction manual supplied with the device
Wiring diagrams
ALARM
NOTIFICATIONS
ELECTRIC USER
OR ITEM
HC/HS4451
L/N/NT4451
EXTERNAL BATTERY
Power supply
*NC = NOT CONNECTED
Timer thermostat
Item L/N/NT4450
BT00379-a-UK
MY HOME 1115
HC/HS 4690
Description
Front view
Multimedia Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling all the functions of the
MY HOME system by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on the 10 16:9 LCD
Touch Screen.
In addition to the management of the automation functions, lights, temperature
control, sound system, burglar alarm, and scenarios, by using the device it is also
possible to answer to video door entry system calls, and display the images transmitted
by the entrance panel, or the connected cameras. Thanks to the USB device and SD card
inputs, Multimedia Touch Screen can manage multimedia files, allowing the users to
listen to their favourite music or to view films and images.
When integrated with a domestic LAN network with internet connection, the device
enables (following the activation of specific icons) receiving RSS services such as news
and weather information, displaying images transmitted through webcams, and
listening to internet radio channels.
Related items
Surround plate:
Power supply:
5
HA4690XC, HA4690VBB, HA4690LTK, HA4690VNB, HA4690VSW
346020
Rear view
6 7 8 9 10 11
Technical data

Local power supply (1 2): 18 27 Vdc
Max. local absorption (1 2): 600 mA
Absorption from SCS BUS: 50 mA
5 45 C
17
PSTN
BUS
2 1
Dimensional data
OFF
SCS AUDIO OUT
ETH
13
15 14
Legend
1. 10 Touch Screen colour LED display
2. Microphone
17 mm
305 mm
3. USB connection
4. Mini USB PC connection
5. SD card connector
6. Sound system source output connector
7. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
BT00318-a-UK
8. LAN connection signalling LED
228 mm
9. PSTN telephone line connector (future application)

10. 2 wire video BUS/SCS connector
11. 1-2 power supply connector
12. End of line ON/OFF micro switch
13. Loudspeaker
14. Bracket fixing screw
15. Factory configuration reset pushbutton
16. NiMh 7.2 V battery compartment; 160 mAh
17. RS232 PC connector
1116 MY HOME
12
ON
16
13
HC/HS 4690
Configuration
Multimedia Touch Screen must be configured using the TiMultimediaTouchScreen

software supplied as standard. In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed,
or to update the firmware, connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the PC using one of the
three solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- serial connector (3559);
- Ethernet cable.
USB connection
Ethernet connection
Serial connection
PSTN
PSTN
BUS
BUS
2 1
2 1
ON
ON
OFF
SCS AUDIO OUT
OFF
SCS AUDIO OUT
3559
ETH
ETH
BT00318-a-UK
Switch
MY HOME 1117
HC/HS 4690
Wiring diagram
Ethernet cable
230 Vac
PSTN
BUS
2 1
PR I
346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175 - 165 mA
47 / 63 Hz
F441M
Multichannel matrix
1-2
346020
Power supply
Audio SCS BUS
BT00318-a-UK
1118 MY HOME
SCS AUDIO OUT
1-2: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ETH
HC/HS 4690
Installation
Before fixing the device to the wall apply the surround plate item HA4690...
HA4690...
Connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the system and fix it to the wall using the bracket
supplied with the product.
To complete the installation rotate the fixing screws at the back of Multimedia Touch
Screen clockwise.
BT00318-a-UK
MY HOME 1119
Touch Screen
H4890 - HW4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - AM5890
Description
Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling the MY HOME and Lighting
Management functions, by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 3.5
touch screen LCD display.
The device can be used to manage the automation, lights, temperature control, sound
system, burglar-alarm, energy management, and scenario functions.
For each application, it is possible to manage up to 20 actuations (for example 20
actuators, 20 amplifiers, etc.).
Technical data

Absorption:
27 Vdc
18 27 Vdc
80 mA
0 40 C
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 flush mounted module

Installation
Touch Screen can be installed very easily on the wall using a box, item 506E, and
integrates perfectly with any domestic room thanks to its compatibility with all cover
plates of the Axolute, Living and Mtix civil series.
506E (AM4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - H4890)

528W (HW4890)
Touch screen
2
Legend
1. USB connector for programming and firmware update
2. RJ45 Ethernet connector
3. Clamp for SCS BUS connection
BT00518-a-UK
1120 MY HOME
H4890 - HW4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - AM5890

Configuration
Touch Screen is programmed by connecting it to a PC using the interface cable,

item 335919 (RS232 version), 3559 (USB version), or an Ethernet cable, and the
TiTouchScreen software.
The software creates a link between the preconfigured icons, which will be shown on
the Display, and the functions that must be managed and performed by the devices
of the Automation and lighting, Sound, burglar-alarm, temperature control, energy
management and scenario systems.
Based on the requirements of the customer, it is possible to create a new configuration,

or manage an existing one. The program also gives the possibility of configuring extra
Touch Screen functions, such as scenarios with logic or time conditions, the display of
the time and the date, and the setup of a protection password.
It is also possible to define the graphic style of the icons to complement the look of the
device. For further information refer to the software documentation.
Connection to the Personal Computer for AM4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - H4890
USB/mini USB
Crossover type
Ethernet cable
Connection to the Personal Computer for HW4890
BT00518-a-UK
USB/mini USB
MY HOME 1121
Scenario programmer
MH200N
Description
This device can be used to manage up to 300 simple and advanced scenarios.
Thanks to the scenario programmer, the MY HOME system can perform certain actions,
not only following a command from the user, but also when external events occur, such
as the opening of a door, or a signal generated by light or temperature sensors.
The execution of an advanced scenario based on a set time and date, or the arming/
disarming of the burglar alarm system, may initiate, for example, the simulation of a
presence inside the home, by automatically activating the rolling shutters or the lights
at certain preset times, when no one is in fact at home.
The scenarios are programmed on the device using the TiMH200N software that can be
found in the CD supplied. The installation of the scenario programmer, item MH200N
only requires the connection to the power supply and to the MY HOME automation BUS.
Thanks to the possibility of connection to the Ethernet network, the device is also
suitable for advanced applications, like:
Bottom view
1
Front view
- Use as SCS/LAN Gateway device for:

- Managing or configuring the MY HOME system with the MHVisual program and
Virtual Configurator respectively, installed on PCs connected to the network;
- Displaying the status of a scenario through web pages (enabled/disabled);
- Managing new functions relating to the 4 zone temperature control system and
current sound system and automation devices (new F503 amplifier, 100 level
dimmer, lighting sensor);
- Managing the burglar alarm system (arming and disarming) based on events.
3
1
Top view
Related items
Power supply 27 Vdc 346020

4
Technical data
Power supply:
Max. absorption:
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules
5
6
27 Vdc
18-27 Vdc
200 mA
5 40 C
Legend
1. Connection to the PC serial port
2. Reset key
3. Status LED
4. Power supply (Item 346020)
5. BUS
6. Ethernet network RJ45 connector
BT00319-a-UK
1122 MY HOME
MH200N
Configuration
For the configuration of the device the TiMH200N program must be used, for creating
scenarios (actuation of light points, rolling shutters, etc.) of different degrees of
complexity, based on time events or events detected on the system (alarms, pushbuttons
pressed, etc.). If the scenario is activated by a control device (configured with M=CEN), it
will be possible to associate the corresponding key to the scenario itself.
The scenarios are grouped in a collection directly saved in the project.
The collection enables saving several scenarios, with only the required ones being
activated.
The project created must then be transferred (downloaded) to the scenario programmer.
This is done by connecting the device to the PC using a crossover type Ethernet cable (see
figure). In alternative, it is also possible to update MH200N remotely. To do this, both
the IP address and the OPEN password must be known (see manual found inside the CD
supplied with the device).
In the same way, it is possible to upload the files from the device to check the saved
configuration. The TiMH200 program also enables updating the unit permanent base
MH200 software, by downloading any new versions published on the Bticino website
(Update Firmware).
Personal Computer
with TIMH200N software
3559
CEN operating mode

This special mode is used for managing MH200N scenario programmers, by manually
activating the control device or the MY HOME automation range set by connecting the
CEN configurator in M.
The association between the key (upper or lower) of the control device and the scenario
to be activated, is obtained using the MiMH200N software. For example, it is possible to
activate two independent scenarios using the special H/L4651M2, AM5831M2 control,
using the T1 (upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons. For the correspondence between the
control keys and the scenarios to activate see the table below.
In addition to the listed devices, the CEN operating mode may be managed using the
Touch Screen, item H/L4864 and item AM5864, the Multimedia Touch Screen, item
HC/HS4690, the Multimedia Interface, item 3465, the Web Server, item F453AV, and a
Personal Computer with the MHVisual supervision software installed.
MH200N scenario
programmer
NOTE: The control devices configured with M=CEN mode can be connected to any point
of the system; The address specified in the A and PL positions must be different from the
addresses assigned to the actuators.
Type of control
H/L4651M2 and AMS831M2 special control
Configuration
Identification of scenario activation keys

T1
A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=-
T2
A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=-
BT00319-a-UK
Basic control for 2 independent loads, H/L4652 and

AM5832/2
T1
T2
A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=CEN
T2
T1
T4
T3
Basic control for 3 independent loads, H/L4652 and

AM5832/2
T2
A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=-
T3
T1
T6
T3
T4
MY HOME 1123
MH200N
Configuration
Install the wiring in an ordered way.
Note: connect the E46ADCN power supply of the automation system and the 346020
power supply of the Scenario Programmer to a standard double-pole switch.
230 Vac
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
OK
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
E46ADCN
NO
Automation BUS
Do not place devices that may generate electromagnetic interferences near

the Scenario Programmer.
346020
PRI
BT00319-a-UK
NO
1124 MY HOME
NO
346020
PRI: 220 240 V~
175 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
CONTENTS
MY HOME Glossary
Glossary
MY HOME 1125
GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of

Automation devices with virtual configuration
Extended configuration devices have 2 configuration levels:
Functions
Operating modes
The functions identify what the device must do, while the operating modes identify how the device must operate to
perform the preselected function. Below is a technical glossary explaining the terms used, to identify the functions
and the modes.
glossarY OF FUNCTIONS
SensorS
Actuators/Dimmers
Local lighting/presence detector

Manages the presence of people and
the lighting level. To be set when the
sensor is not managed by the central
unit.
Light actuator
ON/OFF management of the load
connected.
Double disable control

Mode for disabling the control
functions.
Dimmer
Management of the load dimmer
adjustment.
Double scenario control

It cannot be managed using the
Rolling shutter actuator

Function for the management of the
rolling shutter up/down movement.
Double PLUS scenario control

Recalling of advanced scenarios stored
in the devices (actuators, dimmers,
room controllers). It does not use any
address.
Local lighting sensor

Manages the lighting level only. To be
set when the sensor is not managed by
the central unit.
Local presence sensor
Manages the presence of people
only. To be set when the sensor is not
managed by the central unit.
Central lighting/presence detector
Manages the presence of people and
the lighting level. To be set when the
sensor is managed by the central unit.
Central lighting sensor
Manages the lighting level only. To be
set when the sensor is managed by the
central unit.
Curtain actuator
shutter opening/closure.
Controls
Double light control
Management of the lighting system.
Double rolling shutter control
rolling shutter up/down movement.
Central presence sensor

Manages the presence of people only.
To be set when the sensor is managed
by the central unit.
Double CEN control

Recalling of scenarios saved in the
central unit item BMNE500. Addresses
from 1 to 175.
IR PLUS SCENARIO CONTROL

Manages the recalling of scenarios
set on the IR remote controls, item
BMGE1001 and item BMGE1003.
Double CEN PLUS control

Like the CEN double control but with
addresses extended from 1 to 2047.
1126 MY HOME
Glossary
Double AUX control

Management of auxiliary channels.
Double video door entry system control

Double sound system control
OPERATING MODE
GLOSSARY
SensorS
Type of addressing
In point-point mode the sensor
manages a single load. Indicate the
address of the load by entering the
values in the menu on the right. In
Group mode, it is possible to select
the management of several loads
belonging to different addresses.
Main group
It identifies a main group of sensors/
actuators/dimmers/room controllers to
be managed.
Reference address
It indicates the address of the actuator/
dimmer of which the sensor must
follow the status.
Sensor group
It identifies the secondary groups to
which sensors/actuators/dimmers/
room controllers belong to, in addition
to the main one to manage.
Main group control
Enabling/disabling of the main group
management.
Detection mode
It identifies the technology to use for
the detection (PIR/US).
Control cycle
Always closed.
Initial presence
Its used to set the detection mode of
the initial presence.
Re-trigger
This functions switches the light back
on in case of unwanted switching off
due to a presence not being detected.
Daylight factor
It expresses the ration between the
lighting produced by natural light on
a plane inside the room, and the level
of lighting produced on the plane itself
from the unobstructed sky (max 255).
Lighting adjustment
To be set depending on the type of
load management, ON/OFF or Dimmer.
Operating mode
It identifies how the lighting system
managed by the relevant sensor must
operate.
Preserve the presence
Its used to set the presence
preservation mode for the
management of the lighting system.
Load control
In case of groups with several sensors,
the Master sensor is activated, which
manages the load directly. The other
sensors must be disabled, as they
operate in Slave mode.
Alarm
It identifies how the sensor can detect
the imminent switching OFF of the
lighting system.
PIR sensitivity
This is used to set the number of beams
emitted by the sensor during the
detection process.
Master standard mode

ON/OFF load management. Possibility
of setting a time delay (240 sec.
maximum) for the delayed switching
OFF of the SLAVE actuator (if the case).
US sensitivity
This is used to set the number of waves
emitted by the sensor during the
detection process.
Reference light
Entering of the lux value that the sensor
must maintain in the room.
Hours/Minutes/Seconds
The switch off time delay from the time
a presence was detected.
ACtuatorS/dimmerS
Slave
The device receives a control sent by
the actuator with the same address
identified as Master.
Slave and PUL

The device receives a control sent by
the actuator with the same address
identified as Master. Pulse mode
operation.
Local pushbutton mode
This functions offers the possibility
of managing a load using the device
pushbutton (cyclical ON/OFF, ON/OFF,
Pushbutton, Timed ON); when used for
the management of rolling shutters, the
following modes can be set: bistable
and monostable.
STOP time
This function enables setting the
final time after which the actuator is
automatically disabled when in rolling
shutter or curtain mode.
Delay between the doors
In curtain mode, this function enables
setting a time delay (60 sec. maximum)
before the rabbeted window starts
opening or closing.
Controls
Cyclical standard
For point-point controls, in non-tilting
mode, a short pressure of the control is
used to performs the ON/OFF function,
while an extended pressure is used for
the adjustment function For group,
room, and general controls, it only
performs the OFF function.
ON timed
The load managed switches OFF
after a preset time, to be set in the
corresponding item.
Cyclical with adjustment
The same as the cyclical standard,
but the adjustment is possible for all
controls, point-point, group, room, and
general.
Master PUL
Pulse mode ON/OFF load management.
It does not take into account Room and
General controls. Possibility of setting a
time delay (240 sec. maximum) for the
delayed switching OFF of the SLAVE
actuator (if the case).
Glossary
MY HOME 1127
GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of

Automation devices with virtual configuration
OPERATING MODE
GLOSSARY
O/I with adjustment
The same as standard I/O, but the
adjustments are also possible with
group, room and general controls.
Extended cyclical standard adjustment

As for cyclical standard mode, but the
soft start/stop, dimming, and switching
on level can also be set.
Cyclical without adjustment

It only performs ON/OFF, for all
point-point, group, room, and general
controls.
Extended standard O/I adjustment

As for standard I/O mode, but the soft
start/stop, dimming, and switching on
level can also be set.
O/I without adjustment

For controls, in tilting mode, it performs
the ON functions when the upper key
is pressed, and the OFF function when
the lower key is pressed.
Extended cyclical adjustment

As for cyclical mode with adjustment,
but the soft start/stop time, dimming
time , and switching on level can also
be set.
Standard O/I
For point-point controls, in tilting
mode, when the upper key is pressed,
with a short pressure it performs the
ON function, and with an extended
pressure the adjustment function;
when the lower key is pressed, with
a short pressure it performs the OFF
function, and with an extended
pressure the adjustment function. For
group, room, and general controls it
only performs the ON/OFF function.
Extended adjustment with O/I

As for I/O mode with adjustment, but
the soft start/stop time, dimming time ,
and switching on level can also be set.
OFF
The device only sends OFF controls to
the load.
ON
The device only sends ON controls to
the load.
PULL
The device operates as a pushbutton.
Flashing
The device sends a flashing command
to the load. The time indicates the
flashing speed.
Dimmer level
It defines the percentage value of the
power on the load.
1128 MY HOME
Glossary
Extended non-cyclical adjustment

As for cyclical mode without
adjustment, but the soft start/stop
time, dimming time , and switching on
level can also be set.
Extended adjustment without O/I
As for I/O mode without adjustment,
but the soft start/stop time, dimming
time , and switching on level can also
be set.
Monostable control
In rolling shutter mode the duration of
the command corresponds to the time
the key is pressed.
Bistable Control
In rolling shutter mode, with the simple
pressure of the control, the motor
connected stays ON until the end of the
stroke.
Notes
Notes MY HOME 1129
Notes
1130 MY HOME Notes
Technical guide 2012
BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to
communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
MY HOME
AD-EXMH12GT/GB - Edition 06/2012
BTicino SpA
Via Messina, 38
20154 Milano - Italia
www.bticino.com
MY HOME
DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION
GUIDE

Guia Do Soft Sirius

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Guia Do Soft Sirius

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guia Do Soft Sirius

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical guide 2012

AD-ITMH12GT - Edition 04/2012

INTRODUCTION Project guidelines

Energy management Temperature Control Air Conditioning

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Structured cabling system for the home sector

System integration and control

SOFTWARE AND SERVICES CATALOGUE

TECHNICAL SHEETS - GLOSSARY

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

Indications for the installation of aXOlutE EtrIS device holder boxes . . . . . 56

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

MY HOME General Contents

Advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people . . . . . . . . . . . .

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Start-up and testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

General Contents MY HOME

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Load control management

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

MY HOME General Contents

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Video door entry and home video

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

General Contents MY HOME

One-family system with 5 video handsets in simultaneous switching on. . . . . . 425

Structured cabling system

General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

System integration and control

MY HOME General Contents

MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be

Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Software and services

General Contents MY HOME

Progressive index of items

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

ADVANCED ELECTRIC SYSTEMS

Thanks to the MY HOME technology,

A system made using MY HOME